Refer

Chief Architect X1
Reference Manual
Professional Design & Drafting Software
Chief Architect, Inc.

6500 N. Mineral Dr.
Coeur dAlene, Idaho 83815
www.chiefarchitect.com
Copyright 2007 by Chief Architect, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this book or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from Chief Architect,
Inc.
Chief Architect is a registered trademark of Chief Architect, Inc.
The Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine Copyright 1994-2003 Wintertree Software Inc.
The City Blueprint and Country Blueprint fonts are 1992-1999 Payne Loving Trust. All
rights reserved.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of Chief Architect, Inc. or their respective
owners.
Printed in the United States of America.
Chapter 1: Overview
Introduction .........................................................................................1
Chief Architect Full vs. Lite ...............................................................1
Startup Options ...................................................................................2
The Chief Architect Environment .....................................................3
Toolbars................................................................................................6
Menus....................................................................................................7
Dialogs ..................................................................................................8
The Status Bar .....................................................................................8
Preferences and Defaults ....................................................................9
Drawing a Plan ..................................................................................10
Viewing Your Plan ............................................................................12
Program Updates...............................................................................15
Getting Help .......................................................................................15
Contents
Contents
Chief Architect Reference Manual
Chapter 2: Menus and Toolbar Buttons

Chapter Overview ............................................................................. 17
Toolbar Customization Dialog ......................................................... 18
Toolbars and Menus.......................................................................... 21
Toolbar Configurations .................................................................... 22
Restoring Toolbars ............................................................................ 24
Chief Architects Tools ..................................................................... 24
MEP Toolbar Configuration Buttons..............................................69
Toggle Buttons ................................................................................... 70
Edit Toolbar Buttons......................................................................... 71
Other Buttons .................................................................................... 77
Chapter 3: Editing Objects

Introduction ....................................................................................... 79
Architectural vs CAD Objects.......................................................... 80
Defaults and Preferences .................................................................. 80
Snap Behaviors .................................................................................. 82
Object Snaps ...................................................................................... 82
Angle Snaps........................................................................................ 84
Grid Snaps.......................................................................................... 85
Edit Behaviors.................................................................................... 86
Creating Objects................................................................................ 90
Selecting Objects................................................................................ 92
Editing Line Based Objects .............................................................. 95
Editing Arc Based Objects................................................................ 98
Editing Open Polyline Based Objects ............................................ 103
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects ......................................... 107
Editing Box-Based Objects ............................................................. 111
Editing Spline Based Objects ......................................................... 114
ii
Contents
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses ................................................118

Architectural and CAD Blocks.......................................................121
Displaying Objects...........................................................................122
Moving Objects................................................................................123
Aligning Objects ..............................................................................126
Resizing Objects...............................................................................129
Reshaping Objects ...........................................................................129
Rotating Objects ..............................................................................133
Reflecting Objects............................................................................135
Copying and Pasting Objects .........................................................136
Deleting Objects...............................................................................141
Trim and Extend..............................................................................142
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog...............................................144
Union, Intersection, and Subtract..................................................146
Converting Objects..........................................................................149
Select Same / Load Same ................................................................152
Edit Area Tools ................................................................................153
Chapter 4: File Management

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................157
Compatibility with Previous Versions ..........................................158
Creating a New Plan........................................................................159
Creating a New Layout ...................................................................159
Saving a Plan or Layout File ..........................................................160
Organizing your Files......................................................................160
Save and Save As .............................................................................161
Saving a Plan Thumbnail................................................................161
Auto Archive ....................................................................................162
Undo Files.........................................................................................164
Opening a Plan or Layout File .......................................................164
iii
Project Browser ............................................................................... 165

Project Information......................................................................... 166
Template Files.................................................................................. 167
Searching for Plans ......................................................................... 169
Closing Plans and Views ................................................................. 172
Exporting a Plan.............................................................................. 172
Exporting an Entire Plan................................................................ 173
Exiting Chief Architect ................................................................... 174
Chapter 5: Defaults & Preferences

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 175
Default Settings................................................................................ 176
Dynamic Defaults ............................................................................ 179
Plan Defaults .................................................................................... 180
Reset to Defaults .............................................................................. 182
Preferences Dialog........................................................................... 183
Appearance Panel............................................................................ 184
Colors Panel ..................................................................................... 186
Font Panel ........................................................................................ 187
Library Browser Panel ................................................................... 188
Text & Page Setup Panel ................................................................ 189
General Panel................................................................................... 190
Folders Panel....................................................................................192
New Plans Panel............................................................................... 194
Layers Panel..................................................................................... 195
Unit Conversions Panel................................................................... 195
Time Tracker Panel......................................................................... 197
Architectural Panel ......................................................................... 198
CAD Panel........................................................................................ 199
Line Properties Panel ...................................................................... 200
iv
Contents
Sun Angle Panel...............................................................................201

Edit Panel .........................................................................................201
Behaviors Panel ...............................................................................202
Snap Properties Panel .....................................................................204
Material List Panel ..........................................................................206
Report Style Panel ...........................................................................207
Master List Panel.............................................................................208
Categories Panel ..............................................................................209
Render Panel....................................................................................211
Texture Filter Panel ........................................................................213
Reset Options Panel.........................................................................214
Chapter 6: Layers
Layer Sets .........................................................................................216
Layer Set Management ...................................................................217
Active Layer Set Control ................................................................218
Layer Display Options Dialog ........................................................218
Displaying Objects...........................................................................221
Select Layer Dialog..........................................................................222
Layer Tab .........................................................................................223
Layer Painter ...................................................................................224
Exporting/Importing Layer Sets ....................................................224
Layer Set Defaults Dialog ...............................................................225
Chapter 7: Walls, Railings, & Fencing

Default Settings................................................................................228
The Wall Tools.................................................................................229
The Deck Tools ................................................................................231
The Fencing Tools ........................................................................... 231

Exterior and Interior Walls............................................................ 232
Foundation Walls ............................................................................ 232
Pony Walls........................................................................................ 233
Railings ............................................................................................. 233
Invisible Walls.................................................................................. 234
Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks ................................................ 235
Hatch Wall ....................................................................................... 236
Break Wall ....................................................................................... 236
Deck Railings ................................................................................... 237
Deck Edge......................................................................................... 237
Fencing ............................................................................................. 237
Drawing Walls ................................................................................. 238
Connecting Walls............................................................................. 240
Displaying Walls .............................................................................. 241
Editing Walls.................................................................................... 242
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations ............................... 245
Aligning Walls.................................................................................. 246
Attic Walls........................................................................................ 248
Double Walls ....................................................................................248
CAD to Walls ...................................................................................249
Wall Type Definitions ..................................................................... 251
Wall Type Definitions Dialog ......................................................... 251
Exporting Wall Definitions............................................................. 255
Importing Wall Definitions............................................................. 256
Curved Walls and Roofs ................................................................. 256
Stepped and Raked Walls............................................................... 258
Wall Specification Dialog................................................................ 259
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog .................................................... 273
Wall/Railing/Fencing Defaults ....................................................... 274
vi
Contents
Chapter 8: Rooms
Room Definition...............................................................................280
Room Defaults..................................................................................280
Room Material Defaults..................................................................280
Floor & Ceiling Heights ..................................................................281
Selecting Rooms ...............................................................................283
Room Types......................................................................................284
Room Labels.....................................................................................286
Decks.................................................................................................288
Editing Rooms..................................................................................290
Special Ceilings ................................................................................292
Room Polylines.................................................................................295
Room Specification Dialog..............................................................296
Chapter 9: Doors
Door Defaults ...................................................................................305
The Door Tools ................................................................................306
Displaying Doors..............................................................................308
Editing Doors ...................................................................................309
Centering Doors and Windows ......................................................311
Changing Door Swings....................................................................312
Special Doors....................................................................................314
Door Specification Dialog ...............................................................315
Door Schedules.................................................................................325
Chapter 10: Windows

vii
Window Defaults ............................................................................. 328

The Window Tools........................................................................... 328
Special Windows.............................................................................. 330
Stacked Windows ............................................................................ 331
Window Levels................................................................................. 334
Displaying Windows........................................................................ 335
Editing Windows ............................................................................. 336
Custom Muntins .............................................................................. 338
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows.......................................................... 339
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs .................................................. 341
Window Specification Dialog ......................................................... 343
Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog .......................................... 359
Bow Window Specification ............................................................. 360
Window Schedules........................................................................... 361
Chapter 11: Multiple Floors

Floor Defaults .................................................................................. 364
Working With Multiple Floors ...................................................... 365
Floor Tools ....................................................................................... 365
Adding Floors .................................................................................. 366
Exchanging Floors........................................................................... 367
Deleting Floors ................................................................................. 367
Copying Floors................................................................................. 368
The Current Floor ........................................................................... 368
Reference Floor................................................................................ 368
Chapter 12: Foundations

Foundation Defaults ........................................................................ 372
viii
Contents
Building a Foundation.....................................................................372
New Floor Dialog .............................................................................376
Displaying Foundations...................................................................376
Editing Foundations ........................................................................376
Aligning Stem Walls and Footings.................................................377
Resizing Stem Walls ........................................................................377
Deleting Foundations.......................................................................377
Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations......................................378
Foundations and Room Specification ............................................378
The Slab Tools..................................................................................379
Editing Piers and Pads ....................................................................380
Slab Specification Dialog ................................................................381
Chapter 13: Roofs

Roof Defaults....................................................................................384
Automatic Roofs vs. Manual Roofs................................................384
The Roof Tools.................................................................................385
Automatically Generated Roof Styles............................................386
Some Common Roof Types.............................................................390
Roof Baseline Polylines ...................................................................391
Manual Roofs ...................................................................................393
Drawing Roof Planes.......................................................................393
Curved Roof Planes.........................................................................394
Dormers ............................................................................................398
Roof Returns ....................................................................................400
Displaying Roof Planes....................................................................401
Editing Roof Planes .........................................................................402
Editing Curved Roof Planes ...........................................................405
Editing Auto Dormers.....................................................................407
ix
Locating Roof Plane Intersections ................................................. 408

Ceiling Planes................................................................................... 409
Gable/Roof Line............................................................................... 410
Skylights ........................................................................................... 414
Gutters .............................................................................................. 415
Gable Over Door/Window.............................................................. 415
Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings ....................................... 416
Build Roof Dialog ............................................................................ 416
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog ................................................ 422
Roof Plane Specification Dialog ..................................................... 424
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog ................................................. 428
Dormer Specification Dialog .......................................................... 429
Dormer Defaults .............................................................................. 432
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog ....................................... 432
Roof Pitches in Degrees................................................................... 433
Chapter 14: Stairs

Stair Tools ........................................................................................ 436
Anatomy of a Staircase ................................................................... 436
Drawing Stairs ................................................................................. 437
Creating Curved Stairs ................................................................... 438
Merging Stair Sections .................................................................... 438
Displaying Stairs.............................................................................. 440
Editing Stairs ................................................................................... 441
Winders ............................................................................................ 442
Stair Landings.................................................................................. 443
Maintaining Tread Width............................................................... 447
Flared Stairs and Curved Treads .................................................. 448
Starter Treads................................................................................. 451
Contents
Wrapped Stairs................................................................................452
Other Special Railings & Stairs .....................................................453
Creating a Stairwell.........................................................................456
Rooms Below Staircases..................................................................457
Staircase Specification Dialog ........................................................458
Stair Landing Specification Dialog ................................................467
Chapter 15: Framing

Framing Defaults .............................................................................469
Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing .....................................470
The Framing Tools ..........................................................................471
Blocking and Bridging ....................................................................473
Automatic Framing .........................................................................474
Build Framing Dialog......................................................................475
Framing Reference Markers ..........................................................486
Bearing Lines ...................................................................................488
Joist Direction Lines........................................................................489
Wall Framing Details ......................................................................492
Drawing Wall Framing Members..................................................493
Displaying Framing .........................................................................493
Editing Framing...............................................................................494
Keeping Framing Current ..............................................................496
Framing and the Materials List .....................................................496
Framing Specification Dialog .........................................................497
Beam Specification Dialog ..............................................................498
Post Specification Dialog.................................................................499
Chapter 16: Trusses

xi
Floor and Ceiling Trusses ............................................................... 502

Roof Trusses..................................................................................... 502
Editing Trusses ................................................................................ 504
Editing Truss Shape ........................................................................ 505
Truss Details .................................................................................... 505
Truss Labels..................................................................................... 506
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing............................................... 507
Truss Base ........................................................................................ 507
Hip Trusses ...................................................................................... 511
Girder Trusses ................................................................................. 515
Scissors Trusses ............................................................................... 516
Truss Base Specification Dialog ..................................................... 516
Roof Truss Specification Dialog..................................................... 518
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog ...................................... 521
Chapter 17: Electrical

The Electrical Tools......................................................................... 524
Creating Wiring Schematics........................................................... 525
Auto Place Outlets ........................................................................... 526
Electrical Library ............................................................................ 526
Displaying Electrical Objects ......................................................... 527
Editing Electrical Objects............................................................... 527
Electrical Service Specification Dialog .......................................... 529
Electrical Defaults ........................................................................... 534
Chapter 18: Trim & Molding

Corner Boards ................................................................................. 536
Corner Board Specification Dialog................................................ 536
xii
Contents
Quoins...............................................................................................537
Quoin Specification Dialog .............................................................538
Molding Profiles...............................................................................539
Symbol Moldings .............................................................................540
Molding Polylines ............................................................................541
Displaying Molding Polylines .........................................................543
Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings .......................................543
Frieze Moldings ...............................................................................543
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog...........................................544
3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog.....................................546
Chapter 19: Cabinets

Cabinet Defaults ..............................................................................552
The Cabinet Tools............................................................................552
Displaying Cabinets.........................................................................555
Cabinet Labels .................................................................................555
Editing Cabinets ..............................................................................556
Editing the Cabinet Door/Drawer Style ........................................559
Editing Custom Countertops..........................................................559
Joined Cabinets................................................................................560
Special Cabinets...............................................................................562
Cabinet Specification Dialog ..........................................................565
Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog.................................................577
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog...............................................578
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog......................................579
Cabinet Defaults ..............................................................................580
Chapter 20: Terrain

xiii
Terrain Configuration Button........................................................ 584

Terrain Tools ................................................................................... 584
Terrain Elevation Tools .................................................................. 585
Terrain Modifier Tools ................................................................... 589
Terrain Feature Tools ..................................................................... 590
Garden Bed Tools............................................................................ 592
Water Feature Tools ....................................................................... 592
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools......................................................... 593
Stepping Stone Tools ....................................................................... 593
Plant Tools........................................................................................ 594
Sprinkler Tools ................................................................................ 594
Sun Shadows ....................................................................................595
Hardiness Zones .............................................................................. 595
The Terrain Library ....................................................................... 596
Clearing the Terrain ....................................................................... 596
Displaying Terrain .......................................................................... 596
Editing Terrain Objects ................................................................. 597
Creating a Plot Plan ........................................................................ 599
Plant Image Specification Dialog ................................................... 602
Plant Specification Dialog............................................................... 606
Plant Chooser Dialog....................................................................... 608
Terrain Specification Dialog........................................................... 610
Elevation Point Specification Dialog.............................................. 613
Elevation Line Specification Dialog............................................... 616
Flat Region Specification Dialog .................................................... 616
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog ................................................... 617
Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog ............................. 617
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog ............................................617
Terrain Break Specification Dialog ............................................... 618
Terrain Path Specification Dialog.................................................. 619
Sprinkler Specification Dialog ....................................................... 620
xiv
Contents
Importing Terrain Data ..................................................................623

Import Terrain Wizard...................................................................623
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data...........................................627
Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data........................................628
Chapter 21: Roads & Sidewalks

Road and Sidewalk Defaults...........................................................629
The Road Tools ................................................................................630
Displaying Road Objects.................................................................633
Editing Road Objects ......................................................................634
Adding Road Objects to the Library .............................................635
Road Specification Dialog...............................................................635
Median Specification Dialog...........................................................637
Driveway Specification Dialog........................................................637
Road Marking Specification Dialog...............................................638
Sidewalk Specification Dialog ........................................................639
Chapter 22: Other Objects

Primitive Tools.................................................................................641
Creating Primitives .........................................................................642
Editing Primitives............................................................................643
3D Box Specification Dialog ...........................................................645
Sphere Specification Dialog ............................................................646
Cylinder Specification Dialog.........................................................647
Cone Specification Dialog ...............................................................648
Solid Specification Dialog ...............................................................649
Polyline Solids ..................................................................................649
Polyline Solid Specification Dialog.................................................650
xv
Soffits ................................................................................................ 650

Special Applications for Soffits ...................................................... 651
Calculating Materials on Soffits..................................................... 652
Soffit Specification Dialog............................................................... 653
Fireplaces ......................................................................................... 656
Fireplace Specification Dialog........................................................ 657
Library Fireplaces ........................................................................... 659
Chimneys .......................................................................................... 660
Chapter 23: Architectural Blocks

Architectural vs CAD Blocks ......................................................... 664
Creating Architectural Blocks ....................................................... 664
Displaying Architectural Blocks .................................................... 665
Editing Architectural Blocks .......................................................... 665
Exploding Architectural Blocks ..................................................... 666
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components ................. 666
Adding Architectural Blocks to the Library................................. 667
Architectural Block Specification Dialog ...................................... 667
Chapter 24: Libraries

Third Party Libraries ..................................................................... 670
Bonus Libraries ............................................................................... 670
The Library Browser ...................................................................... 670
Adding to the Library ..................................................................... 674
Editing Libraries ............................................................................. 677
Select Library Object Dialog.......................................................... 679
Replace From Library .................................................................... 680
Library Categories .......................................................................... 681
xvi
Contents
My Libraries ....................................................................................681
Architectural Blocks........................................................................681
Backdrops.........................................................................................682
Cabinet Doors and Drawers ...........................................................682
Cabinet Modules..............................................................................682
CAD Blocks ......................................................................................683
Doors.................................................................................................683
Doorways ..........................................................................................684
Electrical...........................................................................................684
Exterior Fixtures .............................................................................684
Interior Fixtures ..............................................................................685
Exterior Furnishing.........................................................................685
Interior Furnishings ........................................................................686
Geometric Shapes ............................................................................686
Hardware..........................................................................................687
Images...............................................................................................687
Line Styles ........................................................................................688
Materials...........................................................................................688
Millwork ...........................................................................................689
Moldings and Profiles......................................................................689
Plants ................................................................................................689
Sprinklers .........................................................................................690
Terrain..............................................................................................691
Windows ...........................................................................................691
Manufacturers .................................................................................692
Library Search Dialog.....................................................................692
Placing Library Objects..................................................................695
Place Library Object Button ..........................................................696
Displaying Library Objects ............................................................697
Editing Library Objects..................................................................698
Library Objects and the Materials List.........................................699
xvii
Library Object Specification Dialog.............................................. 699
Chapter 25: Materials

Creating Materials .......................................................................... 704
Mapping Patterns and Textures .................................................... 705
Managing Plan Materials .............................................................. 706
Applying Materials.......................................................................... 708
Viewing Materials............................................................................ 709
Materials Tab................................................................................... 710
Editing Materials ............................................................................. 711
Define Material Dialog.................................................................... 712
Material Defaults Dialog................................................................. 721
Color Chooser Dialog...................................................................... 722
Chapter 26: Zoom & View Tools

Zoom Tools....................................................................................... 723
Undo Zoom....................................................................................... 724
Fill Window...................................................................................... 724
Panning the Display......................................................................... 725
Window Menu Tools ....................................................................... 725
Cascade............................................................................................. 726
Tiling Views...................................................................................... 727
Arrange Icons .................................................................................. 728
Swapping Views............................................................................... 729
Aerial View....................................................................................... 729
Closing Views ................................................................................... 731
xviii
Contents
Chapter 27: Vector Views

Defaults and Preferences ................................................................734
Vector View Tools............................................................................734
3D Tools............................................................................................735
Creating Camera Views ..................................................................736
Moving a Camera in 3D Views.......................................................737
Field of View ....................................................................................740
Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View............................................740
Creating Overviews .........................................................................741
Displaying Vector Views .................................................................742
Speeding up 3D View Generation ..................................................745
Editing Objects in 3D Views...........................................................746
Delete 3D Surface ............................................................................747
Saving 3D Views ..............................................................................747
Walkthroughs ..................................................................................748
Creating Cross Section/Elevation Views .......................................749
Editing Cross Section/Elevation Views..........................................750
Saving Cross Section/Elevation Cameras......................................752
Displaying Cross Section/Elevation Views ....................................752
Camera Specification Dialog ..........................................................753
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification.............................755
Camera Defaults Dialog ..................................................................755
3D Settings Dialog............................................................................757
Chapter 28: Render Views

OpenGL and Hardware ..................................................................764
Defaults and Preferences ................................................................764
xix
Render View Tools .......................................................................... 764

Rendering Tools............................................................................... 765
Preview vs. Final Render View ...................................................... 766
Glass House View ............................................................................ 767
Using the Contextual Menu ............................................................ 767
Editing a Camera............................................................................. 768
Materials In Render Views ............................................................. 768
Images & Backdrops ....................................................................... 769
Plan Export ...................................................................................... 770
Editing Objects in Render Views ................................................... 770
Saving a Render View Picture........................................................ 770
Printing a Render View .................................................................. 770
Rendering Tips and Tricks ............................................................. 771
Light Sources ................................................................................... 772
Light Types ...................................................................................... 773
Defining Light Types....................................................................... 777
Adjusting Lights .............................................................................. 778
Sun Angle Specification Dialog ...................................................... 778
Light Specification Dialog............................................................... 781
Cross Section Slider Dialog ............................................................ 785
Chapter 29: Raytracing

Creating a Raytrace View............................................................... 787
The Raytrace Window .................................................................... 790
Creating Materials for Raytracing ................................................ 791
Tips and Tricks................................................................................ 792
POV-Ray .......................................................................................... 794
xx
Contents
Chapter 30: Dimensions

Compatibility With Previous Versions..........................................796
Dimension Defaults..........................................................................796
The Dimension Tools.......................................................................797
Displaying Dimension Lines ...........................................................800
Editing Dimension Lines.................................................................801
Editing Extension Lines ..................................................................802
Moving Objects Using Dimensions ................................................804
Dimension Line Specification Dialog .............................................807
Dimension Defaults Dialog..............................................................809
Chapter 31: Text, Callouts and Markers

Text Defaults and Preferences........................................................818
Fonts..................................................................................................818
The Text Tools .................................................................................819
Creating Text ...................................................................................819
Text Arrows .....................................................................................819
Callouts.............................................................................................821
Editing Callouts ...............................................................................822
Markers ............................................................................................823
Editing Markers...............................................................................823
Displaying Text, Callouts and Markers.........................................823
Editing Text......................................................................................824
Text Macros .....................................................................................826
Spell Check.......................................................................................828
Text Specification Dialog ................................................................830
Callout Specification Dialog ...........................................................834
xxi
Marker Specification Dialog........................................................... 837

Text Defaults .................................................................................... 838
Callout and Marker Defaults ......................................................... 838
Room Label Defaults....................................................................... 838
Arrow Defaults ................................................................................ 839
Designer Information Dialog .......................................................... 839
Client Information Dialog............................................................... 840
Chapter 32: CAD Objects

CAD Defaults ...................................................................................842
The CAD Drawing Tools ................................................................ 842
Point Tools........................................................................................ 843
Line Tools ......................................................................................... 846
Line Specification Dialog ................................................................ 850
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes .............................................855
Arc Tools .......................................................................................... 856
Arc Specification Dialog ................................................................. 858
Circle Tools ...................................................................................... 860
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog.............................. 861
Polylines............................................................................................ 863
Polyline Specification Dialog .......................................................... 863
Box Tools .......................................................................................... 865
CAD Box Specification Dialog........................................................ 867
Splines............................................................................................... 868
Displaying CAD Objects ................................................................. 869
CAD Blocks ...................................................................................... 870
CAD Block Specification Dialog .................................................... 872
Dimensions ....................................................................................... 873
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog................................................... 873
xxii
Contents
CAD Details......................................................................................874
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints.......................................................875
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog...............................................877
CAD Defaults Dialog .......................................................................878
Chapter 33: Advanced Design & Editing

Time Tracker ...................................................................................881
Time Log Dialog ..............................................................................882
House Wizard...................................................................................884
Plan Check .......................................................................................885
IRC Checklist...................................................................................886
Chapter 34: Pictures, Images, & Movies

Picture Files vs. Pictures and Image Objects................................890
Importing Picture Files ...................................................................890
Editing Picture Files ........................................................................891
Exporting Picture Files ...................................................................892
Picture File Box Specification Dialog ............................................893
Creating Images...............................................................................894
Placing Images .................................................................................896
Displaying Images............................................................................896
Resizing an Image............................................................................896
Adding Images to the Library ........................................................897
Image Specification Dialog .............................................................897
Creating Screen Captures...............................................................900
Metafiles ...........................................................................................901
Editing Metafiles..............................................................................902
Metafile Specification Dialog..........................................................903
xxiii
Copy Region as Picture ................................................................... 904

Walkthroughs .................................................................................. 904
Creating VRML Files...................................................................... 905
Chapter 35: Importing and Exporting

Compatibility ................................................................................... 908
DXF vs. DWG .................................................................................. 908
CAD to Walls ...................................................................................909
Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files ...................................................... 909
Additional 2D Import Information................................................ 915
Importing 3D DWG, DXF, 3DS, and OBJ Files ........................... 916
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files ...................................................... 917
Additional 2D Export Information ................................................ 919
Exporting a 3D Model in DXF/DWG Format .............................. 921
Exporting a 3D Model in 3DS Format...........................................922
Chapter 36: Create Symbol Wizard

Overview........................................................................................... 925
Importing 3D Data .......................................................................... 926
Opening the Create Symbol Wizard.............................................. 927
Selecting the Symbol Category....................................................... 927
Loading the 3D File ......................................................................... 929
2D Block ........................................................................................... 932
Cabinet Front Symbols ................................................................... 933
Symbol Options................................................................................ 935
Sizing................................................................................................. 938
Materials........................................................................................... 941
Openings........................................................................................... 943
Floor Plan View ............................................................................... 944
xxiv
Contents
Closing the Create Symbol Wizard................................................944

Symbol Specification Dialog ...........................................................945
Chapter 37: Printing & Plotting

Introduction to Printing..................................................................948
Printers and Plotters .......................................................................949
The Printing Tools...........................................................................949
Display Options and Printing .........................................................950
Printing Directly from a View ........................................................952
Printing from Layout ......................................................................952
Printing to Scale...............................................................................952
Printing Across Multiple Pages......................................................953
Printing to a PDF File .....................................................................953
Line Weights ....................................................................................954
Printing Text and Dimensions........................................................957
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes..........................................................958
Print Model ......................................................................................959
Troubleshooting Printing Problems ..............................................962
Page Setup Dialog ............................................................................963
Print Dialog ......................................................................................965
Print Image Dialog ..........................................................................967
Chapter 38: Layout

The Layout Tools.............................................................................970
Preparing for Layout ......................................................................971
Creating a Layout File ....................................................................971
The Current Page ............................................................................972
Layout Page Zero ............................................................................973
xxv
CAD and Text in Layout................................................................. 974

Images in Layout ............................................................................. 975
Sending Views to Layout ................................................................ 975
Keeping Layout Views Current ..................................................... 977
Editing Layout Views ...................................................................... 979
Rescaling Views ............................................................................... 980
Displaying Layout Views ................................................................ 981
Layout Page Display Options ......................................................... 982
Opening Layout Views .................................................................... 983
Editing Layout Lines....................................................................... 983
Edit Layout Lines Dialog ................................................................ 984
Managing Layout Links.................................................................. 985
Printing Layout Files....................................................................... 988
Exporting Layout Files ................................................................... 989
Layout Box Specification Dialog .................................................... 989
Layout Defaults................................................................................ 990
Chapter 39: Schedules

Schedule Defaults ............................................................................ 992
Creating Schedules .......................................................................... 992
Editing Schedules ............................................................................ 993
Adding Columns to Schedules........................................................ 994
Schedule Specification Dialog......................................................... 995
Chapter 40: Materials Lists

Chapter Overview ......................................................................... 1003
Working With the Materials List................................................. 1004
Creating an Accurate Materials List ...........................................1005
Calculate From All Floors ............................................................ 1005
xxvi
Contents
Calculate From Room ...................................................................1006

Calculate From Area.....................................................................1006
Materials Polyline..........................................................................1007
The Master List..............................................................................1007
Editing Columns ............................................................................1009
Editing Materials Lists..................................................................1011
Displaying Objects in the Materials List .....................................1012
Components Dialog .......................................................................1014
Managing Materials Lists .............................................................1015
Exporting the Material List..........................................................1015
Appendix A: Technical Support Services

Reference and Training Resources ..............................................1017
Before Contacting Technical Support .........................................1018
Contacting Technical Support......................................................1021
Appendix B: Whats New in Version X1

Introduction ...................................................................................1023
Before You Begin...........................................................................1023
New and Improved Features by Chapter....................................1027
xxvii
xxviii
Chapter 1:
Overview
Overview
Introduction
Chief Architect allows builders, designers,
architects, and other professionals in the
building and interior design trades to design
effectively and produce plans, 3D models,
and full working drawings quickly. With
Chief Architect, the input and modification
of design information is fast and simple.
Chief Architect uses parametric design
technology. This means that as you draw, a
3D model is created and is continuously
updated as you make changes. You can tile a
floor plan view next to a 3D view and watch
one update automatically as you draw in the
other.
Chapter Contents
Chief Architect Full vs. Lite

Startup Options
The Chief Architect Environment
Toolbars
Menus
Dialogs
The Status Bar
Preferences and Defaults
Drawing a Plan
Viewing Your Plan
Program Updates
Getting Help
Chief Architect Full vs. Lite

Not all features are available in the Lite
version of Chief Architect. For a list of
features that are not available, see our
website at www.chiefarchitect.com.
Startup Options
When Chief Architect opens, the Startup
Options dialog displays, allowing you to
The Startup Options dialog can be

opened at any time by selecting File>
choose how you want to begin working in the

program or access useful resources.
Startup Options....
1
3
5
1 Click the New to Chief? link to launch
an animated tour of the program.
Click New from Template

to open a
new, blank plan based on a template that
you select. See Template Files on page
167.
2 Select a File command.
Click New Plan

to open a new, blank
plan. See Creating a New Plan on page
159.
Select House Wizard

to launch a
new plan in the House Wizard. See
House Wizard on page 884.
Choose Open Plan

to work on an
existing plan. See Opening a Plan or
Layout File on page 164.
Click Find Plan Wizard

to search a
plan database using criteria you select.
See Find Plan Wizard on page 169.
recently opened files. Click a name to

open the file. You set the number of files that
display in this list in the Preferences
dialog. See General Panel on page 190.
34 The Help options provide access to a

variety of information resources. These
include a list of the new features of version
X1, tutorials, and the online help. You can
also access the electronic versions of the
Reference Manual and Users Guide.
Click either of the links to launch your

default Internet browser and visit the Chief
Architect or ChiefTalk Web sites.
35 Remove the check from Show Options
on Startup if you do not want this

dialog to display when you launch Chief
Architect. Instead, a new blank plan opens.
To have the Startup Options dialog

display at startup again, select File> Startup
Options and place a check mark at Show
Options on Startup.

Classroom Design Project Training
Video: The Chief Architect Interface
Introductory Training Video: Chief
Architect Animated Tour
Object-Based Design
Chief Architects parametric, object-based
design technology means you place and edit
objects rather than work with the many
individual lines or surfaces used to represent
them.
You can quickly select and edit the location,
size, shape, style and other properties of
objects as well as change the materials
applied to their surfaces.
Use Chief Architects editing capabilities to
make the objects you place in a plan match
the objects they represent in real life. For
example, you can set up your windows and
doors to match those available from your
supplier.
3D Drafting
In Chief Architect, the entire drawing area is
laid out on a three dimensional coordinate
system described using the X, Y and Z axes.
Architectural objects take up space in all
three dimensions and their height, width and
depth can be specified in Imperial or metric
units. In addition, the location of objects can
be precisely defined using coordinates.
CAD objects such as lines and arcs take up
space in two dimensions in the current view.
Their dimensions can also be specified in
Imperial or metric units and their locations
precisely defined using coordinates.
Easy Access to Tools

You can access Chief Architects features in
various ways.
Menus provide access to most tools.
Convenient toolbar buttons allow fast

access to tools and let you customize the
interface.
Many tools also have keyboard shortcuts.
Overview
3 Recent Files lists the names of the most
Contextual menus display with a rightclick of the mouse.
The status bar at the bottom of the screen

provides tool descriptions and other
information about the current task.
Child
Tools
Menus
Parent
Tools
Library &
Project
Browser
Selected
Object
Library
Preview
Panes
Temporary
Dimension
Edit
Toolbar
Reference
Grid Lines
Using the Mouse

Video: General Mouse Commands
Many objects, such as doors and cabinets, are
created by clicking the left mouse button.
Others, such as walls, stairs and dimension
lines, are created by dragging the pointer
from one end of the object to the other.
The left button is the primary
button used in Chief Architect.
Unless specified otherwise, this
reference manual refers to the left mouse
button.
Note: If you are left-handed and have re-programmed your mouse, reverse the instructions for left and right buttons in this manual.
Pointer
Crosshair
Lines
Status Bar
The Right button has several uses.

Right-click to select any object. For
example, if the Exterior Wall
tool is active, the left mouse button allows
you to select only walls. You can select other
object types such as cabinets, or stairs with
the right mouse button.
Use the right mouse button to temporarily
switch to the Alternate edit behavior. See
Edit Behaviors on page 86.
You can also use the right mouse button to
open context sensitive menus with additional
editing commands.
The Middle button can be used to
pan in floor plan view or to
You can also program it to work as a doubleclick.

The Mouse Wheel can be used to
zoom in and out in most views.
The Back, or X1, button on 5-button mice
can be used to temporarily enable the
Concentric edit behavior. See Edit
Behaviors on page 86 or the documentation
for your mouse.
The Forward, or X2, button on a 5-button
mouse can be used to temporarily enable the
Resize edit behavior. See Edit Behaviors
on page 86 or the documentation for your
mouse.
Using the Edit Handles

When you select an object, its edit handles
display. How each handle behaves when it is
clicked and dragged may depend on which
Edit Behavior
is currently active. See
When you pass the mouse over the edit
handles, the pointer changes to show how
you can use that handle.
A two-headed arrow indicates that the

object, corner or edge can be moved in
the direction of the arrows.
A four-headed arrow indicates that the

selected object or edge may be moved in
multiple directions.
A circular arrow indicates that the

selected object can be rotated.
Resize handles display along the edges of the

object are used to change the size. See
Resizing Objects on page 129.
The Move handle at the objects center lets

you move the object. See Moving Objects
on page 123.
The triangular Rotate handle lets you rotate

the object. See Rotating Objects on page
133.
You can cancel any edit handle operation

before it is completed by pressing the Esc
key on your keyboard or by pressing any two
mouse buttons at the same time.
The edit handles that display depend on the
type of object selected, the current view, and
how far you are zoomed out.
Edit handles do not resize as you zoom in or
out. If you are zoomed out far enough, some
edit handles may be hidden so that they do
not stack over one another. As you zoom in,
these handles become visible again.
Overview
temporarily use the Move edit behavior. See

Toolbars
Using the toolbar buttons is the fastest,
easiest way to access many program features.
You can move the toolbars, customize them
by adding or removing buttons, or create
your own toolbars from scratch. Toolbar
Customization Dialog on page 18.
The toolbars that display in a given view
depend on the view type. For example,
toolbars that control camera position display
in 3D views but not in floor plan view.
When you pass the pointer over a toolbar
button, a tool tip displays the name of the
tool. When you see one of these tool tips,
press F1 to get more information about that
item. A more detailed description displays in
the status bar at the bottom of the window.
Parent and Child Tools

Parent toolbar buttons have a blue triangle in
the lower right corner. When you select a
parent button, child tools display. For
example, click the Window Tools
parent
button to display its child buttons to the right.
Drop Down Tools

An alternative to the Parent - Child toolbar
interface is Drop Down tools. Click on the
arrow to the right of a button to display a
drop-down list of related child tools.
You can select either Parent - Child or Drop

Down tools in the Preferences dialog. See
Appearance Panel on page 184.
Toolbar Configurations
Toolbar configurations are sets of toolbars
that are organized for certain tasks.
There are eight toolbar configurations in
Chief Architect. Each can be accessed in the
Toolbar Customization dialog by rightclicking on a toolbar button, or by clicking a
button:
The Default Configuration displays a
selection of architectural, file
management and display settings tools.
The Terrain Configuration displays a
selection of terrain, file management
and display setting tools.
The Space Planning Configuration
displays a selection of file management
and display setting tools, as well as the
House Wizard tools.
The Drafting Configuration displays
a selection of file management, display
settings, annotation and other documentation
tools.
Menus
The CAD Configuration displays a

selection of CAD, file management
and display setting tools.
The 800x600 Configuration displays
toolbars suitably sized for monitors set
at 800x600 screen resolution.
The All Tools Configuration displays
an expanded selection of architectural,
terrain, file managment and display setting
tools.
The Edit Toolbar

When you select an object, its edit toolbar
appears, typically at the bottom of the
program window, just above the status bar.
The edit toolbar displays toolbar buttons that
can be used to edit the selected object or
objects. Which buttons display depends on
the type of object selected, the current view,
and how you selected the object.
The edit toolbar buttons are the same as the

options in the contextual menu when you
right-click on an object.
Customizable Toolbars
Shortcut Keys
Since the work you are doing determines the

tools you need, Chief Architect allows you to
tailor toolbars to suit your own needs. You
can store various toolbar configurations for
future use. For more information about
customizing toolbars, see Toolbar
Many commands can be invoked from the

keyboard. Press Alt on your keyboard and
press the underlined letter in a menu name to
access that menu.
You can add toolbars to each configuration

using the Toolbar Customization dialog
while that configuration is active.
For more information on menu items, toolbar

buttons, and shortcut keys, see Menus and
Toolbar Buttons on page 17.
Some of the function keys also invoke

commands. For example, F12 rebuilds walls,
floors, and ceilings.
Menus
Chief Architect uses a standard Windows
menu format. The menus are located below
the title bar in the program window and can
be used to access nearly all tools in the
program.
An icon image after the menu path indicates

that a toolbar button is also available. Some
buttons must be added to the toolbar. See
Toolbar Customization Dialog on page 18.
In this reference manual, menu paths are

written in this format: Build> Window> Box
Window
Overview
The Administration Configuration

displays a selection of project
management, file management and display
setting tools.
Contextual Menus
Contextual menus are context sensitive
menus that display tools relevant to a
selected.
You can access contextual menus by rightclicking on a selected object or in an empty

space in a view window.
Dialogs
Default and preference settings, object
specification, display settings, and many
other functions are accessed through dialog
boxes.
Many dialogs have a preview that shows how
the changes affect the object. This preview
updates when you click in a different field or
press the Tab key on your keyboard.
Specification Dialogs
Each object in Chief Architect has a
unique specification dialog where you
can enter size, style and other information
specific to the selected object. To access it,
select the object and click the Open Object

edit button.You can also double-click many
objects with the Select Objects
active.
tool
You can open the specification dialog for

multiple items if they are of the same type,
such as base cabinets. If you select multiple
objects of different types, the Open Object
edit button is usually not available. The
button may display if the objects have data in
common, but you can only edit the common
data.
The Status Bar

The status bar at the bottom of the main
window displays information about the
current state of the program.
This information depends on a variety of

conditions such as the type of object
selected, the current position of the pointer
and settings in the Preferences dialog.
The information may include the following:
A brief description of the toolbar button

or menu item highlighted by the mouse.
A description of the selected object.
The layer containing the selected object.
The current floor.
The dimensions of the active window in

pixels.
The current layout page.
The current default CAD layer.
The length and/or angle of the selected

object(s).
The current CAD coordinates of the

pointer.
The screen redraw time.
The number and angle styles used in the

Status Bar can be specified in the Number
Style/Angle Style dialog. See Number

Style/Angle Style Dialog on page 873.

Most objects in Chief Architect derive their
intial properties from their respective default
dialogs.
For more information about defaults and

preferences, see Defaults & Preferences on
page 175.
For example, a newly placed Window

gets its initial values from the Window
Defaults dialog and a newly placed Hinged
Preferences
Preference settings let you change program
behavior to suit your workflow. For example,
you can:
Turn certain display elements on or off.
Choose background and floor plan view

colors.
Set frequency of autosaves, maximum

number of undos, and file protection.
Set default folders for various files.
Control the editing behaviors of objects.
Setup the material list categories, subcategories, and report style, as well as
manufacturer and supplier information.
Set rendering specifications to maximize

efficiency and quality.
Preference settings are global, affecting all

plan and layout files.
Door
gets its initial values from the
Door Defaults dialog.
Once an object is placed in a plan, its initial

properties can be overridden, but setting up
your defaults before you begin drawing can
save you considerable time as you build a
model in the program.
Default settings, unlike Preferences, are file
specific.
Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults are values that affect
existing objects in a plan.
In specification dialogs, dynamic default
values have a Default checkbox beside them
or a [D] in their text fields. As long as this
checkbox is checked or the [D] is present,
changes made to the default affect the object.
To edit an individual object, you must delete
the [D] or uncheck the box in the
specification dialog. Objects you edit in this
way do not update if you change the default.
Overview
Defaults
Preference and default settings control many

aspects of the user interface and tool
behavior in Chief Architect. You can use
these settings to customize the program to
suit your personal work style.
To restore a value to the default, click to

place a check in the Default checkbox or
type a d into an edit box.
Template Plans
You can set up an otherwise empty plan with
the default settings of your choice and use it
as your template for new, blank plans. See
Template Files on page 167.
Drawing a Plan
Video: The Plan Development
Sequence
When you draw a plan in Chief Architect,
you are placing 3D objects that represent
building components. Chief Architect comes
with predefined default settings so you can
start drawing plans immediately. You should
review these default settings to be sure they
match your drawing and building methods.
See Defaults & Preferences on page 175.
Wall, Railing, and Fencing Defaults

on page 179.
3.
Set material defaults for roof, walls, and

rooms (optional). See Material
Defaults on page 177.
4.
Set style defaults for doors, windows,

molding, cabinets and other objects.
Draw the Floors

1.
Draw the exterior walls on Floor 1 in a

clockwise direction. See Drawing
Walls on page 238.
2.
Adjust the perimeter shape and size as

required. See Using Edit Handles on
page 242.
3.
Place any first floor bearing walls.
4.
Define types for special rooms such as

garages and decks in the plan. See
Room Types on page 284.
5.
Place perimeter doors and windows. See

Doors on page 305 and Windows on
page 327.
6.
Build additional floors. See Adding

Floors on page 366.
7.
Specify the default ceiling height for

each floor as soon as it is created. See
Floor Defaults on page 364.
Set the Defaults
10
1.
Open the plan template you want to use,

or choose File> Startup Options> New
from Template to begin a new plan.
2.
Set the structural defaults:

Floor Defaults. Set the default ceiling
height for Floor 1. See Floor
Foundation Defaults. Set the foundation specifics such as type, footing size,
and stem wall height. See Foundation
Framing Defaults. Set the floor framing
specifications, including type and
dimensions. See Framing Defaults
on page 177.
Default Wall Types. Specify the
defaults for walls and railings.See
Drawing a Plan
Adjust the perimeter shape of additional

floors as needed. See Editing Walls on
page 242.
1.
9.
Align edited or moved walls with below

where appropriate. See Aligning Walls
on page 246.
Build non-structural interior walls.

Begin on floor one and work up in multiple storey structures.
2.
Align walls where needed such as a

chimney chase, plumbing walls, or Open
Below.
3.
Finish the relevant interior structure

including interior doors, doorways, cabinets, fixtures, and fireplaces.
4.
Build the roof planes. If you generate the

roof automatically, remember to carry
the roof directives in the walls from the
first floor up to the top floor for multiple
storey structures. See Roofs on page
383.
5.
Build the framing. See Framing on

page 469.
Entering Dimensions
When using Imperial units, enter distances as
inches or feet and inches, in fractional or
decimal form. Millimeters are the default
unit for all metric distances. See
Dimensions on page 795.
To enter feet, include the ( ' ) marker or

the program assumes inches.
In most cases, the program allows

precision to 1/16th of an inch. Fractions
with denominators 2, 4, 8 and 16 are
allowed.
The program usually converts decimals

to fractions.
6.
Build the terrain and landscaping

(optional). See Terrain on page 583.
You can enter angles as bearings, decimal

degrees, or degrees, minutes, and
seconds. See Number Style/Angle Style
Dialog on page 873.
7.
Create the plot plan and plan footprint.

See Plot Plans and Plan Footprints on
page 875.
8.
Create any necessary views and use

CAD Detail from View to create 2D
elevations and plan details. Use and
modify details from the Library, as well.
See CAD Details on page 874.
Build the Foundation

1.
2.
Derive the foundation plan from the first

floor. See Building a Foundation on
page 372.
Adjust the foundation perimeter shape
as needed.
3.
Place interior foundation walls as

needed for the first floor bearing walls.
4.
Place any other foundation walls

required.
5.
Align with Above as needed.
Create the Layout

1.
If one does not exist, create a Layout file

with a title block, placing the border,
title block, and other text on page 0. See
Layout on page 969.
2.
Send details to the layout, starting with

layout page 1. See Sending Views to
Layout on page 975.
11
Overview
Add Structure and Details
8.
3.
Print the plan. See Printing & Plotting

on page 947.
Viewing Your Plan

Video: The Many Working Views of
Chief Architect
You can see your model in a variety of views.
rior of the model. You define the camera

position and angle with the mouse. A Vector
Floor Camera view displays only the
current floor.
Floor plan view is a 2D view of the model

and is most commonly used for drawing and
editing. You can only edit one floor at a time,
but another floor can be shown for reference.
Vector Full Camera View
A Vector Full Overview shows the

entire 3D model.
Floor Plan View
Vector Views
Vector Views show the 3D model with
patterns and colors instead of
materials. They can be converted into CAD
or line-based drawings. For more
information about all of the vector view
tools, see Vector View Tools on page 734.
A Vector Full Camera view
shows either the interior or exte-
12
Vector Full Overview
A Vector Floor Overview/ shows only

the current floor. Ceilings are omitted
so you can see the interior.
Viewing Your Plan
Overview
A Backclipped Cross Section

includes only the objects between the
starting point and stopping point of the cross
section line. It shows the entire model from
foundation to ridge.
Vector Overview
A Vector Framing Overview displays

framing in 3D, provided that framing
has been built.
Backclipped Cross Section
A Wall Elevation creates an elevation

of the current wall, either exterior or
interior.
Wall Elevation
Vector Framing Overview
A Cross Section/Elevation view is an

accurate 2D view of a section cut
through the entire model from foundation to
ridge. Use this tool to create either exterior
and interior views.
Render Views
Render views are more photo realistic
than vector views of the 3D model.
Surfaces display materials and textures, and
you can include backdrops, light sources, and
shadows.
The render camera and overview tools
function similar to the corresponding Vector
tools.
Cross Section/Elevation
13
A Final View or Final View with

Shadows creates a higher quality
image but takes longer to generate. You can
create a final view from any render view.
Render Full Camera View
Final View
A Glass House Camera view makes

all surfaces semi-transparent, so you
can see the entire model, inside and outside.
Render Full Overview
Glass House View
Render Floor Overview
A Raytrace view is the most photorealistic of the views and usually takes
the longest to generate. You can create a
raytrace from any render view. See
Raytracing on page 787.
Render Framing Overview

Raytrace View
14
Program Updates
Overview
All views can be sent to a layout or exported

as a graphic image. See Sending Views to
Layout on page 975.
layout
Program Updates
From time to time, Chief Architect releases
program updates that are available for
download free of charge from the
Chief Architect Web site, www.chiefarchitect.com.
Select Help> Download Program

Updates... to launch your default Web
browser to the Program Updates section of
the Chief Architect Web site.
Getting Help
Video: Using the Help Functions
There are many forms of help available in
Chief Architect, including: Tool Tips, the
Status Bar, online Help, product
documentation in both printed and electronic
format, and Chief Architects official Web
site, www.chiefarchitect.com .
All these forms of help assume you have a
basic working knowledge of the Windows
operating system, including how to use a
mouse, open, close and save files, copy,
paste, and right-click to access contextual
menus. Help also assumes you are familiar
with Windows terms.
When you move the pointer over a toolbar button or menu item, a Tool Tip displays, offering a brief description of the
tool. More information displays in the
Status Bar at the bottom of the window,
When you see a Tool Tip in the Status

Bar, press the F1 key to open the online
Help.
Press the Help button in any of the dialogs to open the Help.
When an object is selected, edit handles

display. Place the pointer over these edit
handles and press F1 to open the Help.
You can also access the online Help using

the Help menu. Select Help> Index to
15
database also contains many how-to

articles.
explore the Table of Contents or search

by key words.
16
The Reference Manual and the Getting

Started Guide are accessible through the
program in .pdf format. You can view
these documents with Adobe Reader.
Click any cross reference or page number
to jump to that page. Select Help> View
Reference Manual, or Help> View Getting Started Guide to view these electronic documents.
Our Web site, www.chiefarchitect.com,
has answers to many frequently asked
technical support questions. The help
Other Chief Architect users have a wealth

of knowledge they are willing to share.
You can access the Chief Talk user forum
from the Chief Architect Web site at
www.chieftalk.com.
Chief Architect strives to make our documentation as helpful as possible for all
of our customers. Please send any
questions, comments, or feedback to
documentation@chiefarchitect.com.
Chapter 2:
Menus &
Tools
Menus and
Toolbar Buttons
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Toolbars
and Toolbar Buttons
Whats New In Version X1 Training
Video: Menus and Toolbars
Chief Architects menus provide access to
most of the programs functionality. Next to
each menu item is a graphic that matches a
corresponding toolbar button. Toolbar
buttons are shortcuts and are often more
convenient to use than menus. Chief
Architect comes with a variety of toolbars
that work well for most professions.
However, your work may require a unique
set of toolbars and toolbar buttons. Toolbars
can be customized and new toolbars can be
created.
Toolbars can be viewed in Drop - Down or
classic Parent - Child arrangement. Drop Down toolbar buttons have an arrow to the
right of the button that accesses additional
tools. If you prefer, you can use Chief

Architects classic Parent - Child toolbar
arrangement. (See Appearance Panel on
page 184.) In the classic Parent - Child
toolbar arrangement, you select a parent
button to display its child buttons to the
right. Parent buttons are indicated by a blue
triangle in their bottom right corner.
New Chief Architect users are encouraged to refer to the Users Guide, which
features a series of tutorials designed to
introduce the basics of using the program,
including toolbar buttons.
Chapter Contents
Toolbar Customization Dialog

Toolbars and Menus
Restoring Toolbars
Chief Architects Tools
17
Toggle Buttons
Edit Toolbar Buttons
Other Buttons

To customize a toolbar, choose Tools>
Toolbars> Customize Toolbars. The
Toolbar Customization dialog displays.

Video: Customizing the Toolbars
Video: Working with the Toolbars
Tools Tab
4
5
2
3
Adding Toolbar Buttons

1 Select the view this toolbar
customization applies to. As you select

various views, the tools available change.
Select All Views to add buttons to a
toolbar that displays in all views and
windows.
18
2 A description of the button you select

displays here.
3 Check this to sort the tools in
alphabetical order rather than the order

they appear on the toolbars.
4 Drag a button from the Main Toolbar
Buttons or Child Buttons area and drop

it onto an existing toolbar outside of the
dialog to add the button to that toolbar.
Drag a button from the Main Toolbar

Buttons area and drop it away from an
existing toolbar to create a new toolbar. The
selected button is first in the new toolbar.
The new toolbar is named with the current
view followed by a number.
To delete a tool button, drag it off the

toolbar.
The edit toolbar cannot have tools added or
removed. See Edit Toolbar Buttons on
page 71.
You can use the Empty Space button in

your toolbars as a spacer.
5 Click a button in the Main Toolbar
Menus &
Tools
Buttons area to display its child

buttons in this Child Buttons area. If no
child buttons display, the button you selected
is not a parent tool.
In the example above, the Cabinet Tools
parent button is selected under Main
Toolbar Buttons. All cabinet child buttons
display in the Child Buttons section.
Child buttons only display when their parent
buttons are clicked, however, you can add
any child button such as Soffit
or Wall
Cabinets
to other toolbars by dragging it
from the child buttons area dialog to the
desired location.
Child tools are permanently associated with
the parent tool. If you add the Cabinet Tools
parent button to a toolbar, it will always
display all of its child buttons whenever it is
clicked. Child buttons cannot be removed
from a parent button.
Removing Tools from Toolbars

You can remove a button from a toolbar only
when the Toolbar Customization dialog
is open.
19
Toolbar Tab
3
4
1 The view affected displays here. Click a

name to select another view.
2 A list of existing toolbars for the view
displays in this area. Select a toolbar by

clicking its name. For information about the
color pallettes, see Color Palettes on page
24.
If the selected toolbar is not active, the
Activate button is available. Click Activate
to make the selected toolbar active.
Click Rename to rename the selected
toolbar.
Click Delete to remove the selected toolbar
from the list. A deleted toolbar is no longer
available.
20
3 Click Reset Toolbars to restore all the
toolbars to their original configuration.

This button is only available if a backup
toolbar configuration file was created with
the same name as the toolbar configuration
file.
Note: Clicking on the Reset Toolbars button
deletes any toolbar customization you have
done.
4 Display Tool Tips - Check this to show
Tool Tips when you move the cursor

over buttons.
5 Lock Toobars - Check the box to lock
toolbars in their current position on

screen.
Toolbars and Menus
Configurations Tab
3
4
Menus &
Tools
The default toolbar configuration is for a

screen resolution of 1024 x 768. If you
change your screen resolution, you may also
want to change your toolbar configuration.
1 A list of toolbar configurations displays
here. Select a configuration before

clicking the Remove, Copy, or Switch To
buttons.
2 Add - Click to browse for a toolbar
configuration file and add it to the list.
3 Remove - Click to remove the selected
toolbar configuration. This removes the
configuration from the list but does not

delete the configuration file permanently.
4 Copy - Use this button to create a copy

of the selected toolbar configuration.
5 Switch To - Click this button to switch
to the selected toolbar configuration.

You can also right-click any toolbar and
select a configuration from the menu, or
click a Toolbar Configuration button.
Note: You should backup the toolbar configuration files (*.toolbar) you are using. You can
access these and copy them using Windows
Explorer.
Toolbars and Menus

Video: Choosing a Toolbar Style
Menu items display their corresponding

button images on the left. This may help you
become familiar with the location of both the
21
menu items and their corresponding toolbar

buttons. Depending on your workflow, you
may find it easier to access some of these
features using the toolbar buttons, while
leaving others off the toolbars completely
and accessing them only through the menus.
Toolbars can be viewed in Drop - Down or

classic Parent - Child arrangement. Drop Down toolbar buttons have an arrow to the
right of the button that accesses additional
tools.
If you prefer, you can use Chief Architects

classic Parent - Child toolbar arrangement.
(See Appearance Panel on page 184.) In
the classic Parent - Child toolbar
arrangement, you select a parent button to
display its child buttons to the right. Parent
buttons are indicated by a blue triangle in
their bottom right corner.
Chief Architect has limited space for toolbar
buttons. How many can be shown depends
on your monitors size and screen resolution
settings.
The toolbar configurations that come with
Chief Architect organize tools based on the
type of work being done as well as on
monitor screen resolution.
22
The Default Configuration

displays
the architectural tools used for house
design, including walls, windows, doors,

stairs, cabinets, etc.
The Terrain Configuration

displays
the buttons associated with the terrain
and road tools, including the plant and
sprinkler tools. See Terrain Tools on
page 584.
The Kitchen and Bath Design Configuration

displays the buttons associated
with kitchen and bath design. See Cabinets on page 551.
The MEP Configuration

displays
the buttons associated with mechanical,
electrical, and plumbing. See Cabinets
on page 551.
The Space Planning Configuration
displays the buttons associated with the
House Wizard. See House Wizard on
page 884.
2.
Click Add.
3.
Browse to the location of the toolbar you

want to import.
4.
Click Open.
To create a custom configuration

You can create a custom configuration that
shows only the buttons you need.
The Plan Detailing Configuration

is designed for dealing with materials
lists, time tracking, and client and
designer information.
1.
Access the Configurations tab of the

Toolbar Customization dialog.
2.
Select a configuration similar to the one

you want to create.
CAD Configuration
shows the tools
needed for CAD drawings.
3.
Click Copy.
4.
The All-Tools Configuration is only

available through the Toolbar
Customization dialog. It includes all
available tools.
Give the new configuration a name. It

should be saved to the Toolbars folder
under Chief Architect.
5.
Click Save. The program switches to the

new configuration and it appears highlighted in the list.
6.
Drag any tools you do not want off the

toolbars.
7.
Drag tools you want to add out of the

Toolbar Customization dialog and onto
the toolbars.
The 800 x 600 Configuration is only

available through the Toolbar
Customization dialog. It is designed
for monitors with 800x600 resolution.
To switch between toolbar configurations
Click a Toolbar Configuration button.
Choose a configuration from the Configurations tab of the Toolbar

Customization dialog.
Right click on a toolbar and select a configuration from the contextual menu.
To import a custom configuration
By default, new toolbar configurations

display the
button. You can make your
own button icon. Create a .bmp file with the
same name as the configuration and save it in
the Toolbars folder. Look at the Default.bmp
file in the Chief Architect X1 program folder
that corresponds to the Default Toolbar
configuration for an example.
You can import an existing toolbar

configuration.
Toolbar button bitmaps must be 24 x 24

pixels in size.
1.
The color (R:192, G:192, B:192) maps to

the system 3D face color.
Access the Configurations tab of the

Toolbar Customization dialog.
23
Menus &
Tools

the system 3D Shadow color.

the system 3D light color.
Placing your custom configurations in
an All Views toolbar makes them
available in all views.
Color Palettes
Color palettes are available on the Toolbar
tab of the Toolbar Customization dialog
in elevation views, vector views, and render
views. These are library colors which have
been added to a toolbar using the Place
Library Object
button. You can
customize these toolbars and/or create your
own toolbar palette with custom colors. See
Place Library Object Button on page 696.
Restoring Toolbars
Chief Architect installs two files that affect
the way toolbars display. These files are
*.toolbar and *.toolbarbak.
The program updates *.toolbarbak anytime
you select another toolbar configuration,
close the Toolbar Customization dialog,
or exit from the program.
The program uses *.toolbar files to
remember original toolbar settings. When
you click the Reset Toolbars button in the
Toolbar Customization dialog, the
program copies this file and saves it as

*.toolbar. If you make changes you prefer
over the original toolbar, create a copy of
your *.toolbar file and save it as
*.toolbarbak. The next time you click Reset
Toolbars, the program returns to the default
settings.

Video: Learning Keyboard Commands
Chief Architects main menu is found under
the title bar. Menu items followed by a
triangle ( ) open submenus. Menu items
followed by an ellipsis (...) open dialogs.
Move the cursor over a menu name to see a
brief description in the status bar at the
bottom of the screen. Press the F1 key to
24
open the Help index to information about

that menu item.
You can activate menus at any time using the
keyboard. Press the Alt key and the
underlined letter in the menu name.
Many menu items have corresponding
toolbar buttons. In the chart below, the
toolbar buttons are shown next to the menu
item they access.
File Menu
The File menu contains items related to
opening, closing, saving, exporting, and
printing files.
File> New Plan
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Ctrl + N
File> New Layout

File> Open Plan...
Effect
Create a new plan file. See Creating a New Plan
on page 159.
Create a new layout file. See Creating a Layout
File on page 971.
Ctrl + O
Open an existing plan file. See Opening a Plan

or Layout File on page 164.
File> Open
Layout...
Open an existing layout file. See Opening a Plan

or Layout File on page 164.
File> Templates>
New Plan From
Template
Create a new plan file using a plan template. See

File> Templates>
New Layout From
Template
Create a new layout file using a layout template.

See Template Files on page 167.
File> Templates>
Save Plan As
Template
Save the current plan as a template. See

File> Search For

Plans...
Search for plans in an existing plan database file

using the Find Plan Wizard. See Searching for
Plans on page 169.
File> Manage
Auto Archives...
Opens Windows Explorer to the archives folder

for the current plan. See Auto Archive on page
162.
File> Startup
Options...
Opens the Startup Options dialog. See

Startup Options on page 2.
25
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
File> Close
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
N/A
Ctrl + W
or F4
File> Close All
File> Save
Close the current view. If you close a plan or

layout, you will be prompted to save any changes
you have made. See Closing Plans and Views
on page 172.
Close all windows. If you have made any changes
to the file, you will be prompted to save them. See
Closing Plans and Views on page 172.
Ctrl + S
Save the current plan or layout file. See Saving a

Plan or Layout File on page 160.
File> Save As...
Save the current plan or layout file, and assign file

and path names. See Save and Save As on page
161.
File> Save Plan

Thumbnail
Save the current view as a thumbnail for the plan,

which displays in the Open Plan File dialog.
See Saving a Plan Thumbnail on page 161.
File> Export>
Entire Plan...
Export all plan files and external referenced files

to an empty folder. See Exporting an Entire
Plan on page 173.
File> Export>
Current View
(DWG, DXF)...
26
N/A
Effect
Shift + F4
Exports a 2D DXF file of the current floor plan

view. See Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files on
page 917.
File> Export> All

Floors (DWG,
DXF)...
Exports a 2D DXF file which includes all floors

in floor plan view. Items of different types or on
different floors are placed on distinct layers. See
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files on page 917.
File> Export> 3D
Model (DWG,
DXF)...
Only available from a 3D view. Exports the entire

model as a 3D DWG/DXF. See Exporting a 3D
Model in DXF/DWG Format on page 921.
File> Export> 3D
Model (3DS)...
Only available from a 3D view. Exports the

model as a 3DS. See Exporting a 3D Model in
3DS Format on page 922.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
File> Export>
VRML (WRL)...
Only available from a vector or render view.

Export the entire model in a .wrl file format
which allows you to creat real time walkthroughs
using a VRML plug-in or import into other
graphics programs. See Creating VRML Files
on page 905.
File> Export>
POV-Ray
(POV)...
Exports the entire model as a POV-Ray

compatible file which can then be imported into
POV Ray. See Raytracing on page 787.
File> Export>
Metafile (EMF)...
Export a Windows Metafile of the current view.

See Metafiles on page 901.
File> Export>
Picture (BMP,
JPG, PNG)...
Export any view as a picture file. See Exporting

Picture Files on page 892.
File> Export>
Wall Definitions...
Export the set of multi-layer wall definitions from

the current plan so they can be imported into
another. See Exporting Wall Definitions on
page 255.
File> Export>
Layer Sets...
Export a defined layer set from the current plan so

it can be imported into another. See Exporting/
Importing Layer Sets on page 224.
File> Import>
Drawing (DWG,
DXF)...
Shift + F3
Import a 2D DXF file as CAD data. See

Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files on page 909.
File> Import>
Picture (BMP,
JPG, PNG)...
Import a picture file (.bmp, .jpg, .png,*.gif, *.tif,

or *.pcx) into a floor plan view; layout; or cross
section/elevation view. See Importing Picture
Files on page 890.
File> Import>
Metafile (EMF)...
Import a Metafile (.emf) into a floor plan view,

layout, or cross section/elevation view. See
Importing Picture Files on page 890.
File> Import>
Backdrop
Import a graphics file into the My Backdrops

folder of the Library Browser. See Adding
Backdrops to the Library on page 676.
27
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Effect
File> Import>
Wall Definitions...
Import a file containing wall type definitions

from a different plan and merge them with the
current plans wall type definitions. See
Importing Wall Definitions on page 256.
File> Import>
Line Style
Definitions...
Import line style definitions from another plan

and merge them with the current plan's line syle
definitions. See Line Styles on page 688.
File> Import>
Layer Sets...
Import a defined layer set from another plan file.

See Exporting/Importing Layer Sets on page 224.
File> Import>
Terrain Data...
Import terrain data from a text file in a variety of

formats. See Importing Terrain Data on page
623.
File> Print> Page

Setup...
Open the Page Setup dialog to assign

properties to the printed page. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 963.
File> Print> Scale

to Fit
Adjust the drawing scale to fit the drawing sheet.

See Printing to Scale on page 952.
File> Print>
Center Sheet
Center the drawing sheet relative to the model.

See Center Sheet on page 951.
File> Print> Print

Preview
Alt + F2
Turn the display of the print preview on or off.

See Print Preview on page 951.
File> Print>
Print...
Ctrl + P
Open the Print dialog to print your plan or layout

file. See The Printing Tools on page 949.
File> Print> Print

Image...
Print the current view as an image. Used to print a

render view or a 3D view showing images, such
as trees. See Print Image Dialog on page 967.
File> Print> Print

Model...
Opens the Print Model dialog allowing you to

print plan templates for making a model of your
plan. See Print Model on page 959.
File> Print>
Customize Sheet
Sizes...
28
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
N/A
Open the Customize Sheet Sizes dialog to

select a sheet size. See Creating Custom Sheet
Sizes on page 958.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
File> Print> Clear N/A

Printer Info
File> Send to
Layout...
Effect
Clear the printer information associated with the
current page setup. See Clearing Printer
Information on page 965.
Ctrl + U
Send the current view to an open Layout file. See

Sending Views to Layout on page 975.
File> Exit
N/A
Exit from Home Designer Pro. See Exiting Chief

Architect on page 174.
Names of Plans
Most Recently
Opened
N/A
Only available after opening a plan. The number

of plans that display in the list can be set. See
General Panel on page 190.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu lists options for manipulating
items. Many of these editing options also
have a corresponding toolbar button and/or a
Menu
Command
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
keyboard option (noted next to the menu

item).
Effect
Edit> Undo
Ctrl + Z
Allows multiple undos of plan changes

depending on your settings in the
Preferences dialog. See General Panel on
page 190.
Edit> Redo
Ctrl + Y
Redo the last Undo performed. See General

Panel on page 190.
Edit> Cut
Ctrl + X
Delete the selected item and copy it to the

clipboard so it can be pasted elsewhere.
Edit> Copy
Ctrl + C
Copy the selected item to the clipboard so it

can be pasted elsewhere. The original item is
left unchanged. See Copying and Pasting
Objects on page 136.
Edit> Copy Region as

Picture
Lets you select a region to be saved as a

Windows metafile. You also specify the size of
the file. See Metafiles on page 901.
29
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Effect
Edit> Paste> Paste
Ctrl + V
Edit> Paste> Paste

Hold Position
Ctrl + Alt + Paste the last item cut or copied to the same
V
position on the screen. See Copying and
Pasting Objects on page 136.
Edit > Paste> Paste

Special
Shift + Alt Pastes the last item cut or copied to the

+V
clipboard, provded it is a file type Chief
Architect recognizes. See Copying and
Pasting Objects on page 136.
Edit> Delete
Delete
Delete the selected object. See Deleting

Edit> Delete
Objects...
Ctrl +
Spacebar
Opens a dialog that allows you to delete items

of a particular type in a single room, all rooms,
or throughout a whole plan. See Delete
Objects Dialog on page 141.
Edit> Select Objects
Spacebar
Activate the tool for selecting objects. See

Selecting Objects on page 92.
Ctrl + A
Selects the entire plan.
Edit> Select All
30
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
N/A
Paste the last item cut or copied. See Copying

and Pasting Objects on page 136.
Edit> Snap Settings>

Object Snaps
Shift + F11 Toggles Object Snaps on and off. See Object

Snaps on page 82.

Angle Snaps
F10
Toggles Angle Snaps on and off. See Angle

Snaps on page 84.

Grid Snaps
Ctrl + F9
Toggle Grid Snaps on and off. See Grid

Snaps on page 85.

Bumping/Pushing
Offers easy access to the Bumping/Pushing

setting in the Preferences dialog. See Snap
Properties Panel on page 204.

Endpoint
Enables snapping to the ends of lines, arcs,

splines, and other objects. See Snap
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect

Midpoint
Enables snapping to the midpoint of an object,

such as a line or arc. For objects such as boxes,
you can snap to the midpoint of any side. See
Snap Properties Panel on page 204.

Center
Enables snapping to the center of cabinets,

fixtures, furniture, as wellas circles and arcs.
See Snap Properties Panel on page 204.

Quadrant
Enables snapping to the left, right, top, or

bottom of an arc or circle. See Snap

On Object
Enables snapping to any point on the selected

object, including CAD obnjects and cabinets.

Points/Markers
Allows you to snap to any temporary points

you have placed, as well as callouts and
markers. See Snap Properties Panel on page
204.

Intersections
Enables snapping to the intersection of two

objects such as lines. Also snaps extension
lines to objects or two extension lines to each
other. See Snap Properties Panel on page
204.

Tangent Extensions
Enables snapping to a point tangent to the

objects where the extension anchor sits. See

Perpendicular
Extensions
Enables snapping to a point perpendicular to

the object where the extension anchor sits. See

Orthogonal
Extensions
Enables snappiong to a point on a 90-degree

axis from the extension anchor. See Snap
Edit> Edit
Behaviors> Default
Alt + Z or
Alt + /
Toggles the default edit mode on and off. See

31
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
32
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Edit> Edit
Behaviors> Alternate
Alt or right Toggles to alternate editing mode. See Edit

mouse
Behaviors on page 86.
button
Edit> Edit
Behaviors> Move
Z, /, or
middle
mouse
button
Toggles to Move edit mode. See Edit

Edit> Edit
Behaviors> Resize
X, comma
(,), or X2
mouse
button
Toggles to Resize edit mode. SeeEdit

Edit> Edit
Behaviors>
Concentric
C, period
(.), or X1
mouse
button
Togglers to Concentric edit mode. See Edit

Edit> Edit
Behaviors> Fillet
Toggles to Fillet edit mode. See Edit

Edit> Edit
Behaviors> Edit
Object Parts
Shift + F8
Toggles Edit Object Parts on and off. See Edit

Object Parts on page 81.
Edit> Edit
Behaviors> Rotate/
Resize About Current
Point
Activates the Rotate/Resize About Current

Point edit tool. See Rotate/Resize About on
page 133.
Edit > Arc Creation

Modes> Free Form
Arc
Draw an arc by clicking at the start point,

dragging to create the arc, and clicking again
at the end point. See Arc Tools on page 856.
Edit > Arc Creation

Modes> Center/
Radius/End Arc
Draw an arc by clicking at the center of the

arc, dragging to define the length and radius,
then clicking at the end. See Center/Radius/
End Arc on page 856.
Edit > Arc Creation

Modes> Start/End/On
Arc
Draw an arc by dragging from the start point to

the end point of the arc, then move the mouse
to adjust the curvature. See Start/End/On
Arc on page 856.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Edit > Arc Creation

Modes> Start/
Tangent/ End Arc
Draw an arc by clicking at the start point,

thendragging to define the arc tangent at the
start point. See Start/Tangent/End Arc on
page 856.
Edit > Arc Creation

Modes> Arc About
Center
Draw an arc by defining the center and then

the end points. See Arc About Center on
page 856.
Edit> Edit Area> Edit

Area
Ctrl + H
Select all objects within an area to copy them

or Move the entire area by dragging it to a new
location. See Edit Area on page 153.

Area Visible
Select all visible objects within an area to copy

them or Move the entire area by dragging it to
a new location. See Edit Area on page 153.
Edit> Edit Area>

Edit Area (All Floors)
Group selection tool that allows you to Move

or Copy all floors of an entire area.. See Edit
Area (All Floors) on page 154.

Area (All Floors)
Visible
Group selection tool that allows you to Move

or Copy visible objects on all floors from an
entire area. See Edit Area (All Floors) on
page 154.
Edit> Default
Settings...
Set general parameters for objects and tools

used in a plan. See Plan Defaults on page
180.
Edit> Reset to
Defaults...
Edit> Preferences...
N/A
Reset a part or all of the plan to the defaults for

roof information, floor and ceiling heights, and
wall heights. See Reset to Defaults on page
182.
Shift + ~
Define the global preferences for Chief

Architect. Some of these settings are unique to
individual plans. See Preferences Dialog on
page 183.
Build Menu
Use the tools on the Build menu to build the
3D model in Chief Architect. Each
33
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
arrowhead indicates a submenu that offers

more choices. Most Build menu items have
corresponding buttons on the toolbar.
Menu
Command
Build> Wall> Straight
Exterior Wall
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Shift + Q
Effect
Draw straight walls using the Exterior wall
type as defined in the Wall Defaults dialog.
See Exterior Walls on page 229.
Build> Wall> Curved

Exterior Wall
Draw a straight wall of the Exterior wall type

defined in the Wall Defaults dialog. See
Exterior Walls on page 229.

Interior Wall
Draw walls using the Interior wall type as

Interior Walls on page 229.
Build> Wall> Curved

Interior Wall
Draw a curved interior wall of the type


Foundation Wall
Draw straight foundation walls using the

settings from the Foundation Defaults
dialog. See Foundation Walls on page 230.
Build> Wall> Curved

Foundation Wall
Draw curved foundation wall using the

settings from the Foundation Defaults
dialog. See Foundation Walls on page 230.

Pony Wall
Draw pony walls using the settings from the

Pony Wall Defaults dialog. See Pony
Walls on page 230.
Build> Wall> Curved

Pony Wall
Draw a curved pony wall as defined in the
Walls on page 230.

Railing
34
Ctrl + Q
Draw railings as defined in the Default

Railing dialog. See Railings on page 230.
Build> Wall> Curved

Railing
Draw a curved as defined in the Default

Railing dialog. See Railings on page 230.
Build> Wall>
Invisible Wall
Draw an Invisible wall to define room areas.

See Invisible Walls on page 230.
Menu
Command
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Open the New Regular Polygon Shaped
Room dialog and define the specifications for
Build> Wall> Polygon

Shaped Room...
a regular polygonal room. See Polygon

Shaped Rooms and Decks on page 235.
Build> Wall> Break

Wall
Fill a wall with a hatch pattern. See Hatch

Wall on page 230.
Ctrl + B
Break a wall into two sections. See Break

Wall on page 230.
Build> Wall> Fix

Wall Connections
Connect walls whose ends are within a few

inches of each other but are not connected.
See Fix Wall Connections on page 231.
Build> Wall> Define

Wall Types
Open the Wall Type Definitions dialog to

create or modify available wall types. See
Wall Type Definitions on page 251.
Build> Decks>
Straight Deck Railing
Draw a deck defined by straight railings. See

Deck Railing on page 231.
Build> Decks>
Curved Deck Railing
Draw curved deck railing. See Deck Railing

on page 231.
Build> Decks>
Straight Deck Edge
Draw a deck edge with no railing. See Deck

Edge on page 237.
Build> Decks>
Curved Deck Edge
Draw a curved deck edge with no railing. See

Deck Edge on page 237.
Build Decks> Polygon

Shaped Deck...
Open the New Regular Polygon Shaped

Deck dialog and define the specifications for
a regular polygonal deck. See Polygon
Shaped Rooms and Decks on page 235.
Build> Fencing>
Straight Fencing
Draw a straight fence. See The Fencing

Tools on page 231.
Build> Fencing>
Curved Fencing
Draw curved fencing. See The Fencing

Tools on page 231.
35
Menus &
Tools
Build> Wall> Hatch

Wall
Menu
Command
Build> Door> Hinged
Door
Shift + E
Effect
Place a hinged door into a wall. See Hinged
Doors on page 307.
Build> Door>
Doorway
Place a doorway into a wall. See Doorways

on page 307.
Build> Door> Sliding

Door
Place a sliding door into a wall. See Sliding

Doors on page 307.
Build> Door> Pocket

Door
Place a pocket door into a wall. See Pocket

Doors on page 307.
Build> Door> Bifold

Door
Place a bifold door into a wall. See Bifold

Doors on page 307.
Build> Door> Garage

Door
Place a garage door into a wall. See Garage

Doors on page 307.
Build> Window>
Window
Shift + W
Place a window as defined in the Window

Defaults dialog. See Standard Windows
on page 328.
Build> Window> Bay

Window
Place a bay window into a wall. See Bay

Windows on page 328.
Build> Window> Box

Window
Place a box window into a wall. See Box

Build> Window> Bow

Window
Place a bow window into a wall. See Bow

Build> Floor> Build

New Floor...
36
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Shift + X
Create a new floor in your plan. See Adding

Floors on page 366.
Build> Floor> Insert

New Floor...
Insert a new floor at the current floor and

move all other floors up one level. See
Adding Floors on page 366.
Build> Floor> Delete

Current Floor
Delete the current floor. The floor above

moves down to take the place of the current
floor. See Deleting Floors on page 367.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Build> Floor>
Exchange with Floor
Above
Exchange the current floor with the one above

it. See Adding Floors on page 366.
Build> Floor>
Exchange with Floor
Below
Exchange the current floor with the one below

it. See Adding Floors on page 366.
Build> Floor> Build

Foundation...
Shift + F
Build> Floor> Delete

Foundation
Build> Floor>
Rebuild Walls/
Floors/Ceilings
Create a foundation level. See Building a

Foundation on page 372.
Delete the current foundation. See Deleting
Foundations on page 377.
F12
Build> Floor>
Rebuild Slabs
Update the 3D model to include recent

changes. See Automatic Rebuild of Floors &
Ceilings on page 416
Rebuild a monolithic slab foundation based
on the current first floor footprint. See
Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations on
page 378.
Build> Roof> Build

Roof...
Ctrl + R
Specify settings for automatic roof generation

in the Build Roof dialog. See Build Roof
Dialog on page 416.
Build> Roof> Roof

Plane
Manually place roof planes in floor plan view.

See Roof Plane on page 385.
Build> Roof> Ceiling

Plane
Manually place ceiling planes in floor plan

view. See Ceiling Plane on page 385.
Build> Roof> Truss

Base
Define a truss base on a roof plane. See Truss

Base on page 507.
Build> Roof> Gable/

Roof Line
Draw a gable roof in floor plan view. See

Gable/Roof Line on page 385.
Build> Roof>
Skylight
Create a closed polyline within a roof plane

that will be defined as a skylight. See
Skylights on page 385.
37
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Effect
Build> Roof> Auto

Floating Dormer
Place a floating dormer onto a roof plane. See

Auto Floating Dormer on page 398.
Build> Roof> Auto

Dormer
Place an auto dormer onto a roof plane. See

Auto Dormer on page 399.
Build> Roof> Delete

Roof Planes
Delete all roof planes. See Delete Roof

Planes on page 386.
Build> Roof> Delete

Ceiling Planes
N/A
Delete all ceiling planes. See Ceiling

Planes on page 409.
Build> Roof> Fix

Roofs
Mend all broken roof edges. See Fix Roofs

on page 386.
Build> Structure>
Round Pier
Place round piers under foundation walls. See

Piers & Pads on page 380.
Build> Structure>
Square Pad
Place a square pad under foundation walls.

See Piers & Pads on page 380.
Build> Structure>
Slab
Draw a slab at grade in floor plan view. See

Slabs on page 379.
Build> Structure>
Slab with Footing
Draw a slab with thickened footings in floor

plan view. See Slabs on page 379.
Build> Structure>
Slab Hole
Draw a rectangular polyline within a slab to

create a hole. See Slab Holes on page 379.
Build> Structure>
Slab Hole with
Footing
Draw a rectangular polyline within a slab with

footings to create a hole with footings. See
Slab Holes on page 379.
Build> Structure>
Platform Hole
Draw a rectangular polyline to place a hole in

the above ceiling/floor platform. See
Platform Holes on page 380.
Build> Framing>
Build Framing...
38
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Ctrl + Shift Display Build Framing dialog to define

+S
framing specifications. See Build Framing
Dialog on page 475.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Build> Framing>
Rafter
Manually draw a rafter. See Rafter on page

471.
Build> Framing>
Roof Blocking
Manually draw roof blocking. See Joist and

Roof Blocking on page 473.
Build> Framing>
Roof Truss
Manually draw a truss. See Roof Truss on

page 471.
Build> Framing>
Roof Beam
Draw a beam in floor plan view. See Roof

Beam on page 471.
Build> Framing>
Joist
Manually draw a ceiling or floor joist,

depending on the platform it is drawn over.
See Joist on page 471.
Build> Framing>
Joist Blocking
Draw joist blocking. See Joist and Roof

Blocking on page 473.
Build> Framing>
Floor/Ceiling Truss
Manually draw a floor truss. See Floor/

Ceiling Truss on page 472.
Build> Framing>
Floor/Ceiling Beam
Manually draw a floor or ceiling beam. See

Floor/Ceiling Beam on page 472.
Build> Framing>
Post
Manually draw a post. See Post on page

472.
Build> Framing>
Framing Reference
Marker
Place a framing reference marker in a plan.

See Framing Reference Markers on page
486.
Build> Framing>
Bearing Line
Draw a line defining bearing areas for

automatic framing to break joists. See
Bearing Lines on page 488.
Build> Framing>
Joist Direction
Draw a line defining joist direction for

automatic floor or ceiling framing generation.
See Joist Direction Lines on page 489.
Build> Trim> Corner

Boards
Click in floor plan view to place corner

boards. See Corner Boards on page 536.
39
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Build> Trim> Quoins
Click in floor plan view to place quoins. See

Quoins on page 537.
Build> Trim>
Molding Polyline
Draw a molding polyline. See Layer Tab on

page 539.
Build> Trim>
Molding Line
Draw a molding line. See Layer Tab on

page 539.
Build> Trim> 3D
Molding Polyline
Draw a 3D modling polyline. See Layer Tab

on page 539.
Build> Trim> 3D
Molding Line
Draw a 3D modling line. See Layer Tab on

page 539.
Build> Stairs>
Straight Stairs
Shift + Y
Drag to create an UP stair. Hold the Alt key

and drag to create a DOWN stair. See Stair
Tools on page 436.
Build> Stairs> Click

Stairs
Build a set of stairs with a single mouse click.

See Click Stairs on page 436.
Build> Stairs> Curve

to Left
Place stairs that curve to the left. See Stair

Tools on page 436.
Build> Stairs> Curve

to Right
Place stairs that curve to the right. See Stair

Tools on page 436.
Build> Cabinet> Base

Cabinet
Shift + T
Place a base cabinet as defined in the Base

Cabinet Defaults dialog. See Base
Cabinets on page 552.
Build> Cabinet> Wall

Cabinet
Ctrl + T
Place a wall cabinet as defined in the Wall

Cabinet Defaults dialog. See Wall
Cabinets on page 552.
Build> Cabinet> Full

Height
Build> Cabinet>
Soffit
40
Effect
Place a full height or pantry cabinet as defined

in the Full Height Cabinet Defaults dialog. See Full Height Cabinets on page 552.
T
Place a soffit. See Soffits on page 553.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Build> Cabinet>
Shelf
Place a shelf used in a closet. See Shelves

on page 553.
Build> Cabinet>
Partition
Place a vertical partition. See Partitions on

page 553.
Build> Cabinet>
Custom Countertop
Draw a polyline to create a custom counter

top. See Custom Countertops on page 553.
Build> Cabinet>
Custom Counter Hole
Draw a polyline to create a hole in a custom

counter top. See Custom Counter Holes on
page 554.
Build> Fireplace
Create a free-standing or built-in masonry

fireplace. See Fireplaces on page 656.
Build> Electrical>
110V Outlet
Place 110V outlets. See Outlets on page

524.
Build> Electrical>
220V Outlet
Place 220V outlets. See Auto Place Outlets

on page 526.
Build> Electrical>
Light
Place default lights on walls or ceiling as

defined in the Electrical Defaults dialog.
See Lights on page 524.
Build> Electrical>
Switch
Place switches in walls or cabinets as defined

in the Electrical Defaults dialog. See
Switches on page 525.
Build> Electrical>
Auto Place Outlets
Automatically place outlets in room. See

Outlets on page 524.
Build> Electrical>
Connect Electrical
Connect electrical items into circuits. See

Connect Electrical on page 525.
Build> Primitive>
Box
Draw a box that also displays in 3D. See

Primitive Tools on page 641.
Build> Primitive>
Sphere
Draw a circle that is a sphere in 3D. See

41
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Build> Primitive>
Cylinder
Draw a circle that is a cylnder in 3D. See

Primitive Tools on page 641. See Convert
to Solid on page 649.
Build> Primitive>
Cone
Draw circle that is a cone in 3D. See

Build> Primitive>
Polyline Solid
Draw a polyline solid. See Polyline Solids

on page 649.
Build> Image>
Create Image
Open the Image Specification dialog that

allows you to import an image. See Creating
Images on page 894.
Build> Image>
Create Billboard
Image
Open the Image Specification dialog that

allows you to import an image. See Creating
Images on page 894.
Build> Image>
Create Image Library
Allows you to import a folder of image(s) into

the library. See Converting a Folder of
Images on page 896.
Terrain Menu
Menu
Command
42
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Terrain> Create
Terrain Perimeter
Create a rectangular polyline terrain

perimeter. See Terrain Tools on page 584.
Terrain> Terrain
Specification...
Specify how the program approximates the

terrain and draws contour lines in the Terrain
Specification dialog. See Terrain
Specification Dialog on page 610.
Terrain> Build
Terrain
Model terrain based on elevation data you

provide using points, lines and splines.
Calculate terrain data such as contour lines
and the 3D mesh. See Building the Terrain
on page 596.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Terrain> Clear
Terrain
Clear the plan of 3D terrain data and contour

lines. To restore information you must rebuild
the terrain. See Clearing the Terrain on page
596.
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Elevation Point
Place elevation points containing data in floor

plan view. See Editing Terrain Objects on
page 597.
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Elevation Line
Draw a line containing elevation data. See

Editing Terrain Objects on page 597.
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Elevation
Spline
Draw a spline containing elevation data. See

Terrain> Elevation
Data> Elevation
Region
Draw a polyline to create a region of constant

elevation. See Terrain Elevation Tools on
page 585.
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Terrain Break
Draw a terrain break. See Editing Terrain

Terrain> Modifier>
Raised Region
Draw a polyline to create a raised region. See

Terrain Modifier Tools on page 589.
Terrain> Modifier>
Lowered Region
Draw a polyline to create a lowered region.

See Terrain Modifier Tools on page 589.
Terrain> Modifier>
Hill
Draw a polyline to create a hill. See Terrain

Modifier Tools on page 589.
Terrain> Modifier>
Valley
Draw a polyline to create a valley. See

Terrain> Modifier>
Flat Region
Draw a polyline to create a flat region. See

Terrain> Feature>
Rectangular Feature
Draw a retangular terrain feature. See Terrain

Feature Tools on page 590.
Terrain> Feature>
Spline Feature
Draw a spline to create a terrain feature. See

Terrain Feature Tools on page 590.
43
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
44
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Terrain> Feature>
Kidney Shaped
Feature
Draw a kidney-shaped terrain feature. See

Terrain> Feature>
Terrain Hole
Draw a terrain hole polyline. See Terrain

Terrain> Garden
Bed> Polyline Garden
Bed
Draw a polyline garden bed. See Garden Bed

Tools on page 592.
Terrain> Garden
Bed> Round Garden
Bed
Draw a round garden bed. See Garden Bed

Tools on page 592.
Terrain> Garden
Bed> Kidney Shaped
Garden Bed
Draw a kidney shaped garden bed. See

Garden Bed Tools on page 592.
Terrain> Water
Features> Round
Pond
Draw a round pond. See Water Feature

Tools on page 592.
Terrain> Water
Features> Kidney
Shaped Pond
Draw a kidney shaped pond. See Water

Terrain> Water
Features> Stream
Draw a stream. See Water Feature Tools on

page 592.
Terrain> Stepping
Stones> Polyline
Stepping Stone
Draw a polyline stepping stone. See Stepping

Stone Tools on page 593.
Terrain> Stepping
Stones> Round
Stepping Stone
Draw a round stepping stone. See Stepping

Stone Tools on page 593.
Terrain> Walls and

Curbs> Straight
Terrain Wall
Draw a straight terrain wall. See Terrain Wall

and Curb Tools on page 593.
Terrain> Walls and

Curbs> Spline
Terrain Wall
Draw a curved terrain wall. See Terrain Wall

and Curb Tools on page 593.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Terrain> Walls and

Curbs> Straight
Retaining Wall
Draw a straight retaining wall. See Retaining

Walls on page 593.
Terrain> Walls and

Curbs> Curved
Retaining Wall
Draw a curved retaining wall. See Retaining

Walls on page 593.
Terrain> Walls and

Curbs> Straight
Terrain Curb
Draw a straight curb. See Terrain Wall and

Curb Tools on page 593.
Terrain> Walls and

Curbs> Spline
Terrain Curb
Draw a curved curb. See Terrain Wall and

Curb Tools on page 593.
Terrain> Roads and

Sidewalks> Straight
Road
Draw a road. See Straight Road on page

630.
Terrain> Roads and

Sidewalks> Spline
Road
Draw a road with smooth curves. See Spline

Road on page 631
Terrain> Roads and

Sidewalks>Polyline
Road
Draw a road polyline. See Road Polyline on

page 631.
Terrain> Roads and

Sidewalks> Median
Draw a road median. See Median on page

631.
Terrain> Roads and

Siodewalks>
Driveway
Draw a driveway. See Driveway on page

631.
Terrain> Roads and

Sidewalks> Cul-desac
Draw a cul-de-sac. See Cul-de-sac on page

632.
Terrain> Roads and

Sidewalks> Road
Marking
Draw road markings. See Road Marking on

page 632.
Terrain> Roads and

Sidewalks> Road
Stripe
Draw a road stripe. See Road Stripe on page

632.
45
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Terrain> Roads and

Sidewalks> Straight
Sidewalk
Draw a straight sidewalk. See Straight

Sidewalk on page 632
Terrain> Roads and

Sidewalks> Spline
Sidewalk
Draw a curved sidewalk. See Straight

Sidewalk on page 632
Terrain> Roads and

Sidewalks> Polyline
Sidewalk
Draw a sidewalk polyline. See Polyline

Sidewalk on page 633.
Terrain> Plant> Plant

Chooser...
Search for plants using the Plant Chooser

dialog. See Plant Chooser Dialog on page
608.
Terrain> Plant>
Create Plant Image...
Create a new plan image using the Plant

Image Specification dialog. See Plant
Image Specification Dialog on page 602.
Terrain> Plant>
Grow all Plants...
Open the Grow Plants dialog. See Plant

Tools on page 594.
Terrain> Plant>
Show Hardiness
Zones
Display a collection of plant hardiness zone

maps. See Hardiness Zones on page 595.
Terrain> Sprinkler>
Sprinkler Head
Insert a sprinkler head from the Sprinklers

library. See Sprinkler Tools on page 594.
Terrain> Sprinkler>
Sprinkler Line
Draw a sprinkler line. See Sprinkler Tools

on page 594.
Terrain> Sprinkler>
Sprinkler Spline
Draw a sprinkler spline. See Sprinkler Tools

on page 594.
Library Menu
Menu
Command
46
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Ctrl + L
Open the Library Browser. See The Library

Browser on page 670.
Library> Library
Search...
Open the Library Search dialog. See

Library Search Dialog on page 692.
Library> Refresh
Library Browser
Refresh the Library Browser to display newly

added library items. See Refresh Library
Library> New>
Library
N/A
Create a new library in the selected category.

See Adding to the Library on page 674.
Library> New>
Folder
N/A
Available when an unlocked library or folder

is selected in the Library Browser. Creates a
new library folder. See The Library Browser
on page 670.
Library> New>
Material
Library> New>
Image
Available when an unlocked Materials library

is selected. Opens the Define Material
dialog, allowing you to add a new material.
See Define Material Dialog on page 712.
N/A
Available when an unlocked Images library is

selected. Add a new image to the library. See
Creating Images on page 894.
Library> New> Plant N/A

Image
Opens the Image Specification dialog,

allowing you to create a new image that can
be added to the library. The Library Browser
must be open and an unlocked folder selected.
See Adding to the Library on page 674.
Library> Copy
Library List
N/A
Copy the list of items in an unlocked library

folder to the Windows clipboard. From there it
can be pasted into another program. See
Copy Library List on page 677.
Library> Delete
Object
N/A
Delete
Delete a library, folder or file that you have

created. See Deleting Libraries on page 677.
Library> Rename
Object
N/A
F2
Rename an unlocked library, folder or file. See

Renaming Libraries on page 677.
Library> Expand All N/A
Expand all folders located in a selected library

subcategory. See Expand/Collapse All on
page 678.
47
Menus &
Tools
Library> Library
Browser...
Library> Collapse All N/A
Collapse all folders located in a selected

library subcategory. See Expand/Collapse
All on page 678.
Library>
Components
Open the Components dialog for a selected

object. See Components on page 678
Library> Open...
Open the specification dialog for the selected

material, image or symbol in the library. See
Library Object Specification Dialog on page
699.
Library> Search
Attributes...
N/A
Open the Search Attributes dialog for the

selected library item. See Search Attributes
on page 694.
Library> Edit Light

Data...
N/A
Open the Light Specification dialog for

the selected unlocked light. See Light
Library> Place
Molding Profile
N/A
Place a molding profile from the library into

the plan so you can edit it. You can add it to
the library again after editing. See Place
Molding Profile on page 540.
3D Menu
The 3D menu controls most information
related to the 3D views.
Menu
Command
3D> Create Vector
View> Vector Full
Camera
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
G
48
Create a camera view of all floors. See

Vector View Tools on page 734.
Create a camera view of the current floor only.
See Camera Views on page 734.
3D> Create Vector

View> Vector Floor
Camera
3D> Create Vector
View> Vector Full
Overview
Effect
Create an overview of an entire model,

including ceilings and roofs. See Creating
Overviews on page 741.
Shift + G
3D> Create Vector

View> Vector
Framing Overview
Create an overview of the current floor,

without ceilings or roofs. See Creating
Create an overview of an entire model
showing only framing. Should only be used
after framing has been built. See Creating
3D> Create Vector

View> Cross Section/
Elevation
Shift + H
3D> Create Vector

View> Backclipped
Cross Section
Shift + F12 Create a cross section view of objects between

the start and end points of the cross section
line only. See Cross Section/Elevation
Views on page 735.
3D> Create Vector

View> Wall Elevation
3D> Create Render
View> Render Full
Camera
Create a single floor elevation view of an

interior or exterior wall. See Cross Section/
Elevation Views on page 735.
Shift + J
Create a render view from the floor plan view.

See Render View Tools on page 764.
Create a render view of the current floor only.
3D> Create Render

View> Render Floor
Camera
3D> Create Render
View> Render Full
Overview
Create a cross section view of an entire model

when used inside the model, or an exterior
elevation view of the entire model when used
outside the model. See Creating Cross
Section/Elevation Views on page 749.
Shift + K
Create a rendering of an entire model,

including ceilings and roofs. See Render
View Tools on page 764.
3D> Create Render

View> Render Floor
Overview
Create a rendering of the curent floor, without

ceilings or roofs. See Render View Tools on
page 764.
3D> Create Render

View> Render
Framing Overview
Create a rendering of an entire model showing

only framing. Build framing before using this
view. See Render View Tools on page 764.
3D> Create Render

View> Glass House
Camera
Create a glass house render view. See Glass

House View on page 767.
49
Menus &
Tools
3D> Create Vector

View> Vector Floor
Overview
50
3D> Create Render

View> Render
Current Vector View
Create a render view based on the current

vector view using the same camera settings.
3D> Raytrace
Current Render
View...
Create a raytrace view of the current render

view. See Raytracing on page 787.
3D> Save Active

Camera
Saves the curent camera view. See Saving 3D

Views on page 747.
3D> Edit Active

Camera
Opens the current view for specification. See

Camera Specification Dialog on page 753.
3D> Move Camera

With Mouse> MouseOrbit Camera
Alt + O
Allows you to rotate the camera around the

current camera focal point. See Move
Camera with Mouse Tools on page 738.
3D> Move Camera

With Mouse> MousePan Camera
Alt + P
Allows you to move the camera up, down, left

and right. See Move Camera with Mouse
Tools on page 738.
3D> Move Camera

With Mouse> MouseDolly Camera
Alt + D
Allows you to move the camera forward,

backward, left and right. See Move Camera
with Mouse Tools on page 738.
3D> Move Camera

With Mouse> MouseTilt Camera
Alt + T
Allows you to tilt the camera in any direction

while staying in the same location. See Move
Camera with Mouse Tools on page 738.
3D> Move Camera

With Mouse> 3D
Center Camera on
Point
Allows you to focus the camera at a particular

point in the scene. See Move Camera with
Mouse Tools on page 738.
3D> Move Camera

N/A
With Arrow Keys>
Arrow-Orbit Camera
Allows you to rotate the camera using the

arrow keys on your keyboard. See Move
Camera Tools on page 739.
3D> Move Camera

With Arrow Keys>
Arrow-Pan Camera
N/A
Allows you to pan the camera up, down, left

and right using the arrow keys on your
keyboard. See Move Camera Tools on page
739.
3D> Move Camera

N/A
With Arrow Keys>
Arrow-Dolly Camera
Allows you to move the camera forward,

backward, left and right using the arrow keys
on your keyboard. See Move Camera Tools
on page 739.
N/A
Allows you to tilt the camera while staying in

the same location using the arrow keys on
your keyboard. See Tilt Camera Tools on
page 739.
3D> Move Camera>

Move Camera
Forward
Move the camera one step forward while

maintaining the same line of sight.
3D> Move Camera>

Move Camera
Backward
Move the camera one step backward while

3D> Move Camera>

Move Camera Left
Move the camera one step to the left while

3D> Move Camera>

Move Camera Right
Move the camera one step to the right while

3D> Move Camera>

Move Camera Up
Raise the camera vertically in space while

3D> Move Camera>

Move Camera Down
Lower the camera vertically in space while

3D> Orbit Camera>

Move Camera In
Move the position of the camera closer to the

focal point along the line of sight.
3D> Orbit Camera>

Move Camera Out
Move the position of the camera away from

the focal point along the line of sight.
3D> Orbit Camera>

Orbit Camera
Upward
Rotate the camera up around its focal point.
3D> Orbit Camera>

Orbit Camera
Downward
Rotate camera down around its focal point.
3D> Orbit Camera>

Orbit Camera Left
Rotate the camera to the left around its focal

point.
3D> Orbit Camera>

Orbit Camera Right
Rotate the camera to the right around its focal

point.
51
Menus &
Tools
3D> Move Camera

With Arrow Keys>
Arrow-Tilt Camera
52
3D> Tilt Camera>

Tilt Camera Upward
Tilt the camera upward while keeping it in the

same location.
3D> Tilt Camera>

Tilt Camera
Downward
Tilt the camera downward while keeping it in

the same location.
3D> Tilt Camera>

Tilt Camera Left
Turn the camera toward the left while staying

in the same location.
3D> Tilt Camera>

Tilt Camera Right
Turn the camera toward the right while

staying in the same location.
3D> Overview
Direction Tools> View
Angle...
Adjust the view direction in an overview in

the View Angle dialog. See Creating
3D> Overview
Direction Tools>
Front View
Click for front view.
3D> Overview
Direction Tools> Back
View
Click for back view.
3D> Overview
Direction Tools> Top
View
Click for top view.
3D> Overview
Direction Tools>
Bottom View
Click for bottom view.
3D> Overview
Direction Tools> Left
Side View
Click for left side view.
3D> Overview
Direction Tools>
Right Side View
Click for right side view.
3D> Overview
Direction Tools>
Restore Original
View
Click to restore the original view position.
3D> Walkthroughs>
Play Walkthrough...
Play back a previously recorded walkthrough

movie. See Walkthroughs on page 904.
3D> Walkthroughs>
Record Walkthrough
Record a walkthrough movie. See

Walkthroughs on page 904.
3D> Walkthroughs>
Stop Recording
Stop recording a walkthrough movie. See

3D> Walkthroughs>
Pause Recording
Pause recording of a walkthrough movie. See

3D> Walkthroughs>
Save Frame
Save a single frame to the currently paused

walkthrough file. See Walkthroughs on
page 904.
3D> Materials> Plan

Materials...
Shift + C
Open the Plan Materials dialog. See

Managing Plan Materials on page 706.
3D> Materials>
Create Material...
Open the Define Material dialog to create a

custom material. See Define Material
Dialog on page 712.
N/A
3D> Materials>
Convert Material
Definition (.dat) Files
Convert material.dat files created in previoous

versions of Chief Architect to library
materials. See Converting Material.dat files
on page 704.
3D> Materials>
Convert Textures to
Materials
Convert textures to materials. See

Converting Textures to Materials on page
704.
3D> Materials>
Create Plan Materials
Library
Create a library of materials in the Library

Browser based on the materials being used in
the current plan. See Converting Material
Template Plans on page 704.
3D> Materials>
Adjust Material
Definition
Change a material definition by clicking on a

surface. See Adjust Material Definition on
page 711.
3D> Materials>
Material Painter>
Material Painter
Allows you to paint a material onto objects.

See Material Painter on page 708.
3D> Material
Painter> Material
Painter Component
Mode
Allows you to paint a material onto all objects

of the same material on the same layer. See
Material Painter on page 708.
53
Menus &
Tools
54
3D> Materials>
Material Painter>
Material Painter
Object Mode
Allows you to paint a material onto a single

object. See Material Painter on page 708.
3D> Materials>
Material Painter>
Material Painter
Room Mode

of the same material in a room. See Material
Painter on page 708.
3D> Materials>
Material Painter>
Material Painter
Floor Mode

of the same material on a floor. See Material
3D> Materials>
Material Painter>
Material Painter Plan
Mode

of the same material in a plan. See Material
Painter on page 708
3D> Materials>
Material
Eyedropper...
Load the materials applied to the surfaces of

other objects. See Material Eyedropper on
page 709.
3D> Lighting> Add

Lights
Click in floor plan view to place point light

source. Click and drag to create a parallel
light. See Added Lights on page 774.
3D> Lighting> Adjust

Lights...
Adjust the render properties of the lights

within the plan. See Adjusting Lights on
page 778.
3D> Lighting> Toggle

Sunlight
Turn on or off the light source that represents

the sun to simulate day vs. night exterior
views. See Sun Angles on page 775.
3D> Render View

Options> Final View
Redraw a render view with the Final View settings in the Preferences dialog. See
Rendering Tools on page 765.
3D> Render View

Options> Final View
with Shadows
Redraw a render view with the Final View

with Shadows settings in the Preferences
dialog. See Rendering Tools on page 765.
3D> Render View

Options> Glass House
Mode
Turn the Glass House feature on or off. See

Glass House View on page 767.
3D> Render View

Options> Glass House
Options...
Adjust the Glass House options. See Glass

3D> Render View

Options> Cross
Section Slider
Open the Cross Section Slider dialog. See

Cross Section Slider Dialog on page 785.
3D> Toggle Low

Detail Mode
Toggle between low and high detail 3D view.

See Low Detail Display on page 746.
3D> Delete Surface
Click surfaces in a 3D view to delete them.

Click the button again to restore deleted
surfaces. See Delete 3D Surface on page
747.
3D> Remove 3D
Removes all 3D views associated with the

current plan. See Remove 3D on page 748.
3D> Rebuild 3D
Rebuilds the entire 3D model. See Rebuild

3D on page 748.
3D> 3D Settings...
Ctrl + 1
Opens the 3D Settings dialog, where you

can control how 3D views appear. See 3D
Settings Dialog on page 757.
CAD Menu
The CAD menu is used to access the CAD
tools. Most of these menu items are also
accessible from the CAD toolbar.
Menu
Command
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Description
CAD> Current CAD

Layer...
Opens the Select CAD Layer dialog and

allows you to change the current CAD layer.
See Select Layer Dialog on page 222.
CAD> Points> Place

Point
Click to place a temporary CAD Point. See

Point Tools on page 843.
55
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Description
CAD> Points> Input

Point...
Click to place a new point in an absolute

location or relative to the current point. See
Input Point on page 844.
CAD> Points> Point

Marker
Click to place a permanent point marker.

See Point Markers on page 844.
CAD> Points> Delete

Temporary Points
Delete all temporary CAD points at the

same time. See Temporary Points on page
845.
CAD> Lines> Draw

Line
Click and drag to create lines. See Line

Tools on page 846.
CAD> Lines> Input

Line...
Draw a line in an absolute location from the

origin or relative to the current point. See
Input Line on page 847.
CAD> Lines> Line

With Arrow
Draw a CAD line with an arrowhead. See

Line With Arrow on page 849.
CAD> Lines> Sun

Angle
Draw a Sun Angle to show shadow

information at specific places and times, and
to create a light source in render views. See
Sun Angles on page 775.
CAD> Lines> North

Pointer
Draw a North Pointer to define true North.

See North Pointer on page 849.
CAD> Arcs> Draw

Arc
Draw an arc by dragging along the desired

curve. See Arc Tools on page 856.
CAD> Arcs> Input

Arc...
Draw an arc in an absolute location from a

point of origin or relative to the current
point. See Input Arc on page 857.
CAD> Arcs> Arc

With Arrow
Draw an arc with an arrowhead. See Arc

with Arrow on page 858.
CAD> Circles> Circle
56
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Click and drag to draw a circle. See Circle

Tools on page 860.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Description
CAD> Circles> Circle

About Center
Click and drag from a center point to draw a

circle. See Draw Circle About Center on
page 861.
CAD> Circles> Oval
Draw an oval. See Ovals on page 861.
CAD> Circles>
Ellipse
Draw an ellipse. See Circle Tools on page

860.
CAD> Boxes &

Framing>
Rectangular Polyline
Shift + P
Draw a closed rectangular polyline. See

Rectangular Polyline on page 865.
CAD> Boxes &

Framing> Regular
Polygon
Click to draw a closed regular polygon. You

specify the radius or side length and the
number of sides. See Box Tools on page
865.
CAD> Boxes &

Framing> Box
Draw a resizable box. See Box on page

866.
CAD> Boxes &

Framing> Framing
Draw a framing member. This CAD item

displays in 3D views and in the Material
List. See Framing on page 866.
CAD> Boxes &

Framing> Wall
Bridging
Draw wall bridging or blocking in wall

details only. See Wall Bridging on page
866.
CAD> Boxes &

Framing> Cross Box
Draw resizable box containing a cross to

show a cross section of a framing member.
See Cross Box on page 866.
CAD> Boxes &

Framing> Insulation
Draw resizable insulation for detailing cross

section views. See Insulation on page 867.
CAD> Spline
Click this button and drag from end to end

to draw a smooth curve passing through the
points. See Splines on page 868.
CAD> Dimension>
Manual Dimension
Single click to draw a dimension line. Double-click to open the Dimension

Defaults dialog. See Manual
57
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
CAD> Dimension>
End to End
Dimension
Draw a dimension marking only the

beginning and end points. See End-to-End
CAD> Dimension>
Angular Dimension
Use this tool to find the angular dimension

between any two straight, non-parallel lines.
See Angular Dimensions on page 798.
CAD> Dimension>
Interior Dimension
Click to draw inside room dimensions. See

Interior Dimensions on page 798.
CAD> Dimension>
Point to Point
Dimension
Draw a dimension between any two points.

See Point to Point Dimensions on page
798.
CAD> Dimension>
Baseline Dimension
Draw baseline dimensions for each object

located along the line. See Baseline
CAD> Dimension>
Auto Exterior
Dimensions
Shift + A
CAD> Dimension>
Display Temporary
Dimensions
58
Description
Automatically generate exterior dimensions as

defined in Dimension Defaults dialog.
See Auto Exterior Dimensions on page
799.
Enable temporary dimensions when CAD
objects are selected. See Display
Temporary Dimensions on page 800.
CAD> Text> Text
Click on screen to add text. See Creating

Text on page 819.
CAD> Text> Text

Line with Arrow
Alt + A
Click and drag to draw a text line with an

arrow. See Text Arrows on page 819.
CAD> Text> Leader

Line
Alt + L
Click and drag a text line with an arrow,

then place a text object. See Leader Line
on page 819.
CAD> Text> Callout
Click on screen to add a callout. See

Callouts on page 821.
CAD> Text> Marker
Place a marker in floor plan view. See

Markers on page 823.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Description
CAD> Plan Footprint
Create a basic footprint of the current plan

in a CAD Detail window. See Plan
Footprint on page 876.
CAD> Autodetail
Click to automatically generate CAD

Details. See Auto-Detailing on page 751.
CAD> CAD Block

Management...
Insert a CAD block from the list of available

blocks in CAD Block Management dialog. See CAD Block Management on
page 871.
CAD> CAD Detail

Management...
Shift + V
Open the CAD Detail dialog to create new

detail or open an existing detail. See CAD
Details on page 874.
CAD> CAD Detail

From View
CAD> CAD to Walls...
Click to convert the current view to a CAD

detail. See CAD Detail From View on
page 751.
Ctrl + F3
Convert CAD lines into walls. See CAD to

Walls on page 249.
Tools Menu
The Tools menu offers various tools for
dimensions, text, manipulating reference
floors, and modifying toolbars.
Menu
Command
Tools> Display
Settings> Display
Options...
Tools> Display
Settings> Layer Set
Management
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Open the Layer Display Options dialog to
control the display of items in 2D and 3D
views as well as the materials list. See Layer
Display Options Dialog on page 218.
Open the Layer Set Management dialog to
define, copy, create, import, or export, and set
the default layer set. See Layer Set
Management on page 217.
59
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Tools> Display
Settings> Layer
Painter...
Allows you to move objects to a layer by

clicking on them in any view. See Layer
Tools> Display
Settings>Refresh
Display
F5
Redraw the current window to clean up extra

lines, show missing items, and correct
random effects caused by changes to a model.
If something displays incorrectly or
incompletely, refreshing the display often
corrects the problem.
Tools> Display
Settings> Color On/
Off
F8
Toggle the color on or off. See Color On/

Off on page 743.
Tools> Display
Settings> Display
Reference Grid
Shift + F9
Toggles the reference grid on and off. See

Plan Defaults on page 180.
Tools> Display
Settings> Show Arc
Centers and Ends
Toggles the display of arc centers and ends.

See Show Arc Centers on page 102.
Tools> Display
Settings> Show Line
Weights
Turn on display of line weights for accurate

on-screen representation of line weights and
styles. See Show Line Weights on page
951.
Tools> Display
Settings> Show Sheet
Tools> Reference
Floors> Change
Floor/Reference...
60
Effect
Alt + F3
N/A
Toggles the print sheet on and off. See Show

Sheet on page 951.
Ctrl + Shift Define the working floor and the reference

+G
plan. See Reference Floor on page 368.
Tools> Reference
Floors> Up One Floor
Shift + N
Moves the floor plan view one floor up. See

Floor Up/ Floor Down on page 368.
Tools> Reference
Floors> Down One
Floor
Shift + M
Moves the floor plan view one floor down.

See Floor Up/ Floor Down on page 368.
Tools> Reference
Floors> Reference
Display
F9
Superimpose the plan of another floor over

the current floor. See Reference Display on
page 369.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Tools> Reference
Floors> Reference
Display Options...
Opens the Layer Display Options dialog

to the Reference Display layer set. See
Layers on page 215.
Tools> Reference
Floors> Swap Floor/
Reference
Switch so that the reference plan becomes the

working plan, and the working plan becomes
the reference plan. See Swap Floor/
Reference on page 369.
Tools> Checks> Plan

Check
Checks for some very basic code compliance

issues in the floor plan. Best used when your
floor plan is near completion. See Plan
Check on page 885.
Tools> Checks> Spell

Check
Opens the Check Spelling dialog, allowing

you to check the spelling of the selected text.
See Spell Check on page 828.
Tools> Checks> View

IRC Checklist
Display the IRC Checklist using Acrobat

Reader. See IRC Checklist on page 886.
Tools> Toolbars>
N/A
Customize Toolbars...
Create new toolbars or modify existing ones.

See Toolbar Customization Dialog on page
18.
Tools> Toolbars>
Hide Toolbars
N/A
Toggle the toolbars on or off. See Toolbar

Tools> Layout >

Change Layout
Page...
N/A
Open the Go To Layout Page dialog. See

Displaying Layout Views on page 981.
Tools> Layout> Page

Up
Shift + N
Move the current page in the layout file up

one page. See The Layout Tools on page
970.
Tools> Layout > Page

Down
Shift + M
Move the current page in the layout file down

one page. See The Layout Tools on page
970.
Tools> Layout>
Insert Page
Insert a page before the current layout page as

long as there is nothing on page 1000. See
The Layout Tools on page 970.
61
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Effect
Tools> Layout>
Delete Page
Delete the current layout page as long as there

is nothing on that page. See The Layout
Tools on page 970.
Tools> Layout> Edit

Layout
Select and modify any line in any 3D view

that has been sent to layout other than CAD
objects. See Editing Layout Lines on page
983.
Tools> Layout>
Layout Files...
62
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
N/A
View files present and files not found in the

current layout file. See Layout Files Dialog
on page 987.
Tools> Layout>
Rescale Layout
View...
Rescale a selected floor plan view, CAD

detail, wall elevation, or cross section/
elevation view in layout. See Displaying
Layout Views on page 981.
Tools> Layout>
Relink File...
Reestablish or change the file that a layout

view is linked to. See Relinking Layout
Views on page 987.
Tools> Symbol>
Create Symbol...
Opens the Create Symbol Wizard. See

Opening the Create Symbol Wizard on
page 927.
Tools> Symbol> Get

Last Symbol...
Place the most recently created symbol back

into the plan. See Closing the Create Symbol
Wizard on page 944.
Tools> Symbol> Add

to Library...
Add objects and materials to the Library. See

Adding to the Library on page 674.
Tools> House
Wizard> Start House
Wizard...
Open the House Wizard that leads you

through the steps to quickly lay out a floor
plan. See House Wizard on page 884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Build House
Build a 3D model of a house based on the

organization of Room Boxes that you
defined. Must be done for each floor of the
building. See House Wizard on page 884.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Tools> House
Wizard> Hide Room
Boxes
Turn the display of Room Boxes on and off .

Room Boxes normally display when they are
created and hidden after using the Build
House tool. See House Wizard on page
884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Bathroom
Place a bathroom. See House Wizard on

page 884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Bedroom
Place a bedroom. See House Wizard on

page 884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Closet
Place a closet. See House Wizard on page

884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Deck
Place a deck. See House Wizard on page

884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Dining
Room
Place a dining room. See House Wizard on

page 884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Entry
Place an entry. See House Wizard on page

884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Family
Room
Place a family room. See House Wizard on

page 884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Garage
Place a garage. See House Wizard on page

884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Hallway
Place a hallway. See House Wizard on page

884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Kitchen
Place a kitchen. See House Wizard on page

884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Laundry
Room
Place a laundry room. See House Wizard

on page 884.
63
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
64
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Tools> House
Wizard> Living
Room
Place a living room. See House Wizard on

page 884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Master
Bedroom
Place a master bedroom. See House Wizard

on page 884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Office
Place an office. See House Wizard on page

884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Porch
Place a porch. See House Wizard on page

884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Stair
Place a stairway. See House Wizard on

page 884.
Tools> House
Wizard> Stairwell
Place a stairwell. See House Wizard on

page 884.
Tools> Plans
Database> Create
Plan Database...
Create a plan database for plans on your

system. See Find Plan Wizard on page 169.
Tools> Plans
Database> Edit Plan
Database...
Edit an existing plan database file. See Find

Plan Wizard on page 169.
Tools> Time
Tracker> Start Time
Logging
Begin logging time for the current plan. See

Time Tracker on page 881.
Tools> Time
Tracker> Stop Time
Logging
Stop logging time for the current plan. See

Time Tracker on page 881.
Tools> Time
Tracker> View Time
Log...
Opens the Time Log dialog. See Time Log

Dialog on page 882.
Tools> Schedules>
Door...
Create a door schedule for one or all floors.

See Creating Schedules on page 992.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Tools> Schedules>
Window...
Create a window schedule for one or all the

floors. See Creating Schedules on page
992.
Tools> Schedules>
Cabinet...
Create a cabinet schedule for one or all the

992.
Tools> Schedules>
Fixture...
Create a fixture schedule for one or all the

992.
Tools> Schedules>
Furniture...
Create a furniture schedule for one or all the

992.
Tools> Schedules>
Electrical...
Create an electrical schedule for one or all the

992.
Tools> Materials
List> Calculate From
All Floors
Generate a materials list for all floors. See

Calculate From All Floors on page 1005.
Tools> Materials
Area
Draw a rectangle around an area to generate a

materials list for that area. See Calculate
From Area on page 1006.
Tools> Materials
Room
Select a room, then this menu option to

generate a materials list for the selected room.
See Calculate From Room on page 1006.
Tools> Materials
List> Materials
Polyline
Draw a rectangular polyline defining an area

to produce a materials list from. See
Materials Polyline on page 1007.
Tools> Materials
List> Master List
Ctrl + M
View the master material list. Modify the

master list by making changes to a material
list. See The Master List on page 1007.
Tools> Materials
List> Materials List
Management...
Open the Materials Lists dialog to edit,

delete, or rename saved materials lists. See
Managing Materials Lists on page 1015.
Tools> Project
Browser
Opens the Project Browser. See Project

65
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Tools > Project

Information>
Designer Information
Opens a box where you can enter contact

information for the designer of the plan. See
Project Information on page 166.
Tools> Project
Information> Client
Information
Opens a box where you can enter contact

information on the client this plan was drawn
for. See Project Information on page 166.
Tools> Screen
Capture> Screen
Capture Setup
Opens a dialog where you designate the kind

of screen capture you intent to do, whether
backdrop, image, material, or picture. See
Creating Screen Captures on page 900.
Tools> Screen
Capture> Capture
Screen
Activates the Screen Capture tool. See

Creating Screen Captures on page 900.
Tools> Color Chooser
Accesses the Color Chooser dialog where

you can select a color and create a material
for the library. See Color Chooser Dialog
on page 722.
Tools> Rotate View...
Open the Rotate Plan View dialog to

rotate the current floor plan view. See Rotate
View on page 135.
Tools> Reverse Plan
Reverse your entire plan as though reflected

about a vertical line. See Reverse Plan on
page 136.
Window Menu
The Window menu determines what window
is active and defines how it appears. Some of
Menu
Command
Window> Zoom
66
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Shift + Z
these menu items are common to other

Windows programs.
Effect
Zoom in on a defined area. See Zoom Tools
on page 723.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Window> Zoom In
+ (Num
Lock on)
Zoom in to center of screen by 2x. See Zoom

Tools on page 723. Use the numeric keypad
for the keyboard shortcut.
Window> Zoom Out
- (Num
Lock on)
Move back to include twice as much of your

plan or view. See Zoom Tools on page 723.
Use the numeric keypad for the keyboard
shortcut
Window> Undo
Zoom
Undo the previous zoom. See Undo Zoom

on page 724.
Window> Fill
Window Building
Only
Show the entire drawing in the current

window, including the drawing sheet. See
Fill Window Building Only on page 724.
Window> Fill
Window
F6
Window> Pan
Window
Window> Swap
Views
Pan the current window without changing the

zoom factor. See Panning the Display on
page 725.
F7
Window> Aerial View
Window> Cascade
Toggle between the current view and the view

that was current before it. See Swapping
Views on page 729.
Create an Aerial View of the entire plan in the
upper left corner. Zooming within this
window adjusts the view of the main plan for
editing. See Aerial View on page 729.
Shift + F5
Window> Tile
Horizontally
Window> Tile
Vertically
Show the entire plan in the current window,

including the terrain perimeter and drawing
sheet. See Fill Window on page 724.
A standard Windows option that displays all

open views in a row, each slightly offset from
the others. See Cascade on page 726.
Display views tiled one above the other. See
Tiling Views on page 727.
Shift + F6
Display views tiled left to right. See Tiling

Views on page 727.
67
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Window> Arrange
Icons
A standard Windows option that lines up the

icons of minimized views in a row. See
Arrange Icons on page 728.
Window> Next
Window
Cycles through the open views in the order

that they appear on the bottom of the
Windows menu. See Window Menu Tools
on page 725.
Window> Previous
Window
Cycles backwards through the open views in

the order that they appear on the bottom of the
Windows menu. See Window Menu Tools
on page 725.
Window> Show
Layout
Select this to switch to a layout file that is

currently open. See The Layout Tools on
page 970.
Names of Open Views N/A
Select an view from this list. The view with a

check next to it is the active view.
Help Menu
The Help menu is an extremely useful but
often underused resource. You can get
assistance for most topics from the Online
Menu
Command
Help> Contents and
Index
68
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Help without resorting to other resources.

The Help menu also provides important
customer information.
Effect
Open the Online Help index and show an
outline of all the help information. See
Getting Help on page 15.
MEP Toolbar Configuration Buttons
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Help> Current Mode N/A
Help> View Users

Guide
F1
N/A
Effect
Display information specific to the current
mode or tool. The F1 function key accesses
this same information, but is more flexible
since it can access information specific to any
toolbar button or menu item the pointer is held
above. Most dialogs also have a Help button
that accesses information related to their functions. See Getting Help on page 15.
Open the Users Guide PDF using Acrobat
Reader. See Getting Help on page 15.
Help> View
Reference Manual...
Open the Reference Manual PDF using

Acrobat Reader. See Getting Help on page
15.
Help> Visit Chief

Architect Web Site...
Open the Chief Architect Web page using

your default Web browser. See Getting Help
on page 15.
Help> Download
Program Updates...
N/A
Open to the Program Updates section of the

Chief Architect Web site. See Program
Updates on page 15.
Help> Download
Bonus Content...
N/A
Download bonus library items from the Chief

Architect website. See Bonus Libraries on
page 670.
Help> ChiefTalk...
Launch your default web browser to

www.chieftalk.com.
Help>Hardware Lock N/A

Troubleshooter...
Opens the hardware lock troubleshooter.
Help> About Chief

Architect...
Open the About dialog to view the registered

owners name, the serial number, and the
programs version number and release date.
Contact information is shown on the More
Info tab.
N/A
MEP Toolbar Configuration Buttons

Video: Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing
69
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
The MEP Toolbar Configuration

displays a variety of toolbar buttons
that access line styles and symbols related to
Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing. See
Line Styles on page 688 and Interior
Fixtures on page 685.
MEP Configuration Buttons

Place Gas - Draw a CAD line using
the Gas line style.
Place Heating/AC Duct - Draw a
CAD line using the H/AC line style.
Place Vent Duct - Draw a CAD line
using Vent line style.
Place 4x8 - Click to place 1 4x8
floor vent.
Place 22 w/ Gas Upflow - Click to
place a 22 gas furnace with upflow.
Place Cold Water Supply - Draw a
CAD line using the C/W line style.
Place Hot Water Supply - Draw a
CAD line using the H/W line style.
Place Drain Pipe - Draw a CAD

line using the D/P line style.
Place Waste Water - Draw a CAD
line using the W/W line style.
Place Large Gas WH - Click to
place a gas water heater.
Place Elongated Toilet - Click to
place an elongated toilet.
Place Single 24 - Click to place a
single 24 kitchen sink.
Place Tub-Shower (bar) - Click to
place a 60 tub-shower unit .
Place Data - Draw a CAD line using
the DATA line style.
Place Low Voltage - Draw a CAD
line using the L/V line style.
Place Telephone - Draw a CAD line
using the Telephone line style.
Place TV - Draw a CAD line using
the TV line style.
Toggle Buttons
Toggle buttons access a variety of functions.
Some control how your plan appears on
screen, and others are shortcuts to preference
settings that control the behavior of various
objects.
By default, the toggle toolbars display on the
right vertical frame of Chief Architects main
window.
70
Toggle Buttons
Color On/Off - Toggle the display
of color. See Color On/Off on
page 743.
Show Line Weights - Turn on the
display of true line weights as they
appear when printed. See Show
Line Weights on page 951.
Print Preview - Display the print

preview. All line weights and text
objects appear on screen as they do
when printed. See Print Preview
on page 951.
Display Temporary Dimensions Show temporary dimensions when
objects are selected. See Display
Temporary Dimensions on page
800.
Edit Object Parts - Toggle the
ability to edit individual polyline
edges. See Edit Object Parts on
page 81.
Show Arc Centers and Ends Toggle the display of arc centers.
See Show Arc Centers on page
102.
Display Reference Grid - Turn on

the reference grid, as specified in the
Plan Defaults/Layout Defaults
dialog. See Plan Defaults on page
180.
Grid Snaps - Enable snapping to
the grid as specified in the Plan
Defaults/Layout Defaults dialogs.
See Plan Defaults on page 180.
Object Snaps - Enable snapping to
objects as specified in the
Preferences dialog. See Snap
Angle Snaps - Enable snapping to
allowed angles as specified in the
Plan Defaults/Layout Defaults
dialogs. See Plan Defaults on
page 180.

Video: Editing - Sticky Mode and Other
Edit Sub Modes
Edit toolbar buttons only display when one
or more objects are selected. Various edit
buttons are available, depending on the
object(s) currently selected.
If Contextual Menus are enabled (see
Appearance Panel on page 184), rightclick an object to open a contextual menu
that lists the same options as the edit toolbar.
Accurate Move - Select an object,

then click this button to move it with
more accuracy. See Accurate
Move on page 125.
Activate Camera - Opens an
inactive camera view window. See
Activating Views on page 748.
Add to Library - Adds a symbol,
CAD block, or molding profile to
the Library. See Adding to the
Library on page 674.
71
Menus &
Tools
Show Sheet - Toggle the display of

the print sheet, as specified in the
Page Setup dialog. See Show
Sheet on page 951.
Advanced Splines - Turns on

advanced splines. See Advanced
Splines on page 117.
Allowed Angles - Opens the Place
at Allowed Angles dialog. See
Place at Allowed Angles Dialog
on page 155.
Auto Stairwell - Select a staircase
and click this button to create a
stairwell. See Creating a Stairwell
Automatically on page 456.
Automatically Generate
Sidewalks - Allows you to
automatically generate sidewalks
along a selected road object. See
Using the Edit Buttons on page
634.
Break Line - Single-click, or press
3, then click a selected item to add a
joint-type break. Double-click and
then click selected item to
completely sever the line. See
Break Line on page 130.
Change Line/Arc - Turns the line

into an arc or the arc into a line. See
Change Line/Arc on page 131.
Change Opening/Hinge Side Change the side of a selected door
that the hinges are on. See
Changing Door Swings on page
312.
Change Swing Side - Change the
direction that a selected door
swings. See Changing Door
Swings on page 312.
Components - Open an objects
Components dialog. See
Components Dialog on page
1014.
Build Advanced Deck Framing Build framing and planking for the
selected deck. See Decks on page
288.
Connect Walls - Select a wall then

click this button to form an
intersection with a nearby wall. See
Connect Walls on page 241.
Calculate From Room - Generate a

materials list of the contents of the
selected room. See Calculate From
Room on page 1006.
Convert Spline to Polyline Change the spline into a polyline

made up of straight lines. See
Convert Spline to Polyline on
page 152.
Calculate Materials List - Generate

a materials list of the contents of the
selected Materials Polyline. See
Materials Polyline on page 1007.
Center Object - Center an object in
a wall. See Centering Doors and
72
Chamfer Two Lines - Select an

edge, click this button, and select a
different edge to create a straight
bevel of specified size between
them. Double-click to set the
chamfer size. See Reshaping
Convert to Polyline Road/

Sidewalk - Converts a selected road
or sidewalk into a road polyline or a
sidewalk polyline. See Using the
Edit Buttons on page 634.
Convert to Solid - Convert the

selected polyline solid to a
Primitive. See Convert to Solid on
page 151.
Explode CAD Block - Click to

explode a selected block into its
individual parts. See CAD Blocks
on page 870.
Convert to Spline - Convert a

polyline into a spline. See Convert
Spline to Polyline on page 152.
Explode Mulled Unit - Click to

explode a selected mulled unit into
its individual parts. See Manually
Mulled Units on page 332.
Copy/Paste - Click or press Ctrl +

Alt + C to make a single copy of the
selected object(s) and enable Paste
mode. See Copying and Pasting
Delete - Click to delete the selected
object(s). See Deleting Objects on
page 141.
Delete Gable Over Opening Select a window or door with a
gable above it and click this button
to delete the gable when roofs are
built. See Gable Over Door/
Window on page 415.
Expand Room Polyline - Select a
room and click this button to enlarge
the current room selection to include
all rooms that are continuous and
only separated by invisible walls or
railings. See Room Polylines on
page 295.
Explode Architectural Block Click to explode the selected
architectural block into its individual
parts. See Exploding Architectural
Blocks on page 666.
Explode Dormer - Explode a

selected dormer into its component
parts. See Exploding Dormers on
page 408.
Extend Objects - Select boundary
edge(s), click this button, then select
CAD objects on end to extend. This
may be used with the Select/Make
Fence
tool as well. See Extend
Fence Select - Click this button to
specify the selected object(s) as a
fence. See Using a Fence on page
94.
Fillet Two Lines - Select an edge,
click this button, and select a
different edge to create a rounded
fillet of specified size between them.
Double-click to set the fillet radius.
See Reshaping Objects on page
129.
Flare/Curve Stair - Flare the sides
of the selected staircase. See Flared
Stairs and Curved Treads on page
448.
Gable Over Door/Window - Place
a gable over a door or window. See
Placing a Gable Over a Window
on page 331.
73
Menus &
Tools
Convert Polyline - Convert a

selected polyline to a polyline solid.
See Convert Polyline on page 149.
Intersection - Create a new polyline

around the area in common between
two polylines. See Union,
Intersection, and Subtract on page
146.
Make CAD Block - Available when

one or more CAD objects is Shift +
selected. Click to link selected items
into a single unit, or block. See
CAD Blocks on page 870.
Join Roof Planes - Join two roof

planes. Also activated by pressing 2.
See Joining Roof Planes on page
403.
Make Mulled Unit - Available

when more than one door/window is
selected. Click to mull selected
windows/doors into a single unit.
See Manually Mulled Units on
page 332.
Load Muntins - Turn a CAD block

drawn over window or door glass
into a custom muntin design. See
Custom Muntins on page 338.
Load Values To Make Same Apply values assigned to a group of
objects to new objects. See Load to
Make Same Value on page 152.
Lock Center - Locks the center of
the selected arc. See Using Lock
Center on page 102.
Lock Control Handle Angle Locks or unlocks the control handles
for editing advanced splines. See
Lock Control Handle Angle on
page 118.
Main Edit Mode - Click to return to
the main edit toolbar from the
currently active secondary toolbar.
Make Arc Tangent - Make an arc
tangent to the attached lines/arcs.
See Using Make Arc Tangent on
page 128.
Make Architectural Block Available when one or more objects
is Shift + selected. Click to create a
single architectural block out of all
selected objects. See Creating
Architectural Blocks on page 664.
74
Make Parallel - Align a selected

line or polyline edge with another
object, such as a wall or line. See
Using Make Parallel/
Perpendicular on page 126.
Make Room Molding Polyline Opens the Make Room Molding
Polyline dialog. See Make Room
Molding Polyline Dialog on page
295
Make Room Polyline - Create a
standard polyline that matches the
shape of the selected room. See
Room Molding Polylines on page
295
Move to be Coplanar - Move a
selected roof plane to be coplanar
with the next selected roof plane.
See Move to be Coplanar on page
404.
Move to Framing Reference Position selected framing members
in relation to the framing reference.
See Framing Reference Markers
on page 486.
Move to Front of Group - Click to
move the selected item in front of
other CAD objects. See Move to
Front of Group on page 122.
Multiple Copy Interval - Click to

set interval for Multiple Copy tool.
See Multiple Copy on page 139.
Open Object - Open the selected
objects specification dialog. See
Specification Dialogs on page 8.
Open Symbol - Click to open the
Symbol Specification dialog for
the selected object(s). See Symbol
Open Wall Detail - Open a framing
detail for the selected wall. Framing
must be built. See Wall Framing
Paste Hold Position - Paste a copy
of the selection at the same
coordinates as the original but on
another floor. See Paste Hold
Position on page 139.
Point-to-Point Move - Move the
selection from start point to the end
point of the move. See Point to
Point Move on page 125.
Reflect About Object - Reflect
selected objects about another
object. See To use Reflect About
Object on page 135.
Remove Advanced Deck Framing
Click to turn a framed deck into a
solid deck. See Decks on page
288.
Remove Manufacturer Lock Remove manufacturer data

associated with the selected library
symbol. See Remove Manufacturer
Lock on page 698.
Replace From Library - Replace
the selected object with another
from the Library. See Replace
From Library on page 680.
Resize Picture - Resize a selected
bitmap. See Resizing an Image on
page 896.
Reverse Layers - Reverse the layers
of the selected wall. See Drawing
Walls on page 238.
Reverse Direction - Select a line,
arrow, or polyline, then click this
button to reverse the direction. See
Reverse Direction on page 136.
Same Wall Type - Temporarily
enable Same Wall Type edit handles.
See Same Wall Type Edit Handles
on page 243.
Select Fence - Click this button,
then click on a line or polyline to
specify it as a fence.
Select Next Object - When many
objects are located in a small area,
select one of them and click this edit
button until the desired object is
selected. See Select Next Object
on page 93.
Select Same Type - Open the Select
Similar Objects dialog. See Select
Same Type on page 152.
75
Menus &
Tools
Multiple Copy - Click this button,

then drag to create copies at
specified intervals. See Multiple
Copy on page 139.
Starter Tread - Round one of the

bottom two treads of a staircase.
Must select the staircase at one of
the two bottom treads. See Starter
Treads on page 451.
Sticky Mode - Available after some
edit buttons are clicked. Click to
keep the selected edit mode active
and make multiple edit operations.
Straighten Spline Segment Straighten a segment of an advanced
spline between two points. See
Straighten Spline Segment on
page 118.
Subtract - Subtract one polyline
from another to create a new
polyline. See Union, Intersection,
and Subtract on page 146.
Transform/Replicate Object Click to open the Transform/
Replicate Object dialog. See
Transform/Replicate Object
Dialog on page 144.
Trim Objects - Select cutting
edge(s), click this button, then select
CAD objects on end to eliminate.
This can be used with the Fence
Select
tool as well. See Trim
Union - Create a new polyline using
the entire area of overlapping
polylines. See Union, Intersection,
and Subtract on page 146.
Unload Muntins - Explodes
muntins into CAD lines and objects
for editing. See Custom Muntins
on page 338.
76
Other Buttons
Other Buttons
These buttons are not in the menus or the
default toolbars but can be added to toolbars.
See Adding Toolbar Buttons on page 18.
Adjust Image Properties - Open
the Adjust Image Properties
dialog. Available in Raytrace views.
See Adjust Image Properties on
page 790.
CAD Default Settings - Open the
CAD Defaults dialog. See CAD

Empty Space - Add an empty space
to your toolbar, which may be
helpful when customizing toolbars.
See Toolbar Customization Dialog
on page 18.
Floor Defaults - Open the Floor
Defaults dialog. See Floor
Layer Set Defaults - Open the

Layer Set Defaults dialog. See
Layer Set Defaults Dialog on page
225.
Render Current Vector View Create a render camera view from
the vector camera view. Available in
vector camera views. See Render
Current Vector View on page 765.
Startup Options - Open the
Startup Options dialog. See

Switch Default and CAD Toolbars
- Switch between the Default and
CAD toolbar configurations,
mimicking version 10 and prior
behavior. See Toolbar
Configurations on page 22.

General Wall Defaults - Opens the
General Wall Defaults dialog.
See General Wall Defaults Dialog

on page 274.
77
78
Chapter 3:
Introduction
Introductory Training Video: CAD
Tools
Video: Editing - Setting the Primary
Mouse Movement
Video: Editing - New Edit Handles
Video: Editing - Discontinued Edit
Commands
Video: Editing - 3D Editing
Video: CAD - Editing Tools
In Chief Architect, a variety of architectural
and CAD-based objects are used to create
complete 3D models and working drawings.
Although these objects are sometimes very

different from one another, the methods used
to move, rotate, resize and otherwise edit
them are similar throughout the program.
Edit handles allow objects to be resized,
relocated, or rotated using the mouse. Edit
toolbar buttons and the contextual menus
access edit tools relevant to the selected
object(s). Most objects have a specification
dialog that allows you to edit it in ways that
are specific to that type of object.
The editing characteristics common to most
objects are described in this chapter. Unique,
object-specific editing behaviors and the
specification dialogs are covered in their
respective chapters.
Chapter Contents
Architectural vs CAD Objects
79
Editing
Objects
Editing
Objects
Defaults and Preferences

Snap Behaviors
Object Snaps
Angle Snaps
Grid Snaps
Edit Behaviors
Creating Objects
Selecting Objects
Editing Line Based Objects
Editing Arc Based Objects
Editing Open Polyline Based Objects
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects
Editing Box-Based Objects
Editing Spline Based Objects
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses
Architectural and CAD Blocks
Displaying Objects
Moving Objects
Aligning Objects
Resizing Objects
Reshaping Objects
Rotating Objects
Reflecting Objects
Copying and Pasting Objects
Deleting Objects
Trim and Extend
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog
Union, Intersection, and Subtract
Converting Objects
Select Same / Load Same
Edit Area Tools
Architectural vs CAD Objects

There are two broad categories of objects in
Chief Architect: architectural objects and
CAD objects.
CAD objects such as lines, arcs, and circles
are 2D objects that can be created and edited
in floor plan view, cross section/elevation
views, CAD detail windows, and on layout
pages but do not display in 3D camera views
and overviews. See The CAD Drawing
Tools on page 842.
In contrast, architectural objects such as

walls, cabinets, doors, windows, and stairs
display in 2D and 3D views. Architectural
objects can be created and edited in 2D and
3D views but not in CAD detail windows or
on layout pages.
Some architectural objects, such as custom
countertops and slabs, have some behaviors
in common with CAD objects and are
referred to as CAD-based.

The ways that objects in the program behave
as they are created and edited are affected by
a number of default and preference settings.
See Defaults & Preferences on page 175.
It is a good idea to be familiar with these
options and how they affect drawing
and editing in the program.
80
Snap Settings
Select Edit> Snap Settings to access
the three categories of Snap Settings
that determine how objects snap to one
another and whether they snap to allowed
angles or to points on a grid, as well as object
bumping and pushing behaviors.
82.
Angle Snaps enable snapping at
Allowed Angles. See Angle Snaps
on page 84.
Grid Snaps enable snapping to the
Snap Grid. See Grid Snaps on page
distance moved by each edge is the same as

all other edges. See Concentric on page 88.
The Fillet edit behavior allows you to
add a fillet at any corner of an object.
See Fillet on page 89.
Edit Object Parts
Bumping/Pushing enables bumping

and pushing behaviors. See Bumping/
Pushing on page 124.
Select Edit> Edit Behaviors> Edit

Object Parts to toggle the ability to
edit the individual segments of polylinebased objects and connected walls. See Edit
Edit Behaviors
Rotate/Resize About
Select Edit> Edit Behaviors to access

the six global edit behavior modes that
determine how dragging the edit handles
with the left mouse button affects a selected
object and may also affect how objects are
drawn.
Objects can be rotated or resized about

either their own centers or the current
CAD point. See Temporary Points on page
845.
The Default edit behavior provides the

most commonly used editing options.
See Default on page 86.
About Current Point

or in the
Preferences dialog. See Behaviors
Panel on page 202.
85.
The Alternate edit behavior provides

an alternative to the Default behaviors
that may be more useful in some situations.
See Alternate on page 87.
The Move edit behavior allows you to
move a selected object using the corner
handles and the Move handle. See Move
on page 87.
The Resize edit behavior scales an
object as you drag a corner handle. See
Resize on page 87.
The Concentric edit behavior allows
you to resize objects so that the
Specify which behavior is used by selecting

Edit> Edit Behaviors> Rotate/Resize
Arc Creation Modes

Select Edit> Arc Creation Modes to
access the five Arc Creation Modes
that control how arcs and curved walls are
drawn.
Free Form Arc mode allows you to
define an arc by clicking and dragging
along the desired path. See Free Form Arc
on page 855.
Center/Radius/End Arc mode allows
you to define the center and radius of
an arc, and then its length. See Center/
Radius/End Arc on page 856.
81
Editing
Objects
Object Snaps enable snapping to

objects. See Object Snaps on page
Start/End/On Arc mode allows you to

define the start and end points of an
arc, then adjust the curvature. See Start/
End/On Arc on page 856.
Start/Tangent/End Arc mode allows
you to define the start and end points of
an arc, its tangent and its curvature. See

Start/Tangent/End Arc on page 856.
Arc About Center mode allows you to
draw an arc by defining the center and
then the start and end points. See Arc About
Center on page 856.
Snap Behaviors
Introductory Training Video: Understanding Snaps
Video: Understanding the Snapping
Functions
Video: CAD - Snaps
There are three categories of
snap behavior in Chief
Architect:
Object Snaps
, which snap CAD
and architectural objects to other objects.
Angle Snaps
at specific angles.
, which snap objects
Grid Snaps
, which snap objects to
points on a grid.
Snap behaviors can be controlled in the
Preferences dialog and in the Plan or

Layout Defaults dialogs. See Snap
Properties Panel on page 204 and Plan

You can also select Edit> Snap Settings
to quickly access snap behavior settings.
To temporarily disable Snap Behaviors
and other move restrictions, press the
Ctrl key while dragging an edit handle. See
Moving Objects on page 123.
Object Snaps
Video: Working with Object Snaps
Object Snaps allow you to position
objects precisly relative to each other;
for example, to position lines so that their
endpoints meet or roof plane edges so that
they are colinear.
Object Snaps can be turned on or off by
selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Object
82
Snaps
, by clicking the toggle button, or
in the Preferences dialog. See Snap
Object Snaps are indicated visually as you
create or edit objects and with the exception
of On Object
snaps, have priority over
all other types of snapping in Chief
Architect. Bumping/Pushing
overrides
Object Snaps
Object Snaps. See Bumping/Pushing on

page 124.
Object Snap Behaviors
Orthogonal
extension lines relative to it.
To use extension snaps
1.
Toggle on Object Snaps

and make
sure the extension snaps are enabled.
2.
Draw a Rectangular Polyline
Edit> Snap Settings

or in the
Preferences dialog. See Snap Properties
Panel on page 204.
3.
Select the Draw Line

tool and move
your pointer along the edges of the
polyline.
Extension Snaps
4.
When your pointer passes over an endpoint or midpoint, an extension anchor is

created.
5.
Move your pointer perpendicular edge

displaying the anchor to create a blue,
dashed extension line.
For some operations, it is helpful to snap to a

point far away from an original object, while
maintaining a relationship to a point on that
object. For example, you may want to snap to
a point exactly perpendicular to a lines
endpoint. Extension Snaps are helpful in
these situations.
Only a limited number of anchors can exist at

one time; creating a new anchor removes the
oldest existing anchor. You can specify the
number of possible anchors in the
Preferences dialog. See Snap Properties
Panel on page 204.
Object Snaps Hotkeys
Extension anchors and lines
Extension Snaps are indicated by extension

anchors, indicated by small blue circles.
Anchors display for Endpoint, Midpoint, and
Quadrant snaps when these snap behaviors
are enabled.
When an anchor is established, you can
create Tangent
, Perpendicular
and
Press the 1 key to clear out all current

extension anchors.
Hold down the S key to temporarily

disable Object Snaps. You are still able to
use Extension Snaps to existing anchors,
so the S key can be used to avoid picking up unwanted extension anchors.
The SKey - Case Study

In the following example, there are several
lines. Suppose we want to start a line at the
intersection of two orthogonal extension
83
Editing
Objects
There are many locations on an object that

other objects can snap to. In addition to snap
points located on objects, Extension Snaps
locate points away from objects. Each type
of object snap can be toggled by selecting
lines drawn from two lines, A and B. To

establish an extension anchor, we need to
drag the mouse over a line As endpoint, but
there are several lines between the endpoints
of lines A and B. We need to establish the
two extension anchors without snapping to
the intervening objects.
4.
To establish two extension anchors

1.
Drag the mouse over the endpoint for

line A to establish the first endpoint
anchor.
2.
Temporarily disable object snapping by

holding down the S key.
3.
Move the mouse to the end of line B.
4.
Release the S key to establish the second endpoint anchor.
5.
Move the mouse to the intersection of

the two extension lines and draw the
new object.
5.
1.
3.
The S key can help establish extension
snaps when other objects may interfere
Angle Snaps
It is often important that objects be
drawn at exact angles. This can be
accomplished using Angle Snaps.
Angle Snaps allow you to draw lines, walls,
and other objects at specified Allowed
Angles. Angle Snaps also affect the way
objects rotate, the radius of arcs, and a
variety of other operations.
Angle Snaps allow you to snap at either 15
degree angles or at 7.5 degree angles plus
any additional Allowed Angles that you
specify. See Plan Defaults on page 180.
Angle Snaps can be turned on or off by
selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Angle
84
Snaps
, by clicking the toggle button, or
in the Preferences dialog.
Angle Snap Settings

You can change Allowed Angle settings for
Angle Snaps in the Plan Defaults or
Layout Defaults dialog. See Plan
Specify 15 Degree or 7 Degree angle
snaps. When 7 Degree Angle Snaps are
selected, you can also specify Additional
Angles. These default settings are planspecific rather than global.
Grid Snaps
Angle Snaps
and Object Snaps
Intersection Snaps
the existing line.
to snap to a point on
Angle Snaps have a higher priority than Grid

Snaps and On Object Snaps
, but a
lower priority to all other Object Snaps. If a
valid Object Snap exists, the program uses
that instead of an Angle Snap. Sometimes
both Angle Snaps and Object Snaps apply.
For example, suppose a line is drawn at 15
degrees using Angle Snaps and another line
is approached. You can draw the new line at
an allowed angle of 15 degrees while using
Use both object

snapping and
angle snapping to
create a 15-degree
line that intersects
an existing line
Now suppose that we don't want the new line

to end on the existing line. Hold down the
S key to temporarily disable Object Snaps,
allowing only Angle Snaps. See The
SKey - Case Study on page 83.
Grid Snaps allow you to snap to points

on an on-screen grid. The display and
size of this Snap Grid can be controlled in the
Plan or Layout Defaults dialog. See
Grid Snaps are turned on and off by selecting
Edit> Snap Settings>Grid Snaps
, by
clicking the toggle button, or in the Plan or
Layout Defaults dialog. See Plan
There are two grids in Chief Architect. The
Reference Grid is not used for snapping and
is provided to give you a visual sense of
scale. The reference grid is useful for
zooming in and out, or for general layout
guidelines. See Plan Defaults on page 180.
Grid Snaps and Angle Snaps

Of the three snap behaviors, Grid Snaps have
the lowest priority and are overridden by
Angle Snaps and Object Snaps.
Grid snaps can work well with Angle Snaps.
For example, if the grid Snap Unit is set to
12" (1 foot), drawing a new line at an
allowed angle snaps the line length to 0",
12", 24", and so on. This is also true of walls
drawn at allowed angles. See Plan Defaults
on page 180.
To draw a line or wall at an Allowed
Angle but with unrestricted length, disable Grid Snaps and leave Angle Snaps on.
85
Editing
Objects
Grid Snaps
Edit Behaviors
Video: Choosing Edit Behavior Options
Video: Editing - Choosing Edit Behavior Options
There are six Edit Behavior modes
that determine how edit handles affect
an object, and may also affect how objects
are drawn. The currently active edit behavior
is a global preference setting, affecting all
Two of these modes, Default and Alternate,
are useful for most drawing and editing
needs and can be considered primary editing
modes. Default mode, in particular, accesses
the most commonly used behaviors and is the
best choice in most circumstances.
Default
The Default mode is one of the
primary edit behavior modes. It offers
access to the most commonly used edit
behaviors and should be selected as your
preference in most situations.
When the use of a tool is described in
this manual, it is assumed that the
Default edit behavior mode is active.
Drawing - Standard click and drag

drawing behavior is enabled. See
Creating Objects on page 90.
Resize/Reshape - Default allows you to

adjust the angle of any corner of a
polyline without affecting adjacent corners, changing the objects shape.
The other four modes, Move, Resize,

Concentric and Fillet, offer special editing
behaviors that may be useful only in certain
situations and can be considered secondary.
You can specify which edit behavior mode is
active when the left mouse button is used in
the Preferences dialog, by selecting Edit>
Edit Behaviors
, or by clicking the
corresponding toggle button, which can be
added to your toolbar. See Behaviors Panel
on page 202.
Each edit behavior can also be enabled using
the different buttons on your mouse or by
pressing the keyboard keys associated with
each. See Using the Mouse on page 4.
86
Default edit behavior
For box-based objects, the Default mode

functions the same as the Alternate mode.
Movement - Default allows you to move

objects orthogonal, or at a right angle, to
any of their edges.
Rotation - In Default mode, objects snap

at Allowed Angles as they are rotated.
Edit Behaviors
Alternate
Video: Editing - Alternate Mode Edit
Behaviors
The Alternate mode is the second
primary edit behavior mode.
Drawing - Continuous drawing behavior

is enabled.
Resize/Reshape - Alternate allows you

to keep the angle between adjacent edges
fixed when a corner edit handle is moved.
Instead, adjacent corners move and adjacent edges lengthen or shorten.
Alternate edit behavior
Alternate allows you to drag an end handle on an open polyline to change it from
a line to an arc or vice versa.
Alternate overrides the Lock Center

setting of arc-based objects.
Movement - Alternate allows you to

move objects at Allowed Angles when
Angle Snaps
are enabled, or orthogonal to any of its edges when they are not.
See Angle Snaps on page 84.
Rotation - Alternate snaps objects at

Allowed Angles as they are rotated.
You can temporarily enable the Alternate

edit mode when another mode is active
by pressing Alt or using the right mouse
button while performing an edit or drawing
operation.
Move
The Move mode allows you to move
an object using edit handles that would
otherwise be used for resizing, as well as
with the Move handle.

drawing behavior is enabled.
Resize/Reshape - Move allows you to

move the selected object when any edit
handle is used.
Movement - Move mode allows you to

move objects at Allowed Angles.
Rotation - In Move mode, objects snap

You can temporarily enable the Move

edit mode when another mode is active by
pressing Z or / while performing an edit or
drawing operation.
Resize
The Resize edit behavior allows you to
rescale an object. As you drag a corner
edit handle of an object, you get an exactly
scaled version of the original. For example,
you can resize an object to 50% of its
87
Editing
Objects
You can temporarily enable the Default

pressing Alt + Z or Alt + / while performing
an edit or drawing operation.
original size while maintaining the same

proportions.

Resize/Reshape - Resize allows you to

keep the angle between adjacent edges
fixed when a corner handle is moved.
drawing operation. See Using the Mouse

on page 4.
Concentric
The Concentric mode allows you to
resize objects so that the distance
moved by each edge is the same. For
example, you can resize an irregularly
shaped polyline so that each edge is exactly
ten feet in from the original position, which
is useful for creating site plans with setbacks.

Resize/Reshape - Concentric allows you

to resize an irregularly-shaped polyline
so that each edge is moved the same distance from its original location.
Resize edit behavior

To proportionally resize an object,
always drag a corner edit handle and
not an edge handle.
Movement - Resize allows you to move

an object orthogonal, or at a right angle,
to any of its edges.
Rotation - In Resize Mode, objects snap

You can temporarily enable the Resize

pressing X or using the X2 button on a fivebutton mouse while performing an edit or
88
Concentric edit behavior
Concentric also allows you to move

opposite edges of an object so that each
edge is moved the same distance from its
original location.
Edit Behaviors
Unit specified in the Plan Defaults dialog.

See Grid Snaps on page 85.
To concentrically resize an object with
no restrictions, set the Concentric Jump
value on the CAD Panel of the Preferences
dialog to zero and turn off Grid Snaps.
You can temporarily enable the Concentric
Movement - Concentric mode allows

you to move an object orthogonal, or at a
right angle, to any of its edges.
Rotation - In Concentric mode, objects

snap at Allowed Angles as they are
rotated.
In some cases, the Concentric and Resize

edit behaviors have the same result, such as
when a circle is resized. Usually, though, the
two behaviors are different because
concentric resizing does not maintain the
original ratio between an irregular polylines
edges.
Resize edit
behavior
Fillet
The Fillet mode allows you to add a
fillet, or curve, at any corner of an
object. Dragging a corner edit handle adjusts
the fillet radius at that corner.

Resize/Reshape - Fillet allows you to

create a fillet at by dragging a corner edit
handle inward.
Concentric
edit behavior
In Concentric mode, objects resize in

Concentric Jump increments specified in
the Preferences dialog. See Behaviors
Panel on page 202.
When the Concentric Jump distance is set
at 0", objects resize according to the Snap
Fillet edit behavior
Movement - Move mode allows you to

move objects at Allowed Angles.
89
Editing
Objects
edit mode when another mode is active

by pressing C or using the X1 button on a
five-button mouse while performing an edit
or drawing operation. See Using the
Mouse on page 4.
Rotation - In Move mode, objects snap

The Fillet
edit behavior adjusts all the
corners of a box at once. The radius of each
corner is the same.
Fillet
does not have an effect on circles,
ovals, ellipses or arc segments.
You can temporarily enable the Fillet

pressing F while performing an edit or
drawing operation.
To produce fillets or chamfers of an
exact radius, set the Fillet Chamfer
Radius and use the Fillet two Lines or
Chamfer Two Lines edit button. See Fillet
Two Lines on page 131 and Chamfer

Two Lines on page 132.
Creating Objects
In Chief Architect, there are four ways to
create objects: by clicking to place an object,
by clicking and dragging to draw an object,
by entering coordinates or by importing
custom symbols, drawings, pictures or
images.
Clicking
90
drawing area to draw an object between your

start and end points.
Continue drawing the selected object until
another tool is selected.
You can cancel any click-and-drag drawing
operation before it is completed by pressing
the Esc key on your keyboard, or by pressing
any two mouse buttons at the same time.
Many objects, including doors and windows,

cabinets, library symbols, terrain objects,
text, pictures and images are created by
clicking. Select a tool or library object, or
import a custom symbol, picture or image,
then click in the drawing area to place the
object at that location.
When the Alternate

edit behavior is
active, a continuous drawing behavior is
enabled, allowing you to click at the start and
end points of line- and arc-based objects
without dragging. See Alternate on page
87.
Continue clicking to place the selected object

until another tool is selected.
To continuously draw by right-clicking
Clicking and Dragging
1.
Select a tool that creates line- or arcbased objects.
Other objects, including walls and railings,

straight stairs, and CAD and CAD-based
objects are created by clicking and dragging
to define either a path or an enclosed area.
Select a tool, then click and drag in the
2.
Right-click, drag and release the mouse

button to draw the first object.
3.
Move the pointer to a different location

and notice the drawing indicator that
Creating Objects
4.
Click to create a second object beginning at the first objects starting point
and ending where you clicked.
5.
Continue clicking to create additional

objects until another tool is selected, the
Esc key is pressed, or two mouse buttons
are pressed at the same time.
Entering Coordinates
Video: Editing - Type-in Editing
Objects created by clicking and dragging can
also be drawn by entering coordinates. See
3D Drafting on page 3.
Coordinates can be either absolute or
relative. Absolute coordinates refer to a fixed
point of origin at 0,0,0, while relative
coordinates treat the current location of the
selected object as the point of origin.
To use the Enter Coordinates dialog
1.
Select any tool that requires you to click

and drag to create an object.
2.
Click and begin dragging to draw the

object.
3.
Before you finish dragging and with the

mouse button pressed, press either the
Tab or Enter key on your keyboard.
4.
In the Enter Coordinates dialog:
The Start Location, where you clicked

and began dragging, displays on the
right.
On the left, specify the desired New
Location, or end point.
Select Absolute to define the end point
using absolute coordinates on the snap
grid, or:
Select Relative to Start to define the
end point relative to the start point, as
though the start point was at (0,0).
Check Polar to define the end point of
the new line by its Distance and Angle
from the start point rather than as X
and Y coordinates.
CAD lines, arcs and points can also be
created using the Input Line, Input Arc
and Input Point dialogs. See Input Point
on page 844, Input Line on page 847, or
Input Arc on page 857.
You can also move objects using the
Enter Coordinates dialog. Click and
drag the Move edit handle of an existing
object, then press the Tab key and proceed
with steps 3 and 4. See Moving Objects on
page 123.
Importing Objects
Pictures, images, drawings and custom
symbols can be imported into the program
and placed in the drawing area with a click.
91
Editing
Objects
begins at the objects endpoint and follows your pointer as it moves.
See Importing and Exporting on page 907

and Create Symbol Wizard on page 925.
Selecting Objects
Video: Selecting Objects with the Left
or Right Mouse Button
Select refers to selecting an object for
editing. An object must be selected before it
can be edited.
In order for an object to be selected, it must
be both unlocked and showing in the current
view. See Displaying Objects on page 221.
When an object is selected, it displays edit
handles and may also display lines
representing its edges or surfaces. The size of
the edit handles does not change as you zoom
in or out and is set in the Preferences
dialog. See Edit Panel on page 201. To
prevent them from stacking on one another,
some edit handles may not display as you
zoom away from the selected object.
When an object is selected, its edit toolbar
also displays, typically at the bottom of the
Chief Architect program window just above
the status bar. See The Edit Toolbar on
page 7.
A selected object remains selected until
another object is selected, a different tool is
activated, the Esc key on the keyboard is
pressed, or any two mouse buttons are
pressed at the same time.
Select Objects
With the exception of temporary CAD
points, any object can be selected using
the Select Objects tool. Click this toolbar
92
button or press the Space bar on your

keyboard to activate this tool.
You can also select objects or open context
sensitive menus using the right mouse button
when any tool is active. See Using the
Mouse on page 4.
Selecting Similar Objects

If a tool other than Select Objects
is
active, you can only select objects of that
type using the left mouse button. For
example, if the Exterior Wall
tool is
active, you can only select walls using the
left mouse button.
This can be useful for selecting an object
when many objects of a different type
occupy the same space in floor plan view.
Objects can be selected using the right mouse
button, regardless of which tool is active.
Selected Edge
When you click a polyline or CAD-based
object, the edge that you click nearest
becomes the selected edge and displays an
edit handle larger than those on other edges.
The handle on this edge may also display at
the point where you clicked to select it. See
Using the Edit Handles on page 108.
This edge can be edited on the Selected Line
or Selected Arc tab of the objects
specification dialog, as well as using a
variety of edit toolbar buttons and the Move
Selecting Objects
Object Using Dimension dialog. See
Moving Objects Using Dimensions on

page 804.
Polyline segments maintain their connections

when Edit Object Parts is not selected
Sometimes a single wall or edge of a polyline

needs to be removed, breaking its connection
to adjacent segments.
Edit Object Parts

Polylines objects are composed of lines
and arcs that are connected end to end.
The individual edges of open and closed
polylines can be selected and edited
independent of the objects other edges when
Edit Object Parts is enabled.
Select Edit> Edit Behaviors> Edit Object
Parts
to enable or disable polyline
segments ability to be edited individually.
Edit Object Parts
can also be turned on
or off in the Preferences dialog. See
CAD Panel on page 199.
Edit Object Parts
also affects the
connections between walls, railing and
fences; but it is not available for CAD-based
object such as slabs and roof planes.
Polyline segments can be edited individually

when Edit Object Parts is selected
Select Next Object

If there is more than one object in a
particular space, it may be difficult to
select the desired object. When a
neighboring object is selected, click the
Select Next Object edit button until the
desired object is selected. Pressing the Tab
key on the keyboard functions similarly. This
function cannot be applied to groups of
selected objects.
Marquee Select
Multiple objects can be selected by holding
down either the Shift or Ctrl key when the
Select Objects
tool is active and
93
Editing
Objects
When an object is drawn by clicking and

dragging, the start and end points of its
selected edge may be indicated by an S and
an E when the object is selected. See Edit
Panel on page 201.
dragging a marquee around the objects to be

selected.
You can specify whether objects must be
totally contained in or intersected by the
marquee, or whether an objects center point
must be contained in the marquee, in the
Preferences dialog. See Edit Panel on
page 201.
If an object is currently selected and a
selection marquee is drawn around it, that
object becomes de-selected. If an object is
currently selected and a marquee is drawn
around other objects, the original object
remains selected and the other objects are
added to the selection set.
When using the marquee-select method, both
CAD and architectural objects included in
the marquee are selected. To remove an
object from the selection set, hold down the
Shift key and click it.
More than one type of object can be selected

using this method, but the ability to edit the
group-selected items are limited to
characteristics that all selected objects have
in common.
To remove an object from a selection set,
click it once more - again, with either the
Shift or Ctrl key pressed.
Select All
Select Edit> Select All to select all objects
drawn on the current floor, in the current
cross section/elevation view or CAD Detail
window, or on the current layout page.
Edit Area Tools

The Edit Area Tools allow you to
define an area of your plan and select
the objects within that area for editing. See
Edit Area Tools on page 153.
The marquee-select method can also be used

to group-select similar object types. For
example, select the Base Cabinet
child
button, hold down either the Shift or Ctrl key,
drag a marquee, release the mouse button,
and only cabinet objects within the marquee
are selected.
To make marquee selection easier, turn
off the display of objects you do not
want to include in your selection set. See
Displaying Objects on page 221.
Shift Select
You can select a group of objects by adding
them to the selection set one by one. Select
an object, hold down either the Shift or Ctrl
key, and click additional objects to select
them.
94
Using a Fence
The Fence Select edit tool allows you
to group-select multiple CAD and
CAD-based objects in contact with the
selected CAD line, arc, polyline or spline.
Using a Fence to make a group-selection can
be helpful in a number of situations, for
example:
When many CAD objects must be

selected, particularly when they occupy
the same area.
When a selection marquee would be the

wrong shape or include too many objects.
When a selection group needs to be

selected more than once.
Fences are often used with the Trim Objects

and Extend Objects
edit tools. See
Trim and Extend on page 142.
To Fence Select a group of objects
1.
2.
Draw a CAD line, arc, open polyline,

closed polyline or spline that crosses or
touches all the objects you wish to
group-select.
Click the Fence Select
edit button.
3.
The originally selected object serves as a

fence to select the objects it touches,
while becoming deselected itself.
4.
You can hold either the Shift or Ctrl key

and click objects to add or remove them
from the selection set.
You can keep all fences on their own

custom layer and turn off their display
when not needed. See Layers on page 215.
Select Same Type

Rooms, cabinets, windows and doors
on the current floor can be located
selected based on a set of attributes that you
specify using the Select Same Type edit tool.
See Select Same / Load Same on page 152.

Objects are considered line-based when they
can be edited similar to CAD lines using
their edit handles.
page 309 and Editing Windows on page

336.
CAD lines, framing members, straight walls

and railings, straight stairs, and straight roads
are examples of line-based objects.
Most line-based objects can be connected to
other like objects to form polylines or
polyline-based objects.
Some objects, notably walls and framing
members, have line-based editing behavior
only when selected on certain edges. See
Editing Walls on page 242.
Wall openings such as doors and windows
have line-based editing behavior in floor plan
view only but cannot be rotated, reversed or
converted to an arc. See Editing Doors on
Other objects, such as stairs and roads, edit

similar to CAD lines and can be connected to
form polyline-based objects but also have
95
Editing
Objects
The Fence Select

edit tool cannot be
used to select architectural objects - only
CAD and CAD-based objects. See
Architectural vs CAD Objects on page 80.
additional edit handles that CAD lines do

not.
Drag an end handle at an angle to the

selected line to change its angle. When
Angle Snaps
are on, the line snaps to
Allowed Angles.

When selected, a typical line-based object
displays four edit handles.
Any action performed using the edit handles

can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
Adjust Width
The behavior of the edit handles may

depend on the currently active Edit
Behavior. See Edit Behaviors on page 86.
Right-click and drag it to change the

adjacent line into an arc, or vice versa.
Some line-based objects, such as stairs and

roads, have additional handles that allow the
width of the object to be adjusted.
Extend/Change Angle
Move
Move
Click and drag the Move handle to move

the object according to the currently
active Edit Behavior
. See Edit
Movement may be limited or stopped by

other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
restrictions can be overridden by holding
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
Unrestricted Movement on page 124.
Rotate
The Rotate handle is used to rotate the

object, either about its center or about the
current CAD point. See Rotating
Extend/Change Angle
96
Adjust Width
Rotate
Drag an end handle parallel to the

selected line to change its length.
Click and drag a small, round Expand

handle to increase or decrease the
objects width. By default, objects are
resized in 1" increments. This Snap Unit
is defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
See Plan Defaults Dialog on page 181.
Using Dimensions
Dimensions can be used to position
line-based objects relative to other
objects. See Moving Objects Using
Using Extension Line Snaps

Extension line snaps can be useful when
editing line-based objects. See Extension
Snaps on page 83.
edit button to copy, move, rotate,

resize, or reflect the selected object(s).
See Transform/Replicate Object Dialog
on page 144.
Line-based objects can be edited using their

specification dialogs. See Line
Using the Edit Toolbar

A selected line-based object can be edited in
a variety of ways using the buttons on the
edit toolbar.
The following toolbar buttons may display
on the edit toolbar for a selected line-based
object:
Click the Transform/Replicate Object
Click the Multiple Copy

edit button
to make a series of copies at set intervals.
Click the Accurate Move

edit button
to slow down the mouse speed when
using the edit handles. See Accurate
Move on page 125.
Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular

edit button to make the selected
object(s) parallel or perpendicular to a
straight edge. See Using Make Parallel/
Click the Select Next Object

edit
button to select nearby objects instead of
the selected object. See Selecting
Objects on page 92.
Click the Open Object

edit button to
open the specification dialog for the
selected object(s). See Specification
Dialogs on page 8.
Click the Point to Point Move

edit
button to accurately move the selected
object(s). See Point to Point Move on
page 125.
Click the Copy/Paste

edit button to
copy the selected object(s) to the Windows Clipboard so they can be pasted
elsewhere. See Copying and Pasting
Click the Center Object

edit button
to center an object along the edge of a
room or on a sink. See Center Object
on page 127.
Click the Copy and Paste in Place

edit button to create a copy of the
selected object(s) at the same location as
the original. See Copy and Paste in
Place on page 138.
Click the Reflect About Object

edit
button to reflect the selected object(s)
about another object. See Reflecting
Click the Move to Front of Group

edit button to display the selected object
in front of other objects in the same
drawing group. See Move to Front of
Group on page 122.
Click the Delete

edit button to delete
the selected object(s). See Deleting
97
Editing
Objects
Using the
Specification Dialog
Click the Break Line

edit button to
add a new corner or pivot point to the
selected object. See Break Line on
page 130.
Click the Reverse Direction

edit button to reverse the direction of the selected
object(s). See Reverse Direction on
page 136.
Click the Convert Polyline

edit button to convert the object into a special
polyline-based object. See Convert
Polyline on page 149.
Click the Change Line/Arc
edit button to change a line-based object to an
arc, or vice versa. See Change Line/
Arc on page 131.
edit button to
use the selected object(s) as a selection
fence. See Using a Fence on page 94.

Objects are considered arc-based when they
can be edited similar to CAD arcs using their
edit handles.
CAD arcs, curved walls and railings, curved
stairs, and curved roads are examples of arcbased objects.
Most arc-based objects can be connected to
other like objects to form polylines or
polyline-based objects.
Some objects, notably curved walls, have
arc-based editing behavior only when
selected on certain edges. See Editing
Walls on page 242.
98
Click the Fillet Two Lines

edit button, then click an edge adjacent to the
selected edge to fillet the corner between
them or to join two lines. See Fillet Two
Lines on page 131.
Click the Chamfer Two Lines

edit
button, then click an edge adjacent to the
selected edge to chamfer the corner
between them. See Chamfer Two Lines
on page 132.
Click the Extend Object(s)

edit button to lengthen other object(s) until they
intersect the selected object. See Trim
and Extend on page 142.
Click the Trim Object(s)

edit button
to shorten the length of object(s) intersected by the selected object. See Trim
Other objects, such as curved stairs and

roads, edit similar to CAD arcs and can be
connected to form polyline-based objects but
also have additional edit handles that CAD
lines do not.
The currently active Arc Creation Mode
determines how an arc-based object is
drawn. Once an arc is drawn, the active Arc
Creation Mode does not affect it. See
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes on
page 855.
One is located at the center of the chord

and the other, at the arc center.
If you would like to snap one of these

center points to another point, use that
handle when moving the arc. See Aligning Arc Centers on page 128.

the object according the currently active
Edit Behavior
on page 86.

When selected, a typical arc-based object
displays seven edit handles.
. See Edit Behaviors

Editing
Objects

Move edit handle
Rotate
Resize
(changes radius)
Reshape
(moves center)
Move
Chord
Extend
(along arc or chord)
Extend
Rotate
Move Arc
Center
The end edit handles expand or contract

the arc when moved along the arc radius
or chord.
If you follow the path of the arc, the end

edit handles allow you to adjust the arc
length.
The angle formed by the center point of

the arc and its two endpoints is referred to
as the Included Angle. If Angle Snaps
Move

arc, either about its center or about the
current CAD point. See Rotating
Two Move edit handles allow the arc to

be relocated without changing its shape.
99
are on, the included angle of the arc,

as measured in degrees, jumps at increments set in the Plan Defaults dialog.

adjacent arc into a line, or vice versa. See
Alternate on page 87.
If the object has a locked center, the

Reshape edit handle does not display.
See Using Lock Center on page 102.
Adjust Width
Some arc-based objects, such as stairs and
Extend edit handles

Adjust Width
Resize
Drag the small, round Resize edit handle

to change the radius and included angle
of the arc while maintaining its center.
Click and drag a small, round edit handle

to increase or decrease the objects width.
By default, objects are resized according
to the Snap Unit defined in the Plan
Defaults dialog. See Plan Defaults
Dialog on page 181.
Using Dimensions
Resize edit handle
Reshape
Drag the small triangular Reshape

handle to change the length and location
of the center without moving the
endpoints.
Dimensions can be used to position

arc-based objects. Dimension lines
typically locate tangent extension lines and
any extension lines that may be parallel to
those lines rather than the arc itself. See
page 804 and Extension Snaps on page 83.

Extension line snaps can be useful when
editing arc-based objects. See Extension
Snaps on page 83.
Reshape edit handle
100

on page 144.
Arc-based objects can be edited using their

specification dialogs. See Arc Specification
Dialog on page 858.

A selected arc-based object can be edited in a
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
toolbar.
on the edit toolbar for a selected arc-based
object:

edit button

edit button
Move on page 125.

edit
page 125.

edit button
on page 127.

edit
Objects on page 92.

edit button to
Dialogs on page 8.

edit button to

edit

Place on page 138.

Group on page 122.

edit button to
page 130.

Click the Delete

101
Editing
Objects
Using the

on page 132.

page 136.

edit button to change an arc-based object to a
line, or vice versa. See Change Line/
Arc on page 131.
Click the Convert Arc/Circle to Polyline
edit button to convert the
selected arc into a polyline. See Convert
Arc/Circle to Polyline on page 132.
Click the Lock Center

edit button to
lock the selected arc-based objects center. See Using Lock Center on page
102.
Click the Make Arc Tangent

edit
button to adjust the arc and attached
line(s) so they transition smoothly. See
Using Make Arc Tangent on page 128.
Only available when a selected arc is
attached on one or both ends to another
line or arc.

edit button to

Lines on page 131.
102

edit


edit button
Show Arc Centers

When working with arc-based objects
or circles, it can be helpful to see their
center points. Click the Show Arc Centers
and Ends toggle button on the utility toolbar
to turn on their display. You can also turn on
their display in the CAD Defaults dialog.
See CAD Defaults Dialog on page 878.
Arc-based objects can be aligned using their
center points. See Aligning Arc Centers on
page 128.
Using Lock Center

Click the Lock Center edit button to
lock or unlock the selected arc-based
objects center. When an arcs center is
locked, it cannot be moved except by using
one of its Move edit handles or when the
Alternate
edit behavior is enabled.
An arc-based object with a locked center

lengthens and shortens along its curve when
it is resized. When this is not possible, its
radius changes. In either case, its center
remains locked in the same place.
Locked-center arcs do not display a Reshape

edit handle when selected. See Using the
Edit Handles on page 99.
When it is part of a polyline, a locked-center
arc resizes along its arc rather than its chord
when an adjacent line or arc is moved. Thus,
the radius remains constant for an unlocked
center arc, while the center does not change
for a locked-center arc.
Unlocked center
Locked center
Open polyline-based objects are composed

of individual line- and arc-based objects that
are connected at their end points.
Some objects, such as roads, edit similar to

open CAD polylines and can be connected to
form polyline-based objects but also have
additional edit handles that CAD lines and
arcs do not.
Objects are considered open polyline-based

when they can be edited similar to open CAD
polylines using their edit handles.
If Edit Object Parts is enabled, clicking

on a CAD polyline edge selecst the individual edge rather than the entire polyline.
See Edit Object Parts on page 93.
Open CAD polylines, connected walls,

stairs, and roads and sidewalks are examples
of open polyline-based objects.

A polyline can be composed of many
segments. See Polylines on page 863.
When selected, an open polyline-based
object displays a Move handle, a Rotate
handle, a Reshape handle at the intersection
of each segment, and an Extend handle at
each end.
Each straight, line-based segment has a
Move edit handle along its length.
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own
Move handle at the center of its chord, a
Resize handle and, if it has an unlocked
center, a Reshape handle. See Editing Arc
Based Objects on page 98.
103
Editing
Objects

Video: Editing CAD Polylines
When a polyline is selected, the edge that

you click nearest is called the selected edge,
and certain operations affect only this edge.
The Move handle of the selected edge is
larger than that of other edges. It displays
along the length of a line segment, or at the
center of the chord on an arc segment. See
Selected Edge on page 92.
current CAD point. Its position varies

depending on which edge is currently
selected. See Rotating Objects on page
133.
Extend
Click and drag an Extend handle to

lengthen or shorten the unconnected end
of the selected line or arc segment, or to
change the radius of the selected arc. See
Editing Arc Based Objects on page 98.

adjacent line into an arc, or vice versa.
Reshape
Move
polyline
Move arc
segment
Resize
arc
Move line
segment

Reshape
arc
Extend
Reshape
polyline
Rotate
Move

Rotate
104

The Move Line Segment edit handle is

found on straight segments of closed
polylines and moves the straight section
according to the currently active Edit
Behavior
. Adjacent segments may
extend or contract in their original directions to maintain their connections.

Edit Behavior
Move Line Segment
Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to

change the angle and/or length of the segments on either side of it, or the size of
the object, depending on the currently
Move Arc
Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle

to change the radius and/or chord length
or position, depending on the currently
and whether
the arc has a locked center. Adjacent segments may extend, contract, or change
angle to maintain their connections.
Resize Arc
Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle

to change the radius, chord length and
chord position of the arc segment,
depending on the currently active Edit
Behavior
and whether the arc has a
locked center. Adjacent segments may
extend, contract, or change angle to
maintain their connections.
Reshape Arc
Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit handle to change the radius of the arc without
moving its end points. Only available if
the arc has an unlocked center.
Adjust Width
Some arc-based objects, such as stairs and
Adjust
Width
Click and drag a small, round edit handle

to increase or decrease the objects width.
By default, objects are resized in 1"
increments. This Snap Unit is defined in
the Plan Defaults dialog. See Plan
Defaults Dialog on page 181.

Extension line snaps, especially tangent
snaps, can be useful when editing polyline
vertices. See Extension Snaps on page 83.
Using the
Polyline-based objects can be edited using
their specification dialogs. See Polyline

A selected open polyline-based object can be
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
on the edit toolbar.
on the edit toolbar for a selected open
polyline-based object:

edit
Objects on page 92.

edit button to
Dialogs on page 8.

edit button to

Place on page 138.
Using Dimensions
Dimensions can be used to move or
reshape polyline-based objects. See
page 804.
105
Editing
Objects
Click the Delete


on page 144.

Group on page 122.

edit button to
page 130.

edit button

edit button
Move on page 125.

page 136.


Arc on page 131.
Click the Convert Arc/Circle to Poly-

straight edge parallel or perpendicular to
another straight edge. See Using Make
Parallel/ Perpendicular on page 126. Not
available when the selected edge is an
arc.
106


edit
page 125.
Click the Add to Library

edit button
to add the selected object(s) to the library.
See Adding a New Object on page 675.

edit button
on page 127.

edit
line
Only available when the selected edge is
an arc.

edit button to
lock the center of the selected curved
edge. See Using Lock Center on page
102. Only available when the selected
edge is an arc.

edit
button to adjust the selected curved edge
and adjacent edge(s) so they form a

smooth shape. See Using Make Arc
Tangent on page 128. Only available
when the selected edge is an arc.

edit button to
Lines on page 131. Only available when
the selected edge is a line.

edit
on page 132.


edit button

Editing
Objects

Video: Editing CAD Polylines
Objects are considered closed polyline-based
when they can be edited similar to closed
CAD polylines using their edit handles.
In addition, closed polyline-based objects are
composed of individual line- and arc-based
objects.
Closed CAD polylines, slabs and roof planes
are examples of closed polyline-based
objects.
Some objects, notably walls, have closed
polyline-based editing behavior only when
they are selected on certain edges in 3D
views. See Editing Walls on page 242.
CAD-based objects such as slabs, roof planes
and countertops can be edited in both 2D and
3D views.
107
If Edit Object Parts is enabled, clicking

on a polyline edge selects the individual
edge rather than the entire polyline. See
Edit Object Parts on page 93.
Move arc
segment
Rotate
Resize
arc
Move
polyline
Reshape
arc

A polyline can be composed of many
segments. See Polylines on page 863.
When selected, an open polyline-based
object displays a Move handle, a Rotate
handle, and a Reshape handle at the
intersection of each segment.
Move
Edit Behavior
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own

Move handle at the center of its chord, a
Resize handle and, if it has an unlocked
center, a Reshape handle. See Editing Arc
Rotate


current CAD point. Its position varies
depending on which edge is currently
selected. See Rotating Objects on page
133.
Reshape

108

Each straight, line-based segment has a

Move edit handle along its length.
When a polyline is selected, the edge that

you click nearest is called the selected edge,
and certain operations affect only this edge.
The Move handle of the selected edge is
larger than that of other edges. It displays
along the length of a line segment, or at the
center of the chord on an arc segment. See
Selected Edge on page 92.
Move line
segment
Reshape
polyline
Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to

change the angle and/or length of the segments on either side of it, or the size of
the object, depending on the currently
Move Line Segment
The Move Line Segment edit handle is

found on straight segments of closed
polylines and moves the straight section
Move Arc
Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle

to change the radius and/or chord length
or position, depending on the currently
and whether
the arc has a locked center. Adjacent segments may extend, contract, or change
angle to maintain their connections.
Resize Arc
Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle

to change the radius, chord length and
chord position of the arc segment,
Behavior
and whether the arc has a
locked center. Adjacent segments may
extend, contract, or change angle to
maintain their connections.
Using the
Closed polyline-based objects can be edited
using their specification dialogs. See
Polyline Specification Dialog on page 863.

A selected closed polyline-based object can
be edited in a variety of ways using the
buttons on the edit toolbar.
on the edit toolbar for a selected closed

edit
Objects on page 92.

edit button to
Dialogs on page 8.

edit button to

Place on page 138.
Click the Delete

Reshape Arc
Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit handle to change the radius of the arc without
moving its end points. Only available if
the arc has an unlocked center.
Using Dimensions
Dimensions can be used to move or
reshape closed polyline-based objects.
See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on
page 804.

Extension line snaps, especially tangent
snaps, can be useful when editing polyline
vertices. See Extension Snaps on page 83.
109
Editing
Objects
Behavior
. Adjacent segments may
extend or contract in their original directions to maintain their connections.

Group on page 122.

edit button to
page 130.

page 136.
Click the Union

edit button to join
two or more objects. See Union, Intersection, and Subtract on page 146.
Click the Intersection

edit button to
create a new object defined by the areas
shared by the original objects. See
Union, Intersection, and Subtract on
page 146.
Click the Subtract

edit button, then
click a second object to remove the area
shared by both objects. See Union,
Intersection, and Subtract on page 146.


Arc on page 131.

on page 144.

edit button

edit button
Move on page 125.

another straight edge by either rotating
the selected edge or the entire polyline.
See Using Make Parallel/ Perpendicular on page 126. Not available when the
selected edge is an arc.
110

edit
page 125.
edit button
edit button
on page 127.
edit
line

Only available when the selected edge is
an arc.

edit button to
edge. See Using Lock Center on page
edge is an arc.
edit
button to adjust the selected curved edge
and adjacent edge(s) so they form a
smooth shape. See Using Make Arc
Tangent on page 128. Only available
when the selected edge is an arc.
edit button to

them. See Fillet Two Lines on page
edge is a line.


edit button

edit
on page 132.

Objects are considered box-based when they
can be edited similar to CAD boxes using
their edit handles.
In addition to the CAD Box tools, text
objects, framing members in cross section,
many library symbols, CAD blocks, pictures
and images, are box-based objects.
111
Editing
Objects
The four Resize handles located at each

corner are used to increase or decrease
the size of the object.
The four Extend handles display along

each edge. If you select an object on an
edge, the Extend handle displays at the
point where you clicked; otherwise, it
displays at the center of the edge.
The triangular Rotate handle located

near the selected edge of the object is
used to rotate it either about its center or
the current CAD point. The pointer
changes to a circular arrow
when
moved over this handle. See Rotate/
Resize About on page 81.
When selected, a box-based object displays

ten edit handles. Unlike polylines, boxes
must always have four sides with rightangled corners.
Extend
Move
Resize
Rotate

Edit Behavior
on page 86.
112

Dimensions can be used to reshape

box-based objects. See Moving
Objects Using Dimensions on page 804.
Click the Delete


on page 144.
Using the
Box-based objects can be edited using their
specification dialogs. See CAD Box

edit button

edit button
Move on page 125.

A selected closed polyline-based object can
be edited in a variety of ways using the
buttons on the edit toolbar.
on the edit toolbar for a selected closed

arc.

edit
Objects on page 92.

edit button to
Dialogs on page 8.

edit
page 125.

edit button to

edit button
on page 127.

Place on page 138.

edit
113
Editing
Objects
Using Dimensions

Group on page 122.



edit button

Objects are considered spline-based when
they can be edited similar to CAD splines
using their edit handles. See Splines on
page 868.

Sprinkler lines, spline terrain curbs, spline

terrain walls and round or kidney-shaped
terrain features are spline-based.
Reshape
Move
Resize
Rotate
Move

When a spline is selected, several different
types of handles display. How many handles
display depends on whether the Advanced
Splines
edit button is on or not. See
Advanced Splines on page 117.
114

Edit Behavior
on page 86.


Rotate
Click and drag the Rotate edit handle to

rotate the entire spline.
Additional edit handles, called Control

Handles, display beside each spline vertex
when Advanced Splines
is enabled. See
Control
Handles
Reshape
The Reshape edit handles display along

the spline at each vertex. Click and drag a
Reshape edit handle to change the length,
angle and curve of adjacent segments
without affecting other reshape handles.
Tangent lines
through the vertex
Click and drag a round Control edit handle to change the angle of the associated
tangent line.
If two tangent lines pass through a vertex,

the angle between them remains constant
as long as Lock Control Handle Angle
Editing
Objects
Resize
The Resize edit handles display along the

spline, between each vertex. Click and
drag a Resize edit handle to move the
adjacent vertices and lengthen or shorten
adjacent segments.
is enabled. See Lock Control

Handle Angle on page 118.

A selected spline-based object can be edited
in a variety of ways using the buttons on the
edit toolbar.
Advanced Splines
115

on the edit toolbar for a selected spline-based
object:

arc.

edit
Objects on page 92.

edit button to
Dialogs on page 8.

edit
page 125.

edit button to

edit button

edit button
on page 127.

edit

Group on page 122.

edit button to
page 130.

page 136.

Place on page 138.
Click the Delete
on page 144.
116

edit button
edit button
Move on page 125.

edit button to
Click the Straighten Spline Segment


edit button
Click the Advanced Splines

edit button to turn on advanced splines for the
selected spline. See Advanced Splines
on page 117.
Click the Advanced Splines edit

button to display additional edit
handles called Control Handles. These edit
handles allow you to reshape the spline with
more control at each vertex.
Tangent line
Click the Convert Spline to Polyline

edit button to convert the selected spline
into a polyline. See Convert to Spline
on page 152.
edit button to straighten a segment of
an advanced spline. See Straighten
Spline Segment on page 118. Only
available when Advanced Splines is
turned on.
Advanced Splines
Click the Lock Control Handle Angle

edit button to maintain the relative
angle between the vertex and its control
handles. See Lock Control Handle
Angle on page 118. Only available when
Advanced Splines is turned on.
Vertex
Control
Handles
The line between the vertex and the control

handles defines the tangent to the spline
through the vertex.
Move the control handles at the end of

the line to change the direction of the
spline at that point. The spline curves
away from its tangent direction at the vertex on its way to the next vertex.
Change the shape of the spline by clicking and dragging the control handles.
Control handle
Result
Notice that the control handles on either side

of a vertex maintain their relationship to each
other in a straight line. When one is moved,
the other moves to keep the tangent line
tangent with the vertex.
You can specify all subsequently drawn
splines to be Advanced Splines in the
Preferences dialog. See CAD Panel on
page 199.
117
Editing
Objects
Lock Control Handle Angle

The Lock Control Handle Angle edit
button is available when Advanced
Splines is enabled, and is turned on by
default, as well. This tool maintains the
relative angle between the vertex and its
control handles.
Click the Lock Control Handle Angle
edit button to free the control of the relative
edit angles between the vertex and its control
handles. The control handles can now be
adjusted individually. The opposite handle
remains unaffected by the change. Notice
that the spline adjusts so that it is tangent to
the lines between the vertex and both of its
control handles.
Straighten Spline Segment

The Straighten Spline Segment edit
button is used to straighten a segment
of an advanced spline between two vertex
points.
To use, first select the spline. Click the
Straighten Spline Segment
edit button,
then click the spline between two vertices.
That portion become straight.
Click a spline segment
Result
If you reselect the spline, you see that the

two control handles point toward the straight
section from each vertex point on either end
of the straight section.
Notice that the control handles are not colinear
Result

Objects created using the Circle Tools
are unusual in that no architectural
118
objects share their functionalities.
When selected, circles, ovals and ellipses

display ten edit handles.
Unlike Ovals
and Ellipses
Click and drag the Rotate handle of an

oval or ellipse to change its orientation.
, a Circle
can cannot be edited into any other

shapes; it can only be a circle. A Circle
can be converted into a polyline. See Convert Arc/Circle to Polyline on page 132.
Reshape
The eight edit handles beyond the perimeter are Reshape edit handles. Move them
in or out to resize and reshape an oval or
ellipse.
Unlike ovals and ellipses, circles cannot

be reshaped. When a Reshape handle is
dragged on a circle, it is only resized.
Editing
Objects

Reshape
Move
Concentric
Resize
Rotate
Move

Edit Behavior
on page 86.

Rotate
Concentric Resize
The Concentric Resize edit handle displays on the perimeter of a circle between
a corner Reshape handle and the center.
119
Click and drag this handle to resize the

circle without moving its center point.
Click the Delete


on page 144.

edit button

edit button
Move on page 125.

A selected circle, oval or ellipse can be
on the edit toolbar for a selected circle, oval
or ellipse:
120

arc.

edit
Objects on page 92.

edit button to
Dialogs on page 8.

edit
page 125.

edit button to

edit button
on page 127.

Place on page 138.

edit

Group on page 122.

and Extend on page 142. Not available
for ellipses.

edit button
and Extend on page 142. Not available
for ellipses.
line
selected circle into a polyline. See Convert Arc/Circle to Polyline on page 132.
Not available for ovals or ellipses.
A CAD block is a group of CAD objects that

have been joined together so that they behave
as a single object. Architectural objects
cannot be included in a CAD block. See
Both architectural and CAD blocks can be
added to the library for use in other plans.
Blocking Objects
Architectural objects can be groupselected and blocked together using the
Make Architectural Block edit button.
The Explode CAD Block edit button

breaks a CAD block into its individual
components.
Add to Library
Architectural and CAD blocks can be
added to the library by clicking the
Add to Library edit button. See To add an
object to the library on page 676.
Replace From Library

An architectural or CAD block can be
replaced by another object from the
library by clicking the Replace from
Library edit button. An architectural block
can be replaced by an architectural object or
block, while a CAD block can be replaced by
another CAD block. See Replace From
The Explode Architectural Block edit

button breaks an architectural block
into its individual components.
CAD objects can be group-selected and
blocked together using the Make CAD
Block edit button.
121
Editing
Objects
An architectural block is a group of objects

joined together so that they behave as a
single object. When an architectural block is
created, it behaves as a single object while
the components retain their own attributes.
See Architectural Blocks on page 663.
Displaying Objects
The display of objects in 2D and 3D views
can be controlled by layer. See Displaying
Line style, color and weight can be
controlled by layer or overridden in the
specification dialogs for many objects. See
Line Style Tab on page 851.
In addition, many objects have a fill style
that is initially based on default settings and
can be overridden in the objects
specification dialogs. See Fill Style Tab on
page 864.
The display of color on-screen can be
toggled on and off in all views except render
views. See Color On/Off on page 743.
The display of arc center- and endpoints, and
the display of circle center points can be
enabled by clicking the Show Arc Centers
and Ends
toggle button or in the CAD
Defaults dialog. See CAD Defaults
Dialog on page 878.
Drawing Groups
Each object in a plan or layout file belongs to
one of three drawing groups, which
influences whether it displays in front of or
behind other objects.
122
The Default Group is where most

objects are placed when first created.
Objects moved to the Back Group display behind those in the other two drawing groups.
Objects moved to the Front Group display in front of those in the other two
drawing groups.
With the exception of imported pictures,

when an object is first created, it is placed in
the Default Group. Objects in this group
display in front of or behind one another
according to program-defined rules that
cannot be modified.
Once a CAD or CAD-based object is created,
though, you can control how it displays
relative to other objects using its
specification dialog. See Line Style Tab on
page 851.
For example, you can move an object to the
Back Group or Front Group so that it
displays behind or in front of objects in the
other drawing groups.
You can also check Move to Front of
Group, which displays the object in front of
other objects in its drawing group, but not
necessarily in front of objects in other
groups.
An object moved to the front of the Default
Group, for example, displays in front of
objects in that group and those in the Back
Group, but still displays behind objects in the
Front Group.
Move to Front of Group

edit button to move the selected
object(s) so that it displays in front of other
objects in the same drawing group. Move to
Front of Group functions like the checkbox
of the same name in the objects specification
dialog.
Moving Objects
Patterns and Textures

The appearance of architectural objects in 3D
views is affected by the materials applied to
the objects surfaces. Material patterns
display in Vector Views, while textures
display in Render Views. See Materials on
page 703.
Delete Surface
In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete
Surface, then click a surface in the
view to temporarily remove the surface from
the current view. See Delete 3D Surface on
page 747.
Editing
Objects

is useful for
creating a sense of depth or to improve a
drawings clarity. For example, you can
move a solid circle representing rebar to the
front of a foundation wall with a concrete fill
pattern in a cross section so that the rebar is
not masked by the walls fill pattern.
Moving Objects
Objects can be moved individually and in
groups using a variety of methods.

Select an object, then click the Move edit
handle and drag it to a new location. When
your pointer is over the Move handle, it
displays a four-headed arrow.
As an object is moved, it jumps at set

increments when Grid Snaps
are
enabled. See Grid Snaps on page 85.
When Object Snaps
are enabled, a
selected object snaps to its original location
if it passes over that location while being
moved.
The behavior of the Move edit handle varies
Behavior
86.
. See Edit Behaviors on page
If the Default
, Resize
, Concen-
tric
or Fillet
edit behavior is
active, the object moves orthogonal, or at
a right angle to, any of its edges.
123
If the Alternate edit behavior is active,

the selected object(s) can be moved at
Allowed Angles if Angle Snaps
are
enabled, or orthogonal to any of its edges
if they are not. See Alternate on page
87.
If the Move edit behavior is active, the

selected object(s) can be moved by clicking and dragging any edit handle that
would otherwise be used for resizing. See
Move on page 87.
Bumping/Pushing
When Edit> Snap Settings>
Bumping/Pushing is enabled, CAD
and CAD-based objects with CAD Stops
Move and/or Wall Stops Move enabled, as
well as architectural objects, bump into and
can push one another as they are moved.
When an object bumps into another similar
object while it is being moved, it stops.
Continue dragging and the selected item
resumes movement through the obstructing
object. The Maximum Bump Distance, or
the distance you must drag to override
bumping, is set in the Preferences dialog.
Bumping/Pushing
also affects objects
when they are moved using dimensions. To
override this restriction, hold down the Ctrl
key when you click OK in the Move
Object Using Dimension dialog.
Cabinets, furnishings and fixtures, wall
openings, and CAD and CAD-based objects
can push other objects of these same types
once they have bumped into them. Instead of
dragging through the obstructing object(s),
124
release the mouse button and then click and

drag the Move edit handle a second time in
the same direction to push.
Certain types of objects, notably roof planes,
and objects on locked layers can be bumped
but cannot be pushed. See Layer Display
Options Dialog on page 218.
CAD Stops Move/

Wall Stops Move
CAD and CAD-based objects can be set to
stop at other CAD objects and/or at walls as
they are being moved. See Line Style Tab
on page 851.
Some objects, such as cross boxes, framing
members and insulation, are automatically
set to stop when moved against other CAD
objects.
CAD Stops Move and Wall Stops Move do
not function if Bumping/Pushing
turned off.
is
Unrestricted Movement
Many objects have restrictions placed on
their movement by their own properties or
specification settings. Architectural objects,
for example, bump into other 3D objects as
they are being moved when Bumping/
Pushing
is enabled.
CAD-based objects may be set to stop at

other CAD objects or at walls. See Line
Style Tab on page 851.
Other move restrictions are activated by the
Snap Settings
page 82.
. See Snap Behaviors on
Moving Objects
To use Point to Point Move

1.
To move an object freely

1.
Select the object.
2.
Hold down the Ctrl key.
3.
Click the Move edit handle and drag it

to the new location.
You can also press the Ctrl key while

dragging an objects Move handle to override
move restrictions.
Accurate Move
Click the Accurate Move edit button,
then move the selected object(s) at a
slower speed than normal for greater
precision. Accurate Move can also be used
to resize objects.
Accurate Move
is not a toggle button; it
only affects the speed of the mouse during
the next edit. The next time you want to use
this edit tool, you need to click it again.
Select one or more objects that you

would like to move, then click the Point
to Point Move
edit button.
2.
Click a point that you want to accurately

reposition.
3.
Click the point in the plan where you

would like the selected point to be relocated when it is moved.
4.
The selected object(s) are moved so that

they maintain their position relative to
the point.
Point to Point Move
can be used with
the Copy/Paste
edit button. See To
point to point copy on page 140.
Point to Point Move
can also be used
with the Edit Area

Tools on page 153.
tools. See Edit Area
Center Object
You can also slow down the movement speed

of a selection after you have started moving
it by pressing the Shift key. Release the Shift
key to resume movement at normal speed.
The Center Object edit button allows

you to move walls, cabinets and other
objects so that they are centered along the
edge of a room or on a sink. See Center
Object on page 127.
Point to Point Move
Move to Framing Reference
The Point to Point Move edit button

allows a selected object or group of
objects to be accurately moved.
Using the Move Object Using

Dimension Dialog
Framing members can be positioned

relative to a Framing Reference using
the Move to Framing Reference edit tool.
See Framing Reference Markers on page
486.
Objects or the selected edges of some objects
can be moved using the Move Object
125
Editing
Objects
These restrictions can be overridden when

necessary by holding down the Ctrl key
while dragging to move an object.
Using Dimension dialog. See Moving
Enter Coordinates
Objects or the selected edges of some objects
can be moved using the Enter
Coordinates dialog. See Entering
Coordinates on page 91.
Using the Transform/

Replicate Object Dialog
Objects and groups of objects can be
moved relative to themselves or an
absolute location using the Transform
Replicate Object dialog. See Transform/
Replicate Object Dialog on page 144.
Aligning Objects
It is often important to align objects such as
text boxes, walls or roof plane edges or to
align objects on different floors. There are
several methods to choose from.
Using Snap Settings

With Object Snaps
on, select an edge of
an object. Drag it and visit the corresponding
edge of another object to reveal an object
snap point, then release the mouse.
With Grid Snaps
on and Angle Snaps
off, select the left side of the object, and

drag from the center move handle. This
snaps the selected side to the grid.
When both Grid Snaps
and Angle
Snaps
on, objects snap at increments
equal to the Snap unit specified in the Plan
Defaults dialog rather than onto the grid
itself. This does not align objects to a grid
line unless they were already snapped to the
grid.
See Snap Behaviors on page 82.
126
Using Dimensions
Create a temporary or manual
dimension relative to an object such as
a wall or line, and relocate the objects to the
same dimension. See Moving Objects
Using Dimensions on page 804.
Text objects can be aligned using settings in the Text Specification dialog.
See Aligning Text on page 825.
CAD Stops Move/

Wall Stops Move
CAD and CAD-based objects can be aligned
using another CAD object or a wall as a
guide. Check the CAD Stops Move and/or
Wall Stops Move boxes in the objects
specification dialogs, then move them until
they bump into the CAD object or wall that
you wish to use as a guide for alignment. See
Using Make Parallel/

Perpendicular
The Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button allows you to make a
Aligning Objects
selected object parallel or perpendicular to

any straight edge.
Select edge
If you select an edge of a polyline-based

object, adjacent edges extend or contract to
maintain contact, but other edges are remain
unchanged. The selected edge rotates about
its endpoint if selected near the end, or about
its center if you click within its middle third.
Click
wall
Result
You can also make the selected edge parallel
by rotating the entire object. See Make
Parallel/Perpendicular with Polyline Based
To use Make Parallel/Perpendicular

1.
Select an object such as a roof plane on

the edge that you would like to make
parallel or perpendicular to another
object.
Click near the center of the edge to
rotate it about the center.
Click near an end to rotate the edge
about that end.
2.
Click the Make Parallel
edit button
3.
Click a straight edge such as a wall.
4.
If the first object is within 45 degrees of

parallel to the second object, it is made
parallel. Otherwise, it is made perpendicular to the second object.
Center Object
The Center Object edit button can be
used to center a variety of objects along
the edge of a room or on a sink.
To use Center Object
1.
Click an object such as a cabinet.
2.
3.
Click near a wall within a room to center

the selected object relative to the portion
of that wall defining the room.
edit button.
The object is moved relative to the wall you

clicked closest to.
127
Editing
Objects
The Make Parallel

edit button displays
for a selected CAD block instance when a
line, including a straight polyline edge, or
box edge within a block instance, is selected.
The entire block is rotated to make the
selected line or edge is perpendicular or
parallel to the item subsequently clicked on.
Click button
Before
The object is centered in the room on the left
If you click outside an exterior wall instead

of clicking the inside, you center the selected
object along the edge of the exterior room.
After
To use Make Arc Tangent

1.
Select an arc-based object attached to

like objects one or both ends.
2.

button.
3.
edit
If the arc is attached to two objects, the
Radius of Tangent Arc dialog
opens.
The object is centered relative to the outside room
Instead of clicking near a wall, you can click

a sink to center a selected object such as a
window on the sink.
4.
The radius from the center of curvature

to the middle of the arc-based object displays. Keep this radius or change it, and
click OK.
If the arc is attached to two perpendicular lines, this dialog opens but the Arc
Radius field is not enabled.
5.
The arc and attached segments adjust so

that the arc radius matches the target as
closely as possible and the arc is made
tangent to the attached segments.
Using Make Arc Tangent

If a selected arc is attached on one or
both ends to another line or arc, the
Make Arc Tangent edit button displays.
Click this button to adjust the arc and
attached lines so they transition smoothly.
Aligning Arc Centers

The center points of circles and arc-based
objects can be aligned, even if the objects are
128
Resizing Objects
on different floors, when the Reference

Display is turned on and Show Arc Centers
and Ends
is enabled. See Reference
Floor on page 368 and CAD Defaults
Dialog on page 878.
To align center points easily, it is helpful to
turn on Object Snaps
and turn off Angle
Aligning Objects
on Different Floors
Objects on different floors can be aligned
with one another using Object Snaps
and the Reference Display
. See Object
Snaps on page 82 and Reference Floor on
page 368.
Snaps
. See Object Snaps on page 82
and Angle Snaps on page 84.
Resizing Objects
To override any movement restrictions
caused by snap settings or the presence of
other objects, press the Ctrl key while
dragging an edit handle.

Depending on the currently active Edit
Behavior
, the end, corner and/or side
edit handles can be used to resize a selected
object. See Edit Behaviors on page 86.
When the Concentric edit behavior is active,
dragging an objects corner or end handle
resizes it according to the Concentric Jump
value set in the Preferences dialog. See
Concentric on page 88.
Objects can be resized about either their
center points or the current CAD point. See
Behaviors Panel on page 202.
Using the
Most objects can be accurately resized in
their specification dialogs.

Most objects can be resized about
either their centers or an absolute point
using the Transform Replicate Object
dialog. See Transform/Replicate Object
Dialog on page 144.
Reshaping Objects
There is a wide variety of ways to reshape
objects using the edit handles, specification
dialogs and edit toolbar buttons.

Depending on the Edit Behavior
in use,
the end, corner and/or side edit handles can
129
Editing
Objects
Objects can be resized using the edit handles,

specification dialogs, and the Transform/
Replicate Object dialog.
be used to reshape a selected object. See

When a line-based, arc-based, or openpolyline based object is selected, you can
right-click and drag an end handle to change
a line into an arc or vice versa. This behavior
does not apply to closed polylines.
Using the Specification Dialog

A variety of CAD and CAD-based objects
can be reshaped by editing values on either
the Selected Line or Selected Arc tab of their
specification dialogs. See Polyline
Using Dimensions
Both temporary and manually drawn
dimensions can be used to increase or
decrease the distance between the edge a
line- or polyline-based object and another,
parallel edge or line.
Angular Dimensions
can be used to
adjust the angle where two polyline segments
meet. See Using Angular Dimensions on
page 133.
Break Line
The Break Line edit button can be
used to break an individual line-, arc-,
or spline-based object, or the edge of a
polyline-based object, into two or more
segments.
130
Note: The Break Line edit button is not available for box-based objects, objects created
with the Circle Tools, or some architectural
objects such as stairs and trusses.
The Break Line

edit tool can be used to
create two types of breaks: partial breaks and
complete breaks.
When a partial break is created, a new corner
edit handle is placed at the location of the
break. Partial breaks are also referred to as
joints, nodes or pivot points.
To create a partial break
1.
Click the object or edge that you want to

break into two segments.
2.

once or press the 3 key.
3.
Click the edge to create a new corner

edit handle at that location and two separate edges on either side of that handle.
edit button
If you click and drag one of the edit handles

on either side of the partial break, the edge
moves at a right angle to itself and another
edge forms, connecting the moved edge with
the one on the other side that does not move.
When a complete break is created, the object
or edge is totally severed at that point.
With the exception of framing members,
complete breaks cannot be created on CADbased architectural objects. In the case of
framing members, only complete breaks can
be created.
Reshaping Objects
1.
Click the object or edge that you want to

break into two segments.
2.
Double-click the Break Line

button.
3.
selected edge parallel or perpendicular to

Parallel/ Perpendicular on page 126.
Fillet Two Lines
edit
Click the edge to create a complete

break at that location.
You can now click either side of the location

of the break and move the selected object or
edge completely independent of the object or
edge on the other side of the break.
The Fillet Two Lines edit tool allows

you to connect two non-parallel linebased objects using an arc of a specified
radius or to fillet the corner where two lines
meet.
To use Fillet Two Lines
1.
Click a line or polyline segment that you

would like to connect to another line or
segment with a filleted corner.
2.
Double-click the Fillet Two Lines

edit button to open the Fillet/Chamfer
dialog.
3.
Specify the desired Fillet Radius and

click OK.
4.
Click the line or polyline segment that

you want the selected line to connect to
with a fillet.
5.
Continue filleting two lines by clicking

on one line, clicking the Fillet Two
When Object Snaps

are enabled, breaks
can be placed at snap locations such as
midpoints. See Object Snaps on page 82.
If you place a complete break at a polyline
corner, the adjacent polyline edges become
disconnected.
Change Line/Arc
Select an individual line-based or arcbased object or a segment of a
polyline-based object and click the Change
Line/Arc edit button to convert the selected
segement from a line to an arc or vice versa.
Make Parallel/Perpendicular
The Make Parallel edit button can be
used to reshape a polyline by making a
Lines
edit button, then clicking on
the second line. The same Fillet Radius
is used until you open the Fillet/
Chamfer dialog again and change it.
131
Editing
Objects
To create a complete break
Chamfer Two Lines

The Chamfer Two Lines edit tool
allows you to create a straight corner
bevel of a specified size connecting any two
non-parallel lines. It can also be used to
extend an arc so that it joins to another arc.
The Chamfer Two Lines
edit tool is
used much the way as the Fillet Two Lines
selected arc-based object or circle to a

polyline composed of line segments.
To convert arc/circle to polyline
1.
Select an arc-based object or circle.
2.
Click the Convert Arc/Circle to

Polyline
edit button.
3.
In the Convert Arc/Circle to

Polyline dialog, specify the number of
sides you would like the converted arc to
have.
4.
Click OK to convert the selected arc,

circle or curved polyline edge into a
polyline with the specified number of
edges.
edit tool. First, set the Chamfer Distance

in the Fillet/Chamfer dialog, then select a
line, click the button and click a second line
to chamfer the two.
Deleting Intervening Lines

Fillet Two Lines
and Chamfer Two
Lines
can also be used to eliminate parts
of a polyline. To use, fillet or chamfer two
non-adjacent lines that are in the same closed
polyline.
Convert to Spline
A dialog warns you that lines will be deleted

if you proceed. Click OK to approve the
polyline edit and see the changes occur.
Convert Arc/Circle to Polyline

The Convert Arc/Circle to Polyline
edit button allows you to convert the
132
Click the Convert to Spline edit

button to convert the selected polylinebased object into a spline. See Convert to
Spline on page 152.
Union, Intersection, Subtract

Closed polyline-based objects
can be reshaped using the
Union, Intersection and Subtract edit
buttons. See Union, Intersection, and
Subtract on page 146.
Rotating Objects
Rotating Objects
Objects can be rotated individually and in
groups using a variety of methods.
By default, an object or group of objects
rotate about the center point of the selection
set. You can instead specify that objects
rotate about the current CAD point.
Rotate/Resize About
Objects can be rotated or resized about
either their own centers or the current
CAD point. See Temporary Points on page
845.

Select an object, then click the triangular
Rotate edit handle and drag it in any
direction. When your pointer is over the
Rotate handle, it displays a curved arrow.
When Angle Snaps

are enabled, objects
snap to Allowed Angles as specified in the
Plan Defaults dialog as they are rotated.
Using the
The exact angle of some objects such as
lines, arcs, walls and the selected edges of
polylines can be specified on either the
General tab, the Line Style tab, or the Arc tab
of that objects specification dialog. See
You can specify which behavior is used by

selecting Edit> Edit Behaviors> Rotate/
Resize About Current Point
. When this
option is selected, objects rotate about the
current CAD point; when it is not selected,
object rotate about their centers.
The Rotate/Resize About behavior can also
be specified in the Preferences dialog. See
Entering Coordinates
Objects can be rotated by entering
coordinates or a distance and angle in the
Enter Coordinates dialog. See Entering
Using Angular Dimensions

Angular Dimensions are useful for
adjusting the angles of a variety of
objects with straight edges.
133
Editing
Objects
The angles of line-based objects can also be

changed by dragging an end handle in a
direction other than parallel to the object.
The object rotates about the opposite end
point. See Editing Line Based Objects on
page 95.
To change an angular dimension

1.
Select CAD> Dimension> Angular

Dimension
, then click and drag to
draw an angular dimension line between
the objects you want to move.
Begin and end as close as possible to
the two objects you wish to locate.
2.
Select the edge that you want to move.

6.
Click OK to apply the change.
When an entire polyline is rotated using the
Set Angular Dimension dialog, it rotates
around the vertex of the angle.
with Polyline Based Objects
3.
Click the dimension value to open the
Set Angular Dimension dialog.
The Previous Value is indicated

degrees, minutes and seconds.
The Make Parallel/Perpendicular

edit button usually adjusts the angle of
a selected polyline edge. See Using Make
To rotate the entire polyline instead, doubleclick the Make Parallel
edit button to
open the Make Parallel dialog.
134
4.
Enter a value in the New Value field.
5.
Select Rotate Edge to move the selected

edge when OK is clicked or select
Rotate entire polyline to rotate the
entire object the selected edge is a part
of, maintaining the Previous Value of the
angle.
Choose to either Rotate only selected edge,

as before, or to Rotate entire polyline. Your
setting remains until you access the Make
Parallel dialog again and change it.
Polylines rotate according to the current
Rotate/Resize About setting. See
Reflecting Objects

rotated to a relative or absolute angle
Dialog on page 144.
Rotate View
To rotate everything in floor plan view,
including all objects on all floors, the
Snap and Reference Grids, and the drawing
sheet, select Tools> Rotate View... to open
the Rotate Plan View dialog.
Enter the amount of degrees to rotate the

floor plan view in decimal units using either
positive or negative values.
The degrees rotated displays in 180 degree
format. For example, if you enter 270
degrees, it displays as -90 degrees when the
dialog is reopened.
Rotate View
rotates a plan relative to its
original orientation. For example, entering
90 degrees twice results in a rotation of 90
degrees, not 180 degrees.
Text objects rotate with the plan unless you
uncheck Rotate with plan in the Text
Specification dialog for each object. See
Text Specification Dialog on page 830.
The Rotate View tool does not rotate
objects; it literally rotates your view of
those objects. As a result, it does not alter the
orientation of the plan in layout views or on
the printed page.
Reflecting Objects
There are several ways to reflect an object,
group of objects, or an entire plan about an
axis or another object. Either the original
object(s) or copies of the original(s) can be
reflected.
When an open or closed polyline-based

object is used as the reflective object, the
edge that is clicked on acts as the axis.
When a circle or box-based object such

as a CAD box or cabinet is used as the
reflective object, the axis runs down the
center of the object from back to front.
Reflect About Object

A selected object or objects can be
reflected about another object,
regardless of its angle, using the Reflect
About Object edit tool.
Line-based objects are often used for
reflecting a selection, but most objects have
an axis that can be used.
To use Reflect About Object

1.
Draw a CAD line to act as the reflection

line.
2.
Select the object(s) to be reflected.
135
Editing
Objects

3.

button.
edit
4.
Click the CAD line to reflect the selection about the line.
5.
The selection is reflected around the

CAD line, and the original is no longer
there.
To retain a copy of the selected object(s) in

the original location, click the Copy/Paste
button before clicking the Reflect About
Object
button.

Objects and groups of objects can also
be reflected horizontally or vertically
Dialog on page 144.
Reverse Plan
The Reverse Plan tool is a quick way
to mirror a plan so that everything is
swapped left to right.
Select Tools> Reverse Plan
to reflect an
entire plan right to left, as though it were
reflected about a vertical line. Reverse Plan
reverses all floors associated with the plan.
Reversing a plan rebuilds theentire model,
affects views sent to layout and when they
are printed, and also closes any 3D views
that are currently open.
Reverse Direction
Select a line-based, arc-based or
polyline-based object and click the
Reverse Direction edit button to reverse its
direction.
Reversing a line or polyline is useful with
certain line styles or with an arrow at one
end.

Video: Editing - Cut, Copy and Paste
Edits
Objects can be cut, copied and pasted
individually and as groups. They can be
copied from one floor to another, one view
window to another, and one file to another.
Because copying uses the Windows
Clipboard, objects can be pasted into other
applications, as well.
Objects cannot be pasted into any views that
they cannot be created in normally. Thus,
136
CAD objects cannot be pasted into a 3D

camera view or overview.
Similarly, architectural objects cannot be
pasted into CAD detail windows or onto a
layout page.
A few objects, such as Terrain Perimeters
and camera symbols, cannot be copied.
Cut
Select Edit> Cut to remove the
selected object(s) from the file and
save them in the Windows Clipboard. To
Copy
Select Edit> Copy to copy the selected
object(s) to the Windows Clipboard. To
paste the selection in Chief Architect or
another application, select Edit> Paste or
press Ctrl + V while in that application to
enable the Paste function.
Paste
Select Edit> Paste to enable Paste
mode, then left- or right-click in the
current view to paste the selected object(s)
previously copied to the Windows Clipboard
at that location.
Capture Setup dialog. See Creating Screen

Captures on page 900.
Copy/Paste
Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
copy the selected object(s) to the
Windows Clipboard and immediately enable
the Paste
The Copy/Paste
edit button activates
Paste mode in which each available edit tool
and handle makes a copy in addition to its
primary function and four new edit buttons
display on the edit toolbar.
Click the Sticky Mode

edit button
remain in the current mode and place
multiple copies of the selected object(s).

edit
button to make a copy of the selection at
a specific location. See Point to Point
Move on page 125.

edit
button to make a copy of the selection
reflected about another object. See
Reflect About Object on page 135.
Click the Main Edit Mode

edit button or press the Esc key to return to the
selected objectss main edit toolbar.
Once pasted, these object(s) are selected.

Objects pasted in 3D views are selected on
their top surfaces.
If the selection being pasted consists of text,
it is placed in a Text object.
function in Chief Architect.
If the selection being pasted is an image, the
Paste Image dialog opens.
If you paste a selection in a file other than its

original source file, when you return to the
original, Paste mode is still enabled.
The options in the Paste Image dialog and

their results are similar to those in the Screen
137
Editing
Objects
paste the selection in Chief Architect or

another application, select Edit> Paste or
press Ctrl + V while in that application to
enable the Paste function.
The Copy/Paste
edit button can be used
with the edit handles in either of two ways:
by clicking or by dragging an edit handle.
To Copy/Paste by clicking
1.
Select an object or objects to copy.
2.

edit button,
select Edit> Copy from the menu or
press Ctrl + C. The cursor displays the
Copy/Paste icon.
3.
If you wish to paste the copy in a different view or program window, open that
window.
4.
If your cursor does not display the Copy/

Paste icon, select Edit> Paste from the
menu or press Ctrl + V.
5.
Left- or right-click once to paste a copy

of the object at that location.
Sticky Mode
Video: Editing - Sticky Mode and Other
Edit Sub Modes
Normally, after an action is performed
using the edit tools or handles while in
an edit mode such as Paste mode, you return
to the Main Edit Mode. Click the Sticky
Mode edit button to remain in Paste mode
and continue pasting copies of the selected
object(s).
To exit Paste mode and return to the main
edit toolbar for the selected object, click the
Main Edit Mode
edit button or press the
Esc key on your keyboard. If you have not
pasted a copy of the selected object and
To Copy/Paste by dragging
immediately click Copy/Paste

after
returning to the Main Edit Mode, Sticky
1.
Select an object or objects to copy.
Mode
2.
edit button,
select Edit> Copy

from the menu or
press Ctrl + C. The cursor displays the
Copy/Paste icon.
3.
4.
138
watching the moved distance in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen.
Drag an edit handle:

Drag the Move edit handle to position
the copy at a new location.
Drag a corner handle to create a copy in
the same location but with a different
size or shape. The result depends on
which Edit Behavior you use. See
You can resize or position the copy
accurately with respect to the original by
is still enabled.
Sticky Mode is available when the Copy/

Paste, Multiple Copy, Trim Object(s), or
Extend Object(s) edit button is clicked. See
Trim and Extend on page 142.
Copy and Paste in Place

Click the Copy and Paste in Place edit
button to create a copy of the selected
object(s) at the same location as the original.
The copy remains selected so you can perform additional operations.
Because multiple walls, railing and fencing
cannot share the same space, Copy and
Paste in Place
edit button is not available for these objects.
When copying between different floors

or view windows, you can paste a copy
at the same absolute position as the original
selection using Paste Hold Position.
To use Paste Hold Position
1.
Select the object(s) to be copied.
2.
3.
Switch to the desired floor or plan file

and select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold
Position
4.
2.
Paste Special
A copy is placed at the same X, Y coordinates on the new floor or in the new
plan as the originals position.
3.
In the Paste Special dialog, select the

desired representation for the selection
and click OK.
4.
Click in the drawing area to place the

copy at that location.
Multiple Copy
edit button.
Switch to the desired Chief Architect

view window and select Edit> Paste>
The Multiple Copy edit button makes

it easy to lay out multiple copies of any
object or group of objects, including CAD
blocks and Architectural blocks.
To use Multiple Copy
1.
Select the object(s) to copy.
2.

button.
3.

edit button if
you wish to make more than one set of
multiple copies.
4.
Click and drag the Move edit handle.

Copies of the selection are made at regular intervals between the original and the
pointers location.
5.
Release the mouse button to place the

copies. The dragged distance determines
the number of copies placed.
6.
If you clicked the Sticky Mode

edit
button, you can drag the last object created to make additional copies.
7.

Editing
Objects
Paste Hold Position
Paste Special
The Paste Special tool allows you to
choose a representation for the
selection to be pasted.
Selections can be pasted as:
Enhanced Windows Metafiles (EMF).

See Metafiles on page 901.
Device Independent Bitmaps (BMP). See

Unformated non-unicode text (TXT).
Filename (a path to a file).
Unformatted text (HTML).
Model Objects - Chief Architect format,

not compatible with other programs.
To use Paste Special

1.
Select an object, image, text or file on

your computer and copy it.
edit
139
Separate copy intervals are used for:
General objects
Roof and floor trusses
Rafters
Floor and ceiling joists
Studs (in wall framing details)
To set the copy interval for general objects or
2.

button.
3.
Right-click and drag the Move edit handle in any direction.
4.
Release the mouse button and move the

pointer in another direction.
5.
Click the left or right mouse button to

place the array of copies.
all trusses, click the Multiple Copy

button, then click the Multiple Copy
Interval
button to open the Multiple
Copy dialog.
edit

copied and pasted using the
Transform Replicate Object dialog.
See Transform/Replicate Object Dialog on
page 144.
Copy Region as Picture

The Copy Region as Picture tool
allows you to copy any portion of the
screen and save it as a picture. See Copy
Region as Picture on page 904.
Using Point to Point Move
The copy intervals for rafters, joists, and

studs are set on their respective tabs in the
Build Framing dialog. See Build Framing
Dialog on page 475.
When the Alternate
edit behavior is
used, the Multiple Copy

edit tool can
also be used to create an array of copies. See
Alternate on page 87.
To create an array of copies
The Point to Point Move edit button

can be used in combination with Copy/
Paste
to make a copy of the selected
object(s) at a specified location. See Point
to Point Move on page 125.
To point to point copy
1.
Select the object(s) to be copied, click

the Copy/Paste
1.
140
Select the object(s) to copy.
edit button, then the
Point to Point Move
edit button.
Deleting Objects
2.
Click at the start point and then at the

end point.
3.
An exact copy of the selected object(s)

is created at the end point while the original remains unchanged.
Using Reflect About Object

The Reflect About Object edit button
can be used in combination with Copy/
Paste
to make a reflected copy of the
selected object(s), much the way Point to
Point Move can. See Reflect About Object
on page 135.
Deleting Objects
Objects can be deleted in a variety of ways:
To use the Delete Objects dialog
Select an object or group of objects, then

click the Delete
edit button, select
1.
Select Edit> Delete Objects...

to
open the Delete Objects dialog.
2.
Specify the Delete Scope as Single

Room, All Rooms (current floor only),
or All Floors.
Some architectural objects such as walls,

wall openings, and staircases are deleted
if they are resized too small.
Entire categories of objects can be

deleted using the Delete Objects dialog.
Editing
Objects
Edit> Delete
from the menu, or press
the Del key on your keyboard.
If an object has a line with arrow or text

leader attached to it, the arrow or leader is
deleted if the object is deleted. To prevent the
arrow from being deleted, drag the attached
end away from the object before deleting it.
Delete Objects Dialog

Use the Delete Objects dialog to delete
all objects of one or more specified
types in one room, on the current floor, or in
the entire plan.
141
3.
In the Delete section, check the box for

each category of objects you want to
delete. Click Select All to check all the
boxes or Clear All to uncheck all boxes.
4.
When the scope is set to Single Room:

Move your cursor into the drawing area
and click in a room of the plan to delete
objects of the selected type within that
room without closing the dialog.
Continue clicking on rooms or choose a
different Delete Scope.
Click Done when all selections have
been deleted.
5.
Select Edit Object Parts

. Select the
edge and delete. See Edit Object Parts
on page 93.
Drag a corner handle until it overlaps an

adjacent corner handle to remove the
edge between them and merge them into
a single handle.
Create a complete break at both ends.

Select the edge and delete. See To create
a complete break on page 131.
The Fillet Two Lines
Two Lines
tools can be used to delete
polyline edges. See Reshaping Objects
on page 129.
If you select All Rooms or All Floors,

you do not need to click in floor plan
view. The OK button becomes available,
and clicking it closes the dialog and
delete the specified objects.
Deleting Polyline Edges

There are number of different ways to delete
individual edges of polyline-based objects:
and Chamfer
Delete Surface
In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete
Surface, then click a surface in the
view to temporarily remove the surface from
the current view without permanently
affecting the object. See Delete 3D Surface
on page 747.
Trim and Extend

The Extend Object(s) and Trim
Object(s) edit tools allow you to
lengthen or shorten a variety of CAD objects
and framing members. See Framing on
page 469.
When either the Extend Object(s) or Trim
Object(s) edit buttons are clicked, its edit
mode is enabled and three new edit buttons
display on the edit toolbar.
142

edit button
remain in the current mode and edit multiple objects or select multiple fences.
Click the Select Fence

edit button,
then click an object to use it as a fence.
See Using a Fence on page 94.

If you did not do a fence selection and
then immediately click either Extend
Object(s) or Trim Object(s) after returning to the Main Edit Mode, Sticky Mode
is still enabled.
Trim and Extend
Trim Objects
and click the Trim Object(s)
3.
Trim Object(s)
edit button.
4.

edit button if
you wish to trim objects using multiple
fences.
5.
6.
Click the fence(s) to trim the object segments intersected by the fence.
edit button.
The Trim Object(s)

edit tool can be used
in three different ways:
Select the cutting line(s) and click the
edit button.
Individually clicking on objects to be

trimmed.
Selecting objects to be trimmed using a

To trim using a temporary fence
Selecting objects to be trimmed using a

temporary fence.
1.
Draw the cutting line(s) or polyline(s)

through the objects to be trimmed.
2.
To trim by clicking
Trim Object(s)
1.

2.

Trim Object(s)
edit button.
3.

edit button if
you wish to click multiple objects to
trim them.
4.
Click each segment intersected by a cutting line one-by-one to trim it back to

the cutting line.
To trim using a fence

1.

2.
Draw a fence through the object segments to be trimmed. Be sure that the
fence intersects the objects on the side of
edit button.
3.

edit button if
you wish to trim objects using multiple
temporary fences.
4.
Click and drag a temporary line to act as

a fence, trimming the object segments
intersected by it. Be sure to draw this
fence on the side of the cutting object(s)
that you wish to edit.
Extend Objects
Lines, arcs, polylines and framing
items can also be extended. The
boundary the items is extended to may be
any CAD object, group of CAD objects, or a
CAD block.
As with Trim Objects
, there are three
ways to use Extend Objects
143
Editing
Objects
Lines, arcs, polylines, circles and

framing items can be trimmed. The
trimming, or cutting, object may be any CAD
object, a group of CAD objects, or even a
CAD block. Select the trimming object(s)
the cutting line(s) that you want to edit.

See Using a Fence on page 94.
Individually clicking on objects to be

extended.
Selecting objects to be extended using a

fence.
1.
Draw the boundary line(s) or polyline(s)

you want the objects to extend to.
2.
Select the boundary line(s) and click the

Extend Objects
4.

Extend Objects
edit button.
4.

edit button if
you wish to extend objects using multiple fences.
5.
6.
Click the fence to extend the objects

segments intersected by the fence until
they meet the boundary line(s).
Selecting objects to be extended using a

temporary fence.
To extend by clicking
3.
3.
edit button.
To extend using a temporary fence
edit button.

edit button if
you wish to click multiple objects to
extend them.
Click an object that you would like to
extend to the boundary line(s).
1.

2.

Extend Objects
3.

edit button if
you wish to extend objects using multiple temporary fences.
4.
Click and drag a temporary line to act as

a fence, trimming the object segments
intersected by it.
To extend using a fence

1.

2.
Draw a fence through the objects to be

extended. See Using a Fence on page
94.
edit button.

Select any object or group of objects
and click the Transform/Replicate
Object edit button to open the Transform/
Replicate Object dialog.
If multiple options are selected in the
Transform/Replicate Object dialog,
144
they are performed in the order they appear

in the dialog, from top to bottom.
Caution: Always double-check the values entered in the Transform/Replicate Object dialog. Large numbers of copies
or large offsets or resize factors can result in
objects that are time-consuming to create or
may be off the screen.
1
2
3
4
Editing
Objects
5
6
1 Number Of Copies - Select this
option, then specify the Number of

Copies to make.
2 Move - Select this option, then specify
how far or where to move the object(s).
Select Relative to Itself to move the

object relative to its current position.
Specify the X Delta, Y Delta and Z
Delta values, which are the objects
changes in position along each axis.
Select Absolute Location to move the
object to an absolute location. You can
either specify its X and Y Position, or
Angle and Distance, if Polar is checked.
Select Relative to Current Point to

move the object relative to the current
CAD point. See Temporary Points on
page 845. You can either specify its X
Delta and Y Delta, or Angle and Distance, if Polar is checked.
3 Rotate - Select this option, then specify

the Angle to rotate the object(s).
Absolute Angle - Select this option to

rotate the object so that its orientation is
at an absolute angle.
Relative Angle - Select this option to

rotate the object the specified angle relative to its current orientation.
145
You can also specify the point the selected

object(s) rotate about, below.
4 Select Resize, then specify the Resize
Factor in decimals. A resize factor of 2

doubles the size of the object, while a resize
factor of 0.5 halves the objects size.
object(s) is resized about, below.
6 Rotate/Resize/Reflect About - This
section is enabled when the Rotate,

Resize and/or Reflect functions are selected.
X Position - Specify the X coordinate of

the point to perform the selected edit
function(s) about when About Absolute
Point is selected.
Y Position - Specify the Y coordinate of

the point to perform the selected edit
function(s) about when About Absolute
Point is selected.
About Object Center - Select this option

to perform the selected edit function(s)
about the objects center.
About Absolute Point - Select this

option to perform the selected edit function(s) about the specified point.
About Current Point - Select this option

to perform the selected edit function(s)
about the current CAD point.
5 Reflect - Select this option, then
specify which axis to reflect about.
Horizontally - Select this option to

reflect the object horizontally.
Vertically - Select this option to reflect

the object vertically.

object(s) is reflected about, below.

New closed polyline-based
objects and solids can be
created based on existing closed polylinebased objects of the same type or solid
objects. The Union, Intersection and
Subtract edit tools are provided for this
purpose.
Union
Use the Union edit button to combine
two or more closed polylines or solids
into a single object.
The following example shows three closed
polylines and the single closed polyline that
146
results when the three are merged using the

Union
edit button.
polylines or solids using the Union

button: the single selection and group
selection methods.
edit
To use the group selection method

1.
Group-select two or more closed

polylines or solid objects.
Begin by creating two or more overlapping

objects of the same type. If one object is a
countertop, for example, the others should be
countertops, as well.
2.
Click the Union
3.
If the object is a polyline, choose to

retain or delete the original objects in the
dialog that opens.
If the original objects do not overlap, they

will either not produce a new object or will
be duplicated on top of themselves.
4.
A new object of the same type as the

originals is created, is selected, and is
superimposed over the originals if they
were retained.
To use the single selection method

1.
Select a single closed polyline or solid

object.
2.
Click the Union
edit button.
3.
Click another closed polyline or solid.
4.

dialog that opens.
edit button.
This second method allows you to combine

more than two polylines simultaneously.
Note: If the original objects do not overlap,
the Union edit tool duplicates them and then
either deletes or retains the originals.
Intersection
Use the Intersection edit button to
create a single polyline based on the
overlap area of two or more closed polylinebased objects or solids.
The following example shows two closed
polylines and the single closed polyline that
results when the Intersection
is used.
5.
edit button
The new polyline of the same type as the

originals is created and is selected. Its
shape is defined by the boundaries of the
two originals and, if the original objects
were retained, it is superimposed over
them and can be moved.
147
Editing
Objects
There are two methods of combining closed
the original objects and, if the originals

were retained, it is superimposed over
them and can be moved.
To use the group selection method
1.
Group select two or more closed

polylines or solid objects.
2.
3.

dialog that opens.
4.

were retained.
There are two methods of combining closed

polylines or solids using the Intersection
edit button: the single selection and
group selection methods. The second method
allows you to work with more than two
objects simultaneously.
Begin by creating two or more overlapping
objects of the same type. If one object is a
countertop, for example, the others should be
countertops, as well.
If the original objects do not intersect, no
new object is created.
Subtract
Use the Subtract edit button to
subtract the area of one object that
overlaps another object of the same type to
create a third, new object.
This polyline
selected first
To use the single selection method

1.
Select a single closed polyline or solid

object.
2.
3.
Click another closed polyline or solid.
4.

dialog that opens.
5.
148
edit button.
edit button.

originals is created and is selected. Its
shape is defined by the area shared by
This polyline
selected first
Originals
There is one method for using the Subtract
edit button.
Converting Objects
To use the Subtract edit tool

1.
2.
3.
Draw two or more closed polyline-based

objects or solids that overlap. One object
can be completely enclosed by another.
Select one or more of these objects you
want to remove a portion from as
defined by the area shared in common
with the remaining, unselected object.
Click the Subtract
edit button and
then click the unselected object.
4.

dialog that opens.
5.

were retained.
Note: If the original objects do not overlap, the

Subtract edit tool duplicates the first object
selected and then either deletes or retains it.
Converting Objects
instead of architectural objects, leaving the
original view intact.
Convert Polyline
CAD to Walls
CAD to Walls allows you to convert a
2D line drawing into a 3D model.
Double CAD lines and arcs drawn to
represent wall layers and other structural
items can be converted to actual Chief
Architect walls, railings, windows, or doors.
See CAD to Walls on page 249.
CAD Detail from View
The Convert Polyline edit button lets

you to turn lines, arcs, polylines,
splines, and boxes into CAD-based
architectural objects such as counter tops and
stair landings, special polylines such as
materials list polylines, and numerous terrain
objects.
To convert a CAD object into one of these
3D objects, select the object and click the
Convert Polyline
Select CAD> CAD Detail from View

to create a CAD drawing of the current
view. See CAD Detail from View on page
875.
edit button to open the
Convert Polyline dialog.

does not truly
convert objects in the current view into CAD
objects; instead, it creates a copy of the
original view composed of CAD objects
149
Editing
Objects
CAD objects and many CAD-based objects

can be converted into a variety of other types
of objects.
Convert Polyline Dialog
1
3
11
13
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1 Countertop - Convert the selected
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
7 3D Molding Polyline - Convert to a 3D
closed polyline to a countertop. See

Custom Countertops on page 553.
molding polyline. See 3D Molding

Polyline Tool on page 542.
2 Slab - Convert the selected closed
8 Hole in Roof/Ceiling - Convert the
polyline to a slab. See The Slab Tools

on page 379.
3 Foundation Slab - Convert the
selected closed polyline to a foundation

slab with footings. See Foundation
4 Landing - Convert the selected closed
polyline to a landing. Only available

when the closed polyline is not a spline. See
Stair Landings on page 443.
5 Material List Polyline - Convert the
selected closed polyline to a materials

list polyline. See Calculate From Area on
page 1006.
6 Molding Polyline - Convert to a
molding polyline. See Molding

Polylines on page 541.
150
15
12
selected closed polyline to a roof/

ceiling hole. Only available when the
polyline is contained inside a roof plane or
ceiling plane. See Roof Hole/Skylight
9 Polyline Solid - Convert the selected
closed polyline to a polyline solid. See

Polyline Solids on page 649.
10 Sprinkler Line - Convert to a sprinkler

line. See Sprinkler Tools on page
594.
11 Terrain Perimeter - Convert to the
terrain permeter. See Terrain Tools on

page 584. This option is only available when:
The polyline is closed
A terrain perimeter does not yet exist
Only one polyline is currently selected
Converting Objects
elevation line. See Elevation Lines

on page 586. Only available when a terrain
perimeter exists.
13 Terrain Break - Convert to a terrain
Break. See Editing Terrain Objects

on page 597.
14 Terrain Feature - Convert to a terrain
feature. See Terrain Feature Tools on

page 590. Only available when a terrain
perimeter exists.
15 Road (Perimeter) - Convert the
selected closed polyline to a road

polyline where the polyline represents the
perimeter of the road. See Road Polyline
perimeter exists.
16 Road (Center Line) - Convert to a
road where the polyline represents the

center line for the road. See Straight Road
perimeter exists.
17 Road Median - Convert the selected
polyline to a road median. This is

helpful for creating medians on curved roads.
See Median on page 631.
18 Road Marking (Perimeter) - Convert
to a road marking where the polyline

represents the perimeter of the road marking.
See Road Marking on page 632. Only
available when a terrain perimeter exists and
the polyline is closed.
19 Road Stripe (Center Line) - Convert
to a road stripe where the polyline

represents the centerline of the road stripe.
See Road Marking on page 632. Only
available when a terrain perimeter exists.
20 Sidewalk (Perimeter) - Convert to a
sidewalk polyline where the polyline

represents the perimeter of the sidewalk. See
Polyline Sidewalk on page 633. Only
available when a terrain perimeter exists and
the polyline is closed.
21 Sidewalk (Center Line) - Convert to a
sidewalk where the polyline represents

the center line of the sidewalk. See Straight
Sidewalk on page 632. Only available when
a terrain perimeter exists.
Click OK to convert the object or objects.
If you then click the Open Object
edit
button with the converted object selected, the
specification dialog appropriate to the newly
converted object opens, allowing you to
specify the objects height, material and
other information.
Convert to Plain Polyline

Click the Convert to Plain Polyline
edit button to convert special polylines
to plain polylines.
After a special polyline is converted into a
plain polyline, it can be converted into a
special of the same or different type.
Convert to Solid
Click the Convert To Solid edit button
to convert the selected object into a
Primitive object, or solid, so that it can be
used with other solids to create complex
structures. See Primitive Tools on page
641.
151
Editing
Objects
12 Elevation Line - Convert to an
Convert to Spline
Convert Spline to Polyline
Click the Convert to Spline edit

button to convert some CAD-based
objects such as Custom Countertops or
splines that have been converted to polylines
to spline-based objects. See Editing Spline
If you would like to convert a closed polyline
to a spline, first convert it to a custom
countertop. Then, convert it to a spline and
finally, convert it to a plain polyline again.
Unlike polylines, splines form smooth curves
rather than angled corners where their
direction changes. See Splines on page
868.
Click the Convert Spline to Polyline

edit button to convert the selected
spline-based object into a polyline.
The spline is replaced by the new polyline
A curved portion in a spline is represented as

a number of smaller straight lines. You can
change a spline into a normal polyline that is
made up of these straight lines using this edit
tool.
Select Same / Load Same

The Select Same/Load Same edit
tools provide a fast way to locate
and modify rooms, cabinets, windows and
doors in your plan based on attributes that
you specify.
can be used to quickly modify multiple

rooms. Click any rooms that are not
highlighted to change their attributes so that
they match those that you specify.
Load to Make Same Value

Select Same Type
The Select Same Type edit tool allows
you to quickly select all cabinets,
doors, windows, or rooms on the current
floor of your plan that share the same set of
specified attributes as the selected object.
With the exception of rooms, all selected
objects can then be opened for specification
and/or edited using the toolbar buttons.
Although multiple rooms cannot be edited,
the Load Values to Make Same
152
edit tool
The Load Values to Make Same edit

button can be used to apply the selected
attributes, or values, to any other objects on
the current floor that do not yet share them.
Load Values to Make Same
becomes
available only after the Select Same Type
edit tool has been used to select a group
of objects that share the same attributes.
Some attributes can only be used for
selecting objects and cannot be loaded from
one object to another. These attributes
Edit Area Tools
display in the Select Similar Objects

dialog followed by an asterisk.
To use Select Same/Load Same
1.
Select a room, cabinet, window or door

with attributes that you would like to
apply to other like objects on the current
floor.
2.
Click the Select Same Type

button.
3.
In the Select Similar Objects dialog,

check the box beside any attributes that
you want to use as search parameters
and click OK.
The set of attributes available varies

depending on the type of object
selected.
4.
All objects sharing all the specified

attributes are now selected in the drawing area.
5.
Click the Load Values to Make Same

edit button, then click any like object
that is not currently highlighted to apply
the specified attributes to it and add it to
the selection set.
edit
6.
You can keep selecting objects to load

values until the Esc key or any other tool
is used.
The Edit Area Tools allow you to

quickly define an area of your plan and
select the objects in that area. Once selected,
they can then be repositioned, copied or
deleted. Select Edit> Edit Area to view the
Edit Area Tools.
Unlike other selection methods, the Edit
Area Tools
cut walls, railing and fencing
where the selection marquee intersects them,
allowing you to edit only the selected portion
of these objects.
Edit Area
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area
and draw a rectangular marquee around
the area of the plan to be edited.
Edit Area
affects all objects included in
the selection marquee that are located on the
current floor, regardless of whether they are
displaying in floor plan view or not.
Edit Area Visible
Some objects, such as cabinets, are included

in the selection only if more than half of the
object is contained within the marquee.

Visible and draw a marquee around the
area of the plan to be edited.
A few objects, notably CAD points, are not
Edit Area Visible

only affects visible
objects included in the selection marquee:
objects not currently displayed in floor plan
view are unaffected.
affected by the Edit Area Tools
The Edit Area tools can cause widespread changes across an entire plan
and should always be used with caution.
153
Editing
Objects
Edit Area Tools

(All Floors) and draw a marquee
around the area of the plan to be edited.
affects all objects
on all floors of the plan that are included in
the selection marquee, regardless of whether
they display in floor plan view.
Click the Move edit handle to move the

entire selection set. See Moving
Click the Rotate edit handle to rotate the

entire selection set. See Rotating
Click and drag the Reshape and Resize

edit handles at each corner and along
each edge to adjust the size and shape of
the marquee. See Using the Edit Handles on page 108.
Edit Area (All Floors) Visible

(All Floors) Visible and draw a
marquee around the area of the plan to be
edited.
Edit Area (All Floors) Visible
affects all
visible objects on all floors of the plan that
are included in the selection marquee.
Objects not currently displaying in floor plan
view are not affected.
Edit Area Polyline

If a rectangular marquees shape does not
allow you to define an area precisely, use a
closed polyline instead.
Adjusting the size or shape of an Edit Area

marquee may change which objects are
included in the selection set but does not
otherwise affect those objects.

A selected Edit Area marquee and/or the
objects within it can be edited in a variety of
ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar.
See Using the Edit Toolbar on page 109.
on the edit toolbar for an Edit Area marquee:
Edit Area Tools

. The polyline becomes
temporarily highlighted and acts as an Edit
Area marquee.

edit button to
copy the selection set to the Windows
Clipboard so it can be pasted elsewhere.
See Copying and Pasting Objects on
page 136.
Click the Delete

the selection set. See Deleting Objects
on page 141.
Select a polyline that defines the desired area

in floor plan view and then select one of the
An Edit Area marquee displays edit handles

that are similar to those of a closed polyline.
See Using the Edit Handles on page 108.
154

resize, or reflect the selection set. See
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog on
page 144.
Edit Area Tools

edit button
to make a series of copies of the selection
set at regular intervals. See Multiple
Copy on page 139.

edit button
Move on page 125.

edit button to rotate the Edit Area
marquee and the selection set so that the
selected marquee edge is parallel or perpendicular to another straight edge. See
Using Make Parallel/ Perpendicular on
page 126.

edit
button to accurately move the selection
set. See Point to Point Move on page
125.
edit button
to center the selection set along the edge
of a room or on a sink. See Center
Object on page 127.

edit
button to reflect the selection set about
another object. See Reflecting Objects
on page 135.
Click the Allowed Angles

edit button
to open the Place at Allowed Angles
dialog.
Place at Allowed Angles

Dialog
If more than one percent of the straight
walls included in an Edit Area marquee
are not at an allowed angle, the Allowed

Angles edit button displays.
Click the Allowed Angles
edit button to
display the Place at Allowed Angles
dialog.
Select the first option and click OK to rotate

the plan so that the largest group of off-angle
walls move to an Allowed Angle. This may
place this largest group at Allowed Angles,
but has two disadvantages.
First, other groups of off angle walls

remain off angle.
Second, any walls that were at an allowed

angle before move off angle. The dialog
shows how much (weighted by length) of
the selected walls are in each category.
Select the second option and click OK to add

new entries to the Allowed Angles list and
allow new walls to be placed at these angles.
Walls already at Allowed Angles remain so.
Select the third option and click OK to do
nothing, which is the same as clicking
Cancel.
You may want to rotate the majority of the
walls to one of the normal allowed angles.
Then, use an Edit Area
tool to select
everything again and select the second option
to provide new angle entries to cover the
remaining walls.
155
156
Chapter 4:
File Management
Chapter Overview
All commands related to opening, saving and

closing plans are located in the File
menu.You can also open plans from the
Startup Options window.
You should back up your plan and layout
files externally on a regular basis to avoid
accidental loss of work.
Chapter Contents
Compatibility with Previous Versions

Creating a New Plan
Creating a New Layout
Saving a Plan or Layout File
Organizing your Files
Save and Save As
Saving a Plan Thumbnail
Auto Archive
Undo Files
Opening a Plan or Layout File
Project Browser
Project Information
Template Files
Searching for Plans
Closing Plans and Views
Exporting a Plan
Exporting an Entire Plan
Exiting Chief Architect
File
Management
Chief Architect uses two main document

types, plan files (.plan) and layout files
(.layout). The complete 3D model of a
structure and surrounding terrain and any
CAD data associated with it are stored in the
plan file. Data used to create working
drawings and the links to various views or
details are stored in the layout and files.
157
Compatibility with Previous Versions

Plans produced in the following programs
can all be read by Chief Architect X1:
Chief Architect 5.0 through 10.0
3D Home Architect 3.0 and 4.0
Chief Architect Home Edition 5.0
All Better Homes and Gardens Home

Designer products
Better Homes and Gardens Landscaping

and Deck Designer
Better Homes and Gardens Interior

Designer
Trading Spaces Design Companion

Note: 3D Home Architect 5.0 was not developed by Chief Architect, Inc. Plans written
using 3D Home Architect 5.0 or later cannot
be read by Chief Architect X1.
To continue to read plans produced in an

earlier version of Chief Architect, a Better
Homes and Gardens product, or 3D Home
Architect in that original program, be sure to
save duplicate copies of your files before
opening them in Chief Architect X1. Copies
that have not been opened or saved by Chief
Architect X1 can still be read by the program
they were created in.
Note: Chief Architect X1 automatically
archives plans created in prior versions.
Archived files are appended with their version
number and can be found in your Archive
folder. See Auto Archive on page 162.
158
Several steps are required to successfully

convert plans to the Chief Architect X1.
format.
Before opening a legacy plan, click

Edit> Preferences...
Preferences dialog.
to open the
On the Font panel, select the Legacy Text

Conversion and Legacy Dimension Conversion fonts needed for your plan.
On the Text & Page Setup panel, click

the Legacy Plan Page Setup and Legacy
Layout Page Setup buttons to select the
settings needed for your plan.
On the Layers panel, choose whether to

purge unused layers in the plan and
whether to retain layer numbers along
with the names.
Only the .PL1, .LA1, .plan, and .layout

files from prior versions can be opened in
version X1.
If you notice any problems with symbols
placed using earlier versions, delete the
symbol and replace it with a new symbol
from a Chief Architect X1 library.
After performing these steps select File>

Save As...
to save the plan.
Creating a New Plan
Creating a New Plan
Create a new, blank plan by selecting

File> New Plan or choosing New Plan
in the Startup Options dialog. A new,
blank plan is called Untitled.plan. Unless
this plan is named and saved, it is lost when
it is closed. See Startup Options on page 2.
New plan files are created as a copy of the
current template plan specified in the
Preferences dialog. See Template Files
on page 167. Commonly used settings and
defaults are included in the template plan
file. You should open this file, customize the
settings to fit your work style, and save your
changes as a separate file. See To create
your own template plan on page 168.
If no plan template has been specified in the

Preferences dialog, a new plan is created
using the system defaults. System defaults
cannot be modified.
New plan files are created in either Imperial
or Metric units of measurement, depending
on the current units setting in the New Plans
panel of the Preferences dialog. When the
program is first installed, the Windows OS
setting for units determines what system is
used. See New Plans Panel on page 194.
The units of measurement must be specified
before a plan is created and cannot be
changed later. If you normally work in one
set of units but need to create a new plan in
the other, use the File> New Plan From
Template
feature to open up an
appropriate template plan without changing
your Preferences.
Creating a New Layout

Open a new blank layout by choosing
File> New Layout. You can also create
a new layout on the fly from the Send to
Layout dialog. The layout file is called
Untitled.layout. See Creating a Layout
File on page 971.
See To create your own template plan on

page 168.
Note: Only one layout file can be open at any
given time.
The new layout is created as a copy of the

current layout template specified in the
Preferences dialog. See New Plans
Panel on page 194.
You can create your own layout template
with commonly used settings, title blocks,
and any other data you use for your layouts.
159
File
Management

Video: Creating a Plan File from a Template File
Saving a Plan or Layout File

When you first save a new plan file, you
must give it a name. By default, a new layout
file uses the same name of the first plan file
sent to it, associating the layout files with the
plan files used. Once you understand the file
management of Chief Architect, you should
decide on a naming convention that suits
your needs. Select File> Save
the Save Plan File dialog.
to bring up
adds the extension .layout when you save a

layout file.
Initially, all Open or Save As operations go
to the My Documents folder of your
computer. After that, the path last visited is
remembered and subsequent File> Open or
File> Save As
commands default to that
directory. This path is saved when the
program exits. The next time Chief Architect
is launched, these defaults are used.
Archive folders are used by Chief Architect to manage prior versions of your
files.You should never explicitly save a file to
an archive folder.
In the File name text box, enter a name for

the plan. Chief Architect automatically
attaches the extension .plan to plan files and
This behavior can be changed to use a

specific directory every time you perform an
Open or Save As operation. To do this,
modify the settings in the Preferences
dialog. See New Plans Panel on page 194.
Organizing your Files

You should keep plans separate from the
support files needed to run Chief Architect.
To keep files organized, it is helpful to create
a new folder for each project.
Here is one way to organize your files:
160
Create a folder on your hard drive called

Chief Architect Plans or another name
you prefer. See the Windows Help for
instructions on how to create folders.
Inside this folder, make a new folder for
each client. Save all the files for that cli-
ent inside his folder, including both the

To specify a default Save As location
1.
Select Edit> Preferences> New Plans

.
2.
Under Open and Save As, click Use this

Folder. The Browse button becomes
available.
Save and Save As
3.
Browse to the folder you plan to save

your projects in. Click OK.
Save and Save As
There are two options for saving

plan and layout files: File> Save
and File> Save As.
File> Save
saves the current state of your
plan or layout file without changing its name
and should normally be used for saving your
work.
Any previously saved cross section/elevation
views and CAD Details associated with the
3D model are also saved with this command.
When saving a layout, the program saves all
pages of the layout, all the links to the
various views saved in the layout, and all the
CAD objects added to the .layout file.
Use File> Save As

when you want to
save the plan or layout file using a different
name or location on your computer.
File> Save As
saves any other files
needed for that specific model in the correct
directory with the new name.
File> Save As
is a good way to create
backups of your files. It is recommended,
however, that you avoid saving directly to a
usb device or server. Instead, copy your files
to such locations after you have closed the
program.
Although the program warns you if you
try to exit without saving, you should get
in the habit of saving plan files before exiting
the program.
You should never save a file to an

archive folder. See Auto Archive on
page 162.
Saving a Plan Thumbnail

A thumbnail is a miniature image that helps
identify a file. Any view of a plan such as a
floor plan view or render overview can be
saved as the plan thumbnail. The thumbnail
displays in the preview window of the Open
Plan File dialog and in the Find Plan
Wizard when you use the Search for Plans
feature.
If thumbnails are enabled on the General

panel of the Preferences dialog, the
program automatically creates one when you
first save a new plan. You can choose to
generate small or large thumbnails. See
To save a thumbnail for the current plan,
make sure the view you want to use is on
161
File
Management

Video: Saving and Storing Plan Files
screen, then select File> Save Plan

Thumbnail
You must save the plan and give it a name

before you can save a plan thumbnail.
Thumbnails are saved using the same
filename as the current plan with the _p.jpg

file extension for plans and _l.jpg for
layouts. If a plan thumbnail already exists,
the program asks if you want to overwrite the
existing thumbnail.
Auto Archive
When a plan is first saved, Chief Architect
creates an Archive folder at the same
location as the .plan file. The Archive folder
contains Auto Save and Archive files.
archiving interval is determined on the

General panel of the Preferences dialog.
See General Panel on page 190.
Previous
Save
Daily
Hourly
Automatically generated archive folder
Auto Save and Archive files should not be

viewed as a substitute for regularly saving
your work by selecting File> Save
pressing Ctrl + S on the keyboard.
or
You should never save a file to an

archive folder.
Archive Files
Every time a model is saved, internal archive
files are automatically created that keep a
historical archive of your plan.
Files can be archived by hour, day or most
recent save. They are renamed according to
which archive option is chosen. The
162
Archive folder illustrating

all three archive options
Plan, layout and related files from previous

versions of the program are automatically
moved to the archive folder when the plan is
opened and saved in Chief Archtect X1.
Archive files are meant to be for emergency
use only. If you must access an archive file,
open it as you would any other file. See
Opening a Plan or Layout File on page
164. As soon as the file is open, use Save As
to save this file to another location.
If you open an archive file and do not
save it to a new location, you create a
new archive folder inside the original archive
folder. Path names exceeding 260 characters
cannot be opened by Chief Architect.
Auto Archive
If you Save
a Chief Architect version 10
.plan file (not Save As

) Auto Archive
will create an additional archive file with
_v10 appended. This archived file is a
copy of the original version 10 file and can
still be opened in version 10.
Manage Archives
Chief Architect offers two convenient ways
to access Archive folders.
Auto Save file after normal shut-down
Select File> Manage Auto Archives

to open the current plans Archive folder.
You can enable Auto Save and set its

frequency in the Preferences dialog. See
Click Yes in the Archived Files dialog

when the program warns you that the
number of archive files exceeds the Auto
Archive Files value.
Auto save files created as a result of an

improper program shutdown are appended
_auto_save_bak.plan or
_auto_save_bak.layout.
You can also move or delete archived files

using Windows Explorer. See your Windows
documentation for more information.
As you work, Chief Architect automatically

creates Auto Save files at regular intervals
when changes are made to a file but not
saved by selecting File> Save
These Auto Save files are appended

_auto_save.plan or _auto_save.layout and
are saved in the Archive folder.
When you close a file normally, its Auto
Save file is retained until the next time the
file is opened and the Auto Save file is
overwritten.
Auto Save file after abnormal shut-down
If your computer shuts down accidentally,

you can recover some of your work by
opening the _auto_save_bak file.
A file is auto saved only if you have
saved it previously. Auto Save does not
work for unnamed files.
When you reopen a file after a computer shut

down or system crash, the following dialog
displays if an Auto Save file newer than the
original file is found.
163
File
Management
Auto Save Files
Click the Save
button.
Select File> Save
Press Ctrl + S or F3 on the keyboard.
Even with Auto Save, you should save your

work manually on a regular basis using any
of the following methods:
Undo Files
Chief Architect stores a set number of copies
of all open plan file changes, known as undo
files. Undo files are stored in the Undo
Directory, which can be specified on the
Directories panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Folders Panel on page 192.
By default, the undo directory is the
Windows Temporary Directory. When you
use Windows system cleanup features, these
files can be deleted. Because of this, you
should clean up when Chief Architect is not

running.
The maximum number of Undo files is
specified in the Maximum Undos value in
the Preference settings. If you have Undo
enabled, be sure to define a directory on a
hard drive with enough space for these files.
When Chief Architect is closed normally,
any current Undo files are deleted.
Opening a Plan or Layout File

Select File> Open Plan to open
an existing .plan file or File>
Open Layout to open an existing .layout
file. Chief Architect automatically browses
to either the directory last used or to a
specific directory, depending on your current
Preference settings.
In the main window, all available plans of the
chosen file type located in the current
directory display in the list. When a file is
164
selected, a thumbnail preview of the plan

displays if one is available.
To open files of a different type, select one
from the Files of type list.
The Open Plan File and Open Layout
File dialogs can be resized to list more files
by clicking and dragging the lower right
corner.
Project Browser
Click on a file name and it displays in the

File name box. If a preview image of the file
is available, it will display on the right side
of the dialog. Click OK to open the file.
The names of the plan files you most recently
opened or saved display at the bottom of the
File menu. Click a recent file to open the file

without using the Open Plan File dialog.
The maximum number of recent files listed
in the File menu can be changed on the
General panel of the Preferences dialog.
See General Panel on page 190.
The Project Browser is a convenient

way access to all the floors, cameras,
elevations, CAD Details, Wall Details, and
Materials Lists saved with the current plan.
The Project Browser is shared with the
Library Browser in the Library and
Project Browser window. You can dock it
to the top, bottom, or sides of the Chief
Architect window or let it float freely.
You can open files listed in the Library and

Project Browser by double-clicking them.
You can rename some files by right-clicking
them and selecting Rename.
To open the Library and Project

Browser directly, select Tools> Project
Browser...
. You can also use one of the
many methods to open the Library Browser,
then simply click the Project Browser tab.
See The Library Browser on page 670.
165
File
Management
Project Browser
1 Any CAD details you have saved with
the plan display here. Right-click a

CAD detail name to rename it.
2 Any vector views or render views you
saved with your plan display here by

floor. Save or rename cameras views within
the plan view by selecting and opening the
camera object. See Saving 3D Views on
page 747.
2
3
4
3 Any saved cross sections/elevations
display here. Save or rename these

views by opening the camera object. See
Saving 3D Views on page 747.
4 All the Floors in the current plan
display here. Double-click a floor to go

to the floor plan view for that floor.
5 All materials lists saved with the
current plan are listed here. See

Materials Lists on page 1003.
Library and Project Browser
in a floating state (not docked)
6 Whenever wall framing is generated,
wall details are automatically created as

well and display here by floor. See Wall
Framing Details on page 492.
Project Information
Information about the current project, the
client it is drawn for, and the registered Chief
Architect user can be inserted into text
objects to improve organization and clarity in
your documents. See Text Macros on page
826.
Designer Information
Designer information is specified in the
Default Designer Information dialog,
166
which is initially populated by registered

user information. See Text & Page Setup
Panel on page 189.
To override designer information for a
particular plan, select Tools> Project
Information> Designer Information to
open the Designer Information dialog.
See Designer Information Dialog on page
839.
Template Files
Client Information
Registered User Information
Select Tools> Project Information> Client

Information to open the Client
Information dialog and enter data
regarding the client that the current plan is
drawn for.
Registered User information corresponds to

the information that was given when the
current Chief Architect installation was
registered and cannot be modified without
reinstalling and registering the program. See
User Information on page 10.
Template Files
You can specify what templates the program

refers to when creating new files and can
create and customize templates for metric
and Imperial plans so they include the
settings that you regularly use.
You can specify which templates are used
when a new plan or layout file is opened in
the Preferences dialog. See New Plans
Panel on page 194.
When you select a template file, the program
opens a copy with the name untitled.plan.
This keeps the original unchanged so it is
available for use again.
Once you are familiar with the default
settings in Chief Architect, you can create
template plan files to fit your needs, store
them in the plan templates directory, and set
the files of your choice as the defaults for
new files.
If you make changes to your default

template, all subsequently drawn plans are
created with the new default settings.
You can designate the template directory that
you would like in the Preferences dialog.
See Folders Panel on page 192.
Opening Template Plans

If you have more than one configuration that
you like to use, you can create additional
template plans and open whichever template
is needed for a project.
Choose File> Templates> Open Plan
Template
or Open Layout Template
to create a new plan or layout file using a

different template than the current default
specified in your preferences.
When opening a template plan, the program
browses to the Templates directory specified
in the Directories tab of the Preferences
dialog.
Note: Make sure you use the appropriate
units when you create a template plan. The
Imperial or metric units used in the new plan
are the same as when the template was
saved.
167
File
Management
When Chief Architect opens a new,

blank plan or layout file, this new file
is actually a copy of a template created using
either metric or Imperial units of
measurement and with predefined default
settings, layer settings, wall definitions, and
page setup information.
To create your own template plan
default template whenever you select
1.
Select File> New Plan
File> New Plan

. Click No if you
prefer to access this template by selecting File> New Plan From Template
2.
Select Edit> Defaults Settings...

and go through each item, opening the
dialogs and modifying the settings as
needed. See Default Settings on page
176.
3.
Select Tools> Display Settings> Display Options

and create any custom
layers, layer sets and layer settings that
you typically use. See Layers on page
215.
4.
Select Build> Wall> Define Wall

Types
and create any custom wall
types that you often use. See Wall Type
Definitions Dialog on page 251.
5.
6.
Select 3D> 3D Settings

and set up
your backdrop and other options for 3D
views. See 3D Settings Dialog on
page 757.
If you draw anything in the template
plan, it displays in all new plans created
with that template.
7.
You can insert text macros into the template. See Text Macros on page 826.
8.
After modifying all your default settings, select File> Templates> Save
Plan As Template...
. Name the template plan and save it in the Templates
directory.
9.
168
In the Change Default Template

dialog, click Yes to use the plan as your
.
10. The current plan remains untitled, but a
copy of it is saved for use as a template.
To set a template plan as your default
1.
Go to the Edit> Preferences> General> New Plans panel.
2.
Click Imperial or Metric Units.
3.
Click the Browse button for a plan or

layout.
4.
Select a template plan from the Templates directory or navigate to a different

location and select a template plan from
there.
Note: You should back up any template files

you are using. You can access and back
them up using Windows Explorer.
Updating Templates
When you make a change to the settings in a
plan file, the template plan is not affected. To
change the default settings in your template,
you must open the template file, make the
change and choose File> Templates> Save
Plan as Template
. Select the name of
the template from the list of files in the
Templates directory. When the program asks
if you want to replace the existing file, click
Yes.
Searching for Plans
Searching for Plans
Find Plan Wizard

The Find Plan Wizard can be used to
search for plans using stored information
about each plan, such as the style of
construction or the number of a specified
type of room.
When you open the Find Plan Wizard,
choose a plan database to search. When you
first run Chief Architect, there is only one
plan database containing the sample plans
that come with the program. Click the
Browse button to select a different plan
database. You must create a plan database
before you can use the Find Plan Wizard
to locate files you created.
Click the Next button to select the style of
house desired, the number of floors in the
house, and the number of bedrooms.
At the bottom of each page, the number of

plans that match your current search
parameters displays. As you modify the
parameters, this number increases or
decreases as matching plans are found.
On any page, click the Back button to
modify any previously selected parameters
and change the search results.
Click the Next button to select the number of
bathrooms, size and desired price range.
Click the Next button to see previews of the
plans that match your current search
parameters. Select any of the available plans
to see a preview picture of the plan, if one
exists. See Saving a Plan Thumbnail on
page 161.
Select Next and then the Finish button to
open the plan you selected.
Creating a Plan Database File

Select Tools> Plans Database>
Create Plan Database to create a new
plan database file that can be used to search
for plans using the Plan Find Wizard. The
Create Plan Database dialog opens.
1
2
3
169
File
Management
Choose File> Search for Plans... to

locate an existing plan. This command
opens the Find Plan Wizard that allows
you to search specific plan database files and
define specific search parameters.
1 Use the Database File field to name
the plan database file to be created.

Click the Browse button to save this file at
the location of your choice. If you choose a
plan database file that already exists, the
program asks you if you want to overwrite
the existing file.
2 The Plan Search Path allows you to
specify the folder where the plans you

want included in the plan database are stored.
The program searches for any plan files that
exist in this folder and adds entries in the
plan database for them. You can navigate to a
particular folder on your machine using the
Browse button.
You can Cancel the search process at any

time. If you do, your plan database will have
incomplete information and will not contain
entries for all plans in your search folder.
When all plans have been found and added to
the plan database, the program automatically
opens the new plan database file for
modification.
Editing a Plan Database File
3 The Include Subfolders checkbox
Once a plan database file is created, it

it can be modified. Select Tools> Plans
Database> Edit Plan Database, then select
the plan database file you want to modify.
4 Check Use Relative Path if you
Click OK to open the Edit Plan Database

dialog. You can edit any of the information in
the plan database and add and remove plans
from the database.
allows you to specify whether or not the

search looks only in the Plan Search Path or
if it also searches any subfolders found.
anticipate moving the folder containing
the database and plans to another location.
As long as the database and the plans it
references remain in the same folder, the
folder can be moved to another location.
170
When you click OK, the program searches

for plan files and adds them to the plan
database file. The program must read each
plan and analyze it so this process may take
some time.
Searching for Plans
Edit Plan Database Dialog
6
7
13
8
9
11
10
14
12
2
3
4
5
currently have information stored in the
plan database are listed here.
Add Plan - Click this button to select a

plan file to add to the plan database.
3 Remove Plan - Click this button to
remove the currently selected plan from

the plan database.
4 Select File - Click this button to relink
the entry in the plan database to a plan

file on your system. If a plan file is been
removed, renamed, or moved on your
system, the plan database does not know how
to locate it. You must then relink the plan
database to the file or remove it to keep the
plan database information accurate.
5 Open Plan - Click this button to open
any of the plans referenced in the plan

database. Opening a plan closes the Plan
Database dialog. If you have not saved any
changes you made before clicking the Open
Plan button, you are asked to do so before

you continue.
6 Style - Select a plan style from the drop
down list for the selected plan. You can

also create a new plan style by typing in the
name of the new style in the blank area.
7 Price - Enter the price range for this

plan.
8 Area - The area is automatically
calculated by the program based on the

living area of the plan when it is added to the
database. You can modify this data and enter
your own area.
9 Bedrooms - The number of bedrooms
is automatically calculated by the

program when a plan is added to the
your own number of bedrooms.
10 Baths - The number of bathrooms is

automatically calculated by the
171
File
Management
1 Plans in the Database - All plans that

your own number of bathrooms.
11 Floors - The number of floors is
automatically calculated by the

your own number of floors.
12 Description - Enter a description for
the plan, if desired. This description

displays when a plan is found and selected
using the Search for Plans tool.
13 Plan Thumbnail - You can create a
thumbnail preview for any plan. See

Saving a Plan Thumbnail on page 161.
14 File Path - The file path of the selected

plan displays here.
Closing Plans and Views

Choose File> Close to close the active
window. If this is the last open view for a
plan and you did not save first, the program
reminds you to save before closes. Edited
cross section/elevation views also ask you to
save changes before closing. Select Yes to
save it, or No to close the window without
saving. Select Cancel to close the dialog and

return to the window.
Select File> Close All to close all currently
open windows.
Exporting a Plan
The simplest way to transfer a model to
another directory or another computer is to
use the Save As
feature. Open the plan in
Chief Architect, choose File> Save As

,
and save to the desired drive and folder. The
program makes sure that all plan files are
saved along with the new copy. This is a
good way to create backups of your work.
Plan files can have references to other
external data files such as imported bitmaps,
textures, images, backdrops, and pattern
files. These external files are not
automatically saved with the plan files with
the Save As
command. If you transfer a
set of plan files from one computer to
172
another, you may see warning messages

when you open these files on a computer that
does not have these referenced files. When
transferring plans to another computer that
does not include the external files, it is
usually better to use File> Export Entire
Plan
. See Exporting an Entire Plan on
page 173.
When transferring layout files, be aware that
the plan files are also external file references
and are not actually contained in the layout
file. Using Save As
on a layout file only
copies the layout file but not the referenced
plan files. You should always use the File>
Export Entire Plan
to copy all the
associated files instead of Save As

layout files.
for
Individual files can also be copied or

transferred manually with Windows
Explorer. After transferring files manually,
be sure to open the copy and look for any
error messages about missing files.
You should store all files for a single job in

the same folder so all the associated files are
in a single place. If you use this strategy, it is
be much easier to transfer files because you
can use Windows Explorer to copy the entire
folder.
Choose Export All Files to copy all

plan or layout files and all externally
referenced files such as linked plan
files, inserted picture files, custom pattern files, and any graphics files such
as textures, images, and backdrops.
Choosing Export Plan Files Only copies all associated plan files and any
externally linked files and inserted picture files, but it does not copy any
graphics or pattern files. This is best
used when transferring a plan or layout
file to a computer that already has the
graphics files installed.
Because Chief Architect plans and layouts

often contain many references to other
external files, it is sometimes necessary to
save or copy all the associated files to a new
location. This can be useful when trying to
transfer plan files to another computer or
when sending them to another user. It is also
useful for archiving plan or layout files
because all externally referenced or linked
files are included.
To export a plan and all associated files
Note: Always use File> Export> Entire Plan
when sending files to a user of the Chief
Architect Client Viewer to make sure that they
have all associated data.
1.
To copy all associated plan or layout

files to a new directory, select File>
2.
When you click the OK button in the
Export Entire Plan dialog, the

Browse for Folder dialog opens.
Here you can select the destination

folder for the associated plan files.
Export> Entire Plan...

. The
Export Entire Plan dialog opens for
you to choose what files are copied.
173
File
Management
3.
Navigate to any folder on your system,

to an external storage device, or create a
new folder.
You must select an empty folder for the

Export Entire Plan feature to work. If
you select an existing folder that is not empty,
the export is cancelled.
Returning Client Viewer Files

When customers review and annotate a plans
using the Client Viewer, they only need to
return the .plan and .layout files. The
associated files do not need to be returned.
Exiting Chief Architect

Select File> Exit to exit the program. If you
have not saved any open plans, you are
reminded to do so. It is better to actively save
your work before exiting the program than to
save on exit.
174
When you exit from the program using File>

Exit, all Autosave files and Undo files are
automatically deleted.
Chapter 5:
Defaults &
Preferences
Chapter Overview

Video: Defaults and Preferences
Becoming familiar with the program defaults
and preferences is vital to understanding how
Chief Architect works.
If you use special settings regularly, it is
a good idea to save your settings in a
template plan. See To create your own template plan on page 168.
Chapter Contents
Default Settings
Dynamic Defaults
Plan Defaults
Reset to Defaults
Preferences Dialog
Appearance Panel
Colors Panel
Font Panel
Library Browser Panel
Text & Page Setup Panel
General Panel
Folders Panel
New Plans Panel
Layers Panel
Unit Conversions Panel
Time Tracker Panel
Architectural Panel
CAD Panel
Line Properties Panel
Sun Angle Panel
Edit Panel
Behaviors Panel
Snap Properties Panel
Material List Panel
Report Style Panel
Master List Panel
Categories Panel
Preferences
Introductory Training Video: Preferences and Defaults
175
Render Panel
Texture Filter Panel
Reset Options Panel
Default Settings
Video: Setting Defaults for New Plan
Files
Video: Setting Defaults Before Beginning
Default settings apply within a Chief
Architect plan. Setting defaults before you
begin drawing can save you time. If you have
a particular group of defaults that you use
often on many plans, you can save the
defaults to a template. See Opening
Access Default Settings by selecting
Edit> Default Settings....
Cabinet Defaults
Click the + beside Cabinets or double-click
the Cabinet Tools
parent button to
access the defaults dialogs for the various
cabinet types. See Cabinet Defaults on
page 552.
Select General Cabinet and click the Edit
button to open the General Cabinet
Defaults dialog. See General Cabinet
CAD Defaults
Select CAD and click the Edit button to
open the CAD Defaults dialog. You can
also use the CAD Defaults
button to
access the dialog if you add it to your toolbar
using Toolbar Customization. See CAD
Camera Defaults
Select Camera and click the Edit button or
double-click the Render Tools
parent
button to display the Camera Defaults
dialog. See Camera Defaults Dialog on page
755.
Dimension Defaults
Select Dimension and click the Edit button
or double-click the double-click the Dimension Tools
176
parent button to display the
Default Settings
Dimension Defaults dialog. See

Dimension Defaults on page 796.
dialog. See Foundation Defaults on page

372.
Door Defaults
Framing Defaults
Click the + beside Doors or double-click the
Select Framing and click the Edit button or
Door Tools
parent button to to access the
defaults dialogs for exterior and interior
doors. See Door Defaults on page 305.
double-click the Framing Tools

parent
button to open the Framing Defaults
dialog. See Framing Defaults on page 469.
Dormer Defaults
Layer Sets Defaults
Select Dormer and click the Edit button or

double-click the Auto Floating Dormer
or the Auto Dormer
child button to open
the Dormer Defaults dialog. See Dormer
Select Layer Sets and click the Edit button

to open the Layer Sets Defaults dialog.
See Layer Set Defaults on page 216.
Material Defaults
Click the + beside Materials to access the
defaults dialogs related to materials.
Electrical Defaults
Select Electrical and click the Edit button or
double-click the Electrical Tools
parent
button to display the Electrical Defaults
dialog. See Electrical Defaults on page
534.
Floor Defaults
Select General Materials and click the Edit

button to open the Material Defaults
dialog. See Material Defaults Dialog on
page 721.
Select Room Materials and click the Edit
button to open the Room Material
Defaults dialog for the current floor. See
Room Material Defaults on page 280.
double-click the Floor Tools

parent button to open the Floor Defaults dialog for
the current floor. See Floor Defaults on
page 364.
Foundation Defaults
Select Foundation and click the Edit button
or click the Build Foundation
Plan and Layout Defaults

Select Plan or Layout and click the Edit
button or double-click the Select Objects
button to open the Plan or Laout
Defaults dialog. See Plan Defaults on
page 180 and Layout Defaults on page
990.
child
button or the Foundation Wall

child
button to open the Build Foundation
177
Preferences
Select Floor and click the Edit button,
Road, Sidewalk, &

Driveway Defaults
Click the + beside Roads, Sidewalks and
Driveways or double-click the Road Tools
parent button to access the defaults
dialogs for the various road tools. See Road
and Sidewalk Defaults on page 629.
Select Road and click the Edit button, double-click the Road Tools
parent button,
or double-click the Road

child button to
open the Road Defaults dialog.
Select Driveway and click the Edit button or
double-click the Driveway
child button
to open the Driveway Defaults dialog.
Select Road Marking and click the Edit
button or double-click the Road Stripe
or Road Marking
child button to open
the Road Marking Defaults dialog.
Select Sidewalk and click the Edit button or
double-click the Sidewalk
child button
to open the Sidewalk Defaults dialog.
Schedule Defaults
Click the + beside Schedules or double-click
178
Select Window Schedule and click the Edit

button to access the Window Schedule
Defaults dialog.
Select Cabinet Schedule and click the Edit
button to access the Cabinet Schedule
Defaults dialog.
Select Fixture Schedule and click the Edit
button to access the Fixture Schedule
Defaults dialog.
Select Furniture Schedule and click the
Edit button to access the Furniture
Schedule Defaults dialog.
Select Electrical Schedule and click the
Edit button to access the Electrical
Schedule Defaults dialog.
Text, Callout, &

Marker Defaults
Click the + beside Text access the various
Text Defaults dialogs. See Text Defaults
and Preferences on page 818.
Select Text and click the Edit button,
double-click the Text Tools
parent
button, or double-click the Text

child
button to display the Text Defaults dialog.
See Text Defaults on page 838.
Select Callouts and click the Edit button or
the Schedule Tools

parent button to
access a list of the default schedule dialogs.
Select the type of schedule and click the Edit
button. See Schedule Defaults on page
992.
double-click the Callout

child button to
display the Callout Defaults dialog. See
Callout and Marker Defaults on page 838.
Select Door Schedule and click the Edit

button to access the Door Schedule
Defaults dialog.
or double-click the Marker

child button
to display the Marker Defaults dialog. See
Callout and Marker Defaults on page 838.
Select Markers and click the Edit... button
Dynamic Defaults
Select Room Label and click the Edit...

button to open the Room Label Defaults
dialog. See Room Label Defaults on page
838.
Select Railing and click the Edit button or
Select Arrow and click the Edit... button or
double-click the Straight Railing

child
button to open the Railing Defaults
dialog. See Railing Defaults Dialog on
page 229.
double-click the Text Line with Arrow
Select Deck Railing and click the Edit but-
or Leader Line
ton or double-click the Deck Railing

child button to open the Railing Defaults
dialog. See Railing Defaults Dialog on
page 229.
child button to open the
Arrow Defaults dialog. See Arrow
Wall, Railing, and

Fencing Defaults
Select General Wall and click the Edit...
button or double click the General Wall
double-click the Fencing

child button to
open the Fencing Defaults dialog. See
Fencing Defaults Dialog on page 229.
to open the
General Wall Defaults dialog. See
General Wall Defaults Dialog on page 274.

Select Interior/Exterior Wall and click the
Edit... button or double-click the Exterior
Wall
or Interior Wall
child button
open the Interior/Exterior Wall
Defaults dialog. See Exterior/Interior Wall
Select Pony Wall and click the Edit button
or double-click the Pony Wall
child
button to open the Pony Wall Defaults
dialog. See Pony Wall Defaults Dialog on
page 277.
Window Defaults
Select Window and click the Edit... button
or double-click the Window Tools
parent button to open the Window
Defaults dialog. See Window Defaults on
page 328.
Reset Defaults
Select Edit> Reset to Defaults... to open the
Reset to Defaults dialog. Use this dialog
to clear special settings made in various parts
of your plan. See Reset to Defaults on page
182.
Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults are values that can be set
or changed globally throughout a model.
These values are found in the default
specification dialogs of most objects,
including walls, doors, cabinets and rooms.
Dynamic defaults are followed by either a

(D) in the value field or a Default check box.
You can change the value for that kind of
object and all the objects of the same type
update automatically. The exception to this
179
Preferences
Defaults toolbar button
Select Fencing and click the Edit button or
rule is any object you edited the values for. In

that case, the value does not update when
you change the dynamic default value.
To reset a value back to the dynamic default,

type the letter D in the field or click the
Default checkbox.
Any object that has a material applied to it is
also using a dynamic default. Materials are
almost always set to Use Default. If you
change a default material, many objects in
the plan may also change. See Material
To edit a dynamic default, delete the (D) or

remove the check from Default box and type
the desired value.
CAD objects use layers in much the same

way other objects use dynamic defaults. If
you change the layer information in the
Display Options dialog, any object that is
currently using the settings By Layer for
an attribute, such as line style or color,
update whenever you change those settings.
Plan Defaults
Plan defaults control basic features of the
Chief Architect environment. To open the
Plan Defaults dialog, select Edit> Default
Settings...
, select Plan Defaults, and
click the Edit... button, or double-click the
Select Objects
180
button.
Plan Defaults
Plan Defaults Dialog
Check this box if you want the program

to require confirmation before an item is
deleted.
Ignore Casing for Opening Resize - Check
this box to allow openings such as doors to
be moved right up to an intersecting wall.
Clear the box to place openings within the
specified trim width of an intersecting wall.
Fixture/Furniture Resize Enable - Check
this box to allow the resizing of library
symbols in floor plan or any 3D view. When
enabled, fixture and furniture objects can be
resized from 1 to 2000 inches.
Show Pitch as Degrees - Check this box to
display the roof pitch in degrees.
Show Living Area - Chief Architect
automatically calculates the square footage
of each floor in the plan and shows this
number as the living area in floor plan view.

Remove the check from this box to disable
the total Living Area label.
Enter the number of Inches Scrolled by
Arrow Key in floor plan view.
2 Specify the Allowed Angles used when
Angle Snaps are enabled. See Angle

Snaps on page 84.
Select 15 Degrees to enable Angle Snaps

in 15 degree increments.
Select 7 1/2 Degrees and additional

angles to enable Angle Snaps in 7
degree increments.
You can also enter up to eight Additional

Angles in the fields provided. Click the
Number Style button to specify the format
used to enter angles. See Number Style/
Angle Style Dialog on page 873.
181
Preferences
1 Warn Before Delete Selected Item -
3 The Snap Grid allows you to snap
objects to specific points on-screen as

they are moved or resized. To enable grid
snapping, check Use Snap Grid/Units.
Specify the Snap Unit you prefer.
It may be helpful to change the Snap
Unit temporarily when working with certain objects such as stairs or terrain.
You can snap to an invisible grid or you can

Show Snap Grid, a visual indicator of where
the snap points are. You can also choose the
Snap Grid Color, and whether the snap grid

should Display as Dots rather than lines.
4 Choose whether to Show Reference
Grid, choose the Reference Grid Size,

and choose the Grid Color. You can also
choose whether the reference grid should
Display as Dots, or as lines.
You can also click Grid Snaps
toggle
button to turn on/off grid snapping or click
the Display Reference Grid
toggle
button to turn on/off the grid display. See
Grid Snaps on page 85.
Reset to Defaults
Select Edit> Reset to Defaults to open the
Reset to Defaults dialog.
This dialog allows you to clear the special
settings you have made in various parts of
your plan.
2 Floor and Ceiling Heights - Floor and
ceiling heights for any room can be

changed in the Room Specification
dialog. Check to reset the default values as
specified in the Floor Defaults dialog. See
3 Roof Groups - You can designate a
different roof group for a room in the
Room Specification dialog. This builds
2
3
1 The settings can be cleared for the

current floor or for All Floors.
182
the roof over this room and others in the

same roof group independently from the roof
built over other parts of the plan. Check to
reset to the default roof group, zero. See
Room Specification Dialog on page 296.
4 Roof Directives - You can set
directives describing how a roof surface

rises from a wall into a wall using the Roof
tab of the Wall Specification dialog. All
Roof tab items are unchecked and any value,
such as the roof pitch, is reset to the default
pitch. See Wall Specification Dialog on
page 259.
Preferences Dialog
5 Wall Top Heights and Wall Bottom
Heights - Wall shape and height can be

edited in cross section/elevation views.
Check to reset wall shapes and heights.
If your plan behaves strangely, the current settings may have been brought
forward from a previous version and/or no
longer be appropriate. To check for this, open
your plan and reset these items to their
defaults. Rebuild floors and ceilings to see if
the plan looks better. If so, you know what the
problem is. Rather than save your plan at this
point and lose all these settings, you may
want to investigate and find the specific settings causing the problem and fix only those.
Preferences Dialog
The settings in the Preferences
dialog are global; they apply to all plan
and layout files and are preserved between
sessions. Select Edit> Preferences to access
this dialog.
The Preferences dialog consists of panels.
Each panel is accessed by clicking on its
name in the category tree along the left side.
The + then becomes a -; to hide the

subcategories, press the -.
Preferences
The dialog remembers what panel you last

accessed and opens to that panel the next
time.
The category tree structure is similar to other

Windows programs. A + next to a category
indicates that it has subcategories to choose
from. Click the + to make the
subcategories visible.
183
Appearance Panel
1
2
5
6
7
1 When Contextual Menus are enabled,
you can right-click an object and a

contextual menu displays with options that
are unique to the selected object. The options
in a contextual menu are usually the same as
those on the Edit toolbar.
184
A menu of general commands displays if you

right-click in the window away from any
object.
Video: Controlling Pop-up Contextual
Menus
Appearance Panel
determining the effectiveness of the 3D

acceleration of your graphics card.
Check Show Coordinates to display the

coordinates of your cursor at all times on
the right side of the status bar.
The number style for the coordinates is

controlled in the Number Style/Angle
Style dialog. See Number Style/Angle
Style Dialog on page 873.
3 Check Show Line Weight to have the
Since Chief Architect can use the right-click

as a general select, you have the option to
disable or limit the contextual menus.
Check Enabled to activate contextual

menus. Clear the check box to disable
contextual menus.
Check Click Twice to Display to require

two right-clicks on an object before the
contextual menu displays. This allows
the first right-click to be a general select.
Min Display Weight - Specify the lowest

line weight possible regardless of how far
you zoom out. A Minimum Display Weight
of 0 is the same as 1. This setting is ignored
when printing or when in Print Preview
mode.
The line weight for CAD objects may be
defined individually through each
objects specification dialog or globally in the
Layer Display Options dialog.
2 The Status Bar at the bottom of the
main window displays information

about the current state of the program. See
The Status Bar on page 8.
Check Enable to activate the status bar or

clear the check box to disable it.
Check Show Screen Redraw Time to

display the number of seconds it takes to
redraw the screen. This is useful for
4 Specify how Toolbars present child
tools when a parent button is clicked.
Choose Parent-Child to display child

tools as buttons at the end of the toolbar
where the parent button resides.
Choose Drop Down to display child

tools when the drop-down arrow to the
right of the parent button is clicked.
185
Preferences
The contextual menu for a base cabinet
line weight appear on-screen. Because

of monitor DPI, lines may appear to be much
wider on screen than when they are printed.
Zooming closer may reflect a more accurate
idea of the actual line width.
5 Show Icons - Check this box to display

tool icons next to items in the menus.
6 Double Buffer Drawing - Double
buffering means that all drawing is

done to an offscreen bitmap and then copied
to the screen. The result is that the screen
does not flicker, but there may be a slight
delay before individual objects appear on
screen. This option does not affect render or
raytrace views.
Check Plans and Layouts to doublebuffer in floor plan view and layouts.
Check Elevations and Vector Views to

double buffer in cross/section elevation
and vector views.
Check Auto Cache to save a bitmap of

the last screen draw. This bitmap is used
to refresh the screen if no changes are
made to the model. This option is not
available on computers running Windows
Vista.
7 Obey Color On/Off Setting- Uncheck
this to display pictures and images in

color, even if color is turned off in a
particular view. If you check the box,
pictures and images appear in grey scale
when color is turned off.
8 Enhanced Line Drawing - This option
produces superior quality vector views,

but slows down the process. Remove the
check mark to disable the option.
Colors Panel
1
2
3
4
5
1 Background Color - Click the color
bar to open the standard Windows

Color Chooser dialog. See Color
Chooser Dialog on page 722. Select the
background color for all views except render
views. The background color for render
views is set in the 3D Settings dialog. See
Backdrop Tab on page 760.
186
2 Move Color - Click the color bar to
open the Color Chooser dialog.

Select the color of the lines that represent
object(s) as they are being moved.
3 Handle Fill Color - Click the color bar
to open the Color Chooser dialog.

Select the color for the edit handles for
selected objects.
Font Panel
4 Selection Fill Color - Click the color
bar to open the Color Chooser

dialog. Specify a color for selected objects.
The color may change to ensure that selected
objects arealways visible, so this may not
always be the color you expect.
If the move color and the handle fill

color are similar, it may be difficult to
distinguish between active and inactive
points. The colors should be sufficiently dissimilar to avoid confusion between active and
inactive points.
5 Use Selection Fill in Render Views -
Check this to use the Selection Fill

Color when selecting and editing objects in
render views.
Font Panel
The Font panel controls the conversion of
text in legacy plans when they are opened in
Chief Architect Version X1 as well as the

text used in materials lists.
1
2
3
1 Choose Legacy Text Conversion,
Preferences
Materials to define the font for that use.
Legacy Dimension Conversion, or
187
Legacy Text Conversion sets the default

font for text created in previous versions of
Chief Architect. See Sizing Text on page
824.
Legacy Dimension Conversion sets the
fonts for dimensions created in previous
versions of Chief Architect. See Sizing
Text on page 824.
Materials sets the default font for the
Materials List and Master Materials List
created in previous versions of Chief
Architect.
2 Click the arrow to select a font for the
specified use. The program finds the

fonts currently installed on the computer and
makes them available.
3 Select one or more font styles to apply

to the specified use.
4 Sample text displays the selected font

and font style.
Set the size of text objects individually in the
Text Specification dialog or globally on

the Text tab of the Text Defaults dialog.
Legacy Text and Dimension Conversion settings only affect plans from
previous versions when they are
opened in Version X1. You should set these
values to the default font that you used in previous versions before opening legacy plans.
Library Browser Panel

The Library Browser panel controls the
appearance of the Library Browser window.
1
2
3
4
188
1 View options control the display of the

main sections of the Library Browser.
Hide Selection Pane - Check to hide the

pane that displays objects in a selected
library or library folder.
Hide Preview Pane - Check to hide the pane
that shows a preview of a selected object.
Show Status Bar - Check to display the
Library Browser Status Bar. See The
Library Browser on page 670.
2 Selection Pane View items control the
display style of objects in the Selection

Pane.
Tiled to Fit Window - Select to display all
objects in a library or library folder. If there
are many objects, they appear very small.
Scrollable List - Select to display all library
objects at the highlighted level on a
scrollable list.
Show Names in Selection Pane - Check to

display the names of the objects in the
Selection Pane.
3 Preview Pane - Selection Pane
Layout - Select a radio button to

change the appearance of the Library
Browser.
Vertical - Displayed sections of the Library
Browser are divided vertically.
Horizontal - Displayed sections are divided
horizontally.
Stacked - Displayed sections are divided
both horizontally and vertically.
4 Disable Docking - Check to prevent
the Library Browser from docking to

the sides of the Chief Architect window. See
Docking the Library Browser on page 673.
Preferences
The Text & Page Setup panel controls some

text objects behavioris as well as the Page
Setup information for legacy plan and layout
files.
Legacy Plan and Layout Page Setup
settings only affect plans from previous
versions when they are opened in Version
X1. You should set these values to the default
font that was used in previous versions of
Chief Architect before opening legacy plans.
See Introduction on page 1023.
189
1
2
3
4
5
1 Text Specification Enter Key - Check
this box to insert a new line in the Text

Specification dialog when the Enter key
is pressed. If this is not checked, pressing
Enter closes the Text Specification
dialog. See Text Specification Dialog on
page 830.
2 Click the Legacy Plan Page Setup
button to open the Page Setup

dialog. These settings apply whenever you
open a plan, elevation, or CAD detail created
in an earlier version of Chief Architect. See
Page Setup Dialog on page 963.
3 Click the Legacy Layout Page Setup
button to open the Page Setup

dialog. These settings applied whenever you
General Panel
The General panel contains settings that affect
file management and program updates.
190
open a layout file created in an earlier

version of Chief Architect. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 963
4 Default Designer Information - Click
the Define button to enter designer

information that applies to all plans drawn in
Chief Architect. This default may be
overridden for individual plans. See Project
Information on page 166.
5 Leader Lines- Specify the Number of

Segments that text Leader Lines
have. Changes to this setting only affects
subsequently drawn Leader Lines: existing
lines are not affected.
General Panel
4
9
1 To use Auto Save, select the Enable
check box and enter a value greater

than zero to specify the frequency in minutes
that auto save files are created. Auto save
files are stored in the archive folder.
Note: Even with auto save active, you should
frequently save your work to the hard drive by
selecting File> Save
In the event that your computer shuts down

unexpectedly, you can recover your most
recent work by opening the auto save file
created by the program. See Auto Save
Files on page 163.
2 File Locking - Choose whether or not
to lock files when they are open. Only

.plan and .layout files are locked. Locking a
file prevents another program or copy of
Chief Architect from opening and modifying
the same file at the same time, which is
important when more than one computer has

access to the same set of files at the same
time.
Select Use File Locking to lock files by
default.
Select Disable File Locking to disable the
feature. You should not disable the feature
unless you have conflicts with file locking.
3 Recent File List - Specify the
maximum number of files to list at the

bottom of the File menu and in the Startup
Options dialog. Additional files are
included if you increase the value. You can
open any of the files in this list by selecting
them, making the list a quick way to access
your most recent work.
4 Undo - Click in the Enable check box

to enable Undos and Redos.
Maximum Undos - Specify how many

levels of Undo and Redo you want available,
191
Preferences
from 1 to 100. Undo files are saved in the

Undo Directory.
Record undo state only if idle longer than Use this setting to control how often undo
states are recorded. If set to 0 milliseconds,
an undo state is recorded every time a change
is made to a plan.
If set to a number larger than 0, an undo state
is recorded if the specified amount of time
has elapsed since the last change was made.
Depending on the time specified and the
speed work is being done, multiple changes
might be reversed with one undo.
This setting can have a significant effect on
the performance of the undo feature when
working with large plans.
5 Check For Program Updates- Check
Enable and specify a frequency in days

to check for program updates. By default
Chief Architect will check for program
updates once a day, whenever the program is
launched.
56 Check the box to Enable Thumbnail
Images. This only applies to

automatically created thumbnails. Even if
this option is disabled, you can still create a
thumbnail manually.
Select a radio button for Small or Large

thumbnails. Large thumbnails provide a
higher quality image.
7 Auto Archive Files - Select an archive

option. Every time a model is saved by
clicking the Save

button, selecting File>
Save from the menu, or pressing Ctrl + S on
the keyboard the current archive file is
overwritten. See Archive Files on page
162.
Select Hourly to save and append archive
files based on an hourly format.
Select Daily to save and append archive files
based on a daily format.
Select Previous Save to archive only the
most recently saved file, unappended.
8 Auto Archive Warning - Enter the
number of files that must be in the

Archive directory for the Manage Archives
warning to display. Enter 0 to disable the
warning. See Manage Archives on page
163.
9 Startup Options- Check Show
Options at Startup to open the
Startup Options dialog when Chief
Architect is launched. See Startup Options

on page 2.
Folders Panel
Chief Architect stores many support files in
folders. The default locations of these
directories are listed and can be redefined in
the Folders panel if necessary.
You do not need to change default locations
under normal circumstances, but sometimes
it may be preferable to locate certain files in
192
another location. To define a new default

directory, click the Browse button to specify
a folder on your computer.
Individual plan and layout files can be saved
to a preferred location using the File> Save
As
function.
Folders Panel
Temporary File Directories
You can redefine any directory, but you

should neither relocate the Temporary
Directory nor use it for anything other than
temporary files.
Graphics Directories
Graphics are stored in three locations: the
Images, Textures, and Backdrops
directories.
Although it is not recommended, different default directories for your graphics

can be specified. You should never rename
these directories. If you do, the Chief Architect Library Browser may not be able to find
them.
You can rename or add a folder to any of

these directories as well as add your own
graphics to the library. If you add, rename, or
move any files or folders while Chief
Architect is running, you must refresh the
Library Browser to see your changes. See
Refresh Library Browser on page 677.
193
Preferences
By default, undo files are stored in the same

directory as temporary files. You must define
a directory on a hard drive with sufficient
space to hold these files.
New Plans Panel
1 New Plans - Select the Imperial Units
or Metric Units radio button to

determine the units used in your new plans.
Once you create a new plan, the units of that
plan cannot be changed. You can specify a
different set of templates for imperial plans
and metric plans.
Be sure that you use an imperial plan

for your imperial template file and a
metric plan for your metric template file.
When a new plan is created, the plan is created in the units of the template file regardless of the units setting.
When Chief Architect is first opened on a

computer, it refers to the Windows system
settings to determine whether to use Imperial
or metric units.
Plan Template - Displays the plan template

file the program uses when you start a new
plan. Click the Browse button to select the
new template.
If a template file is not specified or cannot be

found, the program starts a new plan in the
selected units but uses the system defined
defaults for new plans.
Layout Template - Displays the layout plan

template the program uses when you start a
new layout file. Select a new default layout
template by typing in a new file pathname or
click the Browse button to select a new file.
For information about creating templates,
see Template Files on page 167.
194
Layers Panel
2 Open/Save As Directory - Control
how the program behaves when a new

plan is opened or an existing plan is saved.
Use Last Directory refers the program to the

directory last used to save or open a plan file.
Use This Directory refers the program to a
particular location specified by you.
Layers Panel
earlier versions of Chief Architect. The

options on the Layers panel determine how
layers are treated when you open plans
created in earlier versions.
Check Purge Unused Layers to delete any
layers that do not have a name and contain no
objects.
Check Keep All Layer Numbers to keep all
layers that were on the System and User tabs
in version 9 and use their layer numbers as
names.
Check Reset Default Layer Names to reset
the names of layers that were on the
Architectural and System tabs in version 9 to
the default names used in Chief Architect

Version X1.
If you would like your legacy plans to look
like they did in previous versions of Chief
Architect, uncheck Purge Unused Layers,
check Keep All Layer Numbers, and
uncheck Reset Default Layer Names.
Note: When loading legacy plans, there may
be a noticeable delay while converting these
layers.
2 If you check Modify Name In All
Layer Sets and then change the name

of a layer in one layer set, it will be changed
in all layer sets. Clear the checkmark if you
want name changes to only affect a single
layer set.
Unit Conversions Panel

In many places throughout Chief Architect,
you can choose what units are used with
195
Preferences
1 Layers were managed differently in
different objects. The program automatically

calculates conversions based on the data on
this panel.
These conversions are also useful when you
import drawings. Chief Architect draws
plans in real world measurements. When you
draw an object, it appears small on screen,
but the program sees it as actual size. The
drawing is only scaled at the time you print
it. This means that if you import a drawing

that is already scaled, you must convert the
units using this panel. You must add the units
here for them to be available in the Import
Drawing Wizard.
The default unit conversions are locked and
cannot be changed, but custom conversions
can be added to the list.
1
2
1 List of unit conversions available.

2 Sample - This area shows how the
selected unit converts to a sampling of

similar units. Use this to verify that any unit
conversion you add is correct.
1
3
196
3 Add, Edit, Delete, or Copy the unit
conversions. Certain unit conversions

are locked and cannot be edited or deleted.
If you click Add, Edit or Copy, the Add
Unit Conversion dialog displays.
Time Tracker Panel
1 Unit Name - Type the name of the unit.
measurement type must be selected before

the list is populated.
2 Default Unit - Check this box to
To create a new unit conversion
Names must be unique.
display this unit in places that present

lists of available units. For example, if you
have inches as units and make inches a
default, inches appear on the list when you
are given a choice of units, such as in the
Import Drawing Wizard. In other places,
such as the Material List, all units are listed.
Create a unit conversion for furlongs, a unit

of measurement equal to 660 feet that
originated in England.
1.
Click Add on the Unit Conversions

page of the Preferences dialog to
open the Add Unit Conversion dialog.
2.
Type Furlong into the unit name dialog.
3.
Select Length in the measurement type.
4.
Type 660 in the Multiply by field.
5.
Select ft in the combo box.
6.
Click OK to close the dialog.
3 Measurement Type specifies what the
unit measures. Select the appropriate

radio button.
4 Multiply by gives you a number to
multiply by to convert to the unit you

select from thedrop-down list. A
Preferences
Time Tracker Panel
Check Automatically Start Timer on File

Open to begin logging time whenever a file
is opened. If this is not checked you must
click the Start Time Logging

begin logging.
button to
197
Check Stop timer if idle for __ minutes,

and enter the number of minutes to stop
logging time when a plan has been idle.
Check Display Idle Timeout Dialog to warn
when a plan is considered idle.
You can enter or change the Default User

Name.
For more information, see Time Tracker on
page 881.
Architectural Panel
The options on the Architectural panel of the
Preferences dialog control how certain
types of objects are built.
1
2
3
4
1 Select the desired default behaviors for
selected Walls.
Check Show Same Wall Type Handles to

display edit handles on selected walls that
draw new walls of the same type when
dragged. See Same Wall Type Edit
Handles on page 243.
Check Select Room Before Wall in 3D to
select the room defined by a wall when you
click on the wall in 3D views. See Selecting
Walls on page 242.
198
Check Reverse Opening Indicators to

change the direction that opening
indicators point for doors, windows, and

cabinets. See Displaying Cabinets on page
555, Displaying Doors on page 308, or
Displaying Windows on page 335.
3 Check Stair Sections Move
Independently to allow stair sections

connected by landings to move separately,
without moving the entire staircase.
4 Select the desired Skylight Ceiling

Hole Default behavior.
If you select Skylights Automatically

Generate Ceiling Holes, the program
CAD Panel
automatically generates a ceiling hole for a

new skylight.
Select Manually Edit Ceiling Hole

Polylines to create your own ceiling holes.
CAD Panel
The CAD panel contains settings that define
how CAD blocks and other objects behave.
1
2
1 CAD Blocks - These settings determine
the default fill style behavior for CAD

blocks. See CAD Blocks on page 870.
Check Always use By Object for CAD

block fill style to retain the fill pattern for
component objects when they are
blocked. If you remove the check mark,
the fill pattern is determined in the CAD
Block Specification. See CAD
Block Specification Dialog on page 872.
Check Use By Object when creating
new CAD blocks to have By Object
checked on the General tab of the CAD
Block Specification dialog. See
General Tab on page 872.
Checked
Unchecked
2 Options - These settings control the
editability of polylines, polyline-like

objects such as walls connected to form a
room, and splines.
Check Edit Object Parts to edit the individual components of a polyline or

polyline-like object. This functionality
can also be accessed by clicking the Edit
Object Parts
button. See Edit
199
Preferences
Check Advanced Splines to enable the

advanced spline setting as the default
editing behavior for all subsequently
drawn splines. You can also enable this
function for an individual spline by click-
ing the Advanced Splines

edit button. See Advanced Splines on page
117.
Line Properties Panel

The Line Properties panel controls the
appearance of CAD lines.
Endcap Length (Pixels) - The beginning

and end of CAD lines that are not solid are
sometimes difficult to distinguish. Endcaps
200
can be placed to eliminate this problem.

Specify the number of pixels for endcap
length.
Sun Angle Panel
Sun Angle Panel
Define a default Latitude, Longitude and

Time Zone used when creating Sun Angles.
See Shadows on page 776.
Edit Panel
The settings on the Edit panel of the
Preferences dialog control the appearance
of the cursor and selection behavior of edit

handles.
Preferences
2
3

Video: Cursor Behaviors and Crosshair
Choices
1 Use a cursor with Cross Hairs in
different view types and control its

appearance.
201
Check Enable in Plan and Cross Section to

use a cross hair cursor in floor plan, cross
section, and elevation views. This option is
checked by default.
(3 x 2=6, and 6 + 1=7). A value of 1 results

in a handle that is 3 x 3 pixels. The allowed
range is from 1 to 10. Increasing the handle
size may make selecting objects easier.
Check Enable in Perspective Views to use a

cross hair cursor in perspective camera views
and overviews.
Enter a value, in pixels, for Edit Handle

Tolerance to specify how far close to an edit
handle you must click in order to select it.
Click the color bar to open the Color

Chooser dialog and specify the color of the
cross hairs.
Check (S)tart and (E)nd Indicators to

display an S and an E at the start and end
points of selected line- and arc-based objects
and on the selected edge of a polyline-based
objects. See Selected Edge on page 92.
Cross hair size is specified as a percentage of

window width. Specify Size (% of Window
Width) as 100% to extend the cross hairs
across the entire screen.
Set the Aperture Size, measured in pixels.
The aperture is the space where the cross
hairs meet. A value of 0 makes the cross
hairs meet at a point. Larger numbers leave a
gap in the center.
3 Specify program behavior when using
Marquee Select. See Marquee Select

on page 93.
Select Intersect Rectangle to select any

objects intersected by or located within
the marquee.
Select Contained in Rectangle to select

only objects located entirely within the
marquee. This option provides the best
results in most situations.
Select Center Inside Rectangle to select

only objects whose center points are
located within the marquee.
2 Specify the desired Selection settings,
which affect how objects are selected

and their appearance.
Enter an Edit Handle Size in pixels. The edit

handles are twice this number of pixels plus
one. For example, the default value is 3,
which results in a handle that is 7 x 7 pixels
Behaviors Panel
The settings on the Behaviors panel of the
Preferences dialog define basic editing
behaviors of CAD and architectural objects.
202
Behaviors Panel
1 Rotate/Resize About defines the point
an object or a group of objects rotates

or resizes about. See Rotate/Resize About
on page 81.
Select Object Center to rotate or resize

the selection about its center point.
Object Center is the default setting.
Select Current Point to rotate the object

about the current CAD point instead.
Concentric
Resize
Resize About
Current Point
Rotate about
Object Center
Preferences
Rotate Jump defines the angle an object or

group of objects jumps to when it is rotated.
It overrides the angle snaps set in Plan
Defaults. If you set this to zero, the angle
snaps set under Plan Defaults are used.
Rotate about
Current Point
To resize a CAD object about a current point,

select the Resize Edit Type.
This function can also be accessed by
clicking the Resize
button. See Edit
Box rotating about Current

Point with Jump set to 45
203
2 Select one of the four Edit Type
3 The Primary Movement Methods
options. For detailed information about

the different edit types and how they affect
different objects, see Edit Behaviors on
page 86.
control the directions that you can

move objects using their edit handles.
Select Orthogonal to move an object

perpendicular to any of its edges.
If Concentric is selected, specify the desired

Jump increment.
Select Polar to move an object at

Allowed Angles.

The settings on the Snap Properties panel of
the Preferences dialog control how object
1 Check any combination of object
snapping options. You can also turn

these options on an off with the toggle
buttons on the toolbar.
204
snaps behave and appear. See Object

Snaps on page 82.
Endpoint - Enables snapping to the

ends of lines, arcs, splines and other
objects.
Midpoint - Enables snapping to the
midpoint of an object such as a line or
arc. For objects such as boxes, you can snap

to the midpoint of any side of the box.
Endpoint and midpoint snaps
Intersection - Enables snapping to the

intersection of two objects, such as the
intersection of a line with another line.
Intersection snapping also snaps extension
lines to objects, and allows you to snap two
extension lines to each other.
Center - Enables snapping to the

center of cabinets, fixtures, furniture,
as well as circles and arcs.
Note: Center snapping only works for arcs
and circles if Show Arc Centers and Ends is
turned on. See.Aligning Arc Centers on
page 128.
Quadrant - Enables snapping to the

left, right, top, or bottom of an object.
Only used for arcs and circles.
Intersection snaps
2 Check any combination of extension
anchor options. You can also use the

toggle buttons on the toolbar.
Tangent Extensions - Enables

snapping to a point tangent to the point
where the extension anchor sits.
Quadrant snaps
Tangent extension
Perpendicular Extensions - Enables

snapping to a point perpendicular to the
point where the extension anchor sits.
On object snaps
Points/Markers - Allows you to snap

to any temporary points you may have
placed, as well as callouts and markers.
Points/Markers snaps
205
Preferences
On Object - Enables snapping to any

point on the selected object, including
CAD objects and cabinets.
The Snap Distance controls how far your the

cursor can be from a snap point for the snap
to occur. It is measured in screen pixels.
Check the box beside Bumping/Pushing to
enable bumping and pushing. See Users
Guide, Bumping/Pushing on page 124.
Perpendicular extension
Orthogonal Extensions - Enables

snapping to a point on a 90-degree axis
from the extension anchor.
Specify the Maximum Bump Distance

(pixels), which is the distance that a selected
object must be dragged to override bumping
and move past an obstructing object.
Check the box beside Angle Snaps to enable
snapping to allowed angles. See Angle
Snaps on page 84.
Check Snap Cabinets After Paste to make
the cabinets snap together after you paste
them.
4 Control the appearance of Snap

Orthogonal extension
3 Options - Specify the number of
extension line anchors that can display

at one time by changing the Objects in
History setting.
Indicators.
Specify an Indicator Size in pixels.

Click the color bar to select an Indicator
Color and an Extension Color from the
Chooser Dialog on page 722.
Material List Panel

The Material List panel controls which
categories are included in Materials Lists.
The names of all categories and their ID
206
prefixes are listed here. They are defined by

the program and cannot be changed.
Report Style Panel
When a material is entered in the Material

List, the program decides what category it
goes in and assigns it an ID, which is the
prefix followed by a number. EX1 would be
the first exterior trim piece entered in the
Material List for a particular plan.
Include These Categories - Check the
categories you want to to include in every
new material list generated. Before you hide

a category, make sure you know what items
are listed within it.
It is usually better to remove categories
from individual plan lists in the Layer
Display Options dialog, rather than globally. See Layer Display Options Dialog on
page 218.
Report Style Panel
Preferences
The Report Style panel specifies how the

Material List appears. This information can
also be specified individually per Material
List by choosing Tools> Display Options
from within that Material List.
207
2
3
4
1 Include These Columns - Check the
columns that should be included in the

Material List.
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons
to change the order that columns appear. To
change the order, select one or more items in
the list and click the button. The selected
columns move up or down by one in the list.
For a more detailed description of Material
Lists, see Materials Lists on page 1003.
2 When Querying Suppliers &
narrow or broaden your query when

searching the Master List.
Grid - Choose whether or not grid
lines display in the materials list. If you
want lines, choose to have horizontal,
vertical, or both. If the lines are turned off,
they do not show on-screen or in print. You
can select Solid Lines for the grids instead of
dotted lines.
4 Background Colors can be set for

even and odd numbered lines.
Manufacturers - Select an option to
Master List Panel

The Master List panel specifies how the
Master List(s) for materials appears. Master
Lists contain price and manufacturer
208
information for materials. You can maintain

Multiple Master Lists, but only one may be
used at any given time.
Categories Panel
2
3
4
column to include it in the Master
material list.
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons

to change the order of columns. To change
the order, select one or more items in the list
and click the button. The selected columns
move up or down by one in the list. See
2 Master List File - The name and
pathname of the Master List currently

referenced is shown. It is referenced for all
subsequently opened plans when a material

list is generated from any model.
3 Press Browse to select a different
Master List. Navigate the directory

structure until you find the new Master List
to be used, select it, and click OK.
4 Press New to create a new Master List.
Name and save it in the location of your

choice. When you create a new Master List,
it is blank until you build a material list and
enter prices, supplier or manufacturer
information. The Master List is saved
automatically when you close.
Categories Panel
The Categories panel allows you to expand
the scope of the materials list by specifying
additional information in subcategories
under each of the main materials list
headings.
209
Preferences
1 Include These Columns - Check each
2
4
5
To create or modify a subcategory
1 Select a Category from the list.

2 Existing subcategories display here.
3 To Add, Edit or Delete a subcategory,
select it and click the appropriate

button. Clicking Add or Edit opens the SubCategory dialog.
4 In the Sub Category dialog, give the

subcategory a name to appear in the
SubCat column of the materials list. This is
the name used to select the material when
applying it to an item, so use something
logical to you.
5 Doors, Windows, Cabinets, Fixtures,
Furniture, and Electrical objects can
210
generate schedules. Any subcategory for

these objects can appear as a column in that
schedule. Name the schedule heading.
In the example above, two subcategories are
added to the Windows category: GLZ
(Glazing) and EXT (Exterior Trim). See
Editing Materials Lists on page 1011 .
Only objects with a related Components
dialog can use this material subcategory
capability. Additional material information
can be added to a selected object in its
Components dialog, which is accessed by
clicking the Components
edit button. See
Components Dialog on page 1014.
Render Panel
Render Panel
1
2
4
6
3
5
only affects surfaces with materials that

have assigned textures. When textures are
turned off, surfaces are rendered using
the color assigned to the material, but not
the texture. Pattern lines seen in other 3D
views are not drawn in render views. See
Mapping Patterns and Textures on page
705.
The Render panel controls settings for render

previews and final views. Since these
settings significantly affect rendering speed,
it is a good idea to optimize them for your
system.
Note: If you have used previous versions of
Chief Architect and find that render performance in Version X1 is slower than in earlier
versions, compare the setting in the Render
panel with those in the older version and
make sure they are equivalent.
Smooth Edges removes the jagged edges

that sometimes result where two surfaces
meet, producing cleaner lines. This feature slows rendering considerably and is
typically used only for final render views.
This option can also be accessed from the
contextual menu in a render view.
Smooth Faces generates smooth curved

surfaces in render views. It uses new surface normals to alter the lighting effects
1 Select the options to use when Render
Previews and Final Views are created.

These options are available for both views
and can be selected independently.
Use Textures controls whether or not

surfaces are rendered with textures. This
211
Preferences
on surfaces, making them appear curved,

even though it does not alter the shape of
the surfaces. This option should only
have a minimal impact on rendering
speed. It can also be accessed from the
contextual menu.
Use Transparency allows transparency

effects. For some video cards, rendering
may be slowed when this feature is
selected.
Show Images controls the display of

Chief Architect images, such as plants,
cars and people, in render views.
Show Shadows controls whether or not

shadows display. Shadows are extremely
complex to calculate and slow down rendering speed significantly. They are typically used only for Final Views.
Multiple lights can cast shadows at the same

time, and rendering time increases.
Experiment with this feature before using it
as a default.
Show Shadows can also be accessed from the
contextual menu in render view. You should
only set this from the contextual menu rather
than as a preference.
212
Use Triangles divides large surfaces,

such as walls, floors, and ceilings, into
small triangles. This feature enhances
lighting effects when point or spot light
sources are used.
Max Triangle Size controls the size of
the triangles modeled by the program.
The smaller the maximum triangle size,
the more triangles used. Lighting looks
better with smaller triangles, but rendering takes longer. The minimum value is
6".
Other Render Settings

These following settings affect both the
Preview and Final View functions.
2 The Soft Shadows option displays
shadows with soft edges instead of hard

edges. This feature is only used when Show
Shadows and Smooth Edges are also used.
3 Always Rebuild recalculates the 3D
model and render data every time the

view is redrawn. If this is not checked, the
program redraws the screen without
recalculating the model.
When Always Rebuild is turned off, you may
notice lighting and surfaces appear incorrect
after multiple camera movements.
A model can be rebuilt in any view by
pressing F5 on the keyboard or clicking
Refresh Display
4 The Keep All Surfaces option makes
the renderer calculate all surfaces of a

model. Turning off this feature may speed up
rendering because surfaces that cannot be
seen in the view are ignored, but if the
camera is moved and a surface that was not
originally visible comes into view, there will
be a gap in the view. This feature is not
needed when Always Rebuild is selected.
You can also get fast performance in render
view by checking Keep All Surfaces
clearing the Always Rebuild check box.
Lighting may be wrong when the camera
moves between rooms, so use F5 to refresh
the screen and update the lighting.
5 The Use Optimizations option directs
your computer to save rendering data to

video card. On some OpenGL graphics
cards, this may cause problems if the
rendering data for your model is greater than

the amount of memory on the card. If your
computer stops responding when rendering,
try removing the check from this check box.
This slows down the rendering time
considerably, so if the problem is not solved,
leave the check box selected.
6 The Surface Backdrop option
generates the backdrop image using

hardware acceleration. For some graphics
cards, this option improves rendering speed
considerably.
7 Information regarding your OpenGL

graphics card displays here. This
information may be important if you are

having problems generating render views.
Notice the information following the
Acceleration label. If your video card
supports hardware acceleration for OpenGL,
this says Installed Client Driver. If it does
not, it says No Hardware Acceleration.
There is a significant difference in speed
between rendering with acceleration and
without.
The Max Lights value indicates how many
lights you can have turned on at any given
time when generating a render view. This
value should be 8 or higher, depending on
your video card.

The options on the Texture Filter panel
affect the appearance of textures in render
views. How the appearance is affected also
depends on your video card as different cards
produce different results, but if you are not

pleased with the appearance of your textures,
changing these settings helps.
Preferences
1
2
213
When a texture is applied to a surface in a

render view, its size must be adjusted to
accomodate the size of the surface. This
process is referred to as magnification and
minification.
1 Magnification - Control how textures

are mapped when magnified.
2 Minification - These options apply to
textures that must be reduced to fit the

surface they are applied to.
Reset Options Panel
If message boxes have been suppressed, you

can make them appear again by clicking
Reset Message Boxes.
Click the Reset Preferences button to restore
all preferences to those that originally came
with the program.
214
Resetting all preferences to default is a

drastic step and should be done with
extreme caution.
Chapter 6:
Layers
Chapter Overview

Video: Working with Layers and Layer
Sets to Get the Views You Want
Video: Layers - Layers and Layer Sets
The concept of layers is similar to a stack of
transparencies, with groups of objects stored
on each sheet. Layers are used to organize
and manage the display of all objects in all
views and the Materials List. Layers can also
be locked to prevent accidental editing.
Every object in a plan must exist on a layer.
One layer can be thought of as one
transparency sheet. You can determine
which layer an object is on by looking in its
specification dialog or by selecting the object
and looking on the status bar. You can
customize how each layer displays in the

Layers are organized into groups called layer
sets. The layer set currently in use
determines which objects display, and how
those objects are shown. You can customize
the layer display settings for all layers in a
layer set without affecting other layer sets.
You can copy, add and delete layer sets in the
Layer Set Management dialog. All
views use a unique layer set. You can specify
the initial layer set that is used for a
particular type of view in the Layer Set
Defaults dialog.
Chapter Contents
Layer Sets
Layer Set Management
Active Layer Set Control
Layer Display Options Dialog
Displaying Objects
Layers
Introductory Training Video: Understanding Layers
215
Select Layer Dialog

Layer Tab
Layer Painter
Exporting/Importing Layer Sets

Layer Set Defaults Dialog
Layer Sets
Video: Layers - AIA Naming Convention Layer Set
Layer Sets are used to control the layer
settings for different views. All views
associated with a plan file - including views
sent to layout - make use of the layer sets
stored in that .plan file.
A layer set consists of a complete list of all
layers in the current plan and the display
settings for each. These display settings can
be modified, and can be different for each
layer set.
Any changes made to a layer set in one view
affects all other views using the same layer
set. If this is not desired, you can create a
unique layer set for a particular view. See
Layer Set Management on page 217.
Each plan file can have an unlimited
number of layer sets.
Layout Layer Sets

Views sent to layout use layer sets saved with
the plan, rather than with the layout. See
Displaying Layout Views on page 981.
Layer Sets & Templates

Layers and layer sets are plan-specific. A
custom layer set that you created in one plan
file may not be available in another. To
include a custom layer set in all new plan
216
files, add it to your template plan. See

Modify All Layer Sets

If you want changes made in one layer set to
apply to all other layer sets in the current
plan, check Modify All Layer Sets in the
Layer Display Options dialog before
making changes. The layer name and display
attributes are applied to all other layer sets.
For example, if you check Modify All Layer
Sets and then change the color and line style
for the Text layer of the Electrical Set, the
same changes are applied to the Text layer of
the Framing Set of the same plan.
Layer Set Defaults

Whenever a particular type of view is
created, such as floor plan view or a framing
overview, a specific layer set is activated for
that view. Which layer set becomes active
depends on the type of view created.
The default layer sets for nine different view
types, including the Reference Display, are
specified in the Layer Set Defaults
dialog.
Each of these layer sets can be edited as
needed in the Layer Display Options
dialog. See Layer Display Options Dialog
on page 218.
Normally, it is best to change the settings in
the existing default layer sets rather than
select different default layer sets, but you can

do so if needed. See Layer Set Defaults
Dialog on page 225.

The Layer Set Management
dialog lists the layer sets available in
the current plan or layout file and lets you
add and remove layer sets and modify and
copy existing layer sets. Select Tools>
Display Settings> Layer Set Management

to open the Layer Set Management
dialog.
Click a layer set name in the list to select

it.
Click the New... button to open the New

Layer Set Name dialog and create a
new layer set. using the system default
settings.
Click the Define... button (or double

click a layer set) to open the Layer
Display Options dialog and make
changes to the selected layer set.
Click the Copy... button to open the New

Layer Set Name dialog and enter a
name for a copy of the currently selected
layer set.
Click the Delete button to delete the

selected layer set from the current file.
1 Use the Available Layer Sets options
to manage the layer sets saved with the

current plan or layout file.
217
Layers
The Delete button is on enabled if the

layer set can be deleted. You cannot
delete the active layer set.
Do not delete any layer sets that are used
by a layout.
Click the Import... button to import layer

settings from a .layers file. See Exporting/Importing Layer Sets on page 224.
Click the Export... button to export the
layer settings in the current plan in a .layers file. See Exporting/Importing Layer
Sets on page 224.
2 The Active Layer Set for Current
View options affect only the layer set
used in the view that was active when the
Layer Set Management dialog was
opened. You can select a new Active Layer

Set from the drop-down list or click the
Define... button to make changes to the
active layer set in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
3 Reference Display Layer Set - Click
the drop down list to specify which

layer set is used when the reference display is
turned on. While the default Reference
Display Set is usually sufficient, you can
create as many layer sets as you like and use
any of them for the reference display. See
Reference Display on page 369.
Active Layer Set Control

The Active Layer
Set Control dropdown list displays on the toolbar for all views
and provides convenient access to a list of all
layer sets saved with the plan. Click the drop

down list to select a new layer set for the
current view.

The Layer Display Options dialog
controls the display of layers in a
selected layer set. It consists of a table that
lists all available layers and the attributes for
each. Layers can be added and deleted, and
there is no limit to the number of layers that
can exist in a plan.
From any view except the Materials List,
select Tools> Display Settings> Display
Options...
to open the Layer Display
Options dialog. This dialog is resizeable
218
and remembers its size between program

sessions.
Selecting Tools> Reference Floors>
Reference Display Options opens the
Layer Display Options dialog with the
Reference Display Set active. See
Reference Floor on page 368.
Selecting Tools> Dislay Options in the
Materials list opens the Materials List
Display Options dialog. See Displaying
Objects in the Materials List on page 1012.
control which layer set is affected by

changes made in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
The currently selected layer set displays.

Click the drop-down list to select a different layer set.
Click the Copy Set button to create a

copy of the current layer set.
When Modify All Layer Sets is checked,

changes made in the Layer Display
Options dialog apply to all other layer
sets in the plan when you click OK.
Modify All Layer Sets is a one-time
action. It is always unchecked when
the Layer Display Options dialog is opened.
2 Click the column header to sort all
layers in the Layer Display Options

dialog by that column.
In the Name column, sorting is case sensitive to allow greater control over organization.
A red + in the Used column indicates

which layers have objects placed on them
in the current plan. This column cannot
be edited.
A check in the Disp column indicates

which layers are set to be visible. This
controls the display of objects in 2D and
3D views.
An M in the Mat column indicates which

layers are included in the Materials List.
A yellow in the Lock column indicates

which layers are locked, preventing
219
Layers
1 The Available Layer Sets options
objects on that layer from being manually

edited.
The Color column shows the line color

for each layer. You can sort this column
so that like colors are listed together.
The Style column shows the line style for

each layer and can be sorted so that like
line styles are listed together.
The Size column displays the line weight

used by each layer and can be sorted so
that like line weights are listed together.
Click the Library button to open the

Library Browser to the Line Styles
library. See Line Styles on page 688 for
more information.
display at the bottom of the dialog. If

multiple layers are selected, no change
may display for attributes that are different
among the selected layers.
When one or more layers are selected
and you click OK, the program remembers your selection so that the same layers
are selected when you reopen the Layer Display Options dialog.
4 When a layer or layers is selected,
single or shared layer attributes can be

edited in the section titled Properties for
Selected Layer. Line Color, Style and Size
affect lines in floor plan view and surface
edge lines in vector views.
3 Layers are named so that similar object
To change the color of lines on a selected

layer, click the Color bar to select a new
color in the Color Chooser dialog. See
Color Chooser Dialog on page 722.
Double-click a layer in the Name column to

rename it.
To change the line style of a selected

layer, click the Style drop-down arrow or
click the Library button to select a line
style from the library. See Line Styles
on page 688.
To change the width of lines on a selected

layer, enter a Size.
To turn off a selected layer, uncheck

Display. See In All Views on page 221.
To exclude all objects on a selected layer

from the Materials List, uncheck Include
in Materials List. See Materials Lists
on page 222.
To protect the objects on a selected layer

from accidental changes, check Lock.
Items on locked layers display but cannot
be selected, deleted, moved, or modified.
See Locking Layers on page 222.
types such as Cabinets, Base and

Cabinets, Wall are listed near one another
alphabetically.
If a layer is turned on, a checkmark is shown

in the Disp column. If a layer is turned off,
the column is blank.
Layers are selected by clicking them in the
table. Hold down the Shift key or the Ctrl
key to select multiple layers at once. Click
the Select All button to select all layers in the
table. When selected, a layers attributes
220
Displaying Objects
5 The buttons at the bottom left of the
dialog provide additional control of the

layers in the table.
Click the Select All button to select all layers
in the table at once. This allows changes to
be quickly applied to all layers.
Click the New... button to open the New
Layer Name dialog and create a new layer
with the unique name of your choice.
Duplicate layer names are not allowed.
Note: New layers are added to all layer sets.
However, newly created layers will be turned
on to display only in the current layer set.
Click the Copy button to create a copy of the

selected layer. The new layer is added
directly below the original layer in the table.
Click the Delete button to delete the selected

layer. You cannot delete used layers or any of
the system layers used by Chief Architect.
Click the Reset Names button to revert layer
names for system layers back to the original
names that installed with Chief Architect.
This does not affect layers you created.
Click OK to close the dialog and apply your
changes.
Click Cancel to close the dialog, ignoring
any edits.
6 Select a layer to serve as the Current
CAD Layer from the drop-down

list.This is the default layer used for new
CAD objects such as lines and arcs. See
Current CAD Layer on page 869.
7 Click the size grip and drag to resize the

Displaying Objects
The display of layers in 2D views, 3D views,
and materials lists is controlled by layer set
in the Layer Display Options dialog. See
Layer Display Options Dialog on page
218.
Note: Not all objects display in all views. For
instance, door labels do not appear in 3D
views and room labels do not appear in materials lists, regardless of the layer they are
placed on, or whether the layer is turned on
or not.
try to place or draw an object on a layer that

is hidden, the program warns you and asks if
you want to turn the layer on.
The Color, Style, and Size attributes given to

the layer the object is on determines how an
object appears in floor plan view.
Layers
In All Views
All layers with a check in the Disp column
display in all views. Objects that are not
displayed cannot be seen or selected. If you
221
Many objects, including all CAD and text

objects, allow you to override the line style,
color, and line weight for an individiual
instance without changing its layer.
Materials Lists
Layers showing an M in the Mat column
are included in subsequently generated
materials lists. This allows you to control the
inclusion of objects in the Materials List on a
layer-by-layer basis.
select the object and click the Components

edit button. See Components Dialog
on page 1014.
Locking Layers
Objects on layers with a lock symbol in the
Lock column are visible but cannot be
selected. This prevents them from being
accidentally changed.
Some default layers, such as Patterns, do not

generate materials and are not included by
default. See Controlling Object Display by
Layer on page 1012.
Layers with objects that have been
extensively edited and do not require further
editing are good candidates for locking.
The overall content and organization of

materials lists can be controlled in the
Preferences dialog. See Material List
Panel on page 206.
To control the components that are included
in a Materials List for a particular object,
Locking a layer does not prevent the program

from modifying the objects on that layer.
New objects cannot be drawn on a locked
layer. If you lock a layer and then attempt to
draw a new object on that layer, a warning
asks you to unlock the layer.
Select Layer Dialog

When new CAD objects are drawn,
they are placed on the Current CAD
Layer. See Current CAD Layer on page
869. You can specify which layer is the
Current CAD Layer by selecting CAD>
222
Current CAD Layer to open the Select

Layer dialog.
This dialog is also used for the Layer Painter
tool. See Layer Painter on page 224.
Layer Tab
This dialog can only be accessed by clicking

the Current CAD Layer
button. It is
similar in appearance to the Layer Display
Options dialog but only allows a layer to be
selected.
Layer Tab
Layers
The Layer tab is found in the specification

dialogs for many different objects. Here you
can specify on what layer the prgram uses to
display the selected object.
Note: In some specification dialogs, layer
information is located on the Line Style tab
rather than the Layer tab.
223
1
2
3
1 Check Default to place the selected
object on the default layer for that

object type.
2 Click the drop down list to select from
3 Click Define to open the Layer
Display Options dialog and select,

modify, or add a new layer. See Layer
all layers. Any object can be placed on

any layer.
Layer Painter
The Layer Painter tool allows you to
move an object to any layer from any
view.
Select Tools> Display Settings> Layer

Painter
to open the Select CAD
Layer dialog. Choose a layer, click OK, then
click objects in any view to move them to
that layer.
Exporting/Importing Layer Sets

Layer sets created in one plan can be
exported as a *.layers file and imported into
other plans. This is a convenient alternative
to re-creating a layer set that may already
exist in another plan.
224
Exporting Layer Sets

To export layer sets from the current plan,
click the Export button in the Layer Set
Management dialog, or select File> Export>
Layer Sets
to open the Save Layer
Set File dialog.
Select a name and location and click Save.

The exported layer sets can be found in the
specified location as a *.layers file.
Browse to and select the *.layers file you

want to import and click Open. The Import
Layer Sets dialog opens.
Importing Layer Sets

To import layer sets (*.layers file) into the
current plan, click the Import button in the
Layer Set Management dialog, or select
File> Import> Layer Sets
to display the
Open Layer Set File dialog.
Select a layer set or hold down the Shift key

to select multiple sets and click OK.
Layers
The Layer Set Defaults dialog is

used to specify the initial layer sets for
different view types. Select Edit> Default
Settings to open the Default Settings
dialog, then select Layer Sets from the list
and click the Edit button.
225
When a new view is created for any of the

specified view types, Chief Architect sets the
default layer set listed here as the active layer
set. Click the drop-dpwn list to change the
initial layer set for each view.
Select Use Active Layer Set to use the

currently active layer set for the new view
when it is created.
Click the Define... button to open the Layer
Display Options dialog and change the
layer settings for the layer set. See Layer
226
Walls, Railings,
& Fencing
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Walls
Walls are the single most important
building component in Chief Architect. By
creating walls and defining the rooms created
by the walls, you are telling the program how
you want the 3D model built.
There are several ways that walls can be
created in Chief Architect. The most
common is to simply draw them with the
wall tools. Most of this chapter covers the
creation and modification of walls using
these manual wall tools.
Exterior walls can also be automatically
generated when a new floor is built by using
another floor (above or below) as a model.
For more, see Adding Floors on page 366.
In addition, walls can be created by
converting 2D CAD lines into actual walls
using the CAD to Walls tool. See CAD to

Walls on page 249.
Another feature that can be used to generate
walls automatically is the House Wizard.
This tool allows you to define and arrange
room spaces that the program uses to
generate walls. See House Wizard on page
884.
Chapter Contents
Default Settings
The Wall Tools
The Deck Tools
The Fencing Tools
Exterior and Interior Walls
Foundation Walls
Pony Walls
Railings
Invisible Walls
Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks
227
Walls
Chapter 7:
Hatch Wall
Break Wall
Deck Railings
Deck Edge
Fencing
Drawing Walls
Connecting Walls
Displaying Walls
Editing Walls
Editing Straight/Curved Wall
Combinations
Aligning Walls
Attic Walls
Double Walls
CAD to Walls
Wall Type Definitions
Wall Type Definitions Dialog
Exporting Wall Definitions
Importing Wall Definitions
Curved Walls and Roofs
Stepped and Raked Walls
Wall Specification Dialog
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog
Wall/Railing/Fencing Defaults
Default Settings
Default Settings can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings.
Click the + next to Walls to display the
walls sub-headings. Select a subheading and
click the Edit... button to open the Wall
Defaults dialog associated with your
selection.
Wall defaults can also be accessed by
double-clicking the Wall Tools
button.
The settings in the various wall defaults

dialogs determine what wall types are drawn
when the different wall tools are used. It is a
good idea to be familiar with these settings
and how they relate to your style of building.
See Wall Type Definitions on page 251.
General Wall Defaults

The settings in the General Wall Defaults
dialog control general attributes that
apply to all wall types. See General Wall
228
Wall Defaults
Double-click the Exterior Wall
Interior Wall
or
button to open the
Interior/Exterior Wall Defaults dialog
and specify which wall type is drawn when

using the Interior and Exterior Wall tools.
See Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults Dialog
on page 276.
Foundation and
Retaining Wall Defaults
Double-click the Foundation Wall
button or Retaining Wall
button to open
the Foundation Defaults dialog and
specify which wall type is drawn when the
Foundation and Retaining Wall tools are
used, the size of the footings, and other
information used when building foundations.
See Foundation Defaults on page 372.
The Wall Tools
Double-click the Pony Wall

button to
open the Pony Wall Defaults dialog and
set the wall type used for both the upper and
lower portion of pony walls and other data
used when drawing pony walls. See Pony
Wall Defaults Dialog on page 277.
Railing Defaults Dialog
Deck Railing Defaults Dialog

Walls
Pony Wall Defaults
Double-click the Deck Tools

parent
button or any of its child tools except
Polygon Shaped Deck
to open the
Deck Railing Defaults dialog.
The tabs in this dialog are the same as their

respective tabs in the Wall Specification
dialog. See Wall Specification Dialog on
page 259.
Double-click either the Straight Railing

or Curved Railing
button to open the

Railing Defaults dialog and specify what
type of railing is drawn when either Railing
tool is used.
page 259.
Fencing Defaults Dialog

Double-click the Fencing Tools
parent
button or either of its child tools to open the
Fencing Defaults dialog and specify what
type of fencing is drawn when using the
Fencing tool.
page 259.
The Wall Tools

Select Build> Straight Wall to access
the wall tools. The type of wall drawn
by each wall tool is specified in its
corresponding defaults dialog.
The Curved Wall tools are similar to
their corresponding Straight Wall
Tools. Select Build> Curved Wall to access
these tools.
Exterior Walls
The Exterior Wall and Curved
Exterior Wall tools draw walls
using the default wall type specified for
exterior walls in the Exterior/Interior

Wall Defaults dialog. See Exterior/
Interior Wall Defaults Dialog on page 276.
Interior Walls
The Interior Wall and Curved
Interior Wall tools draw walls
using the wall type specified for interior
walls. The interior wall type is defined in the
Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults
Defaults dialog.
229
Invisible Walls
Note: Whether a wall is recognized as an
exterior or interior wall by the program is
determined by its position in the model, not
by the tool used to draw it. See Exterior and
Foundation Walls
The Foundation Wall and
Curved Foundation Wall tools
draw foundation walls according to the
information specified in the Foundation
Defaults dialog. Foundation walls normally
have a footing and can be drawn on any floor
of the model, not just the foundation floor.
See Foundation Walls on page 232.
Pony Walls
A Pony Wall, also called a split
wall, is defined as a wall with two
separate wall types, one for the upper portion
and another for the lower portion.
The Pony Wall and Curved Pony Wall tools
draw pony walls using the information
specified in the Pony Wall Defaults
dialog. You can also convert a normal wall
into a pony wall and vice versa in the Wall
Specification dialog. See Pony Walls on
page 233.
Railings
The Railing and Curved Railing
tools create railings. The type and
height of railings drawn with this tool are
defined in Railing Defaults dialog. See
Railing Defaults Dialog on page 229.
230
Invisible walls are walls used to define

separate room areas in a plan. They can
display in floor plan view but not in 3D
views. Floors, ceilings and roofs generate
above and below the rooms defined by these
walls. You can also convert a normal wall
into an invisible wall and vice versa in the
Wall Specification dialog. See Invisible
Walls on page 234.
Polygon Shaped Room

Video: Framing Decks - The New Polygon Deck Tool
The Polygon Shaped Room tool opens
the New Polygon Shaped Room
dialog, where you can specify the exact size
and number of sides of a new polygonal
room and then click in floor plan view to
create that room. See Polygon Shaped
Rooms and Decks on page 235.
Hatch Wall
The Hatch Wall tool applies a hatch
pattern to a wall that displays in floor
plan views. You must click the wall that you
want to apply the hatch pattern to. You can
then select the hatch and resize it if you want
to only hatch a portion of a wall. See Hatch
Wall on page 236.
Break Wall
The Break Wall tool applies a break in
a wall. Once a wall is broken, the two
wall segments are separate walls that can be
modifed independent of each other. See
Break Wall on page 236.
Fix Wall Connections
Define Wall Types
The Fix Wall Connections tool

connects walls whose ends are within a
few inches of each other but are not
connected. See Fix Connections on page
240.
The Define Wall Types tool opens the

Wall Type Definitions dialog,
where wall types can be created, copied and
edited. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog
on page 251.
The Deck Tools

Select Build> Decks to access the
deck tools. The Straight Deck Railing
tool is activate by default.
Deck Railing
The Straight Deck Railing and
Curved Deck Railing tools draw
decks, complete with framing and bounded
by a railing. If a foundation level exists,
supports for the deck are also created. See
Deck Railings on page 237.
Deck Edges
The Straight Deck Edge and
Curved Deck Edge draw decks
complete with framing, but without a railing.
No deck supports are created. See Deck
Edge on page 237.
Polygon Shaped Deck

The Polygon Shaped Deck tool opens
the New Polygon Shaped Deck
dialog, where you can specify the exact size
and number of sides of a new polygonal deck
room and then click in floor plan view to
create that deck room. See Polygon Shaped
Rooms and Decks on page 235.
The Fencing Tools

Select Build> Fencing or click the
Fencing Tools to access the fencing
tools. The Straight Fencing tool is activate
by default.
outside of a building and follows the shape of

the terrain. See Fencing on page 237.
Fencing
The Fencing and Curved
Fencing tools draw fences, which
are similar to railings but by default do not
define room areas. Fencing is normally used
231
Walls
The Deck Tools
Exterior and Interior Walls

Video: Finishing and Refining Interior
Walls
Most walls are drawn using either the
Exterior Wall
or Interior Wall
tool.
The only difference between these two tools
is the wall type used. You can specify the
default wall type for each tool in the Wall
Defaults dialog.
To draw a wall using a different wall type,
you can change the default wall type for
either tool in the Wall Defaults dialog. You

can also draw a wall using the default type
and then change the wall type in the Wall
Specification dialog.
Whether a wall is recognized by the program
as an actual exterior or interior wall is based
on the model, not by which tool you use to
draw the wall. Any wall that is entirely
surrounded by interior room areas is
considered an interior wall. Any wall
exposed to the outside of the building is
considered an exterior wall.
Foundation Walls
Foundation walls are similar to the
interior and exterior walls but also have
a footing. Foundation walls can either be
created automatically when a foundation
floor is created or manually by drawing them
using the Foundation Wall
tool.
You can draw a foundation wall on any floor

of a plan, not just on the foundation level.
Any wall can be specified as a foundation
wall. See General Tab on page 260.
The initial wall type and footing size used for
foundation walls are specified in the
Foundation Defaults dialog. These
values can be changed at any time in the
Wall Specification dialog.
Normally, the footing is centered on the wall,
but you can center the footing on the main
232
wall layer. See Foundation Tab on page

264.
You can select the footing in 3D views and
edit its size and shape using the edit handles.
Pony Walls
Video: Creating Pony Walls for above
Grade Brick
Video: Using Stepped Pony Walls for a
Daylight Basement
A Pony Wall, sometimes called a split
wall, is a wall with two separate wall
types for the upper and lower portions.
Pony walls are created using the wall types

and other information specified in the Pony
Wall Defaults dialog. System Default Wall
Types are the only types of wall that cannot
be specified as pony walls. See Pony Wall
The height where the upper portion meets the
lower can be specified in 3D views. Because
the upper and lower sections of a pony wall
are linked, if either portion is modified along
the division between the two, such as raking
or the stepping of a footing, the other portion
of the pony wall adjusts to match.
You can convert a normal wall into a pony
wall and vice versa on the Wall Types tab of
the Wall Specification dialog.
Changing Wall Types

for Pony Walls
The upper and lower parts of a pony wall can
be redefined as different wall types in the
Wall Specification dialog. See Wall
Types Tab For Pony Walls on page 266.
Railings
Railings are created and edited just like
walls. By default, newels and balusters
do not display in floor plan view, but their
display can be turned on. See Newels/
Balusters Tab on page 270.
The default type for new railings is defined
in the Railing Defaults dialog. See
Railing Defaults Dialog on page 229.
If Panels is selected on the Railing tab, you

can choose a Panel Type on the Newels/
Balusters tab. See Newels/Balusters Tab
on page 270.
When first drawn, railings have the No
Locate attribute, which prevents them from
being located by dimension lines. The No
Room Def attribute is helpful if you do not
233
Walls
Pony Walls
want a railing to divide a room. See General

Tab on page 260.
Use a Doorway
to produce a break in a
railing for a stairway or other access. This
keeps the railing continuous to maintain
room definition.
A doorway in a railing displays in a 3D view
as an opening, with newels or posts placed
on each side. Posts are evenly spaced
between railing ends and breaks and can be
specified at defined intervals.
Invisible Walls
Invisible walls are used to create or
modify room definitions, most often by
defining smaller areas within larger rooms.
See Room Definition on page 280. These
smaller room areas can have different floor
or ceiling materials or heights, allowing
stepped areas to be created.
Invisible walls can display in floor plan view
but not in 3D views. Floors, ceilings and
roofs generate above and below the areas
defined by these walls.
Common uses for invisible walls include
dividing the living and dining areas of a
single room, or separating a kitchen from an
adjoining nook.
An invisible wall can be turned into a normal

wall, or vice versa, by clicking the Invisible
check box on the General tab of its Wall
Specification dialog. See General Tab
on page 260.
Important Notes on
Invisible Walls
234
Floor, wall and ceiling areas are calculated separately for rooms divided by
invisible and normal walls.
Invisible walls are ignored by the Auto
Place Outlets
tool; it functions as
though they were not present.
Invisible walls can be drawn through a

cabinet to attach to the wall behind.
Invisible walls do not produce a short

wall section to cover the gap where the
level of the floor or ceiling changes. Use
an invisible railing for this. See Floor &
Ceiling Heights on page 281.
Cabinets, fixtures and furniture can be

moved freely through Invisible walls.

Select Build> Wall> Polygon Shaped
Room to open the New Polygon
Shaped Room dialog and create a polygon
shaped room with regular sides.
Select Build> Decks> Polygon

Shaped Deck to open the New
Polygon Shaped Deck dialog and create
a polygon shaped deck with regular sides.
To create a polygon shaped room or deck

1.
Click the radio button beside an option

to specify whether you want to Define
Polygon by Side Length, Radius to
Vertex or Radius to Side.
2.
Specify the desired Number of Sides.
3.
Specify the desired Side Length.
4.
Specify the desired Radius.
5.
Uncheck Include Railing to produce a

deck platform defined by Deck Edges.
This option is not available in the New
Polygon Shaped Room dialog.
6.
Click OK, then click once in floor plan

view to create the specified polygon
shaped deck.
The settings in these dialogs are independent

of one another and are saved between
sessions.
235
Walls
Hatch Wall
The Hatch Wall tool fills any wall
segment, except invisible walls, with a
single hatch pattern. The Hatch Wall tool
places a hatch pattern across all layers of the
selected wall, covering any fill styles
specified for that wall type.
The wall hatch pattern and its line weight
can be specified in the Wall Hatch
Specification dialog. See Wall Hatch
It may be preferable to create a wall type
definition for display purposes rather than
use the Hatch Wall
tool because
multiple fill styles can be used. See Wall
Type Definitions Dialog on page 251.
To apply wall hatching, click the Hatch Wall
button, then click a wall. The hatch
pattern covers the entire length and width of
the wall.
Another way to apply a hatch pattern to a

portion of a wall is to first use the Wall
Break
tool to divide the wall into two or
more segments. When the Hatch Wall

tool is applied to a broken wall, the pattern is
only applied to the selected segment.
To select wall hatching, click the wall using
either the Select Objects
or Hatch Wall
tool, then click the wall with hatching.

To delete a hatch pattern from a wall, select it
and click the Delete
edit button or press
the Del key. Make sure that the hatch pattern
is selected and not the wall by noting that
Wall Hatching displays in the Status Bar.
See The Status Bar on page 8.
You can resize the hatched area by selecting
it and then dragging an end edit handle. If a
hatch covers only part of a wall, you can
move it by dragging the center handle.
Break Wall
To divide a wall, select Build> Wall>
Break Wall and click the wall. This
places a break, creating two wall sections.
When the Break Wall
tool is active, you
can continue to place breaks in walls. Select
a different tool to deselect the Break Wall
tool.
236
If a break is placed near the intersection of

two walls, the break moves to the exact
intersection. Once a break is placed, click the
Select Objects
tool and select the
original wall. If edit handles display near the
break, the wall was correctly broken.
The Break Wall
tool can be used to
create aligned walls across rooms. See
Creating a Nook on page 246.
Deck Railings
Deck Railing is used to create
decks on the exterior of a plan.
Click and drag using the Deck Railing or
Curved Deck Railing tool to draw deck
railing. When room definition is established,

a deck is created within the area defined by
the perimeter railing and its Room Type is
set to Deck. See Decks on page 288.
Deck Edge
The Deck Edge tools are used to
draw invisible railing, defining a
deck room without enclosing it in rails. Click
and drag using the Straight Deck Edge or

Curved Deck Edge tool to draw deck edge.
See Decks on page 288.
Fencing
Fencing in Chief Architect is created
and modified much like railings and
walls. Fences do not create room definition
and are normally used outside a structure to
divide the terrain or detail an exterior.
Fencing automatically follows the shape of
the terrain. You can choose to have the
fencing follow the terrain smoothly or to
have each segment step as it follows the
terrain. See Railing Tab on page 267.
Define the default fence style in the
Fencing Defaults dialog. See Fencing
237
Walls
Deck Railings
Drawing Walls
Video: Drawing and Editing Walls
Video: Drawing the Initial Walls and
Rooms
Walls are drawn similar to the way CAD
lines are drawn and can be drawn in floor
plan view, camera views, and overviews. See
Draw Line on page 846. Similarly, curved
walls are drawn much the way CAD arcs are.
See Draw Arc on page 856.
Draw exterior walls in a clockwise direction so that the exterior surfaces face
outward while interior surfaces face inward.
Drawing walls to create a floor plan is simple

if you keep a few things in mind:
Draw exterior walls first to define the

buildings footprint, then draw the interior walls after the perimeter is in place.
To flip the layers of an existing wall,

select it and click the Reverse Layers
edit button. See Using the Edit
Buttons on page 244.
238
Do not draw short walls to represent wing

walls on the sides of doors and doorways.
Walls should be drawn to create rooms,
and then doors and windows should be
placed later.
Initial wall heights are determined by the
default floor and ceiling heights of the
current floor. See Floor Defaults on
page 364.
Do not break walls and delete center

sections or draw short stub walls from
each side and try to line them up to create
wall openings. To create an opening in a wall,
use the Door or Window tools.
Temporary Dimensions
Temporary dimensions will display as walls
are drawn when CAD> Dimension>
Display Temporary Dimensions
is
toggled on (see Display Temporary
Dimensions on page 800) and Show Wall
Length When Editing is checked in the
General Wall Defaults dialog (see
General Wall Defaults Dialog on page 274.
Continuous Wall Drawing

Just as with CAD lines and arcs, you can
draw walls continuously by right-clicking,
Alt+clicking or Alt+dragging. See To draw
continuous lines on page 846.
Drawing Curved Walls

A straight wall can be converted into a
curved wall and vice versa. Select a straight
wall and click the Change Line/Arc
button to change it into a curved wall.
Drawing a curved wall is similar to drawing
a CAD arc. As with CAD arcs, the method
used to draw a curved wall depends on which
Arc Creation Mode
is currently active.
See Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes
on page 855.
Drawing Walls
Walls
To create a room in the shape of a circle, you must draw two curved walls.
239
Center
A curved wall always has a center point. The
center displays as a small cross when you
enable Show Arc Centers and Ends
See Show Arc Centers on page 102.
grid lines and line intersections as it is

drawn. See Plan Defaults on page 180.
Use Angle Snaps
to draw walls at
specific angles. Modify the angle of an
existing wall by specifying a new angle in
the Wall Specification dialog or by
dragging an end to a new allowed angle. See
Angle Snaps on page 84.
As you draw a wall, note the temporary wall
that displays. The length and angle of this
temporary wall display in the Status Bar at
the bottom of the window as it is drawn.
Show Arc Center
Radius
The radius of a curved wall is measured from
the center to one surface or layer of the wall.
The radius can be defined on the General tab
of the Wall Specification dialog. You
may elect to define the radius to the exterior
or interior wall layers. See General Tab on
page 260.
Wall Positioning
Drag the end of the temporary wall in a

circular motion. In the Status Bar, note that
the wall jumps at defined angle increments.
Release the mouse button to draw the wall at
the length and angle last shown in the
information window.
House Wizard
The House Wizard allows you to place and
arrange room objects that can then be
converted into a fully editable house plan,
including walls. See House Wizard on
page 884.
If Use Snap Grid/Units is checked in the

Plan Defaults dialog, a new wall snaps to
Connecting Walls
Draw a wall sufficiently close to an existing
wall and the program joins them at the
intersection of their main layers. The new
wall moves, extends, or contracts slightly to
meet the existing wall. Existing walls do not
move.
240
By default, walls are automatically joined

when their centers are within a distance
defined by the larger of the two wall widths.
Fix Connections
Occasionally, one or more walls do not
properly connect. To clean up most
connections throughout the plan, select

Build> Walls> Fix Connections. If you
have only one connection to fix, the Connect
Walls
edit button is faster to use.
Connect Walls
Use the Connect Walls edit button to
complete an intersection of two walls.
Select a wall, click the Connect Walls edit
button, then click on the other wall to
connect the two.
If the unconnected wall ends are sufficiently
close to one another, the tool connects them.
If the separation is too great, extend one
towards the other and try again.
Rejoining Colinear Walls

When the end of a wall is placed near the end
of another wall of the same type and in the
same direction, the two walls appear to

combine into a single wall. When selected,
the wall may consist of more than one
section, divided by breaks. See Break Wall
on page 236.
To merge two colinear walls with the same
wall type definition, extend one of the walls
to the other using an Extend handle. If the
walls do not align yet, select one wall and
place the cursor over the center edit handle.
Drag the pointer over the edge of the other
wall. Look for the On Object snap indicator
and release the mouse when it appears. For
more information, see Object Snaps on
page 82.
If the two walls still do not merge, their
specifications are not the same. Open the
Wall Specification dialog for each wall
and determine how they differ.
Displaying Walls
While the composition and appearance of
each wall type is controlled in the Wall
Type Definitions dialog, the display of
walls in all views is controlled in the Layer
In Floor Plan View

There are several options for controlling how
walls are displayed in floor plan view. In the
Layer Display Options dialog, you can
specify whether or not various types of walls
display. By default, walls are placed on
layers with Walls at the beginning of the
layer name, such as Walls, Attic. You can
place walls on any layer, however.
In addition, the display of the wall layers

specified in the Wall Type Definitions
dialog can be controlled. If you turn off the
display of the layer called Walls, Layers,
wall types display with two lines
representing the inside and outside surfaces.
See Displaying Objects on page 221.
It is often desirable to display the walls from
a floor other than the current floor. To do
this, select and display a reference floor. See
Reference Display on page 369. You can
also specify which layers are included in the
reference display in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
241
Walls
Displaying Walls
In 3D Views
While most objects in the program can
display in floor plan view and 3D views, a
few cannot. Invisible walls and wall hatching
are examples of items that do not display in
3D, regardless of what layer they are placed
on.
Displaying Pony Walls

in Floor Plan View
By default, the upper portion of a pony wall
displays in floor plan view. To show the
lower pony wall in floor plan view instead,
select Show Lower in Plan View in the
Wall Defaults Dialog on page 277.
Note: A window or door that is completely
contained by one part of a pony wall does not
display in floor plan view if the other part of
the pony wall is shown.
Editing Walls
Preferences dialog. See Architectural

Video: Walls - Wall Editing
Walls can be selected individually and as a
group in all views. When a wall is selected, it
displays edit handles and an edit toolbar that
vary depending on the current view and the
selected edge and can be used to edit it in
various ways. See Selecting Objects on
page 92.
Panel on page 198.
Objects
to select the wall itself. See
Hatch Wall on page 236.
Selecting Walls
When you try to select a wall in a Cross

Section/Elevation or 3D view, the interior
or exterior room it defines may be
selected first. Click the Select Next
Objects
edit button or press the Tab
key on your keyboard to select the wall
itself. See Selecting Rooms on page
283.
You can specify that the wall be selected
first instead of the room in the
242
If the Hatch Wall

tool has been used
to apply hatching to a wall, the hatching
is selected first. Click Select Next
The Edit Area

tools allow you to
select only part of a wall or walls. See
Edit Area Tools on page 153.
Using Edit Handles

Depending on the type of view, a wall
displays a different set of edit handles when
selected.
In floor plan view, straight and curved

walls can be edited like CAD Lines and
Arcs. See Editing Line Based Objects
on page 95 and Editing Arc Based
Objects on page 98.
In an elevation view, the vertical edges of

straight and curved walls can be edited
like closed polylines. See Editing
Closed-Polyline Based Objects on page
107. Unlike polylines, only the top and
bottom edges of walls can be selected and
manipulated: the side edges cannot.
In a camera view or overview, click the
top surface of a wall to display the same
edit handles as in floor plan view, allowing you to rotate, move, and extend or
shorten the length of the wall.
In a camera view or overview, click an

interior or exterior surface to display the
same edit handles as in an elevation view,
one at each corner and one on the top and
bottom edges.
Moving a wall will move any cabinets

attached to that wall.
When a wall is connected to other walls

and Edit Object Parts
is turned off,
it can only be moved perpendicular to
itself or, in the case of curved walls, its
chord using the Move edit handle.
Unconnected walls can be moved at
Allowed Angles.
The footing of a foundation wall can be

selected in 3D views and edited using the
edit handles.
The Same Wall Type edit handles can be

enabled to allow you to draw a new wall
segment of the same type as the selected
wall.
Same Wall Type

Edit Handles
When the Same Wall Type edit handles are
enabled, two edit handles display just beyond
a selected walls Extend edit handles in floor

plan view or when the top edge of the wall is
selected in a 3D view.
Same Wall Type edit handles
Click and drag a Same Wall Type edit

handle at any angle to draw a new wall
segment of the same type as the selected
wall.
To temporarily enable the Same Wall Type

edit handles, select a wall and click the Same
Wall Type
edit button. You can also
enable these handles globally in the
Panel on page 198.
Locked vs. Unlocked Centers

The default for curved walls is an unlocked
center because it is easier to draw and edit
when the center is unlocked.
Once walls are in place and curved walls are
properly aligned with straight walls, it is a
good idea to lock the curved walls centers.
To lock the center of a curved wall, select it
and click the Lock Center
edit button.
See Using the Edit Buttons on page 244.
The curved wall remains selected, but its edit
handles change.
243
Walls
Editing Walls
The locked status can also be changed in the

General tab of the Wall Specification
dialog. See General Tab on page 297.
Wall Heights
The height of a wall is controlled by the
ceiling height of the room(s) it defines. If the
ceiling or floor height of a room is changed,
the height of the walls that define it also
change.
The ceiling height of a single room is

controlled on the General tab of the
Room Specification dialog. See
The ceiling heights for all rooms on a

floor are controlled in the Floor
Defaults dialog for that floor. See
The top or bottom edge of any wall can

be adjusted independent of floor or ceiling heights using the mouse in Cross Section/Elevation and 3D views.
As with most objects, walls can be copied,

replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See Using
the Edit Toolbar on page 97. The following
edit toolbar buttons may display on the edit
toolbar for selected walls.

edit
the selected wall.

edit button to
selected wall(s). See Wall Specification
Dialog on page 259.

edit button to copy, move, rotate, or
reflect the wall. See Transform/Replicate Object Dialog on page 144.

edit button
to make copies of the selected wall(s) at
regular intervals. See Multiple Copy on
page 139.

edit button
to slow down the mouse speed for the
next edit operation. See Accurate Move
on page 125.
Click the Components

edit button to
open the Components dialog for the
selected wall(s). See Components Dialog on page 1014.
Moving Walls
Using Dimensions
Automatic, manual, and temporary
dimension lines can be used to move a wall.
Select a wall and click the temporary
dimension to open the Move Object
Using Dimension dialog. See Moving
edit button to align the wall with

Using the Edit Buttons

A selected wall or walls can be edited in a
toolbar. See Using the Edit Toolbar on
page 97.
244

edit
wall(s). See Point to Point Move on
page 125.

edit button
to center a wall along an intersecting wall
or room. See Centering Doors and
edit
button to change a selected straight wall
into a curved wall or vice versa. See
Change Line/Arc on page 131.
edit button to
wall. This button appears depressed for a
locked-center wall and up for a normal
wall. Click it to change the lock center
status. See Editing Arc Based Objects

on page 98.
Click the Reverse Layers

edit button
to flip the layers of the selected wall(s).
See Drawing Walls on page 238.
Click the Connect Walls

edit button
to complete an intersection of two walls.
Click the Same Wall Type

edit button to enable the Same Wall Type edit
handles and draw a new connected wall
of the same wall type. See Same Wall
Type Edit Handles on page 243.
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations

If you move a straight wall connected to a
curved wall with a locked center and the
connection cannot be maintained without
changing the center of the arc, the walls lose
their connection.
If you move a straight wall connected to a

curved wall the curved wall extends along its
curve.
When an Extend edit handle of a curved wall

with a locked center is dragged with the
Alternate
Edit Behavior active, the
locked center setting will be overridden. See
245
Walls
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations
button to open the Radius of Tangent

Curved Wall dialog.
Make Arc Tangent

If both ends of a curved wall are attached to
straight walls that are nearly tangent and the
curved wall is selected, the Make Arc
Tangent
edit button displays. Click this
Here you can determine which wall layer the

radius of the curved wall is measuring.
Specify a layer and click OK. For more
information about Wall Layers, see Wall
Type Definitions on page 251.
Aligning Walls
Wall alignment refers to the way wall
segments line up with one another, either on
the same floor or on the floor above or
below. Walls may need to be aligned in a
variety of situations.
Aligning Colinear Walls

Colinear walls are parallel walls connected
end to end and drawn on the same floor.
When colinear walls join end-to-end and
Object Snaps
snap.
246
are enabled, the walls
Creating a Nook
Walls can be aligned across an opening such
as a nook, so that they are colinear, using the
Break Wall
tool.
To create aligned walls across an opening

1.
Select a wall to build a nook into and

click the Break Wall
edit button.
2.
Click at a point on the wall close to one

side of the nook area. Do not worry
about exact placement right now.
3.
Click again near the other side of the

nook. Two short lines at each location
where you clicked indicate Wall Breaks.
Align with Above or Align with Below

box, then click OK.
Aligning Curved Walls

Between Floors
4.
Right-click the middle section of the

wall to select the wall section.
5.
Click the middle Move handle and drag

the wall outward.
6.
Draw side walls to connect the wall back

to the rest of the house.
7.
Move these short walls using dimensions to accurately size the nook.
Aligning Walls
Between Floors
Walls can be aligned between floors using
the Align With Above and Align With
Below checkboxes in the Wall
on page 260.
To align walls between floors
1.
Select a wall that you want to align with

a wall either above or below it.
2.
3.
On the General tab of the Wall

Specification dialog, check either the
edit button.
Curved walls are aligned between floors

using the same technique to align straight
walls. If the centers and radii of the walls are
within a few inches of each other, the Align
with Floor Above/Below check boxes are
enabled on the General tab of the Wall
Specification dialog for the selected wall.
Check either box and the selected curved
wall takes on the radius and center of the
referenced wall as it moves into alignment
with it.
Aligning Curved Walls

With Straight Walls
Curved walls can be drawn tangent to
an existing straight wall using the
Start/Tangent/End Arc Mode. See
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes on
page 855.
If both ends of a selected curved wall
are connected to other walls at angles
of 45 degrees or less, the Make Arc Tangent
edit button is available. Click this button to
move and resize the wall so that both ends
are tangent to the connected walls. See
The walls radius is usually changed by this
action and a locked center automatically
becomes unlocked. Once the wall is tangent,
select it and drag its move handle until it is in
the appropriate position.
247
Walls
Aligning Walls
Attic Walls
In Chief Architect, walls are built between
the default floor and ceiling heights of the
room. See Floor Defaults on page 364.
When the program detects an open space
between a wall and the roof plane above it, it
automatically creates an Attic Wall on the
floor above that wall to fill in the gap.
Attic Walls are typically found above Full
Gable Walls, forming a gable or closing the
top portion of a side wall beneath a shed
roof.
Attic Walls are specified as such on the

dialog. When you Rebuild Walls/Floors/
Ceilings
, all Attic Walls in the plan are
deleted and rebuilt unless Retain Attic Wall
is also checked. See General Tab on page
260.
If you do not want to keep a particular
Attic Wall in your plan, specify it as
Invisible and make sure Retain Attic Wall is
checked on the General tab of the Wall
Double Walls
Video: Creating Double Walls to Add
Furred Basment Walls
Video: Walls - Double Walls
248
Frame Through
Frame Through walls can be considered the
basic Double Wall type. A Frame Through
wall could be used as a double wall between
hotel rooms for sound insulation.
In some situations, such as for sound

insulation, furring, or where the walls of two
modular home units meet, two walls are
drawn side-by-side. In instances such as
these, specify both walls as Double Walls.
To create a pair of Frame Through walls,

specify both walls as such on the General tab
of the Wall Specification dialog.
Two walls become Double Walls when they

are parallel, touching, and both specified as
Double Walls on the General tab of the Wall
on page 260.
Split Framing walls divides floor and

ceiling platforms and any walls their ends
connect to. The split occurs at the boundary
where the two double walls touch and is
useful for separating modular home units.
There are three types of Double Walls:

Frame Through, Split Framing and Furred
Wall.
Chief Architect frames walls and platforms

separately on either side of the Split Framing
wall boundary, with no framing members
crossing it.
Split Framing
You can make floor platform rim joists touch

each other at the boundary between Split
Framing walls or provide spacing to carry
sheathing over them by checking Build
platform to this layer for the appropriate
layer in the Wall Type Definitions dialog.
For more information, see Wall Type
To create a pair of Split Framing walls,
specify both walls as such on the General tab
Furred Wall
Furred Walls are placed against the inside
of a primary wall, typically an exterior wall.
An example is a concrete wall furred out by a
framed wall with an air gap or insulation
between them. Another example is a thick
wall with two framed layers.
Rooms are defined in the normal manner by
the primary wall, but the layers of the Furred
Wall are treated by the program as though
they were added to the primary. An air gap
between the primary and furred walls should
be defined as a layer of one of the walls,

usually the furred wall.
As with Frame Through walls, Furred Walls
do not split platforms or connected walls.
Unlike Frame Through walls, they do not
connect or frame to non-parallel walls like
normal walls. Instead, they connect to other
Furred Walls.
To create a Furred Wall, specify the primary
wall as a Frame Through wall and the
furred wall as a Furred Wall on the General
tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
Openings in Double Walls

Doors and windows placed in one Double
Wall extend through both walls. You can
specify how an opening builds through the
Double Walls on the Frame and Trim tab of
the Door Specification dialog or the
Casing tab of the Window Specification
dialog. See Door Specification Dialog on
page 315 or Window Specification Dialog
on page 343.
CAD to Walls
CAD to Walls allows CAD lines to be
converted to Chief Architect objects.
This is helpful when importing drawings into
floor plan view. Two or more parallel CAD
lines can be converted to both straight or
curved walls or rails. CAD lines representing
windows and doors can also be converted.
All lines that you want to convert to walls
must be located on one layer. The same is
true for windows, doors, and rails. It is
helpful to place like items on a single layer
with unique layer attributes. See Layer

The Import Drawing Wizard is the best
place to arrange the layers of the incoming
lines for easiest CAD to Wall conversion. If
you are importing the CAD lines from
another system, do not check Boxes or
Polylines in the Import Drawing
Wizard. See Select File on page 909.
249
Walls
CAD to Walls
When CAD objects are located properly,

select CAD> CAD to Walls...
the CAD to Walls dialog.
to display
Convert CAD to Walls Dialog
1 Specify the source layers to be
converted to walls, windows, doors, or
rails.
2 Click Define to view the Layer
Display Options dialog and select a
different source layer if needed.
3 Specify wall types for the new walls.
One, two, or neither can be specified.
To convert to a specific wall type, the lines

must be within one inch or 25mm of that wall
types width. If two wall types are specified,
new walls are converted to the one having
the closest width. The new wall expands or
contracts about its centerline to reach the
250
width of the wall type. Typically, only two

wall types are used in a plan and an interior
and exterior wall type are specified.
Conversion works better if lines representing
windows and doors are on different layers,
although it should still be satisfactory if they
are on the same layer. In either case, the arc
indicating door swing helps to identify a door
and should be placed on the same layer as
doors.
Click OK to complete the conversion.
Converted items are found in the Layer
Display Options dialog.

Video: Creating a New Wall Type with
a New Assigned Material
Every wall in a plan is assigned a wall type,
and its 2D representation, default materials,
and framing width are specified by its Wall
Type Definition.
Material information in the Wall Type
Definition can be calculated for take-offs in
the Materials List or shown in 3D views.
Wall types can be viewed, edited and created
in the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See
Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 251.
Walls fall into two categories: System
Default walls and User Specified walls.
System Default Walls

There are two System Default wall types:
Default (wood frame 16" OC) and Default
(Concrete). These two wall types behave
differently from all other wall types and
cannot be edited.
Default (wood frame 16" OC) can be used
for interior or exterior walls and railings on
all floors except the foundation level and are
placed on the Walls, Normal layer of the

Default (Concrete) can only be used on the
foundation plan. When you draw a Default
(Concrete) wall, it is placed on the Walls,
Foundation layer.
The program assigns materials and assume
certain characteristics of these walls when
the Material List is generated.
User Specified Walls

All other wall type definitions in the program
are considered User Specified Walls. Some
User Specified wall definitions are shipped
with the program and can be customized.
The 2D display qualities of user specified
walls are defined by the properties in the
Wall Type Defintions dialog.
User Specified walls can have up to ten
layers defined, each representing a different
material. All of these layers can be calculated
by the Materials List. Materials that are
applied to the outer layers of the wall layer
definition also defines how the wall displays
in 3D views.

The Wall Type Definitions dialog
controls wall type definitions in a plan file.
Use it to define new wall types and redefine
existing ones.
Changes made to an existing wall type
definition affect all walls in the current plan
using that wall type. Walls in other plan files

are unaffected.
Select Build> Wall> Define Wall Types
to open the Wall Type Definitions dialog.
Clicking the Define button on the Wall Types
tab of the Wall Specification or in most
251
Walls
Wall Defaults dialogs also opens this
dialog.
1
8
2
9
10
11
4
12
5
13
6
7
14
1 Click this drop-down list to display all
currently available wall types. Select a

wall type from the list to display its
definition. The list always has at least one
wall type, Default, that cannot be
modified. You can rename a wall type by
typing in a new name.
To create a new wall type, click New to
define a new wall type from scratch or click
Copy to copy the current wall type. The
copied wall type can then be renamed and
redefined.
To remove a wall type, select it and click
Delete. Wall types currently being used in
your plan or set as plan defaults cannot be

deleted.
2 Main Layer - If multiple wall layers
are defined, select a radio button to

specify the Main Layer. It is usually the
structural layer and appears wider than other
layers in the wall preview.
Note: The Framing dialog uses the thickness of the Main Layer to size the studs if a
framing material such as Fir Stud 16" OC, Fir
Stud 24" OC, Metal Stud 16" OC, or Metal
Stud 24" OC is assigned.
3 Define the Thickness for each wall
layer. Wall layers are listed in order
252
from exterior at the top to interior at the

bottom. The numbering format can be
changed by clicking the Num Style button.
4 Build platform to this layer - When a

floor or ceiling platform is built, it goes
to this layer. By default, the Main Layer is
checked. This option can only be selected for
one wall layer; when you select this box for
any other layer, it becomes unchecked for the
previous layer it was selected for.
5 By default, dimensions are based on a
walls Main Layer. Select Dimension
to this Layer to have dimensions locate to a
different wall layer. This option can only be
selected for a single wall layer.
6 Total - Displays the total thickness of
the wall type definition. If you change

the total thickness, the program
automatically changes the thickness of the
Main Layer to account for the difference.
7 Click the Insert button to create a new
layer directly above the active layer in

the wall type definition. The arrow to the
right of the wall assembly diagram points to
the active layer.
To insert a layer at the bottom, click near the

outside edge of the last layer until the arrow
to the left of the diagram points to the last
line.
Click Delete to remove the currently active
layer. The arrow to the right of the wall
assembly diagram points to the active layer.
8 Wall Line - Define the Color, Style,
and Weight for each line in the wall

type definition. Click the line to edit in the
diagram. The arrow to the left of the diagram
points to the active line. Any changes made
in the dialog immediately display in the
diagram, illustrating how the wall displays in

floor plan view.
Check By Layer if you want the line to
assume the attributes of the walls layer as
defined in the Layer Display Options
dialog. See Displaying Objects on page
221.
Click the Library button to open the
Library Browser to the Line Style
category. See Line Styles on page 688.
9 Layer Material - Specify the material
calculated in the Material List and any

fill patterns that display in 2D for the
currently selected, or active, wall layer.
Click either of the two material display boxes

and the Select Library Object dialog
opens to the Materials library category.
Specify a material for the active layer in the
wall layer definition.
10 Click Library Material to open the
Select Library Object dialog to the

Materials library category. See Select
Library Object Dialog on page 679.
Click Plan Materials to open the Plan

Materials dialog. SeePlan Materials
Dialog on page 707 .
11 Click the Fill Style button to open the
Wall Layer Fill Style dialog and

specify a fill style for the selected wall layer.
This dialog is similar to the Fill Style tab for
CAD objects. See Fill Style Tab on page
864.
Wall layer fill styles are overridden if you

use the Hatch Wall
floor plan view.
tool on a wall in
12 Show as insulation in elevation Check this box to have insulation
253
Walls
Exterior walls on different floors are

aligned by the outer edges of their Main
Layers.
assembly diagram points to the active

layer. To activate a layer, click the layer in
the diagram or click in the Thickness field
assigned to it.
Roof baselines are placed at the outer

edge of the Main Layer when roofs are
automatically generated.
Roof base lines and gable/roof lines that

are manually drawn snap to the edge of
this layer.
The arrow to the left of the wall assembly

diagram points to the active layer surface.
Dimension lines can locate the outer wall

surfaces, Main Layer surfaces, or wall
centers (for interior walls).
details generated in cross section views when

the Autodetail
tool is used. See AutoDetailing on page 751.
13 The arrow to the right of the wall
the Num Style button to open the

14 Click
Number Style / Angle Style
dialog. Here you can change the numbering
format. See Number Style/Angle Style
Dialog on page 873.
The Main Layer

The Main Layer is the structural layer of the
wall, usually the framing layer. Use the radio
button to designate the Main Layer. The
Main Layer is used for many things:
254
Floor and ceiling platforms and automatically built foundation walls are normally
built to the outer edge of the Main Layer.
This behavior can be modified by specifying a different layer to build your platforms to.
All of this information is reliant on the

Main Layer, so creating your wall type
definitions accurately beforehand and
specifying the Main Layer is very important.
iwalllay.dat and mwalllay.dat

Two files in the Chief Architect directory
have the .dat extension and contain the
default Chief Architect wall type definitions:
iwalllay.dat (Imperial units) and
mwalllay.dat (metric units). These files are
referred to as .dat files.
If you open a .plan file containing fewer than
six wall types, information from iwalllay.dat
or mwalllay.dat is automatically imported,
adding new wall types to your plan file.
Walls

1
2
3
4
5
Wall type definitions can be exported from
one Chief Architect plan file into another.
This is a convenient alternative to re-creating
wall types that may already exist in another
plan.
The wall type definitions that export from
your current plan are listed in the Wall Type
Definitions dialog. See Wall Type
here. You may see other .dat files in this

directory that are not wall definitions.
4 Give the file a short, descriptive File

name.
5 Save as type should be *.dat.
The File> Export> Wall Definitions...

option exports all wall type definitions in one
.dat file. This .dat file can then be read into
another Chief Architect plan file.
To export a wall type definition, select File>
Export> Wall Defintions... to open the
Export Wall Defintions File dialog.
1 The current directory displays in the

Safe in field.
2 Browse to the location where you want

to save the file.
3 All data files with a .dat extension
located in the current directory display
255
Importing Wall Definitions

1
2
3
To import a .dat file (wall type definitions)
into the current plan, choose File> Import>
Wall Definitions.... The Import Wall
Definitions File dialog opens.
1 Navigate to the folder containing the

wall definitions files.
2 The selected file name displays.

3 Select the .dat file type.
When wall type definitions are imported, the
names of the wall type definitions in the
Import file are compared with those already
in your plan. Files of the same name are

overridden.
Wall definitions can be made available
for future use by following the same
instructions and importing them into your
default template plan. SeeTo create your
own template plan on page 168.
The imported wall type definitions are now

available in your current plan and are visible
in any list of wall types which display
throughout the program. See Wall Type

When roofs are automatically generated, roof
planes are placed over curved walls at
specified increments. The Build Roof
dialog allows you to specify the degree
increments for the roof over the curved wall.
Any number fro 6 to 90 degrees may be
specified. The lower the number, the more
256
roof sections are created over the curved

wall.
The following illustrations show a roof
created at two different curved increments,
30 degrees and 15 degrees.
Walls
Concave Curved Walls & Roofs

Concave curved walls can produce roof
planes that follow them. If the concave area
is too small, simpler roof planes are produced. To follow the curved wall, the section
baselines must be longer than the Min.
Alcove value on the Build tab of the Build
Roof dialog. If baselines are shorter, the
automatically generated roofs are simplified
by either:
1.
2.
Spanning the concave curved wall with

a straight baseline and produce a roof
plane for it from that.
Ignoring the curved wall, as if the walls

on either side extended to their meeting
point and the roof was produced.
257
Stepped and Raked Walls

Stepped and raked walls can be easily
4.
created using the Break Line

tool and
edit handles in any 3D or Cross Section/
Elevation view. In many cases, working in a
Select one of these two handles, and

drag up or down.
5.
A square step is created.

is easiest
and allows the greatest accuracy.
Stepped Walls & Footings

One application for pony walls is a stepped
foundation. The lower part of the pony wall
is the concrete wall with footing, and the
upper part of the pony wall is a framed wall
built to the first floor platform.
The vertical edges of a wall cannot be

broken.
By default, a stepped foundation wall
displays an S symbol at the location of the
step in floor plan view. The display of this
S is controlled in the Wall Defaults
dialog. See Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults
Dialog on page 276.
Raked Walls
In the illustration above, the lower pony wall

is a single layer concrete wall and the upper
part of the pony wall is faced with brick.
To create a simple raked wall:

1.
Select the wall in cross section/elevation

or 3D view.
2.
Click one of the corner edit handles and

drag that handle either up or down.
3.
To rake a wall at a specific angle, draw a
To add a step to a wall

1.
Select the wall in a Backclipped Cross

Section
258
view.
2.

tool, then
click the top or bottom edge of the wall
to place the break.
3.
In addition to the corner handles, two

handles display along the broken edge.
CAD Line
at the desired angle.
Select the raked edge of the wall, click
the Make Parallel
edit button, and
then click the CAD line. See Using
Make Parallel/ Perpendicular on page
126.
Compound Raked Walls

The illustration below shows two walls
meeting in a V. Both walls have three
angles across the top of the wall.
Breaks cannot be added to the vertical edges

of a wall in cross section/elevation view only the horizontal edges.
To create a compound raked wall
1.
In cross section/elevation view, select

the wall, click the Break Wall
tool,
then click either edge to be raked.
To create a compound raked wall, breaks

must be added to raked edge. Each section of
the wall can then be adjusted separately.
2.
The new break point displays as an edit

handle. Click this new handle and drag it
to create the desired angle.

The Wall Specification dialog controls
the characteristics of selected walls. To open
the Wall Specification dialog, select a
wall or group of walls and click the Open
Object
edit button.
259
Walls
General Tab
1
3
9
Items on the General tab are available only
when they apply to the selected wall or walls.
1 The Thickness of the selected wall
displays here. It can be specified when

the wall is one of the System Default wall
types. This option is not available for layered
wall types.
2 Check Foundation to specify the
selected wall as a foundation wall.

More foundation wall settings are available
on the Foundation tab.
3 Select the Railing check box to specify
the selected wall as a railing. More

railing settings are found on the Railing and
Newels/Balusters tabs.
260
4 Specify the Wall Angle and Wall
Length of a straight wall. These

options are not available for curved walls.
Wall Angle - The current absolute angle

of the wall in a floor plan view is shown.
Type in a new angle to rotate the wall
about its locked point.
Wall Length - The current length is

shown. Type in a new length. The part of
the wall that extends or contracts is determined by where it is locked.
5 Select a radio button to Lock the
selected wall at its Start, End or Center.

When the Wall Angle or Wall Length of the
selected wall is changed, this part of the wall
is locked.
the selected wall is very close, but not

quite directly above or below a wall on
the floor above or below. Check the
option to precisely align the walls.
6 Check any of the Options to modify the
selected wall accordingly. In most

cases, multiple options can be selected.
Check Invisible to specify the wall as

invisible. Invisible walls are used to
divide rooms areas that are not separated
by a wall or railing, such as a nook from a
kitchen, and can display in floor plan
view but not 3D views.
Select Railing and Invisible to place
walls where there is a vertical break in
the floor or ceiling level at the invisible
walls location. If railing is not selected, there
will be a gap where the levels change.
Select No Room Definition to display

the wall in floor plan and/or 3D views but
not define or divide a room.
Select No Locate to prevent automatic

dimension lines from locating a wall. No
Locate can be used for any wall that you
do not want dimensioned. Railings have
No Locate selected by default.
Select Invisible Beam to have the wall

display as two lines in floor plan view.
This option is included for compatibility
with earlier versions and its use is not
encouraged. It does not create a beam
when framing is built or in 3D views.
Select Attic Wall to prevent the wall

from extending through the roof above.
See Attic Walls on page 248.
Select Retain attic wall to prevent an

existing attic wall from being deleted
when you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
. This should be selected for
walls that you have drawn.
The Align with Below or Align with

Above check boxes are available when
If both options are available, you may choose

one or the other, but not both.
When you click OK, the wall you selected
moves until it lines up properly with the wall
above or below. Walls align to the outer
surfaces of the main layer of exterior walls,
and to the centers of interior walls.
Curved walls are aligned in a similar way. To
align two curved walls, the center of the
selected wall is moved to coincide with the
center of the other wall. The wall is then
moved radially until the main layer surfaces
and centers match as previously described.
Select Lock Center to lock the center of

a curved wall.
Select to Retain Wall Framing for this

wall, as seen in the wall detail view or in
3D framing, when the wall framing is
globally rebuilt.
Select Terrain Retaining Wall to treat

the wall as a terrain retaining wall. See
Terrain Breaks on page 588.
Select Stop at Platform to have the bottom of the wall stop at the top surface of a
floor platform. This is the default for
framed wall types.
Select Go Through Platform to have the

bottom of the wall go through a floor
platform. This is the default for concrete
wall types.
Whether a wall is a framed or concrete type is
determined by the material selected for its
main layer. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 251.
261
Walls
Select Stop at Ceiling to have the top of

the wall stop at the bottom of a ceiling
platform.
Select Balloon Through Ceiling to have

the top of the wall go through a ceiling
platform.
Default Wall Top Height and Default

Wall Bottom Height are enabled if the
selected wall top and/or bottom height
has been edited. Check these boxes to
restore the default heights.
7 Radius To - This section is only active
for curved walls and controls the

definition of the curved wall radius.
Outer - Select this radio button to define

the radius from the center of the curved
wall to the outer surface of the wall.
Inner - Select this radio button to define

the radius from the center of the curved
wall to the inner surface of the wall.
Outer Main - Select this radio button to

display or modify the radius from the
center of the curved wall to the outside of
the main layer of the wall.
262
Inner Main - Select this radio button to

define the radius from the center of the
curved wall to the inside of the main
layer of the wall.
Radius - Displays the radius length as

defined by the above radio buttons. Modify this value to change the curvature of
the wall.
Lock Center - Select this button so that

when the radius is changed, the wall center
remains locked and the wall ends change.
Lock Ends - Select this button so that when
the radius is changed, the wall ends remain
locked and the wall center changes.
8 Check Double Wall to specify the
selected straight wall as a double wall.

Two walls become double walls when they
are parallel, touching, and this box is
checked for both. See Double Walls on
page 248.
This section is only active for straight walls.
Select Frame Through to create a basic

double wall.
Select Split Framing to create a double

wall that splits platform and connecting
walls at its boundary.
Select Furred Wall to treat the selected

wall as additional layers added to another
wall.
9 Click the Num Style button to open the
Number Style/Angle Style dialog

and change the way the Wall Angle and
Wall Length values display.
Walls
Roof Tab
4
3
Any automatically generated roof style other

than a hip requires roof information to be
defined in the exterior walls. Select the Roof
tab to define the portion of the roof plan that
rests on the wall. See Automatic Roofs vs.
Manual Roofs on page 384.
Extend Slope Downward - Select the

check box to continue a roof down over a
bumpout in an exterior wall.
Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom - Place a

check in this box and the selected wall is
divided by any roof section that overlaps
it. The wall section below the overlapping roof plane is removed.
Combine with Above Wall - This check

box is available for a selected wall with
an attic wall above it. Check this box to
frame the upper and lower portions of the
wall together as one when automatic
framing is built.
1 Options - Specify the shape of the wall

relative to the roof planes.
Full Gable Wall - Select the check box

to create a gable end over the wall.
High Shed/Gable- Select the check box

to model the high end of a shed roof.
Knee Wall - Select the check box to

define a wall as a knee wall. Only an interior wall can be defined as a knee wall. A
knee walls height is defined by the roof
plane, not the ceiling height.
2 Pitch - Enter a value to define the pitch

of the roof plane over this wall.
263
Check Upper pitch to create a roof plane

with two pitches. Enter the upper pitch value.
Specify the horizontal Length of the roof

return in inches.
Specify the elevation that the upper pitch

Starts at, or define the inches in from
baseline that the second pitch begins. The
two values are dynamic. Press Tab to update
the relative numbers.
Enter a value in inches to Extend the roof

returns from the overhang.
Specify the Overhang of the roof plane to be

generated above the selected wall. The
default value is set in the Build Roof dialog.
See Build Roof Dialog on page 416.
3 Check Auto Roof Return to generate
roof returns on the selected wall. In

most cases, roof returns only work for Full
Gable Walls. See Roof Returns on page
400.
Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return.

Specify a Sloping or Flat roof return. See
Some Common Roof Types on page 390.
Check the boxes to Include Frieze molding
and Include Gutter.
4 Lower wall type if split by butting
roof - Designate a wall to be split into

two wall types. The upper portion is defined
in the Wall Types tab, and the lower portion
specified here.
Foundation Tab
1
2
3
4
5
264
to turn the selected wall into a

foundation wall. This produces a footing
beneath the wall.
2 Thickness - Define wall thickness for

System Default Wall types.
3 Footing Width and Height - Define
the size of the footing below the

selected foundation walls.
The Height value will be unavailable if the

bottom height of the footing has been edited.
4 Center Footing on Main Layer -
Select the check box to center the

footing on the main layer instead of the entire
stem wall layer definition.
Warning messages may display if the
foundation wall layer definition does not
appear to be a foundation wall type.
5 Automatic Footing Bottom Height -
Check this box to restore the default

height of the selected walls footing. Only
available when the footing bottom height has
been edited.
Wall Types Tab
1
2
1 Check Pony Wall to enable the options
for pony walls. See Wall Types Tab

For Pony Walls on page 266.
Wall Type - The drop-down list

contains all currently available wall
types. Select the desired type from the list

and a preview displays below.
Use the Define button to open the Wall
Type Definitions dialog to create or
265
Walls
1 Specify Foundation - Check this box
modify any existing wall types. See Wall

3 A preview of the wall type displays
here. The exterior side of the wall is at

the top of the drawing and the interior side is
at the bottom.
Wall Types Tab

For Pony Walls
1
2
3
4
266
When you select a pony wall or when you

turn a normal wall into a pony wall, the Wall
Specification dialog has some additional
options.
Wall Type for Lower Wall - The drop-down

list contains all currently available wall
types. Select the desired type from the list for
the lower portion of the pony wall.
1 Pony Wall - Check this box to make
3 Select a radio button to specify which
the wall a pony wall using a separate

wall type for the upper and lower portions of
the wall.
part of the pony wall is defined in the

diagram below.
2 Wall Type for Upper Wall - The dropdown list contains all available wall
types. Select the desired type from the list for
the upper portion of the pony wall
define where the Upper and Lower wall

layer definitions align.
4 Align pony wall - Select the option to
Note: Pony Walls can specify how the two

wall type definitions align. If the thickness of
the main layers of the two wall type definitions are the same, the program may align
the exterior side when the interior side is
specified. This is okay since both sides are
aligned.
No change - Select this radio button to

leave the alignment as it was when dialog
was opened. This should be used when
multiple walls with different wall layer
definitions are selected.
Outer surface - Select this radio button

to align wall types at their outer surfaces.
Outer main - Select this radio button to

align wall types at the exterior edge of
their main layers.
Central main - Select this radio button to

align the centers of the main layers of
both wall types.
Inner main - Select this radio button to

align the wall types at the interior side of
their main layers.
Inner surface - Select this radio button

to align wall types at their interior surfaces.
Railing Tab
1
2
6
7
3
8
4
5
1 Specify Railing - Check this box to
specify the selected wall as a railing

and enable the other options on this tab.
Railings can be also drawn directly using the

Railing
or Deck Railing
tools.
267
Walls
2 Railing Type - Select the radio button
for the desired railing type. A preview

of the selected type displays to the left.
The following illustrations show the results
of each option.
Balusters - Create balusters.
Solid - Create a solid, wall style railing.

The wall is the type defined by the current wall layer definition.
268
Open - Create a railing with only a top

rail.
Middle Rail - Create a railing with a top

and a middle rail.
No Rail - Eliminate rails, leaving only

pillars or posts (and overhead beam, if
selected).
Panels - Create a solid panel.
3 Post Type - Select the check box for

the desired post type.
Post to Rail - Create newel posts from

floor to rail height. This option is selected
by default.
Post to Beam - Create newel posts from

floor to an overhead beam placed just
under the ceiling height. This option is
used when placing a cross beam along the
top of the railing.
6 A preview of the railing displays here
Post to Ceiling - Select the check box to

change the square newel posts to round
pillars, and to make them extend to the
ceiling.
and updates as options are changed.
7 Check this box to display the preview

in color.
8 Halfpost Options - Select the check
box for the desired halfpost placement.
4 Exterior Materials - Select the check
box to make the balusters the same

material as the rails, instead of having them
be defined separately. You have more
flexibility if you define materials for each
part on the Material tab.
No Halfpost - Select the check box to

prevent a half-width post from being
placed when a railing intersects a wall.
Square Halfpost - Select the check box

to use a square halfpost where a railing
intersect with a wall.
9 Terrain Options - Select the check box
for the desired fencing or railing

behavior on terrain. These options only apply
when railing or fencing is drawn outside of a
building on top of a defined terrain.
Step Terrain - Select the check box to

have the railing or fencing follow the terrain in horizontal steps between each
newel.
Follow Terrain - Select the check box to

have the railing or fencing follow the terrain smoothly.
5 Shoe Options - Select the check box
for the desired placement of the bottom

rail, or shoe. If neither box is checked, the
shoe is placed at floor platform level.
Raise Shoe - Raise the shoe 3-1/2 or 87

mm off the platform.
No Shoe - Eliminate the shoe altogether.

Balusters go right to the floor.
269
Walls
Newels/Balusters Tab
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
1 Railing Height - Specify the railing

height.
2 Baluster Width - Specify the width of
each baluster. For a library baluster,

this is its width or diameter at its widest
point. For a panel type railing, this specifies
the thickness and can be set no larger than
the thickness shown on the General tab.
3 Newel Width - Specify the width of

each newel. For a library newel, this is
its width or diameter at its widest point.
4 Newel Height - This is the height from
the ground to the top of the newel.
5 Newel Offset - Specify the amount
each newel should be offset from the

center of the railing. Use this when creating
270
a fence with the newels to one side of the

fence boards.
6 Panel Type - Only available when the
railing type has been specified as

Panels. Select solid, framed, or Library to
select a symbol to be used as a rail panel.
7 Baluster Type - Only available when
the railing type is not specified as

Panels. Select square, round, or Library
Balusters. Selecting Library from this drop
down list is the same as clicking the Library
button to the imediate right and allows you to
select a symbol from the library to be used as
a baluster.
8 Newel Type - Select square, round, or
Library Newels. Selecting Library

from this drop down list is the same as
9 Check Default to use the Draw Newels/
Balusters setting in the Railing

Defaults dialog. Check Draw Newels/
Balusters to draw newels and balusters in

floor plan view.
Wall Covering Tab

Introductory Training Video: Wall Coverings

Video: Adding Wall Coverings with
Assigned Materials
1
2
3
When a wall covering is assigned using the

Wall Specification dialog, it is applied to
the selected wall only.
All wall coverings applied to the

selected wall are listed here.
2 Click Add New to open the Library

Browser and apply a new wall
covering.
Click Select to open the Library Browser and

change the current wall covering.
Click Delete to remove the current wall
covering.
3 A preview of the current wall covering
displays here. click a preview pane to

open the Library Browser.
271
Walls
clicking the Library button to the immediate

right and allows you to select a symbol from
the library to be used as a newel.
Enter a height from wall covering Top To

Ceiling and Floor To Bottom. The wall
coverings Width can also be specified.
Check Interior and/or Exterior to apply the

wall covering to the inside and/or outside of
the selected wall.
Handrail Tab
The Handrail tab is used to specify the style
and size of the handrailing on a selected
railing, deck railing, or fence.
3
4
1 Molding - Displays the current handrail
3 Default - Click this button to remove a
profile being used. This typically says

Default Handrail unless a custom handrail
profile has been selected.
custom handrail that has been specified

and use the default handrail.
2 Select - Click this button to open the

Select Library Object dialog and
specify a profile from the library to be used
as a handrail.
molding profile. No preview displays

for the Default Handrail option, which is
rectangular.
4 Preview Pane - Displays the selected
Note: Handrails are shown on their side,

rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees.
272
railing.
6 Height - Specify the height of the

handrail molding. Defaults to 2 inches
or 5 cm.
For information about the Layers tab, see

Layer Tab on page 223.
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 710.

The Wall Hatch Specification dialog
controls the display of the selected wall
hatch. To open the dialog, select the hatch
and click the Open Object
Layer Tab
For information about the Layer tab, see
edit button.
Fill Style Tab
1 Define the appearance of the wall

hatch.
Fill Pattern - Select a pattern from the

drop-down list.
273
Walls
Layer Tab
5 Width - Specify the width of the
Spacing - Specify the spacing between

hatch pattern lines.
Angle - Specify the angle of the hatch

pattern.
Line Weight - Specify the line weight of

the hatch pattern.
Transparent Pattern Fill - Select the

check box to make the background transparent.
Fill/Pattern Color - Select the radio button and click the button to open the Windows Color Chooser dialog. Specify a
color for the hatch pattern lines and click
OK.
Use Background Color - Select the

radio button to make the hatch pattern
line color the same as the fill.
Use Layer Color - Select the radio button to make the hatch pattern line color
that of the Walls, Hatching layer.
2 Custom Pattern File and Name - This
section is enabled if Custom is selected

in the Fill Pattern field. Browse to select a
custom pattern file, a style of the selected
pattern from the pull-down list, and a pattern
scale.
3 A picture of the hatch pattern displays

changes as they are made.
Default Settings are accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings....
Click the + next to Walls to display the
walls sub-headings. Select a subheading and
click the Edit... button to open the Walls
Defaults dialog associated with your
selection.
Wall, railing and fencing defaults can also be
accessed by double-clicking the Wall Tools
button.
General Wall Defaults Dialog

The General Wall Defaults dialog
controls the general behavior and
display attributes of all walls, railings and
fencing. For quick access, the General Wall
274
Defaults
button can be added to the
toolbar or you can press Alt+Q on your
keyboard.
Walls
1 Resize About - These radio buttons
determine what part of a wall retains its

position when the wall type or wall type
definition is changed.
3 Enter the Wall Thickness to be used
for Default Wall Types. See Wall Type

Definitions on page 251.
Resize About also controls how colinear

walls snap together.
Outer Surface - Resize a wall from the

exterior surface in. The exterior surface
does not move.
Main Layer Outside - Resize a wall

from the exterior side of the main layer
in. The outer main layer surface does not
move
Wall Center - Resize a wall from its center.
Main Layer Inside - Resize a wall from

the interior side of the main layer out.
Inside Surface - Resize a wall from the

interior surface out.
2 Check Show Wall Length When
Editing to display a temporary

dimension when a wall is drawn or edited.
Wall length only displays when Display
Temporary Dimensions
is on.
275
Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults Dialog

3
1
1 Exterior Wall Tool - From the dropdown list, select the wall type drawn
with the Exterior Wall
tool.
To create or modify wall types, click the

Define button to open the Wall Type
Definitions dialog.
2 Interior Wall Tool - From the drop-
down list, select the wall type drawn by
the Interior Wall
276
tool.
To create or modify wall types, click the

Define button to open the Wall Type
Definitions dialog.
3 Railings, Fencing, Wood Frame and
Invisible Walls - Default Thickness Select a thickness for these tools and wall
types from the drop-down list.
Pony Wall Defaults Dialog
1 Upper Wall - From the drop-down list,
select the default wall type for the

upper portion of pony walls.
Click the Define button to open the Wall

Type Definitions dialog and create or
modify wall types. See Wall Type
2 Lower Wall - Specify the structure and
appearance of the lower portion of pony

walls.
Height of Lower Wall - Specify the default
height of the lower portion of pony walls.
Check Show Lower Wall in Plan View to
display this wall type in floor plan view
instead of the upper wall type.
Wall layers and windows in the upper

part of the pony wall do not display in
floor plan view when Show Lower Wall in
Plan View is selected.
From the drop-down list, select the default

wall type for the lower portion of pony walls.
Click the Define button to open the Wall
Type Definitions dialog and create or
modify wall types.
3 Align Pony Wall - Specify the default
option for aligning the layers of the

upper and lower pony walls. See Wall
Types Tab For Pony Walls on page 266.
277
278
Chapter 8:
Rooms
Rooms
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Rooms
Video: Rooms - Decks, Floors and
Foundations
When walls or railings create an enclosed
area, a room is created. You can select
rooms defined in this manner like other
objects in Chief Architect and open them for
specification.
Rooms are assigned a Room Type. Each
Room Type has predefined characteristics. A
room defined as Porch, for example, is
assigned certain attributes that are different
than a Kitchen.
Ceiling and floor heights can be defined
room-by-room or for the entire floor.
Materials for walls, ceilings, floors and

moldings can be defined room-by-room or
for the entire model based on Room Type.
Chapter Contents
Room Definition
Room Defaults
Room Material Defaults
Floor & Ceiling Heights
Selecting Rooms
Room Types
Room Labels
Decks
Editing Rooms
Special Ceilings
Room Polylines
Room Specification Dialog
Baseboard, chair-rail, and crown molding

can be applied room-by-room or for the
entire floor.
279
Room Definition
Video: Room Definitions and Key
Room Properties
A room is a totally enclosed area defined by
any combination of joined walls or railings,
visible or invisible. To be recognized as a
room by Chief Architect a room must have
an unbroken perimeter.
Unless otherwise specified, rooms generate
floor and ceiling platforms automatically.
Most rooms are also automatically covered
by the roof when one is built. There are
exceptions to this, such as rooms defined as
Decks.
If room is drawn within a larger structure and

none of its walls connect to the exterior
walls, either directly or indirectly by
connecting to walls that do, the program will
view this room as a separate building and
unexpected issues may result. Connect such
a room to the larger structure with an
Invisible wall.
Room definition disappears if part or all of a
surrounding wall is deleted. It is a good idea
to finalize the position of walls before
defining rooms with names and attributes
such as floor height and ceiling height.
Room Defaults
selecting Edit> Default Settings. In
the Default Settings dialog, select Floor
and click the Edit button to open the Floor
Defaults dialog for the current floor.
The default values for rooms are specified in
the Floor Defaults dialog for the current
floor. The Floor Defaults dialog contains
important information that the program uses
to create 3D models - particularly floor and

ceiling heights. Moldings can also be
specified in the Floor Defaults dialog.
Only the defaults for the first floor of a
building can be set ahead of time. The
program uses the setting from the first floor
to create subsequent floors. Once a new floor
is built, its floor defaults can be changed. See
Room Material Defaults

The default materials used for rooms are
specified based on the type of room. There
are four separate room types that can have
their default materials specified:
280
General Rooms
Kitchens, Baths, and Utility Rooms
Decks
Garage, Porches.
The Room Material Defaults dialog is

accessed by selecting Edit> Default
Settings...
. Expand the Materials
category, select Room Materials, and click
Edit.. Click the room type you want to edit to

open the Room Material Defaults dialog
for that room type. This dialog is similar to
the Materials tab found in many specification
dialogs. See Materials Tab on page 710.
Above Floors Platform for Ceiling is

unchecked in the Floor Defaults dialog.
See Floor Defaults on page 364.
If a room type is assigned, the room uses one

of the four defaults for its materials. If a
room type has not been assigned, the room
uses the General Rooms default materials.
There are several ways that materials can be

assigned to walls, depending on how the
rooms and walls have been defined.
Introductory Training Video: Custom

Flooring
Specify floor materials and subfloor material
for the entire floor in the Room Material
Defaults dialog or for individual rooms in
the Room Specification dialog.
You can specify three separate ceiling
materials for a ceiling.
Normally, only the Floor Covering and the
Ceiling Covering display in 3D views. If the
covering is specified as No Material, the
material below is visible. If no floor or
ceiling material has been assigned, then the
program displays the default material for the
floor or ceiling.
All floor and ceiling materials are used for
the calculation of the materials list.
You can only assign unique ceiling materials
to individual rooms when the checkbox Use
When you create a room, the wall surfaces

use the default material specified in the Wall
Type Definition dialog. See Wall Type
You can change a rooms wall material on the
Materials tab of the Room Specification
dialog. See Materials Tab on page 710. To
restore the default Wall Type material, click
Plan Materials and select Use Default from
the list. See Plan Materials Dialog on page
707.
In addition, you can change the surface
material of an individual wall in the Wall
Specification dialog. If you select Use
Default as the material, the program refers to
the material specified in the Room
When neither the wall nor the room has a
material assigned to it, the program refers to
the general material for walls in the
Material Defaults dialog. See Material

Introductory Training Video: Vaulted
and Custom Ceilings
Default floor and ceiling heights are defined
in the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor,
including the foundation. Use the Floor

Defaults dialog to change these values on a
floor-by-floor basis.
281
Rooms
Floor and Ceiling Materials
Wall Materials
Use the Room Specification dialog to set

floor heights on a room-by-room basis. You
can use these settings to create split levels,
sunken living rooms, bi-levels, and dropped
garages, for example.
definition. To create room definition without

enclosing an area with solid walls, use
Railings
In 3D views you can adjust the default floor

and ceiling height for the entire floor, the
floor and ceiling height for an individual
room, or the floor and ceiling height for an
individual wall. See In 3D Views on page
290.
The Room Specification dialog controls
ceiling heights by room. Different rooms on
the same floor can have unique ceiling
heights, cathedral ceilings, coffered ceilings,
or no ceiling at all. See Room Specification
Dialog on page 296.
Using Invisible
Railings
Using an
Invisible Wall
Visible or invisible, railings work well to

create room definition because they put a
railing where the two rooms meet and fill in
the vertical space between with a short wall.
An invisible wall does not fill in the vertical
space between the two levels.
Ceiling and floor heights are interrelated.
Changing the floor or ceiling height in one
room can affect floor and ceiling heights
above and below.
All floor and ceiling heights are measured

relative to zero, which is the default floor
height for Floor 1. Unlike other default floor
and ceiling heights, the default floor height
for Floor 1 cannot be changed, but the floor
heights of rooms on Floor 1 can be edited
individually.
In order to raise or lower a rooms floor or
ceiling height, you must give it a room
282
If a rooms floor is lowered, its ceiling

height is increased while the ceiling
below that room drops.
If the floor is raised, the ceiling height

decreases while the ceiling below that
room is raised.
If a ceiling is lowered or raised, the floor

above is lowered or raised as well.
If the rooms above a particular room have

more than one floor height, the rooms
ceiling is stepped.
Selecting Rooms
Rooms
In the following example, the lowest floor

height is 0, the next is 24, and the next is 48
inches. The ceiling height in each room is set
at 96 inches. An overview and cross section/
elevation view are shown.
In a situation like this, a Lowered Ceiling can

be used to cover any steps made by
different floor heights on the floor above. See
Split Levels
A split level can be created by raising or
lowering the floor and ceiling heights of
various areas of the plan.
Selecting Rooms
Room definition is established when a room
is completely enclosed by walls. You can
confirm that a room has room definition by
using the Select Objects
tool to select it.
When a fully-enclosed room is selected, the
room highlights.
Note: The selection color can be specified in
the Preferences dialog. See Colors Panel
on page 186.
The room at left is selected
As with many other objects in the program,

rooms can be group-selected, as well.
283
The Exterior Room
In 3D Views
You can also select the exterior of a model.

This allows you to control the buildings
exterior wall coverings and materials using
Click the floor of a room or on a wall surface

inside the room in a 3D or cross section view
Click just outside an exterior wall using the
click Select Next Object

edit button or
press the Tab key until the room is selected.
The status bar indicats which object is
currently selected.
Select Objects
tool to select the Exterior
Room. When it is selected, a highlighted
band around the plans exterior displays.
This band represents the selection area for
the Exterior Room.

tool. If you
select another object instead of the room,
Click the exterior surface of an exterior wall

to select the Exterior Room. Click Select
Next Object
if needed. For more, see In
3D Views on page 290.
Using Select Same Type

Click a room to select it, then click the
Select Same Type edit button and use
it to group-select rooms with shared
attributes. See Select Same / Load Same
on page 152.
The Exterior Room is selected
Room Types
Video: Assigning Room Types and
Running a Plan Check
Once your floor plan is laid out, each room
should be assigned a Room Type on the
General tab of the Room Specification
dialog. See General Tab on page 297.
When you assign a room type, a label with
the room name displays in floor plan view.
The Room Type applies appropriate
structural and display properties to the room.
284
You can edit the text of a room label in floor

plan view, but the type of room originally
assigned remains until it is changed in the
Room Specification dialog. See Editing
Room Labels on page 287.
Available Room Types

There are three categories of room types:
Interior, Exterior and Hybrid.
Interior - Living, Dining, Family, Kitchen,
Nook, Bath, Master Bath, Master Bedrm,
Bedroom, Study, Office, Entry, Hall, Closet,

Dressing, Storage, Laundry, and Utility
Walls that define the garage have a foundation under them defined by the
Foundation Defaults dialog with a
concrete slab at the top of stem wall or
grade beam.
The garage floor displays in 3D with the

foundation floor, not the first floor.
Defining a room as Slab causes the floor

platform thickness to equal the slab thickness value in the Foundation Defaults
dialog.
Courts, decks and balconies do not generate foundations.
Exterior - Court, Deck, Balcony

Hybrid - Open Below, Garage, Slab, Porch,
Attic
Effects of Room Types

The program applies specific structural and
display properties to rooms depending on the
assigned Room Type.
Living Area
All interior type rooms are included in

Living Area calculations; exterior and
hybrid rooms are not.
Doors and Windows
A window placed in a wall between an

exterior room and an interior room
always faces out toward the exterior.
Windows placed between interior rooms

generate a warning message.
Door placed between interior and exterior

type rooms display threshold lines.
Interior doors do not display thresholds.
Open Below rooms are treated as interior

rooms for window and door placement.
Ceilings and Roofs
Interior rooms have a ceiling and roof

above them unless specified otherwise.
Exterior rooms are assumed to be open to
the outside and do not generate a roof
above them.
Attic rooms are ignored by the programs
automatic roof generator.
Garage, Slabs, and Porches are treated
like exterior rooms in all cases except
that they generate a ceiling and a roof
above them.
Electrical
The Auto Place Outlets

tool adds
outlets automatically to all interior rooms
except bathrooms. Only one outlet over
each sink is added for a bathroom.
Open Below is a unique type of interior

room. It has no floor platform and can be
used for defining stairwell openings.

tool places
fewer outlets in hybrid rooms.

tool does
not place outlets in Porch rooms.
Exterior walls of rooms default to create

the foundation type specified in the
Foundation Defaults dialog.

tool does
not place outlets in exterior type rooms.
Floors and Foundations

Video: Indicating Room Floor Coverings in Plan
285
Rooms
Room Types

tool does
not place outlets in Open Below rooms.
Any outlet manually placed in an exterior

room automatically becomes a waterproof outlet designed for exterior use.
Plan Check
Trim and Molding
Baseboards and chair rails are not drawn

in Open Below rooms, but crown molding does.
Moldings are not automatically drawn in

exterior rooms.
Plan Check
uses the room type and
its characteristics for basic plan checking.
For example, a closet does not need a
smoke detector but a bedroom does. See
Plan Check on page 885.
Room Labels
Room labels are based on the Room Types
assigned in the Room Specification
dialog. You can move or delete a room label
in floor plan view without affecting the room
type. See Room Types on page 284.

218. You can specify how the area of rooms
is calculated by the program by turning on
the display of one of these layers:
Rooms, Standard Area is measured

from center of interior walls to either the
outside surface of exterior walls or exterior wall framing, depending on the Living Area to setting in the Floor
Defaults dialog. It is rounded to the
nearest square foot or mm and does not
include the area within bay, box and bow
windows.
Rooms, Interior Area is measured from

the inner surfaces of all the room's walls.
It is rounded to the nearest square foot or
mm and includes the area within bay, box
and bow windows.
Rooms, Interior Dimensions is also

measured from the inner surfaces of the
room walls. It is rounded to the nearest
inch or mm and does not include the area
within bay, box and bow windows.
There are two parts to each room label: the

room type, which is similar to a standard text
object, and the room area, which is not a
standard text entry and cannot be edited.
Room labels can move about or even
disappear when room entries are revalidated.
Room Label Defaults

The initial settings that control the size,
font, color and other aspects of room
label appearance are controlled in the Room
Label Defaults dialog. See Room Label
Displaying Room Labels

The display of room labels is controlled in
the Layer Display Options dialog. See
286
Room Labels
Editing Room Labels

Room labels are similar to standard text
entries and can be changed, moved and
resized like any other text object.
Although the text of a room label can be
edited, the program recognizes the specified
room type until you select another in the
Room Specification dialog. The program
determines the type of the room from this
selection, not from the text that the label
contains.
Before editing a room label, try to assign the
room type most similar to the rooms actual
use. For example, it is reasonable to change
the Bedroom label to Guest Room, since
these rooms have similar uses. Defining a
closet as a Living Room and then editing
its label to say Closet may cause problems.
The program still considers it a living room
because this is the specified room type.
If you delete the room label, the room type
remains in the Room Specification
dialog. To restore the label, check the Show
Room Label check box in the Room
on page 297.
Room Area
Unlike the rest of a room label, the room area
and dimensions are not standard text entries
and cannot be edited or changed. The room
area moves, resizes and rotates with the rest
of the room label, but you can turn the area

and dimensions on or off separately in the
The Interior Area room area calculation
includes the areas within bay, box or bow
windows, while the Standard Area and
Interior Dimensions calculations do not.
You can also insert room areas and
dimensions into text objects as Text Macros.
See Text Macros on page 826.
Living Area
The Living Area label displays the area of
the floor platform for living areas in a plan. It
is found near the bottom center of the plan as
soon as a room area is defined by walls and/
or railing. The area is recalculated every time
you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
The Living Area displays for an individual

building if half or more of that building's area
is living area. For example, a living area
label would not display for a detached garage
that contains a bathroom or small shop.
You can choose not to display this label by
clearing the Show Living Area check box
in the Plan Defaults dialog or by turning
off the display of the Room Labels layer in
the Layer Display Options dialog.
The Living Area label can be moved or
deleted. To restore a deleted Living Area
label, select Tools> Plan Check
. You
can click the Done button immediately,
without actually completing Plan Check.
Living Area vs. Footprint

The Living Area should not be mistaken for
the footprint of the house. Only true livable
287
Rooms
Rooms, Standard Area can be measured to either the exterior main wall
layer surface or to the exterior wall surface.
Specify which method you prefer on the General tab of the Floor Defaults dialog. See
areas are included in the Living Area

calculation. Exterior and hybrid room types
such as Garage, Deck, and Porch are not
included. Neither is any room labeled Open
Below or Attic. See Available Room Types
on page 284 of the Reference Manual.
Living Area is measured from the outside
surface or main layer surface of exterior
walls, and to the center of walls or railings
separating the living area from exterior or
hybrid room types.
2.
Click the Make Room Polyline

edit
button. This creates a polyline surrounding the plan from the exterior wall surface.
3.
You can edit the polyline shape if you

want to measure portions of a home.
4.
Select the Polyline and click the Open

Object
edit button. A Polyline Area
displays in the Polyline
Specification dialog. If no area is
shown, the polyline is not closed.
To find the footprint of a floor

1.
Click outside a plan, near an exterior

wall. This selects the exterior room
surrounding the plan.
Decks
Introductory Training Video: Patios
To create a deck without a railing, click the
Introductory Training Video: Decks
Straight Deck Edge

Video: Generating Deck Planking and
Framing
Video: Extending a Deck with the Polygon Deck Tool
288
tool or the Curved
Deck Edge
tool, then click and drag to
draw the perimeter of the deck.
You can also create a regular, polygonshaped deck using the Polygon Shaped
Deck
tool. See Polygon Shaped Rooms
and Decks on page 235.
You can define a room as a Deck on the

General Tab of the Room Specification
dialog.
A room does not have to be defined by Deck

Railing to be specified as a Deck. See
Room Types on page 284.
To draw a deck, click the Deck Railing

tool, then click and drag to draw a railing.
Once room definition is established, the area
defined by the deck railing is assigned the
Deck room type.
By default, decks do not have roofs. If you

want to have a roof over your deck, check
Roof over this room on the Structure tab of
the Room Specification dialog. Select the
Post to Beam option on the Railing tab to
give the roof a visible means of support. See
Railing Tab on page 267.
Decks

Video: Drawing Stairs for a Deck
There are two ways to create stairs from a
deck down to the terrain.
To create stairs using the Click Stair tool
1.
Select the Click Stair
tool.
2.
Click within 12 inches of the deck rail,

outside the deck.
To draw a down stairway from a deck

1.
Select Build> Stairs

view.
2.
Place the pointer at the edge of the deck,

hold down the Alt key (or click with the
right mouse button) and drag in the
direction of the stairs. Holding the Alt
key produces a stairway that goes down
instead of up.
3.
in floor plan
Place a doorway in the railing at the top

of the steps.
The only time you should ever draw

stairs from an upper level down is when
you are going from a floor platform such as a
deck to the ground or finished grade. When
stairs are drawn between two floor platforms,
they should be drawn from the lower floor
platform to the upper floor platform.
Deck Framing
Video: Framing Decks - New Planking
and Framing Options
You can frame deck rooms two ways in Chief

Architect: Standard deck framing or
Advanced Deck Framing.
If Advanced Deck Framing has not been
built, the program creates standard deck
framing when you generate floor framing
using the Build Framing dialog. If you
have a deck on your second floor, you must
go to the 1st floor tab and select framing for
the platform above to generate standard deck
framing. See Floor Tabs on page 475.
Normally, standard decks appear as solid
platforms in all 3D views. Standard deck
framing displays in 3D views if you create a
framing overview. You can change the deck
materials that displays in 3D views on the
Materials Tab of the Room Specification
dialog. See Materials Tab on page 710.
You can create Advanced Deck Framing
details that also include posts, support
beams, and deck planking using the Build
Advanced Deck Framing
edit button. If
a foundation level exists, the program also
creates supports for the deck. You do not
need to build any other framing using the
Build Framing dialog to create and display
the Advanced Deck Framing.
Any standard deck framing is deleted when
Advanced Deck Framing is generated.
If you want to remove the Advanced Deck
Framing, select the deck room and click the
Remove Advanced Deck Framing
edit
button. Normally, the advanced framing deck
display in all 3D views.
Deck Planking
The display of the deck planking is
controlled by the Framing, Deck Planking
289
Rooms
Deck Stairs
layer in the Layer Display Options

on page 218.
You can customize the planking overhang,
width, spacing and border on the Deck tab of
the Room Specification dialog. See
Deck Tab on page 301.
After setting these specifications, select the
deck room and click the Advanced Deck
Framing
edit button. If Advanced Deck
Framing has already been built, click
Remove Advanced Deck Framing first.
Once created, the individual planking and
framing objects created by the Advanced
Deck Framing
tool can be edited like
CAD objects. See Editing Closed-Polyline
Editing Rooms
Once a room is defined by walls or railings,
its structure and appearance can be edited
using the edit buttons or the Room
Specification dialog. Floor and ceiling
heights, floor platform structure, moldings,
wall coverings and an array of materials can
all be specified in the Room
Specification dialog. See Room
In 3D Views
The floor and ceiling heights for floors,
rooms, and individual walls can be edited
using edit handles in render and vector
camera views and overviews. Lowered
ceilings cannot be edited in 3D. The default
floor and ceiling heights for an entire model
can be edited in a 3D view by selecting the
exterior room.
To change default floor heights in 3D
1.
290
Create a floor camera view of your plan.

Although walls can be edited in any 3D
view, cross sections, elevations, floor
camera views, or floor overviews are
best for editing walls.
2.
Click the exterior surface of a wall to

select the exterior room. The status bar
indicates when the exterior room is
selected.
3.
Click and drag the edit handle on the top

wall edge to adjust the default ceiling
height, or the edit handle on the bottom
edge to adjust the default floor height.
Temporary dimensions display.
To adjust room heights in 3D

1.

2.
Click the surface of a wall that faces the

room to select it. When the room is
selected in 3D:
The room highlights
The Status Bar says Room. See The
Status Bar on page 8.
Two edit handles display on the top and
bottom edges of the highlighted wall.
Editing Rooms
4.
Click and drag the edit handle on the top

wall edge to adjust the room ceiling
height, or the handle on the bottom edge
to adjust its floor height. Temporary
dimensions display.
As you drag a handle, notice that all
walls defining that room are affected.
To adjust the height of a wall in 3D

1.
2.
3.
4.

Click a surface of the wall that faces. By
default, the room selects first. You can
change this behavior on the Architectural panel of the Preferences dialog. See
Architectural Panel on page 198.
edit
button to select the wall. The Status Bar
says Wall. See The Status Bar on
page 8.

A selected room or rooms can be edited in a
toolbar.
The following edit toolbar buttons may
display on the edit toolbar for selected
rooms.

button
to select nearby objects instead of the
selected room, particularly the wall it is
placed in.

button to
select room(s). See Room Specification
Dialog on page 296.

button to
select all rooms that have attributes set
the same as the original room. This can
be useful to quickly see which rooms on a
floor share the same attributes.
Use the Load Values to Make Same

button to load the selected attributes into
any rooms that do not currently have the
same values. See Select Same / Load
Same on page 152.

button to create a polyline that follows the
surfaces of the selected room. See Room
Click the Make Room Molding Polyline
Click and drag the edit handles. Temporary dimensions display in elevation
views. See Editing Closed-Polyline
Note: Any rooms that do not update when the

default floor or ceiling height is changed are
not using the default values. To use the
default values for a specific room, open it for
specification and check Default for any of the
room height values. See Room Specification
Dialog on page 296.
button to create a room molding

polyline. See Room Molding Polylines
on page 295.
Click the Expand Room Polyline

button to create a room polyline that
291
Rooms
3.
ignores invisible walls and railings. See

Expand Room Polyline on page 296.
Click the Calculate Materials for Room
contents of the selected room, not including walls. See Calculate From Room
on page 1006.
button to create a materials list of the
Special Ceilings
By default, the program builds a flat ceiling
platform on top the wall plates of a room.
More varied and complex ceilings are made
using settings in the Room Specification
dialog and the Ceiling Plane
tool.
Ceiling planes behave like roof planes except

that whereas the top of a roof plane is viewed
from outside the house, the bottom of a
ceiling plane is viewed from inside the
house. See Ceiling Planes on page 409.
Lowered Ceiling Height

You can define a Lowered Ceiling height to
model a dropped ceiling without affecting
the wall plate height. See General Tab on
page 297.
292
The illustration below, the default ceiling

height for the entire floor is 120", and the
room on the right has a Lowered Ceiling
height of 96". The dashed line in the dialog
preview represents the lowered ceiling.
Rooms
Special Ceilings
Cathedral Ceilings
A cathedral ceiling can be created using the
underside of the roof above or by drawing
ceiling planes in floor plan view.
Structure tab, clear the check box for

Ceiling Over This Room.
3.
To create a cathedral ceiling

1.
Draw the roof planes.
2.
When the roof is in place, individually

select every room affected, and open the
Room Specification dialog. On the
To create a ceiling pitch different from

the roofs, select Build> Roof> Ceiling
Plane
and draw ceiling planes. See
Ceiling Planes on page 409.
4.
Select each ceiling plane and assign a

lower pitch See Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog on page 428.
293
Tray Ceilings
Tray ceilings are usually based on a hip-style
roof. If you use a hip roof and uncheck Ceiling Over This Room, on the General tab of
Hip roof with cathedral

ceiling over.
Hip roof, ceiling over, ceiling

height raised and ceilings
rebuilt.
Generally, only the lower part of a tray

ceiling follows the roof line, with the rest
remaining flat. In this case, the ceiling needs
to remain checked for that room and the
ceiling height adjusted instead.
The roof must be built before adjusting the
ceiling height for a coffered ceiling. Any
attempt to rebuild the roof after adjusting the
ceiling height results in the roof itself being
raised to match the new ceiling height.
For this example, a hip roof is based on 8
ceilings. After the roof is built, the Ceiling
Height is raised to 10. The resulting ceiling
follows the roof pitch for 2, then becomes a
flat ceiling.
Dashed lines in floor plan view show where
the ceiling changes from sloped to flat. This
line is located on the Walls/Beams layer in
the Layer Display Options dialog.
294
the Room Specification dialog, the new

ceiling follows the entire hip roof line.
Tray ceiling from floor plan

view. Note dashed lines for
changed ceiling direction.
Other Special Ceilings

Soffits
can be used in various ways to
enhance the 3D model. Soffits ability to
follow the slope of the roof offers unlimited
possibilities, such as exposed beams or
trusses and coffered ceilings.
Polyline solids, framing members and locked

roof trusses can also be used for similar
purposes.
Room Polylines
Room Polylines
Make Room Molding
Polyline Dialog
Click the Make Room Polyline edit

button to create a standard polyline that
follows the surfaces of the selected room.
Room Molding Polylines
To create a molding polyline that

follows the interior surfaces of a room,
select the room and click the Make Room
Molding Polyline button on the edit toolbar.
Room molding polylines can be edited just
like other molding polylines. Their shape and
height can be altered and the molding profile
can be changed. Additional molding profiles
can also be assigned. See Molding
Use a room molding polyline to wrap a
molding around an object the molding
would not normally wrap around. You can
also remove a portion of an existing room
molding by removing an edge of the polyline.
See Edit Object Parts on page 93.
Rooms
Room polylines and room molding polylines

are not affected when the room is altered.
1 Select the type of molding to convert to

a molding polyline.
Each option is only enabled if the selected

room has that type of molding applied to it.
When you convert a molding type to a molding polyline, the room molding turns off. See
Moldings Tab on page 302.
Base Molding - Select to convert the

rooms base molding into a molding
polyline.
Chair Rail Molding - Select to convert

the rooms chair rail molding into a molding polyline.
Crown Molding - Select to convert the

rooms crown molding into a molding
polyline.
2 Blank Molding - Select to generate a
blank molding polyline at the specified

height. The polyline follows the room
perimeter and has blank sections where the
polyline crosses windows and doors if these
objects are at the polyline height.
295
3 Height - Specify the height of the blank
2.
Click the Expand Room Polyline

edit button.
Expand Room Polyline
3.
molding.
The Expand Room Polyline edit

button displays when you select a room
separated from other rooms by invisible
walls or railings and creates a polyline that
ignores those invisible walls and railings.
To use the Expand Room Polyline tool
1.
Click in a room defined by at least one

invisible wall or railing.
or
Make Room Molding Polyline

edit
button to create a polyline that follows
the interior surfaces of walls, ignoring
invisible walls and railings.
The Expanded Room Polyline tool does not
create a new room that can be opened for
specification; it only allows you to generate a
larger room polyline or room molding
polyline.

The Room Specification dialog controls
the structural characteristics and appearance
of a selected room. To open the Room
Specification dialog, select a room and
click the Open Object
296
edit button.
A value with Default checked is referenced

from the Floor Defaults dialog. To return a
value to the default, replace the check mark.
General Tab
1
3
4
Rooms
2
12
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
The General tab shows a cross section of the

room, showing the various heights and
platform thicknesses, including foundations,
for the floors below the room you selected.
The room in the above example has a
foundation below.
What appears in the cross section depends on
the current floor and the location of the
pointer when you selected the room. Only
two floors at a time display in the Room
Specification dialog. If one large room on
the current floor is positioned over a couple
of smaller rooms, the position of the pointer
relative to the smaller lower rooms
determines which of the the rooms display as

the floor below.
1 Select the Room Type. This affects

some of the room characteristics.
2 Show Room Label - Select the check
box to display the room label in floor

plan view.
3 Floor Height - Specify the height of
the subflooring above or below the

default first floor height of zero.
4 Ceiling Height - Specify the ceiling

height relative to the rooms floor
297
height. Ceiling height is measured from the

top of the subflooring to the bottom of the
ceiling framing.
5 Lowered ceiling - Specify the height
for a lowered ceiling, measured from

the top of the subflooring to the bottom of the
lowered ceiling framing.
6 Stem Wall Height - If the room below
is the foundation, specify the distance

from the bottom of the floor framing to the
top of the footing.
7 Floor Above Height - Specify the
height of the subfloor for the floor

above, measured from the top of the current
floors subfloor.
8 Ceiling Below - The ceiling height for
the floor below is shown. It may be

defined here, or in the specification for that
room. The values are linked.
9 Platform Thickness - The thickness of
the floor platform assembly, including

the subfloor and joists, displays here but
cannot be edited. The platform thickness can
be changed on the Structure tab.
298
If the material for the current room floor is

Concrete, and floors and ceilings have been
rebuilt since it was set to this, the Platform
thickness defaults to the Slab thickness in the
Foundation Defaults dialog, unless is
was explicitly set in the Structure tab.
10 The thickness of the slab on the floor
below (if any) is shown here, but

cannot be edited.
11 Roof Group - Specify a roof group for
the room. The program builds a

complete roof plan for each set of rooms with
the same Roof Group number. This roof plan
is not influenced by any other parts of the
structure where the rooms are in different
roof groups. This number is nearly always
left zero. Change this number to break off a
structure so that the program does not
automatically combine its roof system with
the main building.
12 A diagram of the room is shown. The
arrows indicate what part of the

structure moves if you make changes in the
corresponding box.
Structure Tab
9
Rooms
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 If Ceiling Over This Room is checked,
the room has a flat ceiling. If

unchecked, the ceiling follows the underside
of the roof or ceiling planes.
2 If Roof Over This Room is checked, a

roof automatically generates over the
room. If unchecked, no roof generates.
3 Slab Foundation for This Room -
Check this box to change this rooms

floor platform into a concrete slab. This slab
gets its thickness from the Foundation
Defaults dialog. See Building a
This option is only available if there is no

room or foundation room under the selected
room.
4 Floor for This Room is Supplied by
the Foundation Room from the

Floor Below - Check this box to make the
current room similar to an Open Below
room, deleting its own floor platform. The
floor of the room below, which is often a
room on the foundation floor, then supplies
the floor of the current room. While the same
thing could be accomplished by naming the
current room Open Below, this method
allows the current room to retain its normal
299
designation as Living, Garage, etc. This is

often used in situations where framed walls
are built above concrete curb walls, such as
in garages.
5 Subfloor Thickness - Set the thickness
of the subfloor under this room. The

default value for this is set in the Build
Framing dialog on the Floor tab for the
current floor (subfloor for floor x). Along
with the Floor Structure Thickness, this
determines the depth of the platform under
this room.
When viewing framing, this Subfloor
Thickness may be represented by a gap. To
remove this gap, change the value to zero
and rebuild the appropriate framing.
6 Floor Structure Thickness - Set the
thickness (or depth) of the selected

structure under this room. Together with
Subfloor Thickness, this determines the
depth of the platform under the room.
7 Floor Structure Type - Select the type
of floor structure. Check Default to use

the structure type specified on the
appropriate floors tab of the Build Framing
dialog.
8 Frame Lowered Ceiling - Check this
box if you want the program to frame a

lowered ceiling. Specify the thickness.
9 Insulation (cross sections only) -
Check these boxes to generate

insulation details in cross section views when
the Autodetail
tool is used. See AutoDetailing on page 751.
Insulation Above Ceiling - Check this box
to generate insulation details above the
ceiling in cross section views when the
Autodetail
tool is used.
Insulation Under Floor - Check this box to

generate insulation details under the floor in
cross section views when the Autodetail
tool is used.
300
Deck Tab
1
Rooms
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
The options on the Deck tab are only

available for rooms designated as decks.
1 Specify how far the deck planking

Overhangs the rim joists.
2 Enter the Width of the deck planking.

3 Specify the width of the Gaps between
the deck planks.
4 If you want to enter a Plank Direction,

remove the checkmark from Default.
Enter the direction as degrees.
5 Specify the Number of Border
the outside edge of the deck and may not be

parallel with the rest of the deck planking.
Border planks generate as long as the length
of the inside edge is greater than 0.
Border planks are not generated for curved
deck edges.
6 Check No Border Against Walls to
prevent border planking from being

generated along any walls defining the deck.
Check Herringbone to produce a
herringbone pattern where the border planks
meet.
Planks. These are planks that follow
301
7 Enter the depth of the joists that support
10 Specify the depth of the beams that
8 Specify the distance between joists.
11 Enter the width of the beams that
9 If you want to specify joist direction,
12 Enter the spacing between the beams
the deck.
The default is 16 O.C.
uncheck Default. Enter the direction as

degrees.
support the deck joists.

support the deck joists.
that support the deck joists.
Moldings Tab
2
3
4
5
Chair rail, crown and base moldings can be

assigned to a selected room on the Moldings
tab. Moldings are placed around the wall
surfaces of a room. They continue around the
surface of any soffit that is attached to the
wall at the molding height.
302
1 Previews of the selected Crown
Molding, Chair Rail and Base Molding

display in these panes. If no profile is
selected, a flat profile is used.
2 Click the Library button under each
type of molding to open the Select

Library Object dialog and browse the
Moldings and Profiles library and select the
molding desired profile. See Select Library
Object Dialog on page 679.
3 Click the Clear button under a molding
type to remove the selected profile from

the room. Unless the molding Height is set at
0, a flat profile is still used.
4 Specify a Height for the selected
molding profile. If no profile is

specified, a flat profile is used unless the
Height is set at 0. Molding heights can be
specified in 1/16or 1 mm increments.
A (D) following any value signifies that it is
a default value set in the Floor Defaults
dialog. If a value is not followed by a (D),
replace it with d to reset it to the default.
5 Specify a Distance Above Floor for
the molding type. Crown molding and

chair rail are measured to the top of the
profile while base molding is measured to the
bottom of the profile.
Wall Covering Tab

The Wall Covering tab of the Room
Specification dialog contains the same
elements as the Wall Covering tab of the
Wall Specification dialog. When a wall
covering is assigned using the Room
Specification dialog, that wall covering is
applied to all walls in the selected room only.
See Wall Covering Tab on page 271.
Wall coverings can be applied to exterior rooms as well by selecting the exterior room and opening it for specification. See
Selecting Rooms on page 283 for information about selecting exterior rooms.
Fill Style Tab

For more information about the Fill Style tab,
see Fill Style Tab on page 864.
Materials Tab
For more information about the Materials
tab, see Materials Tab on page 710.
303
304
Chapter 9:
Doors
Doors
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Windows
and Doors
Video: Doors and Windows
Chief Architect comes with tools for creating
a wide variety of interior and exterior doors.
In addition, the library offers a full line of
specialty doors and doorways including
hinged, sliding, pocket, bifold, garage, and
manufacutrer specific products.
Chapter Contents
Door Defaults
The Door Tools
Displaying Doors
Editing Doors
Centering Doors and Windows
Changing Door Swings
Special Doors
Door Specification Dialog
Door Schedules
Door Defaults
Click the + next to Doors to show the door
sub-headings. Select a subheading and click

the Edit... button to open the defaults dialog
associated with your selection.
305
Interior and Exterior Door defaults can also

be accessed by double-clicking the Door
placed. Settings for interior and exterior

doors are similar and should both be defined.
Tools
parent button or Hinged Door
child tool.
The Interior Door Defaults and

Exterior Door Defaults dialogs look
nearly the same as the Door Specification
dialog. See Door Specification Dialog on
page 315. There are only two differences:
The values in the Door Defaults dialog are

initial values for interior or exterior doors.
Individual doors can be edited by selecting
and opening them for specification. Changes
made to individual doors after they have
been placed do alter the default settings.
The rough opening increase size is not

specified in the Door Defaults dialog.
Rough opening defaults are set on the
Openings tab of the Framing dialog. See
Openings Tab on page 479.
Since default settings are specified here,

Use Default is not an option on some
drop-down lists as it is in the Door
Some default settings, like the casing width

on the Frame & Trim tab, are dynamic and
update globally when a new value is entered.
When you change a dynamic default,
existing doors in the model update. See
Dynamic Defaults on page 179.
It is a good idea to go over the settings in the
Door Defaults dialog before doors are
The Door Tools

Video: Placing Doors
Video: Adding a Doorway and Door
Panel from the Library
To place a door, select the type you
want from the Build> Door submenu.
With a door tool activated, click a wall to
place a door in the wall. If the wall is an
exterior wall or a wall that separates an
interior from an exterior room, the program
306
places an exterior door based on the default

settings for exterior doors. If the wall is an
interior wall, the program places an interior
door based on the default settings for interior
doors. See Door Defaults on page 305.
Doors can also be placed in curved walls.
See Curved Options on page 318.
Once placed, any door may be changed into
any other type of door using the Door
Specification dialog. See Door
The Door Tools
Select Build> Door> Hinged Door

and click a wall where you want to
place a hinged door. Hinged doors can be
placed on interior or exterior walls. A hinged
door becomes a double door when its width
is four feet or greater.
Doorways
Choose Build> Door> Doorway and
click a wall to place a doorway (an
opening without a door). Doorways can be
placed on interior or exterior walls, or in
railings and fences to provide an opening.
You can insert doors from the library into
doorways.
Sliding Doors
Select Build> Door> Sliding Door
place a sliding door. Sliding doors can be
placed on interior or exterior walls. If placed
in an exterior wall, the door is glass; if placed
in an interior wall, it is a solid slab.
The default sliding door dimensions are
5-0 x 6-8 with a 12 bottom frame and a
6 frame on the sides and top. A sliding door
must be at least four feet wide.
Pocket Doors
Select Build> Door> Pocket Door
place a pocket door.
Bifold Doors
Choose Build> Door> Bifold Door
place a bifold door.
The default interior single bifold door is 26 x 6-8. A bifold door becomes a double
bifold door if its width is greater than three
feet.
Bifold doors always display closed in all 3D
views.
Garage Doors
Choose Build> Door> Garage Door
and click a wall to place a garage door.
The default garage door is 8-0 x 7-0 high.
A garage door must be at least two feet wide
Garage doors can only be placed in exterior
walls. A dashed line in floor plan view shows
the space occupied by the garage door when
open.
A garage door cuts the stemwall provided the
room is designated as a garage before the
door is inserted.
The Doorway Library

Select Library> Library Browser and
expand the Doorways category to
access a library of special entryways and
doorways. Select a doorway and click a wall
to place it.
The default pocket door dimensions are 2-6

x 6-8 high. A pocket door becomes a
double pocket door if its width is four feet or
greater.
307
Doors
Hinged Doors
To add a door to the doorway, select a Door

Type other than Doorway from the dropdown list in the Door Specification
dialog. or click the Library button and select
a door style from the Doors library. See
You can also select a custom door from the
library and drop it into a doorway in floor
plan view or any 3D view.
To place a library door in a doorway:
5.
Continue clicking other doorways until

all changes have been made.
The Doors Library

The Doors library can be accessed by
selecting Library> Library Browser
.
The Door library contains a variety of
customized interior and exterior doors, and
doors offered by specific manufacturers. The
Doors library also contains garage doors and
gates that can be used with Fencing
1.
Go to floor plan view or any 3D view.
2.
Open the Library Browser.
3.
Navigate through the Doors library category until you find the custom door style
desired.
4.
Select the door in the Library Browser,

then click the doorway in your view. The
selected door replaces the original if one
has already been placed.
Creating Your Own Doors

Use the Create Symbol Wizard to
create custom doors and doorways and
save them in your own library for use in
future plans. See Create Symbol Wizard on
page 925.
Displaying Doors
The display of doors, door sizes, opening
indicators and headers is controlled in the
Layer Display Options dialog. See
If the Doors layer is turned off, doors and
their casing do not display but openings in
the walls where they are located are visible.
In Floor Plan View

If the Doors, Labels layer is set to display,
labels are centered on the doors that they
represent. Label size is controlled in the
Door Schedule Specification dialog.
See Label Tab on page 1000.
308
The size displays in the format 3068,

which is width by height in feet and inches.
A 3068 door is three feet, zero inches wide
and six feet, eight inches high. Metric door
dimensions format is 900x2100, where the
first number is the width in mm.
Customized labels can also be specified for
individual doors in the Door
Specification dialog. See Label Tab on
page 325.
Threshold Lines
Doors in exterior walls and doors that open
to exterior type rooms such as a garage,
Editing Doors
porch, or deck, have a threshold line across

the opening in floor plan view.
Threshold
Line
In 3D Views
Doors
To display opening indicator arrows in vector

views, turn on the Cabinet & Door Opening
Indicators layer in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
Door showing opening indicator
Reverse door opening indicators on the

Architectural panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Architectural Panel on page
198.
Editing Doors
Video: Developing a Sliding Glass
Door and Storing it in the Library
Blocked units are made up of individual

doors and windows. Select a blocked unit by
clicking it in floor plan or 3D view.

Video: Applying Selected Attributes of
One Door to Several
To select a door that is a component of a

blocked unit, click at the location of the component in question, then click the Select
Before a door can be edited, it must be

selected. To select a door, click it when the
Next Object
edit button or press the Tab
key. See Manually Mulled Units on page
332.
Select Objects
tool or any of the Door
Tools
are active. Doors and/or windows
can also be group selected and edited. See
Doors can be edited using the edit handles,

edit toolbar buttons, and in the Door
309
When you select a door in floor plan view,

the door size label indicates the width
followed by the height. For example, a 3068
door is 3-0 wide by 6-8 high.
In the Specification Dialog

Doors can be extensively customixed in the
Door Specification dialog. See Door
Using the Mouse

In floor plan view, click either of the two end

handles and drag along the wall to change the
width. The label showing the size updates as
the handles are dragged. Release when the
desired size is reached.
A selected door or doors can be edited in a

toolbar. See Using the Edit Toolbar on
page 97.
In 3D views, a selected door has five edit

handles: the Move handle at the center and a
Resize handle on each edge. Click and drag
an edge handle to resize the door.
As with most objects, doors can be copied,

replicated, moved, and deleted. The
following edit toolbar buttons may display
on the edit toolbar for selected doors.
Using the edit handles, a door resizes


button
selected door, particularly the wall it is
placed in.

edit button to
select door(s). See Door Specification
Dialog on page 315.
Accurate Move
slows down the
move speed when using the edit handles.
See Accurate Move on page 125. Not
available for component doors.

button to
selected door(s). See Components Dialog on page 1014.

door(s). See Point to Point Move on
page 125. Not available for component
doors.
Behavior
. See Defaults and
Preferences on page 80.
A door or window moved against an
intersecting wall temporarily stops when the
casing meets the intersecting wall. You can
continue to drag and it resumes movement
past or onto the intersecting wall. Place a
check in the Ignore Casing for Opening
Resize check box in the Plan Defaults
dialog to turn off this behavior. See Plan
Using Dimensions
Individual doors can be moved using
the Move Object Using
Dimension dialog. See Moving Objects
310
Click the Make Mulled Unit

edit
button to block the selected door(s) and/
or window(s) into a mulled unit. See
Manually Mulled Units on page 332.
Click the Explode Mulled Unit

edit
button to explode the selected mulled unit

button to
add the selected door(s) to the library. See
Adding a New Object on page 675.
Click the Replace from Library

button to replace the selected door with a
symbol from the Doorways library. See
Replace From Library on page 680.

button to
center doors along a wall or over cabinets
or fixtures. See Centering Doors and
Windows on page 311. Not available for

component doors.

button to reflect the selected door(s)
Objects on page 135. Not available for
component doors.

button to
locate all objects that have specific
matching attributes. These objects can
then be modified as a group using the
tool.
See Load to Make Same Value on page
152.
Gable Over Door/Window

- Create
a gable over the selected door(s) the next
time an automatic roof is built. See
Placing a Gable Over a Door on page
314.

The Center Object edit button allows
you to center the selected object along
a wall within a room.
To center a door or window
1.
2.
Select a door or combination of windows and doors in floor plan view.

edit button
then choose from one of the following
options:
Click the wall that contains the door to
center it along that wall. Openings can
also be centered along curved walls.
Click inside a room to center the door

on that room.
Click outside the house (on the exterior
room) to center the door along an exterior wall.
Doors and windows can also be centered to
sinks and appliances. Select a door or
window and click the Center Object
tool, then click a cabinet positioned against
the wall that contains a sink or cooktop.
311
Doors

Door swing direction and hinge side can be
changed using the Change Opening/Hinge
Side and Change Swing Side edit buttons.
Hinged Doors
In addition to using the edit buttons, hinged
doors hinge side and swing direction can be
changed using the triangular Rotate edit
handle.
2.
Drag the pointer along the path of the

new arc to change the hinge side and/or
swing direction.
3.
Release the mouse.
To adjust the angle of swing:

1.
In floor plan view, select the door and

grab the triangular handle.
2.
Drag to change the amount of swing.
3.
Release the mouse.
If you drag near the closed position, the door

snaps to a closed position.
Note: If the door is set to draw closed, the

swing as it appears in floor plan view has no
affect on the 3D view. See Options Tab on
page 317.
To change the swing using edit buttons:

Note: If the door is set to draw closed, the
swing as it appears in floor plan view has no
affect on the 3D view. See Options Tab on
page 317.
To change the swing using edit handles:

1.
312
In floor plan view, select the door and

grab the triangular handle.
1.
In floor plan view, select the door.
2.
To change the hinge side, click the

Change Opening/Hinge Side
button.
edit
To flip the fixed and moving sides of the

door, click the Change Swing Side
button.
Pocket Doors
To change the swing direction, click the

Change Swing Side
edit button.
To change the direction of a pocket door,

select it and click the Change Opening/
Hinge Side
edit button.
Sliding Doors
To change the side of a sliding door that is
fixed, select the sliding door then click the
Change Opening/Hinge Side
button.
edit
Note: There must be enough room for the

entire door to fit in the opposite wall or the
door does not change.
Bifold Doors
To change the side of a bifold door that is
fixed, select it then click the Change
Opening/Hinge Side
edit button.
313
Doors
3.
edit
To change the hinged side of the door, click

the Change Swing Side
edit button.
Special Doors
Wrapped Openings
Wrapped
openings of
various shapes
are available in
the Doorway
Library
.
You can also
create a wrapped
opening by
placing a
doorway in the
wall and
checking
Suppress Casing in the Frame and Trim tab
of the Door Specification dialog. Note
that the base molding wraps around the
opening.
Openings in Railings
Use a doorway to open a railing for a
stairway or other access. To open a railing
across an entire section, redefine the opening
size of the doorway in the Door
314
Specification dialog to a width greater

than the length of the railing. The opening
resizes to the maximum width possible for
that space. The illustration has two doorway
openings placed into the rail. These openings
are noted by arrows.
Transoms Above Doors

Transom windows above doors are created
the same as other stacked windows. See
Stacked Windows on page 331.
Placing a Gable Over a Door

Click the Gable Over Door/Window
edit button to produce a gable roof over
the selected door(s) the next time automatic
You can manually edit or delete this gable

line at any time. Your changes take effect
when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This
can also be used with group selected doors.
Custom Muntins
Like windows, doors with glass can have
custom muntins. Custom muntins are created
from CAD lines. See Custom Muntins on
page 338.
Blocked Doors and Windows

Combinations of doors and windows can be
blocked. Blocked units are mulled together
and can be copied together as a unit. Blocked
units containing doors can be treated as

either windows or doors for materials list and
schedule generation. See Manually Mulled
Units on page 332.
Making a Passthrough
To create a passthrough, place a doorway in
the wall at the desired location. Create a
camera view and select the doorway. Click
the bottom edit handle and drag the doorway
up to the correct height for the passthrough.
You can drag the top and sides to the correct
dimensions, or set them in the Doorway
To remove the casing, open the doorway for
specification. On the Frame and Trim tab,
check Suppress Casing.

The most precise method of editing an
individual door or group of doors is to use
the Door Specification dialog. Door type,
size, casing, materials, shape, and more can
all be specified in this dialog.
If a group of doors is selected, changes made
in the Door Specification dialog are
applied to all the selected doors. If interior
doors must be different from the exterior
doors, they must be selected and edited as a
separate group.
Select one or more doors and click the Open
edit button to open the Door
Specification dialog for the selected
Object
door(s).
315
Doors
roofs are built. See Gable Over Door/

Window on page 415.
General Tab
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
1 Door Style - Define the door as slab,
glass, panel, or louvered, or select a

door style from the library. Select use
default to use the default door style set in the
Door Defaults dialog. See Door Defaults
on page 305.
Select Library from the list to open the Door
Library. Once a library door is selected, that
door is added to the Door Style list.
Door Type - Specify doorway, hinged,

slider, pocket, bifold, or garage door.
Slider, pocket, bifold and garage are not

allowed as exterior door defaults.
3 Specify the Width, Height, and

4
316
The default is four. This option is only

available for garage doors.
5 R.O. - Specify the total amount added
to the width and height for the doors

rough opening. The default value is set in the
Build Framing dialog. See Openings Tab
on page 479.
6 Enter a value to adjust the Swing Angle
of the selected door in floor plan view.

This is an absolute value. A swing angle of
90 points to the top of the screen and a
swing angle of 0 points to the right. If Draw
Closed is unchecked on the Options tab, the
swing angle displays in 3D views.
Thickness of the door.
7 Check Show Color to show the door in
Vert Panels - Specify the number of

panels to be placed on garage doors.
8 Specify which side of the door to view
color in the preview.

in the preview.
Options Tab
Doors
1 Single Door - Check this box to force
the selected door to be a single door,

regardless of its width.
Double Door - Check this box to force the

door to be a double door, regardless of its
width.
Hinged, pocket and bifold doors default to
Single Door when less than four feet (1200
mm) wide. If the width is greater than four
feet, Double Door is the default. These
options are not editable as default settings,
but can be set individually in the model.
Check Left Swing Only or Right Swing
Only to allow only the left or right side of a
double door to swing.
Check Double Swing to allow a door or both
sides of a double door to swing both
directions.
Draw Closed - Check this box to show the

door closed in 3D views. If unchecked, the
Swing Angle set on the General tab displays
in 3D views.
You may choose to add an Interior Plinth
Block and/or an Exterior Plinth Block to
the default door style. Plinth blocks do not
display in 3D views, but are counted in the
Material List.
Recessed - Check this box to recess the door
to the main wall layer.
A door placed in a brick, concrete block, or
stone wall may be recessed into the exterior
of the wall. If the wall is a single layer and is
thicker than a typical stud wall, this box is
normally checked. It can only be set for
individual doors, not in the defaults.
317
To Sheathing Layer - Check this box to

recess the door to the sheathing layer.
Doors cannot be recessed in a single layer
wall. If it can be recessed, it is apparent in
both floor plan and 3D views.
By default the exterior of a door frame is
flush with the exterior main layer wall
surface, or with the sheathing over that

surface. The door, along with its casing, is
considered recessed into any additional
exterior wall layers. For a framed wall, the
door is then recessed through any brick or
stone veneer to the framing layer or the
sheathing that covers it.
Curved Options
If a door is placed in a curved wall, some
additional options are available on the
Options tab.
2 Casing - Door and window casing and
jamb can be constructed three ways in

curved walls:
318
Straight - Both the door

and casing are straight.
This can be used where
the walls curvature is
not too sharp and the
opening is not too wide.
Radial - A vertical surface that would be perpendicular to a straight

wall has its plane pass
through the wall's center
of curvature.
Straight
Radial
Parallel - A vertical surface that would be perpendicular to a straight

wall remains parallel to
the line from the wall
center through the opening center.
Door - Doors in curved

walls can be specified as
Curved or Straight for any
of the Casing options.
Parallel
Radial with
Curved
Door
Frame & Trim Tab
1
2
Doors
4
5
6
1 Frame - If you specified a Door Style
of glass or panel on the General tab,

you may specify the dimensions of the rail
and stiles here.
and flat casings if no custom profile is

defined. Specify default by entering d for
the value, which uses the value in the Door
Defaults dialog.
Frame Width includes the stiles and top or

middle rails.
Width defines the width of the side or

vertical casings.
Frame Bottom specifies the bottom rail.
Top Width defines the width of the top

casing (only available when using lintels).
Reveal is the starting point of the casings

from the edge of the operable door.
2 Specify Interior or Exterior casing.
These radio buttons switch all the

values below and the door preview. These
options are not available for interior doors,
which use the same values for both sides.
3 Casing - Specify the size and
configuration of the casings with these

values. The active side (interior or exterior)
is indicated by the active radio button. The
view of the door updates with the current
side. The width defines any custom molding
4 Lintel - Check this box to specify a butt
joint between the sides and the top

casing instead of a mitre joint.
Extends defines the amount the top casing extends past the side casings.
Wrap returns the top casing to the wall.
319
5 Sill - Check this box to create a sill.

Suppress Casing - Check this box to
prevent casing from being created.
6 Double Wall - This section is enabled
if the door is placed in a Double Wall.

See Double Walls on page 248.
Through - Select this radio button to create a

single jamb running through both Double
Walls. This option is selected by default.
Enlarged - If this radio button is selected,

casing is provided only for the wall the door
is inserted in. The opening on the other wall
is enlarged to accomodate the casing.
Double - Select this radio button to place a
second door in the Double Wall opposite the
selected door. This second door cannot be
selected. Casing is produced as with the
Through type window.
Lites Tab
The options on this tab are only available for
glass doors. See General Tab on page 316.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Special Type - Choose the style of

divided lites from the list. Normal,
320
Diamond, Prairie and Craftsman styles are

available.
4 Muntin Width - Specify the width of

the muntins used to divide the lites.
5 Round Top - Ray Count If the door is
Normal
Diamond
Prairie
Craftsman
Normal style is the most common, with the

muntin bars going horizontally and
vertically.
defined as round top or one of the arch

tops on the Arch tab, you may specify up to
10 rays. The rays specify the number of
radial muntin bars; there is one more pane of
glass than the number of rays specified.
If rays are added, any Lites Across and Lites
Vertical are confined to the part of the
window below the circle top or arch top.
Doors
Diamond style uses angled muntin bars to

divide the lites.
Prairie style is based on the normal style,
but with all the central muntin bars removed,
leaving only the two outside muntin bars
both horizontally and vertically. To be
effective, both the Lites across and the Lites
vertical should be set between 6 and 8.
Craftsman style is based on the normal
style, but only the topmost horizontal muntin
bar is kept with all the portions of the vertical
muntin bars above it. To be effective, both
the Lites across and the Lites vertical should
be set between 4 and 8.
2 Lites Across defines the number of
horizontal divisions for the glazed area.

In a normal style of divided lites, Lites
Across specifies the horizontal number of
evenly sized panes of glass. This value must
be between one and eight.
6 Concentric - In round top doors only,
rays may be defined as concentric. If it

is not checked, the rays start at the center
point of the arch and fan out. If concentric is
checked, the rays start from the innermost
concentric muntin bar. You must have at least
three lites across for this to be used.
3 Lites Vertical defines the number of
vertical divisions for the glazed area. In

a normal style of divided lites, Lites Vertical
specifies the number of evenly sized panes of
glass vertically. This value must also be
between one and eight.
321
Arch Tab
3
4
5
1 Specify the Type of arch desired.
2 Height - For most arches, a height must
be defined. This is the dimension of the

top of the arch defined by the height of the
door down to the base of the arch.
3 Radius - Some arches also need their

radius defined.
Round Broken Gothic Elliptical Flat

Top
Top
4 Reflect - Checking this box reflects the
arch top to bottom. This is rarely used

for doors, but can be specified for windows
to create unique configurations.
5 A half-arch door is specified by
checking either Arch on Right or Arch

on Left.
Tudor Double Trifoil
322
Octo- Dogear
gonal
Hardware Tab
5
7
9
2
4
6
Doors
1 Handle - Specify a handle to be used
4 Up From Floor - Specify the distance
on the door. If use default is chosen,

the default handle specified in the Door
Defaults dialog is used.
from the bottom of the door where the

handle are to be located.
Library - Click this button to open the

Select Library Object dialog and specify
a handle from the Library.
the interior of the door. If use default is

chosen, the default lock specified in the
Door Defaults dialog is used.
2 Ext Handle - Check this box to specify
a different handle for the exterior of the

door. If unchecked, the handle specified at
(1) is used.
a handle from the Library.
3 In From Door Edge - Specify the
distance from the edge of the door

where the handles are to be located.
5 Int Lock - Specify a lock to be used on
a lock from the Library. This is the same as

selecting Library from the drop down list.
6 Ext Lock - Specify a lock to be used on
the exterior of the door. If use default

is chosen (in the Door Specification
dialog), the lock specified as the default in
the Door Defaults dialog is used.
323
a lock from the Library. This is the same as

7 Up From Floor - Specify the distance
a hinge from the Library. This is the same as

from the bottom of the door where you

want the lock(s) to be located. Locks are
usually located above the handles. The locks
assume the same distance from the door edge
as the handle at (3).
8 Hinges - Specify a hinge to be used on
the door. If use default is chosen, the

default lock specified in the Door Defaults
dialog is used. Two hinges are placed for
interior doors, and three for exterior doors.
9 In From Top/Bottom - Specify the
distance from the top and bottom of the

door to the hinge center.
Note: For hinges to look right, it is best to
have at least a 1/4" (6 mm) reveal for the interior, or hinge side, door casing. If this is not
provided the hinge carves out a portion of the
casing.
Moldings Tab
2
3
4
On this tab, you can apply custom moldings

to doors for casings and lintels. Once a
custom molding is applied, it is sized from
the values on the Frame & Trim tab.
324
1 A preview of the selected molding

profile.
2 Click Library to open the Select
Library Objects dialog. Choose a
Door Schedules
Click Clear to return the casing to a flat

profile.
4 Interior/Exterior - Select a radio
button to specify which side of the door

receives the molding. The door preview
changes to reflect your selections.
New moldings can be added to the library.
See Moldings and Profiles on page 695.
Layer Tab
For information about the Layers tab, see
Materials Tab
Label Tab
For information about the Label tab, see
Label Tab on page 576.
Doors
molding to view your selection in the Door

Door Schedules
Chief Architect can automatically produce a
door schedule. See Creating Schedules on
page 992.
325
326
Chapter 10:
Windows
Introductory Training Video: Windows

and Doors
Video: Doors and Windows
Chief Architect comes with a wide variety of
windows. Fixed glass, hung, casement,
sliding, awning, hopper, and louver window
styles can all be created with the standard
window tool, and even set as the default. The
shape of a window can be angled or made
into a round top or other arch styles. Chief
Architect can create bay, box, and bow
windows at the click of a button. In addition,
the library contains many mulled window
combinations and manufacturer-specific
products.
Window Defaults
The Window Tools
Special Windows
Stacked Windows
Window Levels
Displaying Windows
Editing Windows
Custom Muntins
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs
Window Specification Dialog
Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog
Bow Window Specification
Window Schedules
Once windows have been placed in the

model, the program can automatically
generate a window schedule. See Creating
Schedules on page 992.
Chapter Contents
327
Windows
Chapter Overview
Window Defaults
Select Window from the Default Settings
dialog, or double-click the Window Tools
1.
Dynamic Defaults: These values affect

all existing and new windows that are
still set to the default specification. See
Dynamic Defaults on page 179. These
settings are:
Window Type
Sash Width
Sash Depth
Casing Width.
2.
Initial Values: These only affect new

windows, and changing the value has no
affect on existing windows. These are:
Width, Height
Floor to Top
Default Level
3.
Editing Limits: This affects both the

creation of new and the modification of
existing windows/doors. There is one
only:
Min. Separation
button to open the Window Defaults

dialog.
The settings in the Window Defaults
dialog specify what style of window is
created when a window initially placed in a
plan.
In the Window Defaults dialog, define the
type of window that represents the majority
of windows in your model. As with doors,
any window or group of windows can be
customized in the floor plan or 3D views.
The tabs in the Window Defaults dialog
are similar to those found in the Window
Specification dialog. See Window
There are three types of values set in the
Window Defaults dialog:
The Window Tools

Video: Placing Windows
To place a window, select the desired
window type from the Build> Window
submenu. Click on a wall using a Window
Tool to place a window at that location.
as bay, box, bow, corner or blocked. All these

special types are made up of multiple
standard windows.
A standard window that is part of a special
window is called a component window.
Bay Windows
Standard Windows
A standard window is a single window
that is not one of the special types such
328
The roof is affected by Bay, Box and

Bow Windows. These windows should
therefore be placed before the roof is built.
The Window Tools
A Bay Window is composed of three

wall sections, each with a single
component window. The two side walls are
at an angle to the main wall. Select Build>
Window> Bay Window and click a wall to
produce a bay window.
When initially placed, bay windows measure
2-2 across at the front, 4-2 across at the
back, and are 1-0 deep. The component
windows are specified in the Window
Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit
the available space.
Bow windows can be composed of between

two and twenty sections. The number of bow
window components can be changed in the
Bow Window Specification dialog. See
Bow Window Specification on page 360.
The component windows are specified in the
Window Defaults dialog. Their sizes
adjust to fit the available space.
The 5-section bow below has a 4-10 radius
centered 3-9 inside the wall, giving an
opening 5-10 across and a depth of 11.
A Box window is a bay window with

side angles set at 90 degrees. Select
Build> Window> Box Window and click a
wall to produce a box window.
Box windows initially measure 4-2 wide
with a depth of 1-6. The component
windows are specified in the Window
Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit
the available space.
Note that for a bow with an odd number of

sections, the radial dimension is from the
center of the arc to an outside corner where
two window sections join. The depth (11 )
is measured to the flat area of the center
section, not to a corner. As a result, the radius
is a bit greater than the sum of the depth and
the distance from the center of the bows
curve to the exterior of the wall.
Note: Bay, box, and bow window areas are
not included in the living area or in room standard area calculations. They are included in
room interior area calculations.
Bow Windows
Windows Library
A Bow Window is a group of identical

wall segments that form a segmented
curve. Select Build> Window> Bow
Window and click a wall to produce a 5section bow window.
Select Library> Library Browser,

then browse the Windows category to
access a selection of special windows. Select
the desired window, then click on a wall to
place the window at that location.
329
Windows
Box Windows
Special Windows
A variety of special windows can be created
using multiple standard windows, the edit
tools or custom symbols.
Creating Manual Bay, Box

and Bow Windows
Sometimes it is easier to draw bay, box and
bow windows manually than to use the
automatic tools. Bays created using walls can
have more than one window per section,
which is not possible using a bay window
unit.
Bear in mind that moving a manually created
bay, box or bow window is generally more
difficult than moving a unit created with one
of the Window Tools
since it is
composed of individual walls.
Corner Windows
Corner windows are produced when each
window has one edge at or past the interior
side of the adjacent wall.
330
To create a corner window, first create the

desired window on each side of the corner.
The header height and the sill height of both
windows must be the same.
To move a window all the way into a
corner, check Ignore Casing for
Opening Resize in the Plan Defaults dialog. See Plan Defaults on page 180.
Slant top, or shaped windows can be

components of corner windows as long as
their heights are equal at the corners.
Windows with single or two segment tops
can be used, but windows with three cannot.
If a two segment window is used, the
segment nearest the corner must be flat.
Stacked Windows
Once the corner window is formed, its

components and corner post size can be
adjusted using dimension lines. Blocked
units can also meet at a corner this way.
Creating Your Own Windows

Use the Create Symbol Wizard to
create custom windows and save them
in your own library for use in future plans.
See Create Symbol Wizard on page 925.
Placing a Gable
Over a Window
selected window(s) the next time automatic

roofs are built. See Gable Over Door/
Window on page 415.
You can manually edit or delete this gable
line at any time. Your changes take effect
when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This
can also be used with group selected
windows.
Stained Glass
A selection of solid stained glass materials is
available in the Materials> Glass library.
See Materials on page 688.
Stacked Windows
Video: Creating a Group of Blocked
Windows
Windows can be stacked to create a wide
variety of custom configurations.
Stacked windows are easy to create in 3D
views, particular Cross Section/Elevation
views, using their edit handles.
Because doors are always on Level 0 and

because these line colors affect printouts, it is
best to keep the Default Level at 0. If you do
change the Default Level, remember to
change it back before printing.
The door and windows in the illustration
below were organized have been placed on
different levels. See Window Levels on
page 334.
To help organize their display in floor plan

view, you can place them on different
window levels.
In floor plan view, windows on the Default
Level display the line color and style of the
layer they are on. They also display size
labels if the Windows, Labels layer is turned
on.
2
1
0
Windows on other levels appear light gray

and do not display labels, even if the
Windows, Labels layer is turned on.
331
Windows
Click the Gable Over Window edit

button to produce a gable roof over the
To create this entry, set the two windows on

either side of the door to level zero. A door is
always on level zero. The three windows
above the door are placed on level one, and
the round top window is placed on level two.
windows can be to each other. Define a value

that specifies the desired width for the shared
casing.
If you select a window in floor plan view by

clicking the stacked windows using the
Window tool, you select the window that is
on the same level as your current Default
Level setting. For example, if the Default
Level is set to 2, you select the round top
window shown in the illustration.
Notice how the windows and door in this
example are separate, with a thin wall
showing between them. The next section
explains how the same door and six windows
can be organized into a mulled unit. The
casing connects the windows and door so
that no wall surface shows between them.
Automatically Mulled Units

To form a mulled group of windows and/or
doors, move them close enough together so
that their casings touch. Once the casings
touch, the windows are mulled together with
one casing between the two of them.
The sill of each window in the group must be
at the same level for them to share the middle
casing. The casing tops do not have to be at
the same level. The casings are modeled as if
they are one unit but the windows remain
separate objects for dimensioning and the
Material List.
Windows can be automatically mulled to
doors if the bottom of the window is at the
elevation of the floor, equal to the bottom of
the door.
The Min. Separation value in the Window
Defaults dialog specifies how close mulled
332
Manually Mulled Units

Mulling windows and doors together
gives you added flexibility. This
process creates a combination of objects that
move and copy as a single unit. It allows you
to list the doors and windows in the Material
List either as a single unit or as the
components and it enables you to define a
single opening or separate openings in the
wall framing for the blocked unit.
To create a mulled unit
1.
Group-select several openings, doors

and windows that are on the same wall
and within 24 inches (side-to-side or top
to bottom) of each other.
2.

button to create a block.
3.
Once doors and windows are combined

in a block they can be moved and copied
as a single unit.
edit
Stacked Windows
In one blocking operation, you can block

windows and doors that are either side-byside or above and below each other. You
cannot simultaneously block both
horizontally and vertically. Complex units
are formed by mulling several blocks
together.
To create a blocked unit from windows and
doors on various levels you must use a 3D
view to select the many different
components.
1.
In a cross section/elevation view, select

the door and the windows on level 1 and
2 above it, then click the Make Mulled
Unit
edit button.
A second method would be to first block the

door and its two sidelights as one unit, and
then block the three rectangular windows
above the door as another unit. These
blocked units, along with the top half-round
window, can be mulled together, top to
bottom, to complete the final unit. Since this
unit was blocked together horizontally first,
the horizontal mullions extend continuously
to the outside edges of the entire unit, while
the vertical mullions are interrupted by the
horizontal mullions.
In order to block doors and windows, the
component edges that are to be in contact
must be straight and parallel to each other.
Unlike automatic mulling, they do not need
to be the same length. Openings with
adjacent sides that are curved cannot be
blocked.
The blocked unit moves as a single standard
window in both floor plan and 3D views.
While blocked the unit cannot be resized, it
can be unblocked, its components resized,
and blocked again. The components on the
lowest level display in floor plan view.
2.
Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the

right and the window above it.
To explode a mulled unit
3.
Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the

left and the window above it.
1.
Select the block.
4.
Group select the three vertically joined

units and click the Make Mulled Unit
2.

button.
edit button to join them side to side.

If you form a blocked unit by first blocking
objects vertically, the vertical mullions
extend continously from the bottom to the
top of the entire unit. The horizontal
mullions are interupted by the vertical
mullions.
edit
Selecting Components
of Mulled Units
To select a component window of a blocked
unit, click at the location of the component in
question, then click the Select Next Object
edit button or press the Tab key. Only the
component you clicked is selectable using
333
Windows
Group selection can be done in floor plan

view or any 3D view. Floor plan views work
well for blocking windows that are side-byside, but a camera or elevation view is
needed to block vertically stacked objects.
Once the unit is formed, the components may
not be moved relative to each other without
first unblocking and repositioning them
before blocking them again.
can change its parameters in the Window
this method. If you need to select a different

component, click it and repeat the process.
The selected component may be on any level

in the blocked unit. If you have multiple
levels, it is easiest to select the components
in a 3D view. When you have selected an
individual component of a blocked unit, you
If the component is not itself a blocked unit

and has no components above it, its Height
and Arch parameters can be changed.
Changing the Height causes the component
top to move. The bottom remains stationary.
Window Levels
Window levels are used to organize and
control the display of stacked windows in
floor plan view. At the same location on a
wall and on one floor level, you can place
and define windows at varying levels.
Window levels do not define the height of a
window, just the appearance and editing of a
window in floor plan view.
The Default Window Level is zero, which
contains all doors, all bay, box and bow
windows, and is the first level of standard
windows. Unless the Default Level setting
in the Window Defaults dialog is
changed, all windows are placed on Level 0.
The first row above on the same floor is
represented by Window Level 1 and contains
any windows stacked above a single window
or door. The second row is represented by
Window Level 2 and contains all windows
stacked above two stacked windows, etc.
When you place a window in floor plan view

on a level greater than zero, the program
attempts to locate it over windows on lower
levels. Once placed, it can be moved to the
desired height in a 3D view or in the
Window Specification dialog.
When you specify the default level to a value
other than zero, the initial window type
changes to fixed glass and no Sill is created.
The Width of the window matches your
default Window Type and the Height is 12".
Once the window is placed in the plan, its
parameters can be changed.
334
Displaying Windows
In floor plan view, windows on the Default

Level use the line color specified in the
Layer Display Options dialog. Windows
on other levels appears dimmed.
If window and door labels are set to display,
the sizes show only for windows and doors
on the Default Level.
The Default Level also defines which of the
stacked windows are selected first when you
click the windows in floor plan view. The
windows on the current default level are

selected first.
Always reset the Default Level to zero
before printing. Otherwise, the doors and
some windows may print in a light gray color
and window and door sizes are not those for
level zero.
Instead of using levels to manage stacked
windows, you may want to combine them
into blocked units. See Manually Mulled
Units on page 332.
Displaying Windows
If the Windows layer is not set to display,

window casing, lites and other window
components are not visible, but the openings
in the walls where they are located are
visible.
In Floor Plan View

Some window types, notably Sliding and
Double and Triple Casement windows, are
distinguishable in floor plan view.
Double Hung
Windows
The appearance of windows, window labels,

openings, and headers in floor plan and 3D
views can be controlled in the Layer
Left Sliding
Triple Casement
Window types in floor plan view
If the Windows, Labels layer is set to display,

window labels show in floor plan view,
centered on the windows that they represent.
Label format and size is specified in the
Window Schedule Specification
dialog. See Label Tab on page 1000.

Window labels indicate the width, height and
window type. For example, a 3040 DH label
describes a 3-0 wide by 4-0 high double
hung window. The format of metric window
dimensions is 900x1200, where the first
number is the width in mm and the second,
the height in mm.
335
Customized labels for individual windows

can also be specified in the Window
Specification dialog. See Label Tab on
page 358.
In 3D Views
To show opening indicator arrows in vector
views, turn on the Cabinet & Door Opening
Indicators layer in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
Windows showing opening indicators
You can change the direction of indicator

arrows on the Architectural panel of the
Panel on page 198.
Editing Windows
Before a window can be edited, it must be
selected. Click a window when the Select
Objects
Using the Mouse
In floor plan view, click either of the two

end handles and drag along the wall to
change the width. The label showing the
size updates as the window is resized.
In 3D views, a selected window has five

edit handles: the Move handle at the center and a Resize handle on each edge.
Click and drag an edge handle to resize
the window.
Using the edit handles, a window resizes

tool or any of the Window
Tools
are active. Doors and/or windows
can also be group selected and edited. See
To select a window that is part of a blocked
unit, click the component window, then click
the Select Next Object
edit button. See
Selecting Components of Mulled Units on
page 333.
Windows can be edited using their edit
handles, the edit toolbar buttons, and the
When you select a window in floor plan
view, the window size label displays the
width followed by the height. For example, a
3036 window is 3-0 wide by 3-6 high.
336
Behavior
. See Defaults and Preferences on page 80.
Note: Using the edit handles is the only way
to resize bay, box and bow window systems.
A single window or a group of windows

can be moved with the center edit handle.
Editing Windows
A door or window moved against an

intersecting wall temporarily stops when
it is the casing distance from the intersecting wall. You can continue to drag
and it resumes movement past or onto the
intersecting wall. Place a check in the
Ignore Casing for Opening Resize
check box in the Plan Defaults dialog
to turn off this behavior. See Plan
select window(s). See Window

Accurate Move
slows down the
See Accurate Move on page 125. Not
available for component windows

button to
selected window(s). See Components
Dialog on page 1014.
Individual windows can be moved using the

Move Object Using Dimension dialog.
See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on
page 804.

button to accurately move the selected window(s). See Point to Point Move on
page 125. Not available for component
windows.
In the Specification Dialog

edit
button to block the selected window(s)
and/or door(s) into a mulled unit. See
Manually Mulled Units on page 332.

edit
button to explode the selected mulled unit

button to
add the selected window(s) to the library.

button to replace the selected window with a
symbol from the Windows library. See

button to
center windows along a wall or over
cabinets or fixtures. See Centering
Doors and Windows on page 311. Not
available for component windows.
Using Dimensions
Windows can be edited extensively in the

Window Specification dialog. See
Window Specification Dialog on page 343.

A selected window or windows can be edited
edit toolbar. As with most objects, windows
can be copied, replicated, moved, deleted,
etc. See Using the Edit Toolbar on page 97.
windows.

button
selected window, particularly the wall it
is placed in.

edit button to
337
Windows

button to reflect the selected window(s)
Objects on page 135. Not available for
component windows.

button to
locate all objects that have specific
matching attributes. These objects can
then be modified as a group using the

tool.
See Select Same Type on page 152 and
Load to Make Same Value on page
152. Not available for bay, box or bow
windows.

- Create
a gable over the selected window(s) the
next time an automatic roof is built. See
Placing a Gable Over a Window on
page 331.
Custom Muntins
Design your own muntins for the glazing of a
window or door. Muntins are formed from a
CAD block composed of lines and arcs
drawn over window or door glass in a cross
section/elevation view. The CAD block
should cover at least half the glass
horizontally and one quarter of the area
vertically, but should not overlap it in either
direction by more than five percent.
2.
Creating Muntins
4.
Custom muntins are created by

drawing their pattern using the CAD
tools, blocking the pattern to create a CAD
block, and then selecting the window and
clicking the Load Muntins edit button.
To create custom muntins
1.
Create a Cross Section/Elevation

view of the wall the window or door is
in and Zoom
door.
338
in on the window or
Use the Draw Line
and Draw Arc
tools to design the desired muntins.

Try to make them start and end as close
to the edge of the glass as possible.
3.
When the muntin design is complete,

group-select all lines and arcs and click
the Make CAD Block
edit button.
See Selecting Objects on page 92.
Select the door or window and click the
Load Muntins
edit button to
convert the CAD block into custom
muntins.
If your window has more than one sash (a

double-hung window, for example, has two),
you must create a separate CAD block for
each pane. When you click Load Muntins
, all CAD blocks are loaded.
Custom muntins move with the opening and
copy with their opening. They also stretch or
compress when the glass area is resized. This
stretching may not be perfect for non-rectangular glass areas that are resized by a large
amount.
Custom muntins can be created for the
cross section/elevation view and clicking the
components of Bay Windows
Unload Muntins
button on the Edit
toolbar. The muntins disappear and the
original CAD block takes their place. You
may explode and edit these blocks and reload
them.
Windows
and Box
, and mulled units.
Removing Muntins
Remove custom muntins from a door
or window by selecting the opening in

Bay, box and bow windows
are created much the way
regular windows are: select a tool, then click
a wall to place that window type.
Editing Bay, Box

and Bow Windows
Bay, box and bow windows are edited
similar to regular windows, with one
exception: in floor plan view, a diamondshaped Depth edit handle displays on the
section. Drag this Depth handle outward to
increase the depth, or inward to decrease the
depth of the unit. See Editing Windows on
page 336.
Depth edit handle on a bay window
Bay, box and bow windows can also be

edited in their respective specification
dialogs. See Bay/Box Window
Specification Dialog on page 359 or Bow
Window Specification on page 360.
Displaying Bay, Box

and Bow Windows
The display of bay, box and bow windows is
controlled in the Layer Display Options
dialog. Bay, box and bow window width and
radius dimensions, which display in floor
plan view, are placed on the Dimensions,
Manual layer. See Displaying Objects on
page 221.
Components
A component window within a bay, box or
bow window can be resized like any other
standard window. To select a component
339
Windows
Chief Architect automatically builds a

foundation under bay/box/bow windows
placed on floor 1 unless they are raised from
their original position. That section of the
foundation wall is also a bay/box/bow, but
without windows. If the foundation was
generated before the window is placed, the
foundation must be rebuilt or edited
manually.
window, click at the location of the component in question, then click the Select Next
Object
edit button or press the Tab key.
Only the component that was clicked on is
selectable using this method. If you need to
select a different component, click it and
repeat the process.
In a bow window, all components are
identical, so only one component can be
selected. Changing this component changes
them all.
Resizing Components
An individual component window can be
resized by dragging a side edit handle, by
changing settings in the Window
Specification dialog, or by using the
Transform/Replicate Object dialog.
An individually resized component window
retains its size when the bay is resized. If the
bay is decreased in size to the extent that the
component becomes too large to fit, the
component returns to its default size based
on the bay size, and resumes automatically
resizing as the bay or bow window is resized.
Ceilings
When originally
created, the ceiling
within a bay, box, or
bow windows is the
same height as the
default ceiling for that
floor.
340
Both the top and

bottom heights of these
window units may be
adjusted from a 3D
view.
Use the following
techniques for
modifying any bay, box, or bow window.
Lowering the Ceiling

To lower the ceiling and the wall heights,
select the window in a 3D view. When the
window is selected, grab the top handle and
drag toward the floor. The ceiling is lowered,
which lowers the height of the walls. Any
roofs that are subsequently built are affected.
Creating a Bench Seat

To create a bench seat or garden window,
follow the same step for lowering the ceiling
except this time drag the lower handle
toward the ceiling.
When you raise the bottom of the window to
create a bench seat, the exterior walls that
create the window do not reach the ground.
When you build a foundation, the foundation
is not produced under a window unit that has
bench seats.

Several different roof styles are available for
bay, box and bow window units.
Hip Roofs
Unless a different option is selected, a hip
roof is built above the unit when roofs are
If a different style of roof is desired, the Bay

or Bow Window Specification dialog
can be used to change the style of roof that is
be generated over a bay, box or bow window.
See Bay/Box Window Specification
Dialog on page 359.
Place Under Roof Slope

To have the main roof plane extend down
over the window unit while following the
shape of the unit, select Extend Existing
Roof Over. Rebuild the roofs to see the
changes.
If a header is desired over the bay, box or

bow window, first build the roof correctly,
then lower the ceiling of the bay, box or bow
window in 3D. Once the ceiling is lowered,
select Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
.
This fills in the area between the header and
the roof. Do not rebuild roof planes, if you
do, a lower hip roof over the window unit is
created.
Use Existing Roof

To generate a standard roof with no
allowances made for bay, box, or bow
windows below, check Use Existing Roof.
With this option the bay, box, or bow
windows is tucked under the roof eave.
341
Windows
For this roof style to work successfully, the

ceiling heights of the window unit and the
room containing it must be the same. This
does not work if you have lowered the
ceiling for the window unit.
Rectangular Hip Roof

To create a rectangular hip roof, select only
Rectangular roof over, then rebuild the
roof.
Place Under Roof - Rectangular

To extend the roof plane down over a bay,
box or bow window with a rectangular roof,
ignoring the shape of the unit, select both
Extend existing roof over and Rectangular
roof over in the specification dialog. The
Rectangular roof over option does not work
in combination with Use existing roof since
the existing roof does not cover the window
unit.
See the previous section for directions on
extending the roof down over bay, box or
bow windows.
342
Gable Roof
A gable roof is not one of the automatic
options for the roof above a bay, box or bow
window. A gable can be created by manually
editing the rectangular hip roofs that are
automatically created. See Manual Roofs
on page 393.
To create a gable over a bay window
1.
Select each side hip sections on the front

angled edge. Grab the front ridge corner
handle and drag the roof section forward
until the fascia is straight and let it snap
to the edge of the front hip section.
2.
Delete the front hip section.
3.
Select each side roof plane at the gable

end and drag it out to set the overhang.
4.
Once the roof planes are shaped properly, open the Build Roof dialog and
select the Build Fascia, Gutters option
to complete the roof. Do not select Build
Roof Planes.
To create a gable roof over a normal

window, use the Gable Over Door/Window
edit button. See Gable Over Door/
Window on page 415.
Windows
The program models new windows placed in

a plan according to the settings in the
Window Defaults dialog. See Window
Once placed, a window can be edited with
the Window Specification dialog. You
can use this dialog to define unique features
for a single window or group of windows.
To open the Window Specification
dialog, select a window and click the Open
Object
edit button or double-click the
window using the Select Objects

Window
or
tool.
343
General Tab
1
2
3
4
5
1 Window Type -Select the type of
window from the list. The first entry in
the list is the Default type set in the

Window Defaults dialog.
Window Types
2 Width and Height - Enter values that
represent the overall dimension of the

window unit, including frame. You can also
344
specify a rough opening dimension for the

window.
R.O. - Specify the total amount added to the
width and height for the windows rough
page 479.
Floor to Top - Specify the height to the top
of the window as measured from the
subfloor. This falls under the bottom of the
header by two thirds of the rough opening
amount.
Movable Size - If applicable, define the
dimension (in inches or mm) of the movable
portion of the window. A value of 0 defaults
the movable size to whatever is normal for
that type of window.
3 Level - The Level value is used to
define what row the window appears on

if there is more than one row of windows in a
stacked set. Enter a number to change the
level the window is on.
4 Default Level - Specify the current
window level new windows should be

placed on. Unless you are placing windows
over already existing windows, leave the
Default Level set to 0.
Windows on the default level appear black,
and windows on other levels are grey.
Note: The window that is on the default level
is the one selected when you select a window
from a set in floor plan view.
5 Show Color - Select the check box to
display the window in color in the

dialog preview.
Check Interior or Exterior to change the

side shown in the dialog preview.
Windows
opening. The default value is set in the Build

Framing dialog. See Openings Tab on
Options Tab
345
1 Interior Corner Block - Select the
check box to count interior corner

blocks in the materials list. These do not
display in 3D views.
Exterior Corner Block - Select the check

box to count exterior corner blocks in the
materials list. These do not display in 3D
views.
to the right is recessed, so the brick wraps the

opening. The window on the left is not
recessed, so the casing is outside the brick.
To Sheathing Layer - Select the check box
to recess the window to the sheathing layer.
The wall layers in the following illustration
have been exaggerated to show how the
different options display in floor plan view.
Egress - Select the check box to specify the

window as an egress window in the Window
Schedule and materials list. The letters eg are
appended to the value in the Size column.
Not Recessed
The Egress check box can designate that the

entire area of the window is used for egress,
not just the movable section. To use this
specification on an undersized window, most
or all the window's total area should be able
to open for escape in case of fire.
Recessed (to Main Layer)
The Plan Check calculations for egress

are only an approximate guide. Consult
your local building and fire code authorities
for your regional egress window requirements.
Recessed - Select the

check box to recess the
casing inward to the
main, or framing layer
of the wall. This check
box is available only if
the window is in a
multi-layered wall. A
window or mulled unit
placed in a brick,
concrete block, or stone
wall is often recessed
into the walls exterior.
In the illustration above,
a 3D view, the window
346
Recessed to Sheathing Layer
Curved Options
If a window is placed in a curved wall, some
additional options are available on the
Options tab.
Typical
2 Casing: Window casing can be
constructed three ways in curved walls:
Recessed
Straight: Both window and casing are

straight.
Straight
Because the casing is
straight, it does not
properly fit in the wall
opening if the window is
too wide or the curve of the wall is too
extreme. In these cases use one of the other
two window types described below.
Radial: The sides of

the casing or jambs are
inserted in the wall at
an angle that passes
through the center of
the curve.
Parallel: The sides of
the casing are inserted
in the wall at a right
angle to the line tangent to the curved wall
at the center of the
window.
3 Sash: Window sash
Radial
can be curved or
Radial
straight for the radial and
parallel casing options.
& Curved
Normally, a parallel casing has a straight sash. A
radial casing is more like
traditional curved windows, and may have a curved sash.
Parallel
The Mulled Window Specification

dialog is available when a blocked unit is
opened for specification.
The settings in this dialog similar are to those

in the Window Specification dialog, but
a number of the options cannot be edited.
On Options tab, three options become
available.
1
3
1 Treat as door - This option is available
when the selected mulled window unit

contains a door. Check the box to include the
mulled unit in door schedules and the Door
category of the materials list rather than in
the Window schedules and materials list

category.
2 Single label - Select the check box to
treat the blocked unit as a single object

for labeling in floor plan view. It produces a
single entry in the Material List and window
347
Windows
Options Tab for Mulled Units
schedule. Uncheck box to produce labels and

entries for each component of the mulled
unit.
The Sash & Frame tab only defines the

casing surrounding the blocked unit. It does
not affect the casing between components.
To display a Single label for a component,

click in the middle of the component in an
elevation view, press the Tab key until the
component is selected, and then open the
The Arch tab defines the overall shape of the

blocked units top. If you intend to arch the
top of a blocked unit, the top components
should be constructed with rectangular top
openings whose tops are at the same height.
3 Single wall hole - Select the check box
to produce a single opening with a

single header for the entire blocked unit.
Clear the check box to model studs between,
and individual headers for, the components
of the blocked unit.
For rendering purposes, Single wall
hole should be checked for any mulled
unit with a rectangular shape. This decreases
drawing time by decreasing the number of
surfaces.
The Molding tab specifies the surrounding

casing, sill and lintels. It does not affect the
casing between components.
Settings made on the Material tab for a
blocked unit apply to all components of the
blocked unit. The settings override any
settings made for individual components of
the blocked unit.
Sash & Frame Tab
1
3
2
4
5
6
7
348
1 Sash Width - Enter the width for all
four sides of the window sash.

Increasing the size of the sash decreases the
size of the glass.
The Side value sets the width of all vertical
sash members, those at the window sides and
central members for casement and sliding
windows. It also sets the width for the top
portion of the window when any arch is
specified.
The Top and Bottom values set the width for
the top and bottom sash of all windows,
except that the Top value is not used if the
window has an arch.
The Mid value sets the width for horizontal
components between the top and bottom sash
in double hung, double and triple awning and
double and triple hopper windows. It does
not affect casement and sliding windows.
If any sash width is set to zero, no sash is
produced. The window has no glass and does
not support divided lites. Since there is no
glass, the window is transparent even when
the rest of the windows are set to be opaque
from the exterior.
3 Inset - Enter the distance between the
frame and the outermost sash. If there is

no frame, then the inset is measured from the
outer surface of the walls main layer.
4 Component Opens - Select from the
available hinge options. The preview in

the dialog updates as options are changed.
Must have Double Casement or Triple
Casement selected on the General tab.
5 Frame Width - Enter
the Side, Top and

Bottom widths of the
window frame. When these
are set to the default, zero,
the frame does not appear.
These values are usually left
at zero unless you are
replacing older windows
with new windows, and you
intend to simply drop a new, framed window
into the original windows jamb.
6 Enter the Frame Depth. If this value is
set to zero, the walls main layer

thickness is used as the frame depth.
7 Inset - Enter the distance that the
window frame is inset from the exterior

of the main wall layer. Normally, the outer
surface of the frame is at the outer surface of
the main wall layer. A non-zero Frame Inset
value moves the frame into the wall.
2 Sash Depth - Enter the thickness of the
sash stock measured from the exterior

to the interior.
349
Windows
The (D) notation that follows some values

indicates that they are default values taken
from the Window Defaults dialog. These
values can be changed individually by typing
in a new number or globally by changing the
settings in the default Window Defaults
dialog. To reset any value to its default
setting, type a d in the field. If a warning
results, that setting has no default value.
Sash & Frame Tab for Mulled Units
1
2
1 Inside - Specify the depth of the
mullion on the interior of the house.
350
2 Outside - Specify the depth of the
mullion on the exterior of the house.
Casing Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
Changes made on the Casing tab can onlybe

seen in 3D views.
1 Mfr. Offset - This section refers to the
construction of the window itself, not

the casing. This is most often left at zero. A
positive value in these fields decreases the
size of the window, but does not change
either the nominal size or the rough opening
size specified on the General tab. The Side
value is used for both sides, and also for the
top if an arch type window.
button to choose whether you are

defining the values for the inside or for the
outside of the window. The picture to the
right also switches to show the window from
the selected side.
setting affects both sides and top. This also

affects the bottom if no sill is used and the
width of the apron if one is being used.
Top Width - If Lintel is also checked, enter
the width of the Lintel casing.
Reveal - Enter the dimension from the
outside edge of the frame, or sash if no frame
is present, to the inside edge of the casing.
Note: Unless the selected window(s) have a
different size casing or reveal than the rest of
the windows in the model, the three values in
the Casing section should be changed in the
Window Defaults dialog.
3 Width - Enter the width of the casing.
Unless a separate Lintel is defined, this
351
Windows
4 Lintel - Select the check
box to place a separate

casing across the window top.
Its width is set in Top Width.
This creates a butt joint
between the side casings and
the lintel.
Extends - Enter the amount
the top casing extends on
either side. The default value
of 1 inch (25mm) usually
extends it to the edge of the
vertical casing.
Wrap - Check this box to
model the head casing with
returns at the ends. Thus
the ends of the top casing
can be cut square, or
mitered to return to the
wall. The affects of Wrap
are seen only if a custom
molding is specified for the
top casing, as shown in this
illustration.
5 Sill - Check this box
352
wrapped sill even with the outer edge of the

casing.
Wrap - Select the check box to miter the sill
ends and return them to the wall. Clear the
check box to cut the ends of the sill square.
6 Apron - Clear this
check box to
remove the apron. Select
this box to add an apron
below the sill. The
Extends value extends
the sill and apron
together.
7 Suppress Casing- Check this box to
create a window with no trim details.

The sill remains if you have specified one. If
casing and sill are both suppressed, only the
frame and sash remain.
8 Double Wall - This section is enabled
if the window is placed in a Double

Wall. See Double Walls on page 248.
Through - Select this radio button to create a

single jamb running through both Double
Walls. This option is selected by default.
to specify a sill. Clear

the check box to remove the
sill, causing the specified
Side casing to be used for the
bottom of the window.
Enlarged - Select this radio button to enlarge

the opening on the Double Wall opposite the
window to accomodate casing, which is
produced only for the wall the window is
placed in.
Extends controls the amount

the sill extends to either side.
One inch (25 mm) usually
makes the ends of a non-
Double - Select this radio button to place a

second window in the Double Wall opposite
the selected window. This second window
cannot be selected. Casing is produced as
with a Through type window.
The Lites tab allows you to add muntins to

various window styles and shutters. There
are four possible styles of muntin bars for
regular windows, plus two additional options
for arch top or round top windows. A
window that has been modified using the
Shape tab cannot have divided lites or
shutters added.
either one or both of the sashes to have

divided lites.
A maximum of 8 lites can be specified in

either direction for any of the Special Types.
1 Lites Across - Enter the number of

horizontal lites in each sash.
Lites Vertical - Enter the number of vertical

lites in each portion of the sash.
Muntin Width - Specify the width of the
bars that divide the panes of glass.
Lites in Fixed and Lites in Moveable Select or clear these check boxes to specify
Windows
Lites Tab
Lites in fixed
Lites in moveable
Note: All the window types default to 1 lite

across and 1 lite vertical, in both movable and
the fixed. Because the fixed window in a Triple Sliding window is twice the size of the
movable windows, the fixed section has a
vertical muntin bar. To eliminate this, clear the
Lites in fixed check box.
Shutters - Check this box to place

working shutters on the exterior of the
353
window. These are each half of the windows

width, excluding the casing. If one side of the
window does not have enough room for the
shutter (such as when a window is close to
another window or corner), that side has no
shutter. Default shutters resize with the
window.
an example of the normal style.
Diamond style uses angled

muntin bars to divide up the
lites. French windows are an
example of the diamond
style.
Prairie style is based on the

normal style, but with all the
central muntin bars
removed, leaving only the
two outside muntin bars both
horizontally and vertically.
To be effective, both the Lites across and
the Lites vertical should be set between 6
and 8. Federal or Federation windows are
an example of the Prairie style.
Craftsman style is based on

the normal style, but only the
topmost horizontal muntin bar
is kept with all the portions of
the vertical muntin bars above
it. To be effective, both the
Lites across and the Lites vertical should be set between 4 and 8.
Set Width by Window - Check this box to

make the shutters half as wide as the window
so they meet in the middle when shut.
Specify Width - Enter the width for
decorative shutters. A minimum of 4 inches
(100 mm) applies.
Outside Casing - Select the check box to
place the shutters at the outside edge of the
side casing. Normal operating shutters
overlap the casing except for the innermost
one inch. Decorative shutters usually attach
to the house outside the casing.
Rectangular Shutters - Select the check box
to match the geometry of the shutters to an
arched window.
Louver - Select the check box to place
louvers in the central portion of each shutter.
Clear the check box to model shutters with
solid panels. If Outside Casing is checked,
the louvers are positioned to shield the sun
when the shutters are closed. When the
shutters are shown open, the louvers appear
backwards.
3 Special type - Select a configuration of
lites from the list. When selected, a

preview of each displays in the dialog.
354
Normal style is the most

common, with muntins
going horizontally and vertically. Colonial windows are
4 Round top - This section becomes
active only when the window is defined

with a round top on the Arch tab.
Ray Count - Enter the number of radial
muntin bars. A round or arch top window
may have up to 10 rays. If rays are added,
any Lites across and Lites vertical that are
specified are confined to the part of the
window below the arc of the window.
Concentric - In round top windows only,
rays may also be defined as being concentric.
Select the check box to start the rays from the
innermost concentric muntin bar.
Following is an example of a 3040 fixed
glass window. In all cases, Lites across = 3,
and Lites vertical = 3. The round top window

is shown first with no rays, then with regular
and concentric rays. There is also a 3040
fixed glass arch top window (arch height 12)
with regular rays. The arch top window
cannot have concentric rays. If the window
height is changed to half the width for round
top windows, or changed to match the arch
height for arch top windows, many styles of
transom windows may be created. It is
possible to stack windows above other
windows or doors. All these transoms have
had the sill removed.
Windows
Shape Tab
1
2
3
Any type of non-symbol window may be

shaped. All shaped windows are defined as
fixed glass on the General tab.
1 Window Width is shown. It may be

changed in the General tab.
2 Left Height - Enter the height of the
left upper corner. Unless changed, this

matches the window height.
3 Right Height - Enter the height of the

upper right corner.
355
4 Top Left Corner -Select the check box
to add an inside left corner or single

center peak to the window.
Height - Enter the height of the inside left

corner, and its distance From the left side.
5 Top Right Corner - Select the check
box to add an inside right corner to the

window.
Height - Enter the height of the right inside
corner, and its distance From the left side not from the right side.
The above illustration shows the window

with and without Raise bottom specified.
Examples of Shaped Windows
6 Match Roof -
Click to have the

program match the
angle of the top of the
window to the pitch of
the roof on a gable
end. The window maintains the angle even
when resized and repositioned. Top Left
Corner and Top Right Corner must be
unchecked for this to work. This option does
not work for curved roofs.
Revert - Select the check box to restore the
window to its original window type and
special arch type settings. Both the left and
right heights are reset to the same value,
which is the higher of the two sides before it
was restored.
7 Raise Bottom - Enter a value to raise
one bottom corner of the window by

that amount.
Select At Left or At Right to specify the
corner to raise.
356
On a shaped window, there

must be two vertical sides.
They may be as short as 1/4.
The diagram shows solid
black circles where the left
and right heights are, and
open circles where additional
corners have been placed.
A has different left and right
heights with no corner added.
B has matching left and right

heights with an added corner.
C is the same as B, except

that the left and right heights
have been shortened to 1/4.
D is the same as B except it

has two added corners.
E is the same as A except
that Raise Bottom at right has
been defined.
Arch Tab
3
4
1 Type -Select a type of arch from the

drop-down list.
3 Radius - Enter the radius for the Tudor

Arch or the Double Arch.
Reflect - Select the check box to

reflect the arch from top to bottom.
Reflect can be used to create circular and
octagonal windows from square windows. It
can also be used for decorative fixed glass.
Round Broken
Top
Gothic Elliptical Flat

Top
5 Check Arch on Left to restrict the
shape of the arch to the left side of the

window. The right leg is straight.
Arch on Right - Select the check box to
restrict the shape of the arch to the right side
of the window. The left leg is straight.
Tudor
Double
Trifoil
Octogonal
Dogear
2 Height - Enter the arch height. All
types except Round Top and Octagonal

Arch require a height value.
Treatments Tab
The Treatments tab of the Window
Specification dialog is similar to the
Hardware tab of the Door Specification
dialog. See Hardware Tab on page 323.
357
Windows
Moldings Tab
2
3
4
1 A preview of the selected molding
profile displays.
2 Click Library to open the Select
Library Objects dialog. Choose a

molding to view your selection in the
3 Click Clear to return to a flat profile.

button to specify the side of the window

to receive the molding. The window detail in
the dialog changes to reflect your selections.
New moldings may be added to the library.
See Creating a Molding Profile on page
539.
358
Layer Tab
For information about using the Layers tab,
see Layer Tab on page 223.
Materials Tab
For information about using the Materials
Label Tab
For information about using the Label tab,
see Label Tab on page 576.

To open the Bay/Box Window
Specification dialog, select a bay or box
window and click the Open Object
button.
edit
Many options in this dialog can be set for the

individual object. They cannot be set as
defaults. Many of these same options are
available for Bow windows.
General tab
1
3
1 Bay Angle - Enter the angle of the side
components of the bay window in

degrees. Enter 90 degrees to create a box
window..
2 Has Component Windows - Uncheck
this box to remove the component

windows of the bay/box window unit.
3 Use Existing Roof - Check this box if
the existing roof needs no changes to

accomodate the bay window.
4 Extend Existing Roof Over - Check
this box to extend the existing roof

plane to cover the bay window below.
Windows
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
5 Rectangular Roof Over - Check this
box to create a roof over the bay

window that is square across the end instead
of following the profile of the roof. See Bay,
Box, Bow Windows & Roofs on page 341.
6 Suppress Dimension - Check this box
to suppress the dimensions that are

automatically placed to the Bay window.
7 No Labels - Check this box to suppress
the label in floor plan view and to

prevent the Bay window from being included
in the materials list or Window Schedule.
8 Single Label for Entire bay - Check

this box to create one label to list the
359
Bay window in the Material List and

schedules.
9 No Trimmers for Components - A
normal window has two framing studs

on either side. The trimmer stud is against
the window and ends where it butts to the
bottom of the header. Check this box to
eliminate the trimmer stud for bay
components, which allows the component
width to increase.
10 No Framing Between Components -
Check this box to remove both studs

between the bay components.
11 Components Recessed - Check this
box if the window is placed in a brick

wall and you want to recess the exterior
casing to produce a brick molding.
Bay window components default to a size
that allows one standard trimmer when a bay
Bow Window Specification
1
2
360
is first created. When the bay as a whole is

moved and resized, its components automatically resize to fit a standard trimmer.
12 To Sheathing Layer - Check this box
to recess the components to the

sheathing layer instead of the outside layer
(typically brick) as in item 11.
13 Connect Outer Casing - Check this
box to have the exterior casing

surround all three bay component windows
together, not separately, on the exterior.
Mullions are provided between components.
This is how casing is always done for the
interior.
Layer Tab
For information about using the Layer tab,
Window Schedules
Many of the options in this dialog are the

same as the Bay/Bow Window
Specification. See Bay/Box Window
1 Define the Number of sections to
increase or decrease the number of

components in the window.
3 Suppress Standard Dimension -
Check this box to suppress the

dimensions showing width and depth of the
bow.
4 Suppress Dimension to Center -
Check this box to suppress the radial

dimension.
2 Has Component Windows - Uncheck
this box to remove the component

windows of the bow window unit.
Window Schedules
Chief Architect can automatically produce a
window schedule. See Creating Schedules
on page 992.
361
362
Chapter 11:
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Floors
Foundations
Chief Architect allows for multiple floors in
a plan. Floors that are based on the first floor
footprint can be easily added at any time.
Floors can also be deleted and moved at any
time.
Chief Architect also support special floors
for foundations and attics. Only one
foundation level and one attic can exist in a
plan.
Only one floor can be active at a time. This

floor is referred to as the current floor. One
additional floor can be shown (but not
edited) for reference in the same view.
Chapter Contents
Floor Defaults
Working With Multiple Floors
Floor Tools
Adding Floors
Deleting Floors
Copying Floors
The Current Floor
Reference Floor
363
Multiple
Floors
Multiple Floors
Floor Defaults
Video: Checking the Second Floor
Defaults
The defaults for the current floor can
be accessed by selecting Edit> Default
Settings, then choosing Floor from the
category tree in the Default Settings
dialog. The Floor Defaults dialog can also
be opened by double-clicking the Floor
Tools
In addition, the Floor Defaults

button
can be added to a toolbar for quick access to
the Floor Defaults dialog. See Toolbar
The Floor Defaults dialog is similar to the
Room Specification dialog, but controls
the default settings for all rooms on the
current floor. See Room Specification
Dialog on page 296.
button.
Floor Defaults Dialog
1
2
3
364
Three settings on the General tab of are

unique to the Floor Defaults dialog.
1 Use Above Floors Platform for
Ceiling - Check this box to create a

single ceiling platform for the entire floor,
which prevents unique materials from being
assigned to the ceiling in individual rooms.
This box is normally left unchecked.
2 Default to no ceiling - Check this box
to have newly defined room have no

ceiling above them.
3 On Floor 1 only, define the wall layer
that you would lik to calculate the

Living Area To. See Living Area on page
287.
When Chief Architect starts, it opens a blank

plan. The plan name is Untitled 1.plan. If
you draw walls and save the plan, the current
floor becomes the first floor.
Once the plan file is saved, the title bar
displays filename:Floor Plan, indicating:
The active drawing file is filename.
The .plan file is open.
The active view is the floor plan view.
Any model can have up to 30 floors, plus a

foundation and attic. Floors can be added,
deleted, copied, and swapped. All floors and
the foundation are visible in most 3D views.
The Current Floor is the active floor. There

can be only one active floor at a time.
The Reference Floor is a single floor, other
than the current floor, that can be shown for
reference, similar to an overlay. The
reference floor is visible but not editable.
Objects snap to the reference display, helping
align items with other floors.
All other floors can be shown in 3D views
but not floor plan view.
To view more than one floor of your plan
at a time, open the plan file again. This
creates a new editable window of the same
file that can show any floor. Changes made in
this new window are also reflected in the original window.
Floor Tools
Select Build> Floor to access the floor
tools.
Select Build> Build New Floor
to build
a new floor. A new floor can be generated
based upon the perimeter of the floor below
or a blank floor can be created and drawn
from scratch. See Adding Floors on page

366.
Select Build> Insert New Floor
to insert
a new floor below the current floor. See
Adding Floors on page 366.
365
Multiple
Floors

Video: Deleting, Rebuilding and
Exchanging Floors
Choose Build> Delete Current Floor

to
remove the current floor from the plan. For
more information, see Deleting Floors on
page 367.
Select Build> Exchange With Floor Above
to move the current floor up one floor
and the floor above it down. See
Exchanging Floors on page 367.
Choose Build> Exchange With Floor
Below
to move the current floor down
one floor and the floor below it, up. See
Exchanging Floors on page 367.
Choose Build> Build Foundation
to
open the Foundation Defaults dialog and
build a foundation floor using these settings.

See Building a Foundation on page 372.
Select Build> Delete Foundation
to
remove the foundation from the plan. For
more information, see Deleting
Foundations on page 377.
Choose Build> Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
to force Chief Architect to
recalculate the relationship between the
walls, floors, and ceilings in your model. See
Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings
on page 416.
Select Build> Rebuild Slabs to force rebuild
of any slabs in the plan.
Adding Floors
Video: Building the Second Floor
This option creates an upper floor with

exterior walls (of the same type) generated over the exterior walls of the floor
below. These walls can be edited. Interior walls are not duplicated.
Make new (blank) plan for the 2nd
floor - This option is typically selected
if none of the exterior walls are directly
above the existing walls on the floor
below. This creates a blank floor above
the current floor. If you choose this
method, it may be helpful to turn on
reference layers in order to align walls
with bearing walls below. Items snap to
the reference floor display.
New floors can be added in floor plan view

and 3D views.
To create a new floor
1.
Select Build> Floor> Build New Floor

to open the New Floor dialog and
build an additional floor. Two options
are available.
Most often, Derive new 2nd floor

plan from the 1st floor plan is used.
366
2.
Once you have made a selection, click

OK. A new floor is added based on the
settings in the Floor Defaults dialog.
See Floor Defaults on page 364.
3.
The new floor becomes the current floor.
Exchanging Floors
4.
Repeat this process to create additional

floors.
Note: Chief Architect allows only one floor,

the foundation/basement, below the first floor.
Keep this in mind when you begin an as-built
or plan for a multi-story building.
Adding Floors Between

Existing Floors
Floors can be inserted between two existing
floors. To insert a floor, select Build>
Floor> Insert New Floor
Floor dialog opens.
. The Insert
Select one of the two options available and

click OK. The existing floor is moved up,
(with all floors above it) and a new floor is
created below.
Derive new 2nd floor plan from the 1st
floor plan - Select this option to insert a new
floor, based on the exterior walls of the
current floor. Click OK to create a new floor.
Any existing floors above are moved up and
the new floor is inserted.
Make new (blank) plan - Select this option
to insert a blank floor. The current floor and
all floors above are moved up.
Adding a Foundation
To add a foundation, select Build> Floor>
Build Foundation
. See Building a

Video: Deleting, Rebuilding and
Exchanging Floors
Select Build> Floor Exchange With Floor
Above
or Build> Floor> Exchange
With Floor Below

to swap the current
floor with the floor above or below. The floor
that was moved becomes the current floor at
its new location. You can easily move a floor
up or down several floors by using either one
of these buttons repeatedly.
Deleting Floors
Click Build> Floor> Delete Current Floor
to remove the current floor from the plan.
If there is a floor above, it becomes the
current floor; if there is no floor below, the
floor beneath becomes the current floor.
367
Multiple
Floors
Exchanging Floors
Copying Floors
If you want to make a copy of an existing
floor to be used on a new floor, the Edit
You can also copy floors by selecting all,

then using Copy and Paste, Hold Position.
Area
tools can be helpful. See Edit
Area Tools on page 153.
The Current Floor

Only one floor can be active at any given
time. The active floor is referred to as the
Current Floor, and is the only floor that can
be edited.
If you want to edit two different floors at the
same time, you can open the plan again. This
opens a second window on the current open
plan that has the same editing abilities as the
first. Only one of these windows can be
active at any given time.
Floor Up/ Floor Down

If you are working with more
than two floors, use the
toolbar to change between them. You can
change the current floor in floor plan view
and most 3D views. The current floor
displays on the Change Floor/Reference
button, which can be found between the

Down One Floor
and the Up One Floor
buttons.
You can also select Tools> Reference
Floors> Up One Floor
or Down One
Floor
to switch from one floor to
another. Floors become available once they
have been built. The Attic plan and the
foundation are also accessible using these
tools.
Change Floor
If there are multiple floors, select
Tools> Reference Floors> Change
Floor/Reference to open the Change
Floor/Reference dialog. See Reference
Floor on page 368.
Reference Floor
Video: Using the Reference Floor and
its Layer Set
When there is more than one floor in a
model, it is often helpful to see how different
floors relate to each other. Any floor can be
368
shown as the Reference Floor along with the

current floor.
When the Reference Display is turned on, the
reference floor is visible and objects on the
current floor can snap to objects on reference
Reference Floor
Reference Display
1
2
To show the reference floor, select

Tools> Reference Floors> Reference
Display or press F9 on your keyboard. The
reference floor can also be toggled on or off
quickly in floor plan view by clicking the
Reference Display toggle button on the
utility toolbar.
Note: If the current floor and the reference

floor have edges that line up, the reference
floor may be difficult to see on screen. When
lines of two different colors are superimposed
upon each other, discoloration may result.
The display of objects in the reference

display is controlled by layer set. The layer
set being used for reference can be changed
in the Change Floor/Reference dialog or
in the Layer Set Management dialog.
See Layer Set Management on page 217.
If the reference display is on when a floor
plan view is sent to layout, the reference
display is always on in that layout view and
cannot be turned off.
The reference display settings are also
preserved if the reference display is on when
a view is printed. See Display Options and
Printing on page 950.
By default, the floor below the current floor
is the reference floor, but any floor can be
referenced using the Change Floor/
Reference dialog. To open the dialog, click
the Change Floor/Reference
the Reference Display
remains so.
button. If
was on or off, it
1 The Reference Floor currently used for
reference is highlighted here. You can

select another floor.
2 The Current Floor is highlighted here.
You can select another floor to make it

the current floor.
3 The Reference Display Layer Set,
which controls which layers are visible

in the reference display, shows here. The
Reference Display Set is active by default.
Select another layer set from the drop-down
list to use it for the reference display.
While any layer set can be used as
the Reference Display Layer Set, for
best results you should use the default
Reference Display Set or create a new
layer set specifically for reference display
purposes. See Layer Sets on page 216.
Swap Floor/Reference
If one floor is defined as the current
floor and another floor is defined as the
reference floor, use the Swap Floor/
Reference
button to switch the status of
the two floors.
369
Multiple
Floors
floor; however, objects on the reference floor

cannot be selected or edited.
Reference Display Options

Select Tools> Reference Floors>
Reference Display Options to control
what objects display and how they appear
370
when the reference display is turned on. See

218.
Chapter 12:
Foundations
Chapter Overview
drawn on upper floors using the Foundation
Wall

Foundations
There are three foundation types in Chief
Architect: footing, slab, and piers. All three
can be generated automatically or manually.
The foundation type can be specified in the
Foundation Defaults dialog when the
foundation is built.
There can be only one foundation level in
your plan, Level 0. Foundation walls can be
tool.
Always consult registered geotechnical

and civil engineers for information
regarding the proper foundation for your site.
Chapter Contents
Foundation Defaults
Building a Foundation
New Floor Dialog
Displaying Foundations
Editing Foundations
Aligning Stem Walls and Footings
Resizing Stem Walls
Deleting Foundations
371
Foundations
Introductory Training Video: Basements and Foundations
The Slab Tools

Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations
Editing Piers and Pads

Slab Specification Dialog
Foundation Defaults
selecting Edit> Default Settings... .
There can be only one foundation floor per
plan. Because the settings in the Foundation Defaults dialog determine foundation
type, this dialog opens automatically when
Build> Floor> Build Foundation
selected.
is
The Foundation Defaults dialog allows

you to specify stem wall height, footing size,
slab thickness, presence of treated sill plates,
and other characteristics of the foundation.
These values determine how a new
foundation is built and the sizes for
foundation walls, slabs and footings added to
an existing foundation.
Video: Building the Basement Foundation
Foundations built automatically are based on
the placement of walls on the first floor. At
least one room must be defined on the first
floor for a foundation to be automatically
generated.
Three foundation types are available. They
are piers, footings and monolithic slab. The
first two options are composed of walls; the
last creates a slab with footing polyline.
372
Once a foundation is generated, you can add

walls, piers, and slabs to customize it.
To build a foundation, select Build> Floor>
Build Foundation
to open the
Foundation Defaults dialog.
The Foundation Defaults dialog defines

the general parameters of the foundation.
The Foundation Defaults dialog
cannot be used to edit the foundation
after it has been built. The foundation must
be deleted and rebuilt. See Deleting Foundations on page 377.
Foundation Tab
3
5
4
6
10
11
12
7
13
1 Wall Thickness - If the Foundation
Wall Type is set to Default (wood

frame 16"OC), this field is enabled and
defines the thickness of the stem wall. When
the foundation wall is built, the wall type is
Default (concrete) with the thickness you
assign.
feet (1800 mm), a slab floor is generated

above the footing and a Basement ceiling
height notation displays, showing the
distance from the top of the slab floor to the
basement ceiling. This ceiling height is the
Minimum Wall Height minus the Slab
Thickness. Adjust these values to get the
desired Basement Ceiling Height. The
ceiling height can be changed later. See
Room Specification Dialog on page 296.
To delete the slab, specify the rooms in the
basement as Open Below in the Room
3 Slab Thickness - Defines the thickness
If the foundation wall type is not set to

Default, the thickness of the foundation wall
is determined by the wall type. See Wall
of the slab produced above the footing

or at the top of the stem wall.
2 Min. Wall Height - Defines the stem
Spread footings are used in conjunction with

stem walls. The footing is typically wider
wall height, including the treated sill

plate. If the minimum wall height is at least 6
Footings
373
Foundations
Three types of foundations can be created in

Chief Architect: footing, monolithic slab,
and piers. Select the radio button next to the
name of the desired type. Each type has
different settings, options, and behaviors.
The following settings apply to most
foundation types:
than the stem wall and runs continuously

under the base of the wall.
4 Footings - Select the radio button to
generate a foundation system with a

stem wall centered on a spread footing.
Footings automatically center beneath the
stem wall, but individual footings can be
located differently. See Foundation Tab on
page 264.
5 Slab at top of Stem Wall - Check this

box to raise the slab floor so its top is
flush with the top of the stem wall.
If Slab at top of Stem Wall is selected, all
rooms on the first floor are automatically set
to Floor for this room is supplied by the
foundation room from the floor below, as
noted in the Structure tab in the Room
Specification dialog. See Structure Tab
on page 299.
6 Footing Size - Specify the Width and
Height of the footing. To generate a

foundation with a stem wall and no visible
footing, set the footing width to the same
dimension as the stem wall.
Initially, the bottom of the slab rests on the

top of the footing. The footing can be
subsequently lowered by increasing Stem
Wall Height for the first floor room above the
foundation.
7 Treated Sill Plate Size - Enter a Width
and Height for the treated sill plate,

also commonly referred to as a mudsill. If
either value is set to zero, no sill plate is
produced. A sill plate is only produced if the
main layer of the wall above is a framing
type.
374
8 Foundation Wall Type - Select the
wall type for the foundation walls from

this drop-down list.
Click the Define... button to open the Wall
Type Definitions dialo and change the
definition of the wall type selected from the
drop-down list. See Wall Type Definitions
Dialog on page 251.
If the Default (wood frame 16"OC) wall
type is selected, the thickness can be defined
by the Wall Thickness field to the left. The
thickness of any other wall type is defined by
the wall definition.
Note: If you plan to turn the foundation wall
into a pony wall, a wall type other than
Default (concrete) must be selected.
9 Check Show S Markers on Step
Foundation to include an S symbol

in floor plan view anywhere a step in a
foundation is located.
Monolithic Slab
10 Monolithic Slab - Select this option to
build a slab foundation with a perimeter

footing. This foundation is the floor platform
for the first floor. It is visible in the
foundation plan and can be selected and
edited with the Slab Specification dialog.
Note: Monolithic slabs are rebuilt whenever
you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
Piers
111 Piers - Select this option to generate a
pier and grade beam foundation. The

floor framing rests directly on top of the
grade beam.
The height of the grade beam is defined by

the Minimum Wall Height. The thickness of
the grade beam is defined by the Wall
Thickness. The size and spacing of the piers
are specified in the Piers section of this tab.
If a wall type is selected, only the Minimum
Wall Height is used to size the grade beam,
and the thickness comes from the wall layer
definition. If you select Default (concrete),
the grade beam is sized according to the Wall

Thickness and the Minimum Wall Height.
12 Specify the Diameter, Depth and
Maximum Separation of the piers.
13 Basement Ceiling Height - The ceiling
height for the basement displays here if

the Minimum Wall Height is defined at 72
inches or greater.
Materials Tab
1
The Materials tab determines what

information is used when you build a
materials list. Unlike the Materials tabs on
most other dialogs, none of this data affects
the 3D model.
the slab. If piers are used, specify how many

rebar are used per pier. Rebar does not
display in cross section/elevation views, but
is added to the Material List.
The Materials tab applies to any foundation

type, but some options may be unavailable
depending on the type selected.
Horizontal and Wall Vertical spacing

for the rebar in the stem wall. If using rebar
is a slab instead of mesh, the spacing applies
to both directions.
1 #bars/course - Specify the number of
rebar in the Footing, the number of

Horizontal and Vertical rebar courses in the
stem walls, and the number of rebar layers in
2 Course Spacing - Define the Wall
3 Bar size - Define the rebar size in 1/8th

inches. 4 represents 4/8, or inch.
375
Foundations
Use Mesh - Select the check box to

reinforce the slab floor with mesh
instead of rebar, or uncheck it to use rebar.
5 Select either Foam Seal, Termite
Flashing or both. These options are

added to the Material List, but do not display
in the model.
New Floor Dialog

Once you have specified the correct settings
in the Foundation Defaults dialog, click
OK to open the New Floor dialog.
1
2
1 Select Derive new Foundation plan
from the 1st floor plan and click OK

to build a foundation based on floor 1.
2 Select Make new (blank) plan for the
Foundation and click OK to create an

empty foundation level where you can
manually draw foundation walls or slabs.
Displaying Foundations
In floor plan view, footings are drawn with
dashed lines and walls with solid lines.
Automatically generated piers are drawn
using a dashed line and are centered on the
grade beam. The grade beam is represented
by two solid lines. It aligns with the wall
above unless specified otherwise.
The appearance of foundation walls, footings

and piers is controlled in the Layer Display
Options dialog on the Walls, Foundation
and Footings layers. The Footings layer
controls the display of footings and
foundation piers. The Foundation layer
controls the display of foundations in 3D
views.
Editing Foundations
Foundation walls can be moved and edited
like other walls. See Editing Walls on page
242.
Footing size can be changed on the
Foundation tab of the Wall Specification
dialog. See Foundation Tab on page 264.
376
Monolithic slab foundations can be edited

manually or changed by editing the footprint
of the floor above then rebuilding walls,
floors, and ceilings.
Other slabs are edited in 2D and 3D views
like closed polylines. See Editing ClosedPolyline Based Objects on page 107.

By default, the exterior surface of the main
layer of the stem wall aligns with the exterior
surface of the main layer of the wall above. If
there is only one layer for both the stem wall
and the first floor wall above it, the outsides
of the main layer of the walls line up. The

footing is centered on the stem wall unless
unchecked on the Foundation tab of the Wall
Specification dialog. See Foundation
Tab on page 264.
Resizing Stem Walls

When a foundation plan is created, the
foundation is built with a specified stem wall
height measured from the bottom of floor
framing to top of the footing. Once built, this
height can be set individually by room and
can also be set independent of the basement
floor height.
In 3D Views
Individual stem walls can be selected and
edited in 3D views to move the footing up or
down.
If adjacent rooms have stem wall

heights that differ by at least 1/16 of an
inch, the stem wall separating them uses the
larger of these two values.
room and click the Open Object

edit
button to open the Room Specification
dialog. On the General tab, enter a value in
the Stem Wall Height field to redefine the
height of the foundation stem wall the next
time you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
.
This method should only be used for detailed

changes or for stepping the bottom of the
foundation wall. See Stepped Walls &
Footings on page 258.
Deleting Foundations
Once built, the foundation plan is
separate from the first floor plan. If you
change the position of exterior walls on the
first floor plan, the foundation is not updated.
Use the Rebuild Slab

tool to rebuild
foundation slabs automatically. To update
walls, you must either edit them in the
377
Foundations
To set stem wall height individually, select a
foundation plan or delete the foundation and

rebuild them.
Select Build> Floor> Delete Foundation
to delete the current foundation. Rebuild
the foundation to match the new first floor
plan by selecting Build> Floor> Build
Foundation
. The Foundation
Defaults dialog opens, allowing you to set
general parameters for the new foundation
plan.
Note: You must delete and rebuild the foundation if you decide to change the foundation
type.
Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations

If you built a monolithic slab foundation or
define a room to have a slab foundation and
then modify the footprint of the walls
defining the slab, you can update the slabs by
selecting Build> Floor> Rebuild Slabs
to open the Rebuild Monolithic Slabs
dialog. Click Rebuild Slabs to delete all

existing slabs and rebuild them to match the
current footprint of the walls.
If you have manually edited the slab and
changed it, these changes are lost when the
slab is rebuilt.
Foundations and Room Specification

When a foundation plan is created, rooms
included in the Living Area calculation
generate a spread footing, grade beam, or
slab foundation below it. Garages generate
foundations, but exterior rooms do not.
Note: To remove the concrete slab or part of
the slab in the basement area, select a basement room and define it as Open Below in
378
Two options on the Structure tab of the

Room Specification dialog affect the
foundation: Slab foundation for this room

if the foundation is a monolithic slab, and
This foundation room supplies the floor
for the room above if the foundation is
composed of footings or piers. See
Structure Tab on page 299.
The Slab Tools
Garages
A room labeled Garage on the first floor
produces automatic footings or pier
foundation with a slab floor.
To produce this foundation, the following
options are checked on the Structure tab of
the Room Specification dialog for the
foundation room under a Garage:
Ceiling over this room is not checked.
This foundation room supplies the

floor for the room above is checked.
On the Structure tab of the Room

Specification dialog for the Garage itself,
Floor for This Room is Supplied by the
Foundation Room from the Floor
Below should be checked.
These settings create a 4" slab to sit on top

of the footings, with a short stem wall around
the garage. Stud walls are placed on top of
the stem wall when framing is built.
If Floor for This Room is Supplied by the
Foundation Room from the Floor Below
is selected, a Floor Overview
of the
foundation plan includes the slab. A Floor
Overview
on the 1st floor shows no
garage floor.
The floor height of the garage and the top of
stem wall must be properly defined relative
to the zero level of the first floor. Typically,
the garage area in the foundation must be
selected and the floor height or slab to stem
wall top raised if it is to be less than 24"
below the zero level of the main floor.
The Slab Tools
The Slab Tools

are designed for more
generic purposes than foundations and
should not be substituted for a foundation
plan. The settings in the Foundation
Defaults dialog do not affect slabs created
with the Slab tools.
Slabs
Select Build> Structure> Slab or
Build> Structure> Slab With
Footing, then and click and drag in floor
plan view to create a slab. Slabs can be
edited as a polyline. See Editing ClosedPolyline Based Objects on page 107.
To edit its height and thickness, select the

slab in floor plan or 3D views and use the
edit handles or click the Open Object
edit button to open the Slab Specification
dialog. See Slab Specification Dialog on
page 381.
Slab Holes
A hole can be placed in a slab or in
the floor of a foundation slab with
footings. Select Build> Structure> Slab
Hole or Build> Structure> Slab Hole With
Footing, then click and drag within an
existing slab to create a hole.
379
Foundations
Select Build> Structure to access the

Slab Tools.
Piers & Pads

Piers and pads can be manually
placed under walls, railings, or
beams on any floor. Select Build>
Structure> Round Pier or Build>
Structure> Square Pad and click in floor
plan view to place a pier or pad.
hole in a ceiling or floor platform above the

current floor. A platform hole drawn on
Floor 0 will produce a hole in the floor
platform for the first floor.
You can add this button to your toolbar. See
Adding Toolbar Buttons on page 18.
Slabs and the

Materials List
The pier or pad placed uses the specified in

the Foundation Defaults dialog.
For information about editing Piers and Pads,
see Editing Piers and Pads on page 380.
Platform Holes
If the slab material type is specified as

Concrete or Volume, the materials list
calculates the total volume of the slab and all
footings. See Define Material Dialog on
page 712.
Select Build> Structure> Platform

Hole and draw a polyline to place a
Editing Piers and Pads

Click an existing pier or pad at the wall to
select it. Three edit handles allow the pier or
pad to be moved and resized.
Resize the selected pier or pad by dragging in or out from either of the two side
handles. To resize a pier or pad if one side
is all the way against an outside wall
intersection, select the pier or pad, drag
using the inside handle.
Move the selected pier or pad by grabbing the center handle and dragging it
along the wall. It stops automatically
underneath an exterior corner.
Move any pier or pad using a dimension that

locates an edge. If no such dimension exists,
Select CAD> Dimension> Manual
380
Dimension
and drag a dimension
parallel to the wall containing the pier, within
two feet of the wall. Select the pier or pad,
then click the dimension to open the Move
Object Using Dimension dialog. See
page 804.
If you move a foundation wall or beam,
any piers or pads it contains move with
it.
Delete a pier or pad by selecting it and

clicking the Delete
edit button or
pressing the Delete key.

Select a slab and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Slab Specification
dialog.
General Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Hole in Slab - Check this box to
Polyline Tab
Foundations
convert the selected slab into a slab

hole. A slab hole must be contained within a
larger slab.
2 Top Height - Set the top height of the

selected slab.
3 Thickness - Set the thickness of the

selected slab.
4 Has Footing - Check this box if you
want the slab to have footings. Set the

height and width for the selected slab.
The perimeter, total area, and volume of the

selected slab displays here. The volume is
the amount of concrete required to pour the
slab.
381
Selected Line Tab

For information about using the Selected
Line tab, see Polyline Specification Dialog
on page 863.
Fill Style Tab

For information about the Fill Style tab, see
Fill Style Tab on page 864.
Materials Tab
Line Style Tab
For information about the Line Style tab, see
Line Specification Dialog on page 850.
Use this tab to select a material to apply to

the terrain surface in 3D views. This material
is not calculated in the Material List.
382
Chapter 13:
Roofs

Video: Introduction to Roofs
Chief Architects roof tools allow you to
draw almost any roof style manually. Many
roof styles can also be generated
automatically.
Proficiency with the roof tools can be
attained only through practice, but mastering
these tools saves you time and effort in plan
development.
Verify that all roof planes join as
intended. The program does not confirm correct geometry between manually
designed or edited roof planes. It is possible
to design and edit roof planes with hips and
valleys that do not meet properly.
Chapter Contents
Automatic Roofs vs. Manual Roofs

The Roof Tools
Automatically Generated Roof Styles
Some Common Roof Types
Roof Baseline Polylines

Manual Roofs
Drawing Roof Planes
Curved Roof Planes
Dormers
Roof Returns
Displaying Roof Planes
Editing Roof Planes
Editing Curved Roof Planes
Editing Auto Dormers
Locating Roof Plane Intersections
Ceiling Planes
Gable/Roof Line
Skylights
Gutters
Build Roof Dialog
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog
Roof Plane Specification Dialog
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog
Dormer Specification Dialog
Dormer Defaults
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog
383
Roofs
Chapter Overview
Roof Pitches in Degrees
Roof Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings, to open
the Default Settings dialog for a
variety of drawing tools, several of which
directly affect roof generation.
While not listed in the Default Settings
dialog, the Build Roof dialog also functions
as the roof defaults dialog. Many, but not all,
initial default values for both automatically
generated and manually drawn roofs are set
in this dialog. See Build Roof Dialog on
page 416.
Default settings for framing, which control

the depth of roof planes, as well as the depth
of floor and ceiling platforms which
influence roof plane heights, are specified in
the Framing Defaults dialog. See
Framing Defaults on page 469.
The initial heights of floors and ceilings,
which influence roof heights, can be
specified in the Floor Defaults dialog for
each floor. See Floor Defaults on page 364.
Automatic Roofs vs. Manual Roofs

Chief Architect can create just about any roof
style. Most common roof styles such as hips
and gables can be automatically generated
quite easily. More complex roof styles can be
created manually. The manual roof tools
allow you to create any roof system that can
be represented using roof planes.
Automatically
Generated Roofs
There are several ways to produce a roof for
your plan. The quickest and easiest is to
automatically generate a roof. In the Build
Roof dialog, specify the Pitch and Roof
Overhang, check Build Roof Planes and
click OK to automatically generate a roof.
By default, a roof plane is generated over
each exterior wall, creating a hip roof. The
program automatically joins the roof planes
at ridges and valleys.
384
Any deviations from the default hip roof can

be specified on the Roof tab of the Wall
Specification dialog for any exterior wall.
Here, you can specify a different overhang,
pitch, a second upper pitch, and the elevation
where the upper pitch begins for the roof
plane that rests on the selected wall. You can
also specify a Full Gable Wall, High/Shed
Gable Wall, or other options instead of a
default hip roof. See Wall Specification
Dialog on page 387.
Roofs can also be automatically generated
using roof plane baselines. When roof plane
baselines are used, information that
determines where and how roof planes are
generated is contained on the Roof Baseline
tab of the Roof Baseline Specification
dialog, which is similar in appearance to the
Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
For more about roof plane baselines, see
Roof Baseline Polylines on page 391.
The Roof Tools
Bay, bow, and box windows also produce

roof planes automatically. For information
about these windows and the roof styles that
can be used with them, see Bay, Box, Bow
Windows & Roofs on page 341.
process and limiting the possibilities only to

your imagination.
Manually Drawn
Roof Systems
Another option is to start with an

automatically generated roof and use manual
design techniques to finish it. Using both
automatic roof generation and the manual
roof drawing techniques, you can quickly
design highly customized roof systems.
Any roof system that can be created

automatically can also be created manually.
Each roof plane is drawn and edited
individually, offering full control over the
Using Both Automatic and

Manual Techniques
The Roof Tools
Build Roof
Select Build> Roof> Build Roof to
open the Build Roof dialog and
specify the settings for automatically
generated and manually drawn roofs. See
Build Roof Dialog on page 416.
Roof Plane
Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane to
draw a roof plane manually. Doubleclick the Roof Plane button to open the
Build Roof dialog.
Ceiling Plane
Select Build> Roof>Ceiling Plane to
draw a ceiling plane manually. Ceiling
planes are drawn and behave much like roof
planes. See Ceiling Planes on page 409.
Gable/Roof Line
Select Build> Roof> Gable/Roof Line
to draw a gable line that generates a
gable when roofs are automatically
generated. See Gable/Roof Line on page
410.
The Gable/Roof Line
tool is most
commonly used to define the location of a
gable along a longer wall. A gable/roof line
can also be used to place a gable within a
roof plane or to extend a continuous roof
when there is no wall below.
Skylights
Select Build> Roof> Skylight and
drag over an existing roof plane to
create a skylight. The skylight, skylight
shaft, and ceiling hole (if a ceiling exists) are
drawn at the same time. See Skylights on
page 414.
385
Roofs
Select Build> Roof to access the Roof

Tools.
Auto Floating Dormer

Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating
Dormer and click within an existing
roof plane to place an auto floating dormer.
See Dormers on page 398.
Fix Roofs
Select Build> Roof> Fix Roofs to
remove breaks where a single edge of
one roof plane meets the broken edge of
another in a ridge or valley. See Aligning
Roof Edges on page 403.
Auto Dormer
Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer
and click within a roof plane to place a
dormer. See Dormers on page 398.
Delete Roof Planes

Select Build> Roof> Delete Roof
Planes to delete all roof planes in the
plan. See Deleting Roof Planes on page
405.

Introductory Training Video: Automatically Generating Roofs
Video: Building an Entire Roof at Once
When roofs are automatically generated, a
roof plane is created over each exterior wall
by default, resulting in a hip roof.
To generate a roof plane using values other
than the defaults or to not generate a roof
plane at all (gable roofs, shed roofs, etc.),
change the settings in the Wall
Specification dialog before a roof is
generated.
Select a wall and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Wall Specification
dialog. The Roof tab controls how the roof
plane above the selected wall is
386
Walls can be group selected and edited

simultaneously. Select the first wall,
hold down the Shift key, click additional walls
to add them to the selection set, then click the
Open Object edit button.
Auto Rebuild Roofs

When Auto Rebuild Roofs is checked in the
Build Roofs dialog, any changes made to
the position of an exterior wall or to its roof
directives will automatically prompt the roof
to regenerate to reflect the changes. See
Build Roof Dialog on page 416.
Changes made to floor heights, ceiling
heights, or floor or ceiling platform
thicknesses may also cause the roof to be
automatically rebuilt.
1
2
3
4
5
Note: Pitch settings on the Roof tab of the

Wall Specification dialog override the
Pitch setting in the Build Roof dialog.
1 Any automatically generated roof style
other than a hip requires one of the

Options to be checked.
Full Gable Wall - Check this to create a

gable above the entire wall. This places a
ridge over the middle of the selected
wall(s). See Gable Roof on page 390.
High Shed/Gable Wall - Check this for

the wall under the high side of a shed
roof. It can produce ridges, but it may
Knee Wall - Check this to define an interior wall whose height is defined by the
roof plane above it, not the ceiling height.
Knee walls are usually found next to top
floor attic areas.
Extend Slope Downward - Check this to

extend the roof plane downward over a
bumpout, instead of creating additional
roof planes. The two connecting walls
that create the bumpout must be Full
Gable walls.
In the bottom image below, the outer

bumpout wall has the Extend Slope Downward check box selected. The two short
387
Roofs
also be used for gable ends that have a

raked wall. See High Shed/Gable Wall
on page 390.
Many common roof styles can be generated

automatically using the Roof tab of the Wall
connecting walls have the Full Gable Wall

check box selected.
Pitch - Specify the pitch for the roof

plane above this wall if different from the
default roof pitch set in the Build Roof
dialog. If a roof plane is specified with
two pitches, this field controls the pitch
of the lower roof plane.
Upper Pitch - Check this to define the

pitch for a second roof plane above this
wall. Mansard, gambrel, gull wing and
half-hip are examples of roof styles that
use two pitches.
Starts at - Specify either the height or

the distance in from baseline where the
second roof plane begins.
Before
Full Gable
Wall
Extend Slope
Downward
After
Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom - Check this

to have the bottom of the selected wall
clipped by the roof plane below, as where
a floating dormer wall meets the main
roof plane.
Pitch
2 Any exterior wall can define the pitch
of the roof plane built above it.
If the Pitch value is followed by a [D], the

value is the default pitch for the entire
building. The default pitch is set in the Build
Roof dialog. The minimum pitch is in
12 or 20 mm in 1000 mm.
388
To determine either of these values from an

elevation view
1.
Create the model.
2.
Generate the roof using only the first

pitch. Be sure to define all the roof information for each wall (gable, hip, first
pitch, etc.).
3.
Using the Cross Section/Elevation

tool, generate a cross section of the
house that includes the roof plane that
will have the second pitch.
4.
Using the CAD tools, place a temporary

point near the location where you want
the second pitch to start.
Using the End-to-End Dimension
tool, drag a dimension line from the
first floor 0'-0" to the temporary point.
Using the End-to-End Dimension
tool, drag a dimension line from the
baseline to the vertical plane of the
temporary point.
Note: Normally hip roof planes are built over

bay, bow, and box windows. You cannot edit
the wall segments making up these windows
as described above. Instead, select one of
the windows, open it for specification, and
select one of the roof generation options.
3 Overhang - Specify the overhang of
5.
Enter either of these values in the Wall

Specification dialog. You can press
the Tab key to update the other value.
Click OK to close the dialog.
the roof plane to be generated above the

selected wall. The default value is set in the
Build Roof dialog. See Build Roof
Dialog on page 416.
4 Lower Wall Type If Split By Butting
Roof - Designate a wall to be split into

a pony wall. It is split by roof planes that
abut its outside surface. The upper portion
retains the same type. This is defined on the
Wall Types tab of the Wall Specification
dialog, and the lower portion specified here.
See Wall Types Tab on page 265.
Auto Roof Returns

Open the Build Roof dialog, check
Build Roof Planes and click OK to
rebuild the roof.
5 Check Auto Roof Return to generate
roof returns on the selected wall. In

most cases, roof returns only work for Full
Gable Walls.
Specify the roof returns horizontal Length.

Enter a value to Extend the roof returns from
the overhang.
Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return and
whether the roof return is Sloping or Flat.
See Roof Returns on page 400.
Check the boxes to Include Frieze molding
and Include Gutter along eave edges.
Roofs
6.
389
Some Common Roof Types

Most common roof types can be created
easily using the Options on the Roof tab of
Hip Roof
4.
On the Roof tab check Full Gable Wall.

Be sure both walls are specified the
same.
5.
Double-click the Roof Tools

button
to open the Build Roof dialog, check
Build Roof Planes, and click OK to
regenerate the roof.
Full Gable
Wall
By default a roof plane is generated over

each exterior wall, creating a hip roof. Hip
roofs can be applied equally to all walls
without causing conflict. To define a wall
with a hip roof, make sure all Options are
unchecked.
Gable Roof
A gable roof is produced if the two opposite
walls, or roof plane baseline segments, are
defined as Full Gable Wall in the Roof tab
390
1.
Draw four walls to create a one room

house.
2.
Group select two end walls.
3.

edit button
to open the Wall Specification dialog.
High Shed/Gable Wall

The High Shed/Gable Wall is often
interchangeable with Full Gable Wall, but
should be used when raked walls are desired.
If three adjacent walls are defined as High
Shed/Gable wall, the building is modeled
with a shed roof. The High Shed/Gable wall
is the tall side.
High Shed
Walls
Gable Wall
You can generate roof plane baselines in the

Build Roof dialog. Check Make Roof
Baseline Polylines (this also checks Build
Roof Planes) and click OK. The automatic
roof generation process stops short of
building the roof planes. A continuous set of
roof baselines is created along the outside
edge of the main layer of the exterior walls.
Once created, roof plane baselines can be
edited like a CAD polyline. See Editing
107. When reshaped, new roofs built from
these roof plane baselines follow the new
shape even if that shape no longer follows
the exterior walls.
Just as roof information can be defined in

individual walls, roof information can also
be defined in each roof baseline edge. When
roofs are built using roof plane baselines, the
settings in the roof plane baselines override
the settings in the corresponding walls.
To create the new roof using the modified
roof baselines, check Use Existing Roof
Baselines in the Build Roof dialog and
click OK.
Editing Roof
Baseline Polylines
Roof baselines can be edited and used as the
basis for the generation of a new roof plan.
They can be reshaped in 2D like CAD
polylines. Like walls, edges can have roof
information defined in them. When edited,
attached roof plane baselines stay at the same
baseline height. If roof planes exist at more
than one baseline height, each height
generates its own set of roof baseline
polylines.
391
Roofs
Typically the program models the roof plan

based on the default settings in the Build
Roof dialog and the settings on the Roof tab
of the Wall Specification dialog. The
program takes this information and the
layout of the exterior walls and generates a
roof. If you want a roof plan that diverges
from the footprint of your building, you can
use roof baselines to lay out the roof plan
instead.
Roof baselines always form a closed area.

They cannot be severed, but can have
additional joints or corners added.
In addition to length and direction, each
segment of a roof plane baseline has
embedded roof information that the program
uses when modeling roof planes. This is the
same information that can be set for walls on
the Roof tab of the Wall Specification
dialog.
An Example
For a simple example of roof plane baseline
editing, consider an L-shaped house, with a
rectangular roof. The inner part of the L is a
patio that is covered under the same roof.
To set roof information for roof plane

baselines
1.
Select the roof plane baseline at one

edge.
2.

edit button
to open the Roof Baseline
3.
The settings in the dialog apply only to

the selected baseline edge. Specify one
of the following options:
Full Gable Wall
High Shed/Gable Wall
Knee Wall
Extend Slope Downward
You can specify that a particular baseline ends Against Wall, which means
that the high edge of a roof plane butts
into a wall that continues upward.
4.
392
Click OK to close the dialog. Roof information is shown along the roof plane
baselines. Abbreviations used are: V vertical (against wall), G -gable/shed, K
- knee wall, and L - lower (extend slope
downward).
On the left is the roof plane baseline as it was

originally produced and the roof plan it
creates.
To model the roof plan shown on the right
1.
Select the roof plane baseline by the bottom segment.
2.

edit button. See Reshaping Objects on page
129.
3.
Click the leftmost segment to fillet the

two lines.
4.
A message box displays informing you

that The system must delete intervening lines (those on the inside of the L) to
join the two selected lines. Click OK.
5.
You should see the roof line shown in

the right side.
6.
Open the Build Roof dialog and select

the Build Roof Planes and Use Existing
Roof Baseline check boxes to model the
roof plan shown at right.
Manual Roofs
Manual Roofs
Introductory Training Video: Drawing
Roofs Manually
Before automatically generating roofs, it is

important to understand how the manual roof
editing tools can be used to create and edit
roof planes. The manual roof editing tools
take advantage of the parameters of
neighboring roof planes and walls to partially
automate the process of drawing a roof plan.
Creating a roof plane is a simple task. Once
created it can be edited in two ways.
The orientation of the roof plane can be

edited in 3D. As a roof plane is stretched
and reshaped in 2D, the program maintains the 3D orientation of the plane
being edited. The location of this plane
can be redefined using the Roof Plane
Specification dialog. See Roof Plane
Specification Dialog on page 424. This
dialog allows the roof plane location and
direction to be adjusted.
An understanding of these two concepts

allows you to design almost any kind of roof.
The shape of the roof plane can be

changed. The shape of a roof plane is
edited in 2D just like a CAD polyline.
Drawing Roof Planes

4.

Video: Roofs - Draw and Edit Roof
Planes
Click at point 3 to build the roof plane.

Point 3 defines the upslope direction of
the roof plane.
Roof planes are essentially 3D CAD

polylines. They are created and edited
like polylines, and have pitch, elevation and
structural properties.
To draw a roof plane
Line 1 - 2 is the baseline
Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane
2.
As in the following example, click and

drag a baseline from point 1 to point 2.
3.
Release the mouse button at point 2 and

move your cursor in the upslope direction. As you move the cursor, a preview
outline of the roof plane displays.
The Baseline
The baseline displays an upslope tick in the
middle of the line. The upslope tick indicates
the direction the roof plane slopes upward.
You cannot redefine the direction of the
slope. If the upslope tick is pointing the
wrong direction, either rotate the roof plane
or delete it and draw another.
393
Roofs
1.
The baseline can be used by the program as

the pivot point for the roof plane. In a cross
section, the baseline is the point where the
outside main layer surface of the wall would
extend upward to intersect the top of the roof
framing member.
The height of a baseline is determined by

the following formula:
When drawing the baseline of a roof plane,

here are some things to consider:
The elevation of the top plate is defined

by the ceiling height in the room.
A baseline does not have to be drawn

over a wall, although it often is.
The roof plane overhangs in the downslope direction from the baseline.
If a baseline is drawn over the top of any

other roof plane, the baseline height
equals the height of the existing roof
plane at the point where you started
drawing.
A baseline drawn along a wall should be

drawn over the outer edge of the walls
main layer. It tries to snap to that layer.
Height of baseline = elevation top plate +

the vertical depth of the rafter - the vertical depth of the rafters birdsmouth cut.
Curved Roof Planes

view and a cross section/elevation view
may be helpful.
Any roof plane can be turned into a curved

roof plane in the Roof Plane
One way to produce a barrel roof is using a
single roof plane that starts out flat (zero
pitch) and covers the entire building.
Curving a Single Roof Plane

4 in 12 pitch Shed roof
To curve a roof plane

2.
1.
394
Draw a simple four wall structure 18' x

24', set three of the walls as High/Shed
Gable walls on the Roof tab of the Wall
Specification dialog and automatically generate a roof. The initial pitch
does not matter. Tiling the floor plan
Select the roof plane in floor plan view

edit button to open the Roof Plane
Specification dialog for that roof
plane.
3.
Change the Pitch from 4 in 12 to 0 in 12

to flatten the roof.
Curved Roof Planes
On the General tab, check Curved

Roof. Notice that the angle values are
currently at zero.
5.
Change the Angle at eave from zero to

15 and press the Tab key. Notice that the
other values update. All three values are
interrelated and dynamic. Changing one
changes the others. In order to maintain
the underlying 0 in 12 pitch (the chord
of the curved roof), the other end of the
roof plane must compensate.
6.
Change the Angle at Ridge from -15

degrees to -45 degrees.
7.
Change the Radius to roof surface to a

smaller number, such as 50.
A radius of 50 could not be achieved unless

the walls were closer together. The curved
roof plane accepts the minimum radius,
which is 116.5.
Curving Two Roof Planes

You can also create a barrel roof using two
roof planes. Well use the same basic 24' x
18' plan we used before, designate the two
opposite walls as gable walls, and generate a
gable with a 12 in 12 (45 degree) pitch. The
12 in 12 pitch often underlies curved roofs
395
Roofs
4.
because it allows the curved roof to be nearly

vertical at the eave and nearly flat at its peak.
To curve two roof planes
1.

24', set the two end walls as Gable
Walls, and automatically generate a roof
at a 12 in 12 pitch.
4.
2.
Select one of the roof planes in floor

plan view and click the Open Object
Specification dialog for that roof
In floor plan view, select both roof

planes and click the Open Object
5.
Set the Angle at ridge to 0 and click

OK.
plane.
3.
Check Curved Roof and notice that the

values are the same. Change the Angle
at ridge from 45 to 0. This makes the
roof plane nearly flat at the ridge. The
eave edge has to compensate to maintain
the 12 in 12 pitch.
Notice that the program changed the Angle at

Ridge from 0 to 1 so that the eave does not
become vertical at 90. Curved roofs are not
allowed to be vertical or inverted.
396
Similar results can be achieved using two

roof planes instead of one. Because the
curvature can be set independently for each
roof plane, using two roof planes allows
more variation.
Curved Roof Planes
Compound Curved
Roof Planes
Compound roof planes consisting of two or
more roof planes that merge together can be
defined using curved roofs. To illustrate this,
well produce a flared Thai style roof eave
that is almost flat at the eave edge and
merges into an 8 in 12 pitch roof.
To create a compound curved roof
2.

24', set the two end walls as Gable
Walls, and automatically generate a roof
at a 4 in 12 pitch.
Select both roof planes in floor plan

view and check Curved Roof in the
Roof Plane Specification dialog.
Set the Angle at Ridge to 33.6901,
which is the same as 8 in 12. Notice that
the Angle at Eave is almost flat.
To create the high roof plane, use the

Roof Plane
tool and draw the baseline of the roof plane along the top, or
ridge edge of the curved roof plane in
floor plan view. The bottom edge of the
new roof plane snaps to the top of the
curved plane.
Turn on Display Temporary Dimensions

, select one of the roof planes
in floor plan view at its ridge edge and
pull it back so that it is 4 feet from the
wall. Do the same to the other roof
plane.
3.
4.
5.
Select the two new roof planes, open

them for specification and change their
pitch to 33.6901. Viewed in 3D, the
planes appear to join together into one.
Upper roof planes with pitch set (using

degrees) to match the ridge edge pitch
of the lower curved roof planes
Roofs
1.
397
Dormers
extend completely through the width of
the wall.
Introductory Training Video: Customizing Dormers

Video: Roofs - Dormers
Dormers can be drawn manually or placed
automatically using the Auto Dormer tools.
Automatic dormers reside by default on their
own layer, Auto Dormers. See Layer
Manually Drawn Dormers

Video: Preparing a Roof for Dormers
Once you are familiar with Chief Architects
roof tools, drawing dormers manually can be
quite simple. There are several different
ways to draw dormers; some methods work
better in certain applications. A variety of
resources are available at www.chiefarchitect.com with information about drawing
dormers manually. There are a few things to
keep in mind.
398
Walls extend upward until they meet an

overlying roof plane.
A wall can also be cut by underlying roof

planes if Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom is
checked on the Roof tab of the Wall
Specification dialog. For this to work
properly, the edge of the roof plane must
Polylines can be converted into a Hole in

Roof/Ceiling that allows walls to extend
above or below the roof line. See Convert Polyline Dialog on page 150.
Auto Floating Dormer

Introductory Training Video: Auto
Floating Dormers
Video: Creating and Copying Automatic Dormers
Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating
Dormer and click the roof plane where
you would like to place the center of the
dormer's front wall.
All the walls of a floating dormer are cut off
at their bottom by the underlying roof plane.
To produce such a dormer manually, check
Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom for the dormer
walls on the Roof tab of the Wall
Specification dialog. A floating dormer is
really a complex skylight, since it sits atop a
hole in the roof just as a skylight does.
Usually no room is defined by the walls of
this type of dormer. The pictures below show
both the outside and inside of a typical
floating dormer.
Dormers
Auto Dormer
Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer
and click the roof plane where you
want the center of the dormer's front wall to
be.
The walls of an auto dormer go to the floor
and meet a knee wall on either side on the
back of the dormer. This knee wall must run
parallel to the underlying roof plane.
A floating dormer can be placed in floor plan

view on the same floor where its underlying
roof plane displays, or it can be placed on the
floor above. Which floor it should be on does
not depend on which floor the underlying
roof plane is on, but you must always click
within this roof plane in floor plan view to
create the dormer. Normally it does not
matter what floor the dormer is on, but it may
need to be on a certain floor so that the
dormer walls do not interfere with walls or
railings in the room below it. To do this, it
may help to display the underlying roof plane
on the appropriate floor using the Roof
Plane Specification dialog. See Roof
Plane Specification Dialog on page 424.
If you are creating a (non-floating) auto

dormer, a knee wall must already exist.
The dormer side walls run back to the
knee wall and the knee wall is broken
where the dormer walls meet it.
The knee wall does not have to be designated as such on the Roof tab of the Wall
Specification dialog unless you are
generating an automatic roof.
A non-floating dormer must always be

created on the same floor as the knee
walls.
Roofs
If the dormer is defined on the floor above

and the room below has a flat ceiling, then
defining a room, which is automatically
Open Below, causes a hole to be produced in
the ceiling under the dormer.
399
buttons or via the Default Settings dialog.

See Dormer Defaults on page 432.
Editing Dormers
Auto dormers are like other objects in Chief
Architect. They can be selected and edited in
a variety of ways. See Editing Auto
Dormers on page 407.
Dormer Defaults
The initial width, height, roof style and other
parameters for Auto Dormers are set in the
Dormer Defaults dialog, accessed by
double clicking either of the Auto Dormer
Roof Returns
A roof return is a small decorative roof plane
that connects to the low side of a gable roof
overhang and extends below the upper
triangular portion of the gable wall. The
pictures below show examples of the three
styles of roof returns that can be produced
automatically.
400
The first two are called Gable and Hip

returns, since the return itself ends in a gable
or a hip. The third is called a Full return
because it extends under the entire gable,
connecting both sides.
Gable Return
Full Return
Hip Return
It is not difficult to manually draw roof

returns using small roof planes, but it is
quicker to produce them automatically.
Specification dialog only if roofs are

automatically generated. See Roof Tab on
page 263.
The Roof tab of the Wall Specification

dialog contains the settings that generate auto
roof returns on gable walls. A gable wall is
specified on the Roof tab of the Wall
These roof return settings are also found in

the Dormer Specification dialog for
gable roof dormers and function similarly.
See General Tab on page 430.
Following is a portion of a hip roof shown in

floor plan view:
1
2
3
4
5
Roofs
Roof planes are drawn on the Roof Planes

layer by default. In addition, you can also
choose to display roof baseline polylines,
frieze molding, gutters, gable lines, the
overhang area, roof openings, and valley
truss bases. See Layer Display Options
Dialog on page 218.
401
1 The eave is represented by a dashed

line.
2 The distance from the outer main layer
of the wall to the end of the eave is the

overhang. It is defined in the Build Roof
dialog.
3 The baseline of the roof plane is
normally located over the outer main

layer of the wall. Typically the line is green.
When you automatically generate roofs, the
program constructs the baselines.
The baseline is defined as the line across the
top of the rafters, directly above a walls
outside main layer. It can be used as pivot for
the roof plane as you alter the pitch.
4 This is the upslope mark, which
displays with the baseline and marks

the up direction for this roof plane. The
angle of the slope is controlled by the pitch
defined in the Build Roof dialog.
5 Roof planes are drawn on the Roof
Planes layer in the Layer Display

Options dialog. See Layer Display
If the Roof Planes layer is turned off and
Auto Rebuld Roofs feature is turned on,
changes made to the plan that cause the roof
to rebuild will not automatically turn on the
display of the roof planes. See Auto Rebuild
Roofs on page 386.
Editing Roof Planes

When the roof plan is correct, roof
planes can be locked to prevent accidental changes. The Build Roof dialog has a
Lock Roof Planes check box to prevent accidental rebuilding. You can also protect roof
planes from accidental changes by locking
the Roof Planes layer in all layer sets. See
Layer Display Options Dialog on page 218.
A selected roof plane can be edited in 2D and

3D using edit handles, edit toolbar buttons,
and the Roof Plane Specification dialog.
In the Roof Plane Specification dialog,
the 3D orientation of a roof plane is defined
by three height values and one pitch value.
The Ridge/Top, Baseline, and Fascia Top
402
heights can be specified or locked and used

as a pivot point. Pitch determines the slope
of the roof plane. See Roof Plane
The shape of a roof plane can be edited with
the mouse in the same way that a CAD
polyline is edited. See Editing ClosedPolyline Based Objects on page 107.
Adding a Step to an Edge

You can make a step, or jog, in the edge of a
roof plane by selecting it, clicking the Break
Line
edit button and then clicking on the
roof edge. See Break Line on page 130.
Editing Roof Planes
When Bumping/Pushing
is enabled and
CAD Stops Move is checked in the Roof
Plane Specification dialog, a roof plane
will bump against another roof plane, CAD
or CAD based object as it is moved. Roof
planes cannot push these objects, however.
See Bumping/Pushing on page 124.
Joining Roof Planes
Aligning Roof Edges

After moving a corner edit handle, it may be
difficult to make an edge parallel to an eave
or a wall. Use the Make Parallel/
Perpendicular
edit button to align a roof
plane edge with a wall, another roof plane
edge, or another object with a straight edge.
See Using Make Parallel/ Perpendicular on
page 126.

Video: Drawing and Connecting Roof
Planes
Two roof planes can be joined at
adjacent edges in both 2D and 3D
using the Join Roof Planes edit button. To
use this tool, you must first identify which
edges of the roof planes can extend to meet at
a ridge, hip, or valley. The program will try
to join the two planes along the line where
they intersect whenever possible.
To use Join Roof Planes
Sometimes, what appears to be a single,

straight roof plane edge may actually be
broken into two or more edges, which can
affect your ability to align the edge properly.
A single edge will have three edit handles; if
more than three display, more than one edge
is present. An extra handle can be removed
removed manually by dragging it into an
adjacent handle. You can also use Build>
Roof> Fix Roofs
page 386.
. See Fix Roofs on
1.
Select a roof plane on the edge to be

joined to another plane.
2.
Click the Join Roof Planes

ton or press the 2 key.
3.
Click on a second roof plane on the edge

that should join to the selected edge of
the first plane.
edit but-
If the roof planes are not close enough, or

their shape is not correct, you may need to
align their edges, remove extra edges, or
move them closer.
When roof planes adjust, the program joins
the planes at the proper location and the
adjacent edges extend or contract to remain
connected. If the joining of the two will
403
Roofs
If opposite sides of a roof section are

parallel, selecting one edge automatically gives you a dimension line. If you do not
see that dimension line, the sides are not parallel.
Change Roof Pitch

or Height Dialog
completely eliminate or reverse an adjacent

edge, the connection cannot be made.
Move to be Coplanar
1
The Move to be Coplanar edit button

allows you to move the selected roof
plane to be coplanar (in the same plane) with
the next selected roof plane. You can use this
tool in both 2D and 3D views. The results
can be easily seen in a cross section view.
The two roof planes must have parallel
baselines for this to work.
3
4
Raising/Lowering
Roof Planes
Roof planes can be raised or lowered in the
Roof Plane Specification dialog. Begin
by locking the Pitch, then change the value
of the Baseline Height. See General Tab
on page 424.
You can also raise or lower roof plane
heights in the Transform/Replicate
Object dialog. See Transform/Replicate
This warning dialog displays when you

attempt to snap the corner or an edge of a
roof plane near the edge of another roof
plane that does not match vertically. The
Change Roof Pitch or Height dialog
gives you the option to move the roof plane
vertically, or pivot it about a point and
change the pitch.
In this case, the current roof plane would
have to raise its pitch or height in order to
meet the second roof plane at the corner that
you moved.
1 The amount of vertical displacement

between the two roof planes.
Pivot Roof Plane About - Select

which part of the roof plane to use as
pivot point when pitch is adjusted to meet the
other roof plane.
3 Raise/lower (no pivot) - Select this
option to maintain the current pitch and

raise or lower the entire plane to connect the
roofs. This may affect plate heights of the
walls below.
404
4 To prevent this dialog from displaying,
check Dont show again during this

session. The dialog does not display again
until you have terminated and restarted the
program.
5 Click Yes to make the selected change
so the roofs meet. The roof plane either

changes pitch or is raised or lowered.
6 Click NO to leave the roof plane
unchanged. The roof planes will not

meet vertically. You should usually choose
No unless you have a specific reason to
adjust the roof plane this way.
Changing the
Baseline Angle
A roof plane baseline can be selected like
any line and edited. If the baseline coincides
with a roof edge then select that roof edge
and press the Tab key to select the baseline.
The status bar tells you when the roof plane
baseline is selected.
If the roof plane baseline is moved in

floor plan view, its height does not
change. This means that moving a roof plane
baseline toward the ridge lowers the roof
plane.
The baseline angle can be set in the Roof
Plane Specification dialog. See Roof
Plane Specification Dialog on page 424.
Deleting Roof Planes

Delete the entire roof quickly by clicking the
Delete Roof Planes
tool.
You can also select any roof plane or group

of roof planes, then press the Delete key or
click the Delete
from the plan.
edit button to delete it
The Delete Objects dialog allows

you to delete all roof planes at once.
See Delete Objects Dialog on page 141.

Video: Drawing and Connecting Roof
Planes
Curved roof planes can be joined with
flat roof planes and other curved roof
planes using the Join Roof Planes edit
button.
all four planes and curve them by the same

amount. Since the distance from the eave to
the ridge and the pitch is the same for all
planes, the newly curved planes still join to
each other in 3D.
Roofs
Often it is not necessary to join curved roof

planes if the underlying normal planes were
already joined. A simple four wall
rectangular house is a good example. On a
default hip roof, all flat roof planes are
correctly joined at hip ridges. Group select
405
To join curved and flat roof planes
If one of the planes is curved differently from

the others or is flat, it no longer joins with the
other planes in 3D, although it may display
to in floor plan view. This can be easily seen
if one of the four roof planes remains flat.
1.
Select one of the roof plane edges to be

joined.
2.
Click the Join Roof Planes

edit button and click the joining edge of an adjacent roof plane. The roof plane edges
join into a curve, showing where the
curved and flat roof planes must meet.
This is called the curved join edge for each

roof plane. Notice that a flat roof plane can
406
have a curved join edge if it is joined to a

curved roof plane.
Curved Join Edges

A roof plane with one or more curved join
edges is less editable than one without them.
The curved edges and corners adjacent to
them can be selected, but not moved. If you
move an edge adjacent to a curved join edge,
the curved join edge extends or contracts
appropriately to maintain the corner.
2.
Click Join Roof Planes
3.
Click anywhere in the plan, away from

any roof plane. The curved edge returns
to straight, and is selectable and editable.
Before curving roof planes or joining the

edges of any curved plane, make sure all flat
roof planes are joined as well as possible.
After this you can curve the roof planes and
then make any curved join edges.
The Join Roof Planes
tool can be used
to update curved join edges that have been
changed in some way.
To remove a curved join edge
1.
Select the curved join edge.

Auto Dormers are a collection of objects that
behave as one. When a dormer is selected, it
displays edit handles you can use to resize
and relocate it.
Move handle displays over the front wall and

allows you to relocate the dormer. Two resize
handles display on the side walls and allow
you to change the width of the dormer.
Roofs
If you click the Explode Dormer

edit
button, the dormers individual components
can be edited.
Using the Mouse

When selected in floor plan view, an auto
dormer displays three edit handles. The
Move
Resize
407
There are some things to keep in mind when

editing auto dormers and auto floating
dormers using the mouse.
Dormers move at 90 degree angles unless

the Ctrl key is pressed before moving
them.
The dormer must be contained within one

underlying roof plane.
Auto dormers cannot be moved beyond

the required knee wall.
its width stays fixed. If a change to the

dormer makes its front wall too short to hold
the window, the window reverts to auto
width.
Using the
Auto dormers can be selected, opened for
specification, and edited. See Dormer
Exploding Dormers
Editing the Window

Dormer windows can be selected, edited,
deleted and replaced just as other windows
can. See Editing Windows on page 336.
You can place several windows in the front
wall.
Click the Explode Auto Dormer edit

button to explode the auto dormer into
its component parts. The dormer walls, roof
planes, window, and hole in the roof/ceiling
can be edited individually.
Unless the dormer's window has been edited

or changed in the Window Specification
dialog, when the dormer width is changed, its
width changes automatically to fill the front
dormer wall. If the window has been edited,
The program treats roof planes over an

exploded anto dormer as though they were
manually drawn, allowing you to protect
them from being rebuilt in the Build Roof
dialog. See Build Tab on page 417.
Locating Roof Plane Intersections

When roof planes of differing slopes
meet,they create a ridge, hip, or valley. While
the Join Roof Planes
edit button is
normally used to move edges to make the
planes meet, these edges can also be moved
by placing snap points where the ridge, hip
or valley should be. Once you know where
the planes will meet, you can drag edges or
corners to those points, joining the roof
planes.
408
To find a roof plane intersection

1.
Select the roof plane you would like to

place meeting points on.
2.
Click the edge of another roof plane to

project this edge forward in space and
place an X where it would meet the
selected roof plane.
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the ridge edge

and both fascia edges. You should have
three points located on the larger roof
plane, the tie-in points.
Ceiling Planes
roof plane
intersections
marked with
an X
Ceiling Planes
Ceiling planes are similar to roof planes.
They are drawn the same way and edited
using the same tools. They are useful for
creating custom sloped ceilings.
To draw a ceiling plane
Open the Build Roof dialog and reset
the Pitch using a shallower angle. A
newly drawn ceiling plane takes its initial pitch from this setting.
Ceiling planes
2.
Select Build> Roof> Ceiling Plane
3.
Click and drag along the baseline.
4.
Click upslope to place the ceiling plane.
Cross Section showing ceiling planes.
There are a few things to remember when

drawing ceiling planes.
The baseline of a ceiling plane should be

drawn along and directly on top of the
409
Roofs
1.
outer surface of the wall main layer. This

allows the ceiling plane to extend over
and be supported by the wall.
Ceiling planes can be curved, just like

roof planes. See Curved Roof Planes
on page 394.
The sloping edge at the side of a ceiling

plane should butt to the inside of the wall.
Select a ceiling plane and click the Open
Ceiling planes act independent of the roof

planes above.
Normally the pitch of a ceiling plane

should be lower than the pitch of the corresponding roof plane.
Ceiling planes can be joined together

using the Join Roof Planes
ton.
edit but-
Ceiling planes should be created over

rooms that have Ceiling Over this Room
unchecked in the Room Specification
dialog. If this is unchecked, ceiling
planes must be present in order to build
roof trusses in this area.
Object
edit button to access the
Ceiling Plane Specification dialog.
See Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog

on page 428.
Displaying Ceiling Planes

Ceiling planes have their own layer in the
Layer Display Options dialog. The
display settings can be set here by layer. The
ceiling planes layer can also be locked to
prevent editing. See Displaying Objects on
page 221.
Deleting Ceiling Planes

Select Build> Roof> Delete Ceiling Planes
to delete all ceiling planes in the current plan.
Gable/Roof Line
The Gable/Roof Line tool has a
variety of uses. Its primary purpose is
to mark the location of a partial gable
condition along a wall. It can also be used to
ignore alcoves when automatically
generating roofs.
Creating Gable Walls

and Gable Dormers
If an entire wall supports a gable end, the
wall should be defined as a Full Gable wall
on the Roof tab of the Wall Specification
dialog. If only a portion of the wall is a gable,
then the Gable/Roof Line
410
tool can be
used to draw a line that defines the width of

the gable.
Note: You can break a wall and define only
part of it as gable. This produces similar
results to using the Gable/Roof Line tool. If
this method is used, once the roof is correct
and locked, the wall should be restored as
one continuous wall. Chief Architect functions
better if long walls are single units instead of
broken into multiple components.
The Gable/Roof Line

tool can also be
used to place a small gable within a roof
plane, as in the case of a dormer. This
process can be automated using the Gable
Gable/Roof Line
Over Door/Window
edit button. See
Gable Over Door/Window on page 415.
Gable lines should be outside the wall,
within the first 18" (450 mm). If the gable
line is placed on the wall it does not work.
Position a gable line of the correct length to
represent the portion of wall that supports a
gable roof. The length of the gable line
determines the gable width at the wall main
layer, not at the overhang. At the roof edge, a
gable roof is wider than the gable line by
twice the overhang distance.
Since the gable line is a CAD line, it can be
selected and modified using the Line
Specification dialog. See Line
To get the right length, draw gable

lines over existing exterior walls,
snapping ends to the wall main
layer. It can then be moved so that
the gables on each side match.
partial gable wall

gable dormers
Gable/roof lines drawn to create

gable wall and two small gables
Roofs
Before, with default roof generation
411
Result, after automatic roof generation

Gable/roof lines drawn to extend roof planes
Covering Alcoves
A gable line can also be used to maintain a
roof plane baseline where there is no wall
below. For example, a house may have a
large alcove and you want the roof plane to
extend across the alcove, rather than wrap
into it. A gable line drawn across the alcove
causes roof planes to span across the alcove
when roofs are automatically generated. The
program models a hip in that area. When
extending roof planes across alcoves, the
gable/roof line must be drawn inline with the
walls main layer.
412
Gable/Roof Line
Multiple Copy
The Multiple Copy
and Transform/
Replicate Object
edit buttons allow you
to make multiple copies of a selected gable
line at defined increments, as shown in the
following illustration. The leftmost gable
line was created, then three copies were
made at 8 foot increments.

original
copies
With roof lines added
The Gable/Roof Line

tool can also be
used to create roof lines where there are no
walls or railings. A roof line is created the
same as a gable line, but has a different name
because of its usage. A roof line drawn
across space generates a hip roof. If several
roof lines are combined, they must be
attached to each other, forming a non-closed
polyline in order to automatically produce
one set of roof plane baselines. Both free
ends of the roof line or polyline must meet a
wall at the main layer to produce roof planes.
Roofs
Creating Roof Lines
413
Skylights
A skylight can be created by selecting
Build> Roof> Skylight and drawing a
rectangular polyline within a single roof
plane. This single operation places a flat
panel skylight into a roof hole, produces a
hole in the flat ceiling platform below, and
automatically generates the skylight shaft
between these two holes.
Note: If Ceiling Over This Room is
unchecked in the Room Specification
dialog and a sloping ceiling plane is present
under the roof plane, then a second hole in
this ceiling plane is automatically produced.
This hole is visible, and may be located
directly under the roof hole. It can be moved
and edited separately.
Editing Skylights
Select the skylight and click the Open
edit button to open the Roof
Hole/Skylight Specification dialog. See
Object

on page 432.
The polyline that defines the shape of the
skylight can be moved and reshaped like a
standard polyline, but it must remain
contained by one roof plane. If you clear the
Skylight check box in the Roof Hole/
Skylight Specification dialog, the curb
and glass for the skylight is removed but the
opening remains.
By default, the flat ceiling hole does not
display separately, but it can be edited
separately, and even deleted from the roof
plane entirely. See Roof Hole/Skylight
Specification Dialog on page 432. If the
roof plane is deleted, any holes it contains
are also deleted.
The system maintains the opening as a closed
polyline. The Break Line
edit button
forms a joint in an edge of the roof opening
just as it would in a roof plane edge, but does
not sever the edges at the joint.
414
Gutters
Gutters
Gutters can be added to roof planes. They are
generated whenever Build Fascia, Gutters,
Frieze is checked in the Build Roof dialog.
You can select the profile used for gutters on
the Gutter tab of the Build Roof dialog. See
Gutter Tab on page 421. Open polylines
should be used for gutter profiles. The start
of the profile should be where the gutter
connects to the roof.
Gutters go on the Roofs, Gutters layer that

is locked and not visible in plan view by
default. See Layer Display Options Dialog
on page 218.
The material used for gutters can be set on

the Material tab of the Build Roof dialog.
See Materials Tab on page 422.
The Gable Over Door/Window

edit
button also places a gable over a group of
selected windows and doors, provided they
are all in the same wall and contain no bay or
bow windows. For more information on
415
Roofs
Click the Gable Over Door/Window

edit button to add a gable line over one
or more selected windows or doors the next
time automatic roof planes are built. The
Gable/Roof line displays in floor plan view,
about 12 inches (300 mm) from the wall and
extending a foot to either side of the opening.
When automatic roofs are built, a small gable
dormer is generated over the window or
door. Once produced, the gable line can be
moved, stretched, and edited.
building roofs over Bay, Bow, and Box

windows, see Bay, Box, Bow Windows &
Roofs on page 341.
To remove the gable line, select the window

or door and click the Delete Gable Over
A gable line produces a gable only in an area

where an eave would otherwise appear. Do
not add this gable line to a wall already
designated as a Gable Wall on the Roof tab
of the Wall Specification dialog. If a
gable is already present, some roof planes
may fail to produce properly when you
generate the roof automatically. If this is the
case, select the gable line and delete it.
line and click the Delete
Opening
edit button, or select the gable

edit button.
If you move or resize the window, the gable

line does not update automatically. You can
draw a new gable line using the Gable Over
Door/Window
edit button. This
automatically deletes the old gable line if it is
still near the window. If the window has been
relocated significantly, the old gable line
must be selected and deleted manually.

Floor and ceiling platforms do not move or
resize immediately when walls are moved or
room floor and ceiling heights are changed.
When you make a change to your plan that
requires the floors and ceilings to be rebuilt,
the system detects it. The next time you
generate a 3D or section/elevation view,
floors and ceilings are rebuilt.
If you do not want the program to rebuild

floors and ceilings automatically, clear the
Auto Rebuild Floors & Ceilings check box
on the Options tab of the 3D Settings
dialog. This may speed up plan view editing
for very large plans. When you want to
rebuild floor and ceiling platforms, you can
click the Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
button or press the F12 key.
Build Roof Dialog

To open the Build Roof dialog, select
Build> Roof> Build Roof.
You can also double-click the Roof Tools
button or the Roof Plane
416
button.
Use the Build Roof dialog to automatically

produce roof planes and roof plane baselines.
It also contains initial settings for manually
drawn roof planes.
Build Roof Dialog
Build Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
13
12
14
15
16
8
17
18
19
Check this to construct the floor and

ceiling platforms of your model. It is
independent of Build Roof Planes.
2 Build Roof Planes - Check this to build

a new roof structure over the entire
model. Unless you specify otherwise, the
program discards the existing roof planes
and produces new ones.
3 Make Roof Baseline Polylines - Check
this to delete any existing roof and to

create roof plane baselines (based on the
exterior wall layout and roof information
defined in those walls). Roof baselines can
then be edited like CAD polylines to
customize the roof plan. See Roof Baseline
4 Use Existing Roof Baselines - Check
this to produce a roof plan based on

your edited roof plane baselines instead of
the exterior wall layout. See Roof Baseline

5 Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze - Check
this to regenerate fascia, gutters, and

frieze boards. This option also controls the
generation of automatic roof returns. If you
have edited roof planes, you may need to
select this option to clean up them up. This
function is automatically invoked after you
manually edit roof planes or draw new roof
planes if Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings is checked on the Options tab of the 3D
Settings dialog.
Gutters, fascia, and frieze boards display in
3D views and the material list. If you do not
want gutters built, open the Build Roof
dialog, select Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze
and then uncheck Gutters on the Options
tab. The fascia and frieze is rebuilt, but not
the gutters. Any existing gutters are deleted.
417
Roofs
1 Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings -
To delete a gutter for a specific roof plane,

select the roof plane. Click the Open Object
edit button to display the Roof Plane
Specification dialog. Clear Gutters and
click OK.
The next time Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze
is selected, the gutter does not display. If you
delete a roof plane, the gutter remains in 3D
views until you rebuild fascia and gutters.
6 Allow Low Roof Planes - This should
nearly always be checked. If

unchecked, the roof plan underside (soffitt)
may not generate correctly. The only case
where you may need to uncheck it is the rare
circumstance when an upper floor overhangs
roof planes below.
7 Pitch - Enter a value to describe the
pitch in a ratio over 12. This affects all

newly built roof planes. It does not update
existing roof planes. For a conversion to
degrees, see Roof Pitches in Degrees on
page 433.
8 Roof Overhang - The overhang is

measured from the exterior main layer
wall surface horizontally to the end of the top
of the rafter. It does not include frieze
thickness, gutters, sheathing or siding.
Normal is the overhang at the eaves. This is
always the overhang for a roof plane having
the default Pitch specified above. If the pitch
for a particular roof plane is set differently in
an exterior wall, its overhang may try to
maintain its fascia at the same height.
Overhang can be greater for a shallower
pitch, lesser for a greater pitch.
Gable is the overhang dimension at gable
ends or rake walls.
418
These values function as the default

Overhang for all automatically generated
roof planes. You can override the default
overhang for a specific roof plane in the
9 Auto Rebuild Roofs - If you check this
option, the program automatically

rebuilds the roof if you make a change that
affects the generation of roofs.
10 Lock Roof Planes to lock the existing
roof plan. This prevents accidental

selection Build Roof Planes, resulting in the
loss of manual editing.
When Lock Roof Planes is selected, roofs
cannot be automatically generated. You must
clear Lock Roof Planes before you can
select Build Roof Planes.
Checking Lock Roof Planes automatically
locks the roof planes layer in the Layer
11 Check Retain Manually Drawn Roof
Planes and/or Retain Edited Roof

Planes to retain manually drawn and/or
edited roof planes, including roof planes over
exploded dormers, when the roof planes are
automatically generated. They are not
deleted, but automatic roof planes may be
superimposed on the same area. Select the
redundant roof planes and delete them.
Once a roof is correct, do not build roof
planes again. From that point forward,
only Build Walls/Floors/Ceilings, and perhaps Fascia, Gutters, Frieze to keep the
plan updated.
12 Ignore Top Floor - Check this to
ignore the top floor when roofs are

automatically generated. Roofs are generated
Build Roof Dialog
13 Check Trusses to have the roof raised
so that the bottom edge of the truss top

chord (rafter) is flush with the top of the
wall. You must Build Roof Planes after
checking Trusses for this change to take
effect.
Incorrect--Trusses
is not checked.
Correct--Trusses
is checked.
When Trusses is checked, the size of the roof

rafter framing is the Top Chord size from
the Trusses tab in the Framing dialog.
When Trusses is cleared, the size of the roof
framing is the Rafter size from the Roof tab
the Framing dialog. If trusses are laid out
without selecting the Trusses box, the roof
uses the rafter size instead. The Incorrect
diagram shows this problem.
14 Raise Off Plate - Enter a positive value
in this field to produce the trusses with

an energy heel to allow for more insulation.
The dimension is measured from the top
plate up the outside main layer of the wall to
the bottom side of the top chord.
Note: If trusses is not checked, and Raise Off

Plate is set to zero, the program generates a
birdsmouth cut. To eliminate the birdsmouth
cut, you must set Raise Off Plate to at least 1/
16 (1 mm).
15 Same Roof Height at External Walls -
When you change the pitch of a roof, it

pivots on the baseline at the outer surface of
the wall. This means that if you have a plan
with roof pitches that vary, you must choose
between having the same roof height over the
top plate or having the same overhang all
around.
Check Same Roof Height at External
Walls to keep the walls the same height and
change the amount of overhang. It ignores
any overhang values you entered on the Roof
tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
Uncheck this option to allow some roof
planes to raise off the plate. All overahngs
are then the same unless they are set to the
value entered in the Roof Tab of the Wall
16 Same Height Eaves - The eave edges
of an independent roof plane meet

gables at both ends, or they are part of a set
of adjacent roof planes with the same pitch
that meet gables at both ends. In order to
have the correct overhang and the correct
height over the plate, the vertical distance
between the eave edge and the top plate can
vary for these planes.
Check Same height Eaves to keep this
vertical distance the same for all roof planes,
independent or not. This only affects
independent roof planes. Other planes will
all have the same eave to plate top vertical
distance.
419
Roofs
as if the floor were attic having no permanent

walls. This is most useful in producing a roof
for a house that has only dormers for its top
floor windows, such as a cape style house.
17 Segment Angle at Curved Wall -
Enter the maximum angle for a roof

segement that covers a curved wall. This
value is only used when roofs are
automatically generated. A smaller angle
produces more roof planes.
Following is an example showing this

difference. If Min Alcove is 36", a 36" wide
alcove requires a change in the roof line.
Each wall of the alcove has an eave. On the
right, the alcove is less than the 36"
minimum, so the roof passes right over it.
18 Min. Alcove - Specify the minimum
width of an alcove (depression into an

otherwise straight exterior wall). Any alcove
less than the specified width is treated as
though the exterior wall continues straight
across. Alcoves that measure wider than this
value are not roofed over; they cause a
change in roof planes.
19 Click the Num Style button to change
the way numbers display in the dialog.

Changes made here do not affect the plan.
Options Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Show all ridges - Select the check box
to display a line along all ridges and

valleys in elevations and vector 3D views.
This includes the hip ridges between roof
420
planes forming the conical roof above a

curved wall.
2 Boxed eaves - Select the check box if
you want to create horizontal soffits at
Build Roof Dialog
the eaves. You can also change this for an

individual roof plane in the Roof Plane
3 Square Cut or Plumb Cut - Select
either option to determine how the

rafter tails are cut. This change displays only
after you have rebuilt roofs. Individual roof
planes can have this defined in their own
4 Fascia Width (at gable or rake walls),
Eave Fascia Width - Enter values to

define the width of the material that displays
in 3D views. This value does not go to the
Material List.
5 This section defines whether or not
these items are calculated for the

material list. Selecting the check box does
not control the display in 3D except for Gutters.
Gutter Tab
1
2
1 Click the Select button to open the
Library Browser to the Moldings and

Profiles library and select a gutter profile.
or bottom of the gutter profile. See

Click Default to use the default gutter

profile.
Roofs
2 Set the Height, Width, and Offset
from the top of the fascia for the gutter.
Select From Top or From Bottom to specify

whether the Offset is measured from the top
421
Frieze Tab
1
2
3
1 Click the drop-down list to select from

the moldings used in the current plan.
2 Click the Add New button to select a
new molding profile from the Library

Browser.
Click the Select button to replace the current
molding with another molding from the
Library Browser.
Click the Delete button to remove the curent
molding.
3 The current molding profile displays
here. Set the Height, Width, and

Offset from the top of the fascia for the
frieze molding.
Select From Top or From Bottom to specify

whether the Offset is measured from the top
or bottom of the frieze profile. See
Moldings Tab on page 545
Materials Tab

Like walls, each line of a roof baseline
polyline contains roof directives that affect
automatic roof generation.
422
Select any edge of a roof baseline polyline

edit button open
the Roof Baseline Specification dialog.
Roof Baseline Tab
3
1
2
Wall, High Shed/Gable Wall, Knee

Wall, and Extend Slope Downward are the
same as the first four items in the Roof tab of
Check Display One Floor Up/Down for

Editing to display the selected roof baseline
on an adjacent floor. An upper or lower floor
must be present to enable this option.
2 Against Wall - Check this if the roof

plane rising from this baseline butts
against an exterior wall. This is similar to
checking High Shed/Gable Wall.

The Pitch, 2nd Pitch and Starts at entries are

the same those in the Wall Specification
page 387.
For information about the Polyline tab, see

Polyline Tab on page 863.
3 Pitch - Change the pitch for the

selected roof plane baseline. This
overrides the default pitch set in the Build
Roof dialog. For a conversion to degrees,
see Roof Pitches in Degrees on page 433.
For information about the Selected Line tab,

see Selected Line Tab on page 864.
4 Baseline height holds the height of the
baseline. This is the top of rafter height

where it crosses the baseline. Changing the
pitch or secon dpitch affects the line that was
selected in the baseline. Changing the height
affects all lines in the baseline polyline.
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

423
Roofs
1 The first four checkboxes, Full Gable

Video: Roofs - Automatic Overhangs
for Different Pitch Roof Planes
Select one or more roof planes and click the

Open Object
General Tab
5
3
6
1 Locking any one of the first three
values defines that value as the pivot

point for the plane. Each of these dimensions
is measured from the first floor default
elevation of 0' - 0".
424
If you lock the pitch and change one of the

other values, the roof plane moves vertically,
keeping the same slope. It does not pivot.
For a conversion to degrees, see Roof
Pitches in Degrees on page 433.
height, or 3D orientation of a roof

plane: Ridge/Top, Baseline, Fascia Top and
Pitch. These values are interrelated. When
one value changes, others change as well,
unless locked.
Changing these values does not affect the 2D
representation of the roof plane.
Define a new value for the Ridge/Top of the
selected roof plane.
Define a new Baseline height.
Define a new height for the Fascia Top.
Change the Pitch for the selected roof plane.
This overrides the default pitch set in the
Build Roof dialog.
Check Pitch in Degrees to display the pitch
value in degrees. Values between -80 and 80
degrees are acceptable.
3 Set the baseline angle. A positive value
makes the baseline tilt upward from its

start point. A negative value causes it to tilt
downward. The wall top under this baseline
tilts with it.
The baseline height is specified at the start or

end of the baseline using the Start and End
radio buttons. In floor plan view, the baseline
direction is clockwise around the house.
4 Rafter Depth - Specify the rafter depth
for the selected roof plane. The default

rafter depth for the roof is set in the
Framing dialog. To set the rafter depth to
the default, type a d in this field.
Birdsmouth Depth - The plumb or vertical

depth of the birdsmouth cut is shown for
reference; it cannot be edited directly. To
change it, move the roof plane up or down or
change the pitch. For example, if you lock
the pitch and raise the roof plane by one inch,
you decrease the birdsmouth depth by one
inch.
The birdsmouth width is determined by the
width of the top plate
Birdsmouth is zero if this roof plane was
automatically gernated and the Trusses (No
Birdsmouth) check box was checked in the
Build Roof dialog.
The Vertical Rafter Depth is defined by
measuring a plumb line across the rafter. The
degree of pitch affects this value. The greater
the pitch, the greater the vertical rafter depth.
Top of Plate is shown for reference. It is
defined by the ceiling height for the room.
Overhang from Baseline is shown for
reference and cannot be edited here.
425
Roofs
2 There are four values that define the
5 Check Curved Roof to curve the

selected roof plane(s).
A flat roof plane oriented horizontally has an

angle of zero at both the ridge and the eave.
It also has a radius of zero. You can enter the
Angle at eave, the Angle at ridge, or the
Radius to roof surface and press the Tab
key to update the other values. All three
values are interrelated and dynamic.

Changing one changes the others. In order to
maintain the underlying pitch (the chord of
the curved roof), the other values must
compensate.

Options Tab
1
2
4
5
6
1 Specify the rafter tails to be Square
Cut or Plumb Cut here. This overrides

the setting on the Options tab of the Build
Roof dialog.
2 Boxed Eave - Specify boxed or sloping
eaves. This overrides the setting on the

Options tab of the Build Roof dialog.
426
Higher Eaves Boxed - If the selected roof

plane contains more than one eave, check
this box to box the higher eaves as well. You
can specify the Length of the boxed eaves or
check Default to Overhang to extend the
boxed eave from the edge of the roof to the
exterior main layer of the wall, covering the
overhang area.
rebuild roofs from the Build Roof dialog,

check Retain Edited Roof Planes to prevent
these marked planes from being deleted.
Checking Mark as Edited also marks a roof
plane, even if it has not been edited. Edited
planes can also be unmarked.
Polyline Tab
With Boxed Eave checked

Selected Line Tab

Line Style Tab

With Higher Eaves Boxed checked
3 Display this Plane One Floor Up/
Down - Check one of these to change

the floor where this roof plane displays in
floor plan view.
4 Gable Fascia - The width of a fascia on
a gable end. The default is 7 1/2. If

you want to change this value, remove the
checkmark from Default. To return to
default, replace the checkmark.

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
Eave Fascia Width - The width of fascia on

the eaves. The default is 7 1/2. If you want
to change this value, remove the checkmark
from Default. To return to default, replace
the checkmark.
5 Gutter - Uncheck this to remove
Roofs
gutters from the selected roof plane.
6 Mark as Edited - When you select a
roof plane and move or reshape it, the

system marks it as edited. When you
427
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog

Select a ceiling plane and click the Open
Object
edit button to open the Ceiling
Plane Specification dialog.
General Tab
The Ceiling Plane Specification dialog

is similar to the Roof Plane
1 There are four values that define the
height, or 3D orientation of a ceiling

plane: Bottom at Ridge, Inside Bottom,
Outside Bottom and Pitch. These values are
interrelated. Changing one changes the
others. Select one radio button to the right to
lock that value. Each of these dimensions is
measured from the first floor elevation of 0' 0". Changing these values does not affect the
2D representation of the ceiling plane.
428
Bottom at ridge - Set the highest point on

the underside of the ceiling plane.
Inside Bottom - Set the height of the ceiling
plane underside at the inside surface of the
wall main layer. If the bottom of the plane
does not rest on a wall, this is the underside
height at the lowest point on the ceiling
plane.
Outside Bottom - This is available only if
the ceiling plane was drawn over a wall. This
value is of the height the ceiling rafter lower
edge would have at the outer main layer of
the wall if it were not clipped. This value
plus Clip End should be within 1/16" of the

Top of Plate value.
Pitch - Change the pitch for the selected
ceiling plane. For a conversion to degrees,
see Roof Pitches in Degrees on page 433.
Pitch in degrees - Select the check box to
display the pitch value in degrees.
2 Check Curved Roof to curve the

selected ceiling plane(s).
A flat ceiling plane oriented horizontally has

an angle of zero at both the ridge and the
eave. It also has a radius of zero. You can
enter the Angle at eave, the Angle at ridge,
or the Radius to roof surface and press the
Tab key to update the other values. All three
values are interrelated and dynamic.
Changing one changes the others.
3 Rafter Depth - Specify the rafter depth

for the selected ceiling plane.
Vertical Rafter Depth - This is defined by

measuring a plumb line across the rafter. The
degree of pitch affects this value; the greater
the pitch, the greater the vertical rafter depth.
Top of Plate - This is shown for reference. It
is defined by the ceiling height for the room.
Overhang from inside bottom - This is
available only when the ceiling plane was
created over a wall. It is the horizontal
distance from the baseline to the inside main

layer surface. Typically this is the thickness
of the main wall layer.
Clip End - This shows the amount the
ceiling rafter must be clipped at its lower end
to rest on the wall top plate. It is available
only for ceiling planes drawn over a wall.
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab

Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab

Select a dormer and click the Open Object
Roofs
edit button to open the Dormer
429
General Tab
1
2
7
9
10
11
1 Specify the Roof Type above this
dormer. You can choose from Hip,
Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard, Barrel,

Curved Eave, Hip Curved Eave or Eyebrow.
Hip, Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard, Barrel, Curved Eave,

Hip Curved Eave, and Eyebrow dormer roof types
2 Specify the Pitch of the dormer roof

planes.
430
Initially, the default dormer pitch matches the

roof pitch for all dormer roof types except
Shed, which has a default 3 in 12 pitch. For

Gambrel and Mansard types, this applies to
the lowest, or eave, roof planes.
Check Pitch in Degrees to display the pitch
in degrees.
3 The Second Pitch specifies the upper
roof of a Gambrel, Mansard, curved

eave, and hip curved eave. Specify the
Distance In from the lower roof plane eave
to where the upper roof plane starts.
4 Plumb or Square cut eaves can be
specified for dormer roof planes, as

well as Gutters and Boxed Eaves.
Check Include Frieze to include frieze
boards on this dormer.
5 Overhang, Fascia Depth for gable
fascia, Eave Fascia Depth and Rafter

Depth can also be set.
6 The Wall Type for the dormer walls is

set here.
7 The Height is measured from where the
top of the underlying roof plane meets

the dormer front wall exterior to where the
underside of the dormer rafter meets the
dormer side wall interior.
Dormer
height
flat. The top dormer window casing is

usually close to this height.
Unlike other dormer types, shed dormer
height is measured from the same bottom
point to where the underside of the dormer
rafter meets the dormer front wall interior.
8 Height to Reach Existing shows the
difference between the dormer height

where the inside of the wall meets the
underside of the roof and the ceiling of the
room behind it.
9 Width is measured between the outside

surfaces of the dormer side walls.
Form Room Inside Dormer is used only for

floating dormers and creates a flat ceiling in
the dormer. If you check this option, you
should define the dormer on the floor above
the room it is positioned over. If this room
has a flat ceiling, checking this option makes
a hole in the ceiling under the dormer. This
option should normally be left unchecked.
10 If Set Inside Window Trim Width is
checked, the inside casing width for

dormer windows defaults to the Inside
Window value entered below. Dormer
windows can appear too narrow on the
outside due to the space required for the
inside casing to clear the inside surfaces of
the side walls. This value sets the width for
the inside casing of the dormer window.
11 Roof Returns can be specified only for
Dashed line indicates

interior dormer side wall.
This top height is called the dormer ceiling

height, even if the ceiling in the dormer is not
Line Style Tab

431
Roofs
gable dormers. See Roof Returns on

page 400.
Dormer Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings...
to open
the Default Settings dialog. Select
Dormer and click the Edit... button to open
the Dormer Defaults dialog.
The settings in the Dormer Defaults

dialog determine the initial settings for
dormers and are the same as those in the
Dormer Specification dialog. See
Dormer Specification Dialog on page 429.
You can also double-click either of the Auto

Dormer
tools to open the Dormer
Defaults dialog.

General Tab
2 Frame Width and Frame Height -
Define the width and height of the

frame or curb of the skylight.
3 Angle for Inside Hole Rim - Defines
1
2
the shape of the skylight well where it

passes through the roof plane.
Square Sides - The framing for the skylight
is square to the pitch of the roof.
Plumb Sides - The framing for the skylight
is plumb.
Plumb/Square - The bottom edge is plumb,

the top edge square.
1 Skylight - Check this box to specify
this polyline as a skylight. If you

uncheck this box, the curb and glass for the
skylight are removed but the opening
remains.
4 Skylight Automatically Generates
Ceiling Hole- Select this option to

automatically generate and maintain the
skylight hole in a flat ceiling.
Note: Holes automatically produced in a

sloping custom ceiling plane by a new skylight must be manually maintained.
5 Manually Edit Ceiling Hole Polyline -
Select this option to edit the flat ceiling

hole polyline manually. Click OK to return to
432
Line Style Tab
floor plan view and edit the ceiling hole

polyline. When this option is selected, the
ceiling hole polyline and the skylight can be
selected separately in floor plan view.

Polyline Tab
Fill Style Tab


Selected Line Tab
Materials Tab


433
434
Stairs
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Stairs
Local building and fire authorities must
be consulted for specific stair construction codes and access requirements.

Video: Stairs
Staircases can be composed of one or more
straight or curved stair sections and landings
in any combination. Stair sections can be
edited individually or as a group. Starter
treads can be defined, stair sections can be
flared, treads can be wrapped, and curved
sections can be turned into winders.
Landings can be created automatically or
manually and their shape customized. You
can edit an existing landing, or create a
landing from a closed CAD polyline.
Landing heights can be defined or you can let
them automatically adjust as needed.
Stairwells can be created automatically or
manually and can be seen in all 3D views.
Stairs can be drawn, selected and edited in
3D views.
Chapter Contents
Stair Tools
Anatomy of a Staircase
Drawing Stairs
Creating Curved Stairs
Merging Stair Sections
Displaying Stairs
Editing Stairs
Winders
Stair Landings
Maintaining Tread Width
Flared Stairs and Curved Treads
Starter Treads
Wrapped Stairs
Other Special Railings & Stairs
Creating a Stairwell
Rooms Below Staircases
Staircase Specification Dialog
Stair Landing Specification Dialog
435
Stairs
Chapter 14:
Stair Tools
Select Build> Stairs to access the Stair
Tools.
same floor with a single click of the mouse.

Click the low side, within a few feet of where
the floor changes height.
Straight Stairs
To draw a straight staircase select
Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs, then
click and drag in floor plan or a 3D view.
Click Stairs
Select Build> Stairs> Click Stairs to
create stairs between levels on the
Curved Stairs
Select Build> Stairs> Curve to
Left or Curve to Right and click
once in floor plan view to place a curved
staircase. For more information about creating curved stairs, see Creating Curved
Stairs on page 438.
Anatomy of a Staircase
Stairs are often described in terms of rise and
run. Rise is typically between 6" and 8", and
the run between 10" and 12". In metric plans,
rise is 177 to 190 mm, and the run about 250
mm.
A good rule of thumb is that rise plus
run should equal 18" for a comfortable
stair step. Any rise over 7 1/2 is considered
steep regardless of the run.
Balusters - The vertical members that run

between the handrail and the treads.
Bracket - Decorative L-shaped supports on
the exposed side of stairs below each tread.
Landing - The platform connecting two stair
sections.
Newels - The end post of a stair railing
located at landings and the beginnings and
endings of new stair sections.
436
Rise - The height of a riser.

Riser - The vertical member of stairs
between the treads.
Run - The width of a stair tread.
Runner - The carpet that runs down the
center of the staircase.
Shoe - The bottom railing, placed on the
landing floor, that anchors the balusters at
landings.
Stringer - The inclined support member of a
staircase that supports the treads and risers.
Tread - The horizontal member of a stair the
foot is placed on.
Winder - A wedge-shaped stair tread used
where curved or angled stairways change
direction.
Drawing Stairs
play. See Reference Display on page
369.

Video: Creating a Staircase
Video: Drawing Stairs for a Deck
Stairs can be drawn in floor plan and 3D
views but not in cross section/elevation
views.
To draw straight stairs
1.
Select Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs

.
2.
Click and drag to create straight stairs.
If a stairwell room has been defined on

the floor above, the top of the stairs can
be dragged until it stops at the railing or
wall defining the stairwell.
Stairs can be drawn from the current floor

level downward, however, stairs drawn
downward are only aware of the floor height
where they begin. As a result, drawing stairs
downward may be useful only for drawing
stairs from a porch or deck down to the
ground. It is not recommended for drawing
stairs between floors.
To draw stairs going downward
1.
Stairs drawn on one floor in the UP direction

begin at that floor level and automatically adjust
rise and run to connect with the floor above.
There are a few things to keep in mind when

drawing stairs.
Before stairs are created, make sure that

the heights for both the lower and upper
floors are correctly defined.
Stairs are drawn going UP, so they should

be drawn from the lower of the two floors
they connect.
Stairs adjust their riser and tread dimensions to connect two floor heights if possible. The rise and run are calculated so
that the steps are consistent in size.
If you have the Reference Display

turned on, stairs snap to the reference dis-

.
2.
Hold down the Alt key or the right

mouse button.
3.
Click and drag to create straight stairs.
If the finished grade is known, you can also

create a room outside the structure using
invisible walls and establish the floor height
for that area to match the finished grade.
Click Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
calculate the floor platform at the lower
elevation, then draw a normal staircase in an
upward direct from the lower platform up to
the upper platform. The program correctly
links the two heights.
437
Stairs
Drawing Stairs
Creating Curved Stairs

Curved Stairs can be created using the
Build> Stairs> Curve to Left
or Curve
to Right
. Click in your plan to place a 90
degree curved stair section that can then be
edited.
+ Alt
Curved stairs can also be created from a

straight stair section. Once a stair section is
curved, it can be manipulated and edited to
the correct size and position.
To create curved stairs from straight stairs
1.

and drag to create a straight stair
section of any length.
2.
You can also create curved stairs by drawing

Straight Stairs
against a curved wall.
With the stairs selected, hold down the

Alt key (or use the right mouse button)
and drag the end edit handle.
You can also use this method to change

curved stairs to straight stairs.
Straight stairs drawn along a curved wall

Any combination of straight or curved stair
sections can be merged to create a single stair
section. The resulting stair section is made
up of subsections and, if there are no
landings, functions as a single unit.
Stair subsections must be created in the same
direction if they are to be merged. Multiple
438
stairs drawn in the UP direction may be

merged, and multiple stairs drawn DOWN
may be merged, but combinations of UP and
DOWN stairs do not merge.
Stair subsections merge at the center points
of their upper and lower risers.
1.
Position the sections so they are in the

desired relationship to each other.
2.
Select either stair section so that its edit

handles display.
3.
Click the Extend handle on the end to be

merged and drag it to the point where the
two stairs are to meet.
Stairs
To merge stair sections
Caused by
misalignment
Merging unaligned stair sections
The recommended method for joining stair

sections at different angles are to use curved
stairs and create winders. See Winders on
page 442 and Curved Stairs on page 436.
Locked Tread Width
Merging parallel stair sections
A staircase consisting of merged subsections

resembles a single stair section in floor plan
view. The UP (or DN) arrows join, becoming
a single direction arrow.
When a subsection is clicked, the entire
staircase is selected. Most of the edit handles
display within the boundaries of the selected
subsection. See Using the Mouse on page
441.
Subsections can be joined into a single stair
section without being aligned. If the stair
sections are parallel, the selected section
moves so that it joins properly with the other.
It is possible to merge stair sections that are
not parallel, but they may not merge properly
if they are not precisely aligned.
When dragging an Extend handle to lengthen

or shorten a stair section with Lock Tread
Width selected on the General tab of the
Staircase Specification dialog, the
length expands or contracts one tread at a
time. If Lock Tread Width is checked, it can
be difficult to merge the section to another
section or landing. If this is a problem, you
can temporarily uncheck Lock Tread
Width, then after the stairs are merged the
tread width can be locked again. See
Curved Subsections
Stair subsections attached at both ends by
other sections do not have a free end that can
be dragged into a curve. In this situation,
change the middle sub-section to a curve
using the Change Line/Arc
edit button.
439
If the selected stair section is straight, this

tool makes it curved, and vice versa.
To curve an enclosed stair subsection
1.
Draw three straight stair sections and

connect them end to end.
2.
Select the middle subsection.
3.

edit
button. The center section turns into a
curved stair section.
After using Change Line/Arc
Select the middle stair subsection
If the curved section does not flow smoothly

into the straight sections, you may need to
make it tangent to its neighboring stair. See
Using Make Arc Tangent on page 128.
Displaying Stairs
The display of stairs in all views is controlled
In floor plan view, stairs display on the floor
they were drawn on and are only visible from
the floor above if there is a stairwell.
Stairs have an UP arrow on the floor they
were created on and a DN arrow when
viewed from the floor above.
440
Although stairs span between two floors,

they can only belong to one floor. As a result,
only multi-floor views show the upper floor
with the platform opening and the lower
floor with the staircase simultaneously.
To see the center of a stair section curve,
click Show Arc Centers and Ends
Show Arc Centers on page 102.
. See
Editing Stairs
Staircases can be selected and edited in floor

plan view and 3D views. See Selecting
Objects on page 92.
Using the Mouse

When a staircase is selected edit handles
display. These edit handles can be used to
customize the staircase in many ways. The
edit handles for stairs are similar to those of
other objects. See Editing Objects on page
79.
Straight stair sections are edited like

lines. They have additional edit handles
for resizing the width of the stair section.
See Editing Line Based Objects on
page 95.
Curved stair sections edited like arcs and
also include edit handles for resizing the
stairs width. See Editing Arc Based
Objects on page 98.
When stair sections are merged, the edit
handles display a little differently
depending on what subsection is
currently selected. See Merging Stair
Sections on page 438.
When moving merged stair sections, all

merged stair sections also move.
Several additional edit handles display on

a staircase if the Flare/Curve Stairs
edit button was used. See Flared Stairs
and Curved Treads on page 448.
Stairs
Editing Stairs
As with most other objects stairs can be
copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc.
display on the edit toolbar for selected stairs.

edit button to
open the Staircase Specification
dialog. See Staircase Specification
Dialog on page 458.

edit button to
selected stairs. See Components Dialog
on page 1014.
Click the Make Parallel

edit button
to align the tops, bottoms and sides of
straight stair sections with another
The Center Object

edit button
allows you to center stairs and openings
along a room edge. See Moving
Stair sections can be flared and treads can

be curved using the Flare/Curve Stairs
edit button. See Flared Stairs and
Curved Treads on page 448.
Starter treads can be created using the

Starter Tread
edit button. See
Starter Treads on page 451.
Click the Auto Stairwell

edit button
to create a stairwell automatically. See
Creating a Stairwell on page 456.
A selected staircase can be edited in a variety

of ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar.
441

edit button to
lock the center of selected curved stairs.
If a curved stair section is merged with

straight sections on both ends, you can
use the Make Arc Tangent
edit
button to join the curved section
smoothly to the straight sections and also
specify its radius. See Using Make Arc
Tangent on page 128.
Existing curved stairs can be aligned with an

existing curved wall by aligning their
centers, much the same way that curved
stairs on different floors can be aligned. See
Aligning Objects on page 126.
If there is no curved wall, the radius of a stair
section can be aligned to a CAD arc or circle.
To align curved stairs to an object
1.
Align the centers of the CAD object and

the staircase. See Aligning Objects on
page 126.
2.
Select the curved stairs and move the

side nearest to the arc or circle edge
using the Resize edit handle.
Adjusting the Radius

of Curved Stairs
The easiest way to match the radius of a stair
section to the radius of a curved wall is to
draw a staircase near one side of the curved
wall using the Straight Stairs
tool. The
stairs snap to the wall, and the radius of the
new staircase is defined.
Finally, restore the stair width by dragging

from the other side handle or using the Stair
Winders
Video: Drawing Winder Stairs with
Walls Beneath
Winders are steps located where a staircase
turns and are narrower on the inside of the
turn than they are on the outside. A staircase
defined as a winder expands to fill in any
gaps between the side of the stairs and
nearby walls. Curved stair sections are
typically used to create winders, although
straight stairs can also be used.
442
To create winders
1.
In an enclosed room area, place and connect the stair sections that you want to
be winders.
2.
Select any subsection of the stairs and

edit button to
open the Staircase Specification
dialog.
3.
On the General tab, place a check in the

box beside Winder and click OK.
Winders must be in a room with valid

room definition. You cannot create
winders in an area composed of only 2 corner
walls. If this configuration is needed, enclose
the area in with Invisible walls so that a room
area is defined.
Winders extend to nearby walls
Tight Winders
4.
The steps nearest the wall corner adjust

their shapes and extend into the corner
after the stair is changed to a winder.
Winders cannot be created in a staircase with

too tight a curve. The inside edge of the
curved treads must be greater than zero. If a
staircase curves too tightly, select the winder,
click the Make Arc Tangent
edit button,
and increase the radius so that it is greater
than half of the width of the staircase. See
Stair Landings
Video: Creating a Stair Landing
Stair landings are platforms between stair
sections and can be created in either of two
ways.
To create a landing between stair sections:
Creating a stair landing
1.
Draw two stair sections going UP. They

can be at any angle.
2.
Click between the two sections using the

Straight Stairs
tool to create a landing. Notice that only one direction arrow
displays after the sections are joined by
a landing.
Up to five stair sections can be connected to

one landing. For example, two or three stair
sections might meet at a landing with a single
stair section continuing to the next level.
To be linked by a landing, all sections must
be drawn in the same direction (UP is
preferable) and the top of one section should
be near the bottom of the next.
A landing formed between two stair sections
having less than a 90 degree angle between
443
Stairs
Stair Landings
them are created with a short edge not less

than 6 (150 mm). This is because most
building codes require the shortest tread to be
at least 6 wide. This edge can be manually
edited to less than 6 if needed.
Custom Shaped Landings

Landings can be edited like CAD polylines.
You can add or remove edges, convert an
edge from straight to curved, or vice versa. A
curved landing creates curved railings.
You can also create a stair landing out of
closed polyline created with the CAD tools
using the Convert Polyline
edit button.
See Convert Polyline on page 149.
dialog. See Stair Landing Specification

Dialog on page 467.
Landing Height
Landing height can be either user-defined or
controlled by the program. A landing with a
program-controlled default height is
unlocked. The height of an unlocked landing
adjusts as the stairs attached to it are
modified.
If you specify a height for a landing, that
landing is locked. A locked landing
maintains that height no matter how you
adjust the stairs connected it.
Unlocked Landings
To convert a polyline into a landing
1.
Draw a closed polyline.
2.
Select the polyline and click the

Convert Polyline
edit button to
open the Convert Polyline dialog.
444
3.
Select the Landing radio button and

click OK to open the Stair Landing
4.
Define a Height and Thickness for the

landing. If the Height is defined, the end
of any connecting stairs adjust height to
meet the landing. If you type a d in the
Height value, the height is determined
by connected stairs.
5.
To connect a stair section to the landing,

drag the end handle of a stair section to
the edge of the landing. You can also
move the edge of a landing to the end of
a stair section. Either method makes the
landing or stair section end height as set
in the Stair Landing Specification
By default, a new stair landing is unlocked,

so the stair sections attached to it determine
its height. If the entire stair system forms a
single path from the lower to the upper floor
with each landing connecting only two stair
sections, the program can set landing heights
without any difficulty.
In this example, two stair sections of the

same length are located within a stairwell
and connected by a landing. Both stair
sections have seven treads. Because the
landing height is set automatically according
to the number of treads, all treads have the
same tread width and riser height.
Stair Landings
Locked Landings
A locked landing has a specifically defined
height that does not adjust automatically
when there are changes in the attached stairs.
Instead, the stairs adjust to the landing.
For example, start with the same staircase
used to illustrate unlocked landings, with one
change: the landing height is now defined at
75 inches (190 mm).
7 treads
in each
section
Unlocked landing
An unlocked landing maintains consistent stairs
A change to either stair section affects the

height of the connected landing and the other
stair section. The program tries to maintain
the connection to the floor above, and the
landing adjusts in height so that the entire
stair system has the same riser height,
regardless of how many stairs are placed on
each side of the landing.
6 treads
8 treads
Landing locked at 75"
Notice that a tread is subtracted from the top

and added to the bottom. The program makes
this adjustment to keep the riser heights
within a reasonable range.
The stair sections no longer relate to each
other when they are attached to a locked
landing. Changes to one stair section do not
affect the other.
If more than two stair sections meet at a

landing, the relationship between them
becomes more complex. In this situation, you
may want to define the exact height of the
landing instead of letting the program define
it for you.
Stair sections connected with a landing also
move together unless Stair Sections Move
Independently is checked in the
Panel on page 198.
445
Stairs
Since both stair sections are the same length,

the landing height is a half of the total height
between the two connected floors.

Panel on page 198.
You can use a locked landing to break up a
complex network of stairs and landings into
smaller pieces with known starting and
ending heights.
To lock a landing
1.
Select the landing and click the Open

Object
edit button to open the Stair
Landing Specification dialog.
2.
The Height value displays with a [D],

indicating that the landing height is
defined by the stair sections.
Locked landings produce

independent stair sections
3.
Remove the [D] and enter the desired

height.
In this example, each set of stairs is adjusted

so it bridges the height from the floor to the
landing. Since the landing height is above the
halfway mark, the upper stair section has
very shallow (5") riser height, and the lower
section has a steeper (7-1/2") riser height.
4.
The landing moves to that height. Once

you have defined a height for the landing, all stairs that meet that landing are
redefined.
When a locked landing is used, the

Staircase Specification dialog shows
only the selected stair section and those
connected to it by unlocked landings, rather
than the entire stair system.
When a stair section is moved, all unlocked
landings and any stair sections connected to
those landings move as well. A locked
landing, does not move when attached stairs
are moved. To move a stair section
independently, select this option in the
446
To unlock a landing
1.
Select the landing and click the Open

Object
edit button to open the Stair
Landing Specification dialog.
2.
Enter a d in the Height field and press

the Tab key. The current default height
reappears with [D] after it. Then landing changes to the appropriate height
when you close the dialog. See
Dynamic Defaults on page 179.

Most building codes require staircases to
maintain consistent tread width.
Walk Line
By default, Chief Architect measures the
length and tread width of a stair section along
a walk line. The walk line is typically located
12" or 30 cm from the edge of the stair
section. On curved stairs, it is measured from
the inside edge of the curve.
The walk line distance from the staircase
edge can be specified on the Style tab of the
Staircase Specification dialog. The
walk line feature can also be turned off and
tread width measured at the tread center. See
Walk Line at 12"
Center Line
When the walk line is used on a curved stair

section, the number and/or width of treads in
a section or subsection changes when the
inner edge is moved because the walk line is
measured from this inner edge. You should
set the stair section width to its final value as
early as possible.
Lock Tread Width

The first way to maintain tread width is to
Lock Tread Width to a specified value on
the General tab of the Staircase
on page 459.
Once locked, any changes to the length of the
stair section are made in full tread
increments, maintaining the specified tread
width. A stair section consisting of multiple
subsections must have the tread width locked
so the tread width of each subsection is set to
the same value.
Ignore Subsection
Boundaries
Uniform tread width can also be maintained
by selecting Ignore Subsection Boundaries
on the General tab of the Staircase
Specification dialog. This maintains a
consistent tread width throughout a stair
section without regard to subsection
boundaries. The tread width value may
change when the stair section is edited, but
remains consistent throughout all
subsections. See General Tab on page 459.
Because the program is ignoring the
boundaries where one stair section merges
with another, the treads where a straight
section joins a curved section may angle to
accomodate the adjustment.
There are two ways to keep tread width even

throughout a stair section made of multiple
subsections.
447
Stairs
Check Ignore Subsection

Boundaries to have the
program adjust all the treads
of a stair system so that they
maintain consistent width along
the walkline. Note that it
adjusted the boundary lines to
accomodate the walk line along
the center stairs.
These are the subsection boundaries.

Note that they are straight, exactly as
created. The walk line around the
center treads is too narrow.

Any stair section can be flared and/or
treads curved using the Flare/Curve
Stairs edit button.
Only exposed sides of a stair section can be
flared. If one side of a stair section is against
a wall or wrapped (see Wrapped Stairs on
page 452), only the exposed end can be
flared.
Flaring, curved treads, and special
treads should be the last changes that
you make to any stairs.
Creating a Flared Stair

Flared stairs grow wider near one end,
typically sweeping outward at the bottom.
Stairs can also be flared at the top or on both
ends.
448
To create flared stairs

1.
Create the stairs and connect them to a

landing, floor platform edge, or another
stair section.
2.
Specify the section width, tread width,

and any other needed information.
Curve Stairs
edit button. New Flare
edit handles display on all four corners
of the stairs.
4.
Adjusting the Flare Radius
Select the stairs and click the Flare/
After a flared staircase has been created, you

may want to soften the radius of the flare.
Drag one of the corner handles to flare

that corner. As you drag the flare, the
Status Bar shows the distance the side
handle moves. This allows you to move
the opposite handle the same amount.
Flare
dimensions
display in the
Status Bar
Creating flared stairs
5.
When you are finished editing the flare,

click the Main Edit Mode
to restore
the stairs regular edit handles and toolbar buttons.
The four handles at the sides and the four

handles at the corners flare the stair section
when dragged outward. The two handles in
the center of the section move the starting
point for flaring along the stair section.
To adjust the flare radius
Symmetrically Flared Stairs

Use the dimension information that displays
in the Status Bar as a reference to create
symmetric flares on both sides.
Flare
dimensions
display in the
Status Bar
First, adjust the curvature of the flared

section.
1.
Select the flared stair and click the

Flare/Curve Stairs
edit button to
access the flare handles again.
2.
Select the handle along the flared edge

of the stair. Drag this handle outward
very slightly. This forms a more gradual
flare.
Creating symmetrically flared stairs
449
Stairs
3.
To curve the edges of flared treads

1.

Flare/Curve Stairs
edit button to
2.
Drag a corner edit handle upward one

tread width or less.
Adjusting the flare curvature
Then, adjust the starting point of the flare:

1.

Flare/Curve Stairs
edit button to
2.
This time, drag the lower of the two central handles upward. The handle above it
moves with it. This moves the start point
for the bottom flare from the middle of
the section toward its top, making the
flare even more gradual.
Curving the edges of flared treads
3.
When you are finished editing the curve,

to restore
This type of tread curving works only on

flared edges and concentrates the curvature
at that edge.
Flared treads can also be curved using the
Curve edit handle, which curves the treads
more uniformly.
Adjusting the flares starting point
Treads Perpendicular to Flare

Flared stairs often look best when the treads
curve to meet the flared side perpendicular to
the radius.
450
Curving the Treads

When treads are curved, all treads in the
section show some degree of curvature.
Treads close to the curved end have a greater
curve than those at the opposite end, but both
ends can be curved.
2.
Drag the edit handle at the center of the

bottom edge a small distance to curve
the treads.
Creating curved stair treads
3.
To curve stair treads
1.
Select the staircase, then click the Flare/

Curve Stairs
When you are finished editing the curve,

to restore
edit button.
Starter Treads
The first and second treads of a
staircase can be turned into starter
treads by clicking the Starter Tread edit
button. Starter treads extend to the side of the
staircase, have rounded edges and are
common on traditional staircases.
A starter tread can be added only to open
sides of a stair section. If one side of a stair
section is against a wall or wrapped (see
Wrapped Stairs on page 452), only the
exposed tread end can become a starter tread.
451
Stairs
Starter Treads
To create starter treads

1.
Click a staircase to select it.
2.
Click the Starter Tread

edit button.
An edit handle displays on each end of
both the first and second treads.
3.
Drag either of the handles on the first

tread outward from the stair section. If
the stair section is against a wall, only
one handle displays on the side opposite
the wall.
4.
As you drag, the ends of the tread

become rounded.
6.
Drag either of the two square handles

upward to increase the width of the
rounded ends of the tread.
7.
Drag the edit handle on the second tread

outward from the stair section to create a
second starter tread.
8.
To make changes to existing starter

treads, select the stairs, click the Starter
Tread
edit button and repeat the
above steps as needed.
9.
5.
When you are finished editing the starter

treads, click the Main Edit Mode
to
restore the stairs regular edit handles
and toolbar buttons.
Two additional edit handles display on

each side of the tread, along the back
edge.
Wrapped Stairs
Check Allow Wrap on the Style tab of the
Staircase Specification dialog and the
selected stairs can be wrapped around the
corner of a deck or landing. Curved stairs
and stairs with multiple subsections cannot
be wrapped.
Edits made to any of the wrapped stair
sections apply to all adjacent (wrapped)
sections.
452
To wrap stairs around a landing

1.
Draw two perpendicular stair sections.
2.
Click between them to create a landing.
3.
Rotate one stair section 180.
4.
The stairs wrap around the corner.

Notice that the Up arrow displays on the
most recently edited stair section.
1.
Draw a deck if you have not already

done so.
2.
Hold down the Alt key and drag stairs

away from the edge of the deck using
the right mouse button.
3.
Draw a second set of stairs on the other

edge of the deck the same way.
4.
If necessary, move the stair sections

toward the corner of the deck. The two
sections merge to form wrapped steps.

Partial Railings
A staircase can be enclosed on one side by a
combination of wall and railing.
453
Stairs
To wrap stairs around a deck
rior wall is 4" thick, setting this value to

4" should be sufficient.
Partial railings can be created by specifying

the stairs as winders and increasing the Max
Tread Contraction on the Style tab of the
Staircase Specification dialog.
5.
On the Style tab, increase the Stringer

Bottom value to enclose the area under
the stairs with railings. The best value
depends on the design of your stairs.
6.
On the Newels/Balusters tab, remove the

check from either Right or Left Railing
at Wall, depending on the position of
the stairs and wall in your plan.
7.
Click the Object Snaps

toggle button to temporarily turn off Object Snaps.
See Object Snaps on page 82.
8.
Select the stairs and use the side edit

handle to move the edge of the stairs to
approximately the middle of the wall.
The Max Tread Contraction defines the

largest distance that any section of the stair
system is allowed to move inward when the
stairs are turned into winders. If any point on
the edge of the stairs would have to move
inward more than this defined amount in
order to locate the surface of the wall, the
stairs do not contract and snap to that wall.
To create a partial stair railing
1.
Create a staircase and draw an Interior

Wall
stairs.
2.
9.
Select the stairs and click the Auto

Stairwell
stairwell.
454
Resizing stairs to the middle of the wall
against, but not underneath, the
You may need to Zoom

in on the
stairs and wall to move the stair edge.
edit button to create a
3.
On the General tab of the Staircase

Specification dialog, check Winders.
4.
On the Style tab, define the Max Tread

Contraction (for Winder). If the inte-
Solid Railings
To create a solid rail along a staircase, create
the solid rail against, but not underneath, the
stairs. The solid railing recognizes the
adjacent stairs and climbs alongside them.
See Railing Tab on page 267.
Stairs
Steel Stringer
To make a steel stringer with concrete

treads:
1.
On the Style tab of the Staircase

Specification dialog, set the Tread
Thickness to 2 inches or more.
If any balusters show beyond the railing,

eliminate them by unchecking Left railing
or Right railing on the Style tab of the
2.
Select the Single Stringer check box.
3.
On the Materials tab, set the Tread

material to Concrete and the Riser/Trim
material to steel.
Concrete Stairs
Masonry Stairs
To make a solid concrete staircase:

On the Style tab of the Staircase
Specification dialog, set the Tread
Overhang to zero.
To make a set of masonry stairs:

1.
Set the Tread Overhang to zero.
2.
Set the Tread Thickness to zero.
2.
3.
Remove any check from Open Risers.
Set the Tread Thickness to the thickness of the masonry material.
4.
On the Materials tab, set the Tread and

the Riser/Trim materials to Concrete.
3.
On the Materials tab, set the Tread

material to the masonry material and the
Riser/Trim material to concrete.
1.
455
An interior staircase must be located in a
stairwell, an opening to the floor above. A
stairwell is an Open Below room type on the
floor above.
If you create a stairwell away from other
walls so the Open Below is created in the
center of another room, connect a wall of the
Open Below room to another wall using an
invisible wall.
3.
Select Tools> Reference Floors>

Reference Display
to show the Reference Floor, including the stairs. If the
stairs do not display with the reference,
make sure the Reference Display Set is
selected in the Layer Display
Options dialog. See Displaying
4.
On the upper floor, use the Railing

tool to create a room around the stairs.
Use the edit handles to position the railings as needed.
5.
Select the railings one at a time and drag

them into position.
6.
When the railings are positioned prop-
Automatically
To create a stairwell that matches the
perimeter of the staircase, create a
floor above the staircase if one does
not exist. Select the staircase and click the
Auto Stairwell
edit button.
Auto Stairwell
automatically creates a
room on the floor above enclosed by railings,
defined as Open Below in the Room
Specification dialog, and given a Stairwell room label. This room can be selected
and edited like any other room.
erly, click the Reference Display

toggle button to turn off the display of
the Reference Floor.
Creating a Stairwell Manually

Stairwells can also be created manually.
7.
Click inside the room using the Select

Objects
To create a manual stairwell
456
1.
Draw a two-story building. Create the

staircase on the first floor.
2.
Make the second floor the Current

Floor and the first floor the Reference
Floor. See Reference Floor on page
368.
tool to select it, then click
the Open Object

8.
edit button.
On the General tab of the Room

Specification dialog, select Open
Below from the Room Type list. Click
OK to close the dialog.
log. If the doorway is specified larger

than the railing, the door maximizes to
fit the space available.
9.
Place a Doorway
in the railing at
the top step for an opening.
10. Select the doorway and define a large

width in the Door Specification dia-

Video: Drawing Winder Stairs with
Walls Beneath
3.
Reposition the walls as needed, making

sure that each is entirely under the stairs.
4.
The wall at the foot of the stairs should

be placed no closer to the bottom than
the second step.
5.
Add a door and specify the Room Type.
Rooms such as closets or storage areas are

commonly located beneath staircases.
To create a room below a staircase
1.
Draw a staircase, select it, and click the

Open Object
If Winders are specified for this staircase, set Max Tread Contraction to 2"
on the Style tab to allow walls to be
built entirely under the staircase.
On the Fill Style tab, select None
(Transparent) so the walls and other
objects under the stairs can be seen.
2.
On the same floor as the staircase, draw

the Interior Walls
lowing their shape.
under them, fol-
457
Stairs

Staircases can be defined with the greatest
accuracy using the Staircase
If more than one stair section attaches to an
unlocked landing, information about all the
linked stair sections is available in the
specification dialog.
If a stair section is composed of multiple
subsections, the complete section may be
adjusted as a unit, or by defining each of its
individual subsections. Any section or
subsection can be used to open the
Staircase Specification dialog for the
entire stair system.

It is important that all floor heights, ceiling heights, floor and ceiling thicknesses be established correctly before using
the Staircase Specification dialog.
To open the Staircase Specification

dialog, select a stair section and click the
Open Object
a stair section using the Straight Stairs

or Select Objects
458
edit button or double-click
tool.
Stairs
General Tab
4
5
7
1 The comment line tells whether or not
the staircase reaches the next floor. If it

does not, the Make Reach button displays.
Click this button to add risers to the stairs.
The stair jack extends, raising the bottom
edge of the stair section until the staircase
reaches the next floor.
2 This section lists information about the
expands if the number stair sections and

subsections increases.
A stair section can be modified as a complete
unit or by subsection.
Five values can be changed. To change
Tread Width or Riser Angle, click the
column title to activate the fields below.
staircase. This information cannot be

edited directly, but updates with changes
made in the dialog.
A change in one value usually affects other

values in the same row. You may need to
reposition the staircase after the changes.
If you modify a value, press the Tab key to

update this information.
Section # - Identifies the stair sections. If

Retain # Tread in Subsections is checked,
subsections are also identified.
3 The specifications for each stair section

can be edited here. This section
459
Length - Define the run, or length, of each

section measured along the Walk Line. The
length is equal to the number of treads
multiplied by the tread width and can be
defined with a specific value.
Before you change the length, you may want
to first select Retain # Treads.
When the length of a section changes, all
other stairs and landings connected to it also
move. If you change the length of the section
you originally selected, the end of that
section nearest where you clicked moves,
along with any unlocked landings and
sections connected to it.
Tread Width - Click the column title, then
specify the run of each individual tread. To
lock this value, check Lock Tread Width.
If you do not specify the tread width of each
subsection, the tread width for the whole
section is the same.
If a landing is created by clicking between
two stair sections and one of them has locked
tread width, the staircase formed from them
has locked tread width. Any landings and
sections connected to this new staircase
adjust to meet it and then have locked tread
width as well.
Note: You cannot both Lock Tread Width
and Retain # Treads in the same staircase. If
a landing is created between two stair sections and one has locked tread width, the
entire staircase has locked tread width.
# Treads - Define the number of treads in a

stair section or subsection. If you enter a
value and want to prevent it from changing,
check Retain # treads in either Sections or

Subsections to lock the value.
Sec. Width - Define the width of a section.
Only one width can be defined for a section;
all subsections in the same section have the
same width.
Rise Angle - Define the steepness of the stair
section.
The maximum angle is 42 degrees. To
exceed the 42 degree limit, decrease Length,
Tread Width and/or # Treads.
Winders - Check this box to specify the
selected section as winders. This affects the
section as a whole, even if it is defined by
subsections. If multiple sections are
separated by landings, each section can be
individually specified as winders.
4 Click the Revert button to restore all
values as they were when the dialog

was first opened. Revert only works within
the same editing session.
If you select and then clear one of the Retain
# treads in check boxes, the settings also
revert.
5 Best riser height of ___ inches (mm)
requires ___ risers to reach ___

inches to next floor. This area describes the
ideal rise and run for the selected staircase.
Note the number of inches (mm) to the next
floor; this value includes the ceiling height of
the room plus the platform thickness of the
floor above.
If a landing is locked, its height is used to
calculate this information. See Locked
Landings on page 445.
6 These options control the behavior of

the stair sections.
460
Lock Tread Width - Check this box to lock

the tread width value. If subsections are not
shown, the tread width for each section is the
average of all subsections. Check Lock
Tread Width or Ignore Subsection
Boundaries to ensure that the tread width
shown is the true tread width throughout the
entire section. See Lock Tread Width on
page 447.
Ignore Subsection Boundaries - Check this
box to maintain tread width throughout a
stair section composed of merged
subsections, regardless of subsection
boundaries. See Ignore Subsection
Boundaries on page 447.
Retain #treads in: Sections - Check this box
to lock the number of treads in stair sections
as a whole. This does not define the distribu-
tion of treads throughout the different subsections, and does not include landings.
Retain # treads in: Subsection - Check this
box to specify the number of treads in each
subsection.
If either check box is selected, any change in
the length of a stair section is evenly
distributed among the treads in that section
or subsection. No new treads are added.
All stair sections linked by unlocked
landings to a selected stair section display in
the lower part of the dialog. If you select
Retain # treads in: Subsection, all
subsections display as well.
7 Num Style - Click this button to access
the Number Style/Angle Style

dialog. For more information, see Number
Style/Angle Style Dialog on page 873.
Style Tab
7
8
3
4
5
6
9
10
461
Stairs
The settings on the Style tab affect all stair

sections and subsections.
1 Stringer at Wall - Check this box to
produce a raised stringer top baseboard

trim at the sides of the stair sections against
walls. This baseboard follows the slope of
the stair.
Single Stringer - Check this box to form a
single 5-inch (125-mm) thick stringer in the
center of the staircase.
Checking Single Stringer automatically
checks the Open Risers box and clears the
Closed Stringer and Stringer at Wall
boxes. You may want to increase the tread
thickness when this is checked.
Closed Stringer - Check this box to raise
each exposed stringer to cover the sides of
the treads. If this is checked, no central
stringer is applied to open riser stairs. This
setting only affects those stringers that are
not against a wall.
Large Stringer Base - Check this box to
widen the stringer at the foot of the staircase.
This is helpful when walls are created below
the stairs.
Specify the height of the Stringer Top when

Stringer at Wall or Closed Stringer is
selected. This is measured along the plane of
the riser face from the top of a tread to the
top of the stringer. It cannot be less than 2
inches (5 cm).
Specify the height of the Stringer Bottom.
This is measured from the top back corner of
a tread down to the bottom edge of the
stringer. It must be equal to or greater than
the riser height.
2 Runner - Check this box to add a
carpet runner to all sections connected

by unlocked landings. Specify the Runner
Width. The default value of 0 does not create
a runner.
Runner not Tucked - Normally, carpet
runners are tucked under the tread overhang.
Check this box to have the runner span
directly from the tread front tothe bottom of
the riser below.
3 Use Walk Line - By default, Chief
Architect calculates the tread width

based on a walk line. Specify how far from
the edge of the stairs the Walk Line is
measured. This is normally 12 inches.
Uncheck the box to disable this function.
Show Walk Line - Check this box to show
the Walk Line in floor plan view.
For more information, see Walk Line on
page 447.
Large Stringer Base shown at right
Extend Stringer Top - This box is checked

by default. This option extends a triangular
portion of the stringer under the landing or
platform at the top of the stairs.
462
4 Open Underneath - Uncheck this box
to add a skirt below the staircase along

the two sides. It looks like a wall in 3D, but it
has only a single face. Base molding does not
generate along the bottom of the skirt, and
doors cannot be placed in it.
The recommended way to enclose the area

beneath stairs is to use walls. See Rooms
Below Staircases on page 457.
Open Risers - Check this box to eliminate
the riser face under each tread and expose the
stringers. If Closed Sides is also selected, no
central stringer is supplied.
5 Show Arrow - Check this box to show
the UP arrow or DN arrow in floor plan
view.
Riser Surface at Top Landing - Check this

box to produce a riser surface against the
platform edge at the top of the stairs.
Checking this allows stair risers to match all
the way to the top of the platform. Landing
edges are not affected.
10 Allow Wrap - This box is checked by
default and must be checked to produce

wrapped stairs. For more information, see
Wrapped Stairs on page 452.
6 Use Exterior Materials - Select the
check box to have the entire staircase

use the same material as the railing.
Materials can be defined for the individual
parts of a staircase if this is not checked.
7 Max Tread Contraction (for Winder)
- Define the amount a tread may

contract to create a winder. See Partial
Railings on page 453.
8 Tread Overhang - Specify the distance

that the tread overhangs the riser.
Tread Thickness - Specify the tread

thickness.
1
8
8
Tread Overhang, Tread Thickness, Stringer Top
9 Nosing at Top Landing - This option
produces tread nosing attached to

platform edge at the top of stairs. Landing
edges are not affected.
463
Stairs
Newels/Balusters Tab
2
3
5
1 Rail Height - Specify stair and landing
Baluster Width - Specify the width of

each baluster. For Library balusters, this
is the width, or diameter, at its widest
point.
No Shoe for Rail - This option applies

only to landing rails. Uncheck this box to
place a low rail on the landing surface
that receives the baluster bottoms.
Cut Baluster Top - Each tread normally

has two to three balusters, growing
longer toward its back. The default is to
use the same baluster and cut it off at the
bottom to shorten it toward the tread
front. Check this box to cut the balusters
at the top instead.
rail height.
Stair Rail Height defines the height from

tread surface directly over the riser to
railing top.
Landing Rail Height defines the height
of the landing rail top from the landing
surface.
2 Check Draw Newels/Balusters to
display newels and balusters in floor

plan view. This displays the Newels and
Balusters only for the selected stair section.
3 Baluster specifications.
Baluster Type - Select Square,
Round, or Library balusters. Selecting
Library from the drop down list is the
same as clicking the Library button to
the right and allows selection of a baluster from the library.
464
4 Newel specifications.
Newel Type - Select Square, Round,
or Library newels. Selecting Library from
the drop down list is the same as clicking the
Library button to the right and allows
selection of a newel from the library.
Stairs
Newel Width - Specify the width of each

newel. For Library newels, this is the width,
or diameter, at its widest point.
Newel Height - Specify the height from the
landing surface to the top of the newel. This
is used only when Rail passes over Newel is
unchecked.
Newels at First Tread - Check this box to
place a newel where the rail starts at the base
of the stairs. A newel is placed only on a side
of the stairs not against a wall.
Rail Passes Over Newel - Adjust the newel
height to reach the bottom of the rail that
passes over it. Checking this causes the
Newel Height to be ignored.
Railing Transitions - Check to specify

the placement of gooseneck connections between stair and landing railings.
5 Bracket - Click the Library button to
apply a 1/4 inch thick bracket to the

side of the stringer under each riser. Brackets
are applied only where the side of the stairs is
not against a wall. The stringer on that side is
moved in 1/4 inch to accomodate the bracket.
6 Railing specifications.
Railing - Select either or both check

boxes to specify placement of railings on
stair sections and landings where they are
not against a wall.
Railing at Wall - Check to specify the

placement of wall railings.
Checking both Railing Transitions and

Smooth Transitions produces a handrail like
this:
465
Smooth Transitions - Check to specify

the placement of smooth connections
between stair and landing railings.
Handrail Tab
3
4
1 Molding - Shows the current handrail
profile. This says Default Handrail

unless you select a custom handrail profile.
2 Select - Click this button to open the

choose a profile from the library.
3 Default - Click this button to remove a

specified handrail and use the default.
4 Preview Pane - Shows the selected
molding profile. No preview displays

for the Default Handrail option, which is
rectangular.
Note: Handrails are shown on their side,
rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees.
5 Width and Height - Specify the width

and height of the railing.
466
For information about using the Line Style

tab, see Line Style Tab on page 851.
Materials Tab
Fill Style Tab

For information about using the Fill Style
tab, see Fill Style Tab on page 862.

Select a landing and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Stair Landing
General Tab
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab

1
2
3
landing. Enter a D to unlock the

landing height and use the default height.
The default height is determined by corrected
stair sections when you exit the dialog. See
Locked Landings on page 445.
2 Thickness - Enter a thickness for the
landing. Enter a D to use the default.
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
3 No Rail on Selected Edge - Suppress
railing on the edge nearest to where you

clicked when selecting this landing.
467
Stairs
Line Style Tab
468
Chapter 15:
Framing
Framing
Chapter Overview
Video: Introduction to Framing
Video: Framing Walls, Floors, Ceilings
and Roofs
In Chief Architect, framing can be produced
both manually and automatically, and can be
calculated in the materials list.
Manual framing members are drawn by
clicking and dragging, like drawing a wall.
Automatic framing is produced in the Build
Framing dialog. Both automatically
generated and manually drawn framing
members can be selected and edited using
edit handles in 2D and 3D views.
Trusses are covered in their own chapter,
Trusses on page 501.
Chapter Contents
Framing Defaults
Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing
The Framing Tools
Blocking and Bridging
Automatic Framing
Build Framing Dialog
Framing Reference Markers
Bearing Lines
Joist Direction Lines
Wall Framing Details
Drawing Wall Framing Members
Displaying Framing
Editing Framing
Keeping Framing Current
Framing and the Materials List
Framing Specification Dialog
Beam Specification Dialog
Post Specification Dialog
Framing Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings... to
access the Default Settings dialog.
Both automatic and manual framing is

generated according to the settings in the
Framing Defaults dialog. If automatic
469
framing needs to be edited, change these

default settings and regenerate framing using
the Build Framing dialog.
The Framing Defaults dialog is nearly
identical to the Build Framing dialog. See
Build Framing Dialog on page 475.
As with other default settings, it is best

to set up framing defaults for all major
components before building your model.
Framing defaults control structural elements,
which in turn determine floor, ceiling and roof
heights.
Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing

Introductory Training Video: Automatic and Manual Framing
Video: Introduction to Framing
Platform, roof, and wall framing can be
produced manually or automatically. In most
cases, automatically-generated framing is
preferable. If you want a framing member
that is not affected by automatically
generated framing, then a manually drawn
framing member is desirable. See The
Framing Tools on page 471.
In most plans, both types of framing are
used. The framing for roof planes and floor
platforms is automatically generated, and
additional framing is created manually.
Wall/Floor/Ceiling
Framing
The Wall, Openings, and Headers tabs of the
Build Framing dialog determine how wall
framing is automatically generated. It is a
good idea to set up framing specifications in
the Build Framing dialog before drawing.
Although these settings can be changed,
finalizing them as early as possible saves
time.
470
Framing is not built until the Build

Framing dialog is opened and the check
box on each tab that says Build next to it is
selected. For example, Build Wall Framing
is found on the Wall tab, and Build Ceiling
Framing, on the different floor tabs (1st,
2nd, etc). Once framing is built, changes can
be made to individual components. Framing
members can be added, deleted, resized and
repositioned within the model.
When changes are made to the model that
affect framing, the Build Framing dialog
must be opened and any affected framing
must be rebuilt. For example, if a window is
moved or resized, the wall framing must be
rebuilt. If the footprint is enlarged, the wall
framing and any roof or platform framing
that is affected must be rebuilt.
Roof Framing
Rafters, trusses, or a mixture of the two can
be used for roof framing. Trusses are
manually drawn and are covered in their own
chapter, Trusses on page 501.
Rafters can be manually drawn or produced
automatically on the Roof tab in the
Framing dialog.
The Framing Tools
Framing
If you are going to have both truss and

automatically produced stick framing,
draw the trusses first and then use the
Framing dialog to produce stick framing.
The stick framing is only placed in areas not
supported by trusses, and is cut and butted to
the trusses where appropriate.
The Framing Tools

Framing members can be generated
automatically or drawn manually. In
either case, the default settings for framing
members are derived from their respective
tabs in the Build Framing dialog.
As a general rule, horizontal framing
members are referred to as "joists"
(floor/ceiling platform framing); vertical framing members are referred to as "studs" (wall
framing); and sloped framing members are
referred to as rafters (roof framing).
Rafter
Rafters are assigned at a pitch and
elevation so that they fit inside the roof
plane in which they are drawn.
Roof Truss
Select Build> Framing> Roof Truss
and click and drag in floor plan view
within one or more roof planes to manually
draw a roof truss. Roof planes must be
present before a roof truss can be drawn. See
Roof Trusses on page 502.
Roof Beam
Select Build> Framing> Roof Beam
and click and drag in floor plan view to
manually draw a roof beam. Roof beams are
normally be drawn across and placed directly
under the rafters. Beams can be selected and
opened for specification. See Beam
To draw a rafter manually, select Build>

Framing> Rafter
, then click and drag in
floor plan view to draw a rafter.
If the rafter is drawn within a roof plane, its
height, depth and pitch are set so that it fits
under the roof plane that contains it.
Rafters are edited like other framing
members, except that you cannot set the
height. If a rafter is moved, its height and
slope are automatically reset to fit under the
roof plane at its new position.
Joist
Joists can be automatically generated
for multiple floors at once in the Build
Framing dialog. See Floor Tabs on page
475.
Joists can only be manually drawn on the
current floor. See Floor Up/ Floor Down
on page 368. Whether a floor or ceiling joist
is drawn when the Joist
tool is used is
determined by the presence of a floor above.
If there is no floor above, a ceiling joist is
471
drawn. If there is a floor above, a floor joist

is drawn. To draw a joist on the first floor
subfloor, the current floor must be the
foundation.
To manually draw a ceiling joist, select
Build> Framing> Joist and click and drag
to draw a joist of the desired length.
Joists can be edited just like manually drawn
framing members. See Editing Framing on
page 494.
Ceiling joists, floor joists and rafters
have their own layers. Proper layer
assignment maximizes display and materials
flexibility.
Floor/Ceiling Truss
Select Build> Framing> Floor/
Ceiling Truss and click and drag in
floor plan view to draw a floor/ceiling truss.
See Floor and Ceiling Trusses on page
502.
Floor/Ceiling Beam
Select Build> Framing> Floor/
Ceiling Beam and click and drag in
floor plan view to draw a floor/ceiling beam.
Beams can be selected and opened for
specification. See Beam Specification
Dialog on page 498.
On the Posts/Beam tab of the Build
Framing dialog you can set two ways a
Beams should be placed before joists

are produced by automatic framing. If
With Joists is specified, the joists are cut by
and butted against the beam. If Under Joists
is specified, the joists are automatically
butted or lapped over the beam.
Post
Select Build> Framing> Post and
click in floor plan view to place a post.
Placing a post on the lowest level of a plan
also creates a footing. Posts can be selected
and opened for specification. See Post
Framing Reference Marker

Select Build> Framing> Framing
Reference Marker and click in floor
plan view to place a framing reference
marker.
A Framing Reference Marker
is a
shortcut tool that saves the step of opening a
marker to specify its type. See Markers on
page 823 and Framing Reference Marker
on page 472.
Bearing Line
Select Build> Framing> Bearing
Line and click and drag on floor plan
view to create a bearing line. See Bearing
Lines on page 488.
beam can be drawn:
472
Under Joists places the beam underneath

the joists so the joists can bear on it.
With Joists places the top of the beam

even with the tops of the joists it supports. The joist then butts against it. See
Posts/Beams Tab on page 482.
Joist Direction
Select Build> Framing> Joist
Direction and click and drag in floor
plan view to create a joist direction line. See
Joist Direction Lines on page 489.
The Joist Blocking
and Roof Blocking
buttons are not on the default toolbar but

can be added. See Toolbar Customization
Dialog on page 18.
Joist and Roof Blocking

Blocking for floor and ceiling
joists and rafters can be manually
drawn in floor plan view.
To add Joist Blocking
or Roof Blocking
to your plan, first generate the framing

for that platform. See Build Framing
Dialog on page 475.
Once framing is displayed, select Build>
Framing> Joist Blocking or click the Joist
Blocking
button and click and drag to
draw blocking.
Blocking must be drawn perpendicular to
and across joists or rafters.
One run of blocking behaves as a single
object in floor plan view. Choose between In
Line, Stagger blocking, and Cross bridging
on each numbered Floor tab of the Build
Framing dialog.
When the Rafter

button is doubleclicked to open the Build Framing
dialog, the Rafter tool is active. Be sure that
the Joist Blocking
or Roof Blocking
tool is active before drawing blocking.
Create a framing overview to view your

blocking in 3D. Rafter blocking is tilted in
3D to be perpendicular to the roof plane. The
floor plan view position corresponds to the
top of the rafter blocking.
Wall Bridging
Bridging for walls can be created when
wall framing is built or rebuilt. Select
Exterior or Interior and In Line or Stagger
bridging on the Wall tab of the Build
Framing dialog to define both manually and
automatically drawn bridging. See Build
Framing Dialog on page 475.
Automatically-created wall bridging can be
viewed in a Wall Detail and edited just as
joist blocking is edited in floor plan view.
See Wall Framing Details on page 492.
Bridging can also be drawn in a Wall Detail
by selecting CAD> Boxes & Framing>
Wall Bridging
. Wall bridging must be
drawn perpendicular to the studs; it is
therefore always horizontal in a Wall Detail.
Bridging should start and end at a stud
surface.
473
Framing
Blocking can be drawn manually for floor

and ceiling platforms. Wall bridging can be
created manually or automatically. Both
blocking and bridging can be selected and
edited an a variety of ways.
Automatic Framing
Automatic framing is built by selecting the
Build check box on the appropriate tabs of
the Build Framing dialog.
The settings in the Build Framing dialog
are the same as those in the Framing
Defaults dialog. They control the type of
framing, its size and spacing, and other
details for the major components of the 3D
model.
The major components of framing are floor
platforms, ceiling platforms, walls, and roof
assemblies. Information specified in this
dialog is used when automatic framing is
generated.
of floor joists are set below the floor height

by a distance equal to the subfloor sheathing
thickness. The subfloor thickness is detailed
on each numbered Floor tab of the Build
Framing dialog, but it can be overridden for
individual rooms in the Room
on page 299.
Joist Orientation
If a Joist Direction
line exists somewhere in the platform, it dictates the
direction of the floor or ceiling joists
when automatic framing is generated.
When automatic framing is built, any

previously existing automatically produced
framing of the same type for the same floor is
deleted and replaced with new. Manually
drawn framing remains with the newly
produced automatic framing.
If there is no Joist Direction

line,
automatically generated joists run perpendicular to and across any Floor/Ceil-
Depending on settings on the General tab of

the Wall Specification dialog, wall
framing can be specified to stop at or frame
through floor and ceiling platforms. See
ing Beam
or Bearing Line
have drawn.
The height and depth of automatically

produced joists are defined on these same
tabs of the Build Framing dialog. The top
474
If there are no Floor/Ceiling Beam

or Joist Direction
lines, automatically generated joists run across the
shortest distance on a platform.
Mixing Rafters
and Trusses
Joists and Rafters

Joists and rafters can be automatically
produced in ceiling and floor platforms and
roof planes. Select the Build Framing check
box on the appropriate tabs in the Build
Framing dialog. See Build Framing
Dialog on page 475.
you
If you plan to mix roof trusses with rafters

and/or ceiling joists, you can save time
laying out framing by:
Check Trusses in the Build Roof dialog

before checking Build Roof Planes in
the Build Roof dialog to automatically
build a roof. This also affects positioning
of manually drawn roof planes if their

baseline is drawn over a wall.
Draw and position all roof trusses before

using the automatic framing generator to
produce rafters and ceiling joists. See
Floor and Ceiling Trusses on page 502.
Some other important things to remember:
Rafters and joists that are parallel to a

roof truss are not generated closer than 14
inches (350mm) to the truss.
Automatically produced rafters and joists

do not cross an existing truss, but do generate from the eave inward until they butt
into a truss.
Rafters and hip ridges can pass over a

drop hip truss. See Drop Hip on page
514.
Lookouts can pass over a reduced gable

truss. See the graphic in Truss Base on
page 507.
When rafters are parallel to trusses, the

tops of the rafters are placed in line with
the tops of the trusses. Since the depth of
a rafter is normally greater than that of a
truss's top chord, the lower rafter edge is
below the top plate of the supporting
wall, requiring a birdsmouth cut into the
rafter. If the truss is raised to provide
space for insulation, the rafter may not
need to be cut at all. If the truss is raised
too much, the rafter may not rest on the
top plate at all.

Automatic framing can be generated by
selecting Build> Framing> Build
Framing to open the Build Framing
dialog. This dialog can also be accessed by
double-clicking either the Framing Tools
button or the Rafter
The number of tabs in the dialog varies

depending on how many floors are in your
model. There is be a tab called 1st for the
first floor, 2nd for the second floor, and so
on.
tool.
Floor Tabs
The Build Framing dialog opens at the
framing tab for the current floor, such as
Foundation, 1st or 2nd. Each tab specifies
framing for specific floors or assemblies.
Switch between tabs to define all settings.
The floor framing information for a given
floor is found on the Floor tab for the floor
below it, because that is where the framing
will display in floor plan view when it is
generated. For example, the floor framing

information for Floor 2 is found on the 1st
tab, while the floor framing for Floor 1 is
found on the Foundation tab.
To automatically generate the floor framing
for Floor 1, a foundation on Floor 0 must be
present. If a Floor 0 has not been built, the
Build Floor Framing check box on the
Foundation tab will not be available.
475
Framing
Each Floor tab is divided into two halves:
The right half is for floor framing specifications, and applies to the model when
the floor above is living space.
The left half is for ceiling framing specifications, and is relevant only when the
1
2
3
4
floor in question is the top floor of the

plan.
If there is living space above the floor
corresponding to a particular Floor tab, the
Build Floor Framing check box will be
available. If there is no living space above
the floor, the Build Ceiling Framing check
box will be available instead.
9
10
11
12
5
7
6
8
1 Build Ceiling Framing - Check this
box and ceiling framing is regenerated

when the OK button is clicked.
2 Spacing - Enter a value for the spacing

of joists. If the platform is a floor
assembly, you can specify a rim joist with
the check box.
3 Specify if the framing members lap or
butt over a bearing wall. The lap is

eight inches (200 mm) and centered over the
support.
When the Framing Reference Marker is used
and butt over support is checked, the joists
are placed at reference spacing. If lap over
support is checked, the surface where the
joists lap is placed at the reference spacing
476
locations, so that joists are placed on either

side of the framing reference locations.
4 Use Framing Reference - This applies
to ceiling framing only. The Framing

Reference Marker is the starting point for
framing layout. If a reference is placed, the
center of the first joist is placed at this point
and spacing goes from there. If joists are
lapped, the surface is placed at this point.
If the check box is cleared, the program

attempts to position ceiling joists so that they
overlap rafters. Be sure to build the roof
framing first if you are doing this.
A Framing Reference Marker is not usually
used for both ceiling joists and nearby rafters
that run the same way because one is placed

on top of the other.
Stagger produces blocking that alternates on

either side of the line you draw.
For floor joists, the starting point for a joist

layout is always the Framing Reference
Marker. See Framing Reference Markers
on page 486.
Cross produces cross bridging that looks like

in line blocking in floor plan view, but shows
as cross bridging in 3D views and the
materials list.
5 The Joist width field specifies the

joist's actual thickness.
6 The Joist depth field specifies the
joist's vertical depth, which affects the

thickness of the floor or ceiling platform.
This is a default depth that can be overridden
per room by specifying Floor Structure
Thickness on the Structure tab of the Room
on page 299.
7 Type - Select the type of joist from the
drop-down list. The list includes

lumber, I-joist, glulam, engineered lumber,
lvl, steel-I and steel box. Changing the type
does not affect how framing is placed, but it
does change its appearance in cross section
and 3D views and in the Material List.
This is a default type that can be overridden

per room by specifying Floor Structure
Type on the Structure tab of the Room
on page 299.
8 Blocking / Bridging specifies how
blocking is manually drawn after joists

have been placed. A run of blocking displays
as separate pieces cut by the joists, but is
produced, moved and edited as a single
object.
In Line produces blocking pieces that align
with each other.
9 Specify the floor joist Spacing.

10 Rim Joist - Check this to automatically
produce a rim joist across the ends of

the floor joists. If this is not checked, line
blocking across the ends of the floor joists is
usually drawn in later.
11 Specify if the framing members lap or
butt over a bearing wall. The lap is

eight inches (200 mm) and centered over the
support.
When the Framing Reference Marker is used
and butt over support is checked, the joists
are placed at reference spacing. If lap over
support is checked, the surface where the
joists lap is placed at the reference spacing
locations, so that joists are placed on either
side of the framing reference locations.
12 Subfloor thickness - This is the
thickness of the floor sheathing and

applies to floor framing only.
The program adds the joist depth to the
subfloor thickness to determine the default
platform thickness in the Floor Defaults
dialog. This is a default thickness that can be
overridden by specifying it in the Structure
tab of the Room Specification dialog.
When viewing framing, Subfloor Thickness
may be represented by a gap. To remove this
gap, change the value to zero and rebuild the
framing. See Structure Tab on page 299.
477
Framing
If the material Concrete is applied to the

floor, platform thickness is specified in the
Foundation Defaults dialog. See

Building a Foundation on page 372.
Wall Tab
1
3
7
2
4
5
6
The Wall, Openings, and Headers tabs are all

referenced by the program to determine how
walls are framed. The settings on these three
tabs define how automatic framing generates
and how wall framing is calculated for the
Materials List.
You can still make changes to your plan
once you have framed your model. If
your changes affect framing, if a wall or ceiling were moved for instance, rebuild framing
to update the model.
1 Build Wall Framing - Check this box
to build wall framing for the entire

model. Framing is only built in walls whose
main layer materials type is framing. See
Wall Type Definitions on page 251.
478
Check Use wall framing material to

use the stud thickness and spacing
8
9
11
10
specified in the Define Material dialog of

the framing material selected for each wall
type. Uncheck this box to use the thickness
and spacing values below for all wall types.
3 Specify the Stud Thickness for all
walls in the plan. As long as its material

is set to a framing material type, stud depth is
set by the wall's main layer thickness.
4 Specify the Stud Spacing for all walls
in the plan. This spacing starts from the

framing reference mark, if one is present.
5 Build Wall Framing Details from
Exterior - Check this box to show wall

framing details from the exterior.
6 Bridging - Specify how and where
bridging is produced. Bridging displays

as separate pieces divided by the studs, but is
Check Exterior to automatically produce

bridging on external walls when wall
framing is built.
Check Interior to automatically produce

bridging on internal walls when wall
framing is built.
In Line produces bridging pieces that

align with each other. This applies to
automatically produced or manually
drawn bridging in the wall detail.
Stagger produces bridging that alternates

on either side of a center line along the
wall. This applies to automatically produced or manually drawn bridging in the
wall detail.
7 Specify the Number of Top Plates. A
single bottom plate is always provided.
8 Specify the Thickness of top and

bottom plates.
9 Mitre Plate Ends - Select the check
box to mitre the ends of the top and

bottom plates and corners that are not right
angles. If cleared, the top and bottom plates
butt together.
10 Rotate End Studs - Select the check
box to have the studs closest to the

mitre end be rotated to the angle of the mitre
cut. If it is cleared, the studs remain
perpendicular to the angle of the walls.
11 Horizontal Frame Thru - Select the
check box to specify the horizontal

walls in floor plan view to frame through,
butting vertical walls against them.
Otherwise, walls that are vertical in floor
plan view frame through.
Openings Tab
479
Framing
actually produced as a single object for each

wall and can be moved and edited in a Wall
Detail view as if it were a single object. See
Wall Framing Details on page 492.
1 Specify the default amount to Add for
Rough Opening to the nominal sizes of

wall openings.
These settings define the default rough
openings values on the General tabs of the
Window and Door Specification
dialogs, and can be overridden on an objectby-object basis. See Door Specification
Dialog on page 315 and Window
The specification dialogs show these values
differently in that they show the total amount
added to the opening for both height and
width. The width, if defaulted, is twice the
Each Side value in the Build Framing
dialog, and the height is the sum of the Top
and Bottom values.
Top - Specify the space to allow from the top
of the opening to the bottom of the header.
Bottom - Specify the space to allow from the
bottom of the opening to the top of the sill
plate.
Each Side - Specify the space to allow from
each side of an opening to the side of the
trimmer or stud nearest it.
2 Specify when to build more than one
Trimmer, or supporting header, based

on wall opening width.
Double Trimmer At - Openings as wide as
this value have two trimmers on each side.
Triple Trimmer At - Openings as wide as
this value have three trimmers.
Max Bay Trimmers - Trimmers for a bay or
bow window may be suppressed by entering
zero into Max Bay Trimmers. Enter 1 to
have one trimmer on each side, and a greater
number to have the number of trimmers
480
determined by the Double Trimmer At and

Triple Trimmer At values used above.
A bay window with a top lower than the top
of the wall it is placed in usually contains a
header spanning the entire bay. Trimmers are
usually not needed for this header since the
studs in the wall support it. The same is true
for most bow windows.
Bay Component Thickness - Enter the
dimensions for a thinner trimmer which is
used if a standard trimmer does not fit. The
default for this value is 3/4 inch or 20mm.
Space can be tight in a bay or bow window,
and a desired component window size may
not fit into the bay or bow if standard size
trimmers are used. If this is the case, the
trimmers are omitted and a metal bracket or
other means of supporting the header is
needed.
Bay window components default to a size
that allows one standard trimmer when a bay
is first created. When the bay as a whole is
moved and resized, its components
automatically resize to fit a standard trimmer.
If you select the bay and use the Tab key to
select the individual component window on
which you clicked, you can resize that
component either by selecting it and
dragging from a side handle, or by selecting
it and clicking the Open Object
edit
button in order to modify it using the
Window Specification dialog. You can
resize it larger until there is only room for the
thinner trimmer or for no trimmer at all.
Once a component is resized in this way, it
retains its size if at all possible while the
overall bay is moved or resized. If the bay is
resized in such a way that the component
becomes too large to fit, the component
resumes its default behavior, resizing as its

containing bay window is resized.
3 Specify the construction of the window

Sills, which refer to the framing below
the window rather than the finished sill.
Thickness - Specify the thickness for the sill.

Double Sill - Check this box to specify a
double sill for all windows.
Framing
Headers Tab
3
4
5
6
Chief Architect does not calculate loads

or bearings. It is dependent upon user
input and does not attempt any structural
analysis. Always consult your local building
authorities and contact a licensed engineer
for structural calculations.
1 Specify the header depth dependent on
the opening width. These values should

be set so that the wider the opening, the
deeper the header.
2 Precut - Select the check box to show
precut headers in the Material List.

Precut headers are shown only if the walls
have been framed.
If this is unchecked, the Material List

produces a total footage for all headers.
When checked, each different length of
precut header is listed separately. Note that
the total number of headers is twice the
number of openings if Count is set to 2.
3 Thickness - Specify header thickness.

4 Count - Enter the Count of boards
required to make the header. Using this

number, the program generates a count of
header stock for you in the Material List.
When using stock as thin as 1-1/2 inches,
headers are usually doubled or laminated, so
481
the default number of boards making up a

header in Count is 2.
5 Max Depth - If the top of the rough
opening is closer to the top plate than

the value in Max Depth, a solid header is
produced to fill the entire area. This disables
the building of short cripple studs between

the top of the header top and bottom of the
plate. The default of 12 1/16 inch works well
for 68 headers in 80 walls.
6 Type - Specify the type of material

used for headers.
Posts/Beams Tab
1
2
6
7
8
9
Posts and beams are drawn manually. They

are not produced with the automatic framing.
1 Depth - Enter the vertical depth of

beams in the plan.
2 Thickness - Enter the beam thickness,

which appears as width in floor plan
view.
3 Type -Select the type of beam from the

can affect how the beam appears in cross
section and 3D views and in the material list.
482
11
10
4 Under Joists/With Joists - A beam can
be drawn under the joists or up in the

floor platform with the joists. If the joist
depths and subfloor thickness have been set
in the Build Framing dialog, the beam
height is properly positioned even if the
joists have not yet been produced. If With
Joists is specified the beams should be
drawn before framing is automatically
produced. Then the joists are broken and
butted to the beam.
5 Outer Layer/Main Layer - When a
beam is drawn along and over an

exterior wall, its outer surface snaps to either
Posts are produced manually by clicking in

floor plan view where a post is desired using
the Post
tool.
6 Dimension - A post is created initially
square with each side having this

dimension. It can be subsequently edited to
have a rectangular shape with any
dimensions.
7 Type - Select a type of post from the

can affect how the post appears in cross

section and 3D views and in the material list.
8 Top (from floor) - When a post is
created on the lowest floor of a plan, a

footing for it is automatically produced. The
top of this footing is this distance below the
bottom of the floor platform.
9 Width - Width of the automatically

produced footing under a new post.
10 Height - Height of the automatically

produced footing under a new post.
11 Square/Round - The new footing is
created either square or round in floor

plan view.
Roof Tab
7
2
3
4
5
6
1 Build Roof Framing - Check this box
once roof planes have been built to

build roof framing for the entire model.
automatically producing rafters. It also sets

the initial offset value for laying out rafters
using the Multiple Copy
edit button.
Spacing - Specify the rafter spacing.

This spacing is used when
483
Framing
the walls outer layer or outer main layer, as

specified here.
Use Framing Reference - Select the

check box if you want to use a defined
starting point for rafter layout.
Note: Use Framing Reference is useful

when framing a gable roof, but not necessarily for a hip roof. When the Framing Reference is used, common rafters on either side
of a hip rafter do not meet in the same place.
If the Framing Reference is not used, the
automatic framing utility starts common rafter
spacing from each end of the horizontal
ridges, which results in common rafters on
either side of hip jacks meeting each other.
4 If Angled
Dormer Hole is
checked, a gable roof
dormer creates a five
sided hole in a roof
plane, with the two top
edges formed by the
valleys of the dormer.
An angled doubleheader runs between
the doubled rafters on
one side to the ridge.
On the opposite side, a shorter angled
doubled header frames the other valley.
If the Angled Dormer
Hole check box is
cleared, a rectangular
hole is framed to
contain the dormer
area, with its double
headers placed where
the peak of the dormer
roof meets the main
roof plane. Rafters are
placed within this hole at the top along the
valleys formed by the dormer roof sections.
If the top cross headers do not fit within the
484
roof plane, angled headers are produced

regardless of the state of the check box.
5 Rafter Type - Select the type of rafter
from the drop-down list. The list

includes lumber, I-joist, glulam, engineered
lumber, lvl, steel-I and steel box. This
changes the type for rafters, but not for
ridges or fascia. These can be changed
manually after the roof framing is produced
if desired.
Changing the type does not affect how the
rafters are placed, but it does change how
they appear in cross section and 3D views
and the Materials List entries for this
framing.
6 Blocking/Bridging - specifies how
blocking is manually drawn after the

rafters have been placed. Blocking is
produced as a single object, but displays as
separate pieces chopped up by the rafters, but
it is moved and edited as if it were a single
framing object.
Blocking is produced perpendicular to the
roof plane, so blocking as seen in floor plan
view represents the position of the top of the
blocking.
In Line produces blocking pieces that align
with each other.
Stagger produces blocking that alternates on
either side of the line you draw.
Cross produces cross bridging that looks like
in line blocking in floor plan view, but shows
as cross bridging in 3D views and the
materials list. Cross bridging is seldom used
with rafters.
7 The Width and Depth for Rafter,
Ridge, Fascia, Eave Fascia and

Lookouts may all be set in the Roof tab.
Trusses Tab
2
3
Framing
6
4
The parameters set in this tab apply to any

subsequently drawn trusses. They can be
overridden for any selected group of trusses
using the Truss Specification dialog. The
program uses these values to model trusses
for graphic representation only.
Chief Architect does not engineer
trusses. Always consult an engineer or
truss company to have your trusses
professionally designed.
1 Top Chord - Specify the depth of the

Top Chord.
2 Bottom Chord - Specify the depth of

the Bottom Chord.
3 Webbing - Specify the depth of the

Webbing.
4 For triangular trusses, check Require
Kingpost to require a vertical member

from the roof peak to the bottom chord.
If this is not checked, a vertical member may

still be supplied, depending on what is
needed to support the chords at or closer than
the specified maximum spans.
5 Under Maximum Span, set the
maximum length between junctions of

the supporting webbing to the Top Chord
and Bottom Chord. Changing these values
may cause different truss configurations such
as kingpost, queenpost, fink, howe, fan,
double fink, or double howe to be
represented. Experiment to see what type of
trusses are possible.
These distances are measured horizontally
for both rafters and joists. In some
circumstances, especially with more
complex trusses, making these spans equal
may result in the webbing appearing more
normal or standard. See Trusses on page
501.
485
6 Roof and Floor/Ceiling - Specifies
whether the settings apply to Roof

trusses or Floor/Ceiling trusses.
Truss Spacing
To set the truss spacing, select any truss,
framing object, or CAD object in floor plan
view, then click the Multiple Copy
edit
button. The Multiple Copy dialog opens if
the Multiple Copy
edit button is clicked
again. This dialog sets the truss spacing and
spacing for CAD objects. The spacing for
joists, rafters and wall studs are noted but
cannot be set in this dialog. These spacings
are set in the Build Framing dialog.
Materials Tab
The Material tab sets the default materials
used for framing objects in 3D and render
views. These material specifications are not
used for material take-offs. Materials List
information, is derived from the structure
type of each framing object.
Changes made on the Materials tab of the
Build Framing dialog only effect
subsequently created framing, whether it is
automatically generated or manually drawn.
The Materials tab of the Build Framing
dialog is the same as the Materials tab on
many other specification dialogs. See

Framing Reference Markers are
reference points that specify how to lay
out automatically-produced framing. Layout
for wall, ceiling and floor framing starts at
the closest framing reference marker
measured from the center of the area to be
framed.
486
If no framing reference marker is found on

the floor being framed, the closest framing
reference marker on the first floor is used.
Normally, a single framing reference marker
on the first floor plan is used for the entire
house.
Using Framing References
Wall framing and automatically-produced

floor joists are always positioned by the
program using the framing reference marker.
You can elect to not use the framing
reference marker for positioning rafters and
ceiling joists in the Build Framing dialog.
Placing Framing
Reference Markers
To place a Framing Reference Marker, select
Build> Framing> Framing Reference
Manually drawn joists, rafters, trusses

and studs can be moved a proper
distance from a framing reference marker.
Any selected group of framing objects that
are all parallel to each other can be moved
using the Move to Framing Ref
button.
These should have proper spacing relative to
each other before the move. Only one of the
objects is compared to the framing reference
and moved; the remaining objects are simply
moved the same amount as the first object.
To move framing objects to a framing
reference marker
1.
Group select the framing objects.
Marker
. Click in floor plan view to
place the framing reference marker. A corner
of the first framing member snaps to this
point and all other framing members are laid
out from there.
2.
Click the Move to Framing Ref

button.
3.
The framing members are moved to the

nearest Framing Reference Marker.
Framing reference markers snap to CAD

objects first, and then to a wall main layer
surface or corner if possible.
The Move to Framing Ref

button
references the on-center spacing distance set
in the Build Framing dialog, when it
positions a joist relative to the framing
reference marker. The first joist is this
distance from the reference marker.
To accurately position a marker, first

position a CAD point then create the
marker on top of it. See Input Line on page
847.

can be
modified just like other markers. See
edit
The spacing that is used for moving any

framing object can be viewed by selecting
the object and double-clicking the Multiple
edit button. The Copy Layout
Distances dialog shows the spacing for
Copy
each framing object type. The initial spacing

for floor and ceiling joists depends on the
platform containing them. The default
spacing for a platform is set in the Build
Framing dialog. A spacing specific to a
487
Framing
Note: It is a good idea to place at least one

framing reference marker on Floor 1. If no
framing reference markers exist in your plan,
the point at 0, 0 is used as the framing reference marker location. This point may not be
located near your plan.
particular floor or ceiling platform is set in a

joist direction Line contained within the
platform. See Joist Direction Lines on

page 489.
Bearing Lines
Bearing Lines direct the program to
lap or butt joists and/or rafters where
they cross the line instead of framing across
it to the next wall.
Bearing lines snap to the center of nearby

parallel walls when framing is built.
Select Build> Framing> Bearing Line

,
then click and drag to draw a bearing line as
you would draw a CAD line. Bearing lines
are edited just like CAD lines or polylines, as
well. See Editing Line Based Objects on
page 95 or Editing Open Polyline Based
If a bearing line exists, the program laps or
butts the joist and/or rafters over the line,
depending on the option selected in the
Build Framing dialog. See Floor Tabs on
page 475.
Joists lapping over a Bearing Line
A bearing line should start outside the floor

or ceiling platform and end outside of it,
passing completely through the building.
488
Joists butting over a Bearing

Line and interior wall
A platform can be split into two by a bearing

line, and the joist direction and/or depth can
be specified separately on each side of the
bearing line. Each platform takes on
properties given by the joist direction line it
contains. See Joist Direction Lines on page
489.
Placing a Floor/Ceiling Beam
in a plan
also can also have the same effect as a
Bearing Line when Bearing Beam is
checked in its Beam Specification
dialog. See Beam Specification Dialog on
page 498.
Note: Always rebuild framing after drawing
the Bearing Line in order to update the model
using the new information.
A Joist Direction Line defines the

direction joists are laid out. Every floor
platform can have its own joist direction. If a
direction line is not specified, the joists are
run the way that makes them shortest.
Select Build> Framing> Joist Direction
The text along the joist direction line states

the joist size and spacing for the platform.
Unless the individual joist direction line is
edited, these values reflect the settings
specified on the appropriate floor tab of the
Build Framing dialog.
and draw a joist direction line as you

would draw a CAD line.
Joist Direction
The Joist Direction Line controls the joist
depth and spacing information for the floor
or ceiling platform containing it.
To change this information, click a joist
direction line to select it and click the Open
edit button. The Joist
Direction Specification dialog opens.
Object
489
Framing
Define the joist Spacing for the platform.
Define the Depth for these joists. In most

instances, this is not the recommended
method for specifying joist depth. You
should instead use the Floor Structure
Thickness and Subfloor Thickness
boxes in the Structure tab of the Room
Specification dialog for the rooms
over these platforms.
The Joist Direction Line changes the joist

specification for the entire platform, but does
not affect the settings in the Build Framing
dialog. Settings in the Joist Direction
Specification dialog affect subsequently
produced framing only in the platform that
contains the selected joist direction.
Note: For the Depth value to take effect,
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings to regenerate the platform with the proper thickness.
Using Joist Direction Lines

Two Joist Direction Lines, one on either
side of a Bearing Line, can split a platform
into two for the purpose of defining different
framing specifications for each area.
A less common application would be to use a
single joist direction line across two separate
platforms in order to define a single framing
specification for both platforms. This is
illustrated by the following example:
A 1 1/2 story house is shown in cross section
in the diagram.
490
Ceiling Platform
Floor Platform
Normally, the program produces a floor

platform under the second floor living area
and a ceiling platform under the eave area,
which is not a room area.
This is fine if the first floor has supporting
walls or a large beam under the second floor
kneewalls. If it does not, the floor platform
should extend to the first floor outside
supporting walls, replacing the ceiling joists.
Use joist direction lines to define separate
floor platforms under the second floor living
area and ceiling platforms under the attic
eave area or one continuous framed platform
across both spaces.
To connect a floor and ceiling platform into a
single platform, draw a Joist Direction Line
that crosses the boundary between them.
Following is a diagram of the original
framing with the new Joist Direction Line
spanning the knee wall area.
New Joist
Direction Line
(Note: Several framing members have been

deleted to make the new Joist Direction Line
more visible.)
Although the framing of the 2nd floor
platform is being edited here, the joist
direction is drawn on the first floor. In Chief
Architect, floor platform framing displays
with the floor below, so its joist direction
information must be placed there, as well.
Framing
Original
Framing
Knee Wall on 2nd

Floor shown in
reference
The 3D view of the framing also reflects the

change.
Floor and Ceiling

Joists combined
You must click the Rebuild Walls/ Floors/

Ceilings
button after placing a Joist
Direction Line before the changes take
effect.
Next, rebuild the floor framing for the
second floor and the ceiling framing for the
first floor. The floor framing now spans into
the area which was previously framed using
ceiling joists.
491
Wall Framing Details

Wall framing is produced when the Build
Wall Framing check box on the Wall tab of
the Build Framing dialog is selected. Wall
framing displays in floor plan, 3D, and cross
section/elevation views. A Wall Detail for
each wall in the model is also created when
framing is built.
Wall Details are special elevation views of
the wall framing for individual walls. Unlike
CAD details, a wall framing detail cannot be
opened from the CAD Details dialog.
To open a Wall Detail from floor plan view,
select a wall and click the Open Wall Detail
edit button. If no framing has been
produced for a particular wall, the Open
Wall Detail
edit button is not available
when the wall is selected.
A wall framing detail is comprised of a
polyline that forms the boundary of the wall
and the framing members within the wall.
The framing members of a wall are the studs,
plates and headers. These are standard
framing objects and are placed on the
Framing, Wall layer in the Layer Display
When you open a detail, inspect it and
carefully compare the framing layout to your
model.
A wall framing detail shows the wall as it
would appear if viewed from the inside.
Change this interior view to an exterior view
by selecting the Build Wall Framing
Details from the Exterior check box on the
492
Wall tab of the Build Framing dialog. See

Wall Tab on page 478.
Wall framing details for interior walls are
displayed from the inside as well. Select a
wall and look for the S (Start) and E (End)
indicators to determine which is the inside
edge. Temporarily change the line color of
the bottom line for the interior wall type in
the Wall Type Definitions dialog, and the
inside edge becomes obvious in floor plan
view. To display the wall detail from the
opposite side for any interior wall, select the
wall, open it and select Flip Layers on the
dialog. Rebuild wall framing and the wall
framing detail is now shown from the
opposite side.
Most framing objects occupy the entire
thickness of the wall main layer. Some, such
as a component of a doubled header or a
corner sheetrock nailer, may be turned flat
and oriented to one side of the wall.
Doubled headers display one behind the
other in the wall framing detail. Access
doubled objects by clicking one, then
pressing the Tab key or Next
to select the other.
edit button
The boundary of a wall detail is a polyline

that marks the boundary of the wall framing.
The polyline is placed on the Wall Polyline
layer in the Layer Display Options dialog
and is not typically displayed. You may find
it helpful to display it for reference if you are
extensively editing the wall. The layer
should remain locked.
Note: When a wall or an opening is modified,

the framing detail is not be automatically
updated. Rebuild wall framing to show the
changes. If wall framing has not been built, it
is only estimated for the Material List.
Any edits made to wall framing in the wall

detail are lost if you rebuild the wall framing
from the Build Framing dialog. To prevent
this for a particular wall or group of walls,
select them, open the Wall Specification
dialog, and check Retain Wall Framing on
the General tab.
Framing
If any wall framing has been produced, the

framing objects in each wall are included in
the Material List, listing an accurate
accounting of each type, amount, and length
of the required framing objects.

Before building any framing, review the
settings on all tabs of the Build
Framing dialog.
Draw a framing member by dragging as you

would a line or a wall. By default, a framing
object measures1 1/2 inches or 38mm thick.
The depth is determined by the width of the
walls main layer.
In a Wall Detail, select CAD> Boxes and

Framing> Framing
to draw studs and
plates. Although uncommon, you can also
use it to draw a general framing object in
floor plan view.
When drawn in a wall detail, the framing

member is placed in the wall.
If you draw a general framing member in
floor plan view, the top of the framing
member is placed at height 0.
Displaying Framing
The display of framing members is
221.
In the CAD Defaults dialog you can
specify new framing members to be drawn
with a white fill. This helps distinguish new
framing members from previously drawn
framing members. See CAD Defaults on
page 842.
In Floor Plan View

Joists and rafters are represented in floor plan
view by CAD objects that are essentially
long, thin rectangles. By default, framing
polylines have a solid white fill, and new
members display in front of older ones. See
CAD Defaults Dialog on page 878.
Framing and trusses can be represented by a
single line instead of as a polyline by
checking Use line for framing on the Line
Properties panel of the Preferences
493
dialog. See Line Properties Panel on page

200.
In Cross Section/
Elevation Views
In 3D Views
To display framing in a cross section/

elevation view, make sure the framing layers
are checked in the default layer set for Cross
Sections. See Layer Set Defaults Dialog on
page 225.
The easiest way to view framing in 3D is to

use either the Vector Framing Overview
or Render Framing Overview
tool,
which displays the model using the 3D
Framing Set layer set.
Framing objects can display in other 3D and
cross section/elevation views, although by
default they are not set to do so. If you wish
to see framing in other views, turn on the
framing layers in the appropriate layer set.
You can also use the Delete View Surface

tool to temporarily delete the surfaces of
wall layers or other objects that block the
view.
In cross section/elevation views, framing
objects that are cut by the cross section plane
display as boxes containing an X.
To reveal framing covered by other objects

or wall layers, use the Delete View Surface
tool.
Editing Framing
Video: Editing Framing
Framing members can be individually
selected in all views. Some framing members
can be group selected. Once selected,
framing members can be edited using the edit
handles, edit toolbar buttons, or the
Framing Specification dialog. See
Framing Specification Dialog on page 497.

Framing members can be drawn, edited and
moved much the way CAD lines can. See
Editing Line Based Objects on page 95.
In Cross Section/Elevation views, joists and
rafters cut by the cross section and displaying
a cross box can also be edited. See Editing
494
Box-Based Objects on page 111. Also, in

Cross Section/Elevation views headers can
be edited like closed polylines. See Editing
107.
In a camera view or overview, the handles
that display on a framing member depend on
where it is clicked for selection and your
current zoom factor.
Click the top surface to display the same

edit handles as in floor plan view, allowing you to rotate, move, and extend or
shorten the length of the member.
Click a side surface to display the same

edit handles as in an elevation view, one
at each end and one at the center.
Editing Framing
Zoom in and click on the appropriate

edge to display edit handles that control
the width and depth of framing members.

Group on page 122.

edit button to
add a complete break to the selected
object. See Break Line on page 130.


edit button

edit button to created a mitered joint. See Fillet
Two Lines on page 131.
Click the Move to Framing Reference

A selected framing member can be edited in
edit toolbar. As with most objects, framing
members can be copied, replicated, moved,
deleted, etc. See Using the Edit Toolbar on
page 97.
Wall framing cannot be copied in Wall Detail
windows but not in floor plan view.

edit button
edit button
Move on page 125.
edit button to make the selected framing member parallel or perpendicular to

edit button
to center most objects along the edge of a
on page 127.
edit
about another object. See Reflect About
Object on page 135.
edit button to move the selected

object to a framing reference. See Framing Reference Markers on page 486.
Mitered Joints
Mitered joints can be created using the Fillet
Two Lines
edit button. Click on the end
edge of a framing member such as a joist,
click the Fillet Two Lines
edit button,
then click on the end edge of another nearby
joist to extend one framing item to another
framing item and join them with angled cut.
See Fillet Two Lines on page 131.
Wall Details
In a Wall Detail, the length, width and
location of any wall framing member can be
changed using the edit handles. See Wall
Framing Details on page 492.
495
Framing
Roof and Floor Trusses

Roof and floor trusses cannot be edited like
regular framing members can and are
discussed in their own chapter. See Editing
Truss Shape on page 505.
Because framing does not update when
a plan is modified, it is best to wait until
your design is final before editing framing.
Deleting Framing
Individual and group-selected framing
members can be deleted the way other
objects in the program are. See Deleting
Categories of framing, such as wall framing
or floor and ceiling framing, can also be
deleted in the Delete Objects dialog. See
Delete Objects Dialog on page 141.
Keeping Framing Current

When you modify your plan, move walls,
raise or lower platforms or redesign the roof,
any framing present in the plan does not
update to reflect your changes. In order for
the framing to be updated, you must
regenerate automatically produced framing
and either edit or delete and replace manual
framing.
Automatic Framing
When floor, ceiling or roof framing is
regenerated, all automatically produced
framing objects and any copies of them are
deleted and new framing is calculated.
When wall framing is rebuilt, all objects in

each Wall Detail are deleted and regenerated
unless Retain Wall Framing is checked in
the General tab of the Wall Specification
dialog for that wall.
Manual Framing
Any manually drawn framing objects and
copies of them are retained when framing is
rebuilt.
If a plan is not final, do not spend a lot of
time altering or copying automatically
produced framing objects. It is best to wait
until your design is final before doing
manual framing work.
Framing and the Materials List

Each framing member created in the plan is
counted in the Materials List. This list is as
accurate as the framing in the plan that
produces it. See Materials Lists on page
1003.
Depending on the type of framing member, it

may show as R (Roofing), SF (Sub Floor), or
F (Framing general).
R (Roofing) contains trusses, rafters and
sheathing .
SF (Sub Floor) contains all floor and ceiling
framing joists including sheathing.
496
2.
It is important to note that the Materials List

can be produced either of two ways.
Roof framing is treated the same way.
1.
If no framing has been produced in the

model, then the amount of framing that
would be produced is estimated as accurately as possible. Total lineal footage
for various depths of rafter and joist
material is given, rather than a quantity
of specific lumber lengths and sizes.
If framing objects exist, then the framing

members are counted instead of estimated for the Material List.
1.
If no roof framing objects are found, an

estimation is done.
2.
If even one rafter is created, the program

assumes roof framing has been produced
and the Material List produces a count
of the rafters found in the model.

Select a floor joist, ceiling joist, or rafter and
edit button to
open the Framing Specification dialog

for the framing member type selected.
General Tab
5
6
1
7
2
3
1 Changing one of the following three
objects can cause changes in the other

two. Checking the radio button in front of
one of the following three objects prevent

that objects value from changing.
497
Framing
F (Framing general) contains all wall

framing and the framing members created by
a CAD framing box.
Top Height is the height of the top of the

framing object. This is an absolute height,
where 0 is the first floor. For a rafter this is
the top height at its low end.
Bottom Height is the height of the bottom of
the framing object. This is an absolute
height, where 0 is the first floor. For a rafter
this is the bottom height its low end.
Depth is the depth of the framing object. For
a rafter this is the depth measured
perpendicular to the roof plane.
Raise/Lower - Enter a value to raise or lower
the framing object from its current position.
Once a value is entered, the other controls
are disabled. The amount is added to both the
top height and the bottom height when you
click OK, and does not affect the depth.
2 Length of the framing object. For a
rafter this length is measured along the

top of the rafter, and so is greater than the
length measured in floor plan view.
Changing this expands or contracts the
framing object about the location specified
by the radio buttons described below.
3 Angle of the framing object in floor
plan view. Changing this rotates the

object about the location specified by the
radio buttons described below.
4 Specify the point the framing object
expands or rotates around. Start refers

to the location from which you started
drawing the framing object.
5 Set the framing members Thickness,
which appears as its width in floor plan
view.
6 Type - Select the type of joist from the

does not affect how the framing is placed, but
it does change how it appears in cross section
and 3D views and the Material List entries
for this framing.
7 Manual Rafter Height - This
checkbox is only available for rafters.

Normally, the height of each end of a rafter is
reset after any move or edit so that it is
located just under the roof surface. Check
this box to allow the height of the rafter to be
changed.
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
Beam Specification Dialog

Select a beam and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Beam
498
General Tab
Line Style Tab
Framing Specification Dialog on page 497.

When Bearing Beam is checked, the beam
behaves like a Bearing Line, and joists break
above it. See Bearing Lines on page 488.
Note: If a beam structure type is specified as
concrete, the beam does not appear as such
in the materials list. Instead, the amount of
concrete required for all such beams and for
all such posts is listed. In addition, the square
footage required for beam forms, and for post
forms is also listed.

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab

General Tab
4
1
2
3
1 Lock - These four values are
interrelated. Selecting the radio button
for one of these values prevent thats value

from changing.
499
Framing
The General Tab of the Beam

Specification dialog is similar to the
General Tab of the Framing
Specification dialog for joists. See
2 Top Height is the height of the top of
the post. This is an absolute height,

where 0 is the first floor.
Bottom Height is the height of the bottom of

the post. This is an absolute height, where 0
is the first floor.
Total Height - The height of the post, or the
difference between the top height and the
bottom height.
Raise/Lower - Enter a value to raise or lower
the post from its current position. Once a
value is entered, the other controls are
disabled. The amount is added to both the top
height and the bottom height when you click
OK, and does not affect the total height.
500
3 Post Width 1 & 2- Specify the post

width in each dimension.
Specify the Angle of the posts rotation.
4 Type - Select a type from the drop
down list. Choices include lumber, Ijoist, glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel-I
and steel box. Changing the type does not
affect how the post is placed, but it does
change how it appears in cross section, 3D
views, and Material List entries.
Note: If a concrete Type is specified, the post
is not listed as such in the Materials List.
Instead, the amount of concrete required for
all concrete beams and posts is listed. The
square footage required for beam forms, and
for post forms is also listed.
Chapter 16:
Trusses
Trusses
Chapter Overview
There are two basic ways to frame a roof.
The first is commonly called stick framing,
or sometimes handstacking or cut-andstack. This type of roof incorporates
framing such as rafters, ridges, and ceiling
joists. See Framing on page 469.
The other method is to use prefabricated,
engineered roof trusses. Chief Architect
allows you to design and display a wide
variety of trusses.
Disclaimer
Chief Architect does not engineer trusses.
The trusses displayed by Chief Architect are
for illustrative purposes only. They can show
how trusses are used in your plan, and help
you communicate to the licensed engineer
who produces your final truss design where
you want your trusses and how you would
like them to work.
Chapter Contents
Floor and Ceiling Trusses

Roof Trusses
Editing Trusses
Editing Truss Shape
Truss Details
Truss Labels
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing
Truss Base
Hip Trusses
Girder Trusses
Scissors Trusses
Truss Base Specification Dialog
Roof Truss Specification Dialog
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog
Always have your truss designs

approved by a licensed engineer.
501
Floor and Ceiling Trusses

Floor and ceiling trusses can be used
instead of joists to frame platforms. As
with manually-drawn floor and ceiling
framing, the room type above determines
whether a floor or ceiling truss is drawn. For
example, a truss drawn on the first floor of a
single story home will be a ceiling truss,
while a truss drawn on the first floor of a
two-story building will be a floor truss for
the 2nd floor.
To place a floor or ceiling truss in your plan,
select Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling
Roof trusses seek an exterior wall and adjust

their length automatically. Floor trusses do
not, but if you start or end your truss close to
a wall surface or CAD object, the truss snaps
to the surface or object.
The Trusses tab of the Build Framing
dialog contains default settings for floor and
ceiling trusses. See Trusses Tab on page
485. These default settings can be overridden
by the settings in the Floor/Ceiling Truss
Specification dialog. See Floor/Ceiling
Truss Specification Dialog on page 521.
Truss
. Click and drag to create a truss in
floor plan view.
Roof Trusses
Roof trusses can only be built after roof
and ceiling planes are modeled. Select
Build> Framing> Roof Truss, then click
and drag in floor plan view within one or
more roof planes to manually draw a roof
truss.
Draw a truss as you would a CAD line, by
dragging from the start of the truss to the
end. The first truss can be drawn over a gable
end wall or at the ridge end of a hip roof. The
program shapes the truss so that it fits
properly between the roof and ceiling planes.
502
contract based on the roof and ceiling planes

that define it.
Trusses can end on interior walls. You can
draw a truss that partially crosses the
building by starting and/or ending it within
two feet (600mm) of the interior wall. The
truss extends over the walls main layer. Its
end lines up with the main layer surface on
the far side of the wall.
One or both ends of the truss may be

truncated if they come against existing roof
trusses. If a truss is drawn across another
truss, it terminates exactly on the surface of
the existing truss, producing a girder truss.
A roof truss can exist only between roof and

ceiling planes. You cannot draw a roof truss
above an area where you have unchecked
Ceiling over this room in the Room
Specification dialog. If this check box is
cleared, you must manually draw a ceiling
plane before a roof truss can be drawn over
that area. See Structure Tab on page 299.
If the roof or ceiling planes vary, so do the

trusses. The ends of a truss expand or
The placement of webbing in a newly drawn

truss is controlled by the Top Chord and
Roof Trusses
If you intend to use roof trusses, select the

Trusses (no birdsmouth) check box in the
Build Roof dialog. When this is selected,
the rafter depth that determines the roof
plane thickness is taken from the Top Chord
depth on the Trusses tab of the Framing
dialog. If it is not checked, the roof plane
thickness is determined by the rafter Depth
setting on the Roof tab.
When Trusses (no birdsmouth) is selected
and Raise Off Plate is zero, the bottom edge
of the top chord bears on the top of the
exterior supporting wall at the outside edge
of the main layer. No birdsmouth is provided.
room, such as in a cape cod style home. The

following is a typical cross section view of a
building with attic trusses:
Certain conditions should be met before an

attic truss can be built.
Building should be of sufficient width to

allow for attic space.
The pitch, designated in the Build Roof

dialog, should provide appropriate ceiling
height for storage or living space. The
goal is to create a continuous plane from
the roofs ridge to the first story baseline.
Typical pitches for such a condition range
from 8 in 12 to 12 in 12, or greater.
The truss top chord can be raised by entering

the distance from the top plate to the bottom
of the chord in Raise Off Plate in the Build
Roof dialog.
If the program does not have enough
information to model the trusses, a warning
message displays. For example, a truss that is
under the roof overhang but not over a
ceiling produces this message:
Once these conditions are met, a roof truss is

ready to be designated as an attic truss.
1.

edit
button to display the Roof Truss
Roof and ceiling surfaces too close

together or cannot be found, so cannot
make truss.
The incorrect truss may still display in floor
plan view with a label of the form TR-*. If
it does, it should be deleted or moved. See
Using the Edit Toolbar on page 504.
Attic Trusses
Select the roof truss in floor plan view
2.
Select the Attic Truss check box and

click OK. See Roof Truss Specification
Dialog on page 518.
The final product can be scrutinized in a

framing overview or as a CAD detail, see
Truss Details on page 505.
Attic trusses, a useful variation of roof

trusses, can be drawn if a plan contains an
attic area to either side and above an upstairs
503
Trusses
Bottom Chord settings under Maximum

Span on the Trusses tab of the Framing
dialog. See Trusses Tab on page 485.
Editing Trusses
Trusses can be selected like other objects in
Chief Architect. See Selecting Objects on
page 92 for more information.
If drawn along an exterior wall, it snaps

so that its outer surface is flush with the
outer surface of the wall's main layer.
Once selected, trusses can be edited using

dimensions, their edit handles, the edit
toolbar buttons, or by opening them for
specification.
The center line can snap to the edge or

corner of a nearby roof plane. To prevent
this, zoom in closer while moving it or
Trusses can be deleted all at once in the

Delete Objects dialog. See Delete
When selected in Cross Section/Elevation

views and 3D views, trusses edit like closed
polylines. See Editing Closed-Polyline
Using Dimensions
Trusses can be relocated precisely using
dimensions. See Moving Objects Using

When selected in floor plan view, trusses edit
like lines. See Editing Line Based Objects
on page 95.
When a truss is moved, its shape updates to
conform to the roof and ceiling plane
positions in its new location.
If a truss has been locked, the size does not
update if the truss is moved, but maintains its
original settings. See Roof Truss
The width and depth of truss chords can be
changed in the trusss specification dialog,
but not using the edit handles.
When a roof truss is moved, it snaps to two
things:
504
toggle Object Snaps
off.
Like joists or rafters, trusses can be selected

and moved in 3D views. The only difference
is that the Lock Truss and Webbing setting
in the Roof Truss Specification dialog
prevents the truss from moving back to
between the roof and ceiling planes the next
time it is edited or otherwise changed.

A selected truss can be edited in a variety of
ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar.
As with most objects, trusses can be copied,
replicated, moved, and deleted. See Using
the Edit Toolbar on page 97.
The following edit buttons may display on
the edit toolbar for selected trusses.

button
selected door, particularly the wall it is
placed in.

edit button to
open the truss for specification. the truss
specification dialogs are covered at the
end of this chapter.
Editing Truss Shape
In floor plan view, an individual truss or a

selected group of trusses that are all
parallel to each other can be moved the
proper distance from a framing reference
marker using the Move to Framing Ref
edit button. See Framing Reference
3.

edit button
again to open the Multiple Copy dialog. See Multiple Copy on page 139.
4.
Enter the correct spacing in the All

Trusses box. Once set, click OK.
5.
Select the truss and use the Move edit

handle to drag it perpendicularly. The
Copying Trusses
When a truss has been edited to suit your
needs, use the Multiple Copy
edit tool to
create duplicates at specified intervals. The
copies conform to the roof and ceiling plane
positions in their new location.
To use Multiple Copy
1.
Select the truss to be copied in floor plan

view.
2.

button.
pointer becomes a four-headed arrow

when it is over the Move handle.
6.
New trusses appear as you drag. Drag as

far as necessary to produce all desired
trusses. Each truss is created according
to the particular Roof/Ceiling/Truss
Base planes above and below it.
If copied trusses become different from the

original as a result of the roof/ceiling planes
around them, their labels are different from
that of the original. See Truss Labels on
page 506.
edit
Editing Truss Shape

When a truss is viewed at a 90 degree angle
in a cross section/elevation view, its shape
can be edited. Click on the truss to select it
and edit handles display on a surrounding
polyline. Change the shape of this polyline
and the truss regenerates inside it. Use this
function to change overhang or truss end
details rather than the overall truss shape.
The Lock truss and webbing attribute is set

after editing so that the truss does not reshape
itself back between the roof and ceiling
planes the next time it is edited or otherwise
changed. See Roof Truss Specification
Dialog on page 518.
Truss Details
When you draw the first truss, the program
automatically creates a CAD detail named
Truss Detail. Open the Truss Detail by
selecting CAD> CAD Detail Management

and selecting it from the list.
505
Trusses
truss type in floor plan view and in the

Materials List. The quantity of each type is
also listed.
Note: The Truss Detail is for display of
trusses only. Editing the members that make
up the trusses in the Truss Detail is not recommended.
To restore an edited Truss Detail
All the trusses used in your plan are

displayed in the Truss Detail. If several
trusses are identical, only one diagram is
drawn. The label at the lower left of the
diagram gives a number that designates this
1.
Delete any new members you have

drawn in the detail view.
2.
In floor plan view, select the truss and

edit button to
open the Roof Truss Specification
dialog.
3.
Click OK and the truss regenerates

along with its Truss Detail diagram.
Truss Labels
Roof and attic trusses are labeled in floor
plan view in the format TR-xx. The xx are
numbers following the consecutive order in
which each distinct truss configuration or
type was created.
For example, the first truss type created is
labeled TR-1; the second, TR-2; and so on.
Truss labels also display in the Truss Detail
and the Materials List. Floor and ceiling
trusses are labeled FTR-xx.
A copied truss has the same label as the
original if the conditions at the location of
the copy are the same as the original. If
506
conditions are different, the copied truss is

built differently and displays a different
label.
Truss labels are centered on the truss that
they represent. If the truss is moved or
deleted, the label is moved or deleted as well.
Truss labels cannot be selected by
themselves. Truss labels are selected when
the truss is selected. Truss labels are located
on their own layer, so their display can be
on page 218.
Open the Framing dialog and check Build

Roof Framing on the Roof tab. Be sure that
the on-center spacing of the rafters is correct.
The framing produced is extended or

truncated where it runs into a truss. The
exception to this truncation is that hip ridges
and common rafters at the end of a hip roof
can pass over a drop hip truss.
Lookouts at a gable end are modeled to pass
over a truss at the gable and end at the next
truss in. Both standard and hip ridges are
chopped into blocking between the trusses.
Trusses
After you have laid out all the trusses for

your roof, the Build Framing dialog can be
used to create roof framing that fills in areas
not framed by the trusses.
Truss Base
A Truss Base defines the boundary
separating the tops of normal roof
trusses and valley fill roof trusses that lie
across and above them.
To define a truss base, select Build> Roof>
Truss Base . . Create the truss base as you
would a roof plane or ceiling plane. No
overhang is produced.
The truss base is similar to a roof plane in its
creation and definition. If you select it and
edit button, the
Truss Base Specification dialog will
open. See Truss Base Specification Dialog

on page 516.
Truss bases are used to create valley fill
trusses. The best way to understand valley
fill trusses is the example of an L shaped
house with a gable roof. The wider wing of
this house is trussed through from end to end
with normal trusses. Starting at its outside
end, the narrow wing is trussed with normal
trusses until the wider wing is reached.
507
Where the valley begins, valley fill trusses

are placed over the top of the main roof until
the peak of the narrow wing's roof is reached.
Only three valley fill trusses, TR-2, TR-3,

and TR-4, are used in the following example.
Truss Base (triangular - shown hatched)

Valley Fill Trusses (shown darker)
Normal Trusses
Valley Fill trusses climb up roof made using normal trusses

The truss base defines the footprint of the
valley fill trusses on the main roof. In order
to model the trusses correctly, you must draw
the truss base.
If drawn correctly, a truss base should be in
the same plane with, and its baseline should
be collinear with its surrounding roof plane.
508
The purpose of a truss base is to form a

boundary separating normal trusses below
from the valley fill trusses above. You
already know that trusses are built between
roof planes and ceiling planes. A truss
passing through a truss base is placed below
the plane of the base if it is more
Truss Base
perpendicular to the baseline of the truss

base. It is built above the plane of the base if
it is more parallel to the baseline.
2. Click here
To create a truss base

1.
Create an L-shaped house with the roof

plan shown below.
Trusses
1. Draw Truss Base baseline
3.
Move the pointer and click on the point

where the gable intersects the main roof.
4.
The program creates a rectangular truss

base. Use its edit handles to change its
shape as needed.
In the image below, the truss base has a

diagonal hatch pattern.
The triangular area of overlap between the

main roof and the gable must be defined as a
Truss Base.
2.
Choose Build> Roof> Truss Base

,
then draw a baseline along the outside
edge of the wall from valley to valley.
The baseline is darkened in this diagram.
509
Once the truss base is created, lay out the

trusses.
5.
Draw the first truss.
6.
Select the truss and click the Multiple

Copy
7.
tool.
Drag from the Move handle to create

copies at the defined intervals.
The trusses placed for the main roof generate

right through the truss base, stopping on top
of the wall, eliminating the overhang in that
area.
Select the truss
10. Drag the normal truss up into the truss

base. Copies of the truss appear as you
drag the pointer.
Note: No overhang in this area.
8.
9.
510
When the main trusses are in place, draw

the first truss on the gable in a position
where it will be full length.
Select the truss and click the Multiple
Copy
edit button on the Edit toolbar.
Note: Trusses that run perpendicular to the

baseline of a Truss Base go under the Truss
Base. Trusses that run parallel to the baseline of the Truss Base climb the Truss Base.
As you drag, the truss copies appear to all be

full length.
Hip Trusses
valley trusses that are darker in the diagram below.
Trusses
Drag the truss
11. Release the mouse button, the copies are

clipped by the truss base. Note the three
Hip Trusses
Hip roofs with various truss applications can
be modeled, including step down hip trusses,
sub-girder hip trusses, and drop hip or

California trusses.
Step Down Hip

Step Down hip roofs are the quickest style of
hip truss framing to produce.
In the illustration below, the flat-topped
trusses are called hip trusses. Alternating hip
trusses are colored differently to improve
visibility.
511
Step Down Hip Roof
Jack Trusses
Hip Trusses (4)

Hip Jack
To create a step down hip truss system
3.
Stop when the height of the hip truss

reaches a reasonable minimum.
1.
First, draw a Roof Truss

at the apex
of the triangular hip roof plane. It will
snap exactly into position.
4.
Using the Roof Truss

tool, draw hip
jacks along the hip ridge from the last
truss out into the overhang.
2.
Select the truss; click the Multiple
5.

tool, draw a
jack truss from the intersection of the
last hip truss and the hip jack to the eave.
6.
Select the jack truss; click the Multiple
Copy
edit button; and click and drag
the Move handle down into the hip to
create copies at regular intervals. See
Copying Trusses on page 505.
Copy
edit button; and lay out jack
trusses up to the other hip jack.
Subgirder Hip
Subgirders are the partial trusses that butt
into the doubled truss at the end of the main
run. In the following illustration, the double
512
truss has one face colored dark gray, and

several subgirders are colored light gray.
Hip Trusses
Trusses
Subgirder Hip
Double Truss
Subgirder Trusses (11)
To create a subgirder truss system

1.
Draw a Roof Truss

apex meets the ridge.
2.
Double it by drawing a second truss on

the far side from the hip section.
3.

tool, draw the
first subgirder from the hip apex out to
the eaves.
4.
Select it and using the Multiple Copy

edit button, make copies in both
directions. Stop when the height of the
subgirders reach a reasonable minimum.
where the hip

5.
Finish off with hip jacks and jack trusses

as in a step down hip system.
513
Drop Hip
A Drop Hip, or California Hip, system uses
drop hip trusses to support stick frame hip
ridges and common rafters.
Two of the drop hip trusses are colored gray

to help distinguish them. Notice that the
common rafters are supported by the drop
hip trusses.
Drop Hip (or California Hip)
Drop Hip Trusses (4)
Common Rafters
(deepen the joist
for this truss)
Specification dialog; and select the
Drop hip truss check box.
To create a drop hip truss system
514
1.
Start a drop hip truss system as you

would a step down hip system.
2.
When the hip trusses are drawn, group

select them; open the Truss
3.
Use the Build Framing dialog to produce the common rafters, and the short
joists at the hip end.
Girder Trusses
Advantages and
Disadvantages of
the Different Hip Systems
With the Step Down hip, if the hip trusses

are placed according to your standard on
center spacing, the space measured down the
hip between the trusses is larger than the
standard.
Spacing is larger down the hip

Step Down Hip
With the subgirder system, spacing
measuring down the roof sections on either
side of the hip, near the hip is too large.
Spacing is larger down the roof

sections on either side of the hip.
Subgirder Hip
The Drop Hip system eliminates the spacing
problems because the roof sheathing is nailed
to common rafters that pass over the drop hip
trusses. The disadvantage to this system is
that it requires the rafters in addition to the
trusses, and with a shallow pitch roof the
drop hip truss may not be deep enough to
give sufficient strength.
The first two methods normally require
blocking along the hip ridges. The third uses
a continuous hip ridge rafter as well as
common rafters that run over the drop hip
trusses. Blocking and rafters can be drawn in
manually, but are often supplied by the
automatic framing generator. See Mixing
Trusses with Stick Framing on page 507.
Girder Trusses
Girder trusses provide support for trusses
that are cut short, for example, by a reverse
gable or a skylight. They are often doubledor tripled-up for strength.
In the program, trusses may not cross each

other. If a truss is drawn past another truss
crossing its path, the system automatically
shortens it so that it butts into the existing
truss.
515
Trusses
Each of hip roof method has its advantages.

With both the Step Down hip and the
Subgirder hip systems, you can get almost
everything you need from the truss company.
You will need to get small corner jack and
end jack trusses in addition to the larger
trusses.
end jack truss; or draw a truss between two

trusses, forming a girder. This may be
necessary for a large opening, such as a
skylight.
Draw a new truss from an existing truss to

the roof edge, as you would to draw a hip or
Scissors Trusses
Trusses drawn over sloping ceiling planes are
called Scissor trusses. Draw ceiling planes
as you would manual roof planes by
selecting Build> Roof> Ceiling Plane
Below is an example of a room with a 6 in 12

pitch gable roof and 3 in 12 pitch ceiling
planes.

The Truss Base Specification dialog is
almost identical to the Roof Plane
Specification dialog. Although truss bases
516
are not the same as roof planes, Chief

Architect handles the positioning of the two
in a similar manner.
General Tab
6
7
1
8
2
3
4
Trusses
Four values define 3D orientation of a truss

base: Ridge/Top Height, Baseline Height,
Fascia Top Height, and Pitch. These values
are related; if one is changed, the others
change as well.
These values are measured from the first
floor elevation of 0 0". Baseline Height and
Pitch should be set identical to those for the
roof plane that surrounds the truss base.
Click the radio button to the right of a value
to define it as the pivot point for the truss
base and prevent it from being changed.
Changing these values does not affect the 2D
representation of the truss base.
2 Baseline - Define a new base line

height.
3 Fascia top - Define a new height for
the lowest point of the truss base.

Usually, this is the same as the Baseline.
4 Pitch - Change the pitch for the

selected truss base.
If you lock the pitch and change one of the

other values, the truss base moves vertically
keeping the same slope. It does not pivot.
5 Select the Pitch in degrees check box
to display pitch in degrees rather than

run-and-rise units.
1 Ridge/Top - Define a new value for the

highest point of the selected truss base.
517
6 Select the Up or Down check boxes to
display the truss base one floor up or

down from the floor it is currently on.
7 Rafter Depth - The truss base is a
Polyline Tab
plane used by the program to place

trusses, so it has no rafters. This value should
be the same as that for the surrounding roof
plane in order to align the truss base with it.

8 Vertical Rafter Depth, Top of Plate
Line Style Tab
and Overhang from Baseline are

shown for reference.
Selected Line Tab

Options Tab
Click Up to display the truss base up one
floor, or click Down to show it on the floor
below. If no higher or lower floor exists, the
option is not available.
Fill Style Tab


Select a roof truss or group of roof trusses
edit button to
open the Roof Truss Specification
dialog.
The Roof Truss Specification dialog
allows you to redefine parts of an existing
truss or group of trusses. Some settings affect
518
only individual trusses, such as gable trusses,

while others affect the whole group.
The shape or volume of a roof truss is
controlled by the roof planes above it and the
ceiling planes below it. It cannot be changed
from this dialog.
General Tab
10
1
2
3
7
9
1
2
3
4
11
12
13
14
Trusses
Top Chord - Specify the depth.

Bottom Chord - Specify the depth.
Webbing - Specify the depth.
Check Require Kingpost to require a

vertical webbing member from the roof
peak to the bottom chord.
If this is not checked, a vertical member may
still be supplied, depending on what is
needed to support the chords at or closer than
the specified maximum spans.
Following is a truss detail. The lower truss
was a copy of the upper truss, with Require
Kingpost checked.
Kingpost
5 End Truss - Select the check box to
replace the webbing with vertical

members positioned and spaced on center the
same as the wall studs below. The framing
reference is used for this exactly as it is for
wall studs. If an end truss is in the same
position as a gable attic wall, it replaces the
framing that would otherwise be produced
for that wall.
519
6 Drop Hip Truss - Select the check box
to lower the flat top of a truss in the hip

area of a roof.
The flat top is lowered so that common
rafters and hip ridges can pass over and be
supported by it. The amount that the top
chord is lowered is derived from the rafter
Depth on the Roof tab of the Framing
dialog. Because both common rafters and hip
ridges must pass over this truss, the ridge
depth should be set equal to that of the rafter
depth. For an illustration of a Drop Hip truss,
see Drop Hip on page 514.
7 Energy Heel - Select the check box to
model a truss with an energy heel,

which removes the bottom chord from the
overhang area. For this to be modeled, the
Raise Off Plate value in the Build Roof
dialog must be equal to or greater than eight.
To provide more space for ceiling insulation
at the exterior walls, roofs are sometimes
raised off of the top plate with an energy
heel. When a truss is built for such a roof, a
vertical member is added over the supporting
wall to prevent the bottom chord from extend
ing into the overhang area as far as the end
of the rafter, or until it intersects the rafter.
Without Energy Heel
With Energy Heel
8 Reduce Gable - Select the check box to

lower the top chord of the gable truss so
520
that lookouts may pass over the truss. Any

overhang is removed from a reduced truss.
You can supply this overhang with short

rafters drawn at the ends of the truss.
11 Thickness - Select the thickness, or
truss width in floor plan view. This

setting overrides default settings.
12 Maximum Height - Specify the
maximum height of selected truss.
13 Force truss rebuild - Select the check
box to update trusses with the new

settings in this dialog when you click OK.
Reduce Gable
End Truss
Lookouts
box to lock size and configuration of

truss. A locked truss which has been
relocated will maintain its original settings,
and may no longer fit properly if the new
roof and ceiling conditions are different from
the original.
9 Attic Truss - Check this box to specify
Line Style Tab
an attic truss
10 Maximum Span - Specify the
maximum horizontal distance between

supports along the Top Chord and along the
Bottom Chord. If these are equal, the truss
webbing often appears more regular.
The placement of webbing inside a newly
drawn truss is controlled by the Top Chord
and Bottom Chord settings under Maximum
Span in the Trusses tab of the Framing
dialog. The webbing is for representational
purposes only, not for engineering.
For more information about the Line Style

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab

Floor trusses can be created whenever walls
define one or more rooms.
To open the Floor Truss Specification
dialog, select a floor truss in floor plan view
edit button.
521
Trusses
14 Lock Truss & Webbing - Check this
1
2
3
6
8
1
2
3
4
Top Chord - Specify the depth.

Bottom Chord - Specify the depth.
Webbing - Specify the depth.
Vertical Supports - Check this box to
use vertical supports.
5 Maximum Span - Specify the

maximum horizontal distance between
supports along the Top Chord and Bottom
Chord.
7 Webbing Thickness - Specify

thickness for the webbing.
8 Force Truss Rebuild - Check this box
to update existing trusses with the new

settings in this dialog.
9 Lock Truss & Webbing - Check this
box to lock the size and configuration

of the truss. A locked truss which has been
relocated will maintain its original settings.
Line Style Tab

Top Chord
Vertical Support

Fill Style Tab

Bottom Chord
Webbing
6 Overall Thickness - Specify the

overall floor truss thickness.
522

Materials Tab
Chapter 17:
The Electrical Tools
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Electrical
Objects
The electrical plan shows the location of all
electrical objects such as lights, switches,
outlets, smoke detectors and vent fans. Basic
wiring diagrams show which objects share
circuits and the locations of the controlling
switches.
The display of electrical objects can be
controlled in 2D and 3D. Some electrical
symbols such as lights also affect rendering.
See Electrical on page 684.
Electrical objects can be selected, deleted,
copied, moved, rotated, reflected, and added
to the library like other objects.
Building requirements vary throughout

the country and around the world. It is
your responsibility to comply with local codes.
Chapter Contents

Creating Wiring Schematics
Auto Place Outlets
Electrical Library
Displaying Electrical Objects
Editing Electrical Objects
Electrical Service Specification Dialog
Electrical Defaults
Usually, the electrical plan is one of the last

additions to a plan since the position of most
electrical objects is determined by the
location of walls, cabinets and other objects.
523
Electrical
Electrical

Introductory Training Video: Electrical
Objects
Video: Placing Electrical Symbols and
Circuits
Select Build> Electrical to access the
Electrical Tools.
Click in floor plan view to place an electrical
object. Some can only be placed against
walls, some only on the ceiling or floor, and
some automatically change as needed. If you
click within 12" of the wall, the selected
object is placed on the wall.
Electrical objects are placed according to the
settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog.
See Electrical Defaults on page 534.
Outlets
Select Build> Electrical> 110V
Outlet to place 110 volt duplex
outlets in walls or on the floor. Select Build>
Electrical> 220V Outlet to place 220 volt
outlets. Outlet type and height are controlled
by the outlet height in the Electrical
Defaults dialog.
Outlet locations are measured from their
centers in floor plan view. Individual outlet
heights can be specified in the Electrical
Service Specification dialog.
Certain room types and situations cause
various types of outlets to be placed. To take
advantage of the programs capabilities,
define room types properly before placing
electrical objects. See Room Types on
page 284.
524
In rooms defined as Bath or Master Bath,

Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt (GFCI)
outlets are placed. If outlets are placed prior
to defining the room as a Bath, the standard
outlets must be replaced with GFCI outlets to
meet code.
Outlets placed outside the building or in an
exterior area such as a deck or porch are
labeled WP, or Water Proof.
Outlets placed on the wall behind a base
cabinet containing a dishwasher or sink are
placed at the normal 12" (300 mm) above the
floor. If an outlet is placed above a cabinet,
the Above Cabinet Default Height are used
instead. See Electrical Defaults on page
534.
Other types of outlets, such as floor outlets,
are available in the Electrical Library
Lights
Select Build> Electrical> Light to
place light fixtures as specified in the
Electrical Defaults dialog. Depending on
where you click in floor plan view, the light
may be mounted on the ceiling or on a wall.
All lights placed in a plan also serve as light
sources in render and raytrace views.
Click away from any wall to place a light on
the ceiling. Click near a wall to place the
light in the wall. Specify the height of an
individual light in the Electrical Service
If you place a light in a vaulted ceiling, a
ceiling light is placed at the ceiling height
Many lights are available in the Electrical

Library
. All library lights create light
sources in render and raytrace views.
Light Render Data

The rendering characteristics of individual
lights can be specified. Select the light and
edit button to
open the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. Adjust the settings
on the Light Data tab to specify how the light
appears in render or raytrace views. See
Light Data Tab on page 531.
default switch type. See Electrical Defaults

on page 534.
If you connect two or more switches in a
circuit, they update to 3-way or 4-way
switches automatically.
Switches placed from the Electrical Library

do not automatically update by default, but
can be specified to do so. See Electrical
Service Specification Dialog on page 529.
If two or more switches or outlets are close
enough, they merge.
Switches
Select Build> Electrical> Switch to
place wall switches as specified in the
Electrical Defaults dialog. Like outlets,
the height of switches is measured from the
floor to the center of the object and is set in
the Electrical Defaults dialog, along with
In floor plan view, zoom in to move two

switches or outlets close enough together to
overlap. The switches or outlets must be
within 9 inches, at the same height on the
wall, and of the same dimensions. Up to 32
switches can be merged together. Switches
and outlets are listed separately in the
materials list.

Electrical schematics can be created in two
ways. Using the Connect Electrical
tool
is quick and easy, but if you need detailed
schematics, you can create your own wiring
diagrams using the CAD tools.
Connect Electrical
Select Build> Electrical> Connect
Electrical to illustrate circuits. Using
this tool, you can show which lights and

outlets are attached to any given switch.
To create a new circuit or to add to an
existing circuit, click one electrical object
while using Connect Electrical
tool,
drag to the next object and release.
Connections created with the Connect
Electrical
tool can be edited like splines.
525
Electrical
perpendicular to the floor as though it were

attached to a flat ceiling.
See Editing Spline Based Objects on page

114.
Remove an electrical object from a circuit by
selecting it and clicking the Delete
edit
button. See Delete Objects Dialog on page
141.
More than one switch can control an object

or group of objects. Two switches controlling
the same objects are referred to as three-way
switches. Three switches controlling the
same objects are called four-way switches.
The number of ways is one more than the
number of switches in the same circuit. This
number displays with the switch symbol in
floor plan view.
Auto Place Outlets

Select Build> Electrical> Auto Place
Outlets and click in a room tool to
place outlets, usually 110 volt, around the
entire room at intervals not greater than
twelve feet so that no wall position is farther
than six feet (1800mm) from the nearest
outlet.
Auto Place Outlets

requires a room to
have a door before outlets are automatically
placed and does not work in any room
defined as an exterior room. Exterior rooms
require that the outlets be placed individually
using the 110V Outlets
tool or from the
Outlets are placed based on settings in the

Electrical Defaults dialog. See
Electrical Defaults on page 534. It is
important that the room type be defined
Electrical Library
before using Auto Place Outlets

so that
outlets are placed appropriately in each room
type.
Place Outlets
is used in a room defined
by railings or invisible walls, outlets are
automatically placed in all adjacent rooms
that share these wall types with that room.
Stand-alone or built-in appliances such as

ranges, washers, and dryers each have their
required 110 volt or 220 volt outlets placed
automatically. Lights are always placed
above sinks.
Railings and invisible walls do not separate

rooms for Auto Place Outlets
: If Auto
Any outlet can be moved, deleted, or merged

with other outlets or switches. See
Switches on page 525.
Electrical Library
Select Library> Library Browser to
accesses a library of various electrical
symbols. The Electrical library category is
divided into subcategories.
526
Browse for electrical objects such as bath

vent fans, an electrical panel, fluorescent
lights, chandeliers, a smoke detector,
thermostat, and much more. Select a symbol,
then click in your plan to place it on a wall,

floor, or ceiling.
You can create electrical symbols and save
them to the library. See Create Symbol
Wizard on page 925.
You can also assign electrical objects from

the library to toolbar buttons for easy access
and placement to frequently-used library
objects. See Place Library Object Button
on page 696.
The display of electrical objects and

connections is controlled in the Layer
Electrical labels display in floor plan view
when these coditions are met:
The layer Electrical, Labels layer is

turned on.
An electrical schedule exists in the plan.
Show Labels is checked and a label

shape is specified in the Electrical
Schedule Specification dialog. See
Editing Electrical Objects

Electrical objects can be selected in floor
plan view, cross section/elevation views, and
3D views.
An electrical object can be selected and
modified using its edit handles, edit toolbar
and specification dialog.

The edit handles for electrical objects vary
depending on the location of the object. Wall
mounted electrical objects cannot be rotated,
so only the Move edit handle displays.
Moving Electrical Objects

Using Dimensions
Electrical objects can be moved precisely
using manual dimensions. See Moving
First, dimensions must be checked on the
Locate Objects tab of the Dimension
Defaults dialog. See Dimension Defaults
Dialog on page 809.
Wall-mounted outlet in 2D and 3D views
Electrical objects placed on floors and

ceilings can be rotated.
527
Electrical
Ceiling-mounted outlet in 2D and 3D views

edit button to
selected cabinet(s). See Components
The Accurate Move button slows down

the mouse so you can place electrical
objects more precisely. See Accurate
Move on page 125.
Electrical connections edit like splines. See

Editing Spline Based Objects on page 114.

object(s) parallel or perpendicular to a

edit
electrical symbol. See Point to Point
Move on page 125.

edit
button to replace the selected electrical
symbol with one from the library. See

edit button
to center the selected electrical symbol
along the edge of a room. See Center
Object on page 127.

edit
button to reflect the selected cabinet(s)

A selected electrical symbol can be edited in
edit toolbar. As with most objects, electrical
symbols can be copied, replicated, moved,
deleted, etc. See Using the Edit Toolbar on
page 113.
electrical symbols.
528

edit
the selected electrical symbol.
edit button to
selected electrical symbol. See
on page 529.
Click the Open Symbol
edit button
to open the Symbol Specification
dialog. See Symbol Specification Dialog on page 945.
Adjusting the Height

of Electrical Objects
The heights where electrical objects display
in 3D views are initially based on settings in
the Electrical Defaults dialog.
Kitchen sinks are assumed to require

electricity since they often contain a garbage
disposal. Dishwashers are not considered to
require electricity since they are usually
plugged in under a nearby sink. If an outlet is
needed above a cabinet containing a kitchen
sink, place the outlet before adding the sink,
or move the outlet up.
To change the height of an electrical object in
floor plan view, open the object for
specification and type the desired height in

the Electrical Service Specification
dialog.
Electrical objects placed in 3D views are
placed wherever you click a wall, regardless
of the height. In 3D views, the position of an
electrical object can be adjusted using its edit
handles.
Deleting Electrical Objects

An electrical object can be deleted by
selecting it and clicking the Delete
button or by pressing the Delete key.
edit
All electrical objects in a room, on a floor, or

in the entire plan can be deleted as a group
using the Delete Objects dialog. See
Deleting Objects on page 141.

Select an electrical object and click the Open
Object
Electrical Service Specification
dialog. This dialog varies, depending on the

object you select.
Depending on the type of symbol selected,

only some of the tabs are available. Only the
Service Data, Layer and Material tabs are
available for switches and outlets.
The Electrical Service Specification

dialog consists of four tabs:
The Service Data tab specifies the location of individual electrical objects.
The Light Data tab specifies how lights

appear in render views.
The Layer tab specifies the layer the

object is placed on.
The Materials tab allows you to change

materials on electrical objects.
529
Electrical
In floor plan view, an outlet placed where a

base cabinet meets a wall is placed above the
counter unless the cabinet contains a fixture
or appliance other than a bathroom sink. If
the fixture requires electricity, the outlet
remains behind the cabinet at normal wall
height, where it can supply power to the
fixture or appliance. See Electrical
Service Data Tab
1
2
3
4
The items on this tab vary, depending on the

type of object selected.
1 Name - This is the name that is sent to

the Materials List.
2 Height to Center - Specify the height
to the center of the switch, outlet or

wall light.
Offset From Floor - This option is available

for electrical objects placed on the floor.
530
Offset From Ceiling - This option is

available for for electrical objects placed on
the ceiling.
3 Dist From Wall - Specify the switch,
outlet or lights distance from the wall.
Check this box to Automatically

Change Switch Type When Wiring.
This option is only available for switches.
Switches placed from the toolbar have this
box checked by default; switches placed
from the Electrical library do not.
Light Data Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
11
8
10
13
12
14
Electrical
15
The Light Data tab of the Electrical

Service Specification dialog is similar
to the Light Specification dialog. See
Light Specification Dialog on page 781.
The enabled options on this tab vary
depending on the type of light source
selected.
1 Light Source - Each fixture can have
multiple light sources. Select a current

light source to be modified. Click Add Light
or Delete Light to add or delete light sources
from the list. See Light Sources on page
772.
2 Type - Select a light source Type.
Available types are Point Light, Spot

Light, and Parallel Light. The type selected
determines what options are enabled on this

tab. Each type behaves differently, but all
have some rendering properties in common.
See Defining Light Types on page 777.
3 Auto Intensity - Select the check box
to have the program set intensities for

each light source in render views. When you
select Auto Intensity the program provides
an average intensity to render with
reasonable lighting effects. Clear the check
box to enable the slider bar and text box and
control how bright the light appears in the
render view.
Lights with an intensity of 0% are turned off.
It is possible to have too much light. If you
have multiple lights in a room all set to
531
maximum intensity, colors and textures can

turn white.
4 Color - Click the button to define the
color of the illumination being

modeled. Colored lights alter the material
and texture colors and can be used to achieve
special effects.
The default color of light is pure white,
which has the least affect on the material
colors and textures.
5 Attenuated - Check this box to control
how quickly the intensity of the

illumination drops as a result of the distance
from the light source. Only Spot and Point
Lights have attenuation.
The three edit values represent the three

coefficients (a, b, and c) in the expression
1 / (a + b*d+c*d*d), where d is the distance
from the light source. Increasing any of these
values results in the light intensity dropping
faster (the light does not travel as far).
Decreasing any value results in the light
intensity dropping slower (the light travels
farther). Small changes in these coefficients
can have significant impact on lighting
effects. You may need to experiment to fully
understand how to use them.
6 Tilt Angle - The Tilt Angle controls the
angle of the illumination with respect to

the horizon. A value of -90 degrees means
that the light is pointing straight down and a
value of 90 degrees means that the light is
pointing straight up. 0 degrees is parallel to
the horizon.
7 Dir Angle - Defines the angle that a
Parallel or Spot Light is pointed along.

Zero degrees is measured horizontally
pointing to the right. Positive values rotate in
a counter-clockwise direction from there.
532
Enter a value up to 360 degrees. If you enter

a negative value, the program uses zero.
8 Cut Off Angle - The Cut Off Angle
controls the angle of the cone of

illumination for Spot Lights only. A cone
angle of 180 degrees creates a spot light that
shines on one side of the light source,
representing a half sphere. A small cone
angle, say 10 degrees, creates a very narrow
cone of light. The cut off angle should
always be between 0 and 180 degrees.
9 Drop Off Rate - This affects how fast
the intensity of illumination drops off

from the center of the cone to the outside
edge. This is only available for Spot Lights.
The default drop off value is 7.5, which
means the light drops off fairly quickly. Do
not set this value too low because there are
limitations in the OpenGL lighting model
that result in jagged circles of light when
they are shining on large flat surfaces.
Appearances can be improved by decreasing
the Maximum Triangle Size and increasing
the Drop off Rate.
10 Offset Position gives you control over
the location of the light source relative

to the fixture.
From Base controls how far the light source

is from the fixture base. The fixture base is
determined by the surface that it is attached
to (i.e. wall, floor, or ceiling).
Offset in X/Offset in Y allow you to
position the light source relative to the center
of the fixture, along the floor/ceiling.
11 Soft Shadows (raytracing) - This sets
how a light source casts soft shadows in

a Raytrace view. Setting the Light Size
determines how big the illumination appears.
Zero indicates a true point light source, while

a size of 3 indicates a larger source such as a
lightbulb. The Softness setting determines
how many iterations the raytracer should go
through to soften the light. This value
determines the quality of the raytrace, but
also slows it down. You should not use
values greater than 2 or 3, unless the Light
Size is very large.
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
12 On - This controls whether or not the
light source is used in render or raytrace

views. The default is On.
13 Casts Shadows - Controls whether or
not the light source casts shadows when

Shadows are turned on in a render view.
Electrical
You should only use one or two light sources

to casts shadows at a time. Shadow
calculations can slow rendering significantly.
14 Show Position in Render View -
Check this box to indicate where a light

source is actually positioned in a render
view. The light position indicator is only
drawn when the light is on and only for
positional lights such as point or spot lights.
This tool can be used to determine if your
light source is positioned correctly.
15 Use in Real -Time Rendering/Use in
Raytracing/Use in Both - Use these

options to specify whether a light source is
used only in a raytrace view, only in a render
view, or used in both views. Raytrace views
can handle many more lights than render
views, and some fixtures may have four or
five lights in a raytrace view while only one
in a render view. The more lights you use in
either view, the slower the time to generate
that view.
533
Electrical Defaults
Default Settings for electrical objects
can be accessed by selecting Edit>
Default Settings from the menu or by
double-clicking the Electrical Tools
button.
Default heights of individual objects can be

overridden in the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See Electrical
Service Specification Dialog on page 529.
2
4
5
6
1 Default Library - These are the items
used when electrical items are

automatically generated or placed from the
toolbar. Select an item from the list to see a
preview to the right.
2 Library - Select an object type in the

Default Library list and click the
Library... button to open the Library Browser
to the Electrical category and select a new
default library object. See Electrical on
page 684.
3 Use Default Heights - Check this box
to apply Default Heights to electrical

objects placed in floor plan view. Heights
534
can be specified for individual objects. See

Electrical Service Specification Dialog on
page 529
4 Outlet - Specify the Default Height for
outlets, phone jacks and television

outlets.
5 Switch - Specify the Default Height for

switches, doorbells and thermostats.
6 Above Cabinet - Specify the Default
Height for switches and outlets placed

above most cabinets in floor plan view. See
Adjusting the Height of Electrical Objects
on page 528.
Chapter 18:
Trim & Molding

Video: Trim and Moldings
Chief Architect offers a wide selection of
trim and molding options. Corner boards,
quoins, and frieze moldings can be added to
a buildings exterior. Molding polylines and
3D molding polylines can be edited as 2D
CAD objects using the CAD editing tools,
then extruded to display in 3D for a variety
of powerful applications.
Chapter Contents
Corner Boards
Corner Board Specification Dialog
Quoins
Quoin Specification Dialog
Molding Profiles
Symbol Moldings
Molding Polylines
Displaying Molding Polylines
Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings
Frieze Moldings
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
535
Trim &
Molding
Chapter Overview
Corner Boards
Corner boards are added to a building
exterior in any view by selecting
Build> Trim> Corner Boards.
Click at a wall corner where you want to add

trim. Be sure to click where the outside wall
surfaces meet. If you click where the inside
surfaces meet, corner trim will be created
inside the room.
Corner boards extend from the top plate

down to the bottom of the floor platform of
the floor on which it is placed, but do not
extend to other floors. You must add corner
boards to all floors of the building that you
want to have corner boards.
A selected corner board or boards can be
moved, but only to another wall corner or
corners. In 3D views, corner boards can be
lengthened or shortened using the edit
handles. Corner boards can be copied,
deleted and resized similar to other objects
using the edit toolbar or the Corner Board
The default material for corner boards is
defined by the Exterior Trim entry in the
Material Defaults dialog. See Material
Corner Board Specification Dialog

General Tab
1
2
5
6
3
4
1 Width - Specify the width of the
selected corner board(s).
536
2 Thickness - Specify the thickness of

the selected corner board.
Quoins
3 Set Top - Specify the height of the top
of the corner board. If this box is

unchecked, the top of the corner board automatically extends to the top plate.
4 Set Bottom - Specifiy the height of the
bottom of the corner board. If

unchecked, the bottom of the corner board
automatically extends to the bottom of the
floor platform.
5 Initial Width - Specify the initial width
of all subsequently created corner

boards. This does not change the width of
any existing corner boards.
6 Initial Thickness - Specify the initial
corner boards. This does not change the

thickness of any existing corner boards.
The Initial Width and Initial Thickness are
not saved with the plan file and are reset the
next time you run the program.
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
thickness of all subsequently created
Quoins
The size of quoins in floor plan view is
relative on their size in 3D.
Initially, quoins use the same material as the
default material of the wall surface they are
placed against. This material is specified in
the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See
Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 251.
A selected quoin or quoins can be moved,

but only to another wall corner or corners. In
3D views, quoins can be lengthened or
shortened using the edit handles. Quoins can
be copied, deleted and resized similar to
other objects using the edit toolbar or the
Quoin Specification dialog.
537
Trim &
Molding
Select Build> Trim> Quoins in any

view and click at a wall corner where
you want to place quoins.
Quoin Specification Dialog
1
2
3
4
1 Width - Specify the long dimension of
one quoin. The dimension along the

other wall is half this value when they are
staggered or mirrored.
2 Thickness - Specify the amount that

the quoin protrudes from the exterior
surface of the wall.
3 Height - Specify the height for all
quoins.
4 Gap - Specify the distance between

successive quoins.
5 Set Top - Specify the height of the top
of the quoin. If the check box is

unchecked, the top of the quoin automatically extends to the top plate.
6 Set Bottom - Specifiy the height of the

bottom of the quoin. If the check box is
unchecked, the bottom of the quoin automat-
538
10
ically extends to the bottom of the floor platform.
7 Initial Values - Each of the above
values can be set for all subsequently

produced quoins. Changing these values
does not change the settings for any existing
quoins.
8 Staggered - Produce quoins that have
one long side and one short side

staggered on opposite sides of the corner.
Swap Start Block - Switch the starting order

for staggered quoins.
Uniform - Produce quoins that are of

equal length on both sides of the corner.
10 Mirrored - Produce quoins that
alternate having either two long sides or

two short sides.
Molding Profiles
Staggered
Mirrored
Uniform
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
A molding profile is a closed polyline that

represents a 2D cross section of a particular
style of molding. A molding profile does not
display in 3D on its own; it must be applied
to a room or molding polyline. See
Moldings Tab on page 302 or Molding
The Moldings and Profiles library contains a
selection of moldings, as well as curbs,
gutters and handrails. You can customize
library molding profiles and add them to the
library. You can also create your own custom
profiles and add them to the library. See
Creating a Molding Profile
Moldings can be drawn in either floor

plan view or in a CAD Detail window.
Draw the molding profile at its actual,

unscaled size.
The profile must be drawn with the

proper orientation. The back of most profiles, or the side facing the wall, must be
drawn as a vertical edge on the left side
of the polyline.
Similarly, curbs are drawn with the back

of the profile as a vertical edge on the left
side of the polyline.
In the case of handrail profiles, the bottom edge must be drawn on the left side
of the polyline.
You can easily create custom molding

profiles using the line and arc CAD Tools by
following a few basic guidelines. The object
is to draw a polyline, closed or not.
539
Trim &
Molding
Molding Profiles
3.
Give the new molding a name.
4.
Click OK.
Place Molding Profile

An existing molding profile can be placed in
floor plan view or a CAD Detail, edited, and
added to the library as a new profile.
Base molding profile -
Handrail profile -
back edge faces left
bottom faces left
To add a new profile to the library

1.
Select the profile.
2.

edit button. The Add to Library dialog opens
to the Molding and Profiles category.
Select a profile from the the Moldings and

Profiles category of the Library Browser,
then select Library> Place Molding
Profile. Move your pointer into the drawing
area and click once to place a closed polyline
identical to the selected profile at that
location.
Note: Place Molding Profile cannot be used
to apply a molding profile to a room or to a
molding polyline
Symbol Moldings
Symbol Moldings are 3D symbols that are
repeated along a path to form molding.
Molding symbols are different from molding
profiles because they are replicated 3D
sumbols instead of extruded 2D shapes.
to create the molding shown in the

illustration above, make an object that looks
like this:
Creating a Symbol Molding

Begin by opening a new, blank plan and
creating a single instance of the molding
symbol using the Primitive Tools
. See
Primitive Tools on page 641. For example,
540
When you are satisfied with its appearance,

export it as a 3D symbol. See Importing and
Exporting on page 907.
Molding Polylines
In the Completing the Create Symbol

Wizard window, check the box beside
Add to Library.
To import a molding symbol

1.
Select Tools> Symbol> Create Symbol

from the menu. See Create Symbol
Wizard on page 925.
2.
Proceed through the wizard as normal,

with the following recommendations:
In the 3D window, specify the Origin
as 0,0,0 and rotate the symbol as
needed so that it faces you in the preview image.
In the Select Symbol Category window, click the button beside Molding.
3.
Save the symbol in an unlocked library.

See Adding a New Object on page
675.
Symbol moldings work best if you make

them symmetrical.
Symbol moldings are center aligned. Both

ends have a 45 miter, so the end instances
may be chopped.
Molding Polylines
The Molding Polyline tools are

accessed by selecting Build> Trim
from the menu.
There are four types of molding polylines:
Molding Polylines
Molding Lines
3D Molding Polylines
3D Molding Lines
Molding Polyline Tool

Select Build> Trim> Molding Polyline to open the Library Browser.
Select a profile from the Moldings and
Profiles category, then click and drag to draw
a rectangular molding polyline that will serve
as a path for the selected molding profile or
symbol.
Molding Line Tool
Molding polylines can also be created using

the Make Room Molding Polyline
and then clicking and dragging in floor plan

view.
and
Select Build> Trim> Molding Line to

open the Library Browser. Select a
molding profile from the Moldings and
Profiles category, then click and drag to draw
a path for the selected molding profile or
symbol. Multiple molding lines can be
connected to make an open polyline path.
the Convert Polyline

edit buttons, or by
selecting a profile from the Library Browser
541
Trim &
Molding
A molding polyline is a 3D path a 2D

molding profile is extruded or series of
molding symbols is repeated along. Molding
polylines can be used to create custom room
moldings and decorations anywhere in your
3D model.
Floor Plan View
Molding polyline and molding line in

Floor Plan View and 3D overview
3D Molding Polyline Tool

Select Build> Trim> 3D Molding
Polyline to open the Library Browser.
Select a molding profile from the Moldings
and Profiles category, then click and drag to
draw a rectangular 3D molding polyline that
will serve as a path for the selected molding
profile or symbol.
3D molding polylines extrude a profile in
three dimensions rather than two and can be
created and edited in floor plan and cross
section/elevation views.
3D Molding Line Tool

Select Build> Trim> 3D Molding
Line to open the Library Browser.
Select a molding profile from the Moldings
and Profiles category, then click and drag to
draw a path for the selected molding profile
or symbol that can travel in all. Multiple
molding lines can be connected to make an
open polyline path.
Cross Section/
Elevation View
(selected)
3D Overview
3D Molding polyline and 3D molding line

as they appear in three different views.
Editing Molding Polylines

Molding polylines can be edited much the
way CAD polylines are. See Editing Open
Polyline Based Objects on page 103 and
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects on
page 107.
All molding lines and polylines can be
selected and opened for specification. See
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog on
page 544 and 3D Molding Polyline
Moldings and Profiles Library

In the floor plan view, open the Moldings
and Profiles category of the Library Browser
and select a molding profile. The Molding
Polyline
tool becomes active, allowing
you to select a profile and draw a molding
polyline with that profile applied to it.
Converting Room Molding

Select a room and click on the Make Room
Molding Polyline
edit button. This
opens the Make Room Molding Polyline
542
dialog, allowing you to select which type of

room molding to convert to a molding
polyline. See Room Polylines on page 295.
Converting a CAD Polyline

Select a CAD polyline and click the
Convert Polyline edit button to covert
it into a molding polyline or a 3D molding
polyline. See Converting Objects on page
149.

As with other objects, the display of molding
polylines in 2D and 3D views is controlled in
By default, molding polylines are placed on

the Moldings layer.
In 3D views, select a molding profile or

symbol from the Library Browser and the
pointer changes to indicate that a molding
profile has been selected. Click on a molding
polyline, 3D molding polyline, room
molding, cabinet molding, door molding, or
window molding to change the current
molding profile. This is the same as changing
the molding profile in the specification
dialog for the object.
Click on a molding in 3D view to change it
Frieze Moldings
Frieze moldings (also known as freize
boards) are mounted below the eaves of roof
planes and can be generated automatically
using the Build Roof dialog.
Creating Frieze Moldings

To create automatic frieze moldings, specify
a molding profile on the Frieze tab of the
Build Roof dialog; check Build Fascia,
Gutters on the Build tab of the Build Roof
dialog; and click OK. See Build Roof
Dialog on page 416.
543
Trim &
Molding
Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings
Frieze moldings below the eave of automatically generated roof planes
Displaying Frieze Moldings
Editing Frieze Moldings
By default, frieze molding displays in 3D

views but not in floor plan view and its
default layer, Roofs, Frieze Moldings, is
locked. See Layer Display Options Dialog
on page 218.
Like other 3D Molding Polyines, frieze

molding can be edited much the way CAD
polylines are in floor plan and cross section/
elevation views. See Editing Molding
Selecting Frieze Moldings

To select a frieze molding, its layer must first
be unlocked and turned on. See Locking
Layers on page 222. In floor plan or cross
section/elevation view, select a wall and click
the Next
edit button or press the Tab key
until the frieze molding is selected. When the
frieze molding is selected the status bar says
3D Molding Polyline. See The Status
Bar on page 8.
Frieze molding can also be edited in the 3D

Molding Polyline Specification dialog.
See 3D Molding Polyline Specification
Dialog on page 546.
If you edit a frieze molding, you may want to
uncheck the Automatic Frieze property on
the 3D Molding Polyline Specification
dialog to avoid losing your edits if fascia is
recalculated.
Once Automatic Frieze is unchecked, it
cannot be checked again.To restore the
automatic updating behavior of frieze
molding, it must be regenerated.

To open the Molding Polyline
Specification dialog, select a molding
544
polyline or group of molding polylines and

edit button.
General Tab
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when the
selected segment of the molding polyline is a
line, as opposed to an arc. For information
about the Selected Line tab, see Selected
Line Tab on page 864.
Specify the Height of the polyline.

Select No Molding on Selected Edge to
create blank section in the molding polyline
along the selected line segment.
Arc Tab
The Arc tab displays when the selected
segment of the 3D molding polyline is an
arc, as opposed to a line. See Arc Tab on
page 859.
Moldings Tab
1
Trim &
Molding
2
3
1 Molding - Select the molding to edit.

2 Add New - Click to open the Select
Library Object dialog and add a new

molding profile or symbol to the molding
polyline. See Select Library Object Dialog
on page 679.
Select - Click to remove the currently

selected profile and replace it with a new one
from the Select Library Object dialog.
Delete - Click to delete the currently selected
profile.
545
3 Height - Specify the molding profile

height. It must be greater than 0.
Width - Specify the width. This option is

not available for molding polylines created
from default room moldings. This value must
be greater than 0.
Offset - Specify the offset from the molding
polyline height to the top or bottom of the
molding profile. A positive offset always
moves the molding up and a negative offset
always moves the molding down.
To Top - Click to specify that the top of the
molding is at the polyline height plus the
offset.
To Bottom - Click to specify that the bottom
of the molding is placed at the polyline
height plus the offset.
Inside - Click to extrude the molding profile
on the inside or right side of the polyline.
Clear to extrude the molding profile on the
outside or left side of the polyline.
Molding extruded outside (Inside unchecked)
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
Molding extruded inside

Select a 3D molding polyline and click the
edit button to open the 3D
Molding Polyline Specification dialog.
Open Object
546
General Tab
1
2
turn off the display of the specified

molding on the edge of the 3D molding
polyline that was selected when the dialog
was opened. For more information about the
selected edge, see Selecting Objects on
page 92.
2 Automatic frieze is enabled when a
frieze molding is selected (see

Selecting Frieze Moldings on page 544).
When Automatic Frieze is checked, the
frieze molding is updated whenever you
check Build Fascia, Gutters on the Build
Roof dialog and click OK.
Once Automatic Frieze has been
unchecked, it cannot be checked again.To
restore the automatic updating behavior of
the frieze molding, it must be regenerated.
See Creating Frieze Moldings on page
543.
Selected Line Tab

selected segment of the 3D molding polyline
is a line as opposed to an arc.
1 The Length/Angle section in the 3D
Molding Polyline Specification
dialog is different other Selected Line tabs.

Length specifies the 3D length of the
selected line of the 3D molding polyline.
Angle in XY Plane specifies the counterclockwise angle that the selected line makes
with the positive X axis when viewed from
above, as in floor plan view.
Angle from XY Plane specifies the angle
that the selected line makes with the
horizontal XY plane when viewed from the
side, as in a cross section/elevation view. A
positive value means that the line slopes up;
a negative value means that it slopes down.
For more information about using the
Selected Line tab, see Selected Line Tab
on page 864.
Selected Arc Tab

The Selected Arc tab is available when the
selected segment of the 3D molding polyline
is an arc as opposed to a line.
547
Trim &
Molding
1 Uncheck Molding on Selected Edge to
2
6
3
7
4
1 The Lock options specify how
changing one value affects other values.
Select Start to keep the start and center of

the arc fixed and move the end.
Select End to keep the end and center of the
arc fixed and move the start.
Select Center to keep the center of the arc
fixed and move the start or end.
Select Arc to keep the arc geometry fixed
and translate the arc.
Select Chord to keep the start and end fixed
and change the radius.
2 The Start options specify the
coordinates of the starting point of the
548
selected arc, and are editable when either

Lock End or Lock Arc are selected.
3 The End options specify the
coordinates of the end point of the

selected arc, and are editable when either
Lock Start or Lock Arc are selected.
4 The Chord options specify the length
and angle of the selected arc and are

editable when either Lock Start or Lock
End are selected. The Chord Angle is also
editable when Lock Arc is selected.
Chord Length - the 3D distance between

arc start and end.
Chord Angle - the angle created by the

arc chord and the positive X axis.
5 The Arc options specify radius, angle

and length values of the selected arc:
Radius - the distance from the arc to the

arc center.
Start Angle - the angle created by a line

from the arc center to the start and the
positive X axis.
End Angle - the angle that a line from the

center to the end
Arc Angle - the angle created by a line

from the arc center to the start and a line
from the center to the end.
Arc Length - the length of the arc.
Materials Tab
6 The Center options specify the
coordinates of the center point of the

selected arc and are editable when Lock Arc
is selected.
7 The Normal options specify the
Trim &
Molding
coordinates of the normal for the plane

that the arc exists in. The normal is a vector
that is parallel to that plane and is expressed
as a line between two points: (0,0,0) and the
point defined in the dialog.
In plan view, the arc direction is counter
clockwise if the normal has a positive value
on the z axis (0,0,1) and clockwise if the
value on the z axis is negative (0,0,-1).
Moldings Tab
For information about the Moldings tab, see
Line Style Tab

549
550
Chapter 19:
Cabinets
Chapter Overview
Video: Cabinets - Improvements for
Working with Cabinets
With Chief Architects cabinet tools you can
create base, wall, and full height cabinets as
well as soffits, shelves, partitions, and
custom countertops. These objects are very
versatile, allowing for a wide range of
customization.
Chief Architect also has many customized
cabinet symbols and cabinet groups available
in the library. Cabinets you have customized
can be saved to your own library for future
use.
The appearance of cabinet objects in floor

plan and 3D views is controlled in the
Chapter Contents
Cabinet Defaults
The Cabinet Tools
Displaying Cabinets
Cabinet Labels
Editing Cabinets
Editing the Cabinet Door/Drawer Style
Editing Custom Countertops
Joined Cabinets
Special Cabinets
Cabinet Specification Dialog
Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog
551
Cabinets
Introductory Training Video: Cabinets
Cabinet Defaults
Cabinet Defaults
Access default settings for each cabinet
type by selecting Edit> Default
Settings, then clicking the + beside
Cabinets.
Each type of cabinet has default definitions
for size, style, materials and much more.
General cabinet settings and the default
settings for Base Cabinets, Wall Cabinets,
Full Height Cabinets, Shelves, and Partitions
are defined here.
The Cabinet Defaults dialogs can also be

accessed by double-clicking the Cabinet
Tools
, then clicking the appropriate
button in the Cabinet Defaults dialog.
Double-clicking any of the Cabinet tools also
opens the corresponding defaults dialog.
To allow the maximum range of sizes, set the
General Cabinet defaults so that Minimum
Width is 1" and Width Increment is 1/16".
See Cabinet Defaults on page 580.
The Cabinet Tools

Wall Cabinets

Video: Placing and Merging Kitchen
Cabinets
Select Build> Cabinet to access the
Cabinet tools.
A cabinet placed adjacent to another of the
same type that faces the same direction
merges with it. If a cabinet is created at the
back of another of the same type, the two
cabinets merge back-to-back. When cabinets
are merged, the toe kick, back splash, and
countertop are continuous.
Base Cabinets
Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet
and click near a wall in any view to
attach the cabinet to it. Base cabinets
generate a countertop and toe kick by
default.
552

Video: Adding Wall Cabinets and Soffits
To place a wall cabinet, select Build>
Cabinet> Wall Cabinet and click near
a wall in any view. Click directly over a base
cabinet to place a wall cabinet above it. The
base cabinet does not interfere with the
placement.
Full Height Cabinets

To place a full height cabinet, select
Build> Cabinet> Full Height and
click in your plan in any view. A full height
cabinet cannot be placed on top of a base or
wall cabinet. Full height cabinets generate a
toe kick by default.
The Cabinet Tools
Introductory Training Video: Soffits

Video: Adding Wall Cabinets and Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between
cabinet tops and the ceiling, but can
also be used to create any object than can be
modeled as a 3D box. To place a soffit,
Select Build> Cabinet> Soffit and click in
any view.
Soffits can display in both floor plan and 3D
views. They can be assigned materials that
are calculated in the Materials List; by
default, they use the material assigned to
interior walls in the General Materials
dialog. Like cabinets, soffits can have
custom molding profiles specified for them.
Unlike the other Cabinet tools, soffits do not
have default dialogs. Soffits are sized to be
the same width as and 1" (20mm) deeper
than the default wall cabinet. Their heights
adjust automatically to fill the space between
the ceiling and the top of the wall cabinets,
but individual soffits can be selected and
edited.
Maximum soffit width is 135 feet (32m).
Minimum width is 1/16" (1 mm).
For more detailed information about soffits,
see Other Objects on page 641.
Shelves
Select Build> Cabinet> Shelf and
click in any view to create a shelf.
Once created, shelves can be modified.
Select a shelf and click the Open Object
edit button to access the Shelf
Specification dialog and specify its
dimensions, position, and material. See

Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog on
page 578.
Create corner shelves by placing one shelf on
each wall, then moving or stretching them
until they touch.
Partitions
Select Build> Cabinet> Partition
button and click in any view to create a
vertical partition. Once created, partitions
can be modified. Select the partition and
edit button to
open the Partition Specification dialog
and specify the partitions dimensions,
position, and material. Partitions can be used
with shelves to create complex storage
systems.
Custom Countertops
Select Build> Cabinet> Custom
Countertop, then click and drag a
rectangle to draw a countertop. Custom
Countertops can be drawn in any view except
cross section/elevation views and can be
edited to any shape. See Editing Custom
Countertops on page 559.
If a sink or built-in appliance is added to the
cabinet, a hole for the fixture is automatically
cut in the custom countertop.
Cabinets generate their own countertop as
defined in the Cabinet Specification
dialog. When a custom countertop covers
any portion of a base cabinet, it overrides the
default countertop. See Cabinet
553
Cabinets
Soffits
A custom countertop takes its thickness and

height from the base cabinet below. If there
is no base cabinet below, its thickness is
based on the base cabinet defaults. See
Cabinet Defaults on page 580.
The countertop initially takes its material
from the default base cabinet. Define the
height, position, and material in the Custom
Countertop Specification dialog. See
on page 579.
Custom Counter Holes

Select Build> Cabinet> Custom
Counter Hole, then click and drag a
rectangle entirely within a custom countertop
to create a hole in the countertop. Custom
Counter Holes can be drawn in any view
except cross section/elevation views and can
be edited to any shape. See Editing Custom
Countertops on page 559.
Cabinet Modules Library

Video: Blocking Cabinets and Adding
Them to the Library
In the Library Browser, expand the Cabinet
Modules category to access a list of cabinets.
Select the library object you want, then click
in any view to place it in the plan. Once
placed, library cabinets can be edited. See
Cabinet Modules on page 682.
You can add single cabinets or blocked units
to the library. See Adding to the Library on
page 674 and Architectural Blocks on page
663.
554
Cabinet Door and

Drawer Library
In the Library Browser, expand the Cabinet
Doors and Drawers category to access a
library of special cabinet doors and drawers.
Select a library object, then click an existing
cabinet to place the door or drawer from the
library onto that cabinet. See Cabinet Doors
and Drawers on page 682.
Use the symbol development tools to create
cabinet doors and save them in your own
library for use in future plans. See Adding
to the Library on page 674.
Built-In Appliances
Appliances and fixtures can be found in the
Library Browser in the Fixtures, Interior
category. Some appliances, such as
refrigerators, can be placed directly into a
plan as stand-alone symbols. Many kitchen
fixtures and appliances, such as sinks,
dishwashers, and garbage disposals, must be
placed into an existing cabinet. See Interior
Fixtures on page 685.
Place range tops and sinks into cabinets early, so that any resizing can be
done before too many cabinets are placed.
To install an appliance into a cabinet, select

the appliance for placement in the selection
pane of the Library Browser and click a
cabinet. There must be enough space in the
cabinet or adjoining cabinets to contain the
selected appliance. See The Library
Fixtures can be added to both the top and
front of the same cabinet. The fixture on top
can be selected by clicking the cabinet and
pressing the Tab key or clicking the Select
Displaying Cabinets
Next Object
edit button. The fixture on
the face can be deleted on the Front tab of the
Cabinet Specification dialog. When a
cabinet has fixtures on both its top and front,
In the real world, some appliances can

share a cabinet, while others cannot. It
is up to you to determine which appliances
can be effectively and safely combined.
the Open Symbol

edit button opens the
specification dialog for the fixture on the
front. If a cabinet has only one fixture, the
Electrical Objects
Open Symbol
specification.
edit button opens it for
Electrical objects such as switches and

outlets can be placed on cabinets in most
views. See The Electrical Tools on page
524.
Displaying Cabinets
The display of the various cabinet types,
labels, module lines, door opening indicators
and labels is controlled in the Layer
By default, cabinet module lines, the lines

between individual cabinets, do not display
when cabinet modules are merged. To show
them in floor plan view, set the Cabinets,
Module Lines layer to display.
In Floor Plan View
In 3D Views
If the Cabinets, Labels layer is turned on,

cabinet labels are centered on the cabinet
they represent. Label size is controlled in the
To show opening indicator arrows in cross

section/elevation views, turn on the Cabinet
& Door Opening Indicators layer in the
Camera View layer set in Layer Display
Options dialog.
Cabinet labels display in floor plan view

when the Cabinets, Labels layer is turned on.
See Displaying Objects on page 221.
Label size is controlled in the Cabinet
Select a cabinet to see the label edit handle.
This can be used to move the label.
Cabinet labels do not show fractional

information. The label for a 30 3/8 inch wide
base cabinet displays as BD30. The
fractional width shows in a dimension line
that marks the cabinets sides.
The format for a cabinet label is the same as
the Material List entry. Example labels are:
BDR24: Base cabinet, twenty four inches

wide, one right opening door, one drawer.
555
Cabinets
Cabinet Labels
B30-4: Base cabinet, thirty inches wide,

four drawers.
W3030: Wall cabinet, thirty inches wide,

thirty inches high.
BLPW3318x24: Blind peninsula wall

cabinet, thirty three inches wide, eighteen
high, twenty four inches deep.
Labels consist of letters designating a type or

style, and numbers for dimensions or drawer
counts. Objects are omitted if they are
standard values, which are:
[B|P]{B|U|W}
B U BB PW
The five parts are:
1.
[ [BL] [P] | [P] R | [R] E | C ]

BL: blind P: peninsula R: radius E: end
C: corner
Examples of allowed combinations are
blind peninsula or radius end.
2.
{ B [D | S] | U [D] | W} [L | R]
Standard number of drawers is one for a

base cabinet, none for full height or wall.
B: base U: utility (full height) W: wall
Standard depth is twenty-four inches for

base and full height, twelve for wall.
Standard height for base cabinets is

thirty-six inches, including countertop.
L and R can display only if D (door) displays, and it does not display for double
doors.
D: door(s) S: sink L: left R: right
3.
Width [height] [x depth]
Wall cabinets are assumed to have doors,

so the (D) is not listed, but the R or L is
still included for a right or left door.
4.
[ OV | RF ] [G]
A cabinet label can have up to five parts; the

second and third parts are always present.
The other parts are optional. These can be
diagrammed with the aid of brackets ([ ]),
braces ({ }) and bars (|). Something
enclosed in braces is required. It is optional if
enclosed in brackets. Choose one of a list of
objects that is separated by bars.
5.
OV: oven RF: (built in) refrigerator G:

glass doors
[PO] [CB] [-drawers [D]]
PO: pull out shelves CB: cutting board
D: double drawers
drawers: number of drawers
Cabinet labels can also be specified
individually. See Label Tab on page 576.
Editing Cabinets
Introductory Training Video: Custom
Cabinets
Video: Adding Drawers to a Cabinet
Front
556
Cabinets can be selected individually and as

a group in 2D and 3D views and edited using
the edit handles, the edit toolbar and their
specification dialog. See Cabinet
Editing Cabinets
Using the Mouse
Multiple Cabinets
Cabinets can be edited like CAD boxes. See

Editing Box-Based Objects on page 111.
Depending on the type of view, the edit
handles a cabinet displays when selected
vary.
When cabinets are selected as a group, they

can be modified as a group in the Cabinet
Specification dialog. Any specifications
that the selected objects share in common
can be edited.
When a cabinet is selected in floor plan view

or from the top, up to ten edit handles
display. They are the Move handle at the
center, the Rotate handle just outside the
cabinet front (indicated by a V) and a Resize
handle on each edge and at each corner.
When you group select cabinets of different

types, some options are not available in the
Cabinet Specification dialog. For
example, you cannot redefine the crown
molding on a full height cabinet if it was
selected with a base cabinet that does not
have crown molding.
Soffits, shelves, and partitions can be group
selected and edited using their corresponding
specification dialog. It is important that only
soffits, or only shelves, or only partitions be
a part of the selection set in order to access
the needed specification dialog.
See Cabinet Specification Dialog on page
565.
When a cabinet is selected on a side in a

cross section/elevation or 3D view, it shows
five edit handles: the Move handle and a
Resize handle on each edge. In 3D views,
Cabinets can be selected on any surface:
front, side, back or top.
Cabinets cannot be concentrically resized,
even when the Concentric edit behavior is
enabled. See Edit Behaviors on page 86.

A selected cabinet or cabinets can be edited
edit toolbar. As with most objects, cabinets
etc. See Using the Edit Toolbar on page
113.
cabinets.

edit
the selected cabinet.

edit button to
557
Cabinets
If labels are turned on (see Displaying

Objects on page 221), an edit handle for the
label also displays when the cabinet is
selected.

selected cabinet(s). See Cabinet

558
Click the Open Symbol

edit button
to open the Symbol Specification
dialog. See Symbol Specification Dialog on page 945. This tool is only available for cabinets that contain library
symbols such as sinks or dishwashers and
allows you to modify the properties of the
fixture symbol.
edit button to
selected cabinet(s). See Components

edit
button to locate all objects that have
specific matching attributes. These
objects can then be modified as a group
using the Load Values to Make Same
edit button. See Select Same / Load
Same on page 152.
Add to Library
Cabinets can be saved in the Library
Browser. Select a cabinet and click the
Add to Library edit button. The Add to
Library dialog displays, allowing you to add
the cabinet or cabinet components to specific
libraries under Cabinet Modules, Cabinet
Doors and Drawers, Fixtures (Interior) or
the My Libraries category.

edit
cabinet(s). See Point to Point Move on
page 125.
Click the Make Architectural Block

edit button to block the selected cabinet(s) together. See Creating
If the cabinet is added to the Cabinet

Modules category, the cabinet is saved
along with the cabinet door and any dropin appliance.

edit
button to replace the selected cabinet
with a symbol from the library. See
If you select a library in the Cabinet

Doors and Drawers category, only the
cabinet door is saved.
If the cabinet contains a drop-in appliance, the Fixtures (Interior) category is

available. If a library from this category
is chosen, only the drop-in appliance is
saved to the library. See Adding to the
If the cabinet is added to the My Libraries category, only the cabinet door is
saved.

edit button
to center the selected cabinet(s) along a
wall or over cabinets or fixtures. See
Centering Doors and Windows on page
311.

edit
button to reflect the selected cabinet(s)

There are several ways to specify the cabinet
door and drawer style.
Specification dialog. See Cabinet

If the desired cabinet style is known before

cabinets are placed, the door style can be set
up in the Cabinet Defaults dialog. See
Cabinet Defaults on page 580.
You can also apply a door/drawer style to a

cabinet directly from the Library Browser.
Select a door or drawer style in the library,
then click a cabinet to apply the selected
style to that cabinet. If you are in a 3D view,
the view updates. Continue clicking cabinets
or select a different tool to stop using this
function.
Once cabinets are placed, group select them

edit button to
choose a new door style from the Cabinet
Editing Custom Countertops

and Custom
Counter Holes
can be selected in 2D
and 3D views and edited using the edit
handles, the edit toolbar and their
specification dialogs. See Custom
Countertop Specification Dialog on page
579.
As with most objects, custom countertops

etc. The following edit toolbar buttons may
display on the edit toolbar for a selected
custom countertop.

edit button to
open the Custom Countertop
Specification dialog. See Custom
Countertop Specification Dialog on
page 579.

edit
the selected countertop.
Accurate Move
slows down the
See Accurate Move on page 125.

button to reflect the selected countertop
Cabinet
modules (3)
Custom countertop
Using the Mouse

Custom countertops are considered to be
CAD-based objects and are edited the way
closed polylines are. See Editing ClosedPolyline Based Objects on page 107.
559
Cabinets
Custom Countertops
Click the Move to Front

edit button
to display the selected countertop in front
of other objects in floor plan view. See
Move to Front of Group on page 122.

button to accurately move the selected countertop(s). See Point to Point Move on
page 125.

button to
center a countertop along an intersecting
wall or room. See Centering Doors and
Use the Fillet

and Chamfer
edit
tools to curve or angle the corners. See
Reshaping Objects on page 129.
Click the Make CAD Block

edit button to include the countertop and any
other selected objects in a CAD Block.
See CAD Blocks on page 870. Not
available if only countertop holes are
selected.

edit button to include the countertop and
any other selected objects in an architectural block. See Architectural Blocks
on page 663. Not available if only countertop holes are selected.

edit button
to add the countertop to the library. If the
countertop is part of a CAD block, you
can add it to the CAD Blocks library
cocreator; if it is part of an Architectural
block, you can add to the Architectural
Blocks library. See Adding to the
Add edges using the Break Line

edit
tool. See Break Line on page 130.
Click the Convert to Spline

edit button to convert the selected edge to a
spline. See Convert to Spline on page
132.
Use the Polyline Union

Intersection
Click the Convert to Plain Polyline

edit button to change the selected countertop into a polyline. See Convert to
Plain Polyline on page 151.
Introductory Training Video: Cabinet

Groups and Kitchen Islands
Convert an arc or circle into a polyline by

clicking the Convert Arc/Circle to Polyline
edit button. See Convert Arc/
Circle to Polyline on page 132.
, and Polyline Subtract
Joined Cabinets
560
versa using the Change Line/Arc

edit button. See Change Line/Arc on
page 131.
, Polyline
edit buttons to create or modify countertops using multiple custom countertops. See Union, Intersection, and
Subtract on page 146.
Convert straight edges to curved or vice
Joined Cabinets
Merged cabinets show a gap in the

Cabinet Module line.
Cabinet faces are

marked with a v.
Cabinets merge when two of them face the

same direction, meet at an angle, and touch at
only two corners. When angled cabinets are
merged, fillers are added so the cabinets are
continuous in 3D views.
Pilasters, Countertop Overhang, Closed Toe

Kicks, and Legs all behave differently when
groups of cabinets are joined:
If multiple cabinets are joined together,

only exposed end (outside) cabinets have
corner pilasters, closed toe kicks, countertop overhang, and cabinet feet.
If multiple joined cabinets have both

Front Pilasters and Corner Pilasters
specified, the exposed end cabinets
include corner pilasters and inside cabinets have front pilasters.
If multiple cabinets are joined, inside

cabinets share Front Pilasters.
Corner pilasters are eliminated on the

back if the cabinet is against a wall, and
on either side if its joined with another
cabinet.
For more information see Cabinet Specification Dialog on page 565.
Fillers appear on screen but are not included

in the materials list.
If the side or back of a cabinet moves against
another cabinet side or back, or against a
wall, it attaches to that object.
Exposed End Cabinets

When multiple cabinets are joined together
the exposed end cabinets are the cabinets on
the outside.
Kitchen Island
Exposed End Cabinets
To form a kitchen island, attach several

cabinets back-to-back and side-to-side.
Match the widths so that each cabinet back or
side meets the back or side of only one other
cabinet. If this is not done, the lines
separating the cabinets cannot be suppressed.
561
Cabinets
Cabinets of the same type and height

automatically join when placed side-to-side
or back-to-back. When attached, the
countertop is continuous in 3D views.
Two cabinets cannot merge with the same

side of another cabinet. The picture shows
two instances when cabinets are placed backto-back. Cabinet fronts and joining surfaces
are shown.
Moving Walls with

Cabinets Attached
When a wall is moved, all attached cabinets
move with it. Moving a wall to an unattached
cabinet does not attach the cabinet to it; the
cabinet must be moved to the wall. It can
also be attached to the wall when Plan
Check is done.
When wall layers are resized or the wall
layer definition redefined, the cabinets may
become unattached. To reattach, select them,
drag them away, and then drag them back
again.
Special Cabinets
Introductory Training Video: Special
Shaped Cabinets
Video: Working with Special Cabinet
Types
Normal Cabinets
Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet
and click in floor plan view to place a normal
base cabinet.
There are several special cabinet shapes that

can be specified. Certain requirements must
be met before some special cabinet types can
be specified.
Normal (default) cabinet
Corner Cabinets
To create a corner cabinet, click as close to
the inside wall corner as possible in using
either the Base Cabinet
, or Full Height
562
, Wall Cabinet
cabinet tool. A
Special Cabinets
corner cabinet remains a corner cabinet when

it is moved, edited or copied.
Turn an existing cabinet into a corner
cabinet by selecting Corner Cabinet from the
Special drop-down list in its specification
dialog.
Corner cabinet with curved door
End Cabinets
Open a cabinet for specification and select
End Cabinet from the Special drop-down list
to create an end cabinet.
Corner cabinet with sides of equal width
Before a corner cabinet can be specified

in the Cabinet Specification dialog,
the cabinets Width must be greater than
its Depth.
The Left Side Width and the Right Side

Width can be set independently for corner
cabinets. See General Tab on page 566.
You can specify a Diagonal Door on corner cabinets to create an angled corner
cabinet. See Front Tab on page 569.
Right End Cabinet
End Cabinets have an angled front and

side.
The cabinet width must be no greater

than its depth for an end cabinet to be
specified.
Radius End Cabinets
Corner cabinet with diagonal door

Right Radius End or Left Radius End from
the Special drop-down list to create a radius
end cabinet.
The diagonal door on corner cabinets can

be curved by entering a negative value in
the second Right Side Width field. See
563
Cabinets
Radius End cabinets have a ninety-degree arch
As youre facing a cabinet, a right radius end

cabinet curves to the right, and a left radius
end cabinet curves to the left.
Left
Radius
End
Right
Radius
End
Peninsula Radius Cabinets
Angled Front Cabinet
The length of the left and right side of an

Angled Front cabinet can be defined by
changing the Depth/Bow Depth value.
See General Tab on page 566.
Bow Front Cabinets

Bow Front from the Special drop-down list
to create a bow front cabinet.

Peninsula Radius from the Special dropdown list to create peninsula radius cabinet.
Bow Front Cabinet
Peninsula Radius Cabinet
The radius can be adjusted by changing the

Depth/Bow Depth value. See General Tab
on page 566.
Angled Front Cabinets

Angled Front from the Special drop-down
list to create an angled front cabinet.
564
The bow depth of a Bow Front cabinet

can be defined. See General Tab on
page 566.
The bow depth cannot exceed half the

cabinet width.
The doors and drawers on a Bow Front

cabinet automatically match the curvature of the cabinet.
Fillers
Chief Architect models a continuous
countertop and fillers if two cabinets meeting
in a corner are separated from each other by
nine inches or less. Where two walls meet at

an inside corner, a countertop often flows
continuously across base cabinets on one
wall to those attached to the next. A filler is
used to separate the front of one of these
cabinets from the one it meets so that
drawers and doors have room to operate.
Blind Cabinets
Often, when two cabinets meet in a corner,
one is partially hidden by the other. The
portion of the cabinet covered by the other
cabinet's side cannot be seen and is called a
blind cabinet. Blind cabinets are handled
the same as other cabinets that meet in a
corner.
Two base cabinets and the filler between them
To allow a continuous countertop, wall and

full height cabinets also attach to each other
in this way.

Select a cabinet and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Cabinet
Cabinets
If the selected cabinet is a cabinet symbol

created using the Create Symbol Wizard,
the Cabinet Symbol Specification
dialog opens instead and has fewer options
than the Cabinet Specification dialog.
See Create Symbol Wizard on page 925.
The Cabinet Specification dialog allows
you to customize cabinets individually and in
groups. The options in the dialog are similar
to the Cabinet Defaults dialog.
565
General Tab
1
2
4
5
6
8
9
1 A number of Special cabinets are
available from the drop-down list. See

Special Cabinets on page 562.
2 Specification - A variety of cabinet
dimensions can be specified here.

Fractional cabinet widths, depths, and
heights are supported to 1/16th of an inch.
Height (Including Counter) - This is the
measurement from the bottom to the top of
the cabinet. For base cabinets, this dimension
includes the Counter Thickness, but not the
height of the backsplash.
566
Note: Height defines the height of the entire

cabinet. The height of the cabinet face, countertop and the toe kick are all included in this
value. If you change either the Countertop
Thickness or the Toe Kick Height, the cabinet
face height is altered. This changes the
heights of your face objects.
Width - This is the dimension across the

cabinet as you view it in elevation. This does
not include the countertop overhang.
Depth - This is the dimension from front to
back on the cabinet. This does not include
the thickness of 3/4 for overlay doors or the

countertop overhang.
4 Backsplash - The dimensions and style
For Special type Bow Front cabinets, specify

the Bow Depth in inches. Up to half the
cabinet width is allowed.
Specify the Backsplash Height. The

backsplash is only available when the cabinet
is against a wall.
For corner cabinets, the Width and Depth/

Bow Depth fields become Right Side
Width and Left Side Width. If a corner
cabinet is assigned a diagonal door on the
Front tab, the second Right Side Width field
specifies the bow depth: a positive number
creates a bow and a negative number, an
inside bow.
Backsplash Thickness - Specify the

thickness of the backsplash material.
Follow Terrain - If the cabinet is outside a

room, check this box to place the cabinet
relative to the terrain height.
3 Counter - Specify the dimensions and

style of the counter here.
Counter Thickness and Counter Overhang

- Specify these values for base cabinets. The
Counter Overhang is used for any side of a
cabinet that is not against a wall or another
cabinet. Changing the counter thickness does
not alter the cabinet height but it does affect
the height of face items.
Flat Sides can be added to base cabinets.
Checking Flat Sides eliminates the counter
overhang on the cabinets exposed ends.
Check Flat Back to eliminate the overhang
on cabinets with an exposed back.
Check Always Present to display the

backsplash at all times. If unchecked, a
backsplash is present only when the cabinet
is against a wall.
Side - Check this box to have the same
height backsplash added to the side of a base
or wall cabinet that is against a wall or taller
cabinet.
Any base cabinet or wall cabinet can have a
backsplash defined. The backsplash for a
wall cabinet extends from the bottom of the
cabinet down to the base cabinet. The
backsplash for a base cabinet is measured
from the countertop up.
Wall cabinets offer a check box for
Backsplash to Base Below. If a backsplash
is added to a wall cabinet, it completely
covers the wall from the bottom of the
cabinet to the countertop or backsplash
below.
If a base cabinet and a wall cabinet both have
a backsplash, the backsplash from the wall
cabinet extends down to the top of the base
cabinet backsplash.
Electrical switches or outlets that are placed
within the backsplash area display in front of
the backsplash in a 3D view when electrical
items are turned on in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
567
Cabinets
Floor to Bottom - Specify a distance. For

base and full height cabinets, this is usually
0. Increase this value by at least 1/16 to
eliminate the toe kick. If a toe kick height has
been changed from the default values, raising
a cabinet off the floor does not remove the
toe kick.
of the backsplash are specified here.
5 Toe Kick - The dimensions and style of

the toe kick are specified here.
Toe Kick Height and Depth - Specify these

values for base or full height cabinets. If a
Toe Kick Height or Depth is defined, it
becomes part of the cabinet and is not deleted
if the cabinet is raised off the floor.
If the Toe Kick Height or Toe Kick Depth is
set to use the default (D), the toe kick is
only available when the cabinet is resting on
the floor. Delete the (D) and enter a
positive value to display a toe kick on a
cabinet that is raised off the floor.
Changing the Toe Kick Height does not alter
the cabinet height but it does affect the height
of face items.
Flat Sides can be added to base and full
height cabinets. Checking Flat Sides
eliminates the toe kick area on the exposed
end of the cabinet.
Check Flat Back to eliminate the toe kick on
cabinets with an exposed back. This does not
eliminate the toe kick on the cabinet front.
Check Closed Toe to extend the cabinet
sides to cover the sides of the toe kick area. If
568
pilasters that do not extend to the floor are

specified, checking this places a support
block under them at exposed corners.
6 Corner - Specify angled or rounded

corners for the selected cabinet(s).
Corner Width - Enter a value to create a flat

corner plane of the specified width. This also
applies to the countertop.
Check Rounded to eliminate the 45 degree
plane and round the cabinet corners.
7 The preview of the cabinet updates as

the cabinet changes.
8 Show Color - Check this box to show

the cabinet preview in color.
9 The automatic Cabinet Label displays

below the dialog preview.
The cabinet label defines the type and size of

the cabinet. It is not editable, but you can
specify a custom label on the Label tab.
The labels display in floor plan view if
Cabinet Labels are turned on in the Layer
Display Options dialog. They also display
in the Materials List.
Front Tab
2
3
1 Click a face item in the preview
2 Select the Door Style and Drawer
Click the Library button to select from the

Cabinet Doors and Drawers library
category. Once a door style is selected from
the library, it displays in the drop down list.
See Editing the Cabinet Door/Drawer
Style on page 559.
diagram to select it. The selected item

is highlighted, and the Item Number, Item
Type and Item Height identify the part
selected.
Style from the drop-down lists.
Select Plain Doors or Drawers to apply

a flat drawer or door front.
Select Framed Doors or Doors to apply

a drawer with a frame and flat panel
Select Library to select a cabinet door or

drawer front from the library. See Cabinet Doors and Drawers on page 682.
3 Item Number - The item number
currently selected displays here. Click

the drop-down list to select a face item. Item
569
Cabinets
front. The drawer must be at least 6

inches for the frame and panel to display.
The cabinets door, drawer and shelf

configuration is specified on the Front tab.
numbers start at the top of the cainet and go

down the face. Item number 1 usually
identifies the top face frame rail (separation).
Item Type - Click the drop-down list to
select from the available face items.
When the height of a cabinet is changed,

or the height of a face item is changed,
the height of the lowest face item is
altered to make up the difference.
If you modify the lowest item, the item

directly above is adjusted. Set the countertop height and the toe kick height first,
and then work from the top to the bottom
when adjusting face items.
If the height of an appliance has been

altered, entering d restores its default
height.
Items that display in the front of a cabinet

such as doors, drawers and appliances are
called front items.
Each front item is usually separated by a
frame piece, the exposed portion of which is
defined as the separation. At the top, bottom
and sides of the face frame, a separation
represents the cabinet rails and stiles.
Note: The program makes sure that the
heights of the front items equal the total cabinet face height. When necessary, a blank
area is inserted at the bottom or the lowest
face item is deleted when there is not enough
room. This means you should start editing
face items at the top and work down.
A cabinet can have any number of front

items, but there is a limit to the number of
items that can actually fit on a given cabinets front.
Cabinet fronts may be composed of any

combination of face items.
When a Panel (false front) is specified, it

assumes the appearance of the drawer
style assigned to that cabinet.
Appliances cannot be added from the

Item Type list, but are included once
they have been added from the library.
See Built-In Appliances on page 554.
Item Height - Define a value for the selected

item in the cabinet front. Fractional heights
are supported to 1/16th of an inch.
570
Specify Shelves - Click this button to open

the Cabinet Shelves Specification
dialog and specify the shelf configuration for
a door or opening face item. See Cabinet
Shelf Specification Dialog on page 524.
Click Add New to add a new face item
directly below the currently selected item.
When you click Add New, the New

Cabinet Face Item dialog displays.
Define the Item Type, Item Height and
click OK.
If you click Add New with no face item

selected, the program adds the new item
at the bottom of the cabinet face.
When a face item is added to the cabinet

front, the program attempts to reduce the
height of the lowest item on the cabinet
front to make room for the new item.
Click Delete to remove the currently selected

item. When a face item is deleted, usually the
height of the lowest item is increased to
make up the difference.
Stile Between Doors - Select the check

box to have double doors and double
drawers separated by a stile. This has no
effect on other item types.
Click Move Up to move the currently

selected item up one position, switching
places with the item directly above.
Lazy Susan - This option is only available for corner cabinets. These do not
show, but are reflected in the cabinet
label and how the cabinet is drawn in
floor plan view.
The Reverse Appliance check box is

available if a sink, appliance or other fixture is placed into the cabinet. Select
Reverse Appliance to reverse the fixture
from left to right. This feature can be
used to change a left hand door on a builtin refrigerator to a right hand door.
Check Double Face to replace the current cabinet face with two faces, each
approximately half as wide.
Check Triple Face to replace the cabinet

face with three faces.
Click Move Down to move the currently

selected item down one position, switching
places with the item directly below.
Note: The program tries to maintain a single
separation between all face items. When you
add or delete a face item, separations are
usually added or deleted with them.
4 Certain Options are available
depending on the type of cabinet

selected.
Inset Doors may be selected for all cabinets. This option makes all door and
drawer faces flush with the cabinet face
instead of overlaying it.
Doors On Back may be selected if the

cabinet back is not attached. The back
matches the front.
Bevel - Type in a value to apply beveled

edges to plain drawers and doors. This does
not affect framed or library doors. The bevel
width, as viewed from the front has a
maximum value of 3.
Glass Doors may be defined for any cabinet that doesnt use a library door. When
selected, the door panel is created using
the glass material. The entire door is
glass on plain doors.
Enter a Side Overlap value to apply an

overlap to doors and drawers. A value of 1
inches creates an overlap of one inch on
either side.
Diagonal Door - This option is only

available for corner cabinets. Check this
box to create a diagonal door instead of a
double door at right angles.
Enter a Vertical Overlap value to apply a

vertical overlap to doors and drawers. A
value of 1 inches creates an overlap of one
inch on top and bottom.
If Diagonal Door is checked in the

Cabinet Defaults dialog, corner cabinets have a diagonal door by default.
Separation - Defines the width of the face

frame between doors, drawers, and face
items. A European style cabinet typically has
a 3/4 separation.
571
Cabinets
Left and Right Stile - Define the frame

width to the left or right of all face items.
These can be set independently if necessary.
When set to default ([D]), the program uses
the separator width for the left and right
stiles.
5 Appliance Front Offset - This option
is available for cabinets with topmounted fixtures, such as sinks and

cooktops. Enter a value to adjust the depth of
the counter surface between the counter edge
and the fixture.
Fill Tab
1
2
3
The options on this tab control how a cabinet

displays in floor plan view.
1 Check No Fill to display the selected
cabinet(s) with a transparent fill,

showing only the cabinet border.
Check Use Default to use the default fill

style assigned to the corresponding cabinet.
See Cabinet Defaults on page 552.
572
2 Uncheck both boxes and click the Plan
Fill color bar to open the Color

Chooser and specify a custom fill color.
See Color Chooser Dialog on page 722.
3 Appliance Fill - These items are
enabled when the selected cabinet

contains a fixture or appliance.
Check No Fill to give the selected appliance

a transparent fill.
Check Use Original Plan Colors to use the
original colors for the fixture inserted into
the cabinet.
Uncheck both boxes and click the Plan Fill

color bar to open the Color Chooser and
specify a custom fill color for the appliance.
Hardware Tab
1 Select a Door Handle from the drop-
down list or select a Library handle

from the Select Library Object dialog.
Specify the location of the handle In from
Door Edge and Down from Door Top. For
Wall Cabinets, this value is Up From Door
Bottom.
Select a Drawer Handle from the dropdown list or select a Library handle from the
Select Library Object dialog. Entering a
value In from Drawer Edge creates two
handles the specified distance from the
drawer edge. Specify the location of the
handle Down from Drawer Top. A value of
0" centers the handle on the drawer.
573
Cabinets
Hinges - Select from the list of available

styles or select a Library hinge from the
Select Library Object dialog. Specify
the location of the hinges Up/Down from
Door Edge. Two or three hinges are placed,
depending on the door height.
library, or None. Adjoining cabinets share

cabinet legs.
2 Front Pilaster - Select the default front
pilaster, a Pilaster from the library, or

None.
Corner Pilaster - Select the default corner

pilaster, a pilaster from the library, or None.
Specifying a corner pilaster automatically
creates a flat corner surface and overrides the
Flat Corner setting on the General tab.
The Width applies to both front pilasters and
corner pilasters.
Check Extend to Floor to extend front
pilasters and corner pilasters to the floor.
Removing the Toe Kick on the General tab
also extends the pilasters to the floor.
3 Cabinet Feet - Select the default
cabinet leg, a cabinet leg from the
574
Base cabinet with front pilasters and legs
Moldings Tab
1 Molding - Select a molding for the
cabinet. This list has items only if you

assigned moldings to your default cabinet.
These moldings are stored with individual
cabinets in all other cases.
2 Add New - If no moldings are selected
or if you want to add a new molding to

the list, click the button to open the
Moldings and Profiles library category.

Browse and add a new molding to the list.
Select - Click here to open the Moldings and
Profiles library category. If you select a
molding using the Select button, you replace
the current molding in the list. This option
substitutes one molding for another; it does
not add a new molding to the list.
Delete - Click here to delete the selected
molding from the cabinet.
3 Molding Specification - Use this
section to modify the molding profile

for the selected cabinet.
575
Cabinets
Multiple moldings for each type of cabinet

can be specified. For example, you may want
a wood edge around countertops of base
cabinets and a crown molding that ties
together the tops of the wall cabinets and full
height cabinets.
Height - This is the vertical dimension of the

molding profile. This value is initially set in
the selected molding profile but can be
adjusted.
Width - This value can be used to resize the
molding profile horizontally.
Offset - This value defines the distance the
molding is offset from the top or bottom of
the cabinet. Where it is measured from
depends on which option is selected below.
You can enter positive or negative values in
this field. The molding does not display if it
is completely above or below the cabinet.
Once an offset is defined, select From Top
or From Bottom to specify a reference point.
Cabinet labels can also be controlled on the

218.
1
3
2
4
From Top is measured from the cabinet

top and the molding top.
1 Suppress Label - Check this box to
From Bottom is measured from the

molding bottom and the cabinet bottom.
2 Automatic Labels - Select this option
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
Some material options may be disabled if the
selected cabinet is a manufacturer symbol.
Label Tab
An objects label displays in floor plan view
if Show Labels is checked on the Label tab
of the Schedule Specification dialog for
576
that type of object. See Label Tab on page

1000.
suppress the selected objects label.
to control labels through either the

default schedule or the schedule that the
cabinet is currently in. See Cabinet Labels
on page 555 for more information on how
automatic labels are generated.
3 Use Component Code -Replace the
default label for this object with the

component code. See Components Dialog
on page 1014.
4 Specify Label - Replace the default
label for this object with whatever you

type into the text field.
Note: If you choose a label shape in the
Cabinet Schedule Specification dialog Label tab, it overrides these options and
displays the schedule label instead.

From the Front tab of the Base Cabinet,
Wall Cabinet, or Full Height Cabinet
Specification dialog, select a door or
opening face item in the preview diagram
and click the Specify Shelves... button to

open the Cabinet Shelf Specification
dialog. See Front Tab on page 569.
1
4
2
Automatic
1 By default, cabinet shelves are
specified automatically. The default

number of shelves, shelf type, thickness,
spacing, and depth display here.
Manual
2 Select the Manual radio button to
specify cabinet shelving for the selected
door or opening. If a cabinet is resized after

shelving has been manually edited, the
specifications are maintained, but all shelves
may not be display in all situations.
The Number of Shelves can be specified.
Equal Spacing is checked by default.
3 The shelf type, thickness, spacing, and
depth can be specified on a per shelf

basis or for all shelves at once. To determine
577
Cabinets
which, select the shelf number or All Shelves

from the drop down list.
Note: If All Shelves is selected after
changes have been made to any one shelf,
no change displays, indicating that all
shelves are not the same.
Specify the shelf Type from the drop down

list.
Enter a shelf Thickness in fractions or

decimals.
Changing the Spacing From Previous
unchecks Equal Spacing above.
You can select Full, Half or Specify the shelf
Depth manually.
4 The preview shows shelf numbers,
thickness, depth, and spacing. Press the

Tab key to update the preview as changes are
made.
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog

Select a shelf or partition and click the Open
Object
edit button to open the Shelf
Specification dialog or Partition

General Tab
Specify the Height, Width, Depth, and the

distance from the Floor to Bottom of the
shelf or partition. Click the check box if you
578
want the shelf or partition to follow the

terrain.
Fill Tab
For information about the Fill tab, see Fill
Tab on page 572.
Layer Tab
Moldings Tab
Materials Tab



Select a custom countertop and click the
Open Object
Custom Countertop Specification
dialog.
General Tab
3 Check Set Height From Cabinet to
allow the Countertop Height to be

determined by the cabinet below.
Top Height - Specify the height of the top of

the custom countertop independent of the
cabinet below. Set Height From Cabinet
must be unchecked.
4 Check Set Thickness From Cabinet to
1
2
3
allow the Countertop Thickness to be

determined by the cabinet below.
Thickness - Specify the thickness of the

countertop independent of the cabinet below.
Set Thickness From Cabinet must be
unchecked.
1 Check Hole in Countertop to convert

the polyline into a countertop hole. The
selected polyline must be contained within a
custom countertop.
2
edge.
Check No Molding On Selected Edge

to turn off molding on the selected

Selected Line Tab

Moldings Tab
579
Cabinets
Polyline Tab
Line Style Tab
Materials Tab


Fill Style Tab

Cabinet Defaults
Click the + next to Cabinets to access the
cabinets sub-headings. Select a subheading
and click the Edit... button to open the
defaults dialog associated with your
selection.
Cabinet defaults can also be accessed by
double-clicking the Cabinet Tools
button.
Most of the values in the various Cabinet

Defaults dialogs are initial values. Once
placed, cabinets can be edited individually or
in groups by selecting and opening them for
specification. Changes made to cabinets after
they have been placed do not alter the default
settings. You should review the settings in
the Cabinet Defaults dialogs before
cabinets are placed.
Most cabinet defaults are not dynamic. The
following values are dynamic and change
existing cabinet objects whenever the default
cabinet is changed: Separation, Splash
Height and Thickness, Countertop
Overhang and Thickness, Toe Kick Height
and Depth, and all Materials. See Dynamic
General Cabinet Defaults

Click General to access the General
Cabinet Defaults dialog.
580
Cabinet Defaults
1
2
that is 20 inches wide, your default cabinet is

24 inches, and the minimum width increment
is 6 inches, the program places an 18 inch
cabinet. If you have a space that is 8 inches
and your minimum cabinet width is 9 inches,
no cabinet is placed.
You can set these values specifically for
particular manufacturers. This helps
you place and resize cabinets with your
mouse quickly.
1 Set the Minimum Cabinet Width.

2 Specify whether cabinets should Use
Grid Snaps or a designated Resize

Increment when resizing. Set the Width
Increment that new cabinets snap to. The
smallest allowed Minimum Cabinet Width
is 1/16th of an inch (1 mm) and the minimum
Width Increment is 1 inch (10 mm).
If you try to place a cabinet into a space that
is too narrow, the program attempts to place
a smaller cabinet that is a multiple of the
minimum width increment. If the space is
narrower than the minimum width
increment, the program does not place a
cabinet. For example, if you have a space
The other Cabinet Default dialog buttons

access the default dialogs for each cabinet
type. When finished with each, you return to
this dialog.
Base, Full Height,

Wall, Shelf, Partition
The default dialog for each cabinet type is
similar to its corresponding specification
dialog and can also be opened by doubleclicking the appropriate tool or by selecting
Edit> Default Settings> Cabinets.
Descriptions of the settings in the Cabinet
Specification dialogs begin on page 565.
581
582
Chapter 20:
Terrain

Video: Building a Terrain Model
Video: Terrain and Landscaping
Chief Architect allows you to model the
terrain around a house. Begin by specifying
elevation data that creates the surface
contours, and then add surface features.
Chief Architect builds a three dimensional
map of the terrain. The more information
provided, the better the terrain models.
Once the terrain is modeled, shadows that
follow the terrain can be created using the
Sun Angle tool. The road and sidewalk tools
are covered in the next chapter. See Roads
& Sidewalks on page 629.
Chapter Contents
Terrain Configuration Button

Terrain Tools
Terrain Elevation Tools
Terrain Modifier Tools
Terrain Feature Tools
Garden Bed Tools
Water Feature Tools

Terrain Wall and Curb Tools
Stepping Stone Tools
Plant Tools
Sprinkler Tools
Sun Shadows
Hardiness Zones
The Terrain Library
Clearing the Terrain
Displaying Terrain
Editing Terrain Objects
Creating a Plot Plan
Plant Image Specification Dialog
Plant Specification Dialog
Plant Chooser Dialog
Terrain Specification Dialog
Elevation Point Specification Dialog
Elevation Line Specification Dialog
Flat Region Specification Dialog
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog
Raised / Lowered Region Specification
Dialog
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog
Terrain Break Specification Dialog
Terrain Path Specification Dialog
583
Terrain
Chapter Overview
Sprinkler Specification Dialog

Importing Terrain Data
Import Terrain Wizard
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data

Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data
Terrain Configuration Button

Access to the terrain and road tools is
centralized through the Terrain menu.
Garden Bed Tools
Select Terrain to display the following

terrainand road parent tools:
Water Feature Tools
Terrain Tools
Terrain Walls and Curb Tools
Roads and Sidewalks Tools
Plant Tools
Sprinkler Tools
Terrain Tools
There are many tools available for creating
terrain. All tools are accessible through the
Terrain menu.
Select Terrain> Terrain Perimeter to
create a terrain perimeter.
Introductory Training Video: Creating a
Terrain Perimeter
584
Terrain Perimeter
If you do not add any terrain elevation data

within the terrain perimeter, the terrain
remains flat at the elevation 0' - 0".
The terrain perimeter contains a variety of
properties that can be customized. Many of
these properties affect how the terrain
displays when modeled in 3D. See Terrain
Terrain perimeter at 0' - 0" in a render view
Click the Terrain Specification button

to open the Terrain Specification
dialog. The Terrain Specification dialog
controls how terrain is generated and how it
displays in 3D views. See Terrain
The terrain perimeter is a closed polyline

defining the boundary of the terrain that
generates in 3D views. If the terrain
perimeter does not display on the screen,
click the Fill Window
button.
If you create a terrain perimeter after you

have drawn a building or walls, the terrain
perimeter encompasses everything in floor
plan view.
Select Terrain> Build Terrain to

generate the terrain surface based on
the provided elevation data. See Building
the Terrain on page 596.
It can be resized and edited like other

polylines. See Editing Closed-Polyline
Select Clear Terrain to remove

contour lines and 3D surfaces
generated by the program based on the
provided elevation data. Elevation data
entered manually remains. See Clearing the
Terrain on page 596.
A CAD polyline can be converted into a

terrain perimeter. See Editing Terrain
Select Terrain> Terrain Elevation

Tools to access the various tools.
Elevation data can be specified using
Elevation Point
Elevation Spline
, Elevation Line
, Elevation Region
surface of your site and is represented by

contour lines in floor plan view and a curved
surface in 3D.
Elevation Points
Elevation Points contain absolute
elevation data for one location. Chief
Architect requires many points to make an
accurate approximation of your site. They
and Terrain Break

tools. When terrain
is generated, this data is used to calculate the
585
Terrain
Introductory Training Video: Adding

Elevation Information for Sloped Lots
should be used in addition to Elevation

Lines
and Elevation Splines
Even small sites with a slope may require

over a hundred points to generate an accurate
model of the terrain. For the sake of
illustration, the following image shows only
a few elevation points.
To place an elevation point, select Terrain>
Elevation Data> Elevation Points
and
click in floor plan view. The Elevation
Point Specification dialog opens. Enter
an elevation value and click OK. Click
somewhere else in floor plan view and the
Elevation Point Specification dialog
opens again with the last elevation value
entered. See Elevation Point Specification
Dialog on page 613.
Contour lines after terrain generation
Elevation Lines
An Elevation Line contains absolute
elevation data for many points at a
constant elevation. Elevation lines can be
connected to create a polyline with many
straight sections. For the sake of illustration,
single-section elevation lines were added to
the following image.
To place an elevation line, select Terrain>
Elevation Data> Elevation Line
and
click and drag in floor plan view. At first, an
elevation line is at elevation 0' - 0". It must
be opened and assigned an elevation.
Elevation Points before terrain generation
120"
To generate the terrain, select Terrain>

Build Terrain
. Chief Architect gathers
the elevation data provided, fills in the gaps
where elevation data has not been provided,
and generates contour lines. See Building
the Terrain on page 596.
0"
Elevation Lines before terrain generation
586
60"
36"
0"
Elevation splines before terrain generation
Render view (Low Detail) after terrain generation
Elevation Splines
To place an elevation spline, select Terrain>

Elevation Data> Elevation Spline
and
click and drag multiple sections in floor plan
view. Elevation splines are initially placed at
elevation 0' - 0"and must be opened and
assigned an elevation.
Elevation lines and elevation splines are

created and edited just like CAD lines and
splines. See The CAD Drawing Tools on
page 842.
Elevation Regions
An Elevation Region contains
absolute elevation data for an enclosed
region and is ideal for creating a flat surface
for your building site. Avoid specifing any
other elevation data within an elevation
region.
To create an elevation region, select
Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation
587
Terrain
Elevation Splines can be used to form

complex curves and shapes. Like
elevation lines, elevation splines contain
absolute elevation data for many points along
a constant elevation.
Region
and then click and drag a
rectangular polyline in floor plan view. Once
the elevation region is drawn, it must be
opened and assigned an elevation value.
Elevation regions are created just like
rectangular polylines. See Rectangular
Render Full Overview after terrain generation
Terrain Breaks
240"
120"
To place a terrain break, select Terrain>
0"
Elevation lines used to create a terrain grade,
elevation region used to create building pad.
588
A Terrain Break creates a division

along the terrain surface that effects
terrain generation. Elevation data on one side
of the terrain break does not affect the terrain
generation on the other side, allowing you to
create immediate drops in terrain.
Elevation Data> Terrain Break

and
click and drag a line in floor plan view.
If the terrain break divides the terrain

perimeter into two separate pieces, the
terrain data on either side is calculated
independently and smoothed separately,
resulting in sharp terrain contours.
If the terrain break does not extend completely from one side of the terrain perimeter to the other, the areas near each end
of the terrain break are blended.
240"
120"
Render full overview after terrain generation
84"
18"
0"
Elevation lines create the grade, elevation
region creates the building pad, and the terrain
break (dashed) creates a vertical drop.
The Retaining Wall

tool creates a
similar effect and adds a retaining wall that
rests against the terrain break. By default, the
height of the retaining wall matches the
terrain on the high side of the break and the
bottom matches the low side. Height can also
be specified independent of the terrain
elevation. See Retaining Walls on page
593.

Select Terrain> Modifier to access
these tools.
The terrain surface can be modified using the
Raised Region
, Lowered Region
Hill
, Valley
, and Flat Region
tools. These tools allow you to modify the
existing elevation data by drawing a closed
polyline. Their height is relative to the terrain
To add a terrain modifier to your plan, select

one of the tools from the menu or toolbar and
click and drag a closed polyline in floor plan
view. The polyline can then be selected and
edited in a variety of ways. See Editing
Terrain Objects on page 597.
589
Terrain
surface generated from the elevation data

provided in your plan.
A Raised Region
creates a raised area
that is flat on the top like a plateau, and a
Elev. Line
(240")
Hill
Lowered Region
Raised
Region
that is flat on the bottom. The Hill
Elevation
Region (120")
Flat
Region
Elev. Line
(0")
creates a depression
and
Valley
tools create similar terrain shapes
that come to a point instead of flattening at
their highest or lowest elevations. A Flat
Valley
Lowered Region
Region
adjusts to the surrounding terrain
to maintain a flat elevation.
Elevation lines create the grade, elevation region

creates the building pad, and the terrain
modifiers create terrain shapes relative to the
elevation data.
Terrain modifiers can be blocked with

images and stored in the library for
future use. See Creating Architectural
Blocks on page 664.
Render Full Overview after terrain generation

Introductory Training Video: Terrain
Features
Spline Feature
Terrain features are bounded areas that

follow the contours of the terrain rather
than modify them. They can have a specified
height and material and can also clip other
terrain features. Terrain features can be
drawn in 2D and 3D views.
You can create a variety of terrain feature
shapes using the Rectangular Feature
590
Feature
, Kidney Shaped
, and Terrain Hole
tools.
Use terrain features to highlight landscape

elements. For example, if the entire terrain is
using a grass material, a flower bed can be
created within the terrain by specifying a
terrain feature that uses a dirt material.
Terrain features are also useful for creating
walkways using the height property.
Rectangular Features
and Terrain
Holes
are created just like rectangular
polylines.
Spline Features
are created just like
standard CAD closed splines. See
Splines on page 868.
Kidney Shaped Features

are created
by dragging from one end of the kidney
to the other. See Rectangular Polyline
on page 865.
Terrain features were used to create the

following image. Positive or negative
elevation values were assigned to each, as
were special materials such as sand, water,
and soil. The volleyball net, flowers, and tree
are all objects found in the Library Browser.
Terrain features can also be converted from

closed 2D polylines or splines using the
Convert Polyline
edit tool. See Convert
For information about adding height and
material information to terrain features, see
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog on
page 617.
Terrain features in floor plan view
Terrain Holes
A Terrain Hole
is a region that cuts a
hole in the terrain. Using this tool is the same
as creating a terrain feature and checking

make hole in the Terrain Feature
Specification dialog. See Terrain Feature
591
Terrain
Terrain features in a final render view
The Terrain Hole

tool is useful for
manually clipping the terrain around a
foundation that does not match the footprint
of the first floor. For more information on
clipping, see General Tab on page 610.
Terrain features can be blocked with

images and stored in the library for
future use. See Creating Architectural
Blocks on page 664.
Garden Bed Tools

Use the Garden Bed tools to place
garden beds in your plan. You have a
choice of shapes.
Polyline Garden Bed

This tool draws a square or retangular
garden bed.
Round Garden Bed

Use this tool to draw round or oval
garden beds.
Kidney Shaped Garden Bed

You can draw a kidney shaped garden
bed with this tool. Once you have
placed it with the orientation you prefer, you
can select it and then resize, rotate, and
reshape it using the edit handles.
Set the height of raised garden beds in the
Terrain Feature Specification. Place a garden
bed, select it, and click Open Object
to
access the dialog. See Terrain Feature Specification Dialog on page 617.
Water Feature Tools

The Water Feature tools allow you to
add ponds or a stream to your plan.
You can set the atttributes of these beatures
in the Terrain Feature Specification. See
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog on
page 617.
Round Pond
Use this tool to draw a round or oval
pond.
Kidney Shaped Pond

This tool draws a kidney shaped pond.
Place it with the orientation you prefer,
592
then select it to resize, rotate, and reshape it

using the edit handles.
Stream
You can draw a stream with this tool.
Normally streams are irregular in
shape. Select the stream and click Advanced
Spline
on the edit toolbar. This gives you
handles to reshape the stream. See
A stream follows the terrain. This can result
in it appearing to run uphill if the terrain is
not modeled correctly.

The Straight Retaining Wall tool
draws a straight wall.
The Terrain Wall and Curb Tools

allow you to draw landscaping walls
and curbs.
Terrain Walls
Use the Straight Terrain Wall tool to
draw a wall that sits on top of and
follows the terrain. This wall is made of
concrete by default. You can assign
alternative materials.
Use the Spline Terrain Wall to draw a
curved terrain wall. This wall is drawn
the same way as a CAD spline. See Splines
on page 868.
To specify the height of either straight or
curved terrain walls, select the wall and
Open Object
. On the General tab of the
Terrain Path Specification, indicate the
walls height. See Terrain Path Specification

Dialog on page 619.
Retaining Walls
Use the Curved Retaining Wall tool

to draw a curved wall that holds back
earth.
The height of the retaining wall is
determined by the elevation on each side. By
default, the height of the wall matches the
terrain on the high side of the break and the
bottom matches the low side. If you insert a
retaining wall into flat terrain, it looks like a
concrete strip in 3D views.
Terrain Curbs
Use the terrain curb tools to draw
landscaping curbs.
Use the Straight Curb tool to draw a
straight curb.
Use the Spline Curb tool to draw a
curved curb. This curb is drawn the
same way as a CAD spline. See Splines on
page 868.
The Retaining Wall tools function similarly

to terrain breaks, but include a wall. See
Terrain Breaks on page 588.

Polyline Stepping Stone
This tool draws retangular or square
stepping stones.
593
Terrain
Use the stepping stones tools to place a

walkway made of individual stepping
stones. By default, these steps are concrete,
but you can change their material and other
attributes in the Terrain Feature
Specification dialog. See Terrain Feature
Round Stepping Stone

You can draw round stepping stones
with this tool.
Plant Tools
Select Plant tools to add plants to your
plan.
Select Terrain> Plant> Plant Chooser
to open the Plant Chooser dialog. See
Plant Chooser Dialog on page 608.
Select Plant> Create Plant Image
to
create a plant image. See Plant Image
Specification Dialog on page 602. Once a
plant image is created, it can be added to the
library for future use. See Adding to the
Choose Plant> Grow All Plants
the Grow Plants dialog.
to open
Click and drag the slider bar and select a

growth period from zero to twenty years.
This only works for plants that have a mature
height and mature age set. See Plant Image
Select Plant> Show Hardiness Zones
to access regional climate zone maps. See
Hardiness Zones on page 595.
Add Fencing
to your terrain, complete
with gates from the Doors Library.
SeeFencing on page 237 and Doors on
page 683.
Sprinkler Tools
Use the Sprinkler Tools to design a
sprinkler system in your plan.
Select Terrain> Sprinkler> Sprinkler
Select Terrain> Sprinkler> Sprinkler
Head
to open the library and choose a
sprinkler type. Sprinklers can be selected and
opened for specification. See Sprinkler
Spline
to draw curved sprinkler lines in
your plan. Sprinkler splines are drawn and
edited like CAD splines. See Splines on
page 868.
Select Terrain> Sprinkler> Sprinkler Line
The appearance of sprinkler lines and splines

can be controlled in the Layer Display
to draw sprinkler lines in your plan.
594
Sprinkler lines are drawn and edited just like

CAD lines. See Line Tools on page 846.
Sun Shadows
Options dialog. See Displaying Objects
on page 221.
Sun Shadows
Sun shadows are computed based on the
contour of the terrain. If a terrain perimeter
exists, the sun shadow adjusts to the terrain.
The Sun Shadow is automatically rebuilt
whenever terrain is rebuilt. If you generate a
Sun Shadow and the terrain is not up-to-date,

the terrain automatically rebuilds. You can
turn off the automatic rebuild. See Sun
Angle Specification Dialog on page 778.
Hardiness Zones
Zones...
to view the regional
Hardiness Zone Maps. Click the dropdown list to select various regions.
Terrain
Select Terrain> Plant> Show Hardiness
595
The Terrain Library

The Library Browser contains a
collection of terrain objects that can be
placed in a plan.
You can create your own objects and save
them to the library. Select any combination
of elevation points, elevation lines, terrain
features, roads, sidewalks, road markings, or
even the terrain perimeter itself and send

them to the library as one unit. This library
object can then be placed into any plan. Once
placed into a plan, each object is independent
and is no longer part of the group. See
Clearing the Terrain

To remove the generated terrain, select
Terrain> Clear Terrain
. When
the terrain is cleared, it does not display in
3D views and contours do not display in
floor plan view. The terrain can be
regenerated at any time by selecting

deletes all
components required to model the terrain,
including the generated 2D contours.
Clearing the terrain does not remove the
terrain perimeter, elevation data, or terrain
features from the model. These objects can
only be removed by deleting the terrain
perimeter or if they are selected and deleted.
Displaying Terrain
How terrain objects display in 2D and 3D
views is determined by the active layer set.
See Layer Sets on page 216.
How each layer displays in the active layer
set is controlled in the Layer Display
Building the Terrain

When terrain is generated, Chief
Architect gathers all terrain data that
has been added to the model and creates a
terrain surface. The program interpolates the
data to fill in the gaps.
596
Contour lines are generated at intervals

specified on the Contours tab of the Terrain
Specification dialog. If elevation data is
added to the model at 24 inch intervals and
the contour line interval is set to 12 inches,
generating terrain creates one additional
contour line between each piece of elevation
data. See Contours Tab on page 612.
A terrain perimeter with no additional
elevation data generates a terrain that is flat
at the elevation 0' - 0".
By default, the terrain is automatically built
before a 3D view is generated. This process
takes a variable amount of time, depending
on the amount of elevation data and number

of terrain features. The Building Terrain
progress dialog displays as terrain is
generated, sometimes only briefly, indicating
the progress.
Rebuild the terrain manually by selecting

Terrain> Build Terrain
Many tools are available to help you adjust

the angle of your view in 3D. See Moving a
Camera in 3D Views on page 737.
Terrain & 3D Drawing Time

Terrain requires many triangles to generate,
which has an effect on the drawing time of
3D views. The length of the delay is
determined by the quality of the terrain and
the number of terrain features present.
The program automatically rebuilds the
terrain when a 3D view is open. To turn off
the automatic rebuild, select 3D> 3D
Settings...
to open the 3D Settings
dialog. Clear the Auto Rebuild Terrain
check box on the Options tab and click OK.
The terrain adjusts trees and images to the

terrain when a 3D view is created.
Lights and symbols from the Symbol Library
can be placed outdoors and included in 3D
views when the terrain is generated. When
placed outdoors, lights and symbols follow
the terrain surface.

Terrain objects can be selected in 2D and 3D
views. See Selecting Objects on page 92.
An elevation point can be moved in floor

plan view using the center edit handle.
Any time elevation data is changed, the

terrain must be regenerated. This occurs
automatically when a 3D view is open. It can
also be done manually by selecting Terrain>
Elevation Lines
Splines
and Terrain Breaks
are
edited like lines and splines. Elevation
lines can be connected into polylines.
You should be familiar with editing these
types of objects before spending too
much time modeling terrain. See Line
Tools on page 846, Polylines on page
863, and Splines on page 868.
Edit Handles for

Terrain Objects
The shape of the terrain perimeter can be

edited like a CAD polyline in floor plan
view and 3D views. See Editing ClosedPolyline Based Objects on page 107.
The shape of a Raised Region

Lowered Region
, Hill
,
, Valley
597
Terrain
Build Terrain
and Elevation
, or Flat Region
can be edited like
a normal polyline. See Polylines on
page 863.
Feature Specification Dialog on page

617.
Terrain features are edited just like

standard lines, splines, and polylines. See
Editing Objects on page 79.
Modifier
tools can be selected and
opened for specification. The Raised /
Lowered Region Specification, the
Hill / Valley Specification, and the
Flat Region Specification dialogs
contain area information for the polyline
and control the relative height of the terrain object and how it displays in floor
plan view. See Hill / Valley Specification Dialog on page 617.
Opening Terrain Objects

for Specification
Select Terrain> Terrain Specification...

or select the terrain perimeter and
edit button to
open the Terrain Specification dialog. Here you can control many of the
variables that determine how the terrain
is modeled, as well as how the terrain
perimeter displays in floor plan view. See
Terrain Specification Dialog on page
610.
598
The Elevation Point Specification

dialog is used to assign height values and
provides a more accurate method for
relocating elevation points. See Elevation Point Specification Dialog on page
613.
The Elevation Line Specification

dialog is used to assign height values.
You can also to change the way elevation
lines and splines display in floor plan
view. See Elevation Line Specification
Dialog on page 616.
Use the Terrain Feature

Specification dialog to assign different
height values, control how terrain features display in floor plan view, and
select the material that is applied to the
terrain feature in 3D views. See Terrain
Terrain objects created with the Terrain

for Terrain Objects
Depending on the type of terrain object
selected, a variety of edit toolbar buttons are
available on the edit toolbar. The edit toolbar
buttons for terrain objects are the same as
those available for CAD objects. For more
information about the edit toolbar buttons,
see Edit Toolbar Buttons on page 71.
If you click the Delete

edit button
when the terrain perimeter is selected,
you delete all terrain objects.
There are a few different tools and techniques available for copying and replicating terrain objects. For a complete
description, see Copying and Pasting
Note: If you copy from one plan to another,
you cannot view the pasted objects in 3D
unless a terrain perimeter exists.
Use the Polyline Subtract

tool to
create holes in terrain features. When this
method is used the underlying terrain, or
Moving Terrain Objects

Using Dimensions
whatever lies beneath the terrain feature

defines the height and material of the
hole. See Subtract on page 148.
If dimensions display when a terrain object is

selected, the object can be moved using the
Move Object Using Dimension dialog.
For more information see Moving Objects

location of the current point. See Input
Line on page 847.

Video: Creating a Site Plan
A plot plan is essentially a map of a
propertys legal description. Plot plans
usually have a North Pointer and can also
include other features such as the location of
buildings and setback lines.
6.
To create a plot plan polyline
7.
Open a newChief Architect plan.
2.
Select CAD> Points> Input Point

to open the New CAD Point dialog.
See Input Point on page 844.
3.
Select Absolute Location and define

the points position at (0,0) and click
OK. This is the current point that serves
as the Start Point for the first line of the
plot plan. See Temporary Points on
page 845.
4.
Select CAD> North Pointer

, then
click and drag to create a north pointer.
See North Pointer on page 849.
5.
Select CAD> Lines> Input Line

to
open the New CAD Line dialog.
Notice that the Start Point is at (0,0): the
mal Feet for the Number Style and

Bearing for the Angle Style. See
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog on
page 873.
Click OK to return to the New CAD
Line dialog
8.
Select Relative to Start Point and

check Polar (CCW to horz.).
9.
Enter the length of the first side of your

property boundarys legal description in
the Distance field, and the angle of that
line in the Angle field.
10. Click Next and enter the Distance and

Angle of the next property line.
599
Terrain
1.
Click Num Style and in the Number

Style/Angle Style dialog, select Deci-
11. Continue until all property lines are

entered, then click OK to close the New
CAD Line dialog. The property line
created should be closed, with the end
point of the last line the same as the start
point of the first.
2.
If necessary, use the triangular Reshape

edit handle to make the arc concave or
convex.
3.

edit button
to open the Arc Specification dialog.
4.
On the Arc tab, click the Lock Chord

radio button, then specify the length of
the Radius and click OK.
To correct an error
1.
2.
3.
If a line is entered incorrectly, click OK

to close the New CAD Line dialog.
Click the Edit Object Parts
toggle
button to edit individual line segments
within a polyline.
Click the incorrect line to select it, then
click Delete
4.
A curved property line can also be created by entering data in the New Arc
dialog. See Input Arc on page 857.
To display line length, bearing and radius

1.
Select Edit> Preferences

the Preferences dialog.
2.
On the Line Properties panel, check Display Line Length as Decimal Feet and
Display Line Angle as Bearing, then
click OK. See Line Properties Panel
on page 200.
3.
Click the plot plan polyline to select it,
Place a CAD point at the end of the last

correct line using the Place Point
tool to create a new current point.
5.
Select CAD> Lines> Input Line

and continue entering data in the New
CAD Line dialog.
6.
Click the Edit Object Parts

button again to turn it off.
to open
toggle
To create a curved property line

1.
Click a property line to select it, then

click the Change Line/Arc
edit button to turn this line into an arc.
then click the Open Object

ton.
4.
edit but-
On the Line Style tab of the Polyline

Specification dialog, check Show
Length, Show Angle, and All Angles.
600
3.
Click the plot plan polyline to select it,

then click the Copy/Paste
ton.
edit but-
4.
Place your cursor over a corner edit handle, then click and drag towards the center of the polyline. When a second, inner
polyline appears, release the mouse.
5.
Select the inner polyline and click the

Open Object
Polyline Specification dialog.
6.
On the Line Style tab, select a dashed

line style from the drop-down list,
uncheck Show Length and Show
Angle, then click OK.
To convert to a terrain perimeter

1.
Select the plot plan polyline and click

the Convert Polyline
2.
3.
edit button.
In the Convert Polyline dialog, select

Convert To: Terrain Perimeter, then
click OK.
Make any needed changes in the
Terrain Specification dialog and
click OK. See Terrain Specification

Dialog on page 610.
To create setback lines
2.
On the CAD panel of the Preferences

dialog, select the Concentric Edit Type
radio button. See CAD Panel on page
199.
In the Jump field, type in the setback
distance required by your local planning
department, such as 10, and click OK.
To accurately position a building

1.
Place a CAD Point

at a reference
point along the perimeter of the property, such as at a corner. Or use the starting point for your plot plan polyline,
(0,0), as a reference.
601
Terrain
1.
2.

3.
If you are using (0,0) as your reference

point, select Absolute Location and
specify the distance that the building
should be from this point in the X Position and Y Position fields.
4.
If you have placed a CAD Point at a different location, select Relative to Current Point and specify the desired
distance from that point. Unless you
want to specify the location in distance
and bearing, Polar (CCW from horz)
should remain unchecked.
5.
When you click OK, a point is created at

the specified location. Use this point as a
reference to accurately position a wall or
corner of the building.

Select a plant in a floor plan or 3D view and
edit button to
open the Plant Image Specification
602
dialog. This dialog can also be accessed by

selecting Terrain> Plant> Create Plant
Image
Image Tab
1
2
3
4
5
selected image file displays here. Click

Browse to specify the path for the image that
represents the plant in 3D views.
2 2D Plant Symbol - A number of CAD

blocks are available to mark the
location of the image in floor plan view.
Select one from the drop-down list or click
the Library button to choose a CAD block
from the Library Browser.
If you change the CAD block that represents
an image, you may want to save the new
image to the library. See Adding to the
3 Height - Enter a height for the image.

The width adjusts proportionally.
4 Width - Enter a width for the image.

The height adjusts proportionally.
Check Do not rotate in render view to

prevent the plant image from rotating with
the camera.
5 Location - Precisly position the
selected plant image in reference to the

plan coordinates by specifying its X
Coordinate and Y Coordinate.
Height Above - Specify the height of the
plant image above the ground.
603
Terrain
1 Image File - The path and name of the
Transparency Tab
For information about the Transparency Tab,
see Transparency Tab on page 899.
Plant Information Tab
4
5
This tab lists useful information about the

plant. You can edit this information. Use the
Plant Chooser to search for plants based on
these attributes.
when you can expect the plant to

produce flowers.
1 The Common Name, Scientific Name
45
2 This shows the Flower Color of the
6 Plant Size information at maturity. An
or Variety Name for the plant. A

Pronunciation guide is also provided.
plant.
604
3 Leaf Color of the plant is shown here.

4 This section indicates the Bloom Time
The boxes with checks show the
Special Charcteristics of this plant.
average mature height range can be

entered using the drop down lists. This is
used with the Grow Plants feature. See

Plant Tools on page 594.
8 The check boxes indicates the Type of
7 The special needs of this plant are
99 The Sub-Type of the plant is shown by
shown here.These include the Sun,

Water, Soil pH, and Hardiness Zone range.
See Hardiness Zones on page 595.
plant.
the checked box.
Plant Description Tab
1
2
displays in this pane of the window..
2 Lighting Comments give more
information about the light

requirements of the plant.
3 Hardiness Zone Comments are given

here.
Layer Tab
605
Terrain
1 A detailed Description of the plant

Select a 3D plant symbol and open it for
specification to open the Plant
You can also view data for 3D plants by

choosing Open Symbol for the plant.
General Tab
1
3
2
1 The Specification section indicates the
default Height, Width, and Depth for

the plant. Edit these values if you want the
plant to be larger or smaller.
If you want the plant to sit on a table rather
than the floor, edit the Floor to Bottom
value.
606
2 Click the Reset button to return to the
default values if they have been edited.
3 A preview of the plant displays on this
side of the window. Remove the check

mark from Show Color to see the image in
black and white.
Options Tab
1 Check this box to reverse the plant

horizontally.
2 A preview of the plant displays on this

side of the window. To see the image in
black and white, remove the check mark
from Show Color .
Label Tab
The Label Tab is similar to that of the Base
Cabinet Specification dialog. See
Fill Tab
Fill Style Tab on page 864..
Layer Tab
Terrain
Materials Tab
Use this tab to select materials to apply to the
plant in 3D views. These materials are not
calculated in the Material List. See
607

Introductory Training Video: Plant
Chooser
Select Terrain> Plant> Plant Chooser
to open the Plant Chooser dialog or click
the button at the bottom of the Library

Browser window.
Plant Chooser searches the library for
plant images and plant symbols that meet
your search parameters. You can search
using any or all of the options in this dialog.

6
7
8
2
10
4
5
11
1 Enter the Common Name, Scientific
Name or Variety Name for the plant. A

Pronunciation field is also provided.
Enter the Flower Color of the plant.
2
3 Specify the Leaf Color here.
4 Indicate when the plant produces
flowers in the Bloom Time field.
5 Check the boxes to show the Special

Charcteristics of this plant.
6 Enter Plant Size information at
maturity. An average mature height

range can be entered using the drop down
lists. This is used with the Grow Plants
feature. See Plant Tools on page 594.
7 Special needs are shown here.These
include the Sun, Water, Soil pH, and
608
Hardiness Zone range. See Hardiness

Zones on page 595.
8 When you have entered all the
parameters, click Search. The search

results display in this pane of the window.
Specify whether you want the common or
scientific names listed.
9 Check the boxes to indicate plant Type.

10
6 Check a box to specify the Sub-Type.
11 Highlight a plant in the list and click the
View Item button to see a preview.
1 Enter a Description to search for here.

2 Enter Lighting Requirements to
search for in this field.
3 Hardiness zone comments go here.

4 When you have entered all the
Terrain
parameters, click Search. The search

results display in this pane of the window.
Specify whether you want the common or
scientific names listed.
609

The Terrain Specification dialog can be
accessed two ways:
Select Terrain> Terrain Specification...

.
Double-click the terrain perimeter using

the Select Objects
The Terrain Specification dialog

controls how your terrain is modeled, as well
as how it displays in floor plan view.
When all changes are complete, click OK to
store the changes or Cancel to ignore them.
tool.
General Tab
Chief Architect builds 3D terrain surfaces by

splitting them into triangles. Increasing the
triangle count decreases triangle size.
Smaller triangles representing less area yield
more detailed contour lines and a better 3D
approximation of the terrain. Triangle size is
computed roughly as follows:
610
Size of Triangle = Area of Terrain Perimeter /

Number of Triangles
There is no upper limit to the number of
triangles you can specify, but smaller
triangles demand longer terrain generation
time, increased memory requirements, and
increased drawing time. If you select a large
number of small triangles for a large site, you

may wait a long time for the calculation.
This value does not change existing elevation

data and does not alter elevation contours.
Elevation lines are sampled less frequently

when the surface triangle size is larger,
speeding up terrain generation when there
are many elevation lines in the plan.
The program always defines the first floor

elevation at 0-0. While this is desirable for
adjusting walls, roofs and floor platforms, it
leads to misrepresentations in relation to real
world elevations. Finished grade can be
measured relative to the finished floor, but to
measure elevation in the real world, building
pads are rarely at 0-0 sea-level.
1 Triangle Count - Specify the number

of surface triangles.
Triangle Size - Specify the maximum

triangle size in the terrain surface.
2 Smoothing - Control the amount of

rounding applied to terrain edges. A
low value for smoothing produces terrain
that has sharp peaks and abrupt changes in
slope. A high value results in terrain that
continuously flows from point to point.
3 Flatten Pad - Check this box to flatten
the area beneath your building.
Auto Calculate Elevation - Check this box

to automatically calculate the building pad
elevation value during terrain rebuild. Chief
Architect takes the center of the building
footprint and finds the terrain elevation at
this point. This elevation is added to 8, 12, or
18 inches to calculate the building pad
elevation. 8 inches is used for a slab
foundation, 18 is used if a foundation floor is
present, and 12 is used otherwise.
Building Pad Elevation - Enter a value to
offset terrain from floor 1. The default value
of 12 inches results in floor 1 being 12 inches
above any terrain at an elevation of 0 inches.
For example, if a structure is placed in the

middle of a terrain sloping evenly from a
height of 100.00 feet to a height of 112.00
feet, entering a value of 106.00 feet for the
building pad elevation places the structure at
the correct height in 3D views.
4 Hide terrain intersected by building -
Check this box to cut out the portion of

the terrain that is intersected by the first floor
footprint. Checking this box prevents the
generation of contour lines inside the house.
If your foundation footprint differs from your

first floor footprint you may need to use the
Terrain Hole
tool for custom clipping
instead. See Terrain Feature Tools on page
590.
5 Skirt - Define the thickness of the skirt
added to the terrain. The skirt is only

visible in 3D views and gives the viewer a
sense of depth when viewing the terrain.
Flat specifies that the skirt be flat at its base.

Chief Architect determines the lowest point
in the terrain and then offsets this value by
the user specified thickness value. The
resulting value is used as a uniform elevation
for the base of the skirt.
Follow Terrain specifies that the skirt base
maintains a consistent distance below the
611
Terrain
The Low (1000), Medium (2000), and High

(4000) values work well for an average lot
area of 20,000 square feet. If your terrain
perimeter varies greatly from this, consider
defining the number of triangles using the
Custom setting or the Triangle Size setting.
terrain. The distance is obtained from the

thickness value you provide.
Contours Tab
3
4
The program identifies two types of contour

lines, Primary and Secondary. The two types
are drawn on different layers, so you can
control how they display in floor plan view.
1 Interval - Define the change in
elevation between contours. If the

interval is set to twelve inches (one foot), a
contour line is computed for each elevation
change of twelve inches.
Offset - Specify an offset value for contours.
For example, if the offset is set to 5 feet and
the interval is set to 10 feet then contours are
612
generated at the elevations 5, 15, 25, 35,

etc. Most often, this value is set to 0.
Primary Contour Every__Contours Specify the interval for primary contours. A
value of 1 produces only primary contours,
while a value of 5 defines every fifth contour
line as a primary contour.
2 Specify the Font and Character
Height information for terrain

contours. See Text Specification Dialog on
page 830.
Selected Line Tab
Check Label Secondary Contours to label

secondary contour lines with their elevation
data. Primary Contour lines are labelled with
their elevation data automatically.

3 Contour Line Units - Specify the units
Line Style Tab
that contour labels use. The label units

can be in inches or feet (millimeters or
meters for metric.)

4 Smoothing - If contour smoothing is
Fill Style Tab
turned on, Chief Architect attempts to

remove sharp bends and jagged sections
from the 2D contour lines.
Passes - Specify the number of passes to
perform when smoothing. The more passes,
the smoother the contour lines become, but
contours become less accurate.
Polyline Tab

Materials Tab
Use this tab to select materials to apply to the
terrain surface and terrain skirt in 3D views.
These materials are not calculated in the
Material List. See Materials Tab on page
710.

To open the Elevation Point
Specification dialog, select an elevation
point or group of elevation points and click
the Open Object
edit button, or doubleclick an elevation point using the Select
Objects
tool.
Use the Elevation Point Specification

dialog to define the selected elevation point
and control its appearance in floor plan view.
Terrain
When all changes are made, click OK to

store the changes or Cancel to ignore them.
613
General Tab
2
3
1 Location - Specify the exact location of

the elevation point.
614
Elevation - Enter the height of the elevation point in inches and/or feet (mm for
metric). For example entering 56 (with
the apostrophe as foot mark) results in an
elevation of 66 inches.
X Coordinate - Enter the x coordinate of
Y Coordinate - Enter the y coordinate of

2 Text - Enter notes, such as elevation, in
this box. This text displays beside the

elevation point in floor plan view.
3 Marker Radius - Enter the radius in

inches (or millimeters).
Attributes Tab
1
2
3
4
point should be placed on. See Layer

Tab on page 223.
2 Color - Click the color bar to open the

Windows Color dialog and select the
color of the elevation point and
accompanying text. See Color Chooser
Dialog on page 722.
By Layer - Check this box to use the line
color of the layer the elevation point is
located on.
3 Click the drop-down list to specify the

Font of any accompanying text. Check
the boxes to apply text options.
Character Height - Define the character

height of the text.
Version 9 Compatible Size -In Version 9,
text size was based on sizing information
stored in each font rather than actual
character dimensions. Check Version 9
Compatible Size to use this information for
text sizing. See Sizing Text on page 824
Transparent - Check this box to make the
background of the text transparent.
Rotate with Plan - Check this box to allow
the text to rotate when the plan is rotated.
Terrain
1 Layer - Define the Layer the elevation
4 Specify the Size of any text
accompanying the elevation point.
615
Elevation Line Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Line
Specification dialog, select an elevation
line/spline or group of elevation lines/splines
edit button or
double-click the elevation line/spline using
the Select Objects
tool.
The Elevation Line Specification

dialog defines the selected elevation line and
controls its appearance in floor plan view.
When changes sre complete, click OK to
save the changes or Cancel to ignore them.
Elevation Tab
the apostrophe as foot mark) results in an

elevation of 66 inches.
2 Interior is Flat - When the Elevation
Line Specification dialog is opened

for an Elevation Region, this option is available. Check Interior is Flat to maintain a
flat elevation at the specified height.
3 Interpolate Tangent to Edge - This
options is available for closed elevation

polylines. Check this option to flatten the terrain surface as it approaches the elevation
region.
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab
1
2
3
1 Elevation - Enter the elevation of the
Line/Spline in inches and/or feet (mm

for metric). For example entering 56 (with

Line Style Tab

Flat Region Specification Dialog

The Flat Region Specification dialog is
similar to the Polyline Specification
616
dialog. See Polyline Specification Dialog

on page 863.

Spline Tab
For information about the Spline tab, see
Spline Tab on page 869.
1
Selected Line Tab
Hill / Valley Tab

1 Height - Enter a height for the selected
Hill or Valley. This height is relative to

the terrain surface that is generated from the
elevation data in your plan.
Line Style Tab

Polyline Tab
Fill Style Tab

Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog

The Raised / Lowered Region
Specification dialog is similar to the Hill /
Valley Specification dialog. See Hill /

Valley Specification Dialog on page 617.
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Feature
Specification dialog, select a terrain
feature or group of terrain features in and
edit button.
Terrain
The Terrain Feature Specification

defines the selected terrain feature and
controls its appearance in floor plan view.
When your changes are complete, click OK
to store the changes Cancel to ignore them.
617
General Tab
1
2
Selected Line Tab
terrain feature above or below the

terrain surface with a positive or negative
number.
The program bridges any gap between the
terrain and the raised or lowered terrain
feature.
Make Hole - Check this box to make a
terrain hole. See Terrain Feature Tools on
page 590.
2 Clipping - Check this box to remove
sections of the terrain feature that

intersect other terrain features at a lower
height. Clipping is also useful for creating
features that contain other features such as
planters or swimming pools.

Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
Polyline Tab
Terrain Break Specification Dialog

The Terrain Break Specification dialog
contains a setting on the General tab for
Transition Distance, which defines the
618
distance from the edge of the terrain break to

where the break stops affecting the terrain.
Selected Line Tab

Line Style Tab

Polyline Tab


The Terrain Path Specification controls
Streams, Terrain Walls, and Sidewalks.
Double click any of these items to access the

dialog.
General Tab
1
2
Height. If you enter a negative number

for the height, the item sinks into the terrain
that distance.
2 When one terrain path joins another,
you can flare the intersection. Enter a

radius for the flare and indicate whether the
start or the end of the path should be flared

by checking the appropriate box.
Polyline Tab
619
Terrain
1 Enter the Width of the item and the
Spline Tab
If the selected item is a spline path, this tab is
available. For more information, see Spline
Tab on page 869.
Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
Selected Line Tab
Line Style Tab


Select a sprinkler and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Sprinkler
620

General Tab
1 Enter the Height, Width, and Depth,

or thickness, of the sprinkler.
Enter a Floor to Bottom value to define the

distance from the bottom of the sprinkler to
elevation 0 of floor one.
Check Follow Terrain to make the sprinkler
follow the surface of the terrain.
Check Follow Terrain and enter a Floor to
Bottom value to set the elevation of the
sprinkler relative to the terrain surface. For
example, a value of -6 recesses the sprinkler
head 6 inches below the surface of the
terrain.
Terrain
The elevation of a sprinkler can be

edited in cross section/elevation view.
2 Click Reset to return the sprinkler

values to the defaults.
621
Options Tab
1 Check Reverse Symbol to reverse the

sprinkler from left to right.
2 Set the sprinkler Spray Angle and

Spray Radius.
Fill Tab
Tab on page 572.
Fill Style Tab

Layer Tab
622
Spray Fill Tab

The Spray Fill tab controls how the area
within the sprinklers reach displays in floor
plan view and is similar to the Fill Style tab
found in many dialogs. See Fill Style Tab
on page 864.
Materials Tab
Label Tab
The Label Tab of the Sprinkler
Specification dialog is similar to that of
the Base Cabinet Specification dialog.
See Label Tab on page 576.

Terrain data can be added to a plan using the
tools and techniques described earlier in this
chapter or it can be imported from a file.
Chief Architect is capable of importing text
files (.txt) and DWG/DXF files (.dwg, .dxf).
If your terrain data is not in one of these file
formats, there are third party programs
available that can convert to these formats.
Text Files
Text files contain elevation terrain data based
on x, y, and z coordinates where x and y
define the location of a point on a Cartesian
grid, and z defines the elevation for that
point. Each point must be on a separate line

of the text file. Importable text files can
come from surveyors, other software
programs, or you can create your own using
a GPS system.
DXF/DWG Files
If you have a model of your terrain created
on another program that contains contour
lines and elevation data, that information can
be imported directly as elevation data into
Chief Architect as a .dxf or a .dwg file. See
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data on
page 627.

The Import Terrain Wizard allows
you to import text (.txt) files
containing terrain elevation information into
your model.
Terrain
Select File> Import> Terrain Data

to
open the Import Terrain Wizard. Click
Next.
623
Select File
1
2
1 Select File to Import -Enter the name
of a text file, or Browse to locate a file

on your computer.
2 Select the Organization of the Data You need to know how the data in your
text file is organized. Each data point contains information about its X-axis (East to
West location), Y-axis (North to South
location), and Z-axis (elevation). It might
also contain a brief description.
Elevation information can come in one of six
different sequences, and is separated by
either a comma (comma delimited) or a
space (space delimited).
XYZ - Information in this format begins with
the X coordinate, followed by the Y
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
#XYZ - Information in this format begins
with a number that belongs to each data point
624
followed by the X coordinate, the Y

coordinate, and the Z coordinate.
#XYZ Description - Information in this
format begins with a number that belongs to
each data point followed by the X
coordinate, the Y coordinate, the Z
coordinate, and a description.
YXZ - Information in this format begins with
the Y coordinate followed by the X
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
#YXZ - Information in this format begins
with a number that belongs to each data point
followed by the Y coordinate, the X
coordinate, and the Z coordinate.
#YXZ Description - Information in this
format begins with a number that belongs to
each data point followed by the Y
coordinate, the X coordinate, the Z
coordinate, and a description.
Filter Data
1
2
3
1 This is the number of points your data
contains. Building terrain with too

many elevation points may take a long time,
depending on your processor speed and
memory. If you import more than 1000 or
2000 elevation points, the Linear Smoothing
option in the Terrain Specification
dialog is recommended.
2 Use Every __ Points - Reduce the data
imported by skipping data points.

Specifying every 2 points reduce thes data by
50%; specifying every 10 points reduces the
data by 90%.
Below - Another way to restrict the data
used is to define a range. Data within these
ranges is imported, while data outside these
ranges is not.
The outer box in this diagram and the points

within it represent all of the data contained
within a given text file. If you are only
interested in a small area represented in the
text file, a subset of this information could be
used instead by defining a range, which is
represented by the smaller box in this
diagram. To do this you must define the
range using X, Y, and Z coordinates. The
same effect is accomplished by deleting
625
Terrain
3 Restrict the Data to the Ranges
unwanted data from your text file before it is

imported.
Scale Data
1
2
3
4
5
1 This describes the total number of data
points to be imported and the range of

the coordinates of those points.
2 Translate - Accurately position the
terrain beneath your plan. You need to

know where the origin is located in your
plan, and where that origin is located relative
to the geographical data in your text file. The
coordinates of the data point that correspond
with the origin point in Chief Architect
should be entered here.
To find the origin point in your plan,
open the Move Point dialog, enter
absolute coordinates X=0, Y=0, and click
OK to move the point to the (0, 0) location.
See Moving CAD Points on page 845.
626
3 Units - Select the units of measurement
used in your data for each axis. The

units in the drop down lists are a subset of the
units in the Edit Preferences dialog. Only
linear default units display. For more
information on specifying default units, see
Unit Conversions Panel on page 195.
4 Scale Coordinates - Multiply the
coordinates of each axis by a specific

number to decrease or increase the relative
size or relief of your terrain.
5 Rotate Coordinates - Accurately
rotate terrain data counterclockwise

around the Z axis.
1.
Select File> Import> Drawing (DWG/

DXF)...
to open the Import
Drawing Wizard.
2.
Check the Terrain Elevation Data box.

(See Arrow.)
3.
Continue with the import process

described in the section titled Select
File on page 909.
Imported lines and points are converted to

elevation lines or elevation points,
preserving the elevation data stored in the
DWG/DXF file.
If an imported line has vertices with the

same Z values, an elevation line is created.
If the vertices have differing Z values, an

elevation point is created for each vertex.
Imported points are converted to elevation points.
Other imported entities (solids, faces,

etc.) are imported normally.
Only import layers containing elevation
data when using the Terrain Elevation
Data option. To import other layers as normal
CAD, run the Terrain Import Wizard
again with this option turned off.
If a terrain perimeter does not already exist, a

perimeter that surrounds the data is
generated.
627
Terrain
Elevation data in DXF/DWG format can be

imported using the Import Drawing
Wizard.
Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data

CAD lines can be selected and
converted to terrain data, allowing the
CAD lines of an imported file to be
converted into terrain data and used for
terrain generation.
Select a CAD line, spline, or polyline in floor

plan view and click the Convert Polyline
edit button to access the Convert
Polyline dialog.
Convert Polyline
The Convert to Polyline dialog allows

you to convert the selected polyline(s) to a
variety of special CAD objects. See
Converting Objects on page 149.
1 Terrain Perimeter - This option is
only available when a terrain perimeter

does not exist and only one closed polyline is
selected.
Click OK to convert the selected polyline to
a terrain perimeter.
628
2 A terrain perimeter must exist before
any of these terrain objects can be

created. Click OK to complete the
conversion of the selected polyline.
Roads and road objects are covered in
Roads & Sidewalks on page 629.
When the conversion is complete, the terrain

data is at elevation 0-0. For information
about how to add elevation data to your
converted CAD lines, see Editing Terrain
Chapter Overview
Roads & Sidewalks
Chapter Overview
Roads and sidewalks can be created in Chief
Architect using the road tools. Roads and
sidewalks are modeled in 3D like other
terrain objects. Because they have much in
common with terrain objects and rely upon
terrain data to be viewed in 3D, you should
be familiar with terrain modeling before
using the road tools. See Terrain on page
583.
Chapter Contents
Road and Sidewalk Defaults

The Road Tools
Displaying Road Objects
Editing Road Objects
Adding Road Objects to the Library
Road Specification Dialog
Median Specification Dialog
Driveway Specification Dialog
Road Marking Specification Dialog
Sidewalk Specification Dialog
Road and Sidewalk Defaults

The settings in the Road Defaults,
Driveway Defaults, Road Marking
Defaults, and Sidewalk Defaults
dialogs determine the initial settings when

the road and sidewalk tools are used. It is a
629
Roads
Chapter 21:
good idea to check these settings before

placing any roads or sidewalks in your plan.
To access the Road Defaults dialog, select
Edit > Default Settings> Roads Sidewalks
and Driveways, or double click the Road
button. The settings in the Road
Defaults dialog are the same as those in the
Road Specification dialog. See Road
Tools

To access the Driveway Defaults dialog,
double click the Driveway
button. The
settings in the Driveway Defaults dialog
are the same as those in the Driveway
Specification dialog. See Driveway
To access the Road Marking Defaults

dialog, double-click the Road Marking
button. The settings in the Road Marking
Defaults dialog are the same as those in the
Road Marking Specification dialog.
See Road Marking Specification Dialog on
page 638.
To access the Sidewalk Defaults dialog,
double-click the Sidewalk
button. The
settings in the Sidewalk Defaults dialog
are the same as those in the Sidewalk
Specification dialog. See Sidewalk
The Road Tools

Road objects cannot be placed until a
terrain perimeter exists. See Terrain
Tools on page 584.
When road objects are first placed into your
plan, their initial dimensions and properties
are controlled by their default settings. See
Road and Sidewalk Defaults on page 629.
Once road objects have been placed, they can
be edited individually or as a group. See
Editing Road Objects on page 634.
Roads created with the Road tools have a
consistent width that can be defined in the
Road Specification dialog.
The elevation of a road is flat along its width,
which makes it an ideal tool for creating
roads on terrain with relief.
630
Straight Road
To place a road without any curves,
select Terrain> Roads and
Sidewalks> Straight Road and click and
drag to draw a line in floor plan view.
Multiple road sections can be connected
together.
The Road Tools
Roads
Roads are edited alone their center line like

CAD lines and polylines. See Line Tools
on page 846.
Spline Road
Use Terrain> Roads and Sidewalks>
Spline Road
to draw a curved road.
Spline roads are drawn and edited like CAD
splines. See Splines on page 868.
Road Polyline
A polyline can be used to model roads
of any shape. It is ideal for creating
parking lots and other non-linear road
surfaces. Roads created with the Polyline
Road
tool conform to the surface of the
terrain beneath them.
To place a road polyline select Terrain>
Roads and Sidewalks> Polyline Road
and click and drag to draw a rectangular
polyline in floor plan view.
Road Polylines are edited alone their center
line like polylines. See Polylines on page
863.
Median
A median is a polyline that can be used
within a road. The median is made of
the same material as the terrain beneath it
and has a curb if the road that encompasses it
has one.
To place a median select Terrain> Road>

Median
and click and drag to draw a
rectangular polyline in floor plan view. Road
median polylines must be contained within a
road.
Road medians are edited just like CAD
polylines. See Polylines on page 863.
Polylines can be converted to road medians.
See Converting Objects on page 149.
Driveway
A driveway is a road without a curb. A
driveway cuts out a curb wherever it
meets a road or a road polyline. Like a road,
the elevation of a driveway is flat across its
width.
To place a driveway select Terrain> Roads
and Sidewalks> Driveway
and click
and drag to draw a line in floor plan view.
Multiple driveway sections can be connected
together.
Driveways are edited alone their center line
like CAD lines and polylines. See Line
Tools on page 846.
631
Cul-de-sac
A Cul-de-sac is a road polyline in a
predetermined shape. A cul-de-sac
follows the surface of the terrain beneath it.
To place a cul-de-sac select Terrain> Roads
and Sidewalks> Cul-de-sac
and click a
road end where you would like a cul-de-sac.
Culs-de-sac cannot be placed on road
polylines.
Culs-de-sac can be edited just like CAD
Road Stripe
The Road Stripe tool allows you to
paint lines on a road surface.
To place a road marking select Terrain>

Road> Road Marking
and click and
drag to draw a rectangular polyline within a
road in floor plan view.
Road markings are edited like CAD
Straight Sidewalk
Use the sidewalk tools to model
sidewalks on a building site.
Sidewalks have a consistent width that can
be defined in the Sidewalk Specification
dialog. Sidewalks cut out curbs and gutters
wherever they meet a road or a road polyline.
The elevation of a sidewalk is flat across the
its width.
To draw a sidewalk with no curves, select
Terrain> Roads and Sidewalks> Straight
Sidewalk
and click and drag to draw a
line in floor plan view. Multiple sidewalk
sections can be connected together.
Sidewalks are edited alone their center line
like CAD lines and polylines. See Line
Tools on page 846..
To place a road stripe select Terrain> Roads

and Sidewalks> Road Stripe
and click
and drag to draw a line within a road in floor
plan view. Multiple road stripes can be
connected together.
Road Stripes are edited like CAD lines. See
Line Tools on page 846.
Road Marking
A Road Marking paints polylines on a
road surface, allowing any shape to be
created.
632
Use the Spline Sidewalk tool to create

a curved sidewalk.Select Terrain>
Roads and Sidewalks> Spline Sidewalk.
Spline roads are drawn and edited like CAD
splines. See Splines on page 868.
Polyline Sidewalk
Use the polyline sidewalk tool to
create a sidewalk of any shape.
Sidewalk polylines conform to the surface of
the terrain beneath them.
To place a sidewalk polyline select Terrain>
Road> Sidewalk Polyline
and click and
drag to draw a rectangular polyline in floor
plan view.
Sidewalk polylines are edited just like CAD
Auto Generate Sidewalks

Select a road or median and click the Auto
Generate Sidewalk
edit button to open
the Auto Generate Sidewalks dialog.
1
2
3
1 Left/Right Side of Road - Check one
or both boxes to generate a sidewalk on

the selected road object.
2 All Connected Roads - Check this box
to generate a sidewalk along all other

roads connected to the selected road object.
3 Offset From Road - Specify a gap
between the generated sidewalk and the

selected road object.

In Floor Plan View
Roads and sidewalks are displayed in floor
plan and 3D views based on the settings for
their layers in the Layer Display Options
dialog.
To change the display properties of roads,
center lines, curbs, road markings or
sidewalks, select Tools> Display Options
In 3D Views
Roads and sidewalks display in 3D views
with the terrain.
By default, terrain rebuilds automatically
when road objects are added, removed or
edited. If it does not, select Terrain> Build
Terrain
to open the Layer Display Options

dialog. See Layers on page 215.
633
Roads
Spline Sidewalk
Editing Road Objects

Before a road object can be edited, it must be
selected. To select a it, click on it when the
Select Objects
tool or any of the Road
Tools
are active. See Selecting Objects
on page 92.
Road objects can be moved precisely using
the dimensions that display in floor plan
view when they are selected. See Moving

A selected road object can be edited in a
toolbar. As with most objects, road objects
etc. See Using the Edit Toolbar on page 97.
The following buttons may display on the
edit toolbar for selected road objects.

edit button to
open it for specification. See Road
A Road Polyline
can be concentrically resized and converted into a median
using the Convert Polyline button. See
Concentric on page 88.
Click the Convert to Polyline Road/
Using the Mouse
Straight Roads
, straight Driveways
, straight Road Stripes
, and
Straight Sidewalks
are edited along
their centerline like a line or polyline. See
Line Tools on page 846.
Spline Roads
Sidewalk
button to convert it into a
Polyline Road or a Polyline Sidewalk
and Sidewalk Splines
are edited along their centerline like

standard splines. See Splines on page
868.
Road Polylines
Medians
, Cul-de-sacs
, Road Markings
,
and
Sidewalk Polylines
are edited along
their perimeter, like standard polylines.
The width is determined by the polylines
shape. See Polylines on page 863.
634
Medians
are edited like polylines.
See Polylines on page 863.
and edit the object perimeter as a

polyline. See Editing Road Objects on
page 634.
Click the Auto Generate Sidewalks

button to open the Automatically
Generate Sidewalks dialog. The
options that are available depend on the
type of road object selected. See Auto
Generate Sidewalks on page 633.

You can create your own road objects and
save them to the library. Select any
combination of elevation points, elevation
lines, terrain features, roads, sidewalks, road
markings, or even the terrain perimeter itself
and send them to the library as one unit.
When a group of terrain objects from the

library is placed into a plan, each object
becomes independent and can be edited
individually. See Adding to the Library on
page 674.
Road Specification Dialog

Select a straight road, spline road, polyline
road or cul-de-sac and click the Open
Object
edit button to access the Road
General Tab
1
2
1 Size the road using this section.

Width - Enter a width for the selected
road. This option is not available for a culde-sac or non-centerline road.
Height - Enter a Height above the terrain for
the selected road.
2 Flare - Roads can be flared at the Start
and the End when they intersect with

other road objects. Check one or both boxes.
Radius - Enter the flare radius.
Flaring is not available for culs-de-sac or
non-centerline roads.
635
Roads
Curb Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Has Curb - Check the box if you want

the selected road to contain a curb.
Width - Enter a width value for the curb.

Height - Enter a Height value for the curb.
2 Cut Curb for Driveways and
Sidewalks - Check this box to cut the

curb for driveways and sidewalks.
3 Select Curb Profile - Click this button

to select another curb profile.
4 Default Curb Profile - Click this
button to use the default curb profile.
Polyline Tab
The Polyline tab lists the perimeter, area and
volume of the road.
Spline Tab
Use this tab to specify the angle between line
segments that are used to draw the spline.
636
Specifying a smaller angle makes the spline

smoother. Specify a larger angle to draw the
spline faster. SeeSplines on page 868.
Selected Line Tab

This tab is the same as the Selected Line tab
of the Polyline Specification dialog. See
Selected Line Tab on page 864.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab of the Road
Specification dialog is the same as the
Line Style tab of the CAD Line
Fill Style Tab

The Fill Style tab of the Road
Specification dialog is the same as the Fill
Style tab of the CAD Polyline
Specification dialog. See Fill Style Tab
on page 864.
Materials Tab
The Materials tab of the Road

Materials tab on many other specification

the road in 3D views. This material is not
calculated in the Material List.

The Median Specification dialog is
similar to the Road Specification. See
Road Specification Dialog on page 635.
Driveway Specification Dialog

Select a driveway and click the Open Object
edit button to display the Driveway
General Tab
1
2
3
1 Width - Enter a width for the driveway.

2 Height - Enter a Height above the
terrain.
3 Flare - Driveways can be flared at the
Start and the End when they intersect

with roads or other driveways. Check one or
both boxes.
637
Roads
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab of the Driveway
Line Style tab of the CAD Line
Style tab of the CAD Polyline

Specification dialog. See Fill Style Tab
on page 864.
Materials Tab
the driveway in 3D views. This material is
not calculated in the Material List.
Fill Style Tab
The Materials tab of the Driveway

The Fill Style tab of the Driveway

Specification dialog is the same as the Fill
Materials tab on many other specification

Road Marking Specification Dialog

Select a Road Marking and click the Open
edit button to display the Road
Object
Marking Specification dialog.
General Tab
Selected Line Tab

For information about the Selected Line Tab,
Line Style Tab

For information about the Line Style Tab, see
Fill Style Tab
For information about the Fill Style Tab, see

1 Width - Enter a width value for the

selected Road Marking.
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline Tab, see
638
Materials Tab
the Road Marking in 3D views. This material
is not calculated in the Material List.
For information about the Materials Tab, see

Select a Straight Sidewalk, Spline
Sidewalk, or Polyline Sidewalk and click
the Open Object

edit button to display
the Sidewalk Specification dialog.
General Tab
1
2
3
1 Width - Enter a width for the selected

sidewalk.
Height - Enter a height above the

terrain for the selected sidewalk.
3 Flare - Sidewalks can be flared at
either end, check one or both boxes.
Polyline Tab
The Polyline tab lists the perimeter, area, and
volume of the sidewalk.
Fill Style Tab

For information about the Fill Style Tab, see
Materials Tab
the sidewalk in 3D views. This material is
not calculated in the Material List.
For information about the Materials Tab, see
Selected Line Tab

For information using the Selected Line Tab,
Line Style Tab

For information about the Line Style Tab, see
639
Roads
640
Chapter 22:
Other
Objects
Other Objects
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect has several additional objects
that can be used to customize your design.
Chapter Contents
Primitive Tools
Creating Primitives
Editing Primitives
3D Box Specification Dialog
Sphere Specification Dialog
Cylinder Specification Dialog
Cone Specification Dialog

Polyline Solids
Polyline Solid Specification Dialog
Soffits
Special Applications for Soffits
Calculating Materials on Soffits
Soffit Specification Dialog
Fireplaces
Fireplace Specification Dialog
Library Fireplaces
Chimneys
Primitive Tools
Video: Creating 3D CAD Objects
The Primitive Tools allow you to create
basic solid geometric shapes, which
can be combined to create a wide variety of
custom solid objects. Select Build>
Primitive to display the Primitive Tools.
Objects made with the Primitive Tools are

included in material list calculations,
although it is best that their specified
materials are either Concrete or Volume
material types. See Define Material Dialog
on page 712.
641
Box
Cone
Select the Box tool, then click and drag

to draw a solid 3D box.
Select the Cone tool, then click and

drag to draw a solid 3D cone.
Sphere
Polyline Solids
Select the Sphere tool, then click and

drag to draw a solid 3D sphere.
Cylinder
Select the Cylinder tool, then click and
drag to draw a solid 3D cylinder.
Select the Polyline Solid tool, then

click and drag to draw a polyline solid.
Despite their name, polyline solids are not
true solids; however, they can be converted
into solids. See Polyline Solids on page
649.
Creating Primitives
Primitives are drawn similar to the way CAD
boxes and circles are. Depending on the view
in which they are created, however, the
method may differ somewhat.
Initially, the bottom surface of boxes,

cylinders and cones, and the center point of
spheres, are all set at 0 on the Z axis. See
Entering Coordinates on page 91.
In Floor Plan View
In 3D Views
In floor plan view, primitives are drawn

much the way boxes and circles are. Select a
tool, then click and drag to define an area.
In 3D views, the height of boxes, cylinders

and cones can be defined as they are drawn.
To create 3D Box
, click and drag in
any direction other than vertical or horizontal to define the width and depth of
the boxs base. Its initial height is 1.
To create a Sphere
, Cylinder
or
As it is drawn, the height of a Cylinder

or Cone
is equal to its radius.
, Cylinder
or
Cone
, click and drag to define the
width and depth of the boxs base, then
drag upward or downward to define its
height.
Drag upward to set the height of the bottom surface at 0, or drag downward to
set the top surface at 0.
To create a Sphere
, click and drag in
any direction to define its radius.
Cone
, click and drag in any direction
to define the radius.
To create 3D Box
Unlike polyline solids, primitives cannot be

created in cross section/elevation views.
642
Editing Primitives
Convert to Solid
Click the Convert To Solid edit button
to convert the selected polyline solid or
slab into a solid so that it can be used with

other solids to create complex structures.
Primitives can be selected individually and

as a group and edited using the edit handles,
the edit toolbar and their respective
specification dialogs.

edit button
to center the selected primitive(s) along a
wall. See Centering Doors and
Click the Move to Front

edit button
to display the selected primitive in front
of other objects in floor plan view. See

edit
button to reverse the direction of the
selected primitives line style. See
Reverse Direction on page 136.
A selected primitive or primitives can be

on the edit toolbar. See Using the Edit
Toolbar on page 109.
Click the Union

edit button to join
two or more primitive objects. See
page 146.

edit button to
create a new primitive defined by the
areas shared by the original primitives.
See Union, Intersection, and Subtract
on page 146.
Click the Subtract

edit button, then
click on a second primitive to remove the
area shared by both primitives. See
page 146.
Using the Mouse

Primitives can be edited similar to CAD
boxes or circles. When selected, a primitive
displays six edit handles: a Move handle, a
Rotate handle and a Resize handle on each
edge. Unlike CAD boxes or circles,
primitives do not have corner Resize edit
handles.
As with most objects, primitives can be

copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc. The
following edit toolbar buttons may display
on the edit toolbar for selected primitives.

edit button to
selected primitive(s).

edit button to block the selected primitive(s) together. See Creating
643
Other
Objects
Editing Primitives
Creating Complex Structures

with Primitives
Primitive objects can be manipulated and
combined to produce complex structures.
Use the Union
, Intersection
and
Subtract
edit tools to create unique 3D
shapes and combine shapes into Architectural Blocks
on page 663.
. See Architectural Blocks
A fireplace, for example, can be created by

arranging 3D Boxes
A detailed model truck can be created using

A custom chimney can be designed using 3D
Boxes
and Cylinders
and Subtract
644
and the Union
edit tools.
3D Boxes
Union
and Cylinders
, Intersection
edit tools.
and the
and Subtract
Decorative stone columns can be modeled
When a primitive has been manipulated
using 3D Boxes
using the Union
, and
edit tools.
, Intersection
and
Subtract
edit tools, it is no longer a
primitive that can be resized or reshaped
using the edit handles or specification dialog.
Instead, it is a considered a solid. See Solid
A structure created using the Primitive Tools
can be exported as a 3D model and then
imported to create a custom 3D symbol. See
Importing and Exporting on page 907 and
Create Symbol Wizard on page 925.

Select a 3D box and click the Open Object
edit button to open the 3D Box
When you first draw a 3D box, the origin of

the box is the point where you start drawing
it; the width of the box is the X axis
dimension.
645
Other
Objects
Subtract
and the Union
1 Dimensions - Use this section to

specify the size of the box.
Enter the Width, Length, and Height of the

box.
2 Origin - Use these settings to position
Angle in XY Plane - Enter a number from 1

to 360 to control the rotation of the box on
the X axis.
Angle From XY Plane - This number
controls the rotation of the box on the Y axis.
the origin of the box in relation to the

origin point of your plan. See Entering
Angle Around Width Vector - Enter the

number to specify the rotation of the box on
the Z axis.
Enter the X, Y, and Z delta coordinates for

the box.
Line Style Tab
3 Width Vector - A width vector is an

invisible line that runs the width of the

box. Use the width vector settings to
precisely control the rotation of the box in
free space.
Materials Tab
Sphere Specification Dialog

Select a sphere and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Sphere
1
2
3
4
1 Radius - Specify the radius of the
3 Center Y - Enter the position of the
2 Center X - Specify the exact position
4 Center Z - Enter the position of the
sphere.
of the sphere by entering the location of

the center on the X axis.
646
sphere center relative to the Y axis.
sphere center relative to the Z axis.
Line Style Tab
Materials Tab


Other
Objects

Select a cylinder and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Cylinder
1 Dimensions - Use these settings to

specify the size of the cylinder.
Radius - Enter the radius of the cylinder.

Height - Specify the height of the cylinder.
2 Center - Locate the cylinder precisely

with these settings.
X - Enter the location of the cylinder center

on the X plane.
Y - Enter the location of the cylinder center
on the Y plane.
Z - Enter the location of the cylinder center
on the Z plane.
Axis - The axis is an invisible line that

runs the length of the cylinder. By
default, this axis is vertical. Use the Axis

settings to control the rotation of the cylinder
in free space.
Angle in XY Plane - Use this number to
control the rotation on the X axis. Because
the cylinder is round, it only changes
appearance if you also enter a number in
Angle From XY Plane.
controls the rotation of the cylinder on the Y
axis.
Line Style Tab

647
Materials Tab
Cone Specification Dialog

Select a cone and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Cone
1 Dimensions - These setting specify the

size of the cone.
Radius - Enter the radius of the cone.

Height - Enter the height of the cone.
2 Center - You can locate the cone
precisely relative to the origin using

these settings.
X - Specify the X position of the cone center.
Y - Specify the Y position of the cone center.
Z - Enter the Z position of the cone center.
3 Axis - The axis is an invisible line that
runs the length of the cone. By default,

this axis is vertical. Use the Axis settings to
control the rotation of the cone in free space.
648
Angle in XY Plane - Use this number to

control the rotation on the X plane. Because
the cone is round, it only changes appearance
if you also enter a number in Angle From
XY Plane.
controls the rotation of the cone on the Y
plane.
Line Style Tab

Materials Tab
Solid Specification Dialog
Solid Specification Dialog

,
Line Style Tab
Intersection
and Subtract
edit tools,
or by converting a slab or polyline solid into

a solid, and click the Open Object

edit
button to open the Solid Specification
dialog.
Materials Tab
Polyline Solids
Video: Creating 3D CAD Objects
Video: Creating New 3D Objects by
Merging and Subtracting 3D Solids
Polyline solids are polyline shaped 3D
objects with a specified thickness.
They can be oriented either horizontally or
vertically and are useful for creating custom
details anywhere in your 3D model.
Polyline solids can be edited the way other

closed polyline-based objects are. See
page 107.
Converting CAD Polylines

A closed CAD polyline can be converted into
a polyline solid in floor plan and cross
section/elevation views using the Convert
Polyline
edit button. See Convert
Creating Polyline Solids

A horizontal polyline solid can be created in
floor plan view or any 3D view by selecting
Build> Primitive> Polyline Solid
, then
clicking and dragging to draw a rectangle.
A vertical polyline solid can be created in a
cross section/elevation view by selecting
Convert to Solid
You can convert a polyline solid to a
primitive in order to build complex
solid structures. Select the polyline solid you
want to convert and click Convert to Solid
Build> Primitive> Polyline Solid

, then
clicking and dragging to draw a rectangle.
The polyline solid is placed in front of any
objects visble in the view. If no objects are
behind, the polyline solid is placed one foot
in front of the camera.
649
Other
Objects
Select a solid created using the Union
Polyline Solid Specification Dialog

To open the Polyline Solid
Specification dialog, click on a polyline to
select it, then click the Open Object
button.
edit
General Tab
grow upward (horizontal) or toward the

elevation/cross section camera (vertical).
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab

1
2
Line Style Tab
3
1 Hole in Polyline Solid - Select to
convert the polyline solid into a hole in

a surrounding polyline solid.
2 Height - Specify the height of the top
of the polyline solid. This property is

not available for vertical polyline solids.
3 Thickness - Specify the thickness for
the polyline solid. Increasing the

thickness will cause the polyline solid to

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between
cabinet tops and the ceiling, but they
are very versatile and can be used to create
almost any other object that can be modeled
as a 3D box.
(20mm) deeper than the default wall cabinet.

The soffit height automatically adjusts to fill
the space between the ceiling and the top of
the wall cabinets..
Placing Soffits
Soffit Defaults
The default size for soffits cannot be
changed. Soffits are the same width as and 1"
650
Soffits can be created in both 2D and 3D

views. They can be assigned materials that
are calculated in the Materials List, but by
default they use the material assigned to the

default wall. Like cabinets, soffits can have
custom molding profiles specified. See
When a soffit is created, it is automatically

placed on the Cabinets, Soffits layer. See
218.
Other
Objects

Anything that can be represented by a three
dimensional box of any size or angle can be
represented by a soffit. They can be resized
to as small as 1/16"x1/16"x1/16"
(1mmx1mmx1mm) or as large as 135 feet
(32m).
Note: For free form shapes, polyline solids
may be better suited for the job. See Polyline
Solids on page 649.
For a box that can be rotated around any
side, a 3D box may be better suited. See
Box on page 642.
Soffits can have materials applied to them to

represent simple mirrors, beams in exposed
ceilings, posts, fences, chimneys and so on.
Following are illustrations showing some
possibilities.
Masonry Veneer
On exterior walls, create a brick or stone
veneer that extends only halfway up the wall
using four inch (100mm) deep soffits placed
around the base of the house.
Soffits automatically stop at the floor

platform when moved downward. To place a
soffit for a brick ledge, create a Cross
Section/Elevation
view looking straight
at the brick ledge. Select the brick soffit, hold
the Ctrl key down, grab the soffit by its
middle handle, and drag it down past the
floor so that it covers the floor platform edge
as well.
Tile Surrounds
A material such as ceramic tile can be
assigned to one or more soffits applied to the
walls above tubs or in showers.
651
Calculating Materials on Soffits

addition to the front, if these surfaces are
not attached to a wall or other soffit.
However, only those portions of the
sides, top and bottom remaining after
subtracting twice the material thickness
are used. So, for Dark Red brick, which
has a depth of 4", the sides, top and bottom surface areas cannot contribute to the
brick count unless the soffit depth is
greater than 8 inches.
The number of bricks, tiles, shingles, shakes

or other materials applied to a soffit is
calculated using the following rules:
652
If the soffit depth is less than the larger of

4 inches (10 mm) or 1 times the material thickness, then only the front area of
the soffit is used. Thus if a soffit is
48"x48x4 thick, and the Dark Red
brick material is used (3"x 8" with 3/8
mortar joint) the front of the soffit is
48"x48=2304 square inches. Including
the mortar joint, each brick requires 3 3/
8 x 8 3/8 = 28.26 square inches. 2304
sq. in. divided by 28.26 sq. in. per brick
gives 81.5 bricks.
If the soffit depth is greater than both 4
inches (10 mm) and 1 times the material thickness, then the surface areas of
the soffit back, sides and top are used in
If surface materials such as brick are

applied to a large soffit, the soffit center
is assumed to be hollow, with only a single layer of the material applied to each
applicable face.
For shingles and shakes, the overlap

amount should be subtracted from the
height, as opposed to brick or tile, where
the joint width is added to the size.
For materials in the area category, the

soffit area calculation above is used, with
the material thickness treated as zero.
For materials in the volume, concrete or

earth categories, the true volume of the
soffit is used.
To customize a soffit using the Soffit

Specification dialog, double-click on the
soffit using the Soffit
soffit and click the Open Object

button.
edit
tool or select the
General Tab
1
2
3
5
7
1 Height - Define the vertical height of
the soffit. If you are using the soffit to

represent a beam, this will be the depth of the
beam.
2 Width - Enter the width of the soffit.

3 Depth - Define the depth, the distance
between the front and the back of the

soffit. When selected in floor plan view, the
front of a soffit has a V, and the back of the
soffit has a triangular rotation handle.
4 Floor to Bottom - Enter the Floor to
Bottom distance. This is often more

easily defined by dragging the soffit in a 3D
view until it is properly positioned.
5 Follow Terrain - Check this box to
make a soffit placed outside a building

adjust its height to the height of the terrain.
6 A preview of the defined soffit displays

here.
653
Other
Objects
7 Show Color - Select the check box to
have the picture of the soffit show the

defined material.
Options Tab
1
3
1 Sloped Soffit - Select the check box to

slope the soffit vertically.
The front of the soffit is indicated by a v in

floor plan view. Soffits slope from back up
towards the front.
When you define a sloped soffit, the General
tab includes additional options for specifying
the soffit. You must define a height for the
front of the soffit and a height for the back of
the soffit. The front value should be greater
than the back if the soffit is sloped.
To change an angled soffit back to a
horizontal soffit, clear the Sloped Soffit
check box.
2 Place Under Roof - Select the check
box to have a soffit slope to follow the
654
roof. The soffit moves up and the top of the

soffit is in the same plane as the roof, at the
same pitch as the roof. Be sure to place the
front of the soffit toward the high side of the
roof.
3 Place Under Ceiling - Select the check
box to move the soffit vertically until

the top contacts the ceiling plane.
Moldings Tab
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
Label Tab
Sloped Soffits
When a soffit is turned into a sloped soffit,
the General and Options tabs of the Soffit
Specification dialog change. The preview
of the soffit updates when new values are

entered in the fields. This is a side view with
the back of the soffit to the left.
Elevation View
Floor Plan View

3D view
Front
The three inset diagrams show how the
dialog relates to the sloped soffits.
Thickness is measured perpendicular to the
slope of the soffit.
Width is measured left to right across the
soffit.
slope, this measurement is not the actual

length of the soffit. It cannot, for example, be
used to determine the length of a sloped
beam.
For sloped soffits, both the front and back
heights must be defined.
Horizontal Length is measured from back

to front in floor plan view. Since it is at a
655
Other
Objects

the soffit surface in 3D views. If a material is
applied, the Material List reflects the change.
Height at Back is measured from the

finished floor to the lowest point at the back
of the soffit.
Height at Front is measured from the

finished floor to the underside of the soffit at
the upper end.
Fireplaces
A masonry fireplace can be placed in
or away from a wall by selecting
Build> Fireplace and then clicking in the
drawing area.
If created in a wall, it is considered an

opening and can be moved or resized like
a window or door.
If created away from a wall, it moves and

resizes similar to a cabinet.
Standard, corner and see-through

prefabricated metal fireplaces are also
available from the Fixtures (Interior) library
category. These can be framed in with
standard walls.
Select the fireplace to display four edit

handles located along the wall.
Click the diamond-shaped Depth handle and

drag toward the outside of the wall. The
fireplace will stop when the firebox front is
flush with the inside edge of the wall.
The display of fireplaces is controlled in the

Fireplaces are edited, moved, resized, and
deleted similar toother objects. See Editing
Objects on page 79.
Built into a Wall

To place a masonry fireplace in a wall, select
Build> Fireplace
and click on a wall. A
fireplace is created with the outside of the
fireplace flush with the outside of the wall.
656
In 3D views, fireplaces placed in walls

display five edit handles: a Resize handle
along each edge and a Move handle at the
center.
Fireplaces always face the interior when
placed on an exterior wall. If a fireplace is
created on an interior wall, click on the edge
of the wall to specify which way the fireplace
should face. The fireplace is created with the
firebox on the same side as the wall edge you
clicked on to create it.
To place a free-standing masonry fireplace,

select Build> Fireplace
open area from a wall.
and click in an
Free-standing fireplaces can be selected and

replaced with a symbol from the library by
clicking the Replace From Library
edit
button. See Replace From Library on page
680.
Fireplace Foundations
Unlike fireplaces placed in walls, freestanding fireplace have ten edit handles when
selected and may be rotated, resized, or
moved in any direction, similar to the way
CAD boxes can. See Editing Box-Based
If a fireplace is added on the first floor before

building the foundation plan, a foundation
will be generated under the fireplace when
the foundation is built.
The fireplace foundation is the same material
type as the original fireplace, but will not
have a firebox or a hearth. This fireplace
foundation may be edited or deleted as
desired. A firebox and hearth may be added
in the Fireplace Specification dialog.

Select the masonry fireplace and click the
Open Object
edit button to display the
Fireplace Specification dialog.
Dimensions entered here must be whole

inches. Fractions and decimals are not
accepted.
657
Other
Objects
Freestanding
General Tab
1 Specify the dimensions of the fireplace

and hearth.
Height - Specify the Height of the fireplace.

Width - Specify the Width of the fireplace.
Depth - Specify the Depth of the fireplace.
Hearth Depth - Specify the Hearth Depth.
This is measured from the front of the
fireplace out into the room. To eliminate the
hearth altogether, enter a zero for this value.
658
Hearth Height - Specify the Hearth Height.

This is the height of the hearth above the
floor in that room.
Floor to Bottom - Enter the distance
between the floor and the hearth bottom.
2 Suppress Dimensions - This option is
available for fireplaces placed in walls.

Check this box to turn off dimensions when
this fireplace is selected.
Library Fireplaces
Firebox Tab
Other
Objects
1
2
1 No Firebox - Select the check box to
eliminate the firebox from the fireplace.

This is often used in the foundation plan to
provide a solid matching base for the
fireplace on the first floor.
2 Set the dimensions of the firebox.

Height/Width - Enter the height and
width of the firebox.
Depth - Enter the depth of the firebox.
3 Offset - Enter the number of inches (or

mm) to offset the firebox, measured
from the center. A value of 0 centers the

firebox in the fireplace.
Offset to Left/Right - Choose to offset the
firebox to the left or to the right.
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
Library Fireplaces
A variety of different fireplace symbols are
available in the Fixtures (Interior) library
category. See Interior Fixtures on page
685. The fireplaces in the Library behave just
like other Library objects.
Always check the manufacturers product information for the framing and
clearance requirements of the fireplace unit
you plan to use, and design your plan accordingly
659
Placing a Library Fireplace

Library fireplaces can be placed in floor plan
and 3D views. Select the desired symbol in
the library, then click in your drawing area to
place it at that location. See Creating
Objects on page 90.
can also project the fireplace and enclosing

walls into the room.
Flush fireplaces, found in Fireplaces> Open

Front> Without Stovepipes, are designed to
snap to a wall surface.
Other Open Face fireplace symbols can be
positioned to project through a wall. Once
the fireplace is located, you can draw walls
to enclose the back of the fireplace and use
dimensions to place them accurately. You
Open Front Library fireplace

projecting through a 4" wall
Chimneys
Chimneys for
Masonry Fireplaces
Place a soffit in position over the chimney chase, resize it to match, then extend
the soffit using the same method as
extending the masonry fireplace in the
3D view.
If the chimney chase is drawn with walls

on the exterior of the house, you can continue the chase using walls on the floors
above. Align walls with the chase on
each subsequent floor. The chimney
chase room on the uppermost floor
should have a much higher ceiling
defined in the Room Specification
dialog. It should also be set to have no
roof by unchecking Roof over this room
in the Structure tab of the Room
Specification dialog. Rebuild floors
and ceilings and the roof, if needed.
To create a chimney on a masonry fireplace

1.
Select the fireplace in a 3D view.
2.
Hold down the Ctrl key, click on the topmost edit handle and drag the chimney
up through all the floors and the roof
until it is to the desired height. The Ctrl
key prevents the chimney from stopping
when it reaches the ceiling height.
3.
When the chimney is approximately the

correct height, select the fireplace, click
the Open Object
edit button, and
type in the exact height.
Chimney Chases & Caps

Chimney chases can be extended by a couple
of methods.
660
Chimney caps can be made using soffits,

polyline solids, or other primitive objects.
Chimneys
661
662
Chapter 23:
Architectural
Blocks
Architectural
Blocks
Chapter Overview
Architectural blocks are built from groups of
3D objects. When an architectural block is
created, the block behaves as a single object
while the components retain their own
attributes.
The display of architectural blocks in floor
plan view can be controlled by layer.
The display of architectural blocks in
materials lists and schedules can be turned
off completely. The block can appear as a
single unit or its sub-objects and components
can display separately.
Chapter Contents
Architectural vs CAD Blocks

Creating Architectural Blocks
Displaying Architectural Blocks
Editing Architectural Blocks
Exploding Architectural Blocks
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and
Components
Adding Architectural Blocks to the Library
Architectural Block Specification Dialog
663
Architectural vs CAD Blocks

Just as there are two types of objects in Chief
Architect, architectural and CAD, there are
two types of blocks. See Architectural vs
CAD Objects on page 80.
architectural or CAD blocks. Knowing the

differences between these two types of
blocks helps you decide which type of block
can best meet your needs.
Architectural objects such as cabinets and

fixtures can be included in architectural
blocks, while CAD objects such as lines,
arcs, text and dimensions can be included in
CAD blocks. See CAD Blocks on page
870.
A CAD block can include and also be nested

in a larger block with CAD objects, text and
dimensions, but cannot include or be blocked
with architectural objects.
Some objects, such as custom countertops

and slabs, are referred to as CAD-based
objects and can be included in either
An architectural block can include and also

be nested in a larger block with architectural
objects, but cannot include or be blocked
with CAD objects, text or dimensions.
Creating Architectural Blocks

An architectural block is created by
group-selecting a set of architectural
objects and then clicking the Make
Architectural Block edit button.
The following is a list of objects that can be
included in architectural blocks:
664
Cabinets (Base, Wall, Full Height)
Soffits, Shelves, Partitions
Fixture/Furniture Symbols
Hardware Symbols
Millwork Symbols
Geometric Shape Symbols
Electrical objects
Images
Custom Countertops & Counter Holes
Slabs & Foundation Slabs
Primitives and Polyline Solids
Molding Polylines
Roads, Driveways, Sidewalks
Terrain Features and Terrain Modifiers
Once blocked, the set of blocked objects is

contained in a bounding box, indicating that
they are now an architectural block.
Architectural blocks can be created in any

view.
The Library
Open the Library Browser and expand
the Architectural Blocks category to
access the architectural blocks. Choose a

block and click in the plan to place it.
You can create your own architectural blocks
and save them to the Library. See Adding to
the Library on page 674.

The display of architectural blocks, including
their bounding box, is controlled in the
The components of the block can use the
layer attributes assigned to their current layer
or the layer attributes assigned to the
architectural block. See General Tab on
page 668.
You can control the appearence of the

bounding box by changing the layer
properties for the architectural block.
The label for an architectural block in floor
plan view can be generated automatically,
created manually, derived from the
component code, or suppressed. See Label
Tab on page 668.
Editing Architectural Blocks

Architectural block can be selected and
edited in 2D and 3D views. See Selecting
Objects on page 92.
Note: Moving an architectural block in 3D
view regenerates the view. Moving an architectural block that contains terrain objects
causes the terrain to be rebuilt.
To edit a component of an architectural

block, first select the architectural block by
clicking on the component, then press the
Tab key or click the Select Next Object
edit button. The selection marquee switches
focus to the individual object. The ability to
edit the object as part of a block may be more
restricted than if the object were
independent.

A selected architectural block displays a
Move handle and a Rotate handle. If the
block has a label, it also has its own Move
handle.
Architectural blocks cannot be resized, but
the individual objects in the block can be.
Select the block and tab to the object you
want to resize. Change the size using the edit
handles, or by opening the specification
dialog for that object. You can also explode
the block before resizing. See Exploding
665
Architectural
Blocks
Architectural blocks are visible in all views.
Using Edit Buttons

edit button to
open the Architectural Block
Specification dialog. See Architectural Block Specification Dialog on
page 667.
cisely using the Point to Point Move

edit button. See Point to Point Move on
page 125.
An architectural block or group of blocks

can be edited in a variety of ways using
the Transform/Replicate Object
edit button. See Transform/Replicate
Architectural blocks can be moved pre-
Architectural blocks can be selected and

added to the library for future use by
clicking the Add to Library
edit
button. See Adding Architectural Blocks
Click the Explode Architectural Block

edit button to explode the block into
its individual objects. See Exploding
Exploding Architectural Blocks

You can break an architectural block to
make its objects independent. Select
the architectural block and click the Explode

Architectural Block edit button.
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components

An architectural block consists of a group of
objects blocked together. These sub-objects
often contain additional parts called
components. For example, a kitchen island
can be created by blocking together cabinets,
appliances, and a custom countertop. Each of
these sub-objects may contain components.
For example, the cabinet(s) may contain a
countertop, hinges, and drawer glide.
Architectural blocks can be treated as a
single unit in materials lists, ignoring subobjects and their components. See General
Tab on page 668.
666
Editing Sub-Objects
Certain attributes of an architectural block
can be edited at the object level. An object
can be edited by accessing the specification
dialog either of two ways:
Explode the architectural block; select

the sub-object; and click the Open
Object
edit button.
Select the sub-object while it is part of

the architectural block (see Editing
Architectural Blocks on page 665) and
edit button.
Some attributes may not be editable
while the object is part of a block.
You can view and/or modify the components

of an architectural block (or group of blocks)
through the Components dialog. The
Components dialog lists all the subobjects that comprise an architectural block,
as well as the components that make up each
sub-object.
To open the Components dialog, select an

architectural block and click the
Components
edit button. See
Library
. Once in the library,
architectural blocks can be copied to any
other category. See Editing Library
Select the architectural block and click the

Add to Library
edit button. The Add
to Library dialog opens, allowing you to
add the object to a specific library under the
Architectural Blocks category. See Adding
Note: If you open a plan hat was created in

the Full of Chief Architect in the Base version
and select an architectural block, you cannot
unblock it or edit its components.
Architectural Block Specification Dialog

The Architectural Block
Specification dialog controls the way
architectural blocks display in floor plan
view and in materials lists and schedules.
Select an architectural block or group of
architectural blocks and click the Open
Object
Architectural Block Specification
dialog for the selected block(s).
667
Architectural
Blocks
You can create your own architectural blocks

and save them in the Architectural Blocks
General Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Display Bounding Box - check this to
show the bounding box of the objects in

the architectural block. The box uses the
Architectural Blocks Layer settings.
2 Display Sub-Objects Using Block

Layer - Check this box to apply the
display properties for the architectural block
layer as specified in the Layer Display
Options dialog to all of the sub-objects.
If this box is not checked, all the sub-objects
display according to the display properties
set for their current layer. See Displaying
3 Ignore Sub-Objects - Check this box
to treat the architectural block as a

single unit in materials lists and schedules.
This also turns off sub-objects in floor plan
view, displaying only the bounding box.
4 Block Schedule - Specify which
schedule the architectural block appears

in when Ignore Sub-Objects is checked.
Select None to exclude the architectural
block from all schedules.
Note: "Other" must be checked in the Schedule Specification dialog for the architectural
block to appear in the schedule. See Text
Tab on page 996.
Layer Tab
Label Tab
For more information about the Label tab,
see Label Tab on page 576.
Note: Labels for architectural blocks only display in floor plan view.
668
Chapter 24:
Libraries
Libraries
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Finding
and Placing Library Objects
Chief Architects library contains thousands
of symbols, materials, and images that can
enhance any plan. Anything that you want to
incorporate in your building design that
cannot be made with Chief Architects
architectural and drafting tools can be found
in the library or created in the Create Symbol
Wizard and saved in the library for future
use.
New libraries and library enhancements are
created by Chief Architect on a continuing
basis. There are also third party developers
who have created their own libraries for
Chief Architect that are available for
purchase.
Chapter Contents
Third Party Libraries

Bonus Libraries
The Library Browser
Adding to the Library
Editing Libraries
Select Library Object Dialog
Library Categories
Library Search Dialog
Placing Library Objects
Place Library Object Button
Displaying Library Objects
Editing Library Objects
Library Objects and the Materials List
Library Object Specification Dialog
669
Third Party Libraries

If you have any third-party libraries created
for Chief Architect 7.0, you should copy
them into your Chief Architect X1.0
Libraries folder. The next time you open
Chief Architect, the program will
automatically convert those libraries for you.
If you have any third-party libraries for Chief
Architect 8.0, 9.0, 9.5 or 10.0,, they are
automatically copied into the Chief Architect

X1.0 Libraries folder.
New third-party libraries can be added to the
Library Browser as well. See Adding a
Third Party Library on page 675.
Updated information on available libraries
can be found at www.chiefarchitect.com.
Bonus Libraries
Chief Architect periodically posts new and
updated libraries for download.
Select the Manufacturers category in the

Library Browser and click the link that
displays in the preview pane.
To see what bonus libraries are available
Select Help> Download Bonus Content

from the menu.
The Library Browser

Video: Library and Project Browser
The Chief Architect Library Browser is
a repository of prebuilt components,
symbols, and images that can be used in a
plan. Explore the contents, find what youre
looking for, and place it in your plan.
The Library Browser allows you to add your
own objects, organize them into your own
libraries within existing categories, and save
them for use in future plans. See Adding to
670
To open the Library Browser:
Select Library> Library Browser
Press Ctrl + L on your keyboard.
The Library Browser window has three

adjustable sections: library directory pane,
selection pane, and preview pane. To adjust
the height or width of a section, place the
pointer over the split bar you want to move.
When the double-headed arrow
displays,
click and drag.
The Library Browser can also be docked to
any side of the screen. See Docking the
The Library Browser
1
5
2
1 Select the Library Browser tab to view

the Library Browser.
Select the Project Browser tab to view the

Project Browser. See Project Browser on
page 165.
2 The library directory displays here. The

overall structure is:
Library Category
Library 1
Library Folder 1
Library Subfolder
Library Object 1
Library Folder 2
Library 2
... and so on.
Navigate the hierarchy using the tree view,

by clicking in the view window, or by using
the keyboard.
3 The toolbar beneath the tree view aids
in navigating and displaying windows.
Click the Library Search button to

open the Library Search dialog. See
Click the Plant Chooser button to
open the Plant Chooser dialog. See
Click the Online Content button to
launch your default web browser to the
Chief Architect web site, where links to third
party content developers can be found.
Click the Show/Hide Selection Pane
button to toggle the Selection window
on and off.
Click the Show/Hide Preview Pane
button to toggle the Preview window
on and off.
Click the Preferences button to open
the Library Browser panel of the
671
Libraries
3
4
Preferences dialog, where properties of
the Library Browser are controlled. See

Library Browser Panel on page 188.
4 The status bar at the bottom of the
Library Browser is divided into three

sections. To view them all, you may need to
resize the Library Browser.
The first displays the name of the

selected category, library, folder or
object.
The second section displays the total

number of folders and objects contained
within the selected item.
The third section displays copyright

information for copyrighted symbols.
Using the Menus

The Library menu contains all commands
related to the library. Which menu items are
enabled depends on the type of item
currently selected in the Library Browser.
5 The Selection pane shows thumbnails

for the highlighted portion of the tree
view.
If you have Scrollable List checked in your
preference settings, a scroll bar is present at
the bottom of the selection pane. See
6 The Preview pane displays a 3D or
alternate view of the selected object.
Select an object by clicking on the desired

object in the Selection pane, then click in the
plan to place it. Once placed, the object can
be selected, moved, or edited. All placed
objects are saved with the plan.
You can work on the plan with the Library
Browser open. To close the Library Browser
click the Close button or double-click the
object in the selection pane.
672
For information about these commands,

when they are available, and what they do,
see Library Menu on page 46.
Right-click on an item in the Library
Browser to open a contextual menu
displaying options related to that item. This
menu corresponds to the items found in the
Library menu when the same library object is
selected. See Library Menu on page 46.
The Library Browser
Docking the
Library Browser
Libraries
The Library Browser can be relocated by

clicking and dragging the title bar.
When moved to the top, bottom, or side of
your screen it automatically docks in a
vertical or horizontal orientation, depending
on its location.
Disable Docking in the Preferences

dialog prevents the Library Browser from
docking to the side of the screen. See
Holding down the Ctrl key prevents the

Library Browser from docking while
moving.
If you close the program with the Library

Browser docked, it displays in the same
position the next time the program is
opened.
673

New libraries, folders, and library objects
can be added to the Library Browser. Library
objects are always placed in alphabetical
order within their heirarchy.
Most libraries shipped with Chief Architect
are locked and cannot be edited, indicated
by a small padlock on the folder; however,
each library category does include a single,
unlocked library which can be edited.
The names of these unlocked libraries begin
with -My, followed by the name of the
category. The My Materials library, for
674
example, is located at the top of the Materials

category tree. Additional unlocked libraries
can be added to any category, allowing you
to customize the organization of the library.
Adding a New Library

To create a new, unlocked library, open the
Library Browser, select a library category
in the tree view, and choose Library> New>
Library. A new library initially named
Untitled Library 1 is added to the currently
selected category.
5.
If Chief Architect is running when you

perform this task, select Library>
Refresh Library Browser
6.
The third party library may be listed in

the My Libraries library category.
Inserting a New Folder
A new library can also be created from

within the Add to Library dialog. See
You can also right-click any unlocked library

or folder in the tree view and select New
Folder from the contextual menu. See
Using the Menus on page 672.
Libraries
You can also right-click any current library in

the tree view and select New Library from
the contextual menu. See Using the Menus
on page 672.
Click on an unlocked library or

folder
in the tree view, then select Library> New>
Folder. A new folder initially named
Untitled is added to the currently selected
library or folder.
Adding a Third Party Library

In Chief Architect, libraries are stored using
the .ALB file format. Some manufacturers
and third party symbol resources provide
library content in this file format that can be
added to the Chief Architect library.
To add a third party library
1.
In Windows Explorer, browse to the

.ALB file saved on your computer.
2.
Right click and select Copy from the

contextual menu.
3.
Browse to the Chief Architect Libraries

directory, typically located at C:\Program Files\Chief Architect Inc\Chief
Architect X1 Full\Libraries.
4.
Select Edit> Paste to paste a copy of the

.ALB file in the Libraries directory.
Adding a New Object

Any object previously placed in a plan from
the Library Browser or using the Create
Symbol Wizard can be added to an
unlocked library. See Create Symbol
Wizard on page 925.
In addition, some Chief Architect objects
that are not symbols, such as cabinets,
windows, doorways, CAD blocks, molding
profiles, architectural blocks, and terrain
675
objects can be added to the library. See

Symbols vs. Native Objects on page 698.
To add an object to the library
1.
Select the symbol and choose Tools>

Symbol> Add to Library
or click
the Add to Library

edit button to
open the Add to Library dialog.
Adding Materials and Images

to the Library
Chief Architect can use materials and images
in a variety of file formats and provides
several means of adding new material and
image files to the library. For more
information, see Creating Materials on
page 704; Managing Plan Materials on
page 706; Creating Images on page 894;
and Adding Images to the Library on page
897.
Adding Backdrops
to the Library
Backdrops are images that can be selected to
display in 3D views. See Backdrop Tab on
page 760. A backdrop can be added to the
library by importing an image file from
anywhere on your computer.
2.
In the Choose window, select the

unlocked library or folder that you want
to add the object to. The symbol is added
at the selected directory level.
3.
If you want to add a new library, click

New Library
of the dialog.
button at the top right
4.
In the Object field, give the object a

name. Names are case sensitive.
5.
Click OK to save the object into the

selected folder. The OK button is disabled until you enter an object name and
select a library or folder.
Folders in the Backdrops category cannot have the forward slash / character.
1.
Select File> Import> Backdrop

to
open the Import Backdrop File dialog, which is similar to the Import
Picture File dialog. See Import Picture File Dialog on page 890.
2.
Browse to an image file on your computer, select it, and click Open. This
backdrop can now be found in the My
Backdrops library.
Multiple backdrops can be added to the

library simultaneously by copying them into
the My Backdrops folder using Windows
Explorer.
You can also create a new backdrop by first
copying an image to the Windows Clipboard,
then navigating to a Chief Architect window
and selecting Edit> Paste> Paste
from
the menu or by using the Screen Capture
676
Editing Libraries
tools. See Paste on page 137 and Creating

Screen Captures on page 900.
For information about how to use a backdrop
in render views, see Images & Backdrops
on page 769.
Refresh Library Browser

If you add a new library or graphics file
by copying the file in Windows
Explorer, it does not automatically display in
the browser. Select Library> Refresh
Library Browser to refresh the Library
Browser and display the added file.
Editing Libraries
Copy Library List

To make a copy of the list of all library
objects, select a
folder in tree view and
choose Library> Copy Library List, then
paste the entire library heirarchy as text into
a text program such as Notepad or Text
Editor.
Copying Folders and

Library Objects
To copy a Folder
or Library Object ,
right-click on it in the Library Browser and
select Copy
from the contextual menu.
Highlight a new location in the tree view and
select Edit> Paste to paste a copy in the new
location or right-click and select Paste from
the contextual menu.
You can also copy items by dragging and
dropping them into an unlocked library
folder.
Libraries
cannot be copied.
Deleting Libraries
Unlocked libraries and the folders and library
objects within them can be deleted. To delete
a library object, select it in the Library
Browser and choose Library> Delete
Object; right-click on it and choose Delete
from the contextual menu; or press the
Delete key on your keyboard.
Modifying or deleting library objects is
permanent and immediate. You cannot
undo these changes, so use care when modifying your libraries. You should create backups of all your library files (*.alb) before
making any modifications.
Renaming Libraries
Unlocked Libraries, including the Folders
and library objects within them, can be
renamed.
To rename a library, folder, or library object,
open the Library Browser and select the
library object to be renamed. Choose
Library> Rename Object, press F2 on your
keyboard, or right-click on the library object
and select Rename Object from the
contextual menu. The keyboard command
Ctrl+R also allows you to rename a library
object.
677
Libraries
Most libraries in the Library Browser are

locked and cannot be deleted, moved,
renamed, or modified. User-created libraries
and library objects, however, can be moved,
copied, deleted, and renamed.
Library names can contain up to 63

characters. Library names are also casesensitive. For example, OakCabinet will
not overwrite Oakcabinet.
Expand/Collapse All
When a Folder level item is selected in the
tree view of the Library Browser, Expand
All and Collapse All are available in the
Library and contextual menus, allowing you
to expand or contract its contents in the tree
view.
Components
The display of library objects in the
Materials List is controlled in the
Components dialog. Select Library>
Components
when any unlocked symbol
is highlighted in tree view. See Editing
Library Objects on page 698. The
Components dialog opens, allowing you
to change the information that included in the
Material List.
Terrain objects, CAD blocks, moldings,
images, backdrops, and materials do not
appear in the Materials List. See
To open the Symbol Specification

dialog, click on a symbol name in the tree
view of the Library Browser and select
Library> Open
. See Symbol
Preferences
Click the Preferences
button at the
bottom of the Library Browser directories
panel to open the Library Browser panel of
the Preferences dialog, where display
properties for the Library Browser are
controlled. See Library Browser Panel on
page 188.
Moving Folders and

Library Objects
Unlocked folders and library objects can be
moved to new locations in the Library
Browser provided that the destination is an
unlocked library. Like libraries, folders and
library objects are organized alphabetically
within each hierarchy.
To move an unlocked folder or file to a
different location, open the Library Browser
and click the library object. Click and drag
the object to the new location.
Open Symbol
Any image, material, plant image,or symbol
in an Unlocked library can be edited from
the Library Browser menu.
Individual library objects from locked
libraries can be edited after being copied into unlocked libraries.
678
Folders able to accept additions highlight as

the file is moved. Release the mouse button
to relocate the selected library object.
Keyboard Commands
The Library Browser can be navigated using
the arrow keys on your keyboard. The right
and left arrow keys expand and collapse
folders, and the up and down keys change
which library object is currently selected.
Unlocked library objects can be deleted
using the Delete key on your keyboard.
If you have Scrollable List checked in your
Preference settings, pressing the Tab key
switches focus between the tree view and the

selection pane. Use your mouse to select an
object for placement. See Library Browser
Panel on page 188.
If you have Tiled To Fit Window checked in
your preference settings, pressing the Tab
key switches focus between the tree view and
the selection pane. You can then use the
arrow keys to select a library object within
the selection pane.

The Select Library Object dialog is a
modal version of the Library Browser that is
accessible from object specification dialogs
The Select Library Object dialog only

displays categories that are related to the
opened object. For example, this is how the
Select Library Object dialog displays
when accessed from the Cabinet
Libraries
that display the

button. Click it to
open the Select Library Object dialog
and select and apply items from the library to
the object currently opened for specification.
To make your selection, highlight the desired

object and click OK, or simply double-click
on the object in the selection pane to close
the Select Library Object dialog.
The Select Library Object dialog can be
resized
selection
; display the preview
and
panes; and can initiate a
Library Search
If the Select Library Object dialog is

opened by clicking the Library Material
button on the Materials tab of any
679
specification dialog, three additional options

are available:
Click the New Library

button to create a new library in the Materials category.
Click the New Material

button to
open the Define Material dialog and
create a new material.
Click the Open Item

button to open
the Define Material dialog for the
selected custom material in the library.
See Define Material Dialog on page
712.
These three options are also found in the

New submenu of the contextual menu that
displays when you right-click on the My
Materials library in the Library Browser.

The Replace From Library edit
button displays on the edit toolbar
when most objects are selected. Click this
button to open the Replace From Library
dialog and replace the selected object, and
others like it if you choose, with an object of
the same type from the library.
Select Replace Identical Objects in Room

to replace all objects that are in the same
room as, and are identical to, the currently
selected object.
Select Replace Identical Objects on Floor
to replace all objects that are on the same
floor as, and are identical to, the currently
selected object.
A few things to remember about Replace
From Library
1 Click the Library button to open the
Library Browser and select an object to

use as a replacement. The object that is
currently selected as a replacement is listed
above.
2 Select one of the Replacement

Options.
Select Replace Selected Object to replace

only the currently selected object.
680
Works in floor plan and 3D views.
The replacement option Replace

Identical Objects in Room is not available for doors and windows.

is available for
any object that can be stored in the Library
Browser and can be selected, including:
electrical objects, image objects,
architectural objects, and architectural
blocks. Objects that cannot be replaced using
this feature include materials, backdrops, and
objects placed within other objects, such as
cabinet doors.
Library Categories
Library Categories
The selection pane always represents the

items selected in the tree view. If you select a
category or object in the selection pane, the
corresponding item is selected in the tree
view and the 3D picture displays in the
preview pane.
Here are the library categories:
My Libraries
Architectural Blocks
Backdrops
Cabinet Doors and Drawers
Cabinet Modules
CAD Blocks
Doors
Doorways
Electrical
Exterior Fixtures
Interior Fixtures
Exterior Furnishing
Interior Furnishings
Geometric Shapes
Hardware
Images
Line Styles
Materials
Millwork
Moldings and Profiles
Plants
Sprinklers
Terrain
Windows
Manufacturers
Libraries
There are many library categories, and each

one may contain any number of libraries.
My Libraries
The My Libraries category is a central
repository that can be used to store libraries
containing any and all kinds of objects. This
is a good place to store third party libraries
and libraries that you have created yourself.
In addition, Chief Architects Library
Browser has unlocked libraries and folders
for you to save items in. These unlocked

directories all have the word My at the
beginning of their names, and are found at
the top of their library category when
opened. The My Materials library, for
example, is located at the top of the Materials
category tree.
Architectural blocks are a combination of
objects that are grouped together. Once
blocked, they can be edited as a single object
and stored for future use. See Architectural
Blocks on page 663.
681
Backdrops
The Backdrops library category contains
many images that can be used for backdrops
in render and raytrace views.
Backdrops can be specified from the 3D

Settings dialog; or they can be dragged and
dropped directly from the Library Browser.
See Creating Backdrops on page 761.
Cabinet Doors and Drawers

The Cabinet Doors and Drawers category
contains many door styles, organized into
directories, that can be used with Chief
Architects standard cabinets.
These door styles can be selected and

dropped onto existing cabinets in floor plan
and 3D views to change the door style for
that cabinet.
Cabinet Modules
The Cabinet Modules library category
contains cabinet modules that can be placed
in your plan from the Library Browser or the
682
Cabinet Specification dialog. Cabinets

from the library can be selected and moved
around in the model.
CAD Blocks
CAD Blocks
The CAD Blocks library category contains
2D CAD blocks that can be placed into any
floor plan or cross section/elevation view,
CAD Detail window or layout page.
Libraries
The CAD Blocks library category includes a

wide variety of CAD objects such as product
specific CAD details, commonly used plan
notations, and CAD images. See CAD
Blocks on page 870.
Doors
The Doors library category contains custom
door styles that can be assigned to doors in
the 3D model. These doors can be selected
and dropped into any doorway to change the
door style for that doorway.
The Doors library category also contains
custom doors that can be placed in walls.
683
Doorways
The Doorways library category contains
doorway configurations for grand entries,
interior archways, and garage door frames.
Electrical
The Electrical library category contains
electrical symbols that can be placed in floor
plan or 3D views to create electrical plans.
views and may also produce a light source in

render views.
All of these symbols have a 3D object

associated with them that will display in 3D
Exterior Fixtures
Introductory Training Video: Furniture
and Appliances
The Fixtures (Exterior) library category
contains symbols for many outdoor objects
commonly found on the exterior of a home.
Barbecues, plants, playground equipment,
hot tubs, mailboxes, doghouses, automobiles,
and a variety of road accessories are just
some of the objects found in the Exterior
Fixtures library category.
Sunrooms
The Fixtures (Exterior) library category
includes a Sunrooms library containing a
variety of sunroom components that can be
used to create many different styles of
684
Interior Fixtures
sunrooms. Following are some of the

individual library objects assembled as a
sunroom unit.
Only one side of each section is provided. To
get the corresponding unit for the opposite
side, check Reverse Item in the specification
dialog for that sunroom section.
If a short wall is needed under the sunroom,

use solid railings. Change the Floor to
Bottom value from zero to the height of the
solid railing.

and Appliances
Video: Adding Appliances

includes a selection of toolbar buttons that
place objects from the Fixtures (Interior)
library. See Toggle Buttons on page 70.
The Fixtures (Interior) library category

contains a variety of interior fixtures such as
appliances, indoor stoves, fireplaces, HVAC,
surveillance cameras, and fire extinguishers.
Exterior Furnishing
and Appliances
The Furnishings (Exterior) library category
contains outdoor furniture such as benches,
swings, planters, tables, and chairs.
685
Libraries
Interior Fixtures
Interior Furnishings
and Appliances
The Furnishings (Interior) library category is
very large, containing a broad range of
furniture organized into directories.
There are three types of furniture objects:
A stand-alone object is placed and

moves like a base cabinet. Most furniture
objects are stand alone.
A table object, such as a table lamp or

portable TV, is placed on top of a table,
countertop, or other object.
Geometric Shapes
The Geometric Shapes library category contains cylinders, boxes, wedges, spheres,
cones, and other basic shapes that can be
resized and combined with many other
objects for a variety of applications.
686
A wall object attaches to the wall.
Hardware
Hardware
The Hardware library category contains
accessories that can be applied to doors and
drawers for commercial or residential use.
Image objects contain information and

attributes about the represented object. They
display in 3D views. See Picture Files vs.
Pictures and Image Objects on page 890.
Image objects are extremely important for
the appearance of rendered views and file
export. Images are bitmap files that represent
individual objects such as trees, flowers,

cars, or people. They are marked in floor
plan view with a 2D CAD block and are
visible in 3D views. When placed on a
terrain or terrain feature, the images are
placed at the correct elevation.
687
Libraries
Images
Line Styles
Video: CAD - Line Styles and Line
Weights
The Line Styles library contains line styles
that be applied to objects individually in their
specification dialogs or by layer in the
Layer Display Options dialog. See Line
Style Tab on page 851 and Layer Display
2.
Additional line styles can also be imported

into the library.
To import line styles
1.
Locate a line style and copy its file to a

convenient location on your hard drive.
These files have the extension .lin. Previous versions of Chief Architect used
the .dat format, which also works.
2.
Select File> Import> Line Style Definitions.
3.
Browse to the location where you saved

the .lin file.
4.
Click Open to add the line style to the

library.
You can also draw a line with a selected style

directly from the library or apply line styles
to the Select Library Object button.
includes a selection of toolbar buttons that
access line styles from the library. See
Toggle Buttons on page 70.
To draw a line style from the library
1.
Click and drag in a 2D view to produce a

CAD line with the selected style.
Select a line style in the selection pane

of the Library Browser.
Materials
Video: Storing Materials in the Library
The Materials library category contains
materials that display in 3D and raytrace
views.
Materials can be applied to objects directly
from the Library Browser. See Applying
Materials on page 708. Like other library
objects, once materials are used in a plan,
688
they are independent and can be edited

without changing the original material from
the library.
Materials can be used in plans without
existing in the Library Browser. They can be
added to the Library Browser individually or
all at once. See Managing Plan Materials
on page 706 and Converting Material
Millwork
Millwork
The Millwork library category contains
objects such as door surrounds, balusters,
newels, corbels, mantels and cupolas. These
objects can be applied to other objects in the
program such as railings, fences, and stair
brackets.
The Moldings and Profiles library category

contains a collection of molding, handrail,
curb and gutter profiles that can be applied to
a variety of objects. Molding is typically
applied to an object or room on the Moldings
tab of its specification dialog. See Moldings
Tab on page 302.
polyline. See Molding Polylines on page

541.
Molding profiles can also be extruded along

a path in floor plan view using a molding
Plants
The Plant library category consists primarily
of images of plants and trees. See Plant
In addition to images, the 3D Plants library
contains 3D plant symbols. See Plant
By default plants reside on their own layer.
See Layer Display Options Dialog on page
218.
689
Libraries
Sprinklers
The Sprinklers library category contains
different kinds of sprinklers that can be used
with the Sprinkler Tools
690
to detail
irrigation systems. See Sprinkler Tools on

page 594.
Terrain
The Terrain library category contains road
markings that can be used in parking lots,
crosswalks, etc. See The Terrain Library

on page 596.
Windows
The Windows library category contains
windows with custom muntin patterns as
well as windows with custom shapes.
These windows can be placed in a model just

like other windows and can be resized like
other library objects.
691
Libraries
Terrain
Manufacturers
When various manufacturers produce
libraries of their products for use in Chief
Architect, these libraries are available on the
Chief Architect website. When you

download and install these libraries, they
display under the Manufacturers category.

The Library Search button is found
in the Library Browser window and the
Select Library Object dialog. You can
also access the search by selecting Library>
Library Search.
Click the Library Search

button to open
the Library Search dialog.
Basic Search Tab
1
2
1 Enter text to be used for the search.
692
Substrings are not included. For example,

searching for the word cabinets does not
produce cabinet as a search result.

Searching for the word cabinet does
produce cabinets as a search result.
2 Click any of the items in the search
results area to find that item in the

Library Browser and select it for placement.
Use the arrow keys to scroll through the
search results.
Advanced Search Tab
Libraries
1
2
4
5
1 Search Text - Enter a word or words to
use in your search for a name in the

library.
Match Keyword - Check this box to match

the entered word with an objects search
attributes. See Search Attributes on page
694.
Match Entire Word - Check this box to

match the entire word or words with the
complete name of the object.
Include Folders - Check this box to include
folders in your search.
Match Case - Check this box to make your
search case-sensitive.
693
2 Search Categories - Check the box for
each category you want to include in

your search.
Select All - Click this button to select all of

the categories.
Clear All - Click this button to clear all of
the categories.
3 Check a style (or styles) to restrict the
search results to objects of that style. If

no styles are checked, search results will not
be restricted. See Search Attributes on
page 694.
4 Search - Click this button to begin

searching.
Close - Click this button to cancel the search

and close the Library Search dialog.
5 When the search is complete, the
results display here. Select a folder or

library object to open the Library Browser to
that item.
The Find Library Objects dialog
remembers the search information of
the last valid search whenever it is accessed
from the Library Browser, the main toolbar, or
the menu.
This dialog lists the keywords and styles

associated with the library object.
To associate keywords with unlocked library
objects
1.
Right click an unlocked object in the

library.
2.
Select Search Attributes from the contextual menu.
3.
Any search words already associated

with the object display in the list. Type
in any additional words.
4.
Click any styles you want to associate

with the object.
5.
Click OK to close the dialog and apply

your changes.
Search Attributes
Right-click an object in the tree view of the
Library Browser and select Search
Attributes from the contextual menu to open
the Search Attributes dialog.
You can use the search words find the

symbol using Match Keyword. See
If you selected styles, those styles can be
used when performing a Library Search. See
694
Once an object has been selected, the pointer

may change its appearance, indicating which
library category the object came from. For
example, select an object from the exterior
fixture library and the pointer changes to an
arbor.
To place an object selected from the Library
Browser into the model, click in a floor plan
or 3D view. You can continue to click and
place the selected library object until another
library object or tool is selected.
Once a library object has been placed, it can
be edited in a variety of ways. See Editing
Library Objects on page 698.
Some objects, such as moldings and cabinet
doors, can be applied through the
specification dialogs of their containing
objects. For example, to place a cabinet door
on a particular cabinet, select the cabinet,
open it for specification, and click the
Library button on the General tab. See
Select Library Object Dialog on page 679.
Place Library
Object Button
The Place Library Object button can
be added to your toolbar and used for
quick access and placement of frequently
used library items. See Adding Toolbar
Buttons on page 18.
Up to 100 Place Library Object
buttons
can be dragged onto the same toolbar, each
assigned a different object. See Place
Library Object Button on page 696.
Once a library object has been assigned,
click the button and then click in a view to
place the assigned object.

If you click on a molding profile in the
selection pane of the Library Browser the
program enters molding polyline mode,
allowing you to create a molding polyline
that can be used in floor plan view only. See
Materials
Materials on objects can be changed or added
whenever an object is open for specification.
The Materials tab of every specification
dialog allows you to access the Select
Material dialog and change the material.
You can also change materials on objects in
3D views using Material Painter. See
Material Painter on page 708 .
695
Libraries
Click on an object in the tree view or

selection pane of the Library Browser to
select it for placement. See The Library
Browser on page 670. Most libraries
contain 3D objects that can be selected from
the Library Browser and placed directly in a
2D or 3D view. A few libraries, such as
materials, contain objects that cannot.
Placement Restrictions
A library object comes with placement
restrictions based upon typical real-life
placement. Library windows, for example,
must be placed in a wall just like standard
windows, library doors must be placed in an
existing doorway, and some appliances must
be placed in cabinets.
Library symbols have placement restrictions
that are determined when the symbol is
created but can be changed later. See
Symbols vs. Native Objects on page 698
and Symbol Specification Dialog on page
945.
Most library objects require that there be
enough space to contain it, but some library
objects require special considerations. If
error messages display when placing library
symbols, they indicate where the object must
be placed.
Cabinet Doors must be placed within
existing cabinets. They cannot be free
standing.
Doors must be placed into a wall or

doorway. They can also replace a door that
has been placed in a wall.
Doorways must be placed into a wall.
Electrical objects from the library come with
a variety of placement restrictions. Some
objects, such as ceiling fans, track lighting,
and smoke detectors attach to the ceiling.
Others, like switches, outlets, and jacks,
mount on walls. Some electrical objects fit
under wall cabinets or directly on a floor.
If an Interior Fixture drops into the top or
front of a cabinet, you must have a cabinet
module large enough to contain it. If you
attempt to place a fixture into a cabinet
module that is too small, an error message
displays. Click OK, resize the cabinet to
accommodate the fixture, then place the
fixture in the cabinet again.
Objects from the Millwork library attach to
walls, doors, drawers and cabinets.
Library Windows must be placed into an
existing wall.
Place Library Object Button

Video: Building Toolbars to Place
Library Objects
The Place Library Object button can be
added to your toolbar and used for quick
access and placement of frequently used
library items.
696
If the Place Library Object

button has
not yet been assigned a library object, click it
once to open the Library Object Button
Double-click a Place Library Object
button that has been assigned a library object
to open the Library Object Button
object. See Select Library Object Dialog

on page 679.
1
2
2 When a library object has been
selected, assign a button icon. Choose

from two automatically generated button
icons or click Browse to browse your
computer for a different icon.
1 Click the Library button to open the
Libraries

assign a library object to the button. If a
library object has already been assigned,
click this button to assign a new library

All library objects except materials and
backdrops display in floor plan view. Library
objects are represented by 2D CAD blocks
that resemble the size and shape of the object
when viewed from above. To learn how to
change the 2D block that represents an
object, see 2D Block on page 932.
As with other architectural objects, the
display of library objects in floor plan view
Is controlled by layer in the Layer Display
Options dialog. Each library category has
its own layer. See Layer Display Options
Dialog on page 218.
the Furniture Schedule Specification

and Fixture Schedule Specification
dialogs. See Label Tab on page 1000.
All library objects except CAD blocks
display in 3D views. By default, images
rotate to face the camera in 3D views. For
information about turning off image rotation,
see Image Specification Dialog on page
897.
Terrain objects can be viewed in 3D only
when a terrain perimeter exists. See Terrain
Tools on page 584.
Library Fixtures and Furniture labels display

in floor plan view when the Cabinets, Labels
layer is set to show in the Layer Display
Options dialog. Label size is controlled in
697
Editing Library Objects

Library objects can be selected individually
or as a group, like other objects in Chief
Architect. For more information, see
Once selected, library objects can be edited
like box-based objects in a variety of ways
using dimensions, using the edit handles, and
the edit toolbar buttons. For more
information, see Editing Objects on page
79 and Editing Box-Based Objects on page
111
Symbols vs. Native Objects

A symbol is an object that is based on a 3D
.dxf, .dwg, .obj, or .3ds file that has been
imported into Chief Architect.
Native objects are those placed into the plan
using Chief Architects standard tools, such
as Hinged Doors
, and Cabinets
.
Native objects do not have a 3D .dxf, .dwg,
.obj, or .3ds file associated with them and
are not symbols.
Remove Manufacturer Lock

Manufacturer symbols are limited in
the ways that they can be edited. After
such a symbols is placed in a plan, select it
and click the Remove Manufacturer Lock
edit button to remove the manufacturer data
so that it can be edited like other symbols.
Deleting Built-in Fixtures

and Appliances
A fixture installed into the front of a cabinet
becomes a cabinet face item, like a door or
698
drawer. It can be resized or deleted like other

face items in the Cabinet Specification
dialog. See Front Tab on page 569.
Using Edit Handles

Most library symbols can be edited like CAD
boxes. See Editing Box-Based Objects on
page 111. Depending on the type of view and
the surface selected, the edit handles a
symbol displays will vary.
To resize Fixtures and Furniture, you must
check Fixture/Furniture Resize Enabled in
the Plan Defaults dialog. When this option
is checked, these library objects have edit
handles when selected and can be resized
like other objects. See Plan Defaults on
page 180.
When a furnishing or fixture symbol is
selected in floor plan view or on the top
surface in a 3D view, up to ten edit handles
display. They are the Move handle at the
center, the Rotate handle just outside the
cabinet front (indicated by a V) and a Resize
handle on each edge and at each corner.
When a symbol is selected on a side in a
cross section/elevation or 3D view, it
displays five edit handles: the Move handle
and a Resize handle on each edge.
Symbols cannot be concentrically resized,
even when the Concentric edit behavior is
enabled. See Edit Behaviors on page 86.
The labels of library cabinets, electrical,
furnishings and fixtures, when displayed,
have a separate Move edit handle that
displays when the object is selected.
Fixtures and furniture placed in a plan are

subject to bumping/pushing behavior when
moved. See Bumping/Pushing on page

124.

Library objects are counted in the Materials
List. The Materials List does not reflect any
changes to the size or materials of any fixture
or furniture object. It lists the library object
as well as any comments added to the

Components dialog for a library object.
See Components on page 678.

name of the dialog is determined by the type
of object currently opened for specification.
For example, selecting a library object from
the Furniture (Exterior) library category and
clicking the Open Object
edit button
opens the Furniture Specification
dialog.
General Tab
1
2
4
3
699
Libraries
The Fixture Specification; Furniture

Specification; Geometric Shapes
Specification; Hardware
Specification; and Millwork
Specification dialogs all display the same
options and are referred to as the Library
Object Specification dialogs. The actual
1 Name - Displays the name of the

selected object.
2 Specification - Define size and height

above the floor of the object.
Height - Enter the height for the object.

Width - Enter the width of the object.
Floor to Bottom - Enter the distance from

the floor to the bottom of the object. A value
of zero makes the object rest on the floor.
Follow Terrain - Check this box if you want
the object to follow the surface of the terrain
when it is placed outside a building.
3 Reset - Click to reset to the original,

unmodified size.
Depth - Enter the depth of the object.

Saving a symbol that has been resized
in both the Fixture Specification
dialog and the Symbol Specification
dialog to the library may result in inconsistent
symbol properties. Symbols should be
resized in one or the other, not both.
4 A preview of the library object displays

here and updates with changes.
5 Show Color - Check this box to display

the preview of the object in full color.
Options Tab
1 Reverse Symbol - Select the check box
to reverse the library object. This turns

a right-hand refrigerator into a left-hand
refrigerator, etc.
700
Fill Tab
Layer Tab
Label Tab
Materials Tab
701
702
Chapter 25:
Materials
Chapter Overview
The objects used in Chief Architect have a

variety of 3D properties. These objects walls, windows, doors, cabinets, roof planes,
lot perimeters etc. - can have materials
assigned to them so that they look realistic in
3D views. These materials can also be used
to generate materials lists that can help with
cost estimations.
Designing with objects that look correct in
3D and calculate properly in a material list
requires that you use realistic material
definitions and apply them appropriately to
objects in your plan.
Chief Architect comes with many materials
that are ready for use. From siding, roofing,
flooring, masonry, tile, and paneling, to road
surfaces, grass, water, and wood materials,
Chief Architect has materials for every
application, inside and out. If you cannot find
a material that suits your needs, you can
customize the materials provided or create

your own.
Learning how to create, manage, apply, and
edit materials saves time and adds that
professional touch to your designs.
Redefining only the visual properties of
a material may create unexpected
results. For example, changing the image of
a brick material to represent siding does not
cause the material to be considered as siding
during material calculations.
Chapter Contents
Creating Materials
Mapping Patterns and Textures
Managing Plan Materials
Applying Materials
Viewing Materials
Materials Tab
Editing Materials
Define Material Dialog
Material Defaults Dialog
Color Chooser Dialog
703
Materials

Video: Materials
Creating Materials
Introductory Training Video: Creating
Materials and Colors
Chief Architect comes with many materials
that are ready for use. They are found in the
Materials category of the Library Browser. If
you cannot find a suitable material, you can
edit an existing material or create a new
material. See Editing Materials on page
711.
Once you have a suitable material, it can be
applied to objects. See Applying Materials
on page 708.
Note: Adding a material to a plan is not the
same as adding it to the library. If you want a
new material to be available for use in other
plans, add it to the library.
From the Library Browser

A material can be created from and added
directly to the Library Browser, making it
available for use in other plans. See The
In the directory pane of the Library Browser,
select an unlocked folder or sub-folder in the
Materials category and select Library>
New> Material
. Or, right-click on the
folder and select New> Material

the contextual menu.
from
In the Define Material dialog, you can

create a new material in the selected
unlocked folder. See Define Material
Dialog on page 712.
Using Paste Image

You can create a new material by first
copying an image that will serve as its
texture to the Windows Clipboard, then
navigating to a Chief Architect window and
selecting Edit> Paste> Paste from the menu.
See Paste on page 137.
You can also use the Screen Capture tools to
create a new material texture and add it to the
library. See Creating Screen Captures on
page 900.
Converting
Textures to Materials
An entire folder of textures can be
converted into a library of materials.
When converted, the folder of materials
assumes the same file structure in the
Materials category of the Library Browser.
Select 3D> Materials> Convert Texture to
Materials
and then browse to a folder of
textures on your computer.
Converting
Material.dat files
Material.dat files, which were used in prior
versions of Chief Architect, can be converted
to materials and saved directly to the Library
Browser by selecting 3D> Materials>
Convert Material Definition (.dat) Files.
Converting Material
Template Plans
Select 3D> Materials> Create Plan
Materials Library to create a library
704
of materials based on the materials used in

the current plan. This is useful for converting
material template plans, a common way to
store material definitions in prior versions of
Chief Architect, into a materials library. This
command creates a new library in the

Materials category using the same name as
the plan. Adding materials to the library
individually allows you to store the material
within the existing directory structure.
Patterns are composed of CAD lines and

a fill style and are visible in Vector
Views
733.
. See Vector Views on page
Textures are created using special image

files that tile seamlessly when applied to
surfaces and are seen in Raytrace
and Render Views
. See Render
Views on page 763 and Raytracing on
page 787.
Patterns and textures are assigned origins,

which determine where the pattern or texture
begins on an X/Y axis. By default, this origin
is 0,0.
Depending on the placement of a particular
object relative to this origin, a material
applied to it may not look right in 3D. You
can address this by specifying a new origin
for the materials pattern and/or texture.
The origin for patterns can be set on the
Pattern tab of the Define Material dialog.
The origin for textures can be set on the
Texture tab of the Define Material dialog.
A texture or pattern origin is a property of the
material and not of the object the material is
assigned to. When an object is moved, the

pattern or texture maintains its absolute
position and may not look right. It is a good
idea to assign pattern or texture origins only
after the position of the object has been
finalized.
If you have multiple objects using the
same material, they all share the same
origin. Duplicate materials can be created if
you want different origins specified for the
same texture or pattern.
Determining the Origin

Before a new origin can be specified, the
display of coordinates in the status bar
should be enabled. See The Status Bar on
page 8.
To determine origin coordinates on the
horizontal plane, place your cursor over the
origin location in floor plan view. When the
pointer is in the position you want to
establish as the material origin, take note of
the coordinates that display in the Status Bar.
To determine origin coordinates on the
vertical plane, place your cursor over the
origin location in a cross section/elevation
view.
Once you have taken note of the new origin
coordinates, enter them on either the Pattern
or Texture tab of the Define Material
705
Materials
In Chief Architect, materials have two

attributes that determine what they look like
in 3D views: patterns and textures.
dialog. See Pattern Tab on page 717 and

Texture Tab on page 718.
The pointers current coordinates display in the status bar

All materials that come with Chief Architect are stored in the Library Browser.
You can also create your own materials and
save them in the Library Browser. The Library
Browser offers complete material editing
capabilities. See Editing Materials on page
711.
706
Use the Plan Materials dialog to

manage only those materials that are
used in the current plan. To access the Plan
Materials dialog, select 3D> Materials>
Plan Materials
Plan Materials Dialog
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select a material to preview it to the
right.
If an X displays in the In Use column, the
material is used by an object in your plan or
is defined as a default material for one or
more objects in your plan.
2 Click OK to close the dialog and save

any changes, Cancel to delete any
changes made during this session in the
dialog and return to the current view, or Help
for more information about materials.
3 Edit opens the Define Material
dialog for the selected material.
New opens the Define Material

dialog to create a new material.
5 Copy creates a copy of the selected
material and opens the Define

Material dialog where you can make
changes to the copied material.
6 Purge removes unused materials from

your plan.
7 Delete removes a material from the list
of plan materials. If the material is used

in the model, you cannot delete it.
8 Click Add to Library to add the
selected material to the Library

Browser, making it available for use in other
plans. See Adding to the Library on page
674.
The preview window on top shows how the
material appears in vector and cross section
views.
The bottom preview shows how the texture
appears in render views. If the words No
Texture display, either a texture has not
been assigned to the material or the texture
file could not be found on your system. In
either case, the material displays in render
views as a solid color.
707
Materials
1 This is the list of materials in your plan.
Applying Materials
Introductory Training Video: Applying
Materials, Colors and Textures
Materials are stored in the Materials library
in the Library Browser. They can be applied
to objects in a variety of ways.
Object Specification Dialog

Select an object (or a group of similar
To use the Material Painter tool

1.
Painter
and select the desired Material Painter Mode from the submenu.
2.
From the Library Browser

Materials can be applied directly from the
library in 3D Views. Select a material from
the Library Browser and notice that the
Select 3D> Materials> Material

Painter> Material Painter
3.
objects) and click the Open Object

edit
button to open the specification dialog for
that object. On the Material tab you can
specify material assignments for the
components that make up that object. When
a material has been assigned, its appearance
updates in the preview. See Materials Tab
on page 710.
4.
Select a material from the Select
Library Object dialog.
Click on the surface of an object with

the pointer to apply that material. The
selected material is applied to surfaces
in the model based on the active Material Painter Mode.
There are five Material Painter Modes. Each

mode specifies how broadly or narrowly the
selected material will be applied to surfaces
in your plan. A check displays next to the
active mode in the submenu.
pointer changes (
) to indicate that the
selected material is ready to be applied to an
object using the Material Painter
cation method.
appli-
Material Painter
Video: Changing Materials in 3D Views
Painter to apply materials to surfaces
in 3D views.
708
The Material Painter Component

Mode
is the default mode. This
applies the selected material to an object
component. Using this tool is the same as
opening an object for specification and
changing the material for one of its components on the Materials tab. See Materials Tab on page 710.
Viewing Materials
The Material Painter Object Mode

applies a material to all components of an
object.
The Material Painter Room Mode

applies a material to all the objects in the
room that currently have the same material. For example, if you apply a material
to a dining room chair, this mode applies
the material to all other objects in the
room with the same original material,
such as other chairs and the dining table.
The Material Painter Floor Mode

applies the selected material to all surfaces on the floor that currently have the
same material. For example, if you apply
a material to the kitchen countertops
using this mode, the bathroom countertops on the same floor also have the
material applied.
The Material Painter Plan Mode
applies the selected material to all surfaces in the entire plan that currently have
the same material. For example, if you
have the same carpet on all floors in a
plan, applying a selected material while

this mode is active will change all carpet
on all floors.
When you apply a material to a wall
using the Material Painter, the material
is applied to the entire room - not the individual wall. This rule applies to exterior wall surfaces, as well. See The Exterior Room on
page 284.
Material Eyedropper
The Material Eyedropper tool allows
you to load the material assigned to an
existing object and apply that material to
other objects.
In a 3D view, select 3D> Materials> Material Eyedropper
and then click on the
surface of an object to load its material
assignment. The pointer then changes (
)
to indicate that the material is ready to be
applied to another object using the Material
Painter
tool. You can continue to apply
the material to the surfaces of other objects.
Viewing Materials
Textures do not display in Vector Views. See
Vector View Tools on page 734. Textures
do display in Render Views and Raytrace
views. See Render View Tools on page
764.
If you recieve an error message when
creating render views, your plan might
contain two textures of the same name or
textures that did not originally come with the
program.
To resolve this, find the original texture file

named in the error message and copy it
(while recreating its path) into the Old
Textures folder. The next time Chief
709
Materials
Architect is opened, it will find the missing

file and correctly show the texture.
Materials Tab
The specification dialogs for most objects
include a Materials tab. The Materials tab is
where materials are assigned to the selected

object and components.
The Materials tab shown above is used to

assign materials to an object. The tree on the
left lists the components of the selected
object that can be assigned materials. Some
objects may only have a single component
while more complex objects may have many.
Some components contain additional subcomponents. The contained items display
separately in the components tree.
710
1 Select a component in the tree to assign

a new material to it.
2 The two boxes on the right display the
color, pattern and the texture of the

material that has been assigned to the
selected component. If No Texture
displays in the preview window, either the
material has no texture assigned or the
texture file could not be found on the system.
Editing Materials
3 Click Library Material to open the

Select Library Object dialog.
Select a material and click OK to assign that

material to the selected component. See
Select Library Object Dialog on page 679.
Click Plan Material to open the Plan

Material dialog and select a material from
those already used in your plan. See
Managing Plan Materials on page 706.
Select OK to close the dialog and return to
the active view.
Editing Materials
When a material is applied to an object in a

plan from the library, a copy of that material
is made and saved with the plan. If you
access the Define Material dialog through
a menu or object specification dialog, your
edits affect that material wherever it is found
within that plan. Other objects in that plan
that use that material are also affected, but
objects outside the current plan are not.
Plan Materials
Click the Plan Materials
button to open
the Plan Material dialog for the current
plan. Select a material and click the Edit,
Copy, or New button to open the Define
Material dialog. You can add a newly
defined material to the library from the Plan
Material dialog by selecting it and clicking
the Add to Library button. See Plan
Materials Dialog on page 707.
Adjust Material Definition

This tool is useful for changing plan
materials directly from a 3D view.
Click the Adjust Material Definition
button and then click any surface in a 3D
or render view to modify the material currently assigned to that surface in the Define
Material dialog. Changing the material definition with this tool affects all objects in the
current plan that are using that material.
Library Browser
Select a material from an unlocked library in
the directory view of the Library Browser
and select Library> Open to open the
Define Material dialog for that material.
You can also right-click a material in the
Library Browser and select Open from the
contextual menu to open the Define
Material dialog.
711
Materials
If you cannot find a material that suits your

needs, you can create a new material or edit
an existing one. Applying a different material
to an object is not the same as editing an
existing material. See Applying Materials
on page 708.
Using the contextual menu

Select a material from the Plan Materials
dialog and click Edit, New, or Copy to open
the Define Material dialog for that
material. The Define Material dialog can
also be accessed by right-clicking on any
material located in an unlocked library in the
Library Browser and selecting Open... from
the contextual menu or Library> Open....
712
You can also create a new material from

scratch by selecting 3D> Materials> Create
Material...
If you select a manufacturers material, the
Define Material dialog displays
differently. Some options are not available

and the tabs may vary.
General Tab
1
2
3
4
1 The name of the material displays here.
In this field you can redefine the name

of the material. If you rename the material, it
does not create a new material; it redefines
the existing material.
2 Material Color - The current color of
the material. This color displays in 3D

views and in render views if no texture has
been selected. Click the color box to open the
Windows Color dialog and select a new
color. See Color Chooser Dialog on page
722.
3 Line Color - The color of the pattern
views. See Color Chooser Dialog on page

722.
4 Shading Contrast - Use the slider bar
or text field to specify the amount of

contrast between surfaces at different angles
to each other in 3D views. The farther to the
right the slide bar is set or higher the contrast
value, the more contrast you see. This setting
has no effect on render views.
The following is a picture showing the same
curved wall view with three different
contrasts (combined using a separate
graphics program). Notice how the lowest
contrast at the top appears almost flat, while
the highest contrast on the bottom is sharp.
lines displays here. Click in the box to

open the Color dialog and to select a new
line color. Lines are only used with patterns
in vector views and are not used in render
713
Materials
The information on the General tab varies

from one material to the next.
Low Contrast
Normal
Contrast
High
Contrast
Length - Define a length dimension for the

pattern. This value typically refers to the
Pattern across the screen view.
Thickness - Specify a thickness for a
material such as Tile. This information does
not typically effect the display of the material
but is used for material list calculations.
Depth - Specify a depth for the material such
as brick. This information does not typically
effect the display of the material but is used
for material list calculations.
Size - Some patterns are defined by relative
size. Enter a number here. The number does
not have any units, it is more like a scaling
factor.
5 This area displays a preview of how the

material looks in vector views. It
updates as you change the material
definition.
6 Type - This is the list of material types
Mortar Width - Enter a value for the mortar

joints in a brick or block pattern. This does
not draw the mortar any wider, but the
information is used by the program when
counting pieces of bricks or block.
7 Depending on the Type selected,
Overlap amt - Enter the amount the material

overlaps itself, such as lap siding.
defined by the program. Some types are

associated with patterns. A Type defines
how a material is calculated in the Material
List. See Types on page 715.
several additional edit boxes may
display in the dialog.
Height - Define a height dimension for the
material. This value may be restricted to a
ratio of another dimension. When applied to
a strip or siding pattern, this number
represents the width of the material.
Note: the Height - Overlap Amount =
Exposure of the material.
714
Joint Width - Enter a value for joint width

between pieces of the material. This does not
draw the joint any wider, but the information
is used by the program when counting pieces
of tile or brick.
Note: the Height - Overlap Amount =

Exposure of the material.
Pattern Angle - Certain patterns may be
rotated to a different orientation.
Line Weight - Specify the desired line
weight for pattern lines in vector views.
Grouping - With a Strip type, grouping is
used to describe the repeat of the pattern
across the width of the material. i.e. A 13"
wide siding with an overlap amount of 1"
DXF Code - This field holds up to five

characters that appear at the end of the layer
names used when exporting a 3D DXF file.
Types
Every material is classified by Type. The
Type defines how the material is calculated
in the Material List. Some Types are
associated with patterns but not every Type is
associated with a 3D pattern. Not every Type
is calculated in the Material List.
Following are the available Types and their
characteristics:
Framing - These types are used by the
program to estimate stick framing quantities
if they are applied to the main layer of a wall
layer definition.
Brick - Displays a typical brick course
pattern. The height and length of the brick
can be specified. This can be specified for
anything using this type of layout, including
plywood with staggered joints. The Material
List calculates the number of bricks (by
height and length) that fit on the total surface
area of the defined object. For a wall, the
surface area is used. For a full masonry wall
with two layers of brick, be sure to define the
wall as having two layers to get the right
count. You can define the mortar width that
enables the program to do an accurate count
of bricks.
Strip - Shows a parallel line pattern in 3D
views. The height, separation of the lines,
and the angle can be specified. The Material
List calculates lineal footage based on the
height of the strip and the surface area
covered. Overlap is subtracted from the

height to get the exposure of the material.
Grouping can be used to model a material
that has a repeating pattern across its width.
Sheet - Sheets do not show a pattern. If a
sheet material is applied to a wall or floor
surface, the Material List calculates the
number of sheets needed. If a sheet material
is applied to a library object such as chair, the
Material List does not calculate it.
Gap - This does not show a pattern. Specify
gap to a material to create an Air Gap
between materials as in the case of a wall
layer definition. This would be the same as
defining no material at all. This does not go
to the Material List.
Area - This does not generate a pattern. The
Material List calculates surface area. In the
case of walls it is the area of the vertical
surfaces.
Volume - This does not generate a pattern.
The Material List calculates cubic feet.
Concrete - This does not generate a pattern.
The Material List calculates cubic yards or
cubic meters. When you apply this to a floor
platform, the thickness is defined as four
inches, by default.
Tile - This produces a grid-like tile pattern.
The Material List calculates the number of
units based on the total surface area, exactly
as for bricks.
Shingles - This produces a pattern similar to
the brick pattern, but you are able to define
an overlap amount. The Material List
calculates the number of shingles required to
cover the surface area.
715
Materials
and a grouping of 3 calculates materials

based on a 12" coverage and a repeat line
pattern of 4".
Flooring - This does not produce a pattern.

The Material List calculates the total surface
area.
Shakes - This produces a pattern to represent
wood shingles. The Material List calculates
the number of shingles required to cover the
surface area.
Herringbone - This produces a herringbone
pattern. Height and width are restricted to a
2:1 ratio. The Material List calculates the
number of units required to cover the surface
area.
Octagon - This produces a tile pattern of
octagons and small squares. The size
specified is the size of the small squares
between the octagons. The octagon resizes
proportionally. The Material List calculates
the number of square and octagonal tiles
required to complete the pattern.
Hexagon - This produces a hexagon pattern.
The Material List calculates the number of
units required to cover the area of the object.
716
Parquet - This produces a parquet wood

floor pattern of small squares. The Material
List calculates the required number of
parquet units.
Textured - This produces a pattern similar to
stucco. The density or frequency of the dots
is definable. The Material List does not
calculate this material Type.
Earth - This produces a 2D hatch that
represents earth in cross section view. The
Material List does not calculate this material
Type.
Stars - This produces a star pattern. The
Material List does not calculate this material
Type.
Custom - If you select a pattern type from a
PAT file, the material is automatically
defined as Custom regardless of the pattern
style. Custom materials are calculated in the
Materials List as area.
Pattern Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 The name of the material displays in

this field.
2 This is a preview of the material as it
appears in a vector view. The pattern is

not used in render views. The preview
updates as changes are made.
3 Pattern Type - Select a Chief Architect
pattern from the pull down list. The

Pattern Type defines how the material is
calculated in the Material List. Only Chief
Architect Pattern Types are figured in the
Material List. If a .pat file is defined, the

pattern type is listed as Custom.
4 Pattern File - The name of the current

pattern file is shown here.
Click Browse to select a Pattern File that has
not been defined by Chief Architect. Pattern
files (files with a .pat extension) can come
from a variety of sources and can be saved on
your hard drive. Once you have selected a
pattern file, use the Entries drop-down list to
pick a hatch pattern from the file.
5 Entries - Pattern files are text files that
define more than one hatch pattern.

Individual patterns are defined with names
that appear in the Entries list. Use the dropdown list to select an entry from the pattern
file. The selected pattern displays in the
preview window.
717
Materials
2D surface patterns can be used as a visual

tool in vector views. When a cross section/
elevation view or overview is generated, the
pattern helps define what material is used.
Patterns that are associated with Types are
used by the program to generate accurate
take-off quantities for the Material List.
Patterns are not used in render views.
6 Scale - Rescale the pattern if necessary.
If the pattern displays as black, the

pattern repeats too often and the number in
this field should be increased.
7 Origin - Enter coordinates to specify
where the pattern begins in vector

views. See Mapping Patterns and Textures
on page 705.
Texture Tab
1
2
3
5
4
6
Textures applied to materials affect how a

material appears in render view.
Transparency information contained on the
alpha channel of a texture is used in render
view. Textures do not show up in any other
3D view and do not affect the Material List.
1 The name of the selected material
displays, and can be renamed here if

desired. Renaming a material does not create
a new material; it just changes the name of an
existing material.
2 The selected texture displays here.

3 Texture File - Displays the path and
file name of the selected texture.
718
Click the Browse button to select a texture

for the material. This accesses the Textures
folder.
4 Ratio - Adjust the ratio or scaling of the
selected texture. The values are in

inches (or mm).
In this example, the bitmap shown is mapped

to a 48 x 48 area.
If the surface rendered is larger than this
ratio, the surface has tiles that are 48 x
48 of the assigned bitmap. If it is smaller,
only a portion of the texture is shown.
Select the Stretch to Fit check box to stretch

the texture image to cover each surface it is
applied to.
Note: Changing the scale or selecting Stretch
to Fit can cause textures to appear distorted if
they are mapped to a surface using a different aspect ratio than they were originally created with.
5 Set a new Origin, if needed, so the
texture displays correctly on surfaces in

render views. See Mapping Patterns and
Textures on page 705.
6 Rotate Angle - Specify how the texture

is rotated on the surface.
7 Set Color Using Texture - Selects a
color to represent the material in vector

views. The program averages the color of all
pixels.
Render Tab
1
2
3
4
Materials
The Render tab controls how the material

displays in render views. The preview
window displays the material as it is
rendered on a panel that is approximately 3
x 6. As any of the render properties are
changed, the preview updates to show how
the new material looks in a render view.
2 Use the radio buttons to select the
Simple or Advanced editing options.

The Simple options display on this tab and
the Advanced options, below.
3 Brightness - Controls how bright the
material appears. It can be used to get

the desired appearance relative to other
materials.
719
4 Shininess - Controls the sheen of the
material when it is rendered with a

point or spot light source on it. Shiny
materials appear to have a bright white spot
that simulates reflection of light.
5 Transparency - Controls the opacity of
the material. Most materials are set to

Opaque, but Partial can be used to simulate a
glass surface that you can see through.
Render Tab - Advanced
1
2
3
4
5
6
Advanced options provide more control over
the appearance of the rendered material. If
you change any Advanced value, the Render tab displays the Advanced options when
you edit that material. You can always
change back to the Simple settings.
You can adjust settings using the slide bar, or
by entering a value in the edit box.
The Ambient and Diffuse settings are used
together to modify a materials brightness.
1 Ambient - Controls how bright the
material appears when only ambient

light is present.
2 Diffuse - Controls how bright the
material appears when illuminated by a

light source.
720
The Specular and Shininess settings are used

together to modify a materials shininess.
3 Specular - Controls how bright the
material appears when illuminated by a

positional light source. It simulates the
reflection of light off a surface.
4 Shininess - Controls how shiny the
surface appears when illuminated by a

positional light source. It must be used
together with the specular value to simulate
light being reflected from a surface. Adjust
the shininess value to control the size of the
reflected highlight on a surface.
5 Emissive - Controls how bright a
material appears without regard to the

lighting of the current scene. It can be used to
simulate surfaces that are glowing with their
own light, such as the glass on a light fixture.
6 Transp - Controls the transparency
range from completely opaque to

completely transparent.
You should note that the material Render

Properties are dependent on the Render
settings in the Preferences dialog and the
lights that have been placed in the model.
To get proper lighting effects on an object,
use at least one point or spot light. For these
highlights to appear on large flat surfaces,
select the Use Triangles option on the Render panel of the Preferences dialog.
Raytrace Tab
For information about the Raytrace tab, see
Raytrace Tab on page 791.
Manufacturer Tab
If you select a manufacturers material from
a locked library, the Manufactuers tab is
available in the Define Material dialog.
This tab lists information on the
manufacturer and how to contact them.

selecting Edit> Default Settings
.
Expand the Materials category in the tree
view, select General Materials, and click
the Edit... button to display the Material
Defaults dialog.
dialogs of objects throughout the program.

Select an item from the list on the left. Click
the Library Material button or either of the
preview boxes to open the Select Library
Object dialog, or click the Plan Material
button to open the Plan Material dialog.
Not every object has default materials
defined before being placed in a plan. For
example, stairs do not have a default setup
and so do not have default materials. Specify
the materials for the stair components in the
Material Defaults dialog.
Once you create a stairway, you can open the
Stair Specification dialog and change its
materials.
This dialog functions similarly to the

Material tabs found on the specification
721
Materials
Color Chooser Dialog

Introductory Training Video: Color
Chooser
The Color Chooser dialog is opened by

selecting Tools> Color Chooser
or by
clicking on the color bar that can be found in
many dialogs throughout the program.
3
4
5
6
7
1 Click in any one of the Base colors

boxes to select it as the new color.
2 Click in one of the Custom colors
boxes to define which box will contain

the new custom color to be defined.
3 Click and drag in the color palette area

to dynamically choose a color.
4 Adjust the lightness or darkness of the

selected color.
722
5 Drag the Color Chooser eyedropper to
locate the color and release the mouse

button to select it.
6 Click Create Material to add the color
to the library under My Materials. The

name Custom Color is followed by the
RGB values of the color.
7 Click Add to Custom Colors to add
the color to the Custom Colors palette.
Chapter 26:
Zoom & View Tools
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Navigating in 2D
Use the Zoom tools to position the view. To
work on a specific area, you may need to
zoom in so that the entire screen is filled by
only a single room. At other times you may
need to view the entire plan.
There are also a number of ways to pan
across the screen, shifting the visible part of
the plan slightly while still maintaining the
same zoom factor.
Chapter Contents
Zoom Tools
Undo Zoom
Fill Window
Panning the Display
Window Menu Tools
Cascade
Tiling Views
Arrange Icons
Swapping Views
Aerial View
Closing Views
Zoom
Tools
Multiple views of one or more open files can

be arranged and managed using the view
tools.
Zoom Tools
Zoom is used to magnify any given
area on the plan or 3D view. Select
Window> Zoom
, then click and drag a
marquee around an area on screen. When
you release the mouse, the selected area

expands to fill the screen. When the zoom is
complete, whatever tool was active prior to
selecting the Zoom
tool automatically
723
becomes active again. If another zoom is

needed, click the Zoom
tool again.
Pan Window - Move the display without changing the zoom factor.
Zooming With the

Mouse Wheel
Zoom In - Click to zoom in to the

screen center by a factor of two.
Zoom Out - Click to zoom out from
the screen center by a factor of two.
Undo Zoom - Reverse the last zoom
operation.
Fill Window - Fits all visible items on
screen.
Fill Window Building Only - Fits all
visible items, except the terrain perimeter, on screen.
Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and

out in plan and 3D views. Scrolling
the mouse wheel one click up or
down zooms in or out, centering on the
location of your pointer and changing the
zoom by about 10%.
Note: Depending on the configuration of your
mouse, it may be necessary to hold down the
Ctrl key while turning the mouse wheel. If
zooming in and out are not working correctly,
then please contact the manufacturer of your
mouse and mouse driver for their assistance.
Undo Zoom
Select Window> Undo Zoom to
reverse the last zoom operation.
Zoom
and Undo Zoom
are also
available through the contextual menu.
Note: Undo and Redo do not affect zoom.
Fill Window
Select Window> Fill Window or press
the F6 key to view everything on
screen that is visible. If you are zoomed in so
close that only a portion of the view displays
on screen, selecting Fill Window
zooms
out so that the entire view fits on the screen.
If you are zoomed out so far that the entire
view is smaller than the screen, selecting
Fill Window
zooms in until the entire
view fills the screen.
724
When the drawing sheet is shown, Fill

Window
zooms to the sheet borders.
Fill Window Building Only

Window> Fill Window Building
Only is similar to Fill Window, but
zooms in or out to fill the current window
with the entire building while ignoring the
Panning the Display
terrain perimeter. Fill Window Building

Only
zooms to the edges of the drawing
sheet if it is shown.
Panning the Display

There are four ways to pan the display
without changing the zoom factor.
arrows on the scroll bar. They shift the

display according to the number of inches
defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Using the Scroll Bars

One method is to use the scroll bars on the
right and bottom edges of the window.
Using the Mouse

If you have a wheel mouse, you can pan the
display by pressing the middle mouse button,
or wheel, and moving the mouse in the
direction you would like to pan.
Mouse drivers sometimes have other
functions assigned to the wheel and buttons.
These override the Chief Architect setting.
Drag the square button in the bar itself in

order to pan a larger distance.
Click the end arrow keys on the scroll

bars to shift the display in 12" increments.
Using the Pan Window Tool

The Pan Window
tool works much like
the mouse wheel method.
The 12" increment is defined in the Plan

Defaults dialog under Inches Scrolled
by Arrow Key. See Plan Defaults on
page 180.
The
pointer changes to a hand

icon. Click
and drag in floor plan view to pan the
window. The command is invoked once
and the program reverts to the previously
active tool.
Using the Arrow Keys

In floor plan view, the arrow keys on the
keyboard work exactly like clicking the
Select Window> Pan Window
Double click the Pan Window

tool
and the command remains active.
Window Menu Tools

Video: Displaying Multiple Views
Select Window to access the Window

tools.
725
Zoom
Tools
Note: The Window Menu Tool button does

not display on the toolbar by default but it
can be added. See Toolbar Customization Dialog on page 18.
Click Window> Cascade

to cascade all
open views. See Cascade on page 726.
Select Window> Tile Horizontally
Click Window> Next Window

to
switch to the next open view. See Swapping
Views on page 729.
Select Window> Previous Window
switch to the previous open view. See
Swapping Views on page 729.
to
or
Tile Vertically
to tile all open views. See
Tiling Views on page 727.
Choose Window> Arrange Icons
to
arrange all open views that are currently
Cascade
Select Window> Cascade to cascade
all open views. Click any visible edge
to activate that window.
726
minimized. See Arrange Icons on page

728.
Click Window> Aerial View

to open
the aerial view window. See Aerial View
on page 729.
Tiling Views
Tiling Views
Introductory Training Video: Tiling 2D
and 3D Views
The window tiling options allow you to
display multiple views side by side in the
Client Viewer window.
you make are reflected in the camera view as

well.
To end window tiling, click the Maximize
button in the upper right corner of any open
view.
Select Window> Tile Horizontally

display both views in a horizontal
orientation.
Zoom
Tools
Select Window> Tile Vertically

or press
Shift + F6 on the keyboard to display both
views in a vertical orientation.
to
To activate a view, click the title bar or

anywhere in the view. Note that any changes
727
Tiling is useful for copying objects, details,

or architectural symbols from one plan to
another. Select the object(s) to be copied,
click the Copy

edit button, activate
another view, and select Paste or Ctrl + V.
Arrange Icons
Arrange Icons is a Windows function
used when several active windows
have been minimized. Select Window>
Arrange Icons to align the minimized title
728
bars in a row at the bottom of the working

desktop. You can then click the minimized
title bars to reactivate them or use them for
swapping and closing views.
Swapping Views
Swapping Views
The Swap Views

button toggles
between the current view and the view
that was current before it.
Select Window> Swap Views

or
press F7 to switch between the two most
recent views.
Press the Ctrl + Tab keys to cycle through

all open views.
Select Window> Next Window
or
Window> Previous Window

to
cycle through all open views in the order
you prefer.
A list of all the views currently open is

located at the bottom of the Window
menu. Each view is identified by its name
and what type of view it is. Select one to
go directly to that view.
Aerial View
Video: Zooming, Panning and Using
the Aerial View
In floor plan view, select Window>

Aerial View to open the Aerial View
window.
729
Zoom
Tools
There are several ways to swap views.
Aerial View facilitates zooming and panning

of the floor plan view window by showing
everything on the current floor and a
marquee indicating the portion currently
visible in the floor plan view window.
As you pan around the floor plan view

window or zoom in or out, the marquee in
Aerial View moves and resizes to reflect
these changes.
The grey border that displays in the aerial view window represents the extent of the floor plan view.
The Aerial View window is initially docked

on the right side of the window, but it can be
moved to any other edge or allowed to float
while pressing the Ctrl key. The Aerial View
always displays the entire plan, so it has no
scroll bars or maximize button. It always
maintains its position on top of other
windows.
730
The aerial view window can be moved

and resized.
The grey marquee that displays in the

aerial view window represents the extent
of the floor plan view. The grey marquee
updates if you zoom or pan in floor plan
view.
Closing Views
Use the left mouse button to drag a new

marquee within the aerial view window.
The floor plan view updates to match.
Use the right mouse button to pan the

existing marquee within the aerial view
window. The floor plan view updates to
match.
No matter what tool is active, when you

move the pointer to the aerial view window and drag a marquee, the floor plan
view zooms in on that area.
The display of objects in the aerial view

is controlled by the default layer set for
aerial views. Since the primary purpose
of aerial views is to enhance navigation
of plan views, you may want to turn off
any layers that clutter and slow down the
aerial view window. See Layer Set
Defaults Dialog on page 225. To change
the display of objects in this layer set, see
Layer Sets on page 216.
Closing Views
Select File> Close or click the
at the top
right corner of a window to close it. If the
view is still needed, swap to a different view

without closing the current views.
731
732
Chapter 27:
Vector Views
Chapter Overview
Render views are similar to vector views, but

are much more photo-realistic. They are
covered in their own chapter, Render
Views on page 763.
From the 3D model, you can define and
create cross section/elevation views that
detail the structure of the model. Cross
section/elevation views can be saved and the
program updates them as the model is edited.
The automatic updating of cross section/
elevation views can save time when your
drawings have been sent to layout.
Chapter Contents

Vector View Tools
3D Tools
Creating Camera Views
Moving a Camera in 3D Views
Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View
Creating Overviews
Displaying Vector Views
Speeding up 3D View Generation
Editing Objects in 3D Views
Delete 3D Surface
Saving 3D Views
Walkthroughs
Creating Cross Section/Elevation Views
Editing Cross Section/Elevation Views
Saving Cross Section/Elevation Cameras
Displaying Cross Section/Elevation Views
Camera Specification Dialog
Cross Section/Elevation Camera
Specification
Camera Defaults Dialog
3D Settings Dialog
733
Vector
Views
A vector is a line, which is the fundamental

component of all vector views. Instead of
displaying textures and images on the
surfaces of objects, as in render views, vector
views display patterns and solid colors. This
makes them ideal for use in layout drawings
and high resolution printing.

Camera positioning, field of view and
related initial settings for render and
vector cameras are specified in the Camera
Defaults dialog. See Camera Defaults
Dialog on page 755.
Ambient lighting settings, 3D

backdrop information, and other
settings that affect render views as they are
generated are found in the 3D Settings
dialog. See 3D Settings Dialog on page
757.
Vector View Tools

Select 3D> Create Vector View to
display the Vector View Tools.
Camera Views
The Vector Full Camera tool creates a
multi-floor view of the 3D model. It
can be used to create both interior and
exterior perspectives. The Vector Full
Camera is a good tool for displaying
cathedral ceilings, roofs, lofts, stairwell
openings, or any other variation in floor and
ceiling levels.
The Vector Floor Camera creates a
vector view of the current floor only.
This view does not show anything above the
ceiling or below the floor. It is faster to
generate than a vector full camera view,
because less of the model is calculated.
Check Restrict Camera to Room in the 3D
Settings dialog to limit the view to the
current room. See 3D Settings Dialog on
page 757.
Vector camera views can be changed to
Render Camera
views. See Render
Current Vector View on page 765.
Both the Vector Full Camera and the
Vector Floor Camera can be moved,
734
rotated, raised, lowered or have their line of

sight adjusted. The default camera height,
angle and move increment are defined in the
Camera Defaults dialog. See Creating
Camera Views on page 736.
Overviews
The Vector Full Overview creates an
isometric drawing of the entire model,
including all floors, ceilings, and the roof.
All surfaces such as roofs, walls, and ceilings
can be removed from the view in order to see
into the model. See 3D Tools on page 735.
The Vector Floor Overview creates an
isometric drawing of the current floor
without a roof or ceiling. All lines are in true
length but the drawing cannot be scaled.
The Framing Overview creates an
isometric drawing of the framing in the
model. Framing must be built before
generating a framing overview. Framing
overviews include all floors, walls, roof
framing and foundations. Overviews can be
rotated and viewed from any angle.
Overviews can be printed directly, sent to
layout, or sent to a CAD detail. As a CAD
detail, the lines defining any part of the view
3D Tools
can be edited. See Creating Overviews on

page 741.
Cross Section/Elevation Views

Cross Section/Elevation views are the
traditional, orthogonal views often used in
drafting.
A Cross Section/Elevation view
displays all floors of the model. It can
be used to create both interior and exterior
elevation views. If the view is created
outside the structure looking toward it, the
result is an exterior elevation. If the view is
created inside the structure, or passes
through any of the structure, a cross section
is created.
The Backclipped Cross Section tool

includes only the objects between the
starting point and stopping point of the cross
section line.
The Wall Elevation tool creates a
single floor, single room elevation. It
creates a 2D projection of a vertical face,
such as a wall, and the objects between the
wall and the camera. It is used primarily for
applications such as kitchen elevations or
bath elevations. It does not cut through walls
or show the ceiling, flooring, or roof. The
view can be taken at any angle to the wall(s).
See Creating Cross Section/Elevation
Views on page 749.
3D Tools
Choose from the

architectural tool
buttons that allow placement of Cabinets,
Doors, Electrical Objects, Windows,
Fireplaces, and Corner Trim in 3D views.
Select 3D> Create Render View>
Render Current Vector View to in a
vector view to generate a render view of the
scene. See Render Views on page 763.
Select 3D> Save Active Camera to
save the current camera in the plan.
Saved cameras can be re-opened for later
use. See Saving 3D Views on page 747.
Select 3D> Edit Active Camera to

edit properties of the current camera,
such as field of view. See Camera
Select 3D> Move Camera with
Mouse to access the Move Camera
with Mouse Tools. See Move Camera with
Mouse Tools on page 738.
Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
Keys to specify how the arrow keys affect
the active camera. See Move Camera with
Arrow Keys on page 738.
Select 3D> Move Camera to access
the Move Camera Tools. See Move
Select 3D> Orbit Camera to access
the Orbit Camera Tools. See Orbit
735
Vector
Views
A variety of tools are available in 3D views

that allow you to edit your 3D model, the
camera, and the appearance of the view. You
can also export, print and send 3D views to
layout.
Select 3D> Tilt Camera to access the

Tilt Camera Tools. See Tilt Camera
Tools on page 739.
Select 3D> Remove 3D in plan view to

remove all 3D views associated with
the plan file. See Remove 3D on page 748.
Select 3D> Overview Direction Tools

to access the Overview Direction
Tools. See Overview Direction Tools on
page 744.
Select 3D> Rebuild 3D to rebuild the

entire 3D model. See Rebuild 3D on
page 748
Select 3D> Walkthroughs to record or

play a walkthrough. See
Select 3D> Materials to create, edit
and apply materials to surfaces in the
plan. See Materials on page 703.
In a render view, select 3D> Lighting
to add or adjust the settings of light
sources in the plan. See Light Types on
page 773.
In a render view, select 3D> Render
View Options to change the display
properties of the view. See Rendering
Tools on page 765.
Select 3D> Toggle Low Detail Mode
to switch between High- and LowDetail display modes. Low-Detail allows
quicker view drawing, editing and camera
movements. See Low Detail Display on
page 746.
Select 3D> Delete Surface, then click
on a surface in the view to temporarily
remove the surface from the current view and
reveal the surfaces behind it. See Delete 3D
Surface on page 747.
Select 3D> 3D Settings to open the 3D

Settings dialog. See 3D Settings
Dialog on page 757.
Select Tools> Display Settings>
Color On/Off to control the display of
color in all views except render views. See
Color On/Off on page 743.
Select Edit> Snap Settings> Grid
Snaps to toggle grid snaps on or off for
greater precision when editing in 3D views.
Select File> Export> Picture to save
the current screen image as an image
file. See Exporting Picture Files on page
892.
Select File> Print> Print Image to
print the current screen image. See
Print Image Dialog on page 967.
Select File> Send to Layout to send
the current view to layout. See
Press Ctrl + Alt + S while in a camera
view or overview to spin the view. Pres
Esc to stop the spinning.
Creating Camera Views

Introductory Training Video: Camera
Views
736

Video: Camera Views
Both the Vector Full Camera

the Vector Floor Camera
in the same way.
tool and
2.
Click and drag a line to define the perspective.

Where your line begins is the cameras
position.
The line that you drag defines the
direction the camera is pointed.
The end of the line is the focal point of
the view, the point the camera rotates
around.
By default, the field of view is 45
degrees, which is similar to what the
human eye sees or a 50mm camera
lens.
3.
When you release the mouse button, a

view generates in a new window.
4.
Click the Swap Views

button to
return to the floor plan view. A camera
symbol displays in floor plan view.
tool are used
To create a vector camera view

1.
In floor plan view, select 3D> Create

Vector View> Vector Full Camera
or the Vector Floor Camera
. The
pointer changes to a camera ( ) with a

crosshair marking the position of the
pointer.
Focal
Point
(release)
Line of
Sight
(drag)
FOV Indicators
Camera
(click)
Introductory Training Video: Navigating in 3D

The camera tools function similarly for both
vector and render views. Once these views
are created, there are many ways to
manipulate the camera location, focal point,
and line of site to adjust the view on-screen.
Camera movement is controlled in

incremental steps using either the toolbar or
the keyboard. The distance the camera
moves is defined in the Camera Defaults
dialog. See Camera Defaults Dialog on
page 755. Each time you move the camera,
the view is updated. If you are using either
the toolbar or keyboard to move the camera,
737
Vector
Views
and you have a large distance to move you

can hold down the Shift key as you click a
button or hit the keys on the keyboard. This
suppresses the redraw of the view until the
Shift key is released.
The camera movement tools provide the
ability to pivot the camera in any direction,
move it orthogonally to the line of sight and
rotate the camera around its focal point.
If you hold down the Shift keys while using
any of these tools, screen refresh is
suppressed. This means you can move
multiple increments quicker.
Tile a 3D view and the floor plan view
and use the camera movement tools to
see how they effect the camera.
Move Camera with

Mouse Tools
Select 3D> Move Camera With
Mouse to access the Move Camera
with Mouse modes.
Click Mouse-Orbit Camera (or use
the hot key Alt + O) then move the
mouse to rotate the camera around the
current camera focal point. You can also
click in the render view, move the mouse,
and release the mouse button to throw the
view. Click again in render view to stop the
view from rotating. This tool is available in
all vector views.
Click Mouse-Pan Camera (or use the
hot key Alt + P) then move the mouse
to move the camera up, down, left and right.
Click Mouse-Dolly Camera (or use
the hot key Alt + D) then move the
mouse to move the camera forward and
backward by moving the mouse up and
738
down. It also allows you to turn the camera

left and right in the same way. This tool is
not availble in vector full overviews.
Click Mouse-Tilt Camera (or use the
hot key Alt + T) then move the mouse
to tilt the camera in any direction while
staying in the same location.This tool is not
availble in vector full overviews.
3D Center Camera on Point - Allows
you to focus the camera at a particular
point in the scene. This also sets the camera
center so that future use of the Mouse-Orbit
tool rotates around that particular point. To
use the 3D Center tool, activate the tool and
then click any object in the scene.This tool is
not availble in vector full overviews.
Move Camera with Arrow Keys

Keys to access these tools. These tools are
not available in Cross Section/Elevation,
Back Clipped Cross Section, or Wall
Elevation views.
Keys> Arrow-Orbit Camera to rotate the
camera around the current focal point. Use
the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the
camera. This is the only arrow keys tool
available in vector full overviews, vector
floor overviews, and framing overviews.
Keys> Arrow-Pan Camera to move the
camera up, down, right, and left using the
arrow keys. This tool is available for full
camera overviews, and floor camera
overviews.
Keys> Arrow-Dolly Camera to move the
camera forward and back using the up and

Keys> Arrow-Tilt Camera to use the arrow
keys to tilt the camera any direction at the
same location.This tool is available for full
camera overviews, and floor camera
overviews.
Move Camera Tools

Select 3D> Move Camera to access
these tools. These tools relocate the
camera, while keeping the direction of the
field of view in the same place.
Move Camera Forward - Moves the
camera and the focal point forward.
You can also use the hot key F.
Move Camera Back - Moves the camera and the focal point back. You can
also use the hot key B.
Orbit Camera Tools

Select 3D> Orbit Camera to access
these tools. Orbiting the camera rotates
the camera about the focal point.
Move Camera In - Moves the position
of the camera closer to the focal point
along the line of sight. The camera does not
rotate past the focal point using this tool. You
can also use the hot key I.
Move Camera Out - Moves the position of the camera away from the focal
point along the line of sight. You can also use
the hot key O.
Orbit Camera Upward - Rotates the
camera up about the focal point. The
camera does not rotate past the vertical line
going up from the focal point.
Orbit Camera Downward - Rotates
the camera down about the focal point.
The camera does not rotate below the vertical
line going down from the focal point.
Orbit Camera Left - Rotates the camera to the left about the focal point.
Move Camera Left - Moves the camera and the focal point to the left in a
line perpendicular to the line of sight. You
can also use the hot key L.
Move Camera Right - Moves the
camera and the focal point to the right
in a line perpendicular to the line of
sight.You can also use the hot key R.
Move Camera Up - Moves the camera
and the focal point up.You can also use
the hot key U.
Move Camera Down -Moves the camera and the focal point down. You can
also use the hot key D.
Orbit Camera Right - Rotates the

camera to the right about the focal
point.
Tilt Camera Tools

Select 3D> Tilt Camera to access
these tools. Tilting keeps the camera in
one place and pivots the camera about its
vertical or horizontal axis. This movement is
similar to tilting your head up and down or
turning it side-to-side.
739
Vector
Views
down arrow keys, and side to side using the

left and right arrow keys. This tool is
available for full camera overviews, and
floor camera overviews.
Tilt Camera Upward - Tilts the camera up while keeping it in the same
location. The camera does not tilt beyond the
vertical position.
Tilt Camera Downward - Tilts the
camera down while keeping it in the
same location. The camera does not tilt
beyond the vertical position.
Tilt Camera Left - Turns the camera
to the left while staying in the same
location.
Tilt Camera Right - Turns the camera
to the right while staying in the same
location.
Keyboard Camera Movements

Camera movement in vector views and
render views can be controlled using the
keyboard and the toolbars.
F - Move forward.
B - Move backward.
U - Move up.
D - Move down.
L - Move left.
R - Move right.
I - Moves inward along the line of sight.
O - Move outward along the line of sight.
Left or Right Arrow - The program

remembers the mode you selected under 3D>
Move Camera with Arrow Keys. If you are
in a view that does not support the mode you
selected, the arrow keys move the screen
right or left.
Up or Down Arrow - The program
remembers the mode you selected under 3D>
Move Camera with Arrow Keys. If you are
in a view that does not support the mode you
selected, the arrow keys move the screen up
or down.
Field of View
The Field of View refers to a cameras field
of vision. A wider field of view makes the
focal point appear further away, as more of
the image is included; however, it does not
actually affect the cameras position the way
zooming in or out does.
A cameras field of view can be adjusted in

the Camera Specification dialog. See
Camera Specification Dialog on page 753.
The field of view can also be adjusted with
the mouse wheel while in a camera view, if
your mouse is equipped with one.
In floor plan view, the angled lines of a

camera symbol indicate its field of view.
Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View

Return to floor plan view without closing the
vector view or render view. Using the Select
740
Objects
tool, select the camera object.
Creating Overviews
When a camera symbol is selected it displays

four edit handles.
Line of sight
Move
Focal point
Rotate
Drag the Line of Sight handle to change

the camera angle without moving the
focal point.
Drag the Move handle to relocate the

camera while maintaining its relative
angle.
Drag the Focal Point handle to reposition

the camera, the focal point, and line of
sight.
Drag the Rotate handle to rotate the cameras line of sight about its center.
The 3D view corresponding to the camera

symbol reflects changes made to the symbol
in floor plan view.
The position and movement of a camera is
affected by its location within the model.
When the camera is outside a building, its
height is relative to the terrain and follows
the terrain as it is moved. When inside a
building, the camera goes up and down stairs
automatically and bounces off walls.
If the camera is on an upper floor and you
move the camera outside of the building, the
camera remains at the same height relative to
the floor it was created on.
Creating Overviews
Introductory Training Video: Overviews
Video: Using the Vector and Render
Overview Cameras
Full Overview
Select 3D> Create Vector View> Vector Full Overview to generate an
isometric drawing of the entire building. The
overview begins to generate immediately.
Select 3D> Create Vector View> Vector

Floor Overview
, Vector Full Overview
, or Vector Framing Overview

to
automatically generate an overview in a new
window.
Vector
Views
Overviews generate as soon as you select the

tool and are always created at the same
angle. Once generated, the view angle can be
adjusted. See Displaying Vector
741
Floor Overview
Select 3D> Create Vector View> Vector Floor Overview to create an
isometric drawing of the current floor with
the ceiling removed.
Vector Floor Overview
is an effective
trouble-shooting tool, since it can isolate
each floor for review.
To see a different floor, return to floor plan

view and make the other floor current before
generating the floor overview.
Framing Overview
Select 3D> Create Vector View>
Vector Framing Overview to create
an isometric drawing of the entire building,
displaying only framing and foundation.
Framing must be built before generating this
view or the view is empty.

Up to four camera views and eight total 3D
view windows can be open at any time. A
camera symbol displays in floor plan view
for each camera view that is open. The views
are named and numbered sequentially in the
order they were created. The camera symbol
is an on-screen reference, and does not print.
Note: An object does not show in 3D views if
it has been turned off in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
742
Layer Display Options

Which objects display in a vector view
is controlled in the Layer Display
Options dialog. Line weights can be
displayed using the Show Line Weights
toggle button. Line weights can be specified
by layer. From a vector view select Tools>
Display Options to open the Layer
Vector views can be drawn using Enhanced

Line Drawing , a setting located in the
Preferences dialog. See Appearance
Panel on page 184.
Enhanced vector views remove small gaps in
vector lines, which can be useful in cross
section/elevations and other images that are
sent to layout.
Color On/Off
Select Tools> Display Options>
Color On/Off to control the display of
color in all views except render views. You
can set defaults to specify whether cross
section/elevations, vector views, and vector
overviews are generated with colors turned
on in the Options tab of the 3D Settings
dialog.
The display of colors may or may not make a
view easier to understand. Experiment to see
what works for you, then set your default in
the 3D Settings dialog for each view.
Colors are used in vector views to represent
the use of different materials. The colors can
be printed if you have a color printer, or can
appear as shades of gray on a black and white
printer. If you have assigned a picture file to
represent the texture of a material in render
views, the program can sample that picture
file and define an approximate color to use in
all vector views.
Select Tools> Display Settings> Color Off
to turn off color for the current window.
By default, the view appears in gray scale as
long as Obey Color On/Off Setting is
checked in the Preferences dialog. See
If Obey Color On/Off Setting is unchecked,

all lines appear in black and solid fills appear
in either white or black, depending on the
actual fill color when color is turned on. The
background remains as defined in the
Preferences dialog. See Colors Panel on
page 186.
To print in color, check Print in Color in the
Print dialog. The program remembers your
choice and checks it automatically on future
print jobs.
Displaying Materials
in Vector Views
The pattern lineweight for a material can be
set in the Define Material dialog. See
Define Material Dialog on page 712.
There are a number of ways to change the
material on an object from a vector view. See
Editing Materials on page 711.
Displaying Vector
Overviews
Select 3D> View Direction Tools> View
Angle
to display the View Angle
dialog. The dialog includes a picture of the
exterior walls of the current floor as seen
from the current view angle. Select the check
boxes or move the slide bars to adjust the
view. The picture updates to show all the
adjustments being made. When you are
satisfied, click OK to have the isometric
drawing of the model adjusted to match.
With the View Angle
tool, an isometric
drawing can be generated from any
conceivable angle, from the Top (birds eye
view) to an Elevation (straight on view) to
743
Vector
Views
Enhanced Vector Views
View Angle Dialog
the Bottom (worms eye view), and

anywhere in between.
Overview Direction Tools

These tools are available in vector
overviews only. Access these tools by
selecting 3D> Overview Direction Tools.
1
2
3
View Angle - Click to open the View

Angle dialog.
Front View - Click for a front view of
the model.
Back View - Click for a back view of
the model.
Top View - Click for a top view of the
model.
Bottom View - Click for a bottom view
of the model.
Left Side View - Click for a left side
view of the model.
Right Side View - Click for a right
side view of the model.
Restore Original View - Click to
restore the original view position.
4
5
1 Select the check boxes to view model

from Elevation, Top or Bottom.
2 Use the slide bar to adjust the height to

view the model from.
3 Use the slide bar to adjust how close the

view is to the model.
4 Use the slide bar to view the model

from a different direction.
5 Select the check boxes to view the

model from each side.
Note: An Elevation created by turning the

view is different from that created using the
camera. The
CAD tools are not accessible in this type of
view.
6 A simple preview showing only walls

displays here.
744
Zooming in Vector Views
Selecting Window> Zoom In
, Zoom
The Zoom Tools are available for all

vector camera views and vector
overviews.
Out
or Fill Window
does not
change the field of view, but does redraw the
view zoomed in or out, or adjusted as you
Although the Zoom Tools function normally

in vector views, the results may be affected
by perspective distortion.
want. You can use the Zoom

tools to
simulate Field of View settings.
During this process, the information window

in the toolbar indicates that surface sorting is
occurring. There are several ways to speed
up the generation time of views.
Change View Panel Factors

Vector views are drawn using an adaptive
method that saves time by dividing the
screen into horizontal and vertical panels.
The Options tab of the 3D Settings dialog
has two tuning factors that allow you to
adjust the way the adaptive method works.
The View Panel Factor 1 determines how
many surfaces are drawn for each horizontal
panel. Each horizontal panel is then
subdivided into vertical panels - and View
Panel Factor 2 determines how many
surfaces are contained in each vertical panel.
The default settings are reasonable for most

computers, but with some experimentation
you may find other settings that work well.
Suppress Objects in 3D Views

The display of objects in 3D views can be
turned on or off by layer in the Layer
Display Options dialog. Turning off the
display of unneeded objects can speed up 3D
view generation time.
Each camera view and overview uses the
default layer set for Camera Views. Changes
made to this layer set in one view affect all
other views using that set. See Layer Set
Management on page 217.
Halt Generation with Esc Key

Using the Esc key, you can interrupt the
modeling process at any point and display
the incomplete model as is. This is
particularly helpful when you just need to
reorient a model on the screen for a specific
angle or view.
The Esc option allows you to place the view
quickly, then use Window> Refresh Display
to redraw the model with all 3D Faces intact.
You may use this option with elevation
745
Vector
Views
Depending on the speed of your processor

and the memory of your computer, a 3D view
should generate in a few seconds or less.
When you have a large, complex model with
a lot of interior detail, many objects, or hatch
petterns with many lines, it may take a few
minutes to generate a vector view of
everything in the model.
views, vector views, render views and

overviews.
draws 3D approximations of some objects,

allowing for a quicker screen redraw time
and quicker camera movement.
Low Detail Display

Select 3D> Toggle Low Detail Mode
to switch to and from Low Detail
Mode. Low Detail suppresses patterns and
To draw all 3D views in Low Detail Mode by

default, check Start in Low Detail Mode on
the Options tab of the 3D Settings dialog.
See 3D Settings Dialog on page 757.
Editing Objects in 3D Views

that indicates the overall height and either the
width or depth of the object.
Objects can be created and edited in 3D

views and floor plan view.
Creating Objects in 3D Views

You can place windows, doors, cabinets,
electrical objects, corner trim, and most
library objects directly into 3D views. To do
this, select the appropriate tool from the
toolbar and click in the 3D view. You can
then edit the objects size and placement.
The Build Framing and Build Roof
dialogs are also accessible in 3D views,
although the manual Framing Tools
Roof Tools
and
are not.
Selecting Objects in 3D Views
746
Normally, five handles display. The top and

bottom handles raise and lower the heights of
the object's top and bottom. Side handles
move the object's sides in and out, changing
its width or depth. The middle handle moves
the object horizontally or vertically, changing
its position but not its size.
All moving or resizing is in the plane of the
handle surface. You cannot move an object
directly towards or away from the camera; it
is restricted to the handle surface plane.
By default, movement is restricted to one
inch or 10 mm increments, but this
restriction can be set to custom increments in
the Plan Defaults dialog and toggled off
Most objects can be selected and edited in
and on using the Grid Snaps
3D views. Select Edit> Select Objects

and click the surface of an object. Edit
handles that can be used to move and resize
the object display. Double-click the object or
edit button to
open the specification dialog for the object.
Unrestricted positioning can also be enabled

by holding down the Ctrl key while moving
or resizing an object. Holding down he Ctrl
key also allows you move or resize the
object due to obstructions such as other
objects.
When you select an object, handles and a

handle surface display. The handle surface is
a rectangle around the perimeter of the object
If Furniture/Fixture Resize Enable is

cleared in the Plan Defaults dialog, only a
single handle displays for furniture and
button.
Delete 3D Surface
stand-alone fixtures and appliances. In this

case, the object can only be moved.
Dimension lines are displayed to help you
resize an object and determine its height.
These are more visible when the color is
turned off.
Due to movement restrictions, cross section/
elevation views are sometimes more suitable
for editing objects than vector views or
overviews.
When several floor plan views and 3D views
are open, changes made in one automatically
display in the others. If you have major

changes to make to your plan, it is faster to
make them with as few windows as possible
open.
Rebuild 3D
As changes are made to your plan, a
3D view automatically updates to
reflect any changes visible in the view. If you
find that a view is not updating as expected,
select 3D> Rebuild 3D to rebuild the entire
3D model.
Delete 3D Surface
The individual surface of an object can
be temporarily removed from any 3D
view by selecting 3D> Delete Surface and
then clicking on a surface.
Hold the Alt key while clicking to delete one

triangular face at a time rather than all
adjacent surfaces. See Render Panel on
page 211.
Surfaces removed in one view are removed

in all 3D views, but are not permanently
removed from the model. Continue clicking
surfaces to remove them, then select another
tool when you are finished.
Select 3D> Delete Surface

or click the
toolbar button to restore the most recently
deleted surface. All surfaces can be restored
by selecting Build> Floor> Rebuild Walls/
Floors/Ceilings
or by exiting the 3D
view and reopening it.
Saving 3D Views
Saving 3D Views
Introductory Training Video: Saving
and Restoring Camera Views
You can save any vector or render view
either by opening the camera for
specification in floor plan view and clicking
the Save button in the Camera
Specification dialog, or by clicking the
747
Vector
Views
All 3D views can be saved. Once a view is

saved, it is listed in the Project Browser and
can be named. If the view is a camera view
or cross section/elevation view, this name
appears as a label with the camera symbol in
floor plan view. See Project Browser on
page 165.
Save Camera
Activating Views
button or selecting 3D>
Save Active Camera

open.
when the view is
To activate a view
Select the camera symbol, open it for

specification, and click Activate in the
Camera Specification dialog. (Camera views only)
Select the camera symbol and click the
Saving Cross
Section/Elevation Views
If CAD objects have been added to a cross
section/elevation view, the program prompts
you to save the view before closing.
Activate Camera
To save a cross section/elevation view
Click the Save Camera

within the view to save it.
button from
Select a cross section/elevation camera in

floor plan view, click the Open Object
edit button to open the Camera
Specification dialog, and click the
Save button.
If a vector camera view, render camera view,

or cross section/elevation view has not been
saved, it displays in floor plan view using the
same color designated for moving objects.
See Colors Panel on page 186.
Cameras and views that have been saved
display using the color specified for the
Cameras, Inactive layer in the Layer
Display Options dialog. See Layer
edit button.
Double-click the camera symbol in floor

plan view.
Note: If the symbols for your saved cameras
do not display in floor plan view, make sure
that the Cameras, Inactive layer is checked
in the Layer Display Options dialog,
then refresh the display. If the camera still
does not show, it does not exist.
Remove 3D
Select 3D> Remove 3D from floor
plan view to close all 3D views
associated with the current plan file and
remove unsaved 3D data from memory.
Any views saved with the plan are closed but
not deleted.
Rebuild 3D
Select 3D> Rebuild 3D to regenerate
all 3D data asociated with the current
plan. All open views will remain open.
Walkthroughs
Any vector camera view or overview can be
used to record a walkthrough. Walkthroughs
748
are recorded as .avi files. See


Introductory Training Video: Cross
Section/Elevation Views
makes it easy to accurately see the spatial

relationships of the 3D objects in the model.

Video: Using the Cross-Section and
Elevation Cameras
Cross section/elevation and wall elevation

views are accurate 2D elevations of the 3D
model. Although they display objects at
different depths from the camera, all lines in
the view are in the same plane when sent to
layout.

Video: Creating Updatable Cross Sections
Video: Creating Fully Editable Cross
Sections
The Cross Section/Elevation
clipped Cross Section
, Back-
and Wall
Elevation
tools produce the traditional,
orthogonal views often used in drafting.
Lines and dimensions are true lengths, which
Cross section/elevations and wall elevations

can be calculated at any allowed wall angle.
This makes it possible to create a true length
elevation of any wall, provided that the wall
is on an allowed angle.
Cross Section/Elevations and wall elevations
have the editing capabilities found in other
3D views, and can be further enhanced with
the CAD tools.
Cross Section/Elevation View
Cross Section
, Backclipped
Vector
Views
Wall Elevation View
views are created in the same way.
and Wall Elevation
749
To create a Cross Section/Elevation view

1.
Select 3D> Create Vector View> Cross

Section/Elevation
. The pointer
changes to a
with crosshairs marking
the position of the pointer.
2.
Click in the floor plan view at the spot

where the section is to be cut, or elevation is to be viewed from.
3.
Drag in the direction of the line of sight,

perpendicular to the cut line, and release
the mouse button. The cut line is the line
that you would traditionally think of as
the section line in a floor plan drawing.
4.
When you release the mouse button the

view generates in a new window.
If a cross section line does not cut through a

3D object and the object is within the back
clipped distance, such as a window shown in
elevation, the object retains its 3D definition.
3D objects can be selected, moved, stretched,
or otherwise modified in a cross section/
elevation view. The 3D model is updated in
all views.
Wall Elevations
Always drag the Wall Elevation
camera
perpendicular to the wall to be viewed. The
length of the line is not important.

Introductory Training Video: Adding
Detail to Cross Section Views
Cross section/elevation views are actual 2D
representations of the 3D model and are very
versatile. Architectural objects in the model
can be edited directly from the view. See
Editing Objects in 3D Views on page 746.
If dimensions are set to locate an object, such
as cabinets or windows, these objects are
located in cross section/elevation views, as
well. If the 3D model is edited in another
view, the cross section view updates.
CAD objects can be added to cross section/
elevation views that save with the view. Any
added objects need to be manually replaced,
but if the model changes and the view must
be updated. Note that when editing CAD
objects in a cross section/elevation, the 3D
model may obscure the CAD snapping grid.
750
You can convert everything in a cross

section/elevation view to CAD objects,
disassociating it from the 3D model
completely. This allows for the most editing
capabilities, but requires that all manual
work be redone if the 3D model changes and
the view needs updating.
Adding CAD to Cross Section/

Elevation Views
The CAD text tools are accessible in cross
section/elevation views. Any CAD
information added to a cross section or
elevation view, including dimensions and
text, is stored in that view when it is saved.
Any added CAD objects are superimposed
on the view and have no affect on the 3D
model itself. If CAD objects are added to a
cross section/elevation view, the program
asks you to save the window before closing

the view.
Cross sections and elevations are the only 3D
views that can have information added using
the 2D CAD tools. They can be fully
annotated and dimensioned and then printed
to scale. A cross section/elevation printed
directly from the view can be printed to
multiple pages if the scale requires it.
Wall Details - Add closed CAD

polylines for each wall layer to a crosssection or elevation view where the wall
intersects the viewing plane. The polyline
fill defaults to the fill specified in the
Insulation - Specify which wall layers in

should display insulation fill when autodetailed. See Wall Specification Dialog
on page 259. Specify which rooms
should have insulation below the floor or
above the ceiling. See Room Specification Dialog on page 296.
Foundation Walls - Closed polylines are

created for foundation walls and footings
Slabs - Closed polylines with a concrete

pattern are created for slabs where the
slab intersects the front clipping plane.
Auto-Detailing
To save time, use the Auto-Detailing
tool to give you a head-start in
detailing your cross section/elevation view.
The auto-detailer automatically creates CAD
objects for commonly detailed aspects of a
view. To activate the auto-detailer, select
CAD> Autodetail...
For more information on editing CAD

objects, including closed polylines, see
When the auto-detailing tool is used, CAD
objects are placed on the default CAD layer.
Using the auto-detailing tool twice results in
two copies of the same CAD objects.
CAD Detail From View
The auto-detailer creates CAD objects for the

following:
Detail From View

tool to generate a
CAD detail of the view. This converts all 3D
lines to CAD lines, and copies them with any
added items to a CAD Detail. This tool can
be used in any view except render or raytrace
views. CAD details created from a view do
not update when the model is changed. See
CAD Detail from View on page 875.
751
Vector
Views
When you have finished modifying

your cross section view, use the CAD
Saving Cross Section/Elevation Cameras

Views created using the Cross Section/
Elevation
, Wall Elevation
, and

tools can be
edited with the CAD tools. If CAD objects
are added to a cross section/elevation view,
the program prompts you to save the view
before closing. Any CAD objects added to a
cross section/elevation view are saved with
the view as part of the plan file.
There are three ways to save a cross section/
elevation camera view:
In floor plan view, select the camera sym-
There are four ways to open a saved cross

section/elevation view:
bol, click the Open Object

edit
button to display the Cross Section/
Elevation Camera Specification
dialog, and click the Save Camera button. See Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification on page 755.
From within the view, select 3D> Save

Active Camera
view and click the Activate Camera

edit button.
Double-click the camera symbol using

the Select Objects
tool.
Select the camera symbol, open it to display the Camera Specification dialog, and click the Activate button.
Double-click the cross section/elevation

view in the Project Browser. See Project
button.
Close the cross section/elevation view.

click Yes when prompted to save the
view.
Select the camera symbol in floor plan
Note: When a view is saved, its 2D symbol is

placed on the Cameras, Inactive layer in the
Layer Display Options Dialog on page 218.
Displaying Cross Section/Elevation Views

The display of objects in cross section/
elevation views is controlled in the 3D
column of the Layer Display Options
752

221.
To show framing in a cross section/elevation
view, framing must first be built in the Build
Framing dialog. See Framing on page
469.

The Camera Specification dialog is
accessible from Vector Full Camera
and Render Camera
views by selecting
3D> Edit Camera

. This dialog is also
accessible from floor plan view by selecting
the camera symbol that represents the

cameras location and clicking the Open
Object
edit button to open the Camera
Specification dialog. If more than one
camera object is selected, they cannot be
opened for specification.
1 Camera Name - The camera name
displays in floor plan view and is listed

in the Project Browser. See Project
2 Settings in the Wall and Surfaces
section determine the extent of the

camera view.
Clip Surfaces Within - Specifies that the
camera does not display an object within this
distance.
Remove Wall Within - Removes the view of
walls within this distance of the camera.
Both of these distances are measured as a
radius from the camera position.
753
Vector
Views
The Camera Specification dialog

applies to the selected camera view only.
Depending on the type of camera view in
use, not all the settings may be editable. In
addition, some settings only affect some
types of views.
Check Unless Opening to display a wall that

is inside the Remove Wall Within range if
the camera is pointing through an opening
such as a door or window.
Check Default for any value to use the
default setting. See Camera Defaults Dialog on page 755.
3 Settings in the Plan Display section
determine the cameras display in floor

plan view. For more information, see
Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View on
page 740.
Check Show Field of View Indicators to
display the field of view indicator for
cameras in floor plan view. You can also
change the FOV Indicator Length, which is
measured in plan inches.
Check Show Camera Focal Point to
display the cameras focal point in floor plan
view.
The Camera Symbol Size is measured in
plan inches.
The Incremental Rotate Angle defines how

many degrees the camera rotates each time
you direct it to. A setting of 90 degrees
would make one full rotation in four moves.
The Height Above Floor defines the height
that the camera is above the floor level for
the current floor.
The Field of View defines the cameras field
of vision in angular degrees.
The Tilt Angle determines the angle the
camera is tilted. The camera maintains its
focal point and position in floor plan view,
but if the camera is tilted, the focal point is
above or below the current camera height.
Note: Tilt angles greater than +/- 10 degrees
may produce unexpected results.
4 Click Save Camera to save this view
Specify the Camera Angle for the selected

camera. This is an absolute value. Entering a
value of 90 degrees orients the camera to the
top of the screen.
5 Settings in the Positioning section
Specify the X Position and Y Position for

the selected camera. These are absolute
coordinates. Specifying zero for both places
the camera at the plans origin point (0,0).
with the plan. The camera view can be

named and is listed in the Project Browser.
See Project Browser on page 165.
determine the position and orientation
of the camera.
754
The Incremental Move Distance controls

how many inches the camera moves each
time you direct it to move right, left,
forwards or backwards. For interior views a
small number is good, but for exterior you
may want a larger increment.

Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification

The Cross Section/Elevation Camera
Specification dialog is accessible from
tion
, Wall Eleva-
, and Backclipped Cross Section

views. Select the camera symbol and
in the Project Browser. See Project

edit button.

camera view.
Back clip after - Enter the distance in inches
from camera to backclip plane. If zero, no
clipping occurs.
1
2
Specify the X Position of the camera in

absolute coordinates.
Specify the Y Position of the camera in

determine the elevation of the camera.
4 Click Save Camera to save this view
with the plan. The camera view can be

named and is listed in the Project Browser.
See Project Browser on page 165.
1 Camera Name - The camera name
displays in floor plan view and is listed
Camera Defaults Dialog

selecting Edit> Default Settings or by
double clicking the Render Tools button.
Vector
Views
The settings in the Camera Defaults

dialog affect both vector and render cameras
and define how a camera clips and captures
views, how it displays in floor plan view,
how the camera is positioned, and how the
camera moves.
755

camera view.
cameras in floor plan view. You can also

change the FOV Indicator Length, which is
Clip Surfaces Within - Specifies that the

camera does not display an object within this
distance.
Check Show Camera Focal Point to

display the cameras focal point in floor plan
view.
Remove Wall Within - Removes the view of

walls within this distance of the camera.
The Camera Symbol Size can be changed. It

is measured in plan inches.
Both of these distances are measured as a

radius from the camera position.
You can change the Clip Plane Indicator

Length that displays in floor plan view for
Check Unless Opening to display a wall that

is inside the Remove Wall Within range if
the camera is pointing through an opening
such as a door or window.
Views,
Views, and
Wall Elevation
Views. The length is
2 Settings in the Plan Display section
determine the cameras display in floor

plan view. For more information about how a
camera displays in floor plan view, see
Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View on
page 740.
Check Show Field of View Indicators to
display the field of view indicator for
756
Clip plane indicator in an elevation view
3D Settings Dialog
determine the position and orientation

of the camera.
The Incremental Move Distance controls
how many inches the camera moves each
time you direct it to move right, left,
forwards or backwards. For interior views a
small number is good, but for exterior you
may want a larger increment.
The Incremental Rotate Angle defines how
many degrees the camera rotates each time
you direct it to. A setting of 90 degrees
would make one full rotation in four moves.
The Height Above Floor defines the height

that the camera is above the floor level for
the current floor.
The Field of View defines the cameras field
of vision in angular degrees.
The Tilt Angle determines the angle the
camera is tilted. The camera maintains its
focal point and position in floor plan view,
but if the camera is tilted, the focal point is
above or below the current camera height.
Leaving this default value at zero is
recommended. Any tilt angles greater than +/
- 10 degrees may produce unexpected
results.
3D Settings Dialog
Select 3D> 3D Settings or doubleclick the Vector View Tools
button
to display the 3D Settings dialog.
Vector
Views
Settings in the 3D Settings dialog are not

global: they are saved with each plan file.
Some settings affect render views, some
affect vector views, and some affect both
view types.
757
Options Tab
4
5
1 The General Options affect both

render and vector views.
758
Start in Low Detail 3D Mode - Check

this box to create any camera in Low
Detail mode by default. See Low Detail
Display on page 746.
Restrict Camera to Room only affects

subsequently generated floor camera
views. See Vector View Tools on page
734. Check this box to suppress the generation of objects beyond the room containing the floor camera. If checked, the
view through a doorway into another
room shows only blank space or the
selected 3D backdrop. Use this option to

maximize computer resources or to minimize file size when creating a single
room 3D Walkthrough.
Unrestricted camera view.
3D Settings Dialog
2 The Render View Options affect
render views only. Click and drag the

slide bar or type in a percent value to adjust
these options. For more information, see
Ambient Lights on page 772.
3 The Vector View Options affect vector
Check Opaque Glass From Outside to

make the glass in windows and doors
opaque when seen from outside the
house.
View Panel Factors adjust the performance of vector views. Normally, these
values should not need changing, but you
may be able to get modest performance
improvements by trying other values.
When a vector view is generated, the

view is first divided into panels. View
panel factors represent target numbers of
surfaces to use in defining each panel. A
value of 10000 for Factor 1 means that a
total of 10,000 or more surfaces are collected to define each panel vertically. A
value of 2000 for Factor 2 means that
2,000 or more surfaces are collected to
define panels horizontally.
Restrict Camera to Room is checked.
Camera Bumps Off Walls - Uncheck

this box to allow the camera to move
freely through walls.
Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings Check this box to automatically rebuild

floors and ceilings before a 3D view or
elevation is displayed.
Auto Rebuild Terrain - Check this

option to automatically rebuild terrain to
reflect recent changes before generating a
3D view. If this option is unchecked, you
are asked if the terrain should be rebuilt.
Auto Remove 3D - Uncheck this box to

retain the 3D model in memory when you
are making changes to the model. This
can speed up the generation of additional
3D views of the model, but may slow
down the speed of working in 2D.
Version 10 Compatible Texture Mapping - Check this box to use global texture mapping settings rather than texture
mapping fixed to individual objects.
Making these numbers larger results in

fewer panels; making them smaller
results in more panels. Adjusting these
numbers either too low or too high causes
the time required to draw to increase.
When changing these values, turn on

"Show Screen Redraw Time" in the Preferences> Appearance panel to see if a
change improves drawing speed. See
Framing Back Clip defines the back clip

for framing members in cross section/elevation view. Framing must be set to dis-
Version 10 Compatible Texture Mapping should remain unchecked except

for legacy plans with custom rotated textures.
759
Vector
Views
views only.
play to see the effects of this value. A

zero value does not back clip at all.
across the window. See Panning the

Display on page 725.
6 Specify how the Surface Edge Lines
4 Default Color Display has check
boxes for each type of vector view.

Select a check box to generate that view type
in color or clear the box to generate that view
type as a line drawing. A colored view can
always be changed to a line drawing and vice
versa by choosing Tools> Color Off/Color
On
display for all objects in 3D views.
If this option is not checked, all edge

lines are drawn black and solid with a
line weight of 0.
5 The Scroll Bars check boxes control
the display of scroll bars along the right

side and bottom of each type of vector view.
Clear the check box to suppress the scroll bar
and yield more viewing area when using
smaller windows.
When the scroll bars are suppressed, use the
keyboard arrow keys to scroll. To pan the
display, hold the key and drag the pointer
Check Use Layer Settings to display surface edge lines for objects using the display settings specified by layer in the
Layer Display Options dialog
If Use Layer Settings is checked you can

also check Use Object Settings. All
objects that have special settings specified on the Line Style tab of their specification dialog display using those settings,
overriding the layer settings in the Layer
Backdrop Tab
6
2
3
760
3D Settings Dialog
1 A preview of the selected backdrop

displays.
2 Click Select Backdrop to open the

Select Library Object dialog.
Browse the Backdrops library, select a

backdrop, and click OK.
3 Click Remove Backdrop to change the
backdrop to a solid color. The color

used is defined in the Background Color
section of this dialog.
4 Select the check boxes to specify what

views the backdrop displays in.
5 Render View Options can be used to
create spherical panoramic backdrops.

A spherical backdrop is created by placing
the selected backdrop onto a sphere that
surrounds your scene. The horizontal and
vertical angles control how far around the

sphere the backdrop is stretched.
6 Click the color bar to change the
Background Color that displays when

a backdrop is not being used.
Creating Backdrops
New backdrops can be created using a
variety of graphic file formats. Backdrops
are automatically adjusted to fit the window
size, so they look best when they are created
with the same height to width proportions as
the window you are working in.
Scanned images from photographs or digital
photos can be used to create backdrops of a
specific building site. See Images &
Backdrops on page 769 and Adding
Materials and Images to the Library on page
676.
761
762
Render Views
Chapter Overview
Photo-Realistic Renderings
and edited in render views, just as they can in

vector views.

Video: Presenting a Rendered 3D View
Render views can be saved with the plan for

use in layout and easy access to commonly
used interior and exterior views.
Render views are similar to vector views, but

have a more realistic appearance because
they display surfaces using textures and can
calculate light sources and generate shadows.
Very little preparation is needed to create a
render view. Chief Architect has default
values for most textures and even creates
default light sources so that the render view
looks realistic when first generated. For
better renderings, add or adjust light sources
and edit the materials being rendered.
From a render view, you can create final and
raytrace views that appear even more
realistic.
function just like the vector camera and
overview tools. Many objects can be placed
Chapter Contents
OpenGL and Hardware

Render View Tools
Rendering Tools
Preview vs. Final Render View
Glass House View
Using the Contextual Menu
Editing a Camera
Materials In Render Views
Images & Backdrops
Plan Export
Editing Objects in Render Views
Saving a Render View Picture
Printing a Render View
Rendering Tips and Tricks
Light Sources
763
Render
Views
Chapter 28:
Light Types
Defining Light Types
Adjusting Lights
Sun Angle Specification Dialog

Light Specification Dialog
Cross Section Slider Dialog
OpenGL and Hardware

Chief Architect contains a built in, easy to
use rendering engine that makes use of
OpenGL rendering technology. OpenGL, the
standard for high-end 3D graphics, has the
advantage of good hardware support on most
video cards. With OpenGL, render views
should look the same on all computers
regardless of the graphics card being used.
The only difference is in the speed that it
takes to perform the rendering. It is highly

recommended that users have a graphics card
that supports OpenGL hardware acceleration,
to take full advantage of the rendering
capabilities of Chief Architect. For complex
models, an accelerated card generates quality
renderings in seconds that might otherwise
take hours with a non-accelerated card.

The Render panel of the Preferences
dialog controls settings for render previews
and final views. Since these settings
significantly affect rendering speed and
quality, it is a good idea to optimize them for
your computer system. See Render Panel
on page 211.
Ambient lighting settings, 3D backdrop
information, and other settings that affect
render views as they are generated are found

in the 3D Settings dialog. See 3D
Settings Dialog on page 757.
Camera positioning, field of view and related
initial settings for render and vector cameras
are specified in the Camera Defaults
dialog. See Camera Defaults Dialog on
page 755.
Render View Tools

Select 3D> Create Render View to
access the Render View Tools.
Camera Views and Overviews

function just like the vector camera and
overview tools. See Vector View Tools on
page 734.
764
Glass House Camera

In a glass house view, the surfaces in
the scene are semi-transparent. This
allows you to view the spatial relationships
between areas within the house, and examine
the interior and exterior simultaneously.
Select 3D> Render View Options> Glass

House Camera
, then click and drag a
camera arrow in floor plan view to create a
Glass House camera view. See Glass House
View on page 767.
While in an existing render view, you can
select 3D> Render View Options> Glass
House Mode
to display the view in
Glass House Mode. See Rendering Tools
on page 765.
Render Current
Vector View
You can render an active vector view
by selecting 3D> Create Render
View> Render Current Vector View. Chief
Architect renders the view based on your
Preview settings on the Render panel of the
Preferences dialog. See
Rendering Tools
A variety of tools are available in 3D views
that allow you to edit your 3D model, the
camera, and the appearance of the view. You
can also export, print and send 3D views to
layout. See 3D Tools on page 735.
Some 3D tools apply specifically to render
views.
Select 3D> Raytrace Current Render
View to Raytrace the current render
view. See Raytracing on page 787.
Select 3D> Render View Options in a
render view to access the Render View
Options Tools.
Select 3D> Render View Options>
Final View or 3D> Render View
Options> Final View with Shadows to
regenerate the render view based on the final
view settings on the Render panel of the
Preferences dialog. See Preview vs.
Final Render View on page 766.
Glass House Mode to turn on/off
Glass House mode. This mode makes the 3D
model semi-transparent, so that you can
examine the interior and exterior of your

structures simultaneously. See Glass House
View on page 767.
Glass House Options button to modify
the settings for the Glass House view, such
as transparency level and color. See Glass
Cross Section Slider button to open
the Cross Section Slider dialog that
allows you to adjust the cutting plane of a
render view. See Cross Section Slider
Dialog on page 785.
The Adjust Lights option allows a
user to edit the current lights that are
being used in the render view. The lights are
displayed in a list for easy selecting. Interior
default lights in the list cannot be changed or
altered, but the default sun can be changed.
You can quickly adjust lights to get the
desired appearance in the render view. Use
the checkboxes to turn lights on and off.
Selecting a light and choosing "Adjust" in
765
Render
Views
Rendering Tools
the Adjust Lights dialog opens a dialog

box. If it is an added light, the dialog is the
Light Specification dialog. If you open a
Light Fixture, the dialog consists of the Render Data tab of the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See Adjusting
Lights on page 778.
Select 3D> Lighting> Toggle Sunlight button to turn on and off the light
source that represents the sun. This feature
can be used to simulate day vs. night exterior
views. User defined exterior lights are turned
off in day views and turned on in night
views. See Sun Angles on page 775.
Preview vs. Final Render View

A render view is first drawn using the Preview settings on the Render panel of the
Preferences dialog. By default, many
available options are turned off for the
preview that allows the rendering to display
much faster.
When you have finished making adjustments
in render view, select 3D> Render View
Options> Final View
or Final View
with Shadows
. Apply the Final View
settings from the Render panel of the
Preferences dialog to your render view.
This creates a much higher quality image that
is more suitable for printing or saving as a
.bmp, .jpg, .png, .cif or .pcx file. It usually
takes significantly longer to generate the
final view than the preview. The render view
reverts back to the Preview settings as soon
as anything is changed within the view.
For faster rendering speed, but lowest
rendering quality, all options in Preview
settings should be turned off. To speed up the
render speed even further, you can switch to
Low Detail rendering mode, that draws a
simplified version of the view without
766
lighting. For the best rendering quality, but

slowest rendering speed, all rendering
options should be turned on in Final View
settings.
The rendering option that has the greatest
impact on rendering speed is the Show
Shadows option. It is recommended that you
dont use this feature unless you have
OpenGL hardware acceleration on your
video card.
When rendering shadows, a percentage
complete value displays on the status bar.
You may adjust your Preview and Final

View settings to best fit the speed of your
graphics card and still provide satisfactory
rendering quality. See Render Panel on
page 211.
To generate higher quality renderings
than can be created with the final view
settings, use the Raytrace
feature. See
Glass House View

Introductory Training Video: Glass
House Views
You can display a current render view
as a Glass House view by selecting
3D> Render View Options> Glass House
Mode. You can also create a glass house
view from floor plan view by selecting 3D>
Create Render View> Glass House
You can modify the settings for glass house

view by selecting 3D> Glass House Options
to open the Glass House Options
dialog.
Camera
tool, and clicking and dragging
a camera angle.
Color - Specify which color is used in glass
house view.
Transparency - Specify how transparent the
surfaces are in glass house view. For
example, to create a wireframe line drawing
of your structure, turn transparency to full
and minimize line thickness.
Line Thickness - Specify the thickness of
the lines drawn in glass house view.
Using the Contextual Menu

When in a render view, click the right mouse
button to access the contextual menu. In
most views, the contextual menu contains the
same tools as the Edit toolbar, but in render
views the options are a mix of tool buttons
and toggles that allow you to override the
settings on the Render panel of the
Preferences dialog, or to access special
render features.
Refresh Display, Final View, Raytrace,
Toggle Sunlight, Toggle Low Detail Mode,
767
Render
Views
Glass House View
and Glass House Mode are all available

from the toolbar.
Changing a setting from the menu only

affects the current view, it does not affect the
settings in the Preferences dialog.
Editing a Camera
Just as with a vector camera view, once a
render camera view is created, there are a
number of ways to adjust its focal point, field
of view, and angle.
In Floor Plan View

When a render camera view is open, it is
represented in floor plan view with a camera
symbol that displays an "R" (for render).
This symbol displays the focal point, field of
view, and camera angle and can be selected
and edited. See Editing a Camera in Floor
Plan View on page 740.
In 3D Views
Just like vector camera views, a render
camera view can be edited while the view is
active. See Moving a Camera in 3D Views
on page 737.
You can also make adjustments to the camera
view by clicking the Edit Camera
button to open the Camera Specification
dialog. See Camera Specification Dialog
on page 753.
Materials In Render Views

A render view is similar to a vector view
except that materials are displayed with
textures instead of patterns and object
surfaces are illuminated by light sources.
Textures are assigned to Materials and

Materials are assigned to objects. Materials
are stored in the Library Browser along with
their assigned textures.
The display of materials in render views is

controlled by settings on the Texture and
Render tabs of the Define Material dialog.
For realistic render views, it is important to

adjust texture properties correctly. Textures
can be mapped to objects for correct
placement. See Mapping Patterns and
Textures on page 705.
In render views, there are many ways to

change an objects appearance. See Editing
Materials on page 711.
If no texture is selected for a material or if

the display of textures is turned off, affected
surfaces are a solid color instead.
Texture
Textures are graphic files that represent
irregular surfaces of objects such as bricks,
tile, wood, and carpet in render views.
768
Render Properties
Brightness, shininess and transparency
control how light sources affect the display
Images & Backdrops
Render
Views
of surfaces in render views. See Light

Sources on page 772.
Images & Backdrops

Hundreds of graphics files have been
included with Chief Architect. They are
categorized into three groups: Images,
Materials, and Backdrops. By using them,
you can create more realistic render views.
Images
Images are very important for the appearance
of rendered views and VRML file export.
Images are picture files that represent
individual objects, such as trees, flowers,
cars, people, etc. They are marked in floor
plan view with a 2D Block and are visible in
vector views.
Backdrops
Backdrops are images that display in the
background of 3D views. Only one backdrop
can be used at a time. If a backdrop is not
applied, Chief Architect applies a default
background color. Backdrops are selected
and removed on the Backdrop tab of the 3D
Settings dialog. The background color for
render views is also defined there. See
Creating Backdrops on page 761.
You can drag and drop a backdrop directly
into a render view from the Library Browser.
Select a backdrop from the upper pane of the
Library Browser, notice that the pointer
changes in render view (
) to indicate that
a backdrop is loaded for placement, and then
click in a render view to apply the selected
backdrop.
Spherical Backdrops
The render view allows a special type of
backdrop called a Spherical Panoramic
Backdrop. These options are used to have
the backdrop rotate as you move the render
view Camera.
To enable Spherical Panoramic Backdrops,
you can turn them on from the Backdrop tab
of the 3D Settings dialog. You can then
adjust how much the backdrop wraps around
the scene.
Adjusting the Horizontal Angle determines
how many times the backdrop should appear
as you rotate in a full circle from side-toside. A value of 360 makes the backdrop
wrap around the scene once. A value of 720
makes it wrap around the scene twice. 180
makes only half the backdrop wrap around
the scene.
The Vertical Angle determines how much
the backdrop stretches up-and-down. To have
the backdrop stretch from the highest point in
the sky to the lowest point in the ground, use
a value of 180. To have the backdrop stretch
from just below a horizontal render to just
above, use a smaller value such as 100.
It takes a special camera or an image
processing program to generate spherical
panoramic backdrops. Some experimenting
with the images and the Angle values may be
necessary to achieve the desired results.
769
Plan Export
When transferring a plan to another
computer or to another user, it is
helpful to have all the Images, Textures, and
Backdrops used in the plan so that render
views are complete. The Plan Export tool
accessed through File> Export > Entire

Plan allows you to save the plan and all
associated images, textures, and backdrops,
into a single directory. For more information
see Exporting an Entire Plan on page 173.
Editing Objects in Render Views

You have full editing functionality in a
render view, including the ability to add,
resize, move, group, ungroup, and delete
objects. See Editing Objects in 3D Views

on page 746.
Saving a Render View Picture

Render views may be saved as .bmp, .jpg,
.png, .tif, or .pcx files.
To save a render view
1.
Select File> Export> Picture or click

the Export Picture
render toolbar.
button on the
2.
The Export Picture File dialog displays with the current directory.
3.
Navigate to the desired directory before

saving the file.
4.
Use the file type drop-down to choose

which file type to save to.
5.
Give the file a name and click Save.
Once saved, a picture can be opened and

converted into many other formats using a
graphics program. Picture files can be sent to
layout or used in word processing, desktop
publishing, and web development programs
to create advertisements, brochures, etc.
The picture is saved using the size of
the current window. You can change the
size of your render window to create a
smaller or bigger picture.
Printing a Render View

Since render views are created from
pixels instead of lines, File> Print>
Print Image must be used to send them to
the printer. File> Print> Print Image is a
770
special Chief Architect function that prints

the screen in picture format. The entire view
prints, including images such as trees and
textures.
The quality of your print image is affected by

your current window size and screen
resolution. To maximize the quality of your
printed image, generate it in full screen size
and use the maximum screen resolution.
If you want to save or print a picture

whose resolution is higher than your
screen, you can create the image using Raytracing. See Raytracing on page 787.

You can achieve significantly different
results in rendering speed or quality by
adjusting the following options in the
Render tab of the Preferences dialog. To
access this dialog go to Edit> Preferences>
Render.
Faster Rendering
To improve rendering speed, consider
turning off the following options
Always Rebuild - This forces Chief
Architect to re-create the entire model for
each frame. For most video cards you may
want to turn this off, and turn Keep All
Surfaces on.
Keep All Surfaces - When Chief Architect
creates the 3D model, this option toggles
whether to only create surfaces facing you.
On most OpenGL-accelerated video cards, it
is faster to create the model with all surfaces
once, rather than re-create it every time the
camera position changes. For most scenarios
you may want to turn this on, and turn
Always Rebuild off.
Use Triangles - This determines whether or
not lights illuminate the scene accurately.
Turning off this option speeds up render
times, but results in large objects (such as
walls) appearing to be lit incorrectly. When
you are editing in a render view, or when you
have no lights, you probably want to turn off

Use Triangles.
Soft Shadows - Only used when Shadows
are turned on, this significantly slows down
the rendering speed. To save time, only use
this option for final images, and consider
Raytracing as an alternative way to generate
a high-quality image.
Surface Backdrop - For some OpenGLaccelerated video cards, this option
drastically increases your render speeds.
When turned on, this option creates surfaces
the backdrop is drawn on. When this option
is turned off, the backdrop is send directly to
the video card. For most modern video cards,
Off is the recommended setting.
Use Optimizations - Many OpenGLaccelerated video cards are capable of
optimizing the view for subsequent
redraws. Use of this option varies from video
card to video card.
In general, you should leave this option
turned on unless you are experiencing
crashes when rendering.
Smooth Edges - Only use this option for
final views, as this slows down even the
fastest video card.
Show Shadows - This should only be used
for final views, unless you have an extremely
fast OpenGL-accelerated video card.
771
Render
Views
In general, you should make sure you are

only using a minimum number of lights to
cast shadows.
Use Textures - Some older video cards slow
down significantly using textures. Look at
your Render> Texture Filter settings; some
video cards perform significantly faster using
either Nearest or Linear texture filters
instead of using a mip-mapping filter.
In addition, the number of light sources in a
plan can drastically affect rendering speed,
especially if you are using shadows. Light
sources are added by selecting 3D>
Lighting> Add Lights and can be removed
by clicking the light source in floor plan view
and deleting it.
Higher Quality Rendering
appear to illuminate objects properly.

Generally speaking the smaller you set your
Triangle Size, the slower the render, but the
higher-quality result you can achieve.
Texture Filters - Mip-mapping, though
slightly slower on older video cards, greatly
improves the appearance of scenes where
objects are far away.
Use Transparency - Necessary to display
transparent or semi-transparent surfaces in a
render view.
Smooth Edges - Though slow, this can
significantly improve the quality of a final
view.
To generate a high-quality picture of
your scene, consider Raytracing. See
Use Triangles - when you have lights in your

scene, triangles are used to make those lights
Light Sources
Lighting is extremely important in render
views, raytracing, and VRML file export.
Even small changes can have a large impact
on image quality.
In render views, lighting calculations are
done on a room-by-room basis; only the
lights in the room containing the camera are
used. When the camera is outside a building,
the program normally uses sunlight for
lighting calculations. In this case, all the
other lights are turned off.
It is possible to turn the sunlight off and to
have all the other exterior lights turned on to
simulate night time views. The sun can be
controlled like other light types.
772
The maximum number of light sources that

can be turned on in a room at the same time
is determined by your video card. See
Render Panel on page 211. If eight is your
maximum number of lights, the program
only uses the eight light sources closest to the
cameras position for its lighting
calculations. You can manually turn on and
off certain lights in order to get desired
lighting effects. See Adjusting Lights on
page 778 for more information.
Ambient Lights
Ambient light is additive to other lights in a
room or scene. Ambient light settings are
controlled on the Options tab of the 3D

Settings dialog. Select 3D> 3D Settings...
to access the dialog. Here you can adjust
the ambient light settings, which affect the
overall brightness of a render view. Too
much ambient light can give the 3D view a
flatter look.
Interior Ambient controls the light when a
View is inside the model.
Daytime Ambient controls the light when
you are outside the model and Toggle Sunlight is on.
Nighttime Ambient controls the light when

you are outside the model and Toggle Sunlight is off.
Ambient light is used to simulate the way
that light bounces around a scene. Ambient
light approximates this by simply ensuring
that all objects are at least as bright as the
appropriate ambient value. To create a more
realistic model of how light bounces around
a scene, use Raytracing with Radiosity. See,
Light Types
In addition to the ambient light levels
specified in the 3D Settings dialog, there
are four additional ways to create light
sources for render or raytrace views:
Default Lights
Light Fixtures
Added Lights
Sunlight
Each individual light has a set of Rendering

properties that can be defined.
You can adjust a lights color, intensity,
attenuation (which affects how quickly the
light drops in intensity over distance) and
control whether it casts shadows and whether
the light is on or off.
There are three possible types of light
sources that can be used to specify how a
light is calculated by the Renderer:
See Defining Light Types on page 777.
Default Lights
If you create an interior render view and no
user defined lights exist, the program creates
a Default Light source within the room. The
Default Interior light acts like a central point
source.
It cannot be adjusted in any way. If you want
control over the light sources in your interior
render views, you must add a light to the
room that you are rendering by placing a
lighting fixture or by adding a light source
using 3D> Lighting> Add Lights
Light Fixtures
Parallel Light sources
Point Light sources
Electric symbols placed in floor plan view

that represent a Light Fixture may create
one or more light sources in render and
raytrace views. The light type and properties
for each fixture can be modified by selecting
Spot Light sources.
the fixture, clicking the Open Object
773
Render
Views
Light Types
edit button, and opening the Electrical

Service Specification dialog to the Render Data tab. See Electrical Service
Use the "Light" drop-down to choose which
of the fixture lights you want to edit. You can
then specify the Light Type - (parallel, point,
or spot), the Color, Intensity, and adjust the
Offsets to determine the light position
relative to the fixture.
3D> Lighting> Add Lights allows

you to quickly add a light source in the
floor plan view. Added lights display 2D
symbols in floor plan view and serve as
sources of light in the render and raytrace
views, but do not display as objects in 3D.
Added lights can be placed into objects that
normally do not generate light, such as a TV.
Offset From Base controls how far the light

source is relative to the position of the fixture
base. The fixture base is determined by the
surface that it is attached to, (i.e. wall, floor,
or ceiling).
To add a Parallel Light
Offset in X/Offset in Y are only available

when you are not editing a wall-mounted
fixture. These allow you to position the light
relative to the center of the fixture, along the
floor/ceiling.
Offset up Wall/Offset Along Wall are only
available when you are editing a wallmounted fixture. These allow you to set the
lights distance up/down the wall, and left/
right along the wall.
If the light source is a Point or Spot Light,
you can define its offset relative to the fixture
base. For instance, if the fixture is on the
ceiling you may want to set the Height Offset
field to move the light source down to the
location where the bulb might be in real life.
By using Show Position in Render View
you can tell where in the scene your light is
located.
Due to limitations in the OpenGL lighting
model, and limitations of raytracing, lighting
looks most realistic if it is offset from a
surface.
774
Added Lights
1.
Select 3D> Lighting> Add Lights
2.
Click and drag in floor plan view.
3.
When you release the mouse, a parallel

light pointing in the direction that you
dragged is created.
Parallel Lights can be added to the exterior or

interior of a model.
To create a Point Light source
1.
Select 3D> Lighting> Add Lights
2.
Click in floor plan view. Do not drag the

pointer when you click the screen, or
you create a parallel light source.
To create a Spot Light source

1.
Create a Parallel or Point Light source.
2.
Select the light and open it for specification.
3.
Change its Type to Spot Light in the
Light Specification dialog.
Sun Angles
A Sun Angle arrow is a marker that
displays in floor plan view and indicates the angle of the sun at a specific time
and location on the Earth. Multiple Sun
Angles can be created in floor plan view,
each with different specifications.
A Sun Angles position is specified by Latitude and Longitude. The following table lists
a sample of latitude and longitude values for
some cities:
Sun Angles are parallel light sources. Their

location and direction are defined per plan.
To accurately define the Suns location
relative to the model, use a North Pointer
. See North Pointer on page 849.
When rendering an exterior view, the
program looks for the Sun Angle that is
turned on. If you have multiple Sun Angles,
select the one you want to use and turn it on
on the Render tab of the Sun Angle
Specification dialog. Verify that all others
are turned off and the program render sthe
correct Sun Angle. If a Sun Angle does not
exist, the program uses the Default Sun.
To create a Sun Angle
1.
2.
Make the first floor or foundation level

the current floor. Sun Angles can only be
created on these floor levels.
In floor plan view, select CAD> Special> Sun Angle
and click the
screen where the Sun Angle arrow
should display.
3.
4.
In the Sun Angle Specification dialog, specify the Sun Angles Earth Data
and other information. See Sun Angle
After it is created, a Sun Angle can be
moved to a different location in floor
plan view. Shadows are not affected.
3D> Lighting> Toggle Sunlight

controls the display of either the
Default Sun or the current Sun Angle as a
source of light.
Default Sun Light

If you create an exterior render view and no
Sun Angle
exists, the program creates a
Default Sun. The Default Sun acts like a sun
but its location is not based on any real world
locations.
The Default Sun can be opened for
specification in a render view by selecting
3D> Lighting> Adjust Lights
. If there
are no other lights in the view, the default
suns Light Specification dialog opens.
See Light Specification Dialog on page
781.
775
Render
Views
Light Types
If there are other lights in the scene, but no

Sun Angles, the Adjust Lights dialog
opens. Select Default Sun from the list of
available light sources and click Adjust to
open the suns Light Specification
dialog. See Adjusting Lights on page 778.
The Default Sun acts like a parallel light

source. In the Default Suns Light
Specification dialog, you can specify:
Intensity
Color
Tilt Angle
March 1, 2007
Dir Angle
12 p.m. (noon)
On
Coeur dAlene, ID
Casts Shadows
Soft Shadows
Sun angle for:
If you place a Sun Angle

in floor plan
view, the Default Sun can no longer be used
as a light source in exterior render views
unless the Sun Angles light is turned off.
To display shadows created by a Sun Angle

1.
On the Render tab of the Preferences

dialog, check Show Shadows for Preview and/or Final View. See Render
Panel on page 211.
2.
Select a Sun Angle and click the Open

Object
Shadows
3.
Sun Angles
allow the shadow cast by a
building at any time of the year to be displayed in floor plan and render views.
edit button.
On the Render Data tab of the Sun

Angle Specification dialog, make
sure that Casts Shadows is checked.
4.
To display the shadow in floor plan

view, click the Make Shadow button on
the Earth Data tab.
Multiple Sun Angles can be placed in the

same plan to allow the simultaneous display
of shadows cast at different times in floor
plan view.
Specify different line colors and/or
styles for shadows cast by multiple Sun
Angles on the Line Style tab of the Sun
Angle Specification dialog.
776
If no Terrain Perimeter has been created,

shadows fall on an imaginary plane at height
zero, the default height for the first floor. If a
Terrain Perimeter exists, shadows are modified to indicate where the real shadow would
fall on the actual terrain.
In floor plan view, select and delete the

defining polyline.
In floor plan view, select and delete the

Sun Angle arrow.
In the Sun Angle Specification dialog, click the Delete Shadow button.
Deleting Shadows
In the Sun Angle Specification dialog, click Make shadow to delete the
existing and create a new shadow.
There are several ways to delete the shadow

created by a Sun Angle.

Each light type may be defined as modelling
either a Point Light source, a Parallel Light
source, or a Spot Light source. These
definitions can be assigned and modified to
create many different lighting effects.
Parallel Lights
A Parallel Light has a direction but
no position. The light appears to
illuminate all objects with equal intensity, as
if it were at an infinite distance from the
object. A Parallel Light source is commonly
used to simulate distant light sources, such as
the sun. It is the best choice of light to use for
maximum speed generating render views.
Parallel Light sources are represented in
floor plan view by three arrows. To modify
the light, double-click it or select it, then
edit button. The
Light Specification dialog opens,
allowing you to modify the lights

characteristics. Any light source can be
changed into a Parallel Light source by
changing its light type in the Light
Point Lights
Like a bare light bulb, a Point Light
radiates light equally in all directions
from its origin. It slows rendering
down, but it is a more realistic representation
of electric lighting and should be used where
visual fidelity is the deciding concern.
If no user defined light exists, Chief
Architect creates a Point Light source to
represent a light within a room. Any light
source, except a sun angle, can be changed
into a Point Light source by changing its
light type in the specification dialog.
To modify the light, double-click it (or select
it, then click the Open Object
edit
button). The Light Specification dialog
opens.
Spot Lights
A Spot Light focuses the light in a
specified direction. The location,
cone angle, direction and intensity
of a Spot Light can be defined. Spot Lights
cannot be placed directly in the plan. They
are created by changing an existing lights
777
Render
Views
specification. Once defined as a Spot Light,

the direction of a spot light can be changed in
the Light Specification dialog or for an
added light source, by rotating the light in

floor plan view.
Adjusting Lights
Once lights have been added to the
model, they can be accessed and edited
using the Adjust Lights dialog. Select 3D>
Adjust Lights to open this dialog in floor

plan or any 3D view.
Adjust Lights Dialog
All lights in the plan appear in the list. Check

the box beside a light to turn it on or uncheck
the box to turn it off.
To adjust the properties of a specific light,
select that light in the list and click Adjust.
The Light Specification dialog opens.

Make changes to the light and click OK.
Select another light to adjust or click Done.
If you are in a render view, the view will
regenerate based on the new light settings.

Select CAD> Lines> Sun Angle, then
click anywhere in floor plan view to
open the Sun Angle Specification dialog
and create a new sun angle. See Sun Angle
on page 850.
778
You can also open the Sun Angle

Specification dialog for an existing sun
angle by selecting it and clicking the Open
Object
edit button.
Render
Views
Earth Data Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
1 Latitude is measured North or South of

the equator.
2 Longitude is measured West or East of

the Greenwich meridian.
Common values for latitude, longitude can

be found in any atlas.
3 Date - Enter a date for each arrow you

create.
4 Time - Enter a time for each arrow you
create. Define whether or not it should

be adjusted to allow for Daylight Savings
Time.
5 Time Zone - Specify the time zone.

The previous values default to the settings on the Special CAD panel of the
Preferences dialog.
10
11
12
6 In the lower part of the Sun Angle
Specification dialog is a section displaying the calculated angles.
The Solar altitude angle displays the angle

of the sun in degrees above the horizontal
plane.
The Solar direction angle shows the angle
between true north and the sun's direction.
This is the angle the Sun Angle arrow displays in floor plan view.
This angle is always measured relative to
north. North is defined by a user specified
North Pointer . If you have not created a
North Pointer, north is assumed to be straight
up in the floor plan view. If a North Pointer is
drawn, or the direction of an existing North
Pointer is changed, Sun Angles and their
shadows automatically update.
779
7 Always Update - Select the check box
to have the program update the shadow

for this arrow whenever any of the defining
information is changed. When checked, it
slows the system down while the Sun
Angle Specification dialog is displayed.
If this is not checked, click the Make
Shadow button to generate a new shadow
based on the new information.
Show Date on Sun Angle - Select the
check box to have the date and time display on the Sun Angle arrow in the floor plan
view.
noon to test the function. If the shadow

appears, your original time setting was too
early or too late to generate shadows.
Note that the Make Shadow option does not
affect the Render view. To turn shadows on
and off for the Render view, use the Render
tab.
12 Delete shadow - Removes the sun
shadow generated using Make Shadow

from the floor plan view.
Render Data Tab
9 Auto Rebuild Terrain - Select the
check box to rebuild the terrain

automatically whenever you create a sun
shadow.
If the Auto Rebuild Terrain check box is
checked, then if you rebuild the sun shadow,
the terrain automatically rebuilds as needed
before the sun shadow generates. If this
check box is unchecked, you are prompted to
rebuild the terrain.
Note that when you use the Build Terrain
command in floor plan view, all sun shadows
in the plan are automatically updated.
10 Length of Plan Symbol - Enter the
length of the Sun Angle arrow for floor

plan view.
11 Make shadow - Click the button to calculate the shadow on screen. The shadow is a
polyline filled with a hatch pattern derived
from the Sun Angle direction.
No shadow generates if the sun is not above
the horizon or if the sun is so low on the horizon that the shadow would be extremely
long. If no shadow appears, reset the time to
780
3
4
You can define if the Sun Angle is used as a
light source in render views. Set the parameters here if you want to use the Sun Angle as
a light source in render views.
The settings defined on the Render Data tab
are not related to how the shadow is displayed in floor plan view. They only affect
render views.
1 On - Check this box to select the cur-
rent Sun Angle as a rendering light

source. If there is more than one defined Sun
Angle, the renderer selects the first Sun
Angle that is defined as On. To make sure
you are rendering the correct Sun Angle,
make sure all others do not have this box
checked.
this light source cast shadows. These

shadows are similar to the shadow shown in
floor plan view, but they may render differently based on other light sources.
3 Intensity - Use this slider bar to define
the relative intensity of the light source.

Time of day as set on the Earth Data tab,
does not affect how the Sun Angle renders as
a light source, but this does.
4 Color - Select a color for the light

source.
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab


Select a parallel, point or spot light and click
the Open Object
Light Specification dialog.
You can also select 3D> Adjust Lights

to access a list of the light sources present in
the current plan and open the specification
dialog for any of them. See Adjust Lights
Dialog on page 778.
In addition, you can right-click on a light in
an unlocked library (see Adding to the
Library on page 674) or click on it and
select Library> Edit Light Data to open a
version of the Light Specification dialog
that is similar to the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See Light Data
Tab on page 531.
781
Render
Views
2 Casts Shadow - Check here to have
Light Specification
1
2
3
4
5
11
6
7
8
13
12
14
10
15
Depending on the type of light selected, the

options available may vary.
1 Type - Select a source type for the light.
Available source types are Point Light,

Spot Light, and Parallel Light. The selections
in the dialog are affected by the Type that
you select. Each type of light source behaves
differently but they have some rendering
properties in common. See Defining Light
Types on page 777.
2 Auto Intensity - Select the check box
to have the program set intensities for

each light in the render view. When you
select Auto Intensity the program provides
an average intensity to render with
reasonable lighting effects. If you clear the
check box, the slider bar controls how bright
the light appears in the render view.
782
Lights that have an intensity of 0% are the

same as lights that are turned off. Lights that
have an intensity of 100% have the
maximum brightness allowed. If you have
multiple lights in a room all set to maximum
intensity, it is possible to have too much light
for a realistic View. Colors and textures
become washed out if there is too much light.
3 Color - Click the rectangle to define the
color of the light being modeled.

Colored lights may be used to achieve
special lighting effects. They alter the
appearance of your material colors and
textures.
The default color of light is pure white,

which has the least affect on the material
colors and textures.
4 Attenuated - Check this box to control
how the quickly the light intensity

drops off as a result of the distance from the
light source. Only Spot and Point Lights can
have attenuation values set.
The three edit values represent the three
coefficients (a, b, and c) in the expression:
where d is the distance from the light source.

Increasing any of these values results in the
light intensity dropping off faster (the light
does not travel as far). Decreasing any value
results in the light intensity dropping off
slower, (the light travels farther). Small
changes in these coefficients can have
significant impact on lighting effects. Some
experimentation should be done to fully
understand how to use them.
5 Floor Number - Define where the
symbol for an added light displays in

floor plan views.
The Floor Number controls which floor plan
the added light symbol is drawn on. If you
assign the number of a non-existent floor,
you cannot see the light and you cannot
delete that light.
A floor number of -1 draws the light symbol
on all floors, a value of 1 draws the light
symbol on the first floor. The floor number
has no effect on the light height. Set the
number equal to the floor plan that contains
the room that the light is in, if you want it to
display in floor plan view.
6 Height - Define a height for the light.

Heights of Added lights are always
relative to the first floor. If you want an
Added light to display in a room on the

second floor you must enter a height value
that includes the first floor. A value of 0
equals the floor elevation of the first floor.
7 Tilt Angle - The Tilt Angle is used to
control the angle of the light with

respect to the horizon. A value of -90 degrees
means that the light is pointing straight down
and a value of 90 degrees means that the light
is pointing straight up. 0 degrees is parallel to
the horizon.
8 Dir Angle - Defines the angle that a
Parallel or Spot Light is pointed along.

Zero degrees is measured horizontally on
your screen pointing to the right. Positive
values rotate in a counter-clockwise direction
from there. Enter a value up to 360 degrees.
If you enter a negative value, the program
uses Zero.
Direct a Spot Light in floor plan view by
selecting and dragging the rotate handle.
9 Cut Off Angle - The Cut Off Angle
controls the angle of the cone of light

for Spot Lights only. A cone angle of 180
degrees would create a Spot Light that shines
on one side of the lights position,
representing a half sphere. A small cone
angle, say 10 degrees, would create a very
narrow cone of light. The cut off angle
should always be between 0 and 180 degrees.
The cut off angle for an added light can be
defined in the floor plan view by dragging
the handles at the ends of the cone lines in or
out.
10 Drop Off Rate - This affects how fast
the light intensity drops off from the

center of the cone of light to the outside
edge. This is only available for Spot Lights.
783
Render
Views
The default value for this is set to 7.5, which

means the light drops off fairly quickly. It is
not useful to set this value too low because
there are limitations in the OpenGL lighting
model that result in jagged looking circles of
light when they are shining on large flat
surfaces. Appearances can be improved by
decreasing the Maximum Triangle Size and
increasing the Drop off Rate but it is
impossible to get a nice sharp circle of light
using current methods under OpenGL.
11 Soft Shadows (raytracing) - This
allows you to set how a light casts soft

shadows in a Raytrace view. Setting the
Light Size determines how big the light
should appear. A size of zero indicates a true
point light source, while a size of 3 indicates
a larger source such as a lightbulb. Setting
the Softness determines how many iterations
the raytracer should go through to soften the
light. This value determines the quality of the
raytrace, but also slows down the raytrace. It
is not recommended to use values greater
than 2 or 3, unless the Light Size is very
large.
12 On - This controls whether or not the
light should be used for lighting effects

in the render view. The default is On.
13 Casts Shadows - Controls whether or
not the light casts shadows when

Shadows are turned on in a render view.
It is recommended that you only use one, or

at most two lights to casts shadows at a time.
Shadow calculations are very complicated
and can slow rendering significantly.
14 Show Position in Render View -
Check this box to display an indicator

where a light source is actually positioned in
a render view. The light position indicator is
only drawn when the light is "On" and only
for positional lights such as "point" or "spot"
lights. This tool can be used to determine if
your light source is positioned correctly.
15 Use in Real-Time Rendering/Use in
Raytracing/Use in Both - These

options allows you to specify whether a light
is used only in a raytrace view, only in a
render view, or used in both views. Raytrace
views can handle many more lights than
render views, and some fixtures may have
four or five lights in a raytrace view while
only one in a render view. Be warned that the
more lights you use in either view, the slower
the time to generate that view.
Layer Tab
784

Click the Cross Section Slider
button in
a render view to open the Cross Section
Slider dialog.
Choose one of the cross section angles and

move the Position slide to adjust the position
of the cutting plane. Select the option at top
right to turn off the cutting plane.
785
Render
Views
786
Chapter 29:
Raytracing
Raytracing
Chapter Overview
Raytracing is a technology that allows the
creation of highly realistic images from your
Chief Architect plans. Rendering draws your
model onto the screen, while raytracing
actually traces the rays of light from your
camera as they bounce around and reflect in
the 3D model. As a result, raytracing is
slower than OpenGL rendering, but can be
used to achieve much more complex effects
such as reflections and highly realistic

lighting.
Chapter Contents
Creating a Raytrace View

The Raytrace Window
Creating Materials for Raytracing
Tips and Tricks
POV-Ray

To create a raytraced image in Chief
Architect, begin with a render view.
The camera position, orientation, and field of
view of the render view determine the way
the scene appears in the raytrace window.
None of the other render settings, including
your render preferences, are used for
generating a raytrace view.
The lighting used in a raytrace view is also
different than the lighting used in render
views. In raytrace views, lights are not

limited to the current room; instead, all the
lights currently modeled in the plan are used,
as long as the light has been turned on in
its specification dialog and has been set to
Use in Raytracing.
Unlike a render view, a raytrace view has no
limit on the number of lights that can be used
to create a scene.
787
In a render view, select 3D> Raytrace

The more lights that are turned on and
set for use in raytracing, the longer it
takes to raytrace a scene.
Current Render View

to begin
raytracing. The Raytrace Options dialog
opens.
Raytrace Options Dialog
3
4
5
6
Raytrace Properties
1 Width/Height The size, in pixels, of
the image you are about to create. You

can set these values to virtually anything you
want, but images larger than 2000 x 2000
pixels cannot be viewed from within Chief
Architect and must be saved directly to a
.bmp file.
Retain Aspect Ratio - Check this box to
maintain the width to height ratio of the
788
original image and prevent the raytrace from

being stretched or distorted.
Use Render Window Size - Check this box
to set the raytrace to the size of the render
window. If you change the size of the render
window, subsequent raytraces are also the
new size.
Save Raytrace to File Save the raytrace
image directly to a file while it raytraces. The
only supported file format is the Windows
Bitmap (.bmp) format. Saving as a file is the
Raytrace Parameters
Medium Quality - This option should

only be used for images where Low Radiosity is insufficient, as it is more timeconsuming.
High Quality - Extremely time-consuming and only necessary for the most discerning tastes. High Radiosity often takes
hours to render what takes minutes using
Low Radiosity.
2 Radiosity Radiosity is slower, but
produces a much more realistic lighting

model than standard raytracing. Without
radiosity, the raytracer uses a lighting model
similar to a render view, which uses a
constant value for ambient lights. Unlike the
constant Ambient Lighting model that
assumes any object not directly exposed to a
light is a pre-set brightness, Radiosity traces
light as it bounces around a scene, capturing
the subtle variations in shadows.
Without Radiosity
Time of Day Similar to the Daytime/

Nighttime setting in Render views, this
allows you to choose whether to render a
daytime or a nighttime image.
Anti-Aliasing This setting determines
what quality of smooth edges to create in
your raytraced image. The High Quality
setting is somewhat slower than the Normal
quality setting. This is similar to the Smooth
Edges option used in render views. See
Faster Rendering on page 771.
3 The Sunlight Contribution options are
With Radiosity
available when a Radiosity setting other

than None is used, and allow the ability to
have light coming directly from the sun, as
well as light scattered through the clouds.
Direct Sunlight allows you to brighten the
intensity of the light coming from the sun.
The following options allow you to adjust

how Radiosity works in the scene:
None - Uses an ambient lighting model

similar to the render view.
Low Quality - This option should provide reasonable image quality for most
images, though the results may appear
Diffuse Sunlight allows you to brighten the

intensity of the light from the surrounding
atmosphere. For a cloudy day, you might turn
up the diffuse sunlight, and turn down the
direct sunlight.
4 Use Soft Shadows You can specify
soft shadow settings for each light in

the Adjust Lights dialog. See Adjusting
Lights on page 778. These settings only
789
Raytracing
blotchy. This is the fastest Radiosity

option.
only way to produce a final image larger than

the Chief Architect view window.
take effect if you enable Use Soft Shadows.

Soft shadows may slow image generation.
been added, the program creates a Default

Configuration.
5 Create Default Light If you have no
You can add your preferred raytrace

configurations to your template plan.
SeeTemplate Files on page 167 .
lights in your scene, the raytracer

creates one for you if the scene is indoors and
this box is checked.
Raytrace Configurations
6 A Raytrace Configuration is a group
To add a configuration
1.
Click New. A configuration called

Copy of Default Configuration
appears in the list. When you add additional configurations, they are called
Copy of and the name of the configuration that is currently selected.
of raytrace settings. Configurations are

saved with the plan and can be reused.
Select a configuration from the dropdown list.
Click the New button to create a new

configuration.
2.
Give this new configuration a short,

descriptive name.
Click the Delete button to delete the

selected configuration from the list. This
button is not available if there is only one
configuration in the list.
3.
Make any desired changes to the Raytrace Options settings in this dialog.
4.
Click Save to keep this configuration

with the plan.
5.
To reuse this configuration, select it

from the drop-down list.
The existing configurations are shown on the

drop-down list. There must always be at least
one configuration available. If none have
The Raytrace Window

If your raytraced image is small enough to fit
in a window, your image appears as it is
created. Unlike render views, you can
minimize your raytrace window or perform
other tasks while the raytrace is progressing.
Simply restore your raytrace window when
you are ready to view your image.
The following options are available from the
raytrace window:
Select File> Print Image to print your
picture.
790
Select File> Save Image to save your picture

to any of several file formats including .jpg,
.bmp, and .png.
Adjust Image Properties

A raytracer mimics a camera while it
generates your image. Select File>
Adjust Image Properties to open the
Adjust Image Properties dialog and
adjust the camera lens aperture, which affects
brightness, and as film speed, which affects
contrast. This can be done during the

There are several properties of materials that
only come into effect when you are doing a
raytraced image. To view the effect of your
material settings in a raytrace, you can use
the Show Preview option on the Raytrace

tab in the Plan Material dialog. See
Raytrace Tab
1
2
3
4
5
The Raytrace tab controls how materials

appear in raytrace views. Modifying these
values has no effect on vector or render
views. You can activate the raytrace preview
window by clicking the Show Preview

button.
791
Raytracing
raytrace process or when the raytrace is

completed.
2 Reflectivity - This controls how
reflective the material appears in

raytrace views. Push the slide bar all the way
to the right to simulate a highly reflective
material such as a mirror. For more accuracy,
enter a value in the edit box.
3 Use Bump Map - A bump map is an
image file used to make a material

appear non-flat where light hits it. For more
information on bump maps, see Raytracing
on page 787. To create a bump map, turn on
Use Bump Map and select a bump map to
use. Any image file or texture can be used as
a bump map, with dark areas of the image
corresponding to low points in the bump
map, and brighter areas corresponding to
high points.
4 Bump Height allows you to specify
how drastic the effect of the bump map

is. The Ratio and Stretch to Fit options
work for bump maps the same way that they
do for textures. If you are using a texture and
a bump map, they both use the same values
for Ratio and Stretch to Fit.
5 Material is translucent - A translucent
material allows light to pass through it,

but still appears in the image. An example of
a translucent material is a lampshade.
Translucency is an effect that looks best
when rendering with Radiosity.
6 Transparency Filters Light A
material that filters light acts like a

stained-glass window. A material that does
not filter light simply transmits it, such as
white tissue paper.
Tips and Tricks

Faster Raytracing
Calculating a realistic image can take time,
but there are several things to think about
before you raytrace that can drastically
reduce your raytrace time.
Without the appropriate setup, a scene
that should take five minutes to raytrace
can quite literally take five to ten days. These
tips can help you reduce raytrace times so
you can get the image you want, when you
want it.
Number of Lights Unlike a render view,

which can support only a limited number of
lights, a raytrace view can handle as many
lights as you like. Leaving the lights on is the
number one cause of slow raytracing.
792
Use the Adjust Lights dialog available in

render or floor plan views to turn off any
lights that are not important to your scene.
Remember that most lights are on by
default.
Radiosity Quality For simple scenes, Low
Quality Radiosity is usually sufficient. High
Quality Radiosity is extremely timeconsuming and only necessary for very
complicated scenes where Low or Medium
radiosity is not sufficient.
If your image is very large, or if you have
complicated aspects such as grills or grates,
you may want to try Medium radiosity.
Always try Low radiosity first to see if you
get the desired result.
Tips and Tricks
Image size is a significant factor in

determining raytrace speed. Only raytrace
your full image when you are certain that
your scene lighting is correct.
It may be helpful to create a configuration for
previews so you do not have to reset all the
options each time. See Raytrace
Anti-Aliasing Level Anti-aliasing works
to smooth edges that otherwise would appear
jagged. High-quality anti-aliasing is most
useful when you are raytracing a smaller
picture that contains a very complicated
scene. If you are raytracing a very large
picture, you probably only need low-quality
anti-aliasing.
Bump Maps Bump map calculation is
time-consuming and should only be used as
necessary.
Soft Shadows Soft shadow calculation is
time-consuming and should only be used as
necessary. Only enable soft shadows for
lights whose shadows are significant to the
scene you are raytracing.
Raytrace Quality
It is not hard to create an image that looks
reasonably realistic with raytracing, but
producing an image that really looks like a
photograph takes extra attention to detail.
Here are a few tips for achieving the most
photo-realistic images possible:
Use Radiosity - Although slower, radiosity

adds significant depth to the scene by
simulating the way that light works in the
real world. Radiosity is especially effective
in scenes with a fair number of shadows.
Use Reflections For outdoor scenes,
ensure that your windows are slightly
reflective. You may want to set up a building
across the street that, though not in the scene,
appears in the reflections in the windows.
Especially important are partly reflective
materials on objects such as stovetops, tile
floors, and coffee pots. The subtle effect of
the reflections help convince the viewers
eye that the picture is a real photograph.
Sunlight Settings The brightness of the
sun varies dramatically from climate to
climate, from cloudy day to sunny day. Use
the Direct/Diffuse Sunlight Settings to find
a setting that provides the appropriate
lighting for the scene you are rendering.
Lighting Lighting is an extremely
important tool for achieving high-quality
results. Work with the lighting of your scene
until you achieve something realistic.
Add 3D lights as necessary to capture the
effect you want. For lights that cast shadows
into the scene, consider soft shadows that
smooth the appearance of the scene lighting.
See Added Lights on page 774.
Finally, from the raytrace window, use the
File> Image Adjustment options to subtly
adjust the brightness of your finished
rendering. Dont be afraid to over-saturate
your image slightly in very bright areas this
is a common occurrence in actual
photographs.
Interior Shots - If you are raytracing an
interior radiosity view where the primary
793
Raytracing
Preview Your Raytrace When you are

setting up lighting for a scene, there is no
need to raytrace a full-screen image. Try
using a much smaller image size such as
300x200 that can give you the information
you need to determine whether lighting is
appropriate.
source of light is the sun through a window

or door, you probably need to adjust your
image brightness using File> Image
Adjustment in the raytrace window. You
may also need to use Medium radiosity
quality to ensure that the raytracer models
the light bouncing through the window
accurately.
Bump Maps Though the effect of bumpmaps are usually very subtle, they do add to
the impression that the scene is actually a

photograph. A tile floor that shades
appropriately to the lighting in the room, for
example, lends to an appearance of realism.
Emissive Materials A material with
emissive properties actually cast light into
the scene when Radiosity is used. This effect
can be used to achieve the subtle variations
of light seen in the real world.
POV-Ray
The Persistance of Vision Raytracer (POVRay) is a high-quality, yet entirely free
raytracer. The POV-Ray raytracer has been
used for over ten years to generate images of
virtually anything imaginable. POV-Ray has
even been used on the space shuttle!
Chief Architect uses POV-Ray to generate
raytraced images. It communicates with and
manages POV-Ray directly, so you do not
need to understand POV-Ray to create highquality, raytraced images from within Chief
Architect.
Hobbyist raytracers or those interested in the
highest possible visual quality may want to
learn about POV-Ray to take advantage of
the complete flexibility that it provides. For
more information on POV-Ray, or to
download the latest version, please visit the
POV-Ray Web site at www.povray.org.
794
Exporting to POV-Ray Format

Note: You do not need to export a POV-Ray
scene in order to raytrace in Chief Architect.
To use a Chief Architect scene in the POVRay raytracer, you can export your scene to
POV-Ray format (.pov) file. You must be in
a render view to export to POV-Ray format.
From the render view go to File> Export
, and choose POV-Ray (.POV) from the
list of file types.
When exporting to a POV-Ray file, you have
the option of including all the images that are
used in the scene. This makes a copy of the
necessary textures and images into the same
directory as the destination for your POVRay export.
Chapter 30:
Dimensions
Dimensions
Chapter Overview
Video: Dimensions
Chief Architect provides many dimensioning
tools. In addition, dimension lines can be
selected, edited, and customized. Extension
lines can also be customized using the mouse
or opened for specification.
You can accurately position objects relative
to other objects using the dimensions that
locate them.
Chapter Contents
Compatibility With Previous Versions

Dimension Defaults
The Dimension Tools
Displaying Dimension Lines
Editing Dimension Lines
Editing Extension Lines
Moving Objects Using Dimensions
Dimension Line Specification Dialog
Dimension Defaults Dialog
795
Compatibility With Previous Versions

Dimensions function differently in Versions
9.0 and later of Chief Architect than they did
in previous versions. Being familiar with
these changes is necessary if you plan to
open plans from earlier versions.
The Chief Version 8 Compatible Accuracy
option in the Dimension Defaults dialog
controls how Chief Architect handles
dimensions in legacy plans. This option is
checked by default for plans created in
earlier versions, and affects your available
options. See Dimension Defaults Dialog
on page 809.
In Version 8, extension lines had two modes:
normal and short. Version 9 and later offer
full control over extension lines. If Chief
Version 8 Compatible Extensions is
checked, you do not have this control. See
Extensions Tab on page 815.
Accuracy
Chief Architect uses a different method for
rounding dimensions than in prior versions.
Prior versions showed the distance between
equally spaced objects correctly, but
dimension runs werent always accurate
when added. In Versions 9 and later,
dimension runs always add up correctly.
Dimensioning the same object in different

ways obtains the same results as long as
objects are placed with the same accuracy as
the precision of the dimension lines. If an
object is placed using more precision than
the dimensions, results will vary between
methods.
An example is a 36 1/16 window centered
on a 20' wall.
.
Results with 16ths checked

in dimension defaults
Results with 16ths unchecked

in dimension defaults
A good approach to accurate dimensioning is to turn on the accuracy indicators and position objects so that the
inaccuracy indicators do not display. See
Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 809.
Dimension Defaults
796
Introductory Training Video: Dimension Defaults
double-clicking the Dimension Tools

parent button or any of its child buttons
Dimension Defaults can be accessed by

selecting Edit> Default Settings or by
(except Auto Exterior Dimensions
).
The Dimension Tools
The settings in the Dimension Defaults

dialog define the behavior and appearance of
dimensions. See Dimension Defaults
Dialog on page 809.
section/elevation views and a third affecting

CAD Details. Each dialog can be accessed
by opening the Dimension Defaults
dialog when that view type is active.
In each plan file, there are three different

Dimension Defaults dialogs: one that
affects floor plan view, one affecting cross
Dimensions can be drawn at the Allowed

Angles set in the Plan Defaults dialog. See
Introductory Training Video: Dimension Tools
in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See

Select CAD> Dimension to access the

Dimension tools.
Each manual dimension line can be edited

individually. See Editing Dimension Lines
on page 801.
With the exception of Angular Dimensions

, dimension lines only locate objects that
are parallel or nearly parallel to one another
and should be drawn orthogonal, or at right
angles, to the objects being located.
When Angle Snaps
are enabled,
dimension lines can be drawn at Allowed
Angles as specified in the Plan Defaults
dialog . See Angle Snaps on page 84.
Drag manual
dimension
The wall is 40 from where

the dimension was created.
This is too far so the dimen
sion cannot reach the wall.
The sink is within
reach so is located
Manual Dimensions
Video: Using the Manual Dimension
Tools
End-to-End Dimensions
To display the distance between two

objects, select CAD> Dimension>
Manual Dimension and drag a dimension
line near or through the objects.
Use the End-to-End Dimension tool

to dimension between any two defined
points or objects in floor plan view or in a
CAD Detail.
Manual Dimensions locate objects as

specified on the Locate Objects tab and lying
within the Manual Reach distance specified
Select CAD> Dimension> End-to-End

Dimension
, then drag the dimension
from the first object to the second object. The
797
Dimensions
The Dimension Tools
dimension line snaps to each object, ignoring

any other objects located between either end.
End-to-End Dimensions locate objects as
specified on the Locate Objects tab and lying
within the Manual Reach distance specified
in the Dimension Defaults dialog.
Angular Dimensions
The Angular Dimension tool displays
the angle between any two straight
edges, including lines, walls, the sides of
boxes, the straight sides of polylines,
cabinets, and soffits. Any straight line or side
within a CAD block can be dimensioned, as
well. Edges nested up to four levels deep
within a CAD block can be dimensioned.
Click the first line, then drag and release on
the second. The line start and end points
should be as close as possible to the objects.
Do not pull the angular dimension past the
object as you might with a normal straight
dimension line.
Angular dimensions can be selected and

moved by dragging from a handle along the
arc in its middle. The dimension moves to
maintain the location of its own arc center. If
one of the dimensioned objects is moved, the
angular dimension adjusts, but may have to
be moved manually to a more visible
position.
Interior Dimensions
Select CAD> Dimension> Interior
Dimension to create interior
dimensions. Draw a dimension line through
walls, at right angles only, to create interior
dimensions in floor plan view.
The Interior Dimension
tool locates
interior walls only. It does not dimension
between surfaces in the same wall. Allowed
dimension angles match the allowed wall
angles for each plan.
Interior Dimension locates either the wall
surface or the main layer, depending on the
settings in the Locate Objects tab of the
Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate
Objects Tab on page 812.
Point to Point Dimensions

As with a straight dimension line, an angular
dimension selected with other CAD objects
can be included in a new CAD block. When
the block is exploded the angular dimension
may become invalid and disappear when
edited or changed. If this occurs, the angular
dimension can be redrawn.
798
The Point to Point Dimension tool

dimensions between any two locations.
If you click or release the mouse within 3 of
an object using the Point to Point Dimension
tool, that object is located. If no
object can be found near the beginning or
end of the dimension line, a point marker is
created. Point markers have no text and
display as a + at either end of the
dimension line. See Markers on page 823.
The spacing between lines is the Line

Separation value, which is also used by
automatic dimensions. See Dimension
Point markers can be selected and edited. See
Editing Markers on page 823.
If the objects or point markers located by a
Point to Point Dimension
line are
moved, the dimension updates to reflect the
change.
Objects and point markers located by a Point
to Point Dimension
line can be
accurately relocated by specifying new
dimension values. See Moving Objects
Auto Exterior Dimensions

Introductory Training Video: Automatic Exterior Dimensions
Video: Creating Exterior Dimensions
Automatically
The Auto Exterior Dimension tool
generates dimensions around a plans
exterior in floor plan view. The dimension
lines locate walls and openings as specified
in Dimension Defaults dialog. See
Baseline Dimensions
The Baseline Dimension tool creates a
series of dimensions that all share the
same origin instead of continuing from each
previous location. Baseline Dimensions are
independent and can be edited separately.
Select CAD> Dimension> Baseline
Dimension
, click near an object in a
floor plan or cross section/elevation view,
and drag a dimension line near or through the
objects requiring dimensions.
Auto Exterior Dimensions do not generate properly if there is a gap in the

exterior walls. For example, sometimes
angled walls may not connect properly. If
automatic dimensions do not generate, try
Build> Wall> Fix Wall Connections .
These dimensions can be edited individually,

but all such editing is lost if Auto Exterior
Dimensions
are created again.
To save an automatic dimension line, convert

it to a manual dimension line by unchecking
Automatic in the Dimension Line
799
Dimensions
The Dimension Tools
Specification dialog. See Dimension

There are a maximum of three rows of
automatically generated dimensions per
exterior wall direction. The innermost
dimension line locates exterior walls, interior
walls, and all openings in exterior walls. The
second dimension line locates exterior and
interior walls. The outermost dimension line
is the overall exterior dimension.
Display Temporary
Dimensions
Select CAD> Dimension> Display
Temporary Dimensions or click the
toggle button to turn on or off the display of
temporary dimensions created when an

object is selected. This toggle affects all
views and is saved between launches of
Chief Architect.
As with other dimension lines, Temporary
Dimensions
only locate objects that are
parallel or nearly parallel to one another. A
temporary dimension will not display when
an object is selected if a manually drawn
dimension line locating the same object is
already present and is drawn parallel to the
temporary dimension that would be created.
You can control how temporary dimensions
locate objects in the Dimension Defaults.
See Dimension Defaults Dialog on page
809.
Displaying Dimension Lines

Video: Using the Manual Dimension
Tools
Dimension lines can display in CAD details,
floor plan, cross section/elevation, and layout
views, all of which are considered 2D views.
The display of dimension lines is controlled
Dimension
Lines
Extension
Lines
Dimension
Labels
Arrowheads
Dimension lines created by any of the

dimension tools share the same components.
Dimension Lines run parallel with the
distance being measured.
Extension Lines are perpendicular to
dimension lines, indicating where they begin
and end.
800
Arrowheads display at the intersections of

dimension and extension lines.
You can select the text and drag it away from

the dimension line using the move handle.
Dimension Labels display at the midpoint of

dimension lines and indicate the distance of
the dimension line.
You can customize the display of dimension

lines by placing them on different layers. See
Dimension Tab on page 807.

Video: Editing Dimensions and their
Extensions
Extension Line
Dimension lines can be selected and edited

using the mouse, the edit toolbar buttons, or
the Dimension Line Specification
dialog. See Dimension Line Specification
Dialog on page 807.
Move Dimension
Label
Move
Dimension line numbers and extension lines

can be moved and deleted individually and
new extension lines can be added.
Add Extension
Line
Extension Line
Edit Handles
Select a dimension line to display several
edit handles, each of which edits the line in a
different way. There are four types of
dimension line edit handles. More than one
of some types display, depending on how
many extension lines are present.
The Extension Line handles are used to

move or delete extension lines. See
Moving Extension Lines on page 803.
The Add Extension Line handle displays

to the side of the Move handle and is used
to add extension lines to the dimension
line. Dimension lines do not extend
unless an object can be located. See
Adding Extension Lines on page 802.
The small, square Move Dimension

Label handle is located at the center of
the selected label. Use this handle to
move the dimension number for each
dimension line section. The pointer
changes to a four-headed arrow
when
moved over this handle.
801
Dimensions
Rotate
The Move handle is located where you

clicked to select the dimension line and is
used to move the entire dimension line,
including any subsections, perpendicular
to itself. Extension lines are resized as
appropriate. The pointer changes to a
two-headed arrow
when moved over
this handle.
objects. See Editing Line Based Objects on

page 95.
Edit Dimension Ends
is useful for
locating a point on an object that it might not
locate otherwise, such as the corner of a
polyline.
The Rotate handle is located one plan

foot past the end of the dimension line
and is used to rotate the dimension line.
As you rotate, the dimension snaps to
objects within reach.
Edit Buttons
Dimension lines can be repositioned and
copied using the edit toolbar buttons much
the way other objects in the program are. See
and Editing Objects on page 79.
Click the Edit Dimension Ends edit
button to edit the dimension line using
edit handles similar to those on line based
Dimension lines like these require

edited dimension ends.
Click the Edit Extensions edit button
to edit the length of the selected
dimensions extension lines. See Editing
Extension Lines on page 802.

Extension lines can be added, edited, and
deleted using the mouse. Extension lines are
also affected by the settings on the Extension
tab of the Dimension Line
Specification dialog. See Extension Tab
on page 808.
Adding Extension Lines

To add an extension line
1.
802
Select the dimension line.
2.
Click the diamond-shaped Add Extension Line edit handle. The pointer
changes to a double-headed arrow .
3.
Drag the handle to the object that you

want to a new extension handle to
locate. This example adds an extension
line to the window edge.
4.
Release the mouse button to add an

extension line.
3.
Drag the handle to a new location. The

extension line snaps to possible marks as
the handle is moved.
4.
Release the mouse button at the new

location.
Moving Extension Lines

Extension lines can be moved to locate the
centers, sides, or surfaces of most objects. In
this example an extension line is moved from
the windows edge to the center.
To move an extension line
1.
2.
Dimension lines do not locate library

objects when the dimension is drawn,
but an extension line of an existing dimension
line can be moved or added to locate a library
object.
Select the dimension line it is connected

to, not the extension line itself.
Click the Extension Line edit handle.
The pointer changes to a two-headed
arrow .
Resizing Extension Lines

1.
Select the extension line or select the

dimension line and click the Edit
Extensions
edit button to display
two handles along the extension line.
803
Dimensions
To remove an extension line
2.
Click either handle, turning the pointer

into a two-headed arrow .
3.
Extend or contract the extension line and

release the mouse.
1.
Select the dimension line it is connected

to, not the extension line itself.
2.
Click the Extension Line edit handle.
3.
Drag it perpendicular to the direction of

the arrows, away from any dimensionable object, and release the button when
the extension line disappears.
Deleting Extension Lines

When an extension line is deleted, the
remaining dimensions update.

Video: Positioning Walls Precisely
Using Dimensions
Most objects can be moved by changing an
automatic, manual or temporary dimension
value that locates it. This technique can be
applied in nearly any situation where
dimensions are present, including angular
dimensions.
Your pointer indicates which dimensions can
be used to relocate the selected object by
changing to a pointing hand icon. Another
way to tell is to select an object and drag it in
the desired direction. As you drag, note
which dimensions update. These dimensions
804
are the dimensions that can be used to move

that object.
To move an object using dimensions
1.
Select the object and click on a dimension line that locates it.
2.
The Move Object Using

Dimension dialog shows the Previous
Displayed Distance as it appears in the
current view, as well as the Actual Distance in units specified in the Number
Style/Angle Style dialog. See Number Style/Angle Style Dialog on page
873.
house in one direction. Relocate one wall at a

time in succession so that you do not redefine
the same dimension more than once.
Resizing exterior dimensions may be
easier after windows, doors and interior
walls have been placed.
3.
Enter a value in the New Distance field.

Values followed by an apostrophe (single prime) are in feet. Values followed
by quotes (double prime) are in inches.
Lone values are in inches.
4.
Some objects can be selected by a particular edge. Select Move edge to move
the selected edge only or select Move
entire object to move the entire object.
5.
The selected object or edge moves when

you click OK.
6.
If Bumping/Pushing
is enabled, the
object being moved will bump into any
objects in its move path and not move
the entire distance. Hold down the Ctrl
key when you press OK to override this
move restriction. See Bumping/Pushing on page 124.
Sketch the general shape of the house

using Build> Wall> Straight Exterior
Wall
. Generate exterior dimensions
using CAD> Dimensions> Auto Exterior Dimension .
2.
Select a wall, click a related dimension,

enter a new value, and click OK.
If the Move Object Using Dimension

dialog is appearing when you are trying
to edit another object using edit handles, hold
down the Shift key to prevent the dimension
line from being clicked.
Resizing a House Using

Exterior Dimensions
When resizing a house using dimensions, it
is important to work your way around the
805
Dimensions
1.
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3, adjusting each wall

sequentially as you work your way
around the house in one direction.
Using Angular Dimensions

Angular Dimensions
are useful for
adjusting the angles of CAD lines and walls.
To change an angular dimension
3.
Select CAD> Dimension> Automatic

Exterior Dimension
1.
Draw the angular dimension line, beginning and ending the line on the objects
you want to move.
2.
Select the edge that you want to move.
again.
3.
806
Click the dimension value to open the
Set Angular Dimension dialog.
The Set Angular Dimension dialog indicates the Previous Value in degrees, minutes
and seconds.
Enter a value in the New Value field.
5.
Select Rotate Edge to move the selected

edge when you click OK, or select
6.
Dimensions
4.
Rotate entire polyline to rotate the

entire object the selected edge is a part
of, maintaining the previous value of the
angle.
Click OK to apply the change.

To open the Dimension Line
Specification dialog, double-click a
dimension line or group of dimension lines

edit button.
dimension line using the Select Objects

or Manual Dimension
tool, or select a
Dimension Tab
1
3
2
4
807
1 Number Height - Define a new
number height for the selected

dimension. Type d in the box to reset the
number size to the default.
2 Inches Only - Check this box to change
from feet and inches to inches only.

Uncheck it to show that dimension in feet
and inches. This is only available in plans
using Imperial units.
3 External Only - Check this box to

suppress those portions of the
dimension line that stretch between two

surfaces of the same wall. It still locates both
sides of the interior walls but not the wall
thickness.
4 Automatic - Check this box to change
a manual dimension line to an

automatic dimension line or vice versa. An
automatically produced dimension line that
is changed to a manual one is not deleted
when automatic dimensions are produced
again.
Extension Tab
1
2
3
4
6
The Extension Tab is not available for

dimensions selected as a group or for
Angular Dimensions
Note: The settings in this dialog have no

affect on the selected Dimension Line if the
option Version 8 Compatible Extensions is
checked in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Extensions Tab on page 815.
1 Selected Extension - Click the drop
down list to select which extension line
808
of the selected dimension line is being

specified. The numbers for each extension
line display above the dimension line in floor
plan view when it is selected.
2 Gap From Marked Object - Specify a
fixed gap between the marked object

and the end of the extension line. If the
dimension line is moved, the extension line
updates and the gap is maintained.
3 Length Towards Marked Object -
Specify a fixed length for the portion of
4 Length Away From Marked Object -
Specify a fixed length for the portion of

the extension line that points away from the
marked object.
5 Proximity Fixed - Check this box to
specify a fixed distance between the

marked object and the dimension line. This
has no effect when the mark is at the
arrowhead.
You can only fix the proximity for a single
extension line.
6 Distance to Marked Object - Displays
the distance from the dimension line to

the marked object.
7 Use Plan Default - Check this if you
want to use the Plan Default settings for

the current extension lines. See Dimension
8 Apply to All - Click this box to apply
the settings on this tab to all extension

lines on the selected dimension line.
Layer Tab
Arrow Tab
For information about the Arrow Tab, see
Arrow Tab on page 854.

Control how you use dimensions and their
appearance in the Dimension Defaults
dialog.
setting in your default template file for use in

future plans. See Template Files on page
167.
Select Edit> Default Settings...

, select
Dimension, and click Edit..., or double-click
the Dimension Tools
button to access the
Dimension Defaults dialog.
There are three different Dimension

Defaults dialogs in each plan file: one
that affects floor plan view, one affecting
cross section/elevation views and a third
affecting CAD Details. Layout also has its
own Dimension Defaults dialog. Each dialog
can be accessed by opening the Dimension
Defaults dialog from within that view type.
The settings in this dialog are saved with the

plan. It is recommended that you save your
809
Dimensions
the extension line that points toward the

marked object.
Setup Tab - Left Side

Metric Plans
Imperial Plans
1
3
5
7
9
1 Eighth Inches/Millimeters - Check to
display dimensions in abbreviated

eighths or millimeters. For instance, 5 3-1/
2 appaears as 53 4, with the 4
representing 4/8, which is equal to 1/2. A
dimension that does not have an exact
equivalent in eighths is rounded up to the
nearest eighth (i.e. 7 6-3/16 would round to
762).
2 1/16 Inches/Centimeters - Check to
display dimensions in fraction format,

or centimeters. This is the more precise of
the two options.
0 - Check to supply a zero after the decimal,
even if there is no fractional part. This
displays whole numbers of inches even if it is
zero, and places a dash between feet and
inches. If 1/16th Inches is also checked, the
double quote () always displays after the
dimension.
For example, if 1/16 Inches is checked but 0
is not checked, the following dimensions
810
2
4
6
8
appear: 7 1/2; if 0 is checked, the same

value appears as: 7- 0 1/2.
3 Decimal Inches/Centimeters/mm -
Check this box to display inches in

decimal format. For example 3 feet 1 1/2
inches is represented as 3 1.5.
4 Decimal Feet/Meters - Check to
display feet or meters in decimal

format. For example 5 feet 2 1/2 inches is
represented as 5.208 feet.
5 Number Above Line - Check to have
all the dimensions display above the

dimension line, rather than in the center of
the line.
6 Add Zeros - Check to display zeros out
to 3 decimal places. For example,

314.500 instead of 314.5.
7 Check Imperial and/or Metric to
define the units that are used for

showing dimensions. Although Imperial
plans always use the Imperial dimensions,
dimensions may be changed to display in

metric only or in both metric and Imperial
units simultaneously. These options are not
available in metric plans.
9 Use +, or - After Number - Check this
box to indicate that the actual

dimension value is higher or lower than the
value shown.
8 Use ~ Before Number - Check this box
to indicate dimension values that are

not accurate with the ~ symbol.
Setup Tab - Right Side
Dimensions
Metric Plans
Imperial Plans
10
11
12
13
15
14
16
17
19
21
10 Number Height - Specify the scaled
height, in inches or mm, of dimension

numbers. A Number Height of 6 print a 1/8
tall number at 1/4 = 1 scale.
11 Min. Number Size - Specify the
minimum screen size in pixels for

dimension numbers. The screen dimensions
are no smaller than this value. This does not
affect printed or exported output. To see the
dimension numbers on the screen at the
printing scale, set this value to 0. Changing
this value affects all dimensions
immediately.
18
20
12 Moving Speed - (Allowed values 1-10)
Defines how slowly a selected edit

handle moves when dragged using the
mouse. Ten is the slowest speed, allowing the
greatest accuracy when objects are moved,
resized or reshaped.
13 Automatic Reach - Specify how far
automatic dimension lines reach to

locate objects along exterior walls that are set
back. The default is 192 inches or 4800 mm.
If exterior walls are set back farther than this,
an additional set of dimension lines is
produced to dimension the set back walls.
811
14 Manual Reach - Specify how far
manually drawn dimension lines

reach to locate walls and/or objects
specified in the Locate Items tab. The
default is 24 inches or 450 mm.
15 1st Line Offset - Specify the distance
tool locate doors and windows

automatically. If the check is removed,
openings may still be located using the
Manual Dimension
tool.
19 Check Auto next to Overall
Dimension to have the Auto Exterior
between the exterior wall and the

nearest automatic dimension line in scale
inches or mm.
Dimensions
tool locate the overall
exterior dimensions.
16 Line Separation - Specify the distance
20 New Lines Inches Only - Check to
between automatic and baseline

dimension lines in scale inches or mm .
17 Min. Dimen Area - Specify the
minimum enclosed area needed for the
Auto Exterior Dimensions

generate dimensions.
tool to
18 Check Auto next to Locate Opening to

have the Auto Exterior Dimensions
have all subsequently created manual

dimensions show inches only (37 instead of
3-1). This does not affect existing
dimensions. Uncheck this box to return to
drawing manual dimensions using feet and
inches. Imperial plans only.
21 Chief Version 8 Compatible
Accuracy - See Compatibility With

Previous Versions on page 796.
Locate Objects Tab

The Locate Objects tab specifies whether or
not dimension lines locate specific types of
objects. Changes made in this box affect only
812
new dimension lines, not those already

drawn.
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
10
6
Dimensions
Walls - These options affect Auto Exterior

Dimensions
, Manual Dimensions
and Temporary Dimensions
1 Select Surfaces to locate exterior walls

by outer surface and interior walls by
one of their surfaces.
2 Select Wall Dimension Layer to locate
exterior walls by the outer surface of

the main layer and interior walls by a main
layer surface. The Wall Dimension Layer is
specified in the Wall Type Definitions
dialog. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog
on page 251
The surface dimensioned is either the outside

surface or the main layer surface, depending
on the option selected above.
5 Check Internal Only for dimensions to
ignore the interior surface of exterior

walls. They still locate both surfaces of an
interior wall, but do not display the wall
thickness. Internal Only is only available
when Both Wall Surfaces is checked.
Both Wall Surfaces
3 Check Interior Wall Centers to have
dimension lines locate the centers of

interior walls. Exterior walls are
dimensioned by the option selected above.
4 Check Both Wall Surfaces to have
dimension lines locate both surfaces of

walls. Wall thickness is also dimensioned.
Both Wall Surfaces & Internal only
813
Cabinets - This section affects only manual

dimensions.
6 Sides - Check to locate cabinet sides
using manual dimensions. The sides

must be perpendicular to the dimension line.
7 Corners - Check to locate the corners

of all cabinets within the manual reach
area. Angled cabinets are dimensioned to
their corners at a right angle to the dimension
line. The cabinet fronts or sides do not need
to be perpendicular or parallel to the
dimension line.
both the automatic and manual dimension

tools.
Centers - Check to locate dimensions to the
center of windows and doors.
Sides - Check to locate both sides of
windows and doors. This does not dimension
the rough opening. It dimensions to the
window or door nominal width.
Casing - Check to locate both sides of
windows and doors at the edge of the casing.
Because casing can have different widths on
each side of an exterior wall, an opening may
show different widths depending on which of
its sides the dimension line is drawn.
Rough Opening - Check to locate both sides
of windows and doors at the rough opening.
When editing dimension lines and moving
their marks, this must be checked in order to
place a mark at the rough opening. Otherwise
a mark can be placed at the opening side or
the casing edge, but not at the rough opening.
Note: If neither box is checked, Automatic
dimensions default to locating the centers of
openings. Manually drawn dimensions do not
locate openings at all.
8 Other Objects- Check Electrical to

locate electrical objects. Use this option
when you want to precisely position
electrical objects.
Check Plants and Images to locate these
items.
9 Openings - Check one of four options
to determine both the default program

and manual override behaviors when
dimensioning openings. This section affects
10 CAD Objects - This section affects
only manual dimensions of 2D objects.
Line/Sides - Check this box to locate lines

and edges that are perpendicular to the
dimension line. If the lines or edges are not
perpendicular to the dimension line, they are
not dimensioned.
Ends/Corners - Check to box locate all ends
of lines or corners of polylines, no matter
what angle they are in relation to the
dimension line.
Text - Check to locate text objects.
814
Extensions Tab
1
3
2
4
Dimensions
5
6
1 Gap From Marked Object - Specify
the distance between the marked object

and the end of the extension line in plan
inches or mm. If the dimension line is
moved, the extension line updates, and the
size of this gap is maintained.
2 Length Towards Marked Object -
Specify the length for the portion of the

extension line that points toward the marked
object in plan inches or mm.
3 Length Away From Marked Object -
Specify the length for the portion of the

extension line that points away from the
marked object in plan inches or mm.
4 Proximity Fixed - Check this box to

specify a fixed proximity between the
marked object and the dimension line. This
has no effect when the mark is at the
arrowhead.
You can only fix the proximity for a single

extension line.
Automatic Dimensions ignore the fixed
proximity default and use the default spacing
values. If you select Proximity Fixed as
your default, Automatic Dimensions set the
closest mark as fixed proximity.
5 Chief Version 8 Compatible
Extensions - Check this box for

extensions to function as they did in Version
8. See Compatibility With Previous
Versions on page 796.
56 Short Extensions - Check this box to
have short, uniform-length extension

lines created instead of the extension lines
reaching the object it locates.
815
Font tab
1
2
1 Layer - Specify and define the
properties of the layer dimensions are

placed on. See Layer Tab on page 223.
2 Font - Specify the font and font style
used for dimensions. For more

information , see Text Tab on page 831.
816
Arrow Tab
For information about the Arrow tab, Arrow
Tab on page 854.
Chapter 31:
Text, Callouts
and Markers
Chapter Overview

Video: Creating Text and Callouts
Video: Text, Callouts and Markers
Text, callouts and markers are an ideal way
to draw attention to special details in plans.
Text can be added in floor plan and cross
section/elevation view, and to layout pages.
Text lines with arrow can be attached to text
objects, allowing you to direct attention to
specific plan details.
The display of text can be controlled by layer
or set specifically for each text object.
Chapter Contents
Text Defaults and Preferences

Fonts
The Text Tools
Creating Text
Text Arrows
Callouts
Editing Callouts
Markers
Editing Markers
Displaying Text, Callouts and Markers
Editing Text
Text Macros
Spell Check
Text Specification Dialog
Callout Specification Dialog
Marker Specification Dialog
Text Defaults
Callout and Marker Defaults
Room Label Defaults
Arrow Defaults
Designer Information Dialog
Client Information Dialog
817
Text
Introductory Training Video: Text and

Callouts
Text Defaults and Preferences

Default settings can be accessed by
See Text Defaults on page 838.
Text Defaults
Double-click the Text
or Leader Line
tool to open the Text Defaults dialog

and specify the default appearance of text
objects. See Text Defaults on page 838.
Callout Defaults
Double-click the Callout
tool to open the
Callout Defaults dialog and specify the
default appearance of callouts. See Callout
Marker Defaults
Double-click the Marker
tool to open
the Marker Defaults dialog and specify
the default appearance of markers. See
Marker Specification Dialog on page 837.
Room Label Defaults

Specify the default appearance of room
labels in the Room Label Defaults
dialog. See Room Label Defaults on page
838.
Arrow Defaults
Double-click the Text Line with Arrow
tool to open the Arrow Defaults dialog
and specify the default appearance of Lines
with Arrow
, Leader Lines
Text Lines with Arrow

, and
. See Text
Preferences
Specify whether pressing the Enter key
creates a new line of text or closes the Text
Specification dialog, and the number of
segments for new leader lines in the
Preferences dialog. See Text & Page
Setup Panel on page 189.
Fonts
Chief Architect allows you to use any font
found in your Windows Fonts directory.
Multiple fonts can be used within the same
file. Only one font can be defined for each
text object, but each text object can use a
different font.
Blueprint Fonts
Three architectural fonts: Blueprindbt, City
Blueprint, and Country Blueprint are
818
installed in the Windows Fonts directory

when Chief Architect is installed.
The Text Tools
The Text Tools

Select CAD> Text to display the Text
Tools.
The Text tool is used to create text
objects.
Text Line with Arrow is used to draw
a line to with an arrow. See Text
Arrows on page 819.
The Leader Line tool places a text

object with an arrow attached. See
Leader Line on page 819.
The Callout is used to place callouts.
See Callouts on page 821.
Select CAD> Text> Marker and click
in a plan or layout to place a marker.
See Markers on page 823.
Creating Text
Specification dialog opens. See Text
Text can be created in floor plan view,

CAD details, cross/section elevation
views, and in layout files.
3.
Enter text and click OK.
To create text
4.
To edit text, select it and use the edit

handles that display. See Editing Text
on page 824.
Select CAD> Text> Text
2.
Click where you want the upper left corner of the text to display. The Text
Up to 32,000 characters can be inserted in

one text object. It is usually better to use
several smaller text objects when a lot of text
must be inserted.
Text Arrows
Lines with arrows can be independent or
attached to other objects. If an arrow is
attached to text or another object, deleting
that object will also delete the arrow.
To create text with a leader line

1.
Select CAD> Text> Leader Line
2.
Starting at the point where you want the

arrow to point, drag to where you want a
bend in the leader line and release the
mouse button.
3.
Click at the point where you want the

center of the first line of text to display.
The Text Specification dialog opens.
Leader Line
The Leader Line tool places a text
object with an arrow already attached.
This arrow can be selected and moved like
any other line with arrow.
819
Text
1.
See Text Specification Dialog on page

830.
4.
Enter text and click OK.
Click in the same location to create a text

items without a lader.
For multiple leaders, click int he same
location to stop adding leader segments.
Note: Leader lines have two segments by
default. You can change this in the Preferences dialog. See Text & Page Setup Panel
on page 189.
Text Line with Arrow

Text Lines with Arrow can be
attached to text, CAD and architectural
objects by selecting CAD> Text> Text Line
with Arrow
. There is no limit to the
number of text lines with arrow that can be
attached to an object.
A Text Line with Arrow
Check these if you want the text line with

arrow to update its position on the text object
if the text object or text line with arrow is
moved.
The first segment of a polyline arrow

attached to text maintains its angle when
Auto Position is off and text is moved.
Auto Position is turned off automatically

when an arrow is not attached to one of
the auto position locations.
Arcs and splines with arrows can also be

attached to text objects.
The following image illustrates the behavior

of auto positioning. The arrow has the Auto
Position Tail option checked. When the head
of the line with arrow is moved, the tail of
the arrow snaps to different locations on the
text object, maintaining its connection.
behaves like a
Line With Arrow

with one exception.
Text Lines with Arrow are initially placed on
the default Text layer, not the default CAD
layer. See Line With Arrow on page 849.
Auto Positioning Arrows

If either or both ends of a line with arrow are
attached to a text object, Auto Position Tail
and Auto Position Head are available on the
Arrow Tab of the Line Specification
dialog.
820
Special Use Arrows

A text line with arrow designated as a special
use arrow offers unique functionality that
may be useful when annotating the height of
various platforms. A special use arrow
replaces the first number in the attached text
object with the height of the architectural
object it is attached to on the other end. The
height is relative to the first floor elevation of
0-0.
Callouts
To create a Special Use Arrow

Create a text object that includes a number such as, Foundation Wall Height 1.
2.
Using the Leader Line

tool, draw
an arrow that connects the text object
with a stem wall, footing, slab,
foundation slab, custom countertop, or
stair landing.
3.
Select and open the arrow for specification, check Special Use on the Arrow
tab, and click OK.
4.
The text object should now read Foundation Wall Height 3' 0".
Text
1.
Callouts
Select CAD> Text> Callout, then
click at the location where you want a
callout to be placed in floor plan view, a
cross section/elevation view or in a CAD
Detail. The Callout Specification dialog
displays. Make any needed changes and click
OK to place a callout. See Callout
Cross Section Lines

Select the Cross Section Line check box in
the Callout Specification dialog to add a
cross section line perpendicular to the nearest
wall. See Callout Tab on page 835.
Cross section lines can be added to any

shape. Move or stretch the cross section line
by dragging the triangular edit handle near
the end of the cross section line.
Delete a cross section line by dragging the
triangular handle to the center of the callout,
or by clearing the Cross Section Line check
box in the Callout Specification dialog.
Pointers and Arrows

Callouts can have arrows and/or pointers
added.
With
Pointer
With
Arrow
821
To add a pointer to a callout, select the

callout and drag the diamond-shaped handle.
A pointer is created.
Remove a pointer by selecting the

Callout and dragging the pointers handle
into the center of the callout.
If there is a cross section line, only one

pointer may be created.
Change the pointers direction by selecting the callout and dragging the edit handle appearing just beyond the pointer.
You can also add as many arrows as you like

to callouts. To add an arrow to a callout,
select CAD> Text> Text Line with Arrow
, then click and drag to create a line with
arrow, which can be moved or resized as
needed.
Editing Callouts
Callouts can be edited using the edit handles,
the edit toolbar buttons and the Callout
Specification dialog. See Callout
When a callout is selected, it has at least four
edit handles. An additional rotate handle
displays for each pointer added to the callout.
Rotate
pointer
Move
Extend/
Rotate
The small, square Resize handle is

located on the edge of the callout and is
used to resize it and its associated text.
The Add pointer handle is used to add

pointers by dragging away from the callout
The small triangular Rotate pointer handle located at the end of a pointer, if one
has been added, is used to rotate that
pointer.
Resizing Callouts
Add pointer
822
Resize
The Move handle is located at the center

of the callout and is used to move it.
The triangular Extend/Rotate handle is

used to extend and/or rotate the callouts
cross section line, if one exists. See
Cross Section Lines on page 821.
To change the size of a callouts text, change

the Character Height in the Callout
Specification dialog. The Callout adjusts
to fit the text. See Attributes Tab on page
836.
Adding more text to either the top or bottom
area enlarges the Callout size as well, unless
Specify Callout Size is checked.
Callout size can be adjusted without
independent of its text by checking Specify
Callout Size in the Callout Specification
dialog. See Callout Tab on page 835.
Markers
Markers
Markers for Level Lines, Test Borings
and Point Markers can be placed in
floor plan view, cross sections, or CAD
Details. Framing Reference Markers
should only be placed in floor plan views.
To create a marker, select CAD> Text>
Marker
and click at the location where
you want it to be placed. The Marker
Specification dialog opens. See Marker
You can also place a framing reference

marker using Build> Framing> Framing
Reference
. See Framing Reference
In addition, a Point Marker is placed using
the Point to Point Dimension
tool if an
existing object is not available to snap to. See
Point to Point Dimensions on page 798.
Markers can be edited using the edit handles,

edit toolbar and Marker Specification
dialog. See Marker Specification Dialog
on page 837.
When a marker is selected, it has four edit
handles.
Move
Resize
Extend
The Move handle is located at the center

of the marker and is used to move it.
The Resize handle is located on the edge

of the marker and is used to resize the
marker and associated text.
The triangular Rotate handle is used to

rotate the marker and associated text.
The Extend handle is used to adjust the

distance between the marker and its associated text.
Rotate
Displaying Text, Callouts and Markers

Text can be used in CAD details, floor plan
view, cross section/elevation views, and in
layout. The display of text objects is
221. By default, text objects are located on

the Text layer.
The display attributes can be controlled for
individual text objects, independent of the
823
Text
Editing Markers
layer that contains it. See Text Specification

Dialog on page 830.
Custom Text Layers

Text objects do not need to be shown at all
times. For instance, electrical notes should be
included with the electrical plan, but not with
the framing plan. You can create custom
layers and layer sets to control the display of
text and other objects. See Layer Sets on

page 216.
To move text to a different layer, select the
text object or group of text objects, then click
the Open Object
Text Specification dialog. The layer
containing the selected text object can be

changed on the Line Style tab. See Line
Editing Text
Text can be edited using the edit handles, the
edit toolbar buttons, and the Text
Specification dialog. See Text Specification Dialog on page 830.
Edit Handles
When resizing text, there is a snap X

that occurs at the natural size of the
text. To override this behavior, hold down the
Ctrl key while resizing.
A selected text object has the same edit

handles as a CAD box. See Editing BoxBased Objects on page 111.
As a text box is made narrower or wider
using an Extend edit handle, the bottom of
the text box may expand or contract to allow
all text to be shown.
If Fillet
editing is selecting, the corners become rounded and the font size
does not change. See Behaviors Panel
on page 202.
Sizing Text
Text size can be set on the Text tab of the
Text Specification dialog.
Depending on the active Edit Behavior

,
the text box and the characters within it may
or may not resize together when a corner edit
handle is dragged.
824
If Resize
editing is enabled, both the
text object and the font resizes when a
corner edit handle is dragged.
If Default
or Concentric
editing
is enabled, the text box resizes, but not
the font size.
This value is subject to the current drawing

scale, derived from the Page Setup dialog.
See Page Setup Dialog on page 963.
Text can be sized in two different ways:
Chief Architect uses a font sizing method

that specifies text size as the measurement from the baseline to the topmost
part of the capital letter A. This method is
Editing Text
The Legacy Compatible Size uses a

method similar to most word processing
applications, where size is based on
information stored in the font. This information varies from font to font and is
responsible for apparent differences in
font height.
To determine the Height needed to produce

text of a certain printed size, click the Scale
button to open the Printed Size Input
dialog.
Note: An uppercase "A" is used to calibrate

the size of printed text. If the desired print
size is one inch, a CAD box of 1" height
should match the height of a capital A,
assuming margins have been turned off. This
rule does not apply to Legacy Plans
Aligning Text
To align text, select it and click the Align
Left
, Align Right
Justify
, Center
, or
edit button.
Using these edit buttons to align text is the

same as using the Alignment drop down box
on the Attributes Tab of the Text
Specification dialog. See Attributes Tab
on page 833.
Hold down the C key when resizing
text to resize the text about its center.
To use the Printed Size Input dialog

1.
Click the Scale button on the Text tab of

the Text Specification dialog to open
the Printed Size Input dialog.
2.
Enter the Desired Print Size of the text.
3.
Click OK to return to the Text

Specification dialog. The Height
updates, reflecting the character height
necessary to print the text at the Desired
Print Size when printed at the specified
Drawing Scale.
In most cases, the Drawing Scale does not

need to be changed in the Printed Size
Input dialog unless you intend to send the
current view to layout at a different drawing
scale.
The Make Parallel

edit button can be
used to make text parallel with other objects.
Individual text objects can be aligned with
one another using settings in the Text
Specification dialog. Group-select the text
objects and on the Attributes tab, set their
Widths to the same value and enter an X
Position, which locates the center of the text
objects. When done, you can manually resize
the text boxes to their natural width. See
Attributes Tab on page 833.
A variety of other alignment methods are
also available. See Aligning Objects on
page 126.
Copy, Cut and Paste

Copy, Cut and Paste of text into and out of
the Text Specification dialog uses the
825
Text
similar to that used in most CAD programs.
Windows clipboard, making it possible to

transfer text from your plan into other
applications or to copy text from any
program in Windows into Chief Architect.
General notes can be created and saved in a
word processing program, then copied and
pasted into a text box. Sections of the
Materials List can also be copied and pasted
into a text box or a word processing or
spreadsheet program.
To insert tab-spaced text

1.
Highlight a block of text objects from

the Material List and press Ctrl + C to
copy them to the Windows clipboard.
2.
Return to the floor plan view, select the

Text
object.
3.
Press Ctrl + V to paste the copied materials into the text box, then click OK.
The text object displays on-screen.
4.
Select the text object and note the additional lines with handles separating each
column.
To Copy, Cut and Paste text

1.
On the Text tab of the Text

Specification dialog or in another
program altogether, highlight the text
you wish to cut, copy or paste.
2.
Press Ctrl + X to Cut the selected text

and save it to the Windows clipboard
3.
Press Ctrl + C to Copy the selected text

and copy it to the Windows clipboard.
4.
Click to place your cursor at the location

where you want to paste the copied text
and press Ctrl + V to paste it.
tool, and click to place a text
Columns automatically resize to fit the

contained text. When a text object is selected
you can use the edit handles that display at
each column to adjust spacing.
Tab Spacing
Tab spacing for tabbed text objects such as
tables can be visually edited.
Text Macros
Text macros insert dynamic information
relevant to the current plan or layout file.
Macros are particularly useful in layouts;
page numbers, drawing scale, and
information to identify drawings can be
inserted to improve organization and clarity.
826
To insert a text macro

1.
Click the Insert button on the Text tab

of the Text Specification dialog.
Macro
Description
%date.short
Inserts a short version of the

date using system settings.
(10/25/04)
Inserts a long version of the
date using system settings
(Monday, Oct 25, 2004)
The drive letter of the current
file. (C:)
The name of the current file.
(myPlan)
The directory path of the current file. (\myplans\)
The file type of the current file.
(.plan or .layout)
The full path name of the current file
(C:\myplans\myPlan.plan)
Page number of the current layout page.
Living area of the current plan.
Internal room area of the room
that the center of the text is in.
Standard room area of the room
(at center of text).
Dimensions of the room that the
center of the text is in.
Current drawing scale. On
screen this varies based on the
zoom factor. In printouts this
shows the exact scale used for
printing.
The size of the sheet.
24 hour time.
AM/PM time.
2.
Select from the list of available text

macros. In this example Short Date
(%date.short) is selected.
%date.long
3.
Click OK to return to the Text

%file.drive
%file.name
%file.dir
The formula
appears in the
Text Entry
portion of the
dialog
%file.ext
%file
%page
4.
Click OK to close the Text

Specification dialog and place the
text.
Drawing Macros
Information related to the current state of a
file such as the date, time of day and file
information can be inserted into text objects
using a selection of different formats.
Similarly, information specific to the position
of the text object, such as room area or page
number, can also be inserted.
The following is a list of commonly used
macros that you may find useful. You can
find a complete list of available macros in the
%living.area
%room.area
.internal
%room.area
.standard
%room.dim
ensions
%scale
%sheet.size
%time.24
%time
Registered User Macros

Information supplied by the Registered User
macros, which begin with Registered,
correspond to the information that was given
when the current installation was registered
827
Text
Text Macros
and cannot be modified without reinstalling

and registering the program.
Designer Macros
Information supplied by the Designer macros
can be specified in the Designer
Information dialog. Information in this
dialog is file-specific and can be edited at
any time. See Designer Information Dialog
on page 839.
By default, this dialog is populated by
information from the Default Designer
Information dialog. See Text & Page
Client Macros
Information supplied by the Client macros,
which begin with Client, is specified in the
Client Information dialog. This
information is file-specific and can be edited
at any time. The client info for a plan file and
a layout file are seperate. See Client
Information Dialog on page 840.
Character Macros
Special text characters such as and can
be inserted into text in the same manner as
dynamic text macros.
Spell Check
Select Tools> Checks> Spell Check to
open the Check Spelling dialog.
The Spell Check feature checks each text
object in the current current .plan or .layout
file consecutively for spelling errors.
Spell Check can also be accessed by clicking
the Spell Check button in the Text
828
Specification dialog. See Text

When Spell Check is accessed through the

Text Specification dialog, only the
selected text object is checked for spelling
errors.
Spell Check
Check Spelling Dialog
1
2
3
4
Note: Spell Check has its own Help system.

For complete documentation, click Help.
1 Spell check looks in for each word in
all open dictionaries. Any words not

found display in this field. Type a correction
in the field and click Change or select one of
the suggested corrections below.
2 Spell check makes Suggestions for

corrections and display them here.
3 If a word is not misspelled but is not
found in a dictionary, it can be added.

Click the drop-down File list to select which
dictionary the word is saved to.
Click Options to open the Spelling

Options dialog. Select options to specify
how Spell Check functions.
Click Dictionaries to open the Spelling
Dictionaries dialog. Additional
dictionaries can be opened or closed by
clicking the Add File or Remove File
buttons. Click the New File... button to add a
new dictionary to the list.
Click Help to open the Spelling Checker
Dialog help system for complete
documentation.
Click Cancel to close the Spell Check
dialog without making any further changes.
5 The selected text displays here.

6 Click Ignore to ignore the word in
Note: New words can be added to any dictionary file, but if Chief Architect is uninstalled
and reinstalled, only additions to the User
Dictionary, userdic.tlx, are retained. Words
added to other dictionary files are not saved.
question during the current spell check

session. Running spell check again does not
ignore the same word.
4 Click Undo to reverse the previous
Click Ignore All to ignore the word in

question every time spell check is run.
spell check operation.
Click Add to add the word in question to the

dictionary.
829
Text
Click Change to replace the word in

question with the suggested word that is
currently highlighted.
When Spell Check is finished checking the

text object or file for errors, the Spell Check
results window displays.
Click Change All to replace all instances of

the word in question with the suggested word
that is currently highlighted.
Click Suggest to initiate a deeper search for
suggested corrections. Once all possible
suggestions have been made, the button is
disabled.

Select one or more text objects, then click the
Open Object
830
When text objects are group-selected, the

textual content cannot be changed, but
everything else (character height, color,
transparent background, etc.) can be.
Text Tab
4
2
Text
1 Specify the Text Size.

Enter the Character Height. This
height is subject to the current drawing scale.
Click the Scale button to open the Printed
Size Input dialog.
In Version 9, text size was driven by
dimension information associated with the
current font. Check Version 9 Compatible
Size to use this information for text sizing.
See Sizing Text on page 824.
2 Click the drop-down list to select a
different Font. If a font is missing when

a file is opened, you are prompted to select
from the available fonts in the Font dialog.
The text styles Bold, Underline, Italic, and

Strikeout are available. Check any of the
boxes to apply that style.
3 Click Insert to choose from a list of
special characters and text macros. See

Text Macros on page 826.
4 Check Rotate with Plan to rotate the
selected text when the Rotate View

command is invoked. If unchecked, the
selected text maintains its position on screen
when the Rotate View command is invoked.
See Rotate View on page 135.
Check Preview to show the text in the Text
Specification dialog using the selected
831
font and font size, and the current settings in

the Page Setup dialog.
5 Check Add an Arrow to add a Text
If you are entering text in a view that you

plan to send to layout at a drawing scale that
is different from the current drawing scale in
the Page Setup dialog, the text may not
preview accurately.
6 Enter text in the Text Entry Box. If text
Arrow to the selected text object.
is selected and opened for specification,

it displays here.
Depending on the current preference settings, pressing the Enter key either forces
a new line in the text box or closes the
dialog. See Text & Page Setup Panel on
page 189.
Text automatically wraps to a new line

without requiring a hard return.
Tabs can be added to the text by pressing

the Tab key.
Note: Changing the drawing scale in the

Printed Size Input dialog does not effect
the appearance of text in preview mode.
Click the Spell Check button to check the

spelling of the text that displays in the Text
Entry area. If Spell Check finds words that
may be spelled incorrectly, the Check
Spelling dialog opens. See Spell Check
on page 828.
832
To jump from the text entry area to Text Size

Height using the keyboard, press Shift + Tab .
Attributes Tab
1
2
3
Text
1 Tabs - Check Box/Grid to have
gridlines separate the rows and columns

of tabbed text. When no tabs are present, a
simple box is drawn around the text.
The edit box defines the number of spaces
from the left edge of the text box where each
new column begins. The first column always
starts at 0. In this case, the second column
(following the first Tab ) starts 10 spaces in,
the next at 20 spaces, etc.
2 Select an Alignment option from the

drop-down list to apply to the text.
Specify the Position of the text using

CAD coordinates.
The X Position and Y Position of the pointer

can be set to display in the status bar, which
may help determine the exact coordinates of
a location in a plan or layout file. See
An exact Angle can be entered. An angle of
90 is vertical (pointing up) and an angle of
180 is upside down.
4 Adjust the Size of the text box
surrounding the text by entering a

Height and Width.
A width of 0 makes the text box as small as
the text within it allows. This is a one-time
resizing. To make text automatically resize to
the width or height, use the Auto Width and
833
Auto Height check boxes. If you manually

edit the width or height of the text box, the
corresponding auto size option turns off.
5 Specify the Margins to be used with
the text. This is the distance between

the text and the edge of the text box.
A default Left and Right margin is applied.
Top and Bottom margins are measured
relative to the line height and may not extend
to the text box completely when given a
value of 0.
Chief Architect appends the http:// prefix

automatically for links that begin with
"www" when Test Link is clicked.
To create a hyperlink
1.
2.
Link Tab
3.
Enter text on the Text tab of the Text
Enter a link on the Link tab.

Click the Browse button to browse to a
file on your computer or network.
The link can be tested by clicking the
Test Link button.
Click OK to close the Text
To use a hyperlink
Hyperlinks can be associated with text

objects. The link entered on the Link tab is
associated with the text object that is entered
on the Text tab.
If no text object is entered on the Text

tab, the link has nothing to attach itself to
and is not created.
1.
Select the text object.
2.
Click the Follow Hyperlink

button to activate the link.
edit
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

834
To open the Callout Specification

dialog, select a callout and click the Open
This dialog also displays when a new callout

is created by clicking in floor plan view
Object
using the Callout
edit button.
tool.
Callout Tab
1
2
3
4
Text
1 Callout Label - Enter the text for the

top row of the callout.
2 Text Below Line - Enter text for a

bottom row if desired.
3 Cross Section Line- Select the check
box to add a cross section line. Cross

section lines may be added to any shape.
4 Define the callout shape.

5 Specify Callout Size - Check this box
to specify individual callout size in

inches or millimeters. If this box is left
unchecked, the callout is sized according to
the size of the text in the callout.
Specify the desired Callout Size in plan
inches or millimeters.
835
Attributes Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Check Default to place the callout or
marker on the default layer. Click the

drop down list to select from all layers.
Click Define to open the Select CAD

Layer dialog and choose from all layers. See
Select Layer Dialog on page 222.
2 Click the Color bar to open the

standard Windows Color dialog. Use
the dialog to choose the desired line color.
Select the By Layer check box to use the
default color for the specified layer.
You can assign white if an object is to
exist but not appear on the screen or in
printouts (must print with color on).

different Font.
The text styles Bold, Underline, Italic, and

Strikeout are available.
836
4 The Character Height is subject to the

current drawing scale.
Click the Scale button to open the Printed

Size Input dialog. For more information,
see Sizing Text on page 824.
In Version 9, text size was based on sizing
information stored in each font rather than
actual character dimensions. Check Version
9 Compatible Size to use this information
for text sizing.
Check Rotate with Plan to prevent the
selected callout from rotating if the Rotate
View command is invoked. See Rotate
View on page 135. If checked, the callout
center moves with other objects as the plan
rotates, but the orientation of the callout does
not change.
Check Transparent to allow objects behind
the callout or marker to display. If
unchecked, the callout or marker displays on
top of other objects.

To open the Marker Specification dialog,
select a marker and click the Open Object
This dialog also displays when a new marker

is created by clicking in floor plan view
using the Marker
edit button.
tool.
Marker Tab
1
2
3
Text
1 Enter optional Text Above Line.

2 Enter optional Text Below Line (Level
Line Marker only).
3 Choose a Marker Type.

Level Line
Test Boring
Point Marker
Reference Marker
4 Enter the Height of the marker in 3D
space. Changes do not affect floor plan

view. Height can only be entered for a Level
Line and Point Marker.
Enter the Marker Radius, in inches or

millimeters.
Attributes Tab
The Attributes tab for markers is similar to
the Attributes tab for callouts. See
Attributes Tab on page 836.
Only a Framing Reference marker effects

the model. The other marker types are only
cosmetically different.
837
Text Defaults
Click the "+" next to Text, Callouts and
Markers to display the sub-headings. Select
Text and click the Edit... button to open the
Text Defaults dialog.
The values in the Text Defaults dialog

determine the initial settings for text objects.
Changes made to default settings do not alter
existing text objects, so it is a good idea to go
over the default settings before placing text.
The Text Defaults dialog is similar to the
Text Specification dialog. See Text
Callout and Marker Defaults

Callouts or Markers and click the Edit...
button to open the Callouts or Markers
Defaults dialog.
The values in the Callouts and Markers
Defaults dialogs determine the initial
settings for callouts and markers. Changes
made to default settings do not alter existing
objects, so it is a good idea to go over the
default settings before creating callouts and

markers.
The Callout Defaults dialog looks almost
the same as the Callout Specification
dialog. See Callout Specification Dialog
on page 834.
The Marker Defaults dialog looks almost
the same as the Marker Specification
dialog. See Marker Specification Dialog
on page 837.
Room Label Defaults

Room Label and click the Edit... button to
open the Room Label Defaults dialog.
The Room Label Defaults dialog is
similar to the Text Specification dialog.
See Text Specification Dialog on page 830.
The Room Label Defaults dialog
838
determines the initial settings for room

labels.
If you add text to the Room Label
Defaults dialog, this text appears after all
subsequently created room labels. Changes
room labels. To update existing labels so that
they reflect changes made to the default,
delete and replace them. See Room Labels
on page 286.
Arrow Defaults
Arrow Defaults
Arrow and click the Edit... button to open
the Arrow Defaults dialog.
The Arrow Defaults dialog looks almost
the same as the Arrow tab of the Text
Specification dialog. See Arrow Tab on
page 854.
The settings on the Arrow Defaults dialog

determine the initial settings for arrows
drawn using the Leader Line
tool and
the Line With Arrow

tool. Changes
text objects, so it is a good idea to go over the
settings in the Arrow Defaults dialog
before placing text.
Designer Information Dialog

The specifications in this dialog apply to
Designer text macros and are plan-specific.
Text
Select Tools> Designer Information

to
open the Designer Information dialog.
839
Enter information in each field exactly as

you want it to display when the
corresponding text macro is used. See Text

Macros on page 826.
Client Information Dialog

Select Tools> Client Information
to
open the Client Information dialog. This
dialog is similar to the Designer
Information dialog, but its specifications
840
apply to Client text macros. This information

must be filled out seperately for plan files
and layout files. See Designer Information
Dialog on page 839.
Chapter 32:
CAD Objects
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: CAD
Tools
more information, see Editing Objects on

page 79.

Video: Working with CAD in Chief
Architect
CAD lines are 2D objects and can be

superimposed on floor plan views, cross
section views, elevation views, and layouts.
They do not affect 3D objects or display in
3D views.
CAD polylines can be converted to 3D
objects and shown in 3D views. Custom
countertops, slabs and molding are a few
examples of the many custom 3D objects that
can be created using CAD polylines.
CAD objects are edited much like other
architectural objects in Chief Architect. For
Chapter Contents
CAD Defaults
The CAD Drawing Tools
Point Tools
Line Tools
Line Specification Dialog
Arc Tools
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes
Arc Specification Dialog
Circle Tools
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification
Dialog
Polylines
Polyline Specification Dialog
Box Tools
CAD Box Specification Dialog
Splines
Displaying CAD Objects
CAD Blocks
CAD Block Specification Dialog
841
CAD
Objects
With the 2D Computer Aided Design (CAD)

tools included in Chief Architect, you can
add the details necessary to create complete
working drawings. Custom details can be
created, saved, and used in other plans.
Individual elevations and cross sections can
also be customized.
Dimensions
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog
CAD Details
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints

Plan Footprint Specification Dialog
CAD Defaults Dialog
CAD Defaults
CAD Defaults can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings from
the menu or by clicking the CAD Defaults
button, which can be added to a toolbar
See Adding Toolbar Buttons on page 18.
Settings in the CAD Defaults dialog
control the basic appearance of CAD objects
and are file-specific. See CAD Defaults
Dialog on page 878.
The behavior and appearance of CAD

objects are also affected by settings on the
CAD, Line Properties, Sun Angle,
Behaviors, and Snap Properties Panels of the
Preferences dialog.
Unlike default settings, preference settings
are global, affecting all plan and layout files.
See Preferences Dialog on page 183.
The CAD Drawing Tools

Video: Drawing CAD Points, Lines and
Splines
Video: Drawing CAD Arcs, Circles,
Ovals and Ellipses
Video: Drawing CAD Polylines and
Boxes
The CAD drawing tools are available
in the CAD toolbar configuration,
which can be accessed by clicking the CAD
Configuration button.
You can also access the CAD drawing tools
using the menu. For an outline of the CAD
drawing tools and their corresponding menu
items and shortcut keys, see CAD Menu
on page 55.
Line Tools
Select CAD> Line to access the line
tools.
The Draw Line
With Arrow
, Input Line
, Sun Angle
, and the
North Pointer
are discussed in detail
later in this chapter. See Line Tools on
page 846.
Arc Tools
Select CAD > Arcs to access the arc
tools.
The Draw Arc
Arc With Arrow
842
, Line
, Input Arc
, and the
tools are discussed in
Point Tools
detail later in this chapter. See Arc Tools

on page 856.
The Place Point

Marker
Box Tools
Choose CAD > Boxes & Framing to
access the box tools.
Polygon
, Box
Bridging
, Regular
, Framing
, Cross Box
, Wall
, and
Insulation
tools are discussed in detail
later in this chapter. See Box Tools on page
865.
Circle Tools
, Circle About Center
Oval
, and the Ellipse
tools are
discussed in detail later in this chapter. See
Circle Tools on page 860.
Point Tools
Select CAD> Points to access the
point tools.
, and Delete Temporary Points
tools are discussed in detail later in this

chapter. See Point Tools on page 843.
Spline
Select CAD> Spline to draw
connected line segments that form a
spline. See Splines on page 868.
Dimension Tools
Select CAD> Dimension to access the
dimension tools.
The Dimension Tools
can be used with
CAD objects and are discussed in their own
chapter. See Dimensions on page 795.
Select CAD> Circles to access the

circle tools.
The Circle
, Point
Text Tools
Select CAD> Text to access the text
tools. The text tools are functional in
CAD and Architectural modes and are
discussed in the Text chapter. See Text,
Callouts and Markers on page 817.
CAD Layer
Select CAD> Current CAD Layer to
change the current default CAD layer.
Point Tools
Select CAD> Points to access the
point tools.
Place Point
Select CAD> Points> Place Point and
click the screen to place a temporary
CAD point in the plan. These temporary
843
CAD
Objects
The Rectangular Polyline
, Input Point
points can be used to accurately position

other CAD objects. See Temporary Points
on page 845.
Input Point
A new point can be placed using
To use the Input Point tool
1.

Relative to Current Point (not Polar)

requires input on the distance along the
X-axis (horizontal) and along the Yaxis (vertical) to locate the next point.
Relative to Current Point, Polar
requires input of the distance and the
angle between the start point and the
new point. This is the most typical
method.
Note: When using Imperial units, lengths and
distances may be entered as inches or feet
and inches, in either decimal or fractional
form. Fractional inches with denominators 2,
4, 8 and 16 are allowed. Millimeters are used
for all metric distances. Angles may be
entered as bearings, decimal degrees, or
degrees, minutes and seconds.
Use the Next button at the bottom of the

New Point dialog to place several points.
Place a point, click Next, and place another
point without closing the New Point
dialog.
2.
3.
Select Absolute Location, and enter the

absolute coordinates. The new point
becomes the current point and is highlighted.
To locate a second point, click CAD>
Points> Input Point
, opening the
New CAD Point dialog again. You can
locate a new point using keyboard input

in the same way a line is drawn using
keyboard input, but no line connects the
points. See Creating a Plot Plan on
page 599.
Absolute Location requires input of
the X and Y coordinates tht are related
to the absolute origin (0,0).
844
Point Markers
Use a permanent Point Marker as a
snap point for dimension lines and
other CAD objects. Select CAD> Points>
Point Marker
and click in the view to
place a permanent point marker. Point
markers display as a simple cross, with or
without a text label. They can be opened for
specification and modified to include a label
or alter their attributes.
You can also place point markers using the
Marker
tool, which lets you specify the
marker label and type. See Markers on
page 823.
Point Tools
Temporary Points
Delete Temporary Points
Temporary points are used for snapping

objects. You can add them manually using
the Place Point
tool, or the program may
add them automatically, such as when the
Input Line
, Input Arc
, or Input
Point
tools are used. These points are
temporary and are not saved with the plan.
The current CAD point is either the most
recently created or the most recently
accessed. When multiple temporary points
are on-screen, the current CAD point is highlighted so it can be easily identified. To make
a different point the current CAD point, double-click it using the Select Objects
tool.
All temporary points can be deleted at

once using CAD> Points> Delete
Temporary Points.
You can also press the Delete key when
nothing is selected to delete the points one by
one; however, Delete Temporary Points
saves time when there are many points.
Moving CAD Points

Points can be repositioned relative to
themselves, another point, or a CAD object
such as a line. For example, you can locate
the point exactly one-quarter the distance
along a given line, or exactly 6 inches from
one end. This new location can then be used
for the start point of a new line or other
prupose.
CAD
Objects
To reposition a point, double-click the point

you want to move to open the Move Point
dialog.
Current
Point
There can only be one current point
To delete the current point, make sure no

other objects are selected (pressing the Esc
key deselects a selected object) , and press
the Delete key on the keyboard. Continue
pressing the Delete key to delete temporary
points one at a time in the reverse order that
they were created.
There are four ways to move a point using

this dialog. The two relative ways allow you
to specify normal or polar values.
Absolute Location sets the location by X
and Y coordinates. The current location is
always listed.
845
Relative to Itself sets the point's new

location relative to its current one. The new
location can be placed using rectangular or
polar coordinates, just as when positioning a
new point.
Relative to Prev. Point positions the new
point location relative to the point that was
current just before the point being moved
was created or made current. To be sure that
the correct reference point is used, click it
and then double-click the point to be moved.
This sets the reference point to the previous
point. The point you are moving is always
the current point.
From Line End is enabled when the point is
near a CAD object. Enter a value in the
Along Line box place the point on the CAD
object at the defined distance from the end it

was originally closest to. For an arc, the
distance is measured along the curve. This
distance may be defined as a percentage of
the total line or arc length by checking the
percentage % box. Thus 0, or 0% moves
the point to the closest end of the nearest
edge, 50% to the midpoint, and 100% to the
other end. Negative numbers and
percentages greater than 100 are allowed.
If the point is near a box or polyline, then
Along Line applies to the line or arc forming
the closest side just as it does to a
unconnected line or arc. If the point is near
an oval or circle, then the point is placed
along an (invisible) axis line the item was
originally drawn along.
Line Tools
and drag to draw a line. You can also
toggle to alternative mode.
Select CAD> Lines to display the

submenu of line tools.
Draw Line
There are two methods that you can use
to draw lines with the Draw Line tool.
The standard method is to select CAD>
Lines> Draw Line
, then click and drag
from beginning to end. Draw a line back on
itself to erase a section.
An alternative method for drawing multiple
lines is also available.
To draw continuous lines
846
1.
Select CAD> Lines> Draw Line
2.
Press the Alt key on your keyboard (or

use the right mouse button) and click
3.
Move your cursor to a new location in

the drawing area and click once. A new
line is drawn that is connected to the end
of the previous line.
4.
To stop, press Esc on your keyboard or

press two mouse buttons at the same
time.
If Object Snaps
are enabled and Edit
Object Parts
is disabled, you can
connect the end of two lines or arcs or a line
and an arc together. This new entity is a
polyline, which is two or more lines and/or
arcs joining end to end to form a single unit.
If one end of the polyline is connected to the
other, it becomes a closed polyline. Closed
Line Tools
polylines can be filled with a pattern, or

turned into special 3D objects such as
countertops or slabs that display in 3D views.
Lines and polylines can be distinguished by
the edit handles that display when you select
the line. A line displays an edit handle at
each end and one in the middle. If more than
three edit handles display, the object is a
polyline.
Line
Polyline
Lines that may appear connected to a

polyline may prove to be unconnected when
selected.
All segments forming a polyline display edit
handles when the polyline is selected. To
display the edit handles of one individual
segment at a time, click the Edit Object
To connect lines, make sure Edit Object Parts

is off, then click on the end edit handle were
the two independent lines join.
Input Line
CAD lines can also be created using
absolute values entered using the
keyboard. This method is slower but more
precise than using the mouse and is ideal
when the desired length and angle of each
line is known, such as with property lines.
Before any line is drawn using this method, a
starting point must be defined. If a starting
point has not been defined, Chief Architect
assumes a starting point of 0,0.
New CAD Line Dialog

CAD lines can be created using absolute
values in the New CAD Line dialog. To
open the New CAD Line dialog, select
CAD> Lines> Input Line
click the Line Tools
or double-
button.
1
3
CAD
Objects
Parts
toggle button. See Editing
Objects on page 79.
2
4
5
6
The two shapes above appear identical until
they are selected. When selected at their left
edge, the polyline on the left reveals that the
left edge is not attached. The polyline on the
right confirms that the left edge is part of the
larger polyline unit.
Begin by specifying how you want to define

the line End Point Location.
1 Absolute Location - Define the end
point of the new line in X Position

(horizontal) and Y Position (vertical)
coordinates.
847
Any point can be uniquely

described using absolute
coordinates
2 Relative to Start Point - Define the
end point of the new line in X and Y

coordinates that are relative to the start point,
as though the start point was at (0,0).
Points can be described

relative to the starting point
using coordinates
3 Relative to Start Point: Polar
(Counter Clockwise from horizontal)

- Check this box to define the end point of
the new line by its Distance and Angle from
the start point rather than in X and Y
coordinates. This is helpful when creating a
plot plan. For more information about
creating plot plans, see Creating a Plot
Plan on page 599.
848
Points can also be described

relative to the starting point
using angle and distance
4 Relative to Previous Line - Define the
end point of the new line by its

Distance and Angle relative to the end of the
previous line drawn, as though the end of
that line end point were (0,0) and it was
drawn left to right on the X axis.
Points described relative to the

previous line depend upon the
previous line for orientation
5 Click Next to create a line without
exiting the dialog so you can input data

for the next line. The start point of the next
line is the end point of this line.
6 Click Num Style to change the units
shown in the New CAD Line dialog.

See Number Style/Angle Style Dialog on
page 873.
Line Tools
1.
Select CAD> Points> Place Point

,
then click the screen to place a CAD
point. This is the current point, and is the
start point for the new line. See Temporary Points on page 845.
2.
Choose CAD> Lines> Input Line

to open the New CAD Line dialog.
3.
Specify the line end point, then enter

distance and angle or position data and
click OK.
Note: If you accidentally click OK instead of

Next and need to continue drawing a polyline
using the New CAD Line dialog, click Input
Line again and continue.
Enter Coordinates
Similar to Input Line, lines can also be
specified by pressing the Tab key on the
keyboard when a line is in the process of
being drawn. This opens the Enter
Coordinates dialog, for more information,
see Creating Objects on page 90.
Line With Arrow

Create a line or polyline with an arrow
on one or both ends by selecting CAD>
Lines> Line With Arrow, then clicking and
dragging on screen. The default attributes of
the line are determined by the settings on the
Arrow Defaults dialog. See Arrow
Continue to draw connected lines to form a

polyline with an arrowhead at the end. The
arrowheads display only at the free ends, not
where the lines connect.
You can also create arcs with arrowheads.
See Arc with Arrow on page 858.
If a line or arc with arrow is snapped to
another object such as text and that object is
deleted, the line or arc with arrow will be
deleted, as well.
North Pointer
The North Pointer defines true north
in floor plan view. If north is not
defined, it is assumed to be straight up.
Every bearing is defined relative to
North, so establish this direction before
entering survey information for plot layout or
for bearings to establish polar direction for
the creation or editing of objects such as
points, lines, arcs, etc.
Select CAD> North Pointer

, then click
and drag to define the pointer, starting at the
tail and dragging toward the point. Once it is
drawn, you can define the exact length and
angle in the Line Specification dialog.
See Line Specification Dialog on page
850.
Change the appearance and behavior of the

line with arrow by selecting it and clicking
When a north pointer is placed on one floor

of a plan or into a CAD detail, a north pointer
drawn on any other floor automatically
points in the same direction. If the direction
of the north pointer is reset on any floor,
those on all other floors automatically reset.
the Open Object

edit button. See
To enter the angle in bearings, first type N or

S (for North or South) then the degrees
849
CAD
Objects
To use the Input Line tool
(followed by d), then the minutes (followed

by '), then the seconds (followed by "), and
finally type either E or W (for East or West).
If minutes are zero, you do not need to enter
a value. Following are some examples of
bearings. It is not necessary to capitalize the
letters. Spaces are also optional.
N 20d 30' E
S 45' W
N 89d 48' 30" W
N 90' E
The same line angle is set to show

Bearings. This shows the angle in
reference to the North Pointer.
If you choose to display the angle of a line

when a north pointer exists, be sure to select
the appropriate format on the Line Properties
panel of the Preferences dialog. If angles
are set to show as Degrees, the angle relates
to 0 degrees (horizontal to the right) even
though a north pointer is already established.
If angles are set to Bearings, they are
relative to the north pointer. See Line
North pointers can be selected and edited

using their edit handles and the edit toolbar
buttons. For more information, see Editing
Objects on page 79.
Sun Angle
In floor plan view you can create
multiple Sun Angles. Select CAD>
Lines> Sun Angle
and click in floor plan
view. The Sun Angle Specification
dialog displays. For each sun angle you
place, specify time of year, time of day, and a
location based on longitude and latitude.
If you have created a north pointer, the sun
angle location relative to the model is
accurate. See Sun Angles on page 775.
Line angle shown in degrees. This

does not reference the North Pointer.
Sun angles can be moved and extended using

the edit handles, but they cannot be rotated.

Select a line, line with arrow, or text line with
arrow, and click the Open Object
850
edit
button to open the Line Specifcation

dialog.
Line Tab
4
2
1 Lock - These lock options control how

changing properties on this dialog
affect the line.
Start - Select this option to keep the start of
the line fixed when changing the length,
angle, and end.
End- Select this option to keep the end of the
line fixed when changing the length, angle,
and start.
Center- Select this option to keep the center
of the line fixed. Changing the length of the
line moves the start and end of the line
equally. Changing the angle rotates the line

around the center.
Select Length/Angle to keep the length and
angle of the line segment fixed. Moving the
start or end moves the other end so the length
and angle of the line do not change.
2 Specify the Length and Angle of the

selected line.
3 Specify the X and Y coordinate for the

Start of the line.
4 Specify the X and Y coordinate for the

End of the line.
The format for these controls can be changed

by clicking the Num Style button. See
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog on page
873.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab is found in the
specification dialogs for many different
objects. Here you can control the display of a
CAD line or the lines that make up an object.
851
CAD
Objects
The Line tab is similar to the Selected Line

tab of the Polyline Specification dialog.
See Selected Line Tab on page 864.
1
2
3
4
1 Specify the Layer the selected object
should be located on. See Layer Tab

on page 223
2 Specify the Line Color used to show

the selected object.
Check By Layer to use the line color

assigned to this layer.
Click the color bar to assign another line
color to the selected object(s) using the
Chooser Dialog on page 722.
3 Specify the Line Style used to show the

selected object.
Check By Layer to use the line style

assigned to this layer.
852
Click the drop-down list to select from all

available line styles. You can use the
keyboard arrow keys to scroll up and down
through the options.
Click the Library button to access the Line
Styles library and add a line style to the dropdown list. See Line Styles on page 688.
4 Define the Line Weight (in pixels).

Check By Layer to use the Line Weight
assigned to the specified layer.
Setting the line weight to zero (0)
makes the line weight print as thin as
possible.
how the selected object(s) display

relative to other objects. See Drawing
Groups on page 122.
Select Back Group to display the

selected object(s) behind objects in the
other two drawing groups.
function when Bumping/Pushing is

enabled. See Bumping/Pushing on page
124.
7 Select the desired Display Options.
Check Show Length to show the length

of each line centered above the line. This
option is available with line and arc segments and is commonly used for property
lines. The length format for Imperial
units (fractional or decimal feet) is
defined on the Line Properties panel of
the Preferences dialog. See Line
Check Show Angle to show the angle of

each line centered below the line. The
angle format (degrees or bearings) is
defined on the Line Properties panel of
the Preferences dialog. See Line
the Move to Front of Group

edit
button. See Move to Front of Group on
page 122.
Uncheck All Angles to show only those

angles that are neither horizontal nor vertical. This is automatically checked when
Show Angle is checked.
Note: Move to Front of Group is an action,

not an attribute. The box is not checked the
next time the specification dialog is opened.
Check Reverse Angle to reverse the

angle by 180 degrees. This is most commonly used when showing the bearing of
a line, since the start point of the lines
defines the bearing.
Select Default Group to display the

selected object(s) in front of those in the
Back Group but behind those in the Front
Group.
Select Front Group to display the

selected object(s) in front of objects in
the other two groups.
Check Move to Front of Group to display the selected object(s) in front of

other objects in the same drawing group.
You can also move a selected object to
the front of its drawing group by clicking
6 Specify the desired Bumping behaviors

for the selected object(s).
Check CAD Stops Move to bump the

selected object into other CAD or CADbased objects as it is moved, and/or to
push the other object(s).
Check Wall Stops Move to stop the

selected object when it bumps into a wall.
Walls cannot be pushed by other objects.
CAD Stops Move and Wall Stops Move are

not available for Primitive objects and only
853
CAD
Objects
5 The Drawing Group options control
Arrow Tab
1
2
3
4
5
The Arrow Tab is available for any line, arc,

polyline, or spline that can have an arrow.
Check Include Arrow to turn the

arrows on or off.
2 Select an arrowhead Type from the

drop-down list.
If multiple arrows are selected, and they have

more than one arrowhead type, check No
Change to keep the defined arrow type for
each arrow.
Check Default to set the arrow type to the
default specified on the Arrow tab of the
Text Defaults dialog. See Text Defaults
on page 838.
3 Select the Fill Color used to fill the

arrowheads.
If multiple arrows are selected and they have

more than one fill color, check No Change
to keep the defined Fill Color for each arrow.
854
Check Default to use the default fill color.
4 Define a Size for the arrow(s).

Check Default to use the default size.
5 Select from the available Options.

Check Arrow on Both Ends to place a
head on both ends of the selected arrow(s).
Check Special Use Arrow to create an arrow
that can be used in layouts and floor plan
views to show platform elevations. See
Special Use Arrows on page 820.
Auto Position Tail and Auto Position Head
are available when either end of the line is
attached to a text object. Check either or both
options if you want this text line with arrow
to update its position on the text object if the
text object or text line with arrow is moved.
Usually better results are obtained if Auto
Position is off. See Auto Positioning
Arrows on page 820.

There are five Arc Creation Modes that
control how an arc is drawn using the
The chord is the straight line between the

start and end point.
Draw Arc
tool. These arc creation
modes also control how curved walls are
drawn (see Drawing Curved Walls on page
238). Each mode allows you to specify a
different aspect of the arc, such as its radius
or tangent. The method used for drawing an
arc or curved wall depends on what Arc
Creation Mode is currently active. The
program remembers the last creation mode
used between sessions. Once drawn, all arcs
are edited similarly. See Editing Arc Based
Objects on page 98.
A straight line that intersects an arc and is

perpendicular to the radius of the arc at
that point is tangent to the arc.
Select Edit> Arc Creation Modes

view these modes.
1.
Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc

then click at the arcs start point.
2.
Move the pointer along the desired

curve while dragging to curve the arc.
3.
Release the mouse button at the end

point to complete the arc.
Before deciding which arc tool works best

for the project at hand, it may be helpful to
be familiar with the different components
that make up an arc.
End
Free Form Arc mode allows you to

define an arc by clicking and dragging
along the desired path. There are two
methods for using this mode.
To draw a Free Form arc
,
CAD
Objects
to
Free Form Arc
To draw continuous Free Form arcs
Tangent
This mode is useful for making custom

revision clouds.
Start
Radius
Chord
1.
2.
Press the Alt key on your keyboard and

click and drag to draw an arc.
3.
Move your cursor to a new location and

click. A new arc is drawn that is connected to the end point of the previous
arc.
Center
The center of an arc is the point the arc is

drawn about.
The radius is the distance from the center

to the arc.
The start is where the arc begins.
The end is where the arc stops.
855
Center/Radius/End Arc
Start/Tangent/End Arc
Center/Radius/End Arc mode allows

you to define the center and radius of
an arc, and then its length.
Start/Tangent/End Arc mode allows

you to define the start and end points of
an arc, its tangent and its curvature.
To draw a Center/Radius/End arc
To draw a Start/Tangent/End arc
1.

,
then click at the center of the arc and
drag to define the radius.
1.
2.
Release the mouse button, then move the

mouse to the end of the arc and click
again.

,
then click at the start of the arc and drag
a line to define the arcs tangent at the
start point.
2.
Release the mouse button.
3.
Move the mouse to adjust the length and

curvature of the arc, then click to release
the mouse and create the arc.
Start/End/On Arc
Start/End/On Arc mode allows you to
define the start and end points of an
arc, then adjust the curvature.
Arc About Center
To draw a Start/End/On arc
Arc About Center mode allows you to

draw an arc by defining the center and
then the start and end points.
1.

,
then click at the start point of the arc and
drag to the end point.
To draw an Arc About Center
2.
Release the mouse button at the end

point.
3.
Move the mouse to adjust the curvature

of the arc, then click to release the
mouse and create the arc.
1.

,
then click once to define the center
point.
2.
Click and drag from the start point of the

arc to its end point.
3.
Or click and drag an arc. The most

recently placed point is used as the center.
Arc Tools
Select CAD> Arcs> to display the
submenu of arc tools.
856
Draw Arc
The method used to draw an arc using
Draw Arc depends on which Arc
Arc Tools
The Chord Direction defines the angle

of the arcs chord from the start point.
Creation Mode is currently active. Once

drawn, an arc can be edited. See Editing Arc
Input Arc
An arc can be drawn to exact
specifications using the New Arc
dialog.
To use the Input Arc feature
1.
Start Direction = 0
Define a start point by clicking the

screen using the Place Point
tool.
The X defines the current point, which
is the start point for the new arc.
2.
4.
Define the Radius of the arc.
5.
Define one of the values in the Extension group:

Arc Angle: The positive number of
degrees from the center point of the arc
to each of its two endpoints.
With the start point defined, select

CAD> Arcs> Input Arc
Chord Direction = 45
to open the
New Arc dialog. Define the arc end-
Arc Length - The length along the arc

itself from one endpoint to the other.
point, curvature, and direction.
Chord Length - The length of the

straight line from one end to the other.
CAD
Objects
Arc Angle = -90

Chord Length =
282 13/16
Radius = 200
Arc Length = 314 3/16
3.
Select either the Start Direction or the

Chord Direction.
The Start Direction defines the angle
of the tangent from the start point.
6.
Select the direction the arc bends, either

cw (clockwise) or ccw (counter
clockwise).
7.
Click OK to draw the specified arc.
Click the Num Style button to display the
Number Style / Angle Style dialog. See
857
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog on page

873.
Arc with Arrow

You can create an arc with an arrow on
one or both ends, using the Arc With
Arrow tool.
Draw an Arc With Arrow
like a
standard arc. When you release the mouse
button, the arc has an arrowhead at the end.
The default attributes are determined by the
settings in the Arrow Defaults dialog. See
Arrow Defaults on page 839. The
arrowhead can be changed by selecting one

Select an arc and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Arc Specification
dialog.
858
or more arrow arcs and clicking the Open

Object
edit button. See Arrow Tab on
page 854.
Continue to draw connected lines and arcs to
form a polyline with an arrowhead at the end.
The arrowheads display only at the free ends,
not where the lines connect.
Lines with arrowheads can also be created.
See Line With Arrow on page 849.
A line can be converted to an arc by
selecting the line, pressing and holding
down the Alt key, then using the edit handle
at either end to bend the line.
Arc Tab
changing properties on this dialog

affects the arc.
Start - Select this option to keep the start
fixed when changing the arc, chord, or end.
Center Y - Specify the y coordinate for the

center of the arc.
Radius - The distance between the center of
the arc and the arc surface.
CAD
Objects
1 The Lock options control how
End - Select this option to keep the end fixed

when changing the arc, chord, or start.
Center - Select this option to keep the center
of the arc fixed when changing the arc.
Arc - Select this option to keep the arc fixed
when changing the arc location.
Chord - Select this option to keep the arc
chord fixed when changing the arc radius.
2 Arc - These parameters define the arc.

Various controls are disabled depending
on what lock option is used.
Center X - Specify the x coordinate for the
center of the arc.
Start Angle - Specify the angle that a line

drawn from the arc center to the arc start
makes with a horizontal line to the right.
End Angle - Specify the angle that a line
drawn from the arc center to the arc end
makes with a horizontal line to the right.
Arc Angle - The angle between the center of
the arc and each end.
859
End Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the end

of the arc.
End Direction - Specify the angle of a
tangent line at the end of the arc.
5 Chord - These values define the chord

of the arc.
Arc Length - The length of the arc along the

curve.
3 Start - These values define the start

point of the arc.
Start X - Specify the X coordinate for the

beginning of the arc.
Start Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the
beginning of the arc.
Start Direction - Specify the angle of a
tangent line at the start of the arc.
4 End - These values define the end point

of the arc.
End X - Specify the X coordinate for the end

of the arc.
Chord Length - The straight line distance

between the two ends of the arc.
Chord Angle - Specify the angle of the

chord (the imaginary straight line going from
the start of the arc to the end of the arc).
Line Style Tab

Arrow Tab
For information about the Arrow tab, see
Circle Tools
Select CAD> Circles to access the
circle tools.
Draw a Circle by dragging across the
diameter. If a small circle is needed,
draw a larger circle and then resize it.
860
Use the Circle Specification dialog to

accurately define size, position and other
attributes. You can fill a circle with a hatch
pattern or solid fill. See CAD Circle/Oval/
Ellipse Specification Dialog on page 861.
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog
Draw Circle About Center
Ovals
Select CAD> Circles> Circle About

Center to create a circle by dragging
the radius out from the center point.
An Oval is a four-arc approximation of

an ellipse. To draw an oval, select
CAD> Circles> Oval, then click and drag.
To draw a Circle About Center
Use the CAD Oval Specification dialog

to accurately set the length and width of the
oval and other attributes.
1.
Click the Circle About Center
tool.
2.
Click the screen to define the center.
3.
Drag the radial distance and release the

mouse button. If you are using Object
Snaps
, both the center point and the
radius snap to any appropriate nearby
CAD object, intersection or point.
Ellipses
An Ellipse is a set of points with a
constant combined distance from two
points called foci. An ellipse looks like a
stretched circle, or a circular surface viewed
at an angle. To draw an ellipse, select CAD>
Circles> Ellipse and drag at an angle to
define its maximum height and width.
Use the CAD Ellipse Specification
dialog to accurately set the length and width
of the ellipse and other attributes.
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog

CAD
Objects
The CAD Circle Specification dialog

and the CAD Oval Specification dialog
are almost exactly the same. The CAD Oval
Specification dialog has an additional
setting for Angle.
861
General Tab
1 Specify the Position of the circle/oval.
Line Style Tab
Specify the X Position and Y Position

of the center of the circle/oval.

Specify the ovals Angle.
2 Specify the Size of the circle/oval.

Specify the Length and Width of an
oval or the Diameter and Radius of a circle.
862
Fill Style Tab

Polylines
Polylines
Closed Polylines
Open Polylines
Polyline Based Objects on page 103 and

page 107. Additionally, the individual
segments can be edited. See Edit Object
Parts on page 81.
Create a polyline by drawing lines and/or

arcs end-to-end, allowing the end of each
successive object to snap to the end of the
previous one.
There are a number of unique polyline

editing behaviors that you should be familiar
with before creating and editing polylines.
See Editing Open Polyline Based Objects
on page 103 and Editing Closed-Polyline
Polylines can be copied, moved, reshaped, or

resized as a single unit. See Editing Open
CAD
Objects
A polyline consists of two or more line and/

or arc segments that are attached at their
endpoints. If a polyline connects with itself,
it is a closed polyline; if there is a gap in the
polyline, it is open.
Polyline Specification Dialog

Select a polyline and click the Open Object
Polyline Tab
edit button to open the Polyline
The Polyline tab of the Polyline

Specification dialog indicates the length
of the perimeter, the enclosed area, and the
volume of a closed polyline.
If the polyline is not closed, Not closed
displays under Area.
863
Selected Line Tab

selected segment of the polyline is a line as
opposed to an arc. The data here applies to
the selected line segment.
Line tab of the Line Specification dialog.

See Line Tab on page 851.
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the

end of the previous connected line, if there is
one. Similarly, moving the End of a line
segment moves move the start of the next
connected line, if there is one.
The Selected Arc tab is available when the

selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
opposed to a line. The data here applies to
the selected arc. See Arc Tab on page 859.
The Selected Line tab of the Polyline

Selected Arc Tab
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
864
Box Tools
1 Fill Pattern - Choose a fill pattern

from the drop-down list. If the pattern
Custom is selected, the custom pattern
options become available below.
2 Spacing - Define the spacing for the
selected fill pattern. Hatch spacing set

at 12" matches grid/reference spacing set at
12".
3 Angle - Define the angle of the selected

fill pattern.
Fill Pattern Color - Define a different

line color or fill color if a solid is
specified. This overrides the layer color.
7 Select Use Background Color to use
the background color for solid fills or

patterns.
8 Check Use Layer Color to have the fill
pattern use the layer color for the

pattern lines. If it is a solid fill, the fill color
is the same as the layers color.
9 Custom Pattern File and Name - This
section is enabled when Custom is

selected from the Fill Pattern list.
Click the Browse button to open the

Custom Pattern File dialog and select
a pattern (.pat) file from the Chief Architect Patterns directory or a custom .pat
file elsewhere on your computer. The
selected .pat files path name displays
and can be edited in the text field.
Select a Pattern from the drop-down list.

This list includes all custom patterns
available in the selected file.
Specify a Scale for the selected pattern.
4 Set the Line Weight for the selected fill

pattern.
5 Check Transparent Pattern Fill to
make the fill pattern transparent. When

you check this option, any objects behind the
fill pattern are visible through it.
Box Tools
Select CAD> Boxes & Framing to
access the box tools.
Rectangular Polyline
A Rectangular Polyline begins as a
rectangle, drawn from corner to corner.
Once selected, a rectangular polyline can be
edited into any shape. See Editing BoxBased Objects on page 111.
Regular Polygon
You can draw a regular polygon based
on the length of a side, or the length of
the radius to a vertex or a side. Select your
options in the New Regular Polygon dialog
and click OK. Click in your plan to place the
polygon.
865
CAD
Objects
Fill patterns can be applied to boxes, circles,

closed polylines and a variety of architectural
objects. The pattern options are disabled
until you select a pattern other than None
from the Fill Pattern drop-down list.
The Trim Objects
and Extend Objects
tools work well to adjust the framing

members to the correct length, and to cut
their ends off at an angle to fit against the
trimming members. See Trim and Extend
on page 142.
Wall Bridging
Box
Draw a box from one midpoint to the
midpoint of the opposite side. A box
draws as a square at first and can be reshaped
into a rectangle. A box always has four 90
degree corners.
Boxes have some unique editing behaviors
that are important to be aware of. See
Framing
Select CAD> Boxes & Framing>
Framing to draw a 1-1/2" (38 mm)
wide box of any length. When dragging the
length, the framing member looks like a line
until the mouse button is released. Specially
designed to represent general framing
materials, the box can be resized to any
specification using the handles or the
Framing Specification dialog, discussed
later in this chapter. Multiple copies can also
be laid out automatically at defined spacing
using the Multiple Copy
edit button or
the Transform/Replicate Object dialog.
Objects drawn with this tool are listed in the
Framing category of the Materials List. To
specifically draw rafters or joists, click the
Rafter
button or Joist
button and
drag to draw a framing member.
866
Select CAD> Boxes & Framing Wall

Bridging to draw wall bridging in a
wall detail. For more information, see
Editing Cross Section/Elevation Views on
page 750.
Cross Box
The Cross Box behaves the same as a
box. The only difference is the cross
that is automatically drawn whenever this
tool is used. Use the cross box add framing
detail to cross sections.
Cross boxes are automatically maintained at

ends of framing members cut by the cross
section cutting plane. They automatically
update when the cross section first is created
and whenever you click Fill Window
You may want to create and resize one cross

box for each framing member size used, such
as 2x4, 2x6, 2x12, then copy and paste the
original as needed. It is easiest to resize using
CAD Box Specification dialog.
Insulation
Use the Insulation tool to draw
insulation in cross section details. Drag
the length of the insulated area, then select
object and use the edit handles to move or
resize it. It may be easier to use the CAD
Box Specification dialog to define the
insulation width and length exactly.
Drag to
create
Result
Select
to edit

Select a rectangular poyline, a box, a framing
box, a wall bridging box, a cross box, or
edit button to open the CAD Box

insulation and click the Open Object
General Tab
CAD
Objects
1 Specify a Box Style.

Select Normal to specify a normal box,
Cross to specify a cross box, or Insulation to
specify an insulation box.
Define the Position of the box.
Specify the X Position and Y Position of the

center of the box.
Specify the Angle of the box.
3 Define the Size of the box by
specifying its Height and Width.
867
Line Style Tab

To find out which direction is the height
and which is the width of a square box,
select it. The triangular rotate handle is nearest the side you originally dragged from when
creating the box. Changing the height
changes the length of this side.

Fill Style Tab

Splines
A Spline is a curve that passes
smoothly through a set of points.
Splines can be selected and opened for
specification. See Polyline Specification
Dialog on page 863.
As drawn
To use the Spline tool
Result
1.
Select CAD> Spline
2.
Draw the first spline segment just as you

would a line. A single spline segment
looks identical to a line. You may need
to turn off Angle Snaps
freely.
4.
As soon as two straight spline segments

connect end-to-end, the straight segments become a curve that passes
through the endpoints defined by the
original segments. Each point is called a
vertex.
5.
Draw a few more segments, connecting

each to the free end of a previously
drawn segment.
to draw
Result
3.
Draw the second segment from the end

of the first at a different angle. Object
Snaps
should be on to assure that
new segments attach correctly to the
ends of previous segments.
868
As drawn
6.
Notice as additional segments are drawn

that the spline changes the curvature of
the previous segment to create a continuous curve between the last three points.
Applications for Splines

As drawn
Result
7.
Form a closed spline by drawing a segment between its two free ends.
Splines are typically used in situations where

there is an irregular curve. A contour line is a
typical example. Splines are useful wherever
a free-flowing curve is needed.
Spline Tab
Draw segment to close
The result is an irregular curve that

flows smoothly through each vertex.
Result
Polylines that are splines display the spline

tab in the Polyline Specification dialog.
New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
between line segments that are used to draw
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
draw the spline faster.

As with architectural objects, the display of
CAD objects is controlled in the Layer
Current CAD Layer

When drawn, CAD objects are automatically
placed on the Current CAD Layer. In floor
plan and cross section/elevation views, the
name of this layer displays on the right side
of the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen.
See The Status Bar on page 8.
Initially, the Default CAD Layer is set as the

Current CAD Layer, but this can be changed
at any time in the CAD Defaults dialog.
See CAD Defaults Dialog on page 878.
The Current CAD Layer can also be changed
in the Select CAD Layer and Layer
Display Options dialogs. See Select
Layer Dialog on page 222 and Layer
869
CAD
Objects
8.
Changing the Current CAD Layer

affects subsequently-drawn objects, but
existing CAD objects are unaffected by the
change. As a result, you can efficiently produce CAD drawings on multiple layers
CAD Blocks
A CAD block is a group of CAD objects that
have been grouped together so that they
behave as a single object.
CAD blocks can be selected, moved, rotated
and resized much like CAD boxes. They can
be added to the library and can also be
exploded into their individual parts.
Click and drag a corner handle to resize a
CAD block proportionately. Drag a side
handle to resize in only one dimension.
Resizing each dimension differently can
distort ovals and arcs, and does not allow you
to explode the block.
Make CAD Block

Create a CAD block by selecting
multiple CAD and text objects, then
clicking the Make CAD Block edit button.
The new block acts like a single CAD object.
CAD blocks can contain other CAD blocks,
referred to as nested CAD blocks.
A CAD block cannot contain the following
CAD objects: roof planes, layout boxes,
north pointer, plan footprint, roof/gable line,
sun angle arrow, bearing line, or joist
direction line. If any these are selected as
part of a group, the group cannot be turned
into a CAD block.
Text
, Callouts
and Markers
can
be included in a CAD block. A few CAD-
870
based objects that display in 3D, such as

counter tops and slabs, can be part of a CAD
block, but most cannot. See Architectural
Blocks on page 663.
Explode CAD Block

Click any item in a CAD block to
select the block. When a block is
selected, click the Explode CAD Block edit
button to separate it into its individual
components. You cannot explode a block by
using a marquee to select it; you must click it
to select it.
If the block is composed of other blocks,
exploding the outermost block breaks it
down into the component blocks. Note that
the block definition is not exploded or
changed, just the instance.
If a block has been resized so that its original
aspect ratio is altered, it cannot be exploded.
See CAD Block Specification Dialog on
page 872.
Add to Library
Like other objects, customized CAD
blocks can be added to the library for
future use in other plan files. See Adding to
Before an exploded block can be added to the
library, it must first be group-selected and
CAD Blocks
blocked once again using the Make CAD

Block
edit tool.
Many manufacturers provide CAD details in

DXF/DWG format. These can be imported,
blocked and added to the library. In addition,
some manufacturers details are available in
.ALB library file format, which can be added
to the library. See Adding a Third Party
You can organize your CAD blocks in
the Library Browser by creating custom
libraries and library folders. See Adding a
New Library on page 674.
CAD Block Management

When creating a CAD block, two things are
actually created: a block definition and a
block instance. The block definition holds all
the items in a group, while block instance
shows the block at a position, orientation and
size that matches the items in the original
group. More instances of the new block can
be made by copying the first instance. Any
copy can be repositioned, resized and rotated
independently of any other block instance.
For a single plan file, these instances share
the same definition regardless of what floor
or CAD detail they display in. Copying a
block instance to a completely different plan
file also copies the block definition to that
plan.
CAD
Objects
2
3
4
5
6
Select CAD> CAD Block Management
to access the CAD Block Management
dialog.
1 Displays a list of all CAD blocks for the
current plan file, including all CAD

blocks that appear as instances on any floor,
in a CAD detail or saved elevation/cross
section view. It can also include CAD blocks
that currently have no instance anywhere in
your plan. These blocks can remain after all

their instances have been deleted.
2 In Use shows the blocks that have at

least one instance used.
3 Select any block in the list, click Insert,
then click in floor plan view, a CAD

detail, or in a cross section/elevation view to
place a new instance of the block into that
view.
871
4 Rename - Click to specify a new name

for the CAD Block.
5 Press the Purge button to mark all
unused block definitions from your
plan for deletion. Click OK to delete the

blocks.
6 Delete - Mark a selected block Delete
or Undelete with this button. Blocks are

deleted when you click OK.
CAD Block Specification Dialog

General Tab
1 Block Name - Specify the name for the
CAD block in the plan CAD Block

Management list. All other changes in this
dialog affect only this instance of the block,
but changing the name modifies the block
definition.
This name is used when you export the block

via DXF/DWG, and is also imported with
DXF/DWG block definitions. A CAD block
name is limited to 255 characters.
If you use a name that is in use, the definition
of the other block is overwritten and the
872
instances of that block are updated to match

the current definition.
Copyright - Shows the block copyright, if
there is one.
2 X Position - Specify the x coordinate of

the center of the CAD block instance.
Y Position - Specify the y coordinate of the

center of the CAD block instance.
Angle - Specify the angle for the CAD block
instance.
Dimensions
box to retain the existing ratio between

the height and width of the block. If you
resize the block unevenly, you cannot
explode it.
Height - Specify the height of the CAD
block instance.
Height Factor - Specify the ratio of the
height of the CAD block instance to the
height of the original CAD block.
If the height and width factors are set to
different values, the instance cannot be
exploded and ovals and arcs are distorted.
Width - Specify the width of the CAD block

instance.
Width Factor - Specify the ratio of the
width of the CAD block instance to the width
of the original CAD block.
If the height and width factors are set to
different values, the instance cannot be
exploded and ovals and arcs are distorted.
4 By Block - Specify that the block line
style and fill style should override the

line style and fill style of the individual
objects in the block.
New block instances default to By Block

unless Use By Object when creating new
CAD blocks is checked in the CAD panel of
the Preferences dialog. See CAD Panel on
page 199.
By Object - Specify that the individual
objects in the block control their own line
style and fill style.
Line Style Tab

Tab, see Line Style Tab on page 851.
Fill Style Tab

Tab, see Fill Style Tab on page 864.
CAD
Objects
3 Retain Aspect Ration of x - Check this
Dimensions
The Dimension Tools are discussed in
depth in their own chapter. See
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog

At the bottom of many dialogs, you can click
the Number Style button to open the
Number Style/Angle Style dialog.
This dialog controls the format of distances,
coordinates and angles in these dialogs and
the status bar.
873
CAD Details
Video: Adding CAD Details
Video: CAD - Details Library and
Details Template Plan
CAD Details are special view windows for
drawing, saving and organizing any 2D
drawings associated with the current plan,
such as plot layouts and cross section details.
CAD Detail
Management Dialog
Select CAD> CAD Detail Management to open the CAD Detail
Management dialog. An alphabetical list
of all CAD Details saved with the current
plan displays on the left side of the dialog.
Like other views, CAD Details are saved

with the plan they are created in and can be
sent to the printer or layout sheet.
2D CAD information can also be copied into
or out of a CAD Detail window using the
group select and copy functions.
Each plan file can store any number of CAD
Details. CAD Details saved with the current
plan are listed in the Project Browser and
the CAD Detail Management dialog.
874
Click New... to open the Create New CAD
Detail dialog.
When walls are framed using the Build

Framing dialog, a Wall Detail is created for
each wall. These details are listed in the
Project Browser and are also accessible
by selecting a wall and clicking the Open
To rename an existing CAD Detail, click

Rename. In the Create New CAD Detail
dialog, type a new name for the selected
CAD Detail and click OK.
To open an existing CAD Detail, click its

name to select it, then click Open.
CAD> CAD Detail from View

converts the current view into a 2D
CAD drawing composed of CAD objects that
can be then edited.
To delete an existing CAD Detail, click its

name in the alphabetized list to select it, then
click Delete.
CAD Details should be given short

descriptive names for organizational
purposes.
Special CAD Details

Some CAD details are created automatically
by the program. If any roof or floor trusses
are present in your plan, the program creates
a Truss Detail that includes an editable
diagram of each truss type used and a count
of each. See Editing Framing on page 494.
Note: It is important to understand that a

detail created with the CAD Detail from View
tool is not dynamically linked to the original
view. Any changes made to the view do not
update in the detail or vice versa.

is available in
all views except render and raytrace views
and materials lists.

Video: CAD - Plan Footprints
Using the CAD Tools and conventional
survey information, you can create an
accurate plot plan in floor plan view or a
CAD Detail. See Creating a Plot Plan on
page 599.
A plot plan can be sent to layout and

included in working drawings. See Floor
Plan Views and CAD Details on page 978.
A plot plan can also be converted into a
terrain perimeter, allowing you to add
elevation data and accurately position
buildings for 3D modeling of home and lot.
875
CAD
Objects
Name the CAD Detail, click OK, and a new

CAD Detail window opens.
Wall Detail
edit button. Wall Details are
not listed in the CAD Detail
Management dialog. See Wall Framing
Plan Footprint
Plan Footprint is a feature that creates
a new CAD detail or imports the
building footprint into an existing CAD
Detail. Once the plan footprint appears in the
detail window, you can control what
information displays.
To create a new Plan Footprint
1.
(see Plan Footprint Specification Dialog

on page 877).
Inserting a footprint into a CAD detail
1.
Open the CAD detail you want to insert

a footprint into.
2.
Select CAD> Plan Footprint
3.
Select the floor to use from the dropdown list and click OK.
4.
The floor plan appears in the CAD

Detail window. Select Window> Fill
Open the floor plan view of the plan you

want to create a plan footprint from.
DN
DECK
15'8 x 9'7
30" GE
electric
cooktop
KITCHEN
12'4 x 10'5
DINING
Allow 39"
for ref.
12'4 x 13'5
Double
electric
oven
Window
to center the footprint on
screen. The footprint can be rotated and
moved anywhere in the window.
LIVING
15'6 x 25'2
HALL
2'6 x 6'5
NOOK
10'3 x 9'5
UP
DN
HALL
4'8 x 31'10
CLOSET
2'2 x 7'2
FAMILY
two vents, min 50 sq in ea.,

max 5 in off floor
13'1 x 19'1
DN
solid core door, 1

hr rating
UP
5/8 inch, wallboard on walls
& ceiling between house and
garage
GARAGE
22'7 x 27'5
BATH
6'6 x 5'6
PORCH
15'7 x 5'6
DN
Floor Plan View

UP
2.
Select CAD> Plan Footprint

. The
program creates a new CAD detail with
the footprint of the current floor.
By default, this new CAD detail uses the

Plan Footprint layer set. You can control
what displays in the footprint using the
Layer Display Options dialog (see
Displaying Objects on page 221), or by
opening the Plan Footprint for specification
876
DN
UP
DN
Plan Footprint
If the model consists of several buildings, a

footprint is created for each building.
Moving one footprint automatically adjusts
all the footprints in order to maintain their
relationship.
If you edit a plan using Reverse Plan
or
the Edit Area

tools, the plan footprint
updates automatically.
Layer Display
Options Dialog
When you create a plan footprint by selecting
CAD> Plan Footprint
while in floor
plan view, the default layer set for plan
footprints is used. See Layer Set Defaults

Dialog on page 225.
When a plan footprint is created by selecting
CAD> Plan Footprint
while in a CAD
Detail, the current layer set is used. See
Regardless of the layer set in use, the
appearance of objects in a Plan Footprint is
dialog. Individual objects are on the same
layer as in floor plan view, while the entire
Plan Footprint is on the Default CAD Layer.
218.

Select a plan footprint and click the Open
Object
edit button to open the Plan
Footprint Specification dialog for the
selected plan footprint.
CAD
Objects
General Tab
1
3
2
4
1 Select the Floor Used for Plan
Footprint from the drop-down list.
2 Check Display Footprint Polyline to
draw a polyline around the perimeter of

the footprint. This polyline may not be
877
visible if you also have Display Plan Details

checked.This option must be chosen if you
want to use a fill pattern or specify line
styles.
3 Check Display Plan Details to show
the walls and other details as they

appear in floor plan view.
4 Check Use Current Layer Set to
Display to to control what displays in

the footprint using Layer Display Options.
You can choose an alternate layer set from
the drop-down list on the toolbar at any time.
Polyline Tab
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

If you uncheck this box, you lose control of

what displays and the program makes the
determination for you.
CAD Defaults Dialog

The CAD Defaults dialog controls the
general appearance of CAD objects.
In each plan file, there are three different
CAD Defaults dialogs. One affects floor
elevation views and a third affects CAD

details. Layout also has CAD defaults. Each
dialog can be accessed by opening the CAD
Defaults dialog from within that view.
plan view, another affects cross section/
1
2
3
4
878
CAD Defaults Dialog
1 Select the Current CAD Layer from
the drop-down list. See Current CAD

Layer on page 869.
Note: Although there are three CAD Defaults
dialogs in each plan file, only one layer can
be specified as the Current CAD Layer. When
a new Current CAD Layer is selected, the
change affects all view types.
5 Select any combination of the available

Options.
Show Arc Centers and Ends - Select

the check box to show arc centers and
ends. Ends display as small lines where arcs
connect to one another. A center also acts as
a snap point.
Click the Define button to open the Layer

Display Options dialog. See Layer
in plan inches. You can set this higher
so that line labels on objects such as property
lines can be easily read at small scales.This
value does not affect the size of dimension
numbers or other text objects.
3 Display Line Lengths as - Select either
Fractional feet or Decimal feet. This

setting is not available in metric format,
which always uses millimeters.
Show Arc Centers andEnds
Fill New Framing Members - Check to

have all new framing members drawn with a
solid white fill. This makes it easy to tell
what framing member is on top, since the
objects below are blocked by the solid white
fill. You can change the color for framing
once it is created.
Use Line for Framing - Check this box to
show all framing members as single lines rather
than as closed polylines.
Fractional Degrees
Decimal Feet Bearing
4 Display Line Angles as - Select either
Degrees or Bearings relative to the

North Pointer. If no North Pointer has been
established, north is assumed to be straight
up on the screen.
879
CAD
Objects
2 Specify the desired Line Label Height
880
Chapter 33:
Advanced Design
& Editing
Chapter Overview
The tools described in this chapter allow you
to track the time you spend on plans,
eliminating guesswork and making billing
easier.
they are free of code violations and other

errors.
Others let you draw plans with ease and

flexibility, and run checks on plans you
completed so you can be more confident that
Chapter Contents
Time Tracker
Video: Keeping Track of your Design
and Drafting Time
allow it to run automtically. The Time

Tracker keeps a log that can be amended and
edited as needed.
The Time Tracker tool monitors the

time spent on each Chief Architect file.
You can enter start and end times each time a
plan or layout file is opened and closed, or
Select Tools> Time Tracker> Start

Time Logging to begin logging time
for the current plan or layout file. This
creates a new entry. Opening a plan or layout
881
Advanced
Design
Time Tracker
Time Log Dialog
House Wizard
Plan Check
IRC Checklist
automatically starts a time log if you set your

preferences to do so. See Time Tracker
Panel on page 197.
Time Tracker information is stored with each

file and can be printed or exported from the
Time Log dialog.
Select Tools> Time Tracker> Stop

Time Logging to stop logging time for
the current file. This button is only available
when an entry is currently being recorded.
You can how the Time Tracker functions on

the Time Tracker panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Time Tracker Panel on page
197.
Select Tools> Time Tracker> View

Time Log to open the Time Log
dialog and view the time log for the current
file. See Time Log Dialog on page 882.
Time Tracker logs times for each plan

and layout file separately, even if they
have the same project name or are saved in
the same directory on your computer.
Time Log Dialog

The Time Log dialog displays all entries
logged for the current plan or layout file.
Entries can be added, deleted, edited,
exported, and printed.
882
Select Tools> Time Tracker> View Time

Log
to open the Time Log dialog.
Time Log Dialog
3
4
5
Select an entry in the Start Time

column and edit the details in the lower
portion of the dialog.
Click Add to add a new entry using the

current time.
Select an entry and click Delete to remove it.

Click Export to open the Select Log
Export File dialog and specify a name and
destination for the exported file. Time log
information can be exported as either a text
(.txt) or Comma Separated Values (.csv) file.
If you have multiple plan and/or layout
files associated with a particular project
and wish to bill them together, export your
Time Logs to another application and thencombine them.
Click Print to open the Print dialog and

print the log.
3 Select an entry and edit the Start and
End times. Highlight the digits and

enter new values or use the arrow keys on the
keyboard. You can also click the drop-down
list and select a date from the calendar. The
start time must predate the end time.
The Duration of the selected entry and the
Total Duration display at right.
4 Initially the User information is derived
from the Chief Architect license

registration information. By default, the User
information prefills from the Default User
Name on the Time Tracker panel of the
Preferences dialog. You can select an
entry and change the User here.
883
Advanced
Design
1 A summary of the entries displays here.
5 Select an entry and add Notes.
House Wizard
The House Wizard is a time-saving
feature used to create a preliminary
room-by-room design of a home without
getting caught up in the details. Once the
shape and layout of the rooms are finalized,
the House Wizard converts them into a
working plan that can be edited and detailed
to completion.
Editing Rooms
Start House Wizard

Select Tools> House Wizard> Start
House Wizard. The House Wizard
leads you through a series of windows that
gather information about the rooms you want
to include in your house. When you click
Finish and close the House Wizard, the
selected room boxes display.
Select room boxes using the Select

Objects
tool just like other objects in
Chief Architect. Room boxes can be
resized, rotated, and rearranged.
Try to line up the rooms so that they are

just touching. Excessive overlaps may
cause your rooms to form incorrectly.
Closets are the exception. You can overlap a room with a closet, or place in
inside another room box.
Rooms can be copied and pasted using

the Copy/Paste
edit button and
deleted using the Delete

Room boxes can now be arranged into a floor
plan.
884
edit button.
Select Tools> House Wizard
or click
the Space Planning Configuration

button to access the list of room boxes
and place additional rooms in your plan.
Plan Check
Select an item from the list and click in

the plan to place a room box of that type.
Select Tools> House Wizard> Hide

Room Boxes
or click the toggle button to hide or show the room boxes.
3.
Turn on Reference Layers by pressing

F9 on your keyboard.
4.
Add a second floor, making it blank.
5.
On the second floor, select Tools>

House Wizard> Build House
6.
Arrange the second floor rooms as

desired, using the reference display as a
guide.
7.
Use Build House to complete the second

floor.
Build House
When the rooms are in place, select
Tools> House Wizard> Build House
to convert the rooms into a building model.
Walls and doors are inserted between the
rooms that you arranged.
Multiple Floors
If you specified a two-story house, follow
these steps:
1.
Arrange the rooms on floor one as

described.
2.
Use the Build House tool to create the

walls on the first floor.

Video: Assigning Room Types and
Running a Plan Check
Plan Check checks the floor of your
plan shown on screen for anything that
appears to violate common building
practices. Plan Check may not find all the
problems in a plan, but does it point out areas
that may need improvement.
As your plan evolves, a number of things that

may become incorrect can be fixed using
Plan Check. For example, doors that change
from exterior to interior as you add new
rooms are redrawn without the threshold line
that marks an exterior door. A cabinet,
fixture or furniture item that is against a wall
because the wall was moved into it, as
opposed to the item moving, are attached to
the wall.
885
Advanced
Design
Plan Check
Disclaimer: The Plan Check feature in

Chief Architect compares your plan with
common building practices. This Plan Check
does not claim to detect all building code and
design requirements. Always have your plans
checked by a licensed professional before
beginning actual construction.
To run Plan Check, select Tools> Checks>

Plan Check
Click Hold to suspend Plan Check so you

can fix the current error. Select Tools>
Checks> Plan Check again and the
check starts where it left off.
Click Done to terminate Plan Check.
Potential plan errors found are usually

highlighted in floor plan view. To ensure the
highlighted item is on-screen, make sure the
entire plan is shown in the window before
you run Plan Check.
If this dialog obscures the floor plan view,
drag its title bar to move it. It remembers its
new position and displays there the next time
Plan Check is run.
Plan Check Dialog

1
Room Types
2
3
The current error number, along with

the total number of errors found.
2 A description of the current error

displays here.
3 Options for navigating Plan Check are

found on the right side.
Click Next to ignore the current error and

proceed to the next.
Click Previous to return to the previous

error.
Plan Check can do a much better job of

checking for problems if it knows what the
rooms in your plan are to be used for, so you
should assign a Room Type to each room in
your plan. See Room Types on page 284.
The first time Plan Check runs in a plan, it
automatically assigns a room type to as many
undesignated rooms as it can. Some rooms
are determined by their size and shape, and
others by their contents. For example, a shelf
in a small room indicates a closet; a stove or
refrigerator indicates a kitchen; or a bed, a
bedroom. If the program cannot assign a
room type, Plan Check highlights it and
suggests that you do so manually.
IRC Checklist
Chief Architect includes the
International Code Councils IRC
886
Checklist, a comprehensive list of standard

building codes that can greatly facilitate your
IRC Checklist
planning, design, and plan approval

processes.
Select Tools> Checks> View IRC Checklist
Note: The IRC Checklist is a useful reference

tool but is not an alternative to the local building codes in your area.
Advanced
Design
to view a copy of the IRC Checklist in

.pdf format.
887
888
Chapter 34:
Pictures, Images,
& Movies
Chapter Overview
Video: Images, Pictures, and Movies
Chief Architect also contains many images

of real world objects such as trees, plants,
people, and vehicles in the Library Browser.
Images are actual objects that can be edited
in a variety of ways.
Chief Architect allows you to create virtual
tours that can be saved as .avi files, shared
with others, and played back later.
Chief Architect can also generate a POV-ray
file from a 3D view for photo-realistic
rendering capabilities. The POV-ray feature
is covered in its own chapter. See
Chapter Contents
Picture Files vs. Pictures and Image

Objects
Importing Picture Files
Editing Picture Files
Exporting Picture Files
Picture File Box Specification Dialog
Creating Images
Placing Images
Displaying Images
Resizing an Image
Adding Images to the Library
Image Specification Dialog
Creating Screen Captures
Metafiles
Editing Metafiles
Metafile Specification Dialog
Walkthroughs
889
Pics, Images
& Movies
Chief Architect can save any view in a wide

variety of picture file formats. Picture files
can also be imported into Chief Architect and
shown in most views.
Creating VRML Files
Picture Files vs. Pictures and Image Objects

In common computer language, picture files,
pictures and images are more or less
synonymous. In Chief Architect, however,
there are some notable differences between
these terms.
In Chief Architect, a picture file (such as a
.bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png) is a two
dimensional image file. You can find
examples on most computers.
A picture, on the other hand, is an image that

that has been imported into the program from
a picture file. Pictures can be imported into
floor plan view, cross section/elevations,
wall elevations, CAD details, and layout
pages. They are two-dimensional only; they
do not display in camera views or overviews.
An image object is also based on a picture
file, but it does display in both 2D and 3D
views. Images contain width and height data
and have an associated 2D CAD block.
Importing Picture Files

Picture files can be imported into floor
plan view, cross section/elevations,
wall elevations, CAD details, and layout
pages. Picture files do not display in camera
views or overviews.
Select File> Import> Picture (BMP, JPG,

PNG)
to insert a picture file into a plan
or layout file. The Import Picture File
dialog opens so you can browse to a picture
file on your computer.
Import Picture File Dialog
1
2
3
4
890
1 Navigate to the folder containing the

picture to be imported.
2 Select the picture file from the list.

3 File name shows the selected picture.
4 Files of type can be *.bmp, *.jpg,
*.png, *.gif, *.tif, or *.pcx.
Click Open to finish importing the picture.

The picture is placed in the center of the
current view.
and selecting Edit> Paste> Paste from the

menu, or by using the Screen Capture tools.
See Paste on page 137 and Creating
Importing Backdrops
Backdrops for 3D views can be imported
directly into the Library Browser from
anywhere on your computer. See Adding
Backdrops to the Library on page 676.
Importing/
Exporting Metafiles
Using Paste Image

You can also import a picture by first
copying it to the Windows Clipboard,
Enhanced Metafiles (.EMF) can be imported

and exported. See Metafiles on page 901.
Resize Factor
An imported picture of a house plan or
property layout can be drawn at full scale
with a bit of calculation.
To calculate the Resize Factor
1.
Import the picture file.
2.
Find two items on the picture that are a

known horizontal or vertical distance
apart.
3.
Draw parallel CAD lines on top of these

two items.
4.
Find the distance between the CAD

lines.
5.
The Resize Factor for the image is the

true distance on the image divided by
the distance between the CAD lines.
In other words, if the items are supposed to

be 10 feet apart on the picture, but the
distance between the two CAD lines
superimposed on them is only 2 feet, you
need to set the Resize Factor for the picture
to 5. (10 divided by 2 equals 5). When the
picture is 5 times the original size, the items
on the picture are at the actual scale shown
on the picture.
6.
Select the picture and click the Transform/Replicate Object

edit button.
The Transform/Replicate Object
dialog opens.
7.
Select the Resize Factor check box and

enter the calculated Resize Factor.
8.
Click OK and the image is rescaled.
891
Pics, Images
& Movies
Picture files can be edited like other objects.

See Editing Objects on page 79.
Resize Picture
4.
A selected picture can be resized in

either the X or Y direction with the
Resize Picture tool.
1.
Select the picture.
2.
Click the Resize Picture

button.
3.
Click two points in the image that have a

known distance between them.
After you click at the second point, the
Resize Picture dialog opens showing
the distance between the points.
edit
5.
Enter a new dimension that matches the

known distance between the points.
6.
Click OK and the picture is resized.
Exporting Picture Files

The Export Picture tool is similar to
creating a screen capture of everything
in the current Chief Architect window. Select
File> Export> Picture (BMP, JPG, PNG)
to open the Export Picture File dialog

and save the current view as a picture file.
Files may be saved in various picture file
formats. These files can then be used outside
of Chief Architect in other applications.
1
2
3
4
1 Navigate to the desired folder.
2 The pictures that exist in the current
folder display here.
892
3 Give the picture a name.

4 Save as type can be *.bmp, *.jpg,
*.png, *.tif, or *.pcx.
Importing/
Exporting Metafiles
Click Save to finish.
Enhanced Metafiles (.EMF) can be imported

and exported. See Metafiles on page 901.

Select an imported picture file and click the
Open Object
Picture File Box Specification dialog.
1 Filename - The full pathname for the
picture file. Type a new name to change

the picture assigned to this box.
Browse - Click this button to browse for a
new picture file or to relink to a missing file.
2 Retain Aspect Ratio - Check this box
to maintain the width to height ratio of

the original image. If you change one value,
the other recalculates so the image is not
stretched or distorted as it is resized.
893
Pics, Images
& Movies
Reset Original Aspect Ratio - If the aspect

ratio is changed, you can click this button to
return the picture to its original aspect ratio.
Width - Specify the desired width of the
picture box in plan inches. The original
width in pixels displays to the right.
Height - Specify the desired height of the
picture box in plan inches. The original
height in pixels displays to the right.
3 X Position - The location of the picture

box relative to the absolute origin.
Y Position - The location of the picture box

relative to the absolute origin.
Angle - The current angle of the picture box
relative to a horizontal line pointing towards
the right hand side of the screen.
4 Input/Output (IO) Options - Check
Check Black and White Dither to dither

the selected picture file. Dithering creates a
two tone effect that may produce better
results when printing some pictures.
Check Grayscale to replace the color in the
selected picture file with shades of gray.
Check Reflect to reverse the image.
Enter a degree of Brightness from 1 - 100%.
Enter a degree of Contrast from 1 - 100%.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab in the Picture File Box
Specification dialog is similar to the same
tab in numerous other dialogs, with one
exception.
Uncheck the Show Outline box to turn off
the display of the pictures border polyline.
Save in Plan to embed the image in the

plan file. If a picture file is embedded in a
plan, you do not need to include it when
sending the plan to a different computer.
Click the radio button beside either PNG or
JPEG to specify:
Picture files that were originally using

.jpg format select the .jpg option by
default.
Picture files that were using .gif or .png

formats select the .png option by default.
5 Choose from a variety of Display

Fill Style Tab

tab, see Fill Style Tab on page 864.
Options.
Creating Images
Select Build> Image to view the
Image Tools, which allow you to use
894
2D images representing real world objects to

enhance your 3D views.
Creating Images
Images have the advantage of making 3D

views and renderings more realistic without
adding many surfaces to the model. For
example, a realistic tree image can be used
instead of a tree symbol with thousands of
surfaces, dramatically improving realism
without compromising drawing time.
block from the library. See CAD

Blocks on page 870.
Enter Height and/or Width and Location information.
3.
Enter transparency information and

layer information on the Transparency
tab.
An image is not the same as a picture file.

See Picture Files vs. Pictures and Image
Objects on page 890. Images are associated
with a CAD block for floor plan view and
have width and height data assigned to them.
4.
Click OK to close the Image

5.
Click to place the new image in floor

plan view.
There are two types of images in the

program:
For information about saving images to the

library, see Adding Images to the Library
on page 897.
Images
rotate so that they always
face the camera in 3D views.
Billboard Images
do not rotate to
face the camera. An example of when
this may be useful is an image of a trellis,
which might look awkward when facing
a camera from a side view.
To create an image in the Library Browser

1.
From the Library Browser, select an

unlocked library, folder, subfolder, or
image.
2.
Right-click with the mouse and select

New> Image to open the Image
Specification dialog. See Image
3.
Once created, the image is listed in the

Library Browser where you rightclicked. Size and other data is saved.
To create an image in floor plan view

1.
In floor plan view, select Build>

Image> Create Image
or Billboard
to open the Image

Image
2.
On the Image tab:

Click the Browse button to browse to a
picture file on your computer or enter
the path to a valid picture file in the
Image File field.
Select a CAD block to represent the
image in floor plan view. Choose a 2D
Plan Symbol from the list or click the
Library button and select a CAD
Using Paste Image

You can also import an image by first
copying it to the Windows Clipboard,
and selecting Edit> Paste> Paste from the
menu, or by using the Screen Capture tools.
See Paste on page 137 and Creating
895
Pics, Images
& Movies
Converting a
Folder of Images
A folder of images can be converted
into image objects all at once, saving
the effort of converting them individually.
To convert a folder of images:
1.
2.
Select a folder of images to convert in

the Browse For Folder dialog and
click OK.
3.
When all of the images in the folder are

converted, a new library of the same
name and directory structure as the converted folder is listed in the Library
Browser.
Select Build> Image> Create Image

Library
Placing Images
Open the Library and expand the
Image cetegory. Select an image and
click in a floor plan, vector, or render view to
place it.
The image displays in 3D views and a CAD

block marks its location in floor plan view.
Displaying Images
The display of images in floor plan and 3D
views can be controlled in the Layer
An image consists of a two-dimensional
picture file, an associated CAD block, and
width and height data. Depending on the type
of view that is current, the image appears
differently, or may not display at all.
In Floor Plan View

In floor plan view, images are represented by
an 2D CAD block. Any 2D CAD block from
the library can represent an image object. See

The CAD blocks that represent images in
floor plan view are placed on the Images
layer by default. They can be moved to other
layers. See Image Specification Dialog on
page 897.
In Layout
The symbols representing images in floor
plan view, whether 2D symbols or CAD
blocks, can display on a layout sheet and be
printed or plotted.
Resizing an Image
Images can be resized in either 2D or 3D
896
views, or in the Image Specification
dialog. See Image Specification Dialog on

page 897.
the top. The picture image and the 2D

symbol resize proportionally.
When either the height or the width is

changed, the rest of the image resizes
proportionally.
Images can be resized in floor plan view by
dragging the circular handles at the top of the
2D symbol. This method retains the aspect
ratio of the of the image and 2D CAD block..
An image can be resized in any 3D view by

dragging the circular Resize edit handle at

Chief Architect can use any image with a
*.bmp, *.jpg, *.png, *.gif, *.tif, or *.pcx.
extension.
Generally, .png files work best as images
because this format has good compression
and allows for the image to contain
transparency information.
Right click on an unlocked folder in the
Library Browser. Select New> Image from
the contextual menu. The Image

Specification dialog opens.
Browse to the image you want to add and
select your other options. For more
information in these options, see Image
For information about adding images, see
Graphics Directories on page 193.
Any image can be adjusted in size or even

changed to a different image altogether.
Select the image and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Image
Existing images can also be opened for

specification directly from the Library
Browser. Select an image in the tree view,
right click, and select Open from the
contextual menu.
897
Pics, Images
& Movies
Image Tab
1
2
3
5
4
6
1 Image File - The path and name of the
image. The width adjusts

proportionally.
2 2D Plan Symbol - Several universal

CAD blocks are available to mark the
location of the image in floor plan view.
Select one from the drop-down list or click
the Library button to choose a CAD block
from the Library Browser.
image. The height adjusts

proportionally.
If you change the CAD block that represents

an image in floor plan view, you may want to
save the new image to the library. See
Displaying Images on page 896.
898
3 Height - Enter a height for the selected
selected image file. Click Browse to

open the Library Browser and replace the
current image with a different one.
4 Width - Enter a width for the selected

5 Check Do not rotate in render view to
keep the image from rotating with the

camera.
6 Location - Locate the selected image
precisely by specifying its X

Coordinate and Y Coordinate.
Height Above - Specify the image height

above the ground, if applicable.
Transparency Tab
2
3
1 Click this button to keep the default
transparency included in the image file.
2 To use another color to represent the

tansparency, click this button.
Click the color box to open Color Chooser

dialog and select another transparency color.
Enter a level of Tolerance to be applied to
colors that are almost the same color as the
specified transparency color. Use the slide
bar or type a number in the edit box.
that is magenta becomes transparent in 3D

views. If the image itself contains the
transparency color, that part of the image
also becomes transparent. This may make the
image appear partially disintegrated.
You may need to experiment to find the best
transparency color for the image.
Layer Tab
3 Place your pointer over a part of the

Pics, Images
& Movies
preview and a magnified preview

displays here, allowing for accurate pixel
selection.
The Transparency Color

By default, the program uses magenta as the
transparency color. Every pixel in the image
899
Creating Screen Captures

Use the Screen Capture tools to add
backdrops, images or materials to the Chief
Architect Library or to create picture objects.
You can capture screens in Chief Architect or
other applications.
Begin by selecting Tools> Screen Capture>

Screen Capture Setup
to open the
Screen Capture Setup dialog.
Screen Capture Setup Dialog

1
2
3
1 Select the Screen Capture Creation
If you choose Picture as the capture type,

the picture displays on screen in Chief
Architect.
Type that you want.
If you select Backdrop as the capture

type, the program will add the capture to
the My Backdrops library category, and it
will display in the library preview panes.
To use this backdrop, select 3D> 3D Settings
from the menu. See 3D Settings Dialog on page 757.
If you select Image as the capture type,

the program will add the capture to the
My Images library category. The image
will display in the preview panes and will
be selected. Click in the plan to place it.
If you select Material as the capture
type, the new material will be added to
the My Materials library category and
will be shown in the preview panes.
Painter
900
to apply the material.
2 Follow these instructions to create the
screen capture after you have selected a

capture type.
3 Click Capture when you are ready to

proceed.
To create a screen capture

1.
Select 3D> Screen Capture> Capture

Screen
, or click the Capture button
in the Screen Capture Setup dialog,
then right-click on screen to activate the
capture tool.
2.
Navigate to the window you want to

capture from. This can be in Chief
Architect, another program, or a Web
page in your Internet browser.
Metafiles
3.
Click to specify the first corner of the

capture.
4.
Click to specify the second corner. A

marquee defines the capture area as you
move the mouse.
To change the name of a captured backdrop,

image, or material, right click on its name in
the library list, select Rename, and type in
the new name. See Renaming Libraries on
page 677.
Metafiles
A metafile (.EMF) is a special file format
that is made up of vectors (lines) that allow
the image to be rescaled without loss of
quality. High resolution pictures can be
exported as a metafile.
5.
Enter a name and location for the metafile.
6.
Click Save to close the Export

Metafile dialog and open the Metafile
Size dialog.
7.
Specify the metafile desired Width or

Height. When one value is edited, the
other changes to maintain its aspect
ratio. Metafiles can always be resized
later.
Exporting Metafiles
A metafile can be exported from any
view except render and raytrace views.
Only items that display on screen are written
to the metafile.
To export a metafile
Accurately position the view on screen.
2.
Select File> Export> Metafile (EMF)

.
3.
4.
Drag a marquee
from corner to corner, defining the area that will become a
metafile.
Release the mouse to open the Export
Metafile dialog.
Specify, too the desired Dots Per Inch

(DPI) for the metafile. A larger value
results in a higher quality metafile, but
also a larger file size.
3D Views and Metafiles

The Metafile Size dialog from a 3D view
also allows you increase the printing line
weight of a metafile created from any 3D
view.
901
Pics, Images
& Movies
1.
This option has no effect on a metafile

created from a floor plan view. Metafiles
created from a floor plan view use the line
weights defined in the Layer Display
Importing Metafiles
To increase the printing line weight, type a
larger number in the Use Line Weight box.
A line weight of 3 or 4 is usually sufficient
for plotting.
Select File> Import> Metafile from

floor plan view, a cross section/
elevation view, or a CAD detail to open the
Import Metafile dialog, which is a typical
open file dialog. See Opening a Plan or
Layout File on page 164.
Editing Metafiles
Once imported into a plan, a metafile can be
selected and edited like other objects. See
Using Dimensions
Metafiles can be relocated relative to other
objects with precision using dimensions. See
page 804.
As with most objects, metafiles can be

copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See
metafile.

edit button to
open the Metafile Specification
dialog. See Metafile Specification Dialog on page 903.
If another object occupies the same space

as the metafile, click the Move to Front
Using Edit Handles

Metafiles can be edited using their edit
handles much the way CAD boxes can. See
Using Edit Buttons

A selected metafile can be edited in a variety
902
of Group
edit button to display the
metafile on top of the other objects. See

Select an imported metafile and click the
Open Object
Metafile Specification dialog.
General Tab
1 The metafiles Size displays here along
with the current Aspect ratio. You can

enter a different Width or Height.
Uncheck the Show Outline box to turn off

the display of the pictures border polyline.
2 The metafiles original aspect ratio
displays here. If the metafiles width or

height has been changed, you can click the
Convert To Original Aspect Ratio button
to return it to the original aspect ratio.
3 The Metafiles current Position and

orientation display here. Enter a new X
Position and/or a Y Position to relocate the
Metafile in absolute coordinates. You can
also change the Metafiles Angle.

Fill Style Tab

Pics, Images
& Movies
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab in the Metafile
Specification dialog is similar to the same
tab in numerous other dialogs, with one
exception.
903

You can copy any portion of the screen
and save it as a picture.
4.
To use Copy Region as Picture

1.
Open the view that you would like to

copy all or part of as a picture.
2.
Select Edit> Copy Region as Picture

. Your pointer displays a marquee
icon.
3.
Click and drag a rectangular selection

marquee around the desired region.
5.
The selection is copied to the Windows

clipboard.
As long as the current view is not a render or raytrace view, the Metafile
Size dialog displays because the program uses this file format to produce
vector-based pictures. See Exporting
Metafiles on page 901.
If the current view is a render or raytrace view, the region is sent directly to
the Windows clipboard.
From there, the picture can be pasted
into another view or another program.
Walkthroughs
Introductory Training Video: Virtual
Walkthroughs
A 3D Walkthrough is a series of picture
files saved in .avi format that can be
opened by other applications such as
Windows Media Player.
Select a Frame Rate between 1 and
100. The value entered is the number
of frames per second.
Select a Compression Percent
between 0 and 100. A value of 0 gives
the highest quality images and the largest file size.
Click OK.
Recording a Walkthrough
1.
Create a vector or render view. This

view is the first frame of the walkthrough.
2.
From the view, select 3D> Walkthroughs> Record Walkthrough
904
3.
Specify a location and name for the

walkthrough in the Write Movie File
dialog and click Save.
4.
In the Walkthrough Options dialog:
5.
Use the camera movement tools to create additional views. Each time the
screen redraws, that view is recorded as
the next frame in sequence. See Moving a Camera in 3D Views on page 737.
Creating VRML Files
6.
To move the camera without saving a

view, select 3D> Walkthroughs> Pause
Recording
to temporarily stop
recording. You can then use the Save
Frame
button to control what views
are saved, or start recording again by
selecting 3D> Walkthroughs> Pause
Recording
7.
again.
When the walkthrough sequence is complete choose 3D>Walkthroughs> Stop

Recording
Note: Zooming in and out and using the scroll

bars does not change the viewpoint and does
not produce a frame for the walkthrough.
Playing a Walkthrough
Select 3D> Walkthroughs> Play
Walkthrough to open the Open
Movie File dialog. Browse to an .avi on
your computer. Your default video
application plays the walkthrough.
or close the view.
Creating VRML Files

VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling
Language) is a 3D file format that can
be imported by various walkthrough
viewers as well as other rendering packages.
An exported VRML file contains the entire
3D model with texture, image, and lighting

information that cannot be exported via
DWG/DXF. You can post a VRML file to the
web or e-mail it to a customer.
Exporting VRML Files

VRML files are created from vector and
render views. The entire model is exported,
but the starting point for the walkthrough is
defined by the camera location at the time of
export. VRML files use the same textures
that appear in render views.
VRML files match render views more

closely than vector views since they use
similar display methods including lighting
and textures.
When a vector or render view is active, select
File> Export> Export VRML
. The
VRML Export Options dialog opens.
2
4
6
8
Pics, Images
& Movies
5
7
905
1 Define the Camera Field of View.
Standard most closely corresponds to

the default Chief Architect camera view. The
other options generate a wider field of view.
Select as many options along the right side as
desired.
2 No Textures Exported keeps
associated texture files from being

exported with the VRML file. If textures are
exported, the texture files must be in the
folder with the VRML file.
3 Walk Through Surfaces allows you to
walk through walls and closed doors

from room to room, instead of stopping when
you reach a wall.
4 Turn off Ambient Lights turns off the
default lights that are used to light a

scene.
5 Turn off Fixture Lights turns off the
default lights that are generated for

fixtures and used to light a scene.
6 Night Sky/Ground colors darkens the
ground plane and sky to give a night

appearance.
7 Run Default VRML Viewer starts the
VRML viewer and opens the new

VRML file as soon as it is generated.
8 Copy Images to Export Directory
should be checked if you are saving the

VRML to a file on a disk to share with
others. This copies texture bitmaps with the
VRML file so that they render correctly
when exported.
Once the general parameters have been
selected click OK. Name the VRML file and
906
save it to the desired VRML folder and click

Save.
It is best to keep all VRML files in a
folder separate from your normal Chief
Architect files, since all textures used in the
model also export to the same folder. This
could add a significant number of files, creating potential organization problems. A folder
named VRML export can be found in the
Chief Architect root directory for this purpose.
VRML use of Texture

& Image Files
The VRML specification does not support
the use of .bmp files. Instead, VRML only
supports compressed file formats such as
.gif, .png, or .jpg files. These are more
compatible, compressed, efficient formats. In
order for VRML to render textures correctly,
the texture and image files must be in the
same directory as the exported .wrl file.
You may add new texture and image files for
Chief Architect to use if you use the same
file formats as those provided with the
program. If you want to use a .bmp file in
Chief Architect and still be able to export it
with the VRML file, you should also create a
.gif file with the same name in the same
directory. When you export the VRML file,
Chief Architect automatically substitutes the
.gif for the .bmp file used in the render view.
You should use either the .jpg or .png file
format instead of using .bmp and .gif pairs
whevenever possible.
For more information about VRML players,
visit the Chief Architect Web site at
www.chiefarchitect.com.
Importing and
Exporting
Chapter Overview
Video: Importing and Exporting 3D
Symbols
Video: Importing and Exporting 2D
DWG or DXF Files
Chief Architect allows you to import and
export files from, and to, other plans or other
CAD programs. Importing is the process of
opening a file in Chief Architect that was
produced in a different program. Exporting is
the process of saving a file in a format that
can be read by another program.
Chapter Contents
Compatibility
DXF vs. DWG
CAD to Walls
Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files
Additional 2D Import Information
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files
Additional 2D Export Information
Exporting a 3D Model in DXF/DWG
Format
Exporting a 3D Model in 3DS Format
907
Importing &
Exporting
Chapter 35:
Compatibility
Importing
Chief Architect supports import of the
following:
For more information on importing these

files, see Create Symbol Wizard on page
925.
Exporting
2D .dxf or .dwg files compatible with

AutoCAD through version 2007.
Polylines (Bulges- Arcs in Polyline)
Chief Architect supports export of the

following:
Multi Line Text
Lightweight Polylines
Complete 3D .dxf or .dwg models

including geometry.
2D Solids (Not ACIS Solids)
3D faces/polyface meshes
3D .3ds models including geometry and

materials
Hatch entities
3D views as 2D .dxf or .dwg files
Spline entities
Ellipses
Chief Architect also supports import of these

file types using the Create Symbol Wizard:
3D .dwg/.dxf files compatible with

AutoCAD
.obj files
.3ds files
Dimensions
Chief Architect supports the import and
export of aligned, rotated, and angular
dimensions. Imported dimensions that are
not supported by Chief Architect can be
edited only as lines and text.
CAD blocks containing dimensions as text
must be exploded before the text can be
edited separately. For more on exploding, see
DXF vs. DWG

Many design programs can read and write
.dxf and .dwg file formats. Both formats
interpret data as CAD objects such as lines,
polylines, and circles.
908
.dwg is the native AutoCAD file format.

Originally a proprietary format, it is now
widely used with many different products.
The .dxf (Drawing eXchange Format) is a
standard file format created by Autodesk for
the transfer of data between other programs.
CAD to Walls
This feature allows you to convert a
flat line drawing into a 3D model.
Once a drawing has been imported into Chief
Architect, double CAD lines that represent
wall layers and other structural items can be

converted to actual Chief Architect walls,
railings, windows, or doors. See CAD to
Walls on page 249.

To import a 2D drawing file, select
File> Import> Drawing (DWG/DXF)
to open the welcome page of the Import
Drawing Wizard. Click Next to continue.
A .dxf or .dwg file can be imported into floor

plan view, Wall Elevation
Section/Elevation
Detail window.
view, Cross
view, or a CAD
Select File
1
2
3
4
5
1 Enter the full pathname of the drawing
file you want to import or click Browse

to locate a file on your computer. The
directory containing the last file selected
using the Import Drawing Wizard displays in

this field.
2 If you want to convert lines to polylines
or boxes, check the appropriate options.
909
Importing &
Exporting
CAD to Walls
Polylines are imported as polylines

regardless of these settings.
Terrain Elevation Data - Check this box to
import lines as Terrain Data. See Importing
DXF/DWG Elevation Data on page 627.
Polylines - Check this option to import lines
as polylines. Unconnected lines will be
connected. This option is rarely needed.
Boxes - Check this option to import lines as
boxes. Unconnected lines will be connected.
This option is rarely needed.
3 Select Import all CAD blocks to
access all CAD blocks associated with
the file being imported whether or not they

are visible. See CAD Block Management
on page 871.
4 Select Only import CAD blocks if
they are referenced in the drawing to

reduce the volume of transferred data.
5 Check Import Hatch entities to import
areas of hatching as solid-filled

polylines.
Click Next to load the file into memory so

that Chief Architect can present information
about the contents of the file. This can take a
while for larger files.
Select Layers
2
1
3
1 Specify which layers you want to
import. Boxes checked at left are

imported; unchecked boxes are not.
2 Layers that were visible on import are
checked by default. You may choose to

include an invisible layer by checking the
box at left.
910
3 Layers that were frozen on import are
not checked by default. You can include

them by checking the box at left.
Layers are designated as visible or
frozen before a file is saved/exported in the
original program. Changes must be made in
the original program and saved/exported
again.
Importing &
Exporting
Layer Mapping
1
2
3
4
5
The Layer Mapping page specifies how

layers are structured once imported into
Chief Architect.
Mapping to a Single Layer

1 The simplest layer mapping option is to
assign all CAD objects to a single Chief

Architect layer. This choice offers the least
control. Original layer attributes are lost.
Line color, style, and weight are preserved on
a per object basis.
2 All CAD objects to be imported are
placed on the layer indicated in the box.

Select a layer from the drop-down list or
click the Define... button to open the Layer
Display Options dialog and specify a layer
and its properties. See Layer Display
Mapping Layers By Name

3 The second option is to map layers by
name. Layers are created in Chief

Architect with the same names as those listed
on the Select Layers window of the Import
Drawing Wizard, and the imported CAD
objects are placed on those layers.
4 In combination with the second
alternative, you may choose to import

all attributes for each layer or none at all.
The third option is to map each layer
individually with complete control of
all layer mapping options. Selecting the third
option opens the Advanced Layer
Mapping page.
911
Advanced Layer Mapping
If you select the Advanced Layer Mapping

alternative, the Advanced Layer
Mapping page displays. This window
allows for complete user control of all layer
mapping options.
1 Lists the layers found in the drawing
file and the layer in Chief Architect that

each will be imported to. Select a layer and
specify which layer to import it to below.
Select multiple layers by holding down the
Shift key.
912
2 Shows the Chief Layer that the
currently selected drawing file layer

will be imported to. Select a different layer in
Chief Architect to import onto from the dropdown list, or click the Define... button to
open the Layer Display Options dialog
where Chief layers can be specified and
defined. See Layer Display Options Dialog
on page 218.
Repeat these steps for additional layers.
Click Next to continue.
Importing &
Exporting
Duplicate CAD Blocks
1
2
3
4
If one or more CAD blocks in the imported

file have the same name as a block in the
current plan, the Duplicate CAD Blocks
page displays.
4 Select the fourth option to open the
Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks
page and manage each duplicate individually.

There are four alternatives. Selecting any of

the first three applies that choice to all
duplicate CAD blocks in your plan.
1 The first choice is to allow the program
to automatically generate unique names

for each duplicate. For instance, if the
original files name is blockname, the
program gives the new file a name like:
blockname-copy or blockname-copy-1.
2 The second alternative is to replace the
existing block in the plan with the

duplicate. This option is not recommended,
as all instances of the CAD block are
replaced.
3 The third is to keep the existing block

and discard the duplicate.
913
Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks
3
1
4
If you chose the fourth option from the

Duplicate CAD Block dialog, the
Advanced Duplicate CAD Block
window displays. It allows you to apply the

first three alternatives from the previous
window to each duplicate individually.
1 Highlight a block in the list at the far
left. Select multiple blocks by holding

down the Shift key..
2 Click one of the three buttons in the
center of the window to specify how the

highlighted blocks are to be treated.
3 Review your choices in the tables at the

right.
4 Highlight block(s) within tables at far
right and click Remove to reverse

choices.
914
Importing &
Exporting
Drawing Unit
1
3
1 What unit of measurement was used
to create this drawing? - Click the

drop down box and select a unit of
measurement. This ensures that your
imported drawing is accurate.
3 Import as CAD blocks - Select this
radio button to import dimensions as

CAD entities that are not recognized by
Chief Architect as dimensions.
Import Complete
Note: During the import process, Chief ArchitectHome Designer Pro defaults to inches or
millimeters. If you are importing a site plan or
topo prepared by a surveyor, or if you are
importing a metric drawing into an imperial
plan (or vice versa), you may need to change
units.
2 Import as dimensions where possible
- Select this radio button to import

dimensions as Chief Architect supported
dimensions.
When a file is imported, it initially appears in

Chief Architect as a single unit, with a Move
edit handle
available for relocating the
entire drawing. A Rotation handle is
available as well.
Imported CAD objects can be manipulated
with the CAD tools. See Editing Objects
on page 79.

2D import is accomplished by reading
entities from the .dwg or .dxf file and
creating the equivalent CAD objects in Chief
Architect.
In general, all Z coordinates are mapped to

zero. If an entity has thickness, Chief
Architect ignores it.
The following is a list of the entities that are
read and how they are converted. All other
entities are ignored:
915
Lines
- Both 2D and 3D lines.
Circle - Fully supported in 2D.

Arc - Fully supported in 2D.
Ellipse - Fully supported in 2D.
Splines - Fully supported as 2D polylines.
Text & Multi-line Text - Both are mapped to
the Text layer. Multi-line text objects retain
their original width. The first font in a multiline text object is applied to the entire object.
Hatch - If Import Hatch entities is selected
on the Select file page of the Import
Drawing Wizard for a .dwg file, Hatch
patterns are imported as a CAD block
consisting of solid black filled polylines.
Blocks & Block Inserts - Blocks are loaded
by name. The Duplicate CAD Blocks
dialog controls whether the block is imported
under a new name, replaces an existing block
or simply uses the existing block of the same
name. A block is a group of entities.
Solid - A solid is a 3 or 4-sided filled area.
These are imported as faces.
3D Face - A 3D face has its Z coordinate
mapped to zero, and imports as a polyline.
Dimension - Chief Architect supports the
rotated, aligned and 3-point angular
dimensions. All other dimension types have

their associated block imported and placed as
an insert at the appropriate location.
Polylines and Lightweight Polylines Polylines are imported as polylines. Bumps
are converted to arcs. Line widths are
ignored.
Attributes - Attributes are text objects that
are associated with other items, like blocks.
These are imported as text objects at the
appropriate location. The association with
the original object is broken.
Layers - There can be some confusion
between importing a layer and actually
mapping entities to a layer. The distinction is
important. The filter and layer mapping
pages of the Import Drawing Wizard
mostly deal with how entities are mapped
from one layer to another. Layer information
is only imported through the path that maps
all layers to successive numbered layers or in
the Advanced Layer Mapping dialog
when the appropriate item is checked.
Line Styles - Line styles are not imported.
Instead, if a style of the same name displays
in the Chief Architect line styles, that line
style is used. Otherwise a solid line style is
used.
Importing 3D DWG, DXF, 3DS, and OBJ Files

Chief Architect supports the import of 3D
surface and 3D solid object saved to the
.dwg/.dxf format. These models are
decomposed into polyface meshes on import.
916
It is not necessary to explode a 3D model

before importing it; the block is exploded as
part of the import process.
Materials assigned to the 3D model in the
originating program do not transfer into
Chief Architect.
In Chief Architect, materials are assigned by

layer. Objects residing on the same layer are
assigned the same material.
3D .dxf, .dwg and .obj files are imported
using the Create Symbol Wizard. See
Create Symbol Wizard on page 925.
.3ds and .obj files are also imported using the
Create Symbol Wizard. The textures
associated with .3ds are imported along with

the model and copied to the My Textures
folder of the Library Browser. The materials
associated with .obj files are also imported if
the supporting files are available.

2D and 3D files can be exported from Chief
Architect in both .dxf and .dwg file formats.
You can specify the version of AutoCAD to
export to. Compatibility with other software
may vary.
There are two ways to export .dxf files, both
using the Export Drawing File dialog.
To export the floor or CAD detail that
is currently visible, select File>
Export> Current View (DWG/
DXF).
To export the floor plan view for all
floors simultaneously, select File>
Export> All Floors (DWG/DXF)
from any floor of the plan.
917
Importing &
Exporting
Export Drawing File

1
2
3
4
5
6
10
7
9
11
13
15
12
14
1 Save In - The current directory displays
here. Click the drop down arrow and

browse to the export location you prefer.
2 Existing .dxf or .dwg files in the

current directory are listed here.
3 Enter a file name.

4 Save as type - Specify the file format
Chief Architect should use to export.
5 File Format Options - .dxf and .dwg
files created by Chief Architect are

compatible with many versions of
AutoCAD. Specify which version from the
drop down list.
6 Binary DXF - Check this box to export

the file in binary .dxf format. Binary
918
.dxf is easier for the computer to read, is

more accurate, and occupies less disk space,
but some applications do not support binary
.dxf.
The .dxf format must be selected at step 4 to
allow binary .dxf as an option.
7 Split Wall Assemblies Into Layers -
Wall assemblies can be split into layers,

allowing them to be edited separately.
8 Export only displayed layers - Select
this radio button to export only those

layers that display on screen.
9 Export all used and named layers -
Select this radio button to export all

layers that either have something on them or
have a layer name specified. See Layer

This file is now ready to be imported by

another program.
10 Layer Set - Select a layer set to export.
If you chose to export all floors, the file

will contain all floors superimposed on
each other. The items are on distinct layers, each for its own floor. Items or entire
floors can be turned on or off as desired.
For each floor, different plan items are

placed on separate layers. The floor an
item is located on is indicated by a number following the layer name. For example: Electrical-2 contains the electrical
information for the second floor.
Customize layer sets to accommodate

desired naming conventions or display
attributes. See Layer Sets on page 216.
11 Define Layers - Clicking this button
opens the Layer Display Options

dialog and allows you to edit your layer sets
before exporting. See Layer Display
12 Scaling Unit - Select the unit of

measurement to be used.
13 Create Associative Dimensions Check this box to export dimensions as

associative dimensions. Associative
dimensions are recognized by AutoCAD and
many other CAD programs.
Uncheck this box to export dimensions as
simple CAD entities that are not recognized
dimensions.
14 Export Pattern Lines - Check this box
to export pattern lines. Pattern lines are

exported as normal CAD lines.
15 Export Filled Areas - Check this box
to export filled areas as AutoCAD 2D

solid entities.
Select Save to complete.
DXF/DWG 2D View
Sometimes a flat 2D drawing of a 3D camera
view, overview or elevation is needed. When
the 3D view is on screen with the desired
objects shown, select File> Export> Current View
. Name the file and save in the
desired location.
Before exporting, turn off the color
(Tools> Color Off) in the 3D view so
that only lines show. This reveals which lines
will be visible in the exported file.
Elevation and cross section views produce a

file with accurate dimensions. Vector and
overviews are not produced to scale.
Use the CAD Detail from View tool to
automatically create a 2D view from a
3D view. See CAD Detail From View on
page 751.

The export process converts high level Chief
Architect objects (doors, windows, etc) into
simple, CAD-based objects (lines, circles,

etc). Chief Architect exports all data to
919
Importing &
Exporting
AutoCADs model space. The following

entity types are currently supported for 2D
export:
Line - The simplest entity. In AutoCAD, this
is a 3 dimensional line with the Z coordinate
set to zero.
Arc - Arcs have a start angle, end angle and
radius.
Circle - Fully Supported.
Multi Line Text - If exporting to an
AutoCAD release that supports multi-line
text, Chief Architect writes the file as multiline text. If exporting to a version that does
not support multi-line text, the file is written
as simple text.
Polyline - Polylines are a collection of points
with lines or arcs connecting them. Chief
Architect supports both lines and arcs. Arcs
are referred to as bulges in AutoCAD.
Dimension
920
Each dimension has an associated block

that contains a representation of the
dimension as it is drawn in Chief
Architect. It also contains all the data to
recreate that information.
When an exported dimension is modified
in AutoCAD or another CAD program,
its appearance changes.
Chief Architect does not support arrowhead styles or fonts.
Three kinds of dimensions are generated:

Aligned, Rotated and 3 Point Angular.
Please refer to AutoCAD documentation

for more information.
Note: Uncheck Use Associative Dimensions in the Export Drawing File dialog
if the CAD program you are using does not
support AutoCAD Associative dimensions.
See Export Drawing File on page 918.
Block Insert - A block insert is a reference

to a block, which is a named collection of
entities. A block can also contain block
inserts.
In addition to the above entities several other
things are also written to the file as follows:
Line Type
A line type is used by layers and entities to
determine how lines are drawn. Chief
Architect line types are supported on export.
Layers
Layers in other systems are similar to Chief
Architect layers, but there are some subtle
differences. The following information in a
layer is mapped as follows:
Chief
Architect
Other Systems
Name
Name
Color
Nearest AutoCAD Color. Chief

Architect uses the default
AutoCAD color table to
determine this mapping.
Display
On
Size
Line Weight. In AutoCAD, line

weights are determined by a
table of mm line widths. Chief
Architect maps to the closest
match in the default line weight
table based the Line Weight
Scale set in the Page Setup
dialog. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 963.
Style
Line type
Lock
Lock
Importing &
Exporting
Exporting a 3D Model in DXF/DWG Format
Exporting a 3D Model in DXF/DWG Format

The entire 3D model can be exported
from Chief Architect as a 3D file, with
all surfaces exported as 3DFACE entities.
This file can then be imported by any
program that is fully compatible with
AutoCADs 3D .dxf or .dwg format.
To export the 3D model, a 3D view must be
active. Make sure that everything to be
exported is visible. If you use the delete
surfaces tool, the deleted surfaces are not
exported.
When the model is ready, select File>
Export> 3D Model (DWG/DXF)...
.
Give the file a name, making sure to save it
in the desired location. The 3D model is
created.
Layers for 3D DWG/DXF Model

When you export a 3D model, all surfaces
are exported as 3DFACE entities. Each entity
represents a surface in the 3D model. The
entities are placed on layers that are named
by Chief Architect. The names currently
used by Chief Architect are listed below.
AutoCAD Layer
Name
A-APPL-MAIN
A-CASE-CABF
A-CASE-CABN
A-CASE-CNTR
A-CASE-GLAS
A-CASE-SOFF
A-CASE-TOEA
A-CEIL-BAY
A-CEIL-MAIN
A-CEIL-SLOP
A-DOOR-STND
A-EQPM-DOOR
A-EQPM-HDWR
A-FIXT-GLAS
A-FIXT-MAIN
A-FLOR-BAY
A-FLOR-MAIN
A-FOOT-FOOT
A-FRAM-CEIL
Chief Architect
Surface / Object
Appliance
Cabinet Door
Cabinet Box
Cabinet Counter Top
Cabinet Glass
Soffit
Cabinet Toe Area
Bay / Bow Window
Ceiling
Platform Ceiling
Roof Ceiling
Door
Window Hardware
Cabinet Hardware
Fixture Glass
Fixture
Bay / Bow Window
Floor
Platform Floor
Footing Top
Ceiling Framing
921
A-FRAM-DECK
A-FRAM-GENL
A-FRAM-JOIS
A-FRAM-ROOF
A-FRAM-TRUS
A-FRAM-WALL
A-FURN-MAIN
A-GLAZ-DOOR
A-GLAZ-WIND
A-HRAL-BAL
A-HRAL-BLST
A-HRAL-NWEL
A-HRAL-RAIL
A-CASE-CABD
A-MASN-FIRE
A-NONE-NONE
A-PLAT-RIM
A-RISR-MAIN
A-ROOF-EAVE
A-ROOF-FASC
A-ROOF-MAIN
A-STRS-RUNR
A-STRS-TRED
A-STRS-UNDR
A-WALL-BAY
A-WALL-EXTW
A-WALL-MAIN
A-WALL-PAPE
Deck Framing
Framing
Floor Framing
Roof Framing
Truss Framing
Wall Framing
Furniture
Door Glass
Window
Stair Baluster
Railing Baluster
Newel
Handrail
Cabinet Drawer
Fireplace
Miscellaneous
Platform Rim
Stair Riser
Roof Soffit
Roof Fascia
Roof
Stair Runner
Stair Tread
Stair Bottom
Bay / Bow Window
Wall
Corner Board
Wall
Wallcovering
A-WALL-PONY Pony Wall

A-WDWK-EXTR Exterior Door /
Window Trim
A-WDWKExterior Sash
EXTTRIM
A-WDWK-MOLD Molding
A-WDWK-SHLF Shelf
A-WDWK-TRIM Interior Door /
Window Trim
C-PROP-CURB
Curb
C-PROP-ROAD
Road
C-PROP-TERA
Terrain
C-PROP-TRFE
Terrain Feature
C-PROP-TRSK
Terrain Skirt
E-ELEC-TRIM
Electrical
DXF Code
Each layer name exported can include a DXF
Code from the materials used for items on
that layer. If a material has been specified for
an item and appears on its surface, the DXF
code for the material is included in the layer
name. This DXF Code is specified on the
General tab of the Plan Material dialog.
These codes are specified in the Plan
Material dialog for each Chief Architect
material. As you add new materials in this
dialog, you can specify an appropriate DXF
code for each.

The entire 3D model can be exported
from Chief Architect as a 3D .3ds file.
A .3ds file can be opened by any program
that is compatible with 3D Studios .3ds
format.
922
To export the 3D model, a 3D view must be

active. All surfaces are exported whether or
now they are visible, but if you use the delete
surfaces tool, the deleted surfaces are not
exported.
Export> 3D Model (3DS)...

file name and location.
Importing &
Exporting
When the model is ready, select File>

, and enter a
1 Check Truncate Texture Names to 8.3
format to truncate material and object

names to an eight character file name with a
three character extension. This allows import
into applications that support only legacy
.3ds files.
2 Check Place Textures in a Separate
Folder to put all associated textures

(image files) into a folder independent of 8.3
file names.
923
924
Chapter 36:
Symbol
Wizard
Create Symbol Wizard
Overview
Chief Architect provides a complete set of
architectural tools for highly customized
design. In addition, the Library Browser
contains a vast supply of objects that can be
used to add more detail to a plan. For
everything else, theres the Create Symbol
Wizard. With the ability to make your own
symbols, the amount of detail that can be
added to a plan is limitless.
With the Create Symbol Wizard, you can
import 3D objects and convert them into 3D
symbols for use within Chief Architect. You
can also modify existing library symbols.
Chapter Contents
Importing 3D Data
Opening the Create Symbol Wizard
Selecting the Symbol Category
Loading the 3D File
2D Block
Cabinet Front Symbols
Symbol Options
Sizing
Materials
Openings
Floor Plan View
Closing the Create Symbol Wizard
Symbol Specification Dialog
This chapter guides you through the process

of creating a symbol in Chief Architect using
the Create Symbol Wizard. Adding
symbols to the library, editing them, and
placing them in a plan are covered in the
Libraries chapter, see Libraries on page
669.
925
Importing 3D Data
Creating a symbol that can be used by Chief
Architect is a relatively simple process that
begins with previously created 3D data. This
3D data usually comes from a program other
than Chief Architect. If you use another 3D
modeling program to create the 3D data, be
aware of the following requirements before
attempting to create symbols.
Chief Architect is not able to provide
support for any third party software.
There are a number of requirements that
must be met before any 3D data can be used
to create a symbol in Chief Architect:
926
The 3D data must be stored in a standard

Drawing Exchange File (.dxf), AutoCAD
Drawing (.dwg), object (.obj) or 3D Studio Mesh (.3ds) file format. If you have
3D data in another format, you must convert it into one these formats first.
Geometry and material information
stored in .3ds files are imported; cameras
and lights are not.
The 3D model must be composed of 3D
DWG or 3DSOLID solid entities, or face
data. Faces are typically referred to as 3D
faces, polygonal faces, or poly meshes.
Other types of entities such as lines,
curves, circles, polylines, and free form
surfaces can exist in the file but are not
imported when the symbol is created.
This is true for all (.dxf /.dwg/.obj/.3ds)
file types.
The face data should be assigned to different layers so that you can map them to
the correct materials when viewing them
in 3D. It is helpful to name your layers
using a convention that identifies that
materials should be assigned to each subcomponent.
Pay attention to the origin and orientation

of the 3D data when designing symbols.
Chief Architect allows some adjustment
when creating the symbol, but it is easier
to build the 3D data correctly before
importing it into Chief Architect. For
more information about defining the origin, see Origin Locations on page 930.
Surface Normals
If you use third party software to help you
create the .dxf /.dwg/.obj/.3ds files that will
be turned into symbols, you should be
familiar with the concept of surface normals.
A surface normal is a vector
that is perpendicular to the
plane of a surface. This
vector points in one
direction, determined by the
way the face is drawn.
If the face is drawn
clockwise, the surface normals are directed
outward, if the face is drawn counterclockwise, the surface normals point inward.
Many objects can be drawn using only one

side of each face. A cube is a good example.
The inside of a cube is not visible when only
the outside faces are drawn. When the inside
faces are not calculated, 3D views in Chief
Architect generate faster. Chief Architect
assumes that the face on the positive side of
the normal vector is the outside face.
A time saving option, Make Faces Double
Sided, allows you to view faces from any
perspective. See Loading the 3D File on
page 929.
The cube on the left shows which direction

each face was drawn and the cube on the

To open the Create Symbol Wizard,
select Tools> Symbol> Create Symbol
A slightly different version of the Create

Symbol Wizard allows you to edit an
existing symbol and can be accessed by

selecting a symbol based object and clicking
the Open Symbol
edit button. See
Symbol Specification Dialog on page 945.
Selecting the Symbol Category

The Select Symbol Category window
allows you to determine the symbol type.
Each category contains properties specific to
the type of item being created. These properties are viewable later in the Create
Symbol Wizard.
927
Symbol
Wizard
right shows which direction the surface

normal for each face points as a result.
1 Category - Choose a category. This
category determines where the symbol

is stored in the Library Browser and may
affect some of the options in the symbol
creation process.
2 Type of Object - This drop down list is

available only for the Fixture and
Furniture categories. Select a Type of Object

to determine where the symbol appears in
Material Lists.
Some object types for Fixtures may also
affect how the symbol can be placed. The
following table lists these effects. See
Symbol Options on page 935.
Item Type
Placement Affect
Appliances
(built-in base cabs)
Appliances
(under wall cabs)
Cooktops
Placement in base cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Front option is

selected.
Placement under wall cabinet is allowed if Fits under Wall Cabinet option is
selected.
Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected.
928
Loading the 3D File

Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Front option is
selected.
Symbol
Wizard
Ovens (built-in)
Refrigerators
(built-in)
Sinks (bathroom)
Sinks (kitchen)
Sinks (laundry)
Loading the 3D File

The options in the 3D window determine
how the symbol appears in 3D.
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
1 Enter the name and directory of the file
you want to import, or click Browse to

locate a file on your computer.
If a file with faces containing more than

four vertices is imported, the faces are
truncated, resulting in an object that appears
to have holes. The best remedy is to reexport the model from the original application
using only triangular or quadrilateral faces.
929
2 This informational line indicates the
number of faces in the model. Although

there is no limit to the number of faces, large
numbers can increase render time.
3 Check Double Sided to make all

symbol faces double sided.
While making faces double sided increases

the amount of information calculated for
render views, it also simplifies the symbol
building process by ensuring that all surfaces
are visible from any perspective. To
understand this option, it is helpful to be
familiar with the concept of surface normals.
See Surface Normals on page 926.
Chief Architect assumes that faces in the
imported model are counterclockwise and
automatically reverses them to clockwise on
import. If the model is already clockwise,
click Reversed to keep that orientation.
4 Automatic Edge Lines: Check this box
if you want Chief Architect to

automatically determine which lines display
in 3D views.
When displaying a model in 3D, edge lines

emphasize the edges and corners of the
model. Each face has up to 4 edge lines.
Some edge lines are helpful in third-party
programs but are not needed in Chief
Architect. If your modeling program has the
capability to turn edges off, that may be the
ideal place to do so.
Instead of manually turning edges on and off,
Chief Architect offers another alternative
with Automatic Edge Lines. This interprets
which lines are needed in Chief Architect
and turns the others off.
The center edge lines on this object do not display

when Automatic Edge Lines is checked
Surface Smoothing Angle - This

value is used to determine whether two
adjacent surfaces are shown with a smooth or
sharp angle between them in render view. If
the angle between any two surface normals is
less than this angle, then normal averaging is
used in the render view to give the effect of a
curved surface. This angle also effects the
generation of automatic edge lines.
A good example is a hexagonal cylinder. The

angle between adjacent surfaces is 360/8, or
45 degrees. If you want it to look cylindrical,
then the Surface Smoothing Angle should
be set to something greater than 45 degrees.
If you want to make the cylinder look
hexagonal, set it to less than 45 degrees. The
default is 35 degrees.
6 Units - Enter the units that were used
when the symbol was created.

Specifying any units other than inches or mm
causes the program to convert the data into
units appropriate for Chief Architect.
Origin Locations
7 Specify Origin - The origin of an
object determines where that object is
930
Loading the 3D File
For example, the top surface of a smoke

detector typically rests against the ceiling
bottom surface, while an armchairs bottom
surface typically rests on the top surface of
the floor. For an object to be placed correctly,
the origin must be at the right location.
The origin of an object is defined when it is
created in a third party modeling program.
Chief Architect also has default origins for
most object types. The following table lists
these default origins by symbol type.
Symbol Type
Origin location
Furniture
Fixture
Electrical Floor
Items
Electrical
Wall
Items
Electrical Ceiling
Bottom, Back, Middle

Center, Bottom (against
floor)
Center, Back (against
wall)
Center Top (against
ceiling)
Bottom, Outside, Middle
(of sill)
Bottom, Outside, Middle
Windows
Cabinet Door
Doors
Doorways
Check this box and enter new values to

manually adjust the origin. The values in
the X, Y, and Z fields represent the offset
of the origin point from the default Chief
Architect origin.
Origin 0,0,0
located middle,
bottom, back of
object
This portion of the dialog allows three

options:
Leave this box unchecked to accept Chief

Architects default origins for the symbol. Checking this box and entering 0 in
the X, Y, and Z fields produces the same
results.
Check this box if you want to use the origin point from the original .dxf/.dwg/
.obj/.3ds file. The values in the X, Y, and
Window origin located bottom, outside, middle.
8 Select an axis and click Rotate 90 to
roatate the object 90 degrees around

that axis when creating the symbol.
9 A preview of how the object looks in
3D views displays here. The preview is
931
Symbol
Wizard
Z fields represent the difference between

the default Chief Architect origin for that
type of symbol and the origin from the
original .dxf/.dwg/.obj/3ds file.
placed in Chief Architect. It is the point

where the X, Y, and Z axes intersect (0,0,0).
updated in this dialog when the symbol is

rotated and when a 3D data file is selected.
10 Enter a Symbol Name up to 63
characters. Symbol names are case

sensitive. Symbol names appear in the
Materials List, the Symbol Specification
dialog, and any specification dialogs that
apply to this particular symbol.
11 Display Size - This allows you to
append the name of the symbol with

size information that is relevant to the current
plan. Select the format from the drop-down
list and the symbol name is automatically
appended with the selected sizing
information. Choosing None does not
append anything to the name.
2D Block
Most 3D objects require 2D representation in
floor plan view. 2D CAD blocks are not
required for Windows, Doors, Cabinet
Doors, and Doorways.
The 2D Block window of the Create

Symbol Wizard allows you to choose 2D
CAD blocks from a variety of sources.
1
5
2
1 Select Blocks From - Checking these
boxes populates the list with available

2D CAD blocks.
932
Plan - Check this box if you want every

CAD block that is currently in your plan to
appear in the list. See CAD Blocks on page
870.
Generated - Check this box to automatically

generate a CAD block based on an overhead
projection of the object.
2 Available Blocks - The available 2D

blocks display here.
3 Plan Fill Color - Select a color for the

background of the 2D symbol.
4 No Fill (transparent) - Select the

check box to have the 2D background
transparent.
Use Plan Colors - Select the check box to
make the background white.
5 The selected CAD Block displays here.

6 Enter an angle if you want to rotate the
2D CAD block from its original angle.

The orientation of the 2D CAD block in floor
plan view is independent of the symbol
orientation in 3D view.
Create your own CAD blocks to represent

symbols in floor plan view. The only
requirement is that the correct X and Y
dimensions are defined. An incorrect CAD
block size causes inconsistent placement of
your symbol.
It is usually best to build your CAD block
with solid filled properties. This keeps
background patterns and other objects from
showing through.
For more information on creating CAD
blocks, see CAD Blocks on page 870.
Once the CAD object has been blocked it
must be named. Select the item and click the
Open Object
CAD Block Specification dialog. See
CAD Block Specification Dialog on page

872.
Blocks can also be imported with the
Import Drawing Wizard, but nested
blocks cannot be used in the symbol development process. See Importing and Exporting
on page 907.
Creating Your Own

CAD Block

Video: Cabinets - Updatable Hybrid
Cabinet Symbols
933
Symbol
Wizard
File - Check this box to include any CAD

blocks contained in the 3D .dxf/.dwg/.obj/
.3ds file.
If you selected Cabinet as the symbol

category, the Cabinet Front Symbols window
1 Layer/Component Assignment -
Specify the type of component for each

layer associated with the cabinet symbol.
Click a layer in the list, then select the type
of cabinet component type from the Select
Component drop-down list.
934
displays, where you can specify the function

of both the cabinet and its individual parts.
2 Cabinet Type - Specify whether the
cabinet symbol is a Base Cabinet, Wall

Cabinet or Full Height Cabinet.
Cabinet symbols should not include
hardware. Handles and hinges are
assigned according to cabinet defaults when
the cabinet is created. See Hardware Tab
on page 573.
Symbol Options
Symbol Options
Symbol
Wizard
2
3
The options that display in this window vary,

depending on the type of symbol being
created.
1 Options - How each of these options
affects a symbol is detailed in the

following table.
2 Height Off Floor - Enter a value if you
want the symbol to rest a certain height

above the floor.
when the Light option is checked. Enter a

distance to offset the light source from the
symbols origin.
Available Options
The following table lists each of the options
that are available and how this option affects
the behavior of the symbol:
3 Material Components - Click this
button to open the Components

dialog. See Components Dialog on page
1014.
Default Light Offset - This field is available
only for electrical symbols and is enabled
935
Option
110 / 220 Volts
3-Way
Categories
Electrical
Electrical
4-Way
Appears
in
appliance
schedule
Appears
in
HVAC schedule
Appears
in
plumbing
schedule
Breaker Panel
Can sit on base
cabinet or table
Fixture
Fixture
Electrical
Fixtures,
Furniture,
Electrical
Ceiling
Mounted
Doorbell
Fan
Electrical
Fits under wall

cabinet
Fixtures
Floor Mounted
Electrical
GFCI
Electrical
Hangs on wall
936
Fixture
Electrical
Electrical
Fixtures and
Furniture
Effect on Symbol
If a 110V or 220V item is on a wall and you select Build>
Electrical> Auto Place Outlets
, an outlet is not
placed in that area.
Check this box to make an electrical symbol a 3-way
switch.
Check this box to make an electrical symbol a 4-way
switch.
Check this box to make this fixture appear in the Appliance Schedule.
Check this box to make this fixture appear in the HVAC
Schedule.
Check this box to make this fixture appear in the Plumbing Schedule.
No effect
Allows fixture to be placed on top of a cabinet. Symbols
remain selectable and independent of cabinet after placement. Can also be placed independently, 0" from floor to
bottom.
Electrical item is attached to ceiling at origin.
Uses switch default height.
Recognized by Plan Check as needing to be connected
to a switch.
Attaches fixture top to bottom of selected wall cabinet
and fixture back to adjacent wall. Fixture can be placed
independently on plan, and locates itself 54" from floor to
bottom.
Electrical item is attached to floor at origin. Use Height
Off Floor to specify distance from floor.
If an electrical symbol is given the GFCI attribute and is
placed behind a cabinet in a bathroom, Build> Electrical> Auto Place Outlets
recognizes it and does not
insert a GFCI outlet behind the cabinet.
Fixture attaches to wall at 54" from floor if placed within
8" of the nearest wall. Can be placed independently of
wall if placed more than 8" away and inserts at 54" from
floor to bottom.
Symbol Options
Categories
Inserts into
cabinet front
Fixtures
Inserts into
countertop
Fixtures
Light
Electrical
Move casing
out 1/2 inch, 1
inch at sill
Doorways
and Windows
No default door
in this doorway
Outdoor
Doorways
and Windows
Electrical
Outlet
Electrical
Phone
Electrical
Requires high/
standard voltage
Requires natural gas
Requires water
drain
Sits on floor
Fixtures
Smoke Detector
Switch
Effect on Symbol
Fixture attaches itself centrally to the front of a full height
cabinet. The fixture becomes merged with the cabinet,
and is selectable and resizable only from the Cabinet
Specification dialog. Cannot be placed independently.
When this is the single option selected, fixture can be
placed in a full height cabinet only.
*Note: CAD must also be the same size as the 3D's or
width/depth modification is required. For modification,
depth must equal distance from back of block to point
wanted to attach to cabinet, in order for 2D CAD to show
properly.
Fixture rests on top of base cabinet, merging itself to it.
Cannot be placed independently. Fixture is not selectable.
Creates light source with available properties to individual symbols. Recognized by Plan Check as needing to
be connected to a switch.
This option only applies when a sill is present. Check this
box to have the casing moved out from the window or
doorway. The option System Supplies Rectangular Casing must also be checked.
Check this option to exclude a door from the doorway.
Fixtures
Plan Check warns that this is not a waterproof switch/outlet.

Can be placed automatically using the Place Outlets
option. Electrical Defaults determines placement above
floor.
Presence is recognized by Plan Check. Uses outlet
default height.
If against a wall, Place Outlets places an outlet of the
appropriate type behind the fixture. Also makes fixture
appear in Appliance Schedule.
Appears in Appliance Schedule.
Fixtures
Appears in Plumbing Schedule.
Fixtures and
Furniture
Electrical
Default option for Fixtures. Places fixture on floor.
Electrical
Recognized by Plan Check as a requirement for certain

rooms.
Recognized by Plan Check for connection to a switched
item. Electrical Defaults determines height above floor.
937
Symbol
Wizard
Option
Option
Categories
Switched
Electrical
System supplies rectangular casing

Thermostat
TV
Doorways
and Windows
Wall Mounted
Electrical
Electrical
Electrical
Effect on Symbol
Recognized by Plan Check as needing to be connected
to a switch.
Chief Architect automatically supplies rectangular casing
if your model does not already have a casing.
No affect. Uses switch default height.
Presence is recognized by Plan Check. Uses outlet
default height.
Electrical item is attached to wall at origin.
Sizing
The Sizing window allows you to control the
size of a symbol and how it behaves when
resized. The objects Width (X), Depth (Y),
and Height (Z) are referenced to the nearest
1/16". The default size information for the
symbol appears, representing the actual
boundaries of the 3D object.
1
2
938
In most situations, the default values for

Width (X), Depth (Y), and Height (Z) should
be left unchanged.
Saving a symbol to the library that has
been resized in both the Fixture
Specification dialog and the Symbol
Specification dialog may result in inconsistent symbol properties. Symbols should be
resized in one or the other, not both.
Sizing
1 Size -The size values do not need to be
For example, to make an object such as a

fireplace or air conditioner protrude through
other 3D items, smaller size values must be
used. Size values larger than the 3D objects
can be used if a symbol needs to be spaced
away from other 3D items (e.g. toilets and
sinks that need minimum clearance).
2 Stretch Planes: Stretch Planes allow
you to define where the symbol

stretches when resized. If no stretch planes
are added, the symbol resizes uniformly.
Stretch plane coordinates are relative to the
symbols origin point. For more about the
origin point, see Loading the 3D File on
page 929.
Symbol
Wizard
modified unless the boundary box (the

selectable area) of a symbol is not the same
size as the 3D symbol.
It resizes like this:

(Y axis into paper)
Below one Stretch Plane is specified 6" from

the symbols origin.
Before
One Stretch Plane

One stretch plane means that the symbol
stretches only at the location of that plane. In
the following illustration, a stretch plane was
placed at x=0 and the symbol stretched along
the x-axis.
939
Stretch Zones
3 Stretch Zone - A Stretch Zone defines
an area between two planes that

stretches uniformly, leaving the area outside
unaffected.
Two Stretch Planes

If you want to stretch the symbol without
disrupting the outer arches, two stretch
planes need to be specified.
In this example two YZ stretch planes are
specified on the X axis, the first at -6", the
second at 6". Stretch planes to the left of the
origin must be expressed as a negative
number, while stretch planes to the right are
positive.
In the following example we want to

designate a Stretch Zone for an archtop. To
stretch only the middle when the archtop is
stretched vertically, select Height 1-2.
Height means that we are making the
object taller, and 1-2 directs Chief
Architect to the two planes that define the
area.
In the following example the area to be
stretched is between 18" - 24" from the
bottom. Only this area becomes taller.

940
Symbol
Wizard
Materials
Materials
Materials window for an imported .obj file
The Materials window of the Create

Symbol Wizard is like the Materials tab on
many other specification dialogs. See

941
DXF/DWG Files
All the layers, layer names, solids and
instances of blocked solids from the original
.dxf/.dwg file display on the left.
Double click a name to rename it.
Select a material component, click the

Library Material button to open the
Select Library Object dialog, and
assign a material to the selected material
component.
If the .dxf/.dwg file for a symbol has

changed, all material information is lost.
OBJ Files
One of the most useful features of the .obj
file format is its ability to record material
data that can be transferred from one
application to another.
Any material names associated with a face in
the .obj file are listed on the left.
OBJ Files and Materials

Material definitions for most .obj files are
located in a separate file that is given the .mtl
extension. If such a file exists, the material
definitions associated with the .obj file
display on the left.
If Chief Architect does not receive material
definition information in an accompanying
942
materials file, default material properties are

assigned. Materials from the library can be
assigned by selecting a component of the
object and clicking the Select Materials
button.
The material definitions associated with an
imported .obj symbol are not available for
use by other objects until that symbol has
been placed into a plan.
OBJ and #DS Files and

Textures
Material definitions for .obj files can include
texture information. As with material
definitions, any image files used to define the
texture (.jpg, .png, etc.) are typically
included and referenced. If a textured object
is created in another application and exported
as an .obj file, Chief Architect needs the .obj
file, the .mtl file, and any referenced texture
files in order to properly import the object. If
a texture file is not available, the material is
created without a texture.
Once an .obj file is imported and turned into
a symbol, the .obj file and the .mtl file can
be deleted. The associated texture file is
copied to the My Textures library of the
Library Browser. If a texture of the same
name exists already, the following dialog
displays. Choose one of the three alternatives
and click OK.
Symbol
Wizard
Openings
Openings
The Opening window of the Create
Symbol Wizard displays only for
Windows and Doorways.
When creating a doorway or window
symbol, Chief Architect needs information
about the space that contains it. The Opening
window defines the specifications of the hole
to be cut. The required hole is the same as the
rough opening that would be created in
actual construction.
Edit the size of the opening by clicking the
appropriate side and entering the dimension.
If a window or doorway requires an arch top
opening or triangle, you must select more
than one opening section from the drop down
list to correctly show the opening in Chief
Architect.
You can approximate the opening for arch or
other odd shaped windows or doors by
specifying up to three sections.
943
Floor Plan View

The Plan View window displays only for
Windows and Doorways. The preview shows
how the symbol displays in floor plan view.
By default the program brings up a door
symbol for a doorway. To change from a
door swing to a window, click the image
itself in the dialog. Click again to toggle
back.
To edit a dimension, click it and type the
desired size.
Mulled Units
To represent a .dxf/.dwg that is a mulled
window or doorway, you may need several
windows and possibly a door in floor plan
view.
Click the drop down list and select the
number of units. You can have up to five
windows or four windows and a doorway.
This is independent of the opening.
Closing the Create Symbol Wizard

This window displays when you have
completed the Create Symbol Wizard.
Select the Back button at any time during the
process to make changes.
Click Finish to close the window and place
the new symbol in your plan with the next
click.
Check the Add to Library box to close the

window and proceed to the Add to Library
dialog with your new symbol. See Adding
If you created a symbol that must be
contained by another object, click Finish to
close this window, place the object, then
select Tools> Symbol> Get Last Symbol...
to retrieve the last symbol created.
944
The Symbol Specification dialog

provides a convenient method for editing
existing symbols.
Changes made using this method are

permanent. Use the Edit> Open
Symbol command only if you want to overwrite the original library symbol. Instead, copy
a symbol and then add it to the library. See
The Symbol Specification dialog can be

accessed in two ways. The method used
determines whether the original symbol in
the library or a single copy of the symbol
placed in your plan is edited.
Open Symbol
The Open Symbol edit button displays
when a symbol based object is selected
in floor plan view or 3D view. Click it to
open the Symbol Specification dialog
and edit the selected symbol.
Edit> Open Symbol

Any symbol from an
Unlocked library
can be opened for specification and edited
from the Library Browser menu. Highlight a
symbol in the tree view of the Library
Browser and select Edit> Open Symbol
The tabs on the Symbol Specification

dialog correspond to the windows in the
Create Symbol Wizard.
Type Tab
This tab is present when the Symbol
Specification dialog is opened for a
selected Fixture or Furniture object.
Click the drop down list if you want to

change the Item Type. See Selecting the
Symbol Category on page 927.
3D Tab
Editing a symbol using Edit> Open Symbol

opens the Symbol Specification dialog
and allows you to make changes to the
original symbol and all future instances of it.
The options in this dialog are the same as the

3D window in the Create Symbol
Wizard. See Loading the 3D File on page
929.
945
Symbol
Wizard
If you load a new .dxf/.dwg/.obj/.3ds to an

existing symbol, all material information are
lost. See Materials on page 941.
2D Block Tab
This dialog is similar to the 2D Block
window in the Create Symbol Wizard. It
allows you to select from the 2D blocks in
the list or generate a new one. See 2D
Block on page 932.
Options Tab
Options window in the Create Symbol
Wizard. See Symbol Options on page
935.
Opening Tab
The Opening Tab is present when the
Symbol Specification dialog is opened
for a selected Window or Doorway symbol.
See Openings on page 943.
Floor Plan View Tab

The floor plan view Tab is present when the
Symbol Specification dialog is opened
for a selected Window or Doorway symbol.
See Floor Plan View on page 944.
Sizing Tab
The Sizing Tab is the same as the Sizing
Window of the Create Symbol Wizard.
See Sizing on page 938.
Default Light Offset is not present in the
Symbol Specification dialog. If you
want to change the Light Offset for an

existing symbol, select the symbol and click
the Open Object
edit button. See
Render Data Tab on page 780.
Materials Tab
Materials window in the Create Symbol
Wizard. See Materials on page 941.
946

If you open a plant symbol, this tab is
available. The options are the same as the
Plant Information tab of the Plant Symbol
Sepecification dialog. See Plant
Information Tab on page 608.

If you open a plant symbol, this tab is
available. The options are the same as the
Plant Descrption tab of the Plant Symbol
Sepecification dialog. See Plant
Description Tab on page 609.
Chapter 37:
Printing
Printing & Plotting
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect offers a wide variety of
printing options. The simplest and quickest
method may be to print directly from any
view using either the Print dialog or the
Print Image dialog.
To create complete working drawings, you
can use the programs layout facility. In a
layout file, you can customize a border and
title block that appears on each page.
Different views can be set at different scales,
and each can be controlled individually.
Once sent to layout, views and details can be
resized, replaced, updated, rotated, relocated,
and otherwise edited to your liking. For more
information about layout, see Layout on
page 969.
Chief Architect also allows you to save your
drawings in an electronic file format that can
then be sent to a printing service.
Chapter Contents
Introduction to Printing
Printers and Plotters
The Printing Tools
Display Options and Printing
Printing Directly from a View
Printing from Layout
Printing to Scale
Printing Across Multiple Pages
Printing to a PDF File
Line Weights
Printing Text and Dimensions
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes
Print Model
Troubleshooting Printing Problems
Page Setup Dialog
Print Dialog
Print Image Dialog
Screen captures are provided for

illustrative purposes only and are not an
endorsement of any products.
947
Introduction to Printing
Always familiarize yourself with your
printer or plotter before a deadline. It
takes a little time to configure the machine
properly when you first start.
Chief Architect offers printing options for a

variety of needs. You will benefit from
understanding the output options clearly and
choosing the one that makes the most sense
for the project at hand.
Output Options
Printing From Layout - For professional
quality drawings and details in full size
format, printing from layout provides the
most control and the best results. For more
information, see Layout on page 969.
Printing Directly From a View - For
individual drawings or details, you may
prefer to print directly from a view. The
process is quick and allows control over
scaling, positioning, and line weights,
depending on the view type. See Printing
Directly from a View on page 952.
Paper Size - The dimensions of the paper to

be printed on. Specifying a paper size that is
smaller than the sheet size allows large
drawings to be printed across multiple pages.
The preview diagram in the Page Setup
dialog illustrates the difference between page
size and drawing sheet size. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 963.
When a paper
size of 8 x 11 is
selected, 15
pages are
required to fill an
Architectural D
drawing sheet
size (24" x 36").
Printing to a Remote Plotter/Printer Plans can be saved as a .pdf file and printed
remotely. See Printing to a PDF File on
page 953.
Check Plot - A test printing, typically at a

smaller scale, made before final output to
large paper format. For more information,
see Check Plots on page 953.
Print Model - If your final printed output

will be used to create a 3D model of your
design, the Print Model feature works best.
See Print Model on page 959.
Line Weight - The thickness of a line. A

thicker lineweight is easier to see, but may
not show as much detail. See Line Weights
on page 954.
Terminology
There are a few terms that you should
familiarize yourself with.
948
Sheet Size - The dimensions of the final

printed output. This may or may not be the
same as the paper size. If the sheet size and
paper size are the same, only one page is
required per sheet. See Page Setup Dialog
on page 963.
Printing Scale - Drawings are often printed

to scale for accuracy. " = 1' and 1 m = 50 m
are examples of common scales. When
accuracy is not important, drawings can also
be sized to fill a particular area. See Printing

to Scale on page 952.
Plotters are typically used to output larger

sheets of paper such as 17 x 22" (ANSI C),
22 x 34" (ANSI D) or 34 x 44" (ANSI E).
Print Drivers
Print driver programs are interpreters
between software programs and the printer.
The drivers are usually created by the
manufacturer of the printer and are typically
updated regularly. Different drivers are used
for different versions of Windows. It is
useful to keep track of the drivers for each
printer or plotter and update them whenever
the Windows operating system is changed.
Note: You should only update your printer
driver if you are having problems printing.
To find the version of your printer driver,

select Start> Control Panel> Printers and
Faxes to view the Printers information for
Windows. Select the printer in question, then
choose File> Properties.
In the Printer Properties dialog should be
a button called About. Click this button to
find the version and creation date of the
driver currently in use. If you experience
printing problems and yours is not the latest
driver, consider replacing it with an updated
driver. Visit your printer manufacturers Web
site for more information.
Windows provides information about
installing print drivers. To access Windows
help, select Start> Help. If you have
problems installing a print driver, refer to
your printer documentation for technical
support.
Options available with one driver may
not be available with another. Printers
and plotters supported in one version of
Windows may not be supported by the
manufacturer in another.
The Printing Tools

Select File> Print to view the Print
Tools submenu.
Page Setup - Opens the Page Setup
dialog, where printing options are set.
Scale to Fit - Automatically selects a

scale that fits your plan to the drawing
sheet. See Printing to Scale on page 952.
Center Sheet - Automatically centers
your drawing on the sheet. See Center
Sheet on page 951.
949
Printing
There are many different types of printers

and plotters. In general, a printer is smaller,
normally outputting 8 x 11" (Letter or
ANSI A size), 8 x 14" (Legal Size) or
sometimes as large as 11 x 17" (Tabloid or
ANSI B size).
Print Preview - Shows how your view

appears when printed. See Print
Preview on page 951.
Print - Prints the current view or
layout sheet. See Print Dialog on
page 965.
Print Image - Prints a screen view
including images, textures and
backdrops. See Print Image Dialog on
page 967.
Print Model - Opens the Print
Model dialog print plan templates for
making a physical model of your plan. See
Print Model on page 959.
File>Print>Customize Sheet Sizes - Allows
you to create custom sheet sizes. See
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes on page 958.
Clear Printer Info - Clears the printer
information associated with the current page
setup. See Clearing Printer Information on

page 965.
Toggle Buttons
Toggle buttons are either on or off. When on,
they appear depressed and remain depressed
until clicked again. See Toggle Buttons on
page 70.
Show Line Weights - When this is on,
line weights appear on screen as they
will print. See Show Line Weights on page
951.
Show Sheet - Turn this toggle on for a
preview of your plan relative to the
current sheet size. See Show Sheet on page
951.
Print Preview - Turn this toggle on for
a preview of how your plan will appear
when printed. See Print Preview on page
951.

The display of objects in views may be used
to affect the printed output. Some display
options allow you to preview the printed
output on screen before any paper is used.
Objects must be visible for them to print, but
not all items that are visible print. Camera
symbols in floor plan view, CAD points, and
the snap and reference grids, for example, do
not print. The Reference Display prints if it is
visible. See Reference Floor on page 368.
To see how your printed output will
appear on paper, select File> Print>
Print Preview or click the Print Preview toggle button.
950
Displaying Objects
You can control the display of objects
when printing directly from a view in
218.
To control the display of objects in an
orthogonal view sent to layout, select the
view, click the Layout Box Layers
edit
button, and make any needed changes in the
To control the display of objects in a camera
view sent to layout, turn layers on/off in the
view before it is sent to layout.
Show Line Weights

Select File> Print> Show Line
Weights for an on-screen
representation of line weights and line styles.
Turning Show Line Weights on or off does
not affect the final printed output.
When Show Line Weights is turned on, you
can Zoom In
to see the location of lines
and dashed lines as they will appear on the
printed page.
When Show Line Weights
is off, dashed
lines look the same, regardless of the zoom
factor.
Show Line Weights
can also be turned
on or off in the Preferences dialog. See
Show Sheet
Select File> Print> Show Sheet to
show the drawing sheet on screen. The
drawing sheet size is specified in the Page
Setup dialog. See Page Setup Dialog on
page 963.
Any portion of your plan that cannot fit on
the drawing sheet at the current scale
displays outside the sheet.
A blue border represents the printable area,
which varies depending on which printer is
currently selected. This border may not
display on all edges of the drawing sheet. See
Print Drivers on page 949.
When Show Sheet
is on, the drawing
sheet behaves as an object.
When selected at its border the sheet has

edit handles, allowing it to be resized,
relocated, and rotated. See Editing
Objects on page 79.
If the sheet size is changed, the drawing

sheet dimensions update in the Page
Setup dialog. See Page Setup Dialog
on page 963.
Dimension lines locate the borders of the

sheet. These dimensions can be used to
relocate other objects in relation to the
sheet. See Moving Objects Using
Print Preview
Select File> Print> Print Preview for
an on-screen representation of how the
current view will appear when printed.
Objects such as camera symbols that do not
print do not display in Print Preview. Text
and dimension objects appear on-screen as
they will on the printed page.
When Print Preview
buttons Show Sheet
Weights
is on, the toggle

and Show Line
are overridden.
Note: Specifying a standard sheet size

in the Page Setup dialog is preferable to
editing the sheet size on-screen.
Center Sheet
Select File> Print> Center Sheet to
center the drawing sheet on the
drawing. This moves the sheet relative to the
951
Printing
Creating a special layer set for printing may

be useful if you are not printing from layout.
See Layer Sets on page 216.
drawing but does not affect the coordinates

of objects in the drawing. The location of the
drawing sheet is independent for each floor

of the model.
Printing Directly from a View

To print directly from any floor plan
view or cross section/elevation view,
choose File> Print> Print. For more
information, see Print Dialog on page 965.
To set up print formatting before printing,

select File> Print> Page Setup
. See
Render views can be printed using the File>
Print Image
option. See Print Image
Dialog on page 967.
Printing from Layout

Chief Architect layout files can be used to
print professional working drawings.
Multiple views at different scales can be sent
to each page and organized as desired.
Layout sheets can accomodate a border and
title block that display on all sheets and can

be printed at full size or printed at a smaller
scale for check plots. See Layout on page
969.
Printing to Scale
Several different print scaling options are
available. The type of view that you are
printing determines which options you may
choose from.
Orthogonal Views
Floor plan views, cross section/elevation
views, CAD details and layout pages are
orthogonal views, which means:
952
Your line of sight is at a right angle to all

objects in the view.
Objects do not appear to decrease in size

as their distances from the viewer
increase.
Orthogonal views can be printed to scale.

The scale set in the Page Setup dialog is
inherited by the Print and Send to Layout
dialogs. This scale can be overridden on an
individual basis in either of these dialogs.
See Print Dialog on page 965 and
Select File> Print> Scale to Fit in an
orthogonal view to select a suitable
scale and recenter the drawing sheet so that
everything fits on the sheet.
Imperial drawing scales are typically noted
in inches per foot. Larger scales, such as 1
Once a view has been sent to layout, there

are a variety of additional scaling options.
See Rescaling Views on page 980.
Perspective Views
Vector and render camera views and render
overviews are referred to as perspective
views, which means:
Your line of sight can be at any angle to

the objects in the view.
Objects seem to decrease in size as their

distances from the viewer increase.
Perspective views cannot be scaled.

Perspective views cannot be printed to scale.
If Fit to Paper is selected in the Print
dialog, a percent value can be set that defines
how much of the printed page to fill. 50%

causes the print to be 50% of both the height
and width of the paper, not including the
non-printable border. If printing to an 8 x
11 page with a 1" non-printable border in
each direction, 100% would print 7 x 10,
and Full Page 50% would print 3 x 5. Each
printer may vary slightly.
Check Plots
A check plot is a test print that allows you to
print at a reduced scale on smaller, less
expensive paper so you can check that the
drawing will print as expected.
In a check plot, the drawing scale is
temporarily adjusted to a specified fraction
of its true value. Both drawing scale and line
weights are subject to this scale adjustment.

When printing directly from a floor plan
view, cross section/elevation view, or layout
it is possible to print at a scale that does not
fit the image on one page. To do this, specify
a larger drawing sheet and print across
multiple pages.
When printing to a paper size that is smaller
than the sheet size, a 2% overlap is used.
Crop marks print where the paper needs to be
cut between pages. A solid line is drawn at
the drawing sheet boundary on the sides that

need to be cut.
To see on-screen what this will look like
when printed, select File> Print> Show
Sheet
and then Window> Fill Window
. Grey lines across the drawing sheet

indicate where the page breaks will occur.
See Show Sheet on page 951.
Printing to a PDF File

The .pdf, or Portable Document Format,
creates viewable and printable documents
and is one of the most universally compatible

and efficient of file formats.
953
Printing
inch = 50 feet or 1:200m, are often used for

property layouts.
Page Setup dialog. See Page Setup

Dialog on page 963.
Creating a .pdf document requires that a .pdf

printer driver be installed on your computer.
This is not a physical print device, but a
software program that is recognized as a
printer by all other programs and creates a
.pdf file that can be read and printed using
Adobe Reader.
2.
Select File> Print> Print

to open
the Print dialog. Your .pdf printer driver
is listed as the selected printer.
3.
When you print to a .pdf print driver, you

will be asked for a file name and destination
automatically.
Select the needed options in the Print

dialog, then click OK.
4.
In the Save As dialog, select a File

name and Save in location for your .pdf
file. For more about the Save As dialog, see Saving a Plan or Layout File
on page 160.
To print to .pdf
1.
Select your .pdf printer driver as you

would select any other printer in the
The PDF995 .pdf driver is available on

the Chief Architect installation disks.
Line Weights
The weight of a line refers to its thickness on
the printed page and is described in absolute
terms as a fraction of a unit, often 1/100th of
a millimeter or 1/1000 of an inch.
You can specify the Line Weight Scale by
defining the denominator and the unit used in
this fraction in the Page Setup dialog. See
In Chief Architect, line weights are assigned
to objects, patterns or layers using whole
numbers that correspond to the numerator of
this fraction.
Your preferred line weights and line weight
scale can be saved in your template plan and
layout files. See Template Files on page
167.
The method for changing the line weight for
a particular object depends on the object and
the type of view.
954
Most objects line weights can be set in

their specification dialogs. See Line
The line weight for a group of objects can

be set by layer. See Layer Display
The line weights for walls in floor plan

view are defined by wall type in the Wall
Type Definitions dialog. See Wall
The line weights of material pattern lines,

which are visible in Vector Views, can be
set in the Define Material dialog. See
The line weight for fill patterns is set for

individual objects on the Fill Style tab of
their specification dialogs. See Fill Style
Tab on page 864.
Line Weights
The line weight applied to surface edges

in Vector Views can be set in the Print
dialog. See Print Dialog on page 965.
The end cap length of dashed lines in

floor plan view is controlled in the
Preferences dialog. See Line
An assigned line weight of 0 draws a line

weight of 1 pixel, the thinnest line weight
a printer allows. How thick this is varies
from printer to printer. See Printers and
Plotters on page 949.
Line Weights and Scaling

When a view is sent to layout, line weights
may be affected by the drawing scale
selected for the view. This occurs when the
layout views scale is different from the
drawing scale of the original view.
Dialog on page 976 and Rescaling Views

on page 980.
Note: Under most circumstances, you should
select Use Layout Line Scaling when sending
views to layout.
Line weight scaling affects both line weights

and line styles and can be particularly
noticable with dashed line styles.
In the following image, the same floor plan
view has been sent to layout twice, at two
different scales. The view on the left was sent
at the same scale as the original view,
1/8 = 1. The view on the right was sent at
1 = 1, or magnified eight times, to show an
area of the plan in greater detail.
For example, assume that you have an object

in a view with a line weight of 20, and that
the views drawing scale is 1 mm = 50 mm.
If you send the view to layout at 1 mm =

25 mm scale, twice the original scale, the
resulting printed line weight for this
object will increase to 40 instead of 20.
If you send the view to layout at 1 mm =

100 mm scale, half the original scale, the
resulting printed line weight for this
object will decrease to 10 instead of 20.
You can specify the drawing scale for any

orthogonal view by opening the Page
Setup dialog while in that view. See Page
Setup Dialog on page 963.
For any layout view, you can specify whether
the original line weight is maintained or not
in the Send to Layout and Change
Scale dialogs. See Send To Layout
Because the view on the right was sent to

layout at a scale other than that of the
original, it is subject to layout line scaling.
The solid lines representing walls, cabinets
and doors are rescaled to be eight times
thicker than in the original view.
Similarly, the dashed lines representing the
door jambs are rescaled so that the dashes
and the spaces between them are eight times
larger than in the original view.
955
Printing
when Use Layout Line Scaling is enabled.

Were the view rescaled to be smaller instead,
the line weights would look relatively large
and thick.
Printers and Line Weight

Line weight and print scaling are subject to
the limitations of the printer being used. For
example, you will not be able to see the
difference between a line that is 1/150th of
an inch wide and one that is 1/300th of an
inch wide when they are printed using a
printer that prints 150 dots per inch (DPI).
with Use Layout Line Scaling disabled
If Use Layout Line Scaling is enabled, line

weights are no longer scaled and the dashed
lines display at the same size as in the
original view.
That is, a CAD line with a line weight of 1

will look the same as a CAD line with a line
weight of 4 when the Line Weight Scale is
set at 1 = 1/600th of an inch and you print to
a printer capable of 150 DPI.
The default Line Weight Scale of
1 = 1/100 mm makes it easy to meet
many professional drawing standards. In
most cases, this scale will produce positive
results using any printer or plotter and should
not be changed.
Legacy Plans
When plans and layouts created in prior
versions of Chief Architect are opened in
Version X1, they assume the Page Setup
settings, including the Line Weight Scale,
specified in the Preferences dialog. See
Text & Page Setup Panel on page 189.
with Use Layout Line Scaling enabled
Because the view in this example is scaled

eight times larger in this case, the dashes and
line weights look relatively small and fine
956
When working with legacy files, using a

Line Weight Scale of 1 = 1/X, where X is the
DPI of your printer, will produce the most
faithful translation from the previous
version.
print, Zoom In
" = 1'
3/8" = 1'
" = 1'
" = 1'
on them.
Text may not appear accurately on

screen when the font used by the
printer is different than the font used on
screen. Consult your printer documentation
for more information on font substitution.
Default text character height is set in the

Text Defaults dialog. See Text Defaults
on page 838.
Dimension number height is affected by
scaling the same way text is and is set in the
Dimension Defaults dialog. See
Dimension Defaults on page 176.
The following tables detail the resulting print
height when character height is assigned at a
given scale. These tables can be used to
determine the necessary character height for
printed output of a certain size.
The relationship between character height
and printed scale is also addressed in the
Text Specification dialog. See Sizing
Text on page 824.
Imperial Plans
Plan Scale
in Layout
1/8" = 1
48
24
18
12
6
36
18
12
8
4:
24
12
9
6
3
16
8
6
4
2
If, for example, you print or send a view to

layout at 1/8"=1' scale, refer to Section A.
In Section A, find your Desired Print Height,
then note the Necessary Character Height
that you need to use.
For text in layout views to be 1/8" high, for
example, the character height in the drawing
needs to be set at 12.
Metric Plans
Necessary
Desired
Character
Print Height
Height
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
Printing
Text may not print exactly as it appears onscreen. To get a better idea of how letters,
numbers, and other characters in text will
The following table is a metric equivalent of

the imperial dimensioning system.
96
48
36
24
12
957
Plan Scale
in Layout
Desired Print
Height
1:25m
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
1:50m
1:75m
1:100m
1:200m
Necessary
Character
Height
62.5 mm
50 mm
37.5 mm
25 mm
12.5 mm
125 mm
100 mm
73 mm
50 mm
25 mm
187.5 mm
150 mm
112.5 mm
75 mm
37.5 mm
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
Different fonts may introduce slight variations in text height. When conducting
your own printing tests to determine optimal
text height in a Layout, we recommend using
a true-type or open-type font.
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes

Standard drawing sheet sizes can be selected
in the Page Setup dialog.
To create custom sheet sizes, select File>
Print> Customize Sheet Sizes... or click
Customize in the Page Setup dialog.
Several options are available:
958
250 mm
200 mm
150 mm
100 mm
50 mm
500 mm
400 mm
300 mm
200 mm
100 mm
Print Model
Click New to create a new sheet size.
Select a sheet size and click Copy to create a duplicate sheet size.
Click Delete to remove the selected sheet

size.
Select a sheet size and click Edit to open

the Edit Paper Size dialog and change
its description, dimensions, and units of
measurement.
Click OK to close the dialog. Any new

sheet sizes created are now available in
the Page Setup dialog.
The data for this dialog is stored in the

sheetSizes.sheet file in the program
directory.
Printing
Print Model
The Model Maker allows you to create a
template of your plan that can be printed to
scale and assembled into an actual 3D model.
Three groups of templates are used in the
process. Walls and roofs are printed
separately. These can then be placed onto a
floor plan view, which is printed as a layout
for the entire model.
Printing the Model

The best way to understand how the various
options affect the final product is to make a
very simple two story plan and try them out.
To print the model templates, choose File>
Print> Print Model
dialog opens.
. The Print Model
Since different people build house models in

different ways, the Model Maker focuses on
providing the most necessary tools. It may
not necessarily give you everything you
might want in order to build house models
your way. For example, you may want to
affix tabs to certain wall or roof edges to help
attach them to their neighbors. While you
can draw some of these things onto printed
sheets, the system does not provide them
automatically. What it does provide is
accurate templates for wall and roof sections.
Combining these with your own skills helps
you create professional quality models.
959
The Print Model Dialog

1
2
3
5
7
4
6
8
9
1 Printer - Select the printer for your
model. Larger sheet sizes are better.

Landscape is usually the best mode for
printing models. If it is not your default
printing mode, it can be selected via the
Properties button.
2 Printer Info - Information about your
printer and its current setup displays

here. Check this box if you prefer to Print to
File instead.
3 Walls - Clear the check box to prevent

walls from printing.
4 Exterior Only - Check this box to
suppress interior wall surfaces.

Normally it is only the exterior walls that
display in a model. If interior walls and
surfaces are produced, much more paper is
required. Interior surfaces are typically
printed when composing a model of only the
current floor, without a roof.
960
10
11
12
13
14
5 Fold Interior Down - Check this box
to print the interior surface of a wall

above its corresponding exterior surface and
upside down. This allows both walls to be
cut in one piece and folded over. This is
convenient when making a separate model
for each floor to show its interior.
6 Combine Floors - Check this box to
print together the exterior surfaces of

walls that are on top of each other. Interior
surfaces of those walls still print separately.
Allow Offset - This modifies the outcome of
the Combine Floors Option. Normally the
main layers of stacked walls must be closely
aligned and have the same thickness for
walls to combine. Check this box to allow an
offset of up to six inches (15 cm) and allow
different thicknesses.
7 Railings - Check this box to print

railings along with walls.
Print Model
Check this box to include Outdoor

Walls and/or Foundation Walls in the walls
group. This also affects which walls display
in the floor plan view template.
Outdoor Walls - An Outdoor wall is
normally a garden wall or a wall used as a
fence. It may be a No Room Def. type wall,
see Wall Specification Dialog on page 259,
or have exterior type rooms, such as Deck,
Porch, or Attic on both sides of it.
If a plan has extensive outdoor walls,
printing them all may use a considerable
amount of paper.
Foundation Walls - Walls on floor zero, the
foundation floor, still print unless they are
specified as foundation walls on either the
General or Foundation tab of the Wall
Specification dialog. See Wall
12 Use Scale Wall Thickness - Uncheck
this box to print walls to the width

specified in the edit box, ignoring the scale
width. The walls of your plan temporarily
resize so that their interior and exterior
surfaces accurately match the materials they
are modeled with. These changes can be
most readily seen when the floor plan view
of your model template is printed. Changing
the wall thickness is useful when producing a
model with an interior using material of the
specified thickness for walls.
13 Floor Thickness - Specify the
thickness of the material you use for the

floor platform.
14 Print in Color - This option depends
on whether you have a color printer.

Check this box to print in color.
Assembling the Model
Plan View Instructions - Remove check

from box to suppress floor plan view
instructions from printing.
Once the templates have been printed, they

are ready to be assembled. You need scissors
and an adhesive and a rigid material that can
be easily cut and glued, such as thin
cardboard or styrofoam, to provide support
for the 3D model.
10 Copies - Use the spin box to specify the
Floor Plan View Template
Roofs - Remove check from box to

suppress roofs from printing.
number of copies to be printed.
11 Scale - Specify the scale to be printed

in inches per feet. A simple ratio (1:48
for example) is used for metric plans.
The system arranges as many wall or roof
sections as possible onto a single sheet. For
larger scale models, a printer with a larger
sheet sizes is helpful. If any wall surface,
roof surface, or floor plan view covers more
than one sheet, it prints by itself on the
number of sheets required. Models with large
surfaces may require a lot of paper.
Begin by laying out the floor plan view,

which is used as a layout for the entire 3D
model. If your floor plan view template
printed on a number of sheets, they should be
combined into one. Exterior and interior wall
surfaces should match throughout.
Adhere your complete floor plan view
template to a sturdy and dedicated surface to
provide support for your walls.
961
Printing
8 Outdoor Walls/Foundation Walls -
Walls
Walls should be cut and fixed to a rigid
backing so that they can stand on their own
and support the weight of the roof or floors
above them. How they are cut and assembled
varies depending on the desired final
appearance of the model and how they were
printed.
prevents walls from resizing. This is best if

you do not want to print the interior wall
surfaces, or are using a modeling material
that closely matches the scale thickness of
your walls.
Roofs
It may be helpful to take the thickness of the

rigid material being used into consideration
and override the scale thickness of the walls
so that it agrees with your material thickness.
Roof planes are joined together when

possible before printing. For each roof
surface, the fascia and soffit surfaces are
attached at the eave, so that the least amount
of taping produces the roof and adjoining
surfaces.
If your walls were resized in the Print

Model dialog, you may see unwanted lines
between floors that should merge together
seamlessly. This is usually due to walls
whose exterior surfaces match but overall
thickness does not. You can prevent this by
checking Use Scale Wall Thickness, which
All flattened roof/fascia/soffit surfaces are

placed into a CAD detail named Model
Detail. This is overwritten and updated each
time the roof group is printed for a particular
model. If the roof or portions of the roof need
to be reprinted, those pieces can be printed
from the detail.
Troubleshooting Printing Problems

Printers and plotters vary widely in how they
function. Often, solving a problem is as
simple as installing an updated print driver
downloaded from the Internet. Sometimes a
faulty cable can be a problem. Other times,
the plotter requires that the paper be loaded
in a different orientation.
It is a good idea to keep the Owners
Manual for your printer or plotter close
at hand. Write inside the Owners Manual the
various phone numbers for technical support
for that printer or plotter for the original
manufacturer and for your local dealer.
Chief Architect can print to almost any

printer or plotter that supports printing
graphics from Windows programs.
962
Testing the Printer

When setting up a printer for the first time,
make sure that the test page prints properly.
There is usually a Print Test Page button
available in the Printer Properties dialog
for that printer.
If the test page prints properly, try printing
from Chief Architect. If there is a printing
problem, make sure that you can print from a
graphics program such as Windows Paint. If
there is a problem printing the test page or
printing from a different graphics program,
the printing problem is probably unrelated to
Chief Architect. Make sure that the latest
printer drivers are installed, then solve the
printing problem for the other programs.
Page Setup Dialog
Once the printer prints properly from the

other graphics programs, it should print from
Chief Architect.
and browse the Technical Support section of

our Web site at www.chiefarchitect.com.
ChiefTalk
Help Database
For answers to frequently asked questions
regarding printing and other topics, select
Help> Visit Chief Architect Web Site
Another helpful source of information about

printing and other topics is the Chief
Architect user forum, ChiefTalk. Select
Help> ChiefTalk to launch your Internet
browser to this web site.
Select File> Print> Page Setup to

open the Page Setup dialog.
The Page Setup dialog is only available
when an orthogonal view is active. When a
perspective view is active, File> Print>
Page Setup
The settings in this dialog, including the

selected printer, are specific to the current
orthogonal view or layout file, and are saved
with the .plan or .layout file.
cannot be selected.
1
2
3
7
4
5
6
963
Printing
Page Setup Dialog
1 Click the Printer button to select the
current printer or edit its settings. If you

have questions about your printers settings,
consult its documentation.
2 Select the printer paper Size and
Source. The options available in these

drop-down lists are controlled by the
currently selected printers driver.
Specify the Orientation of the printer paper.
Check Show Page Breaks to display page
breaks as grey lines across the drawing sheet
in the plan or layout view when Show Sheet
is enabled. See Show Sheet on page
951.
Plotters can often have paper inserted
into the machine in either of two orientations. Test your own machine and refer to the
printer manual to find out which way to insert
the paper for correct results.
3 Specify the Size of the Drawing Sheet,

which is the final printed output.
Click the Customize button to open the

Customize Sheet Sizes dialog. See
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes on page 958.
Specify the Orientation of the drawing
sheet, which is the orientation of the entire
drawing. The dialog preview at right updates
as the orientation is changed.
Check Show Drawing Sheet to display the
drawing sheet on screen.
4 Specify the Drawing Scale for your
printed plan. The scale is specified in

two parts, which by default are 1 ft = 1 ft or 1
m = 1 m for layout views, and inch = 1 ft
or 1 m = 50 m for all other views. Both
964
imperial and metric units of measurement are

available and can be selected independently.
The units of measurement available here can
be controlled in the Preferences dialog.
See Unit Conversions Panel on page 195.
This scale is applied for printing purposes
only and has no effect on the plan scale.
The Drawing Scale acts as the default scale
for the Print, Printed Size Input, and
Send to Layout dialogs.
5 Select the Line Weight Scale. See
Line Weights and Scaling on page
955.
Check Automatic to have the program
specify the line weight scale and adjust it to
maintain line thickness and dash size when
the drawing scale is changed. Automatic
Line Weight Scale is based on a 1/4 inch = 1
foot drawing scale and 1= 1/300 inch line
weight scale and is an option for .plan files.
Plan files originally created in one of the
Better Homes and Gardens Home Designer
products have Automatic checked by
default; however, this option is not normally
recommended. See Line Weights on page
954.
Automatic Line Weight Scale is not
available in .layout files.
Setting the line weight to zero (0) for
any object or group of objects causes
the line weight to print as thin as is possible.
6 Check Use These Settings When
Converting Old Files and click OK to

establish the current settings as the default
settings for plans, elevations, and CAD
details when opening plans created in earlier
versions of Chief Architect. Layout plans
Print Dialog
must be set separately. See Text & Page

7 A line weight preview shows how

changes to the drawing scale affect the
printed size of various line weights at the
current Drawing Scale.
Clearing Printer Information

Select File> Print> Clear Printer Info to
clear the printer-specific information stored
in the Page Setup dialog.
This is useful for creating template plans
without an associated printer. See Template
Files on page 167.
Direct printing can be used with any printer

and any sized paper. To print directly from
any floor plan view or cross section/elevation
view, select File> Print> Print
Print dialog opens.
Render views can be printed using the

File> Print Image command.
. The
2
5
3
4
1 Specify Printer parameters.

Browse the Name list to choose a
printer.
Click Properties to verify that the printer is

configured correctly. Paper size, orientation,
and other settings can be accessed here.
965
Printing
Print Dialog
Select the Print to file check box to create a

file for remote printing.
In the Print To File dialog, be sure to give the
file name a .prn or .plt extension.
Do not check Print to file if you are creating

a .pdf file. See Printing to a PDF File on
page 953.
Printing to a PDF file is often preferable
to printing to file. For more information,
see Printing to a PDF File on page 953.
2 Specify the Print Range.

From a layout file, select Current Page
or All. By default, the current page is
selected.
Current Screen prints only the portion of
the entire View showing on screen.
Entire Sheet prints the entire sheet even
though you may be zoomed in on a portion of
the view.
Note: If you are zoomed out, and Current
Screen is selected, any white space around
the plan is calculated for printing.
3 Fit to Paper prints the plan on one
page. The program uses whatever scale

is necessary to fit the plan on one page. If a
percentage less than 100 is specified, only
that portion of the printable area is used.
Select To Scale to print at the scale specified
in the Page Setup dialog. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 963.
966
To print a check plot, select Check Plot at

and choose a scale adjustment from the dropdown list. This temporarily modifies the
scale but does not alter the scale specified in
the Page Setup dialog. Line weights are
also subject to the temporary scale
adjustment. If a drawing sheet larger than the
printer paper is specified, a check plot prints
across multiple pages.
Note: None of these options override the
printer paper size specified in the Page
Setup dialog.
4 Check the accuracy of your printed
scaled documents using Height/Width

Correction. If your scaled documents are not
correct, you can fine tune or calibrate the
printer with these adjustments. These
numbers are multiplied into the scaling units.
Such corrections should only be necessary if
you are using a dot matrix printer.
Check printer calibration by printing a
four foot square at = 1-0. Measure
the print to see if it measures out exactly 1"
square.
5 Copies - Define the number of copies.

Check Print in Color to print in color or
clear the check box to print in black and
white.
When Print in Color is not checked, solid
fills, including the shaded areas of vector
views, print as either black or white,
depending on which is closer to the fill color.
Most black and white printers print a grey
scale approximation of the colors if Print in
Color is selected.
Print Image Dialog
Use Outline Printing - Select the check box

to have True Type text and dimension
numbers drawn as outlines.
If Use Outline Printing is selected when
printing to a regular printer, only the outlines
of text objects and dimension numbers print.
Double Buffered Printing uses computer
memory to render the output at printer
resolution. The resulting bitmap is then
printed. This can greatly improve print speed
when printing vector views, but a lot of
memory is required. This method is not
normally recommended for layouts, plans, or
details; however, it may help you avoid
issues with certain printer drivers for older
printers. See Printers and Plotters on page

949.
If there are a lot of pictures on your plan or
layout, using double buffered printing may
improve your print speed.
Line Weight - Available for vector views
only. Specify the Line Weight for all lines
defining the edges of 3D objects. This is a
global setting for all edges. Individual lines,
other than superimposed CAD lines, cannot
be defined with different line weights. To
modify individual lines, the 3D view must
first be sent to layout. To edit a line once the
3D view has been sent to layout, select Edit>
Edit Layout, and then select the line to be
modified. See Editing Layout Lines on
page 983.
Print Image Dialog

Any view can be printed by selecting
File> Print Image. This is the only
way to print a render view or raytrace view.
See Raytracing on page 787.
The Print Image dialog is similar to the

Print dialog; however, the printing process
is different. Print Image prints individual
pixels as opposed to vectors.
967
Printing
Printing to pen plotters is not supported.
1 Specify Printer parameters.

Choose a printer from the Name list.
Click Properties to verify that the printer is
configured correctly. Paper size, orientation,
and other settings are accessed here.
968
Select the Print to file check box to send the

print to a file for remote printing. For more
information, see Printing to a PDF File on
page 953.
2 Specify the Print Range.

3 Specify the number of Copies.
Chapter 38:
Chapter Overview
Layouts
Video: Creating a Layout File for
Working Drawings
Video: Layouts
The Chief Architect layout facility provides a
set of easy to use tools for arranging multiple
views and/or details on a single page for
printing. You can create and print sets of
working drawings or blueprints in almost any
paper size.
Each layout can contain many pages, and
each page can contain multiple views,
details, images, CAD objects, text, or
schedules.
Layout files can be printed on any printer

that uses a Windows driver. Layout files can
also be printed to a file for off site printing.
When you are ready to print a layout file to a
printer or plotter, refer to the chapter on
printing and plotting for information about
controlling the final printed product. See
Printing & Plotting on page 947.
Chapter Contents
The Layout Tools

Preparing for Layout
Creating a Layout File
The Current Page
Layout Page Zero
CAD and Text in Layout
Images in Layout
Sending Views to Layout
Keeping Layout Views Current
969
Layout
Layout
Editing Layout Views

Rescaling Views
Displaying Layout Views
Layout Page Display Options
Opening Layout Views
Editing Layout Lines
Edit Layout Lines Dialog

Managing Layout Links
Printing Layout Files
Exporting Layout Files
Layout Box Specification Dialog
Layout Defaults
The Layout Tools

Many of the tools available in layout are
covered in the printing chapter. See The
Printing Tools on page 949. Some
additional tools are available to help you get
the most out of Chief Architects layout
facility.
Select File> Send to Layout to open
the Send to Layout dialog and send
the current view to the specified layout page.
See Sending Views to Layout on page 975.
Use Tools> Layout> Page
Up, Page Down, and
Change Layout Page to navigate the layout
document. See The Current Page on page
972.
Click Files> Layout> Insert Page
button to add a new layout page,
moving the current page and all following
pages up one page, as long as there is nothing
on page 1000.
Click the Files> Layout> Delete Page
button to delete the current layout
page, moving all following pages down one
page, as long as nothing is on the current
page.
Click Tools> Layout> Edit Layout to
allow the lines of a vector view sent to
layout to be edited individually. See Editing
Layout Lines on page 983.
970
Select Files> Layout> Layout Files to see a

list of the files that are included in the layout.
See Layout Files Dialog on page 987.
Select File> Layout> Rescale Layout
View to open the Change Scale
dialog and apply a different scale. This tool is
also available on the Edit menu. See
Rescaling Views on page 980.
Select a layout view and click the
Relink File edit button to open the
Choose Layout File Reference dialog
and relink the selected layout view. This tool
is also available on the Edit menu. See
Relinking Layout Views on page 987.
Click Swap Views to switch between
the current view and the view that was
current before it. See Swapping Views on
page 729.
Display Options from a layout file to
open the Layout Page Display Options
dialog. See Layout Page Display Options
on page 982.
Layout Box Layers button to open the
Layer Display Options dialog for the
selected view only. See Displaying Layout
Views on page 981.
Click the Show Layout button to

switch to a layout file that is currently
open.
Edit Buttons
Open View edit button to open the
view that was originally sent to layout. This
tool is only available for dynamic views. See
Editing Dynamic Views on page 980.

Rescale Layout edit button to open the
Change Scale dialog and apply a different
scale. See Rescaling Views on page 980.
Relink File edit button to open the
Choose Layout File Reference dialog
and relink the selected layout view. See
Relinking Layout Views on page 987.
Other edit buttons are available. These
buttons are common to other views. See
Edit Toolbar Buttons on page 71.
Printer Setup
You can print to any printer that uses a
Windows driver. You can change the current
printer at any time in the Page Setup
dialog. See Page Setup Dialog on page
963.
Printing Services
If you plan to use a printing service, install sa
PDF wrter such as PDF995, which is
supplied with Cheif Architect. See Printing
to a PDF File on page 953.
Find out what paper size the printer company
uses and select it in the Page Setup dialog.
Check Plots
If a large size printer has been chosen for the
layout, it is still possible to run a check plot
on a smaller printer. This allows you to make
final checks before printing to the larger
sizes. See Check Plots on page 953.
Creating a Layout File

Choose File> New Layout to create a
blank layout file. A layout file is
created with the name untitled.layout. By
default, new layout files open to page one.
If you have specified a layout template file, a

new layout file will have its default and layer
settings. See Template Files on page 167.
971
Layout
Very little preparation is necessary before

creating layouts. Most changes can be made
any time before the layout file is sent to the
printer. There are a few things that are
helpful to keep in mind.
To open an existing layout file, select File>

Open Layout
. Browse to a directory and
select the layout file to open.
Only one layout file can be open at a time.
When a layout file is open, it is listed at the
bottom of the Window menu as an open
view. Layout files are also listed in the
Project Browser. See Project Browser on
page 165.
same directory as the plan files from which

views have been sent to the layout pages. See
File Management on page 157.
Although it is possible to use multiple plan
files with a layout, it is generally best to
associate only one plan file with a layout and
use the same file name for both.
When you save your layout, take a moment
to also save the plan file associated with it.
If a layout file is not open when you try to

send a view to layout, a warning message
will ask you if you want to create a new
layout file. See Sending Views to Layout
on page 975.
When a view is sent to layout, the layout view is linked to the .plan file. Do
not change the path name by moving the
.plan file to a new folder or renaming it. If the
path name is changed, the link in the layout
file must be reestablished for the view to
appear in layout. Use the Relink File tool or
resend the drawing to layout. See Relinking
Select File> Save

to save the layout file.
It is important that you save the layout in the
The Current Page

The current page is indicated
at the center of the Layout
Page buttons. When a layout file is first
created, the current page is page one.
To navigate between layout pages
Click the arrow buttons on either side of

the Layout Page button.
Click the Current Page number between

the arrows to open the Go To Layout
Page dialog. Enter a page number and
click OK.
Select one of the options from the Tools>

Layout> menu.
Press Shift + N (up one page) or Shift + M

(down one page) on the keyboard.
The current layout page is the default target

of any view sent to layout. If sent to the
wrong page, a view may be moved from one
page to another. To accomplish this, click the
view you want to move. Once it is selected,
edit button to
open the Layout Box Specification
dialog, which allows you to change the page
number on the Line Style tab. See Layout
Box Specification Dialog on page 989.
972
Layout Page Zero
Double click a page in the Project

Browser. See Project Browser on page
165.
Note: Layout pages do not print if they are

blank, even if layout borders are present
Layout Page Zero

3.
4.
Draw a rectangular polyline inside the

printable area of the drawing sheet, indicated by a blue border.
Go to the Edit> Behaviors panel of the
Preferences dialog. Select Concentric
Edit Type, and set the Jump to . This

allows a concentric copy of the polyline
to be made inch from all edges. See
Creating Borders
Once the print area of the layout sheet is
established, you can use CAD tools to create
borders for your layout pages on sheet zero.
For information about the printable area, see
Show Sheet on page 951.
Drawing borders may be simplified by
making a few changes in the Preferences
dialog and your plan defaults. When you
have finished creating borders you may want
to reverse these changes.
Re
5.
2.
In the Layout Defaults dialog, set the

Snap Grid/Units to the desired distance
between border lines. A setting of displays a snap grid in inch increments.
See Layout Defaults on page 990.
With layout page zero open, Select
CAD> Boxes & Framing> Rectangular Polyline
e
c
a
pl
Select the rectangular polyline, click the

Copy/Paste
edit button, and drag
one of the corner edit handles to the
inside. A concentric copy of the polyline
is made.
To create border lines on a layout page

1.
Layout
Layout page zero is unique

because anything on page
zero displays and prints on all layout pages.
This allows you to create title blocks and
borders that appear on all layout pages
without having to recreate them on each
page. Add anything to page zero that you
want on all subsequent layout pages.
6.
Thicker borders can be created by defining the color, style, and/or line weight
for the CAD objects.
7.
It may be easier to see your final product

with the snap grid and the reference grid
turned off. See Layout Defaults on
page 990.
973
Title Block
To create a filleted border

1.
Draw a rectangular polyline or CAD box

inside the printable area of the drawing
sheet, indicated by a blue border.
2.
Double click the Fillet Two Lines

edit button and set the Fillet Radius
value in the Chamfer/Fillet dialog. A
value of 1 fillets one inch of each line at
their intersection.
3.
Select one side of the rectangle, click the

Fillet Two Lines edit button and then
select an adjacent side. The two lines fillet where they meet.
4.
Repeat step 3 until all corners are filleted.
Note: The printable area varies from printer

to printer. For best results, inset layout borders 1/2" to 3/4" from the paper edge.
Create the title block using CAD boxes, lines

and text on layout page zero. Include only
those items that should appear on every
layout page. You can create areas for pagespecific information, which can be filled in
later on each page.
A company logo can be added to a layout by
importing it as a bitmap into a CAD detail,
then sending the CAD detail to the layout.
You can also embed the image in the layout
file.
Text Macros
Page numbers can be entered on page zero
using text macros that are available with the
Text tool. The correct page number displays
on all pages. A variety of other macros are
also available including date/time, file name,
drawing scale, and others. See Text Macros on page 826.
CAD and Text in Layout

CAD objects and text can be added to any
layout page. These are attached to the layout
page itself, not to any specific view
contained on the page.
Text sent to layout is specified in model
coordinates. Text placed on a layout page is
specified in printer coordinates. If you want
text in a plan, elevation, or detail to print at a
particular size, you need to calculate its size
based on the scaling you use when you send
974
a view to layout. See Sizing Text on page

824.
CAD objects can be edited in layout just

as they are edited in floor plan view. See
CAD Objects on page 841.
Text objects can be edited in layout just

as they are edited in floor plan view. See
Text Specification Dialog on page 830.
To move text or CAD objects to another

page, change the Page number on the
Line Style tab.
Images in Layout
Images in Layout
Images can be imported into a layout file just
as they are imported into floor plan view. See
A selected image has edit handles that allow

you to resize, relocate, or rotate the image.
See Editing Picture Files on page 891.
Once imported into layout, an image can be

selected and opened for specification in the
Picture File Box Specification dialog,
including line style, fill style, and
transparency information. See Picture File
Render and Raytrace views sent to layout are

treated as imported images embedded in the
file. See Picture File Box Specification
Dialog on page 893.
Embedded images increase layout
file size. Limit the number of large
and/or multiple images.
Sending Views to Layout

To send a view to layout
1.
Layout files can contain many different

views and details sent to it from one or
more plan files. To send a view to layout,
select File> Send to Layout.
When a view is sent to layout, the program
sends it to the layout file that is currently
open. While more than one plan file can be
open at once, only one layout file can be
open at a time.
If no layout file is open, the program
searches for a layout file with the same file
name as the plan that the view is being sent
from. If it cannot find such a layout file, the
program asks if you want to create a new
layout and send the view to it.
Prepare the view so that objects that

should be seen are visible and those that
should not are suppressed. See Layer
Remember that if the Reference Display
is turned on when a view is sent to layout, it cannot be turned off later. See
Reference Display on page 369.
If there are layer settings that you use

often, it may be helpful to define custom
layer sets for your layout files. See Layer
Sets on page 216.
2.
Select File> Send to Layout
. In the
Send to Layout dialog, the available
options vary depending on the type of

view being sent to layout.
3.
Click OK to send the view to the specified layout page.
975
Layout
\Classroom Design Project Training

Video: Sending Plan Set Views to the
Layout File
Send To Layout Dialog
1 Select a radio button to specify the
depends on the type of view being sent

to layout.
Select Fit to Sheet to send the view to

layout at no specific scale. The view can
be resized on the layout sheet later.
Specify the exact scale for the view in

layout. The view can be rescaled later
from layout if necessary. Both imperial
and metric units of measurement are
available and can be selected independently.
976
2 Which Send Options are available
method of Scaling for the view sent to

layout.
When views are sent to layout at different

scales, line weights and line styles are
subject to the same scaling. In most cases
this is not desirable. When Use Layout
Line Scaling is checked, the lines in
views sent to layout appear the same as
lines drawn directly on layout. See Rescaling Views on page 980. This option is
available for vector views, wall details,
and cross section/elevation views.
Select Entire Plan/View to send to layout the extent of the plan that is visible
when you click Fill Window
. This
option is available for vector views, wall
details, and cross section/elevation views.
Select Current Screen to send only what

is shown on screen to layout. This option
is available for vector views, wall details,
and cross section/elevation views.
Select Current Screen As Image to send

only what is shown on screen to layout as
an embedded image. See Picture File
This option is available for all views, and
is the only option available for render and
raytrace views.
Select Make Copy of Active Layer Set

and specify a New Name to create a copy
of the currently active layer set and reference this copy from the layout view. The
copied layout set is saved with the plan
If Make Copy of Active Layer Set is

unchecked, the currently active layer
set is applied to the layout view. If a layer set
is modified after a view is sent to layout,
those changes affect the view.
3 Specify the desired Send Position for
the view. These options are available

for all views.
Send to Layout Page # - Enter a page
number to send the view to.
Check Snap to Active CAD Point to snap

the view you are sending to layout to the
active CAD Point. See Temporary Points
on page 845.
Check Show Layout Page to go to the
selected layout page when you click OK.
4 The Vector View Options are available
when a Vector Camera View, Vector

Overview, Wall Elevation View, or Cross
Section/Elevation View is sent to layout. See
Vector View Tools on page 734. These settings are preserved between sessions.
tings when the view is sent to layout. If

unchecked, the vector view respects the settings in the 3D Settings dialog when sent
to layout. See 3D Settings Dialog on page
757.
Check Use Pattern Line Defaults and specify a Default Pattern Weight to override the
Line Weight setting on the General tab of the
Define Material dialog. See Define
Material Dialog on page 712.
Uncheck Merge Generated Lines to prevent
the merging of colinear lines. Horizontal and
vertical lines still merge.
If Merge Generated Lines is selected and a
cross section/elevation view is sent to layout,
the program merges any lines that are
superimposed or parallel with each other so
that the layout has only one line rather than
several. This makes the final view easier to
edit in layout if necessary, but may slow
down the process of sending 3D views
containing non-vertical or horizontal lines to
layout.
This option is not available for floor plan
views, Render Views, Raytrace Views, or
CAD Detail views.
Check Use Edge Line Defaults and specify

a Default Line Weight to override all layer
specific and object specific line weight set-

Video: Creating Updatable Cross Sec-
of view, some may update automatically and

other must be updated manually.
tions
If a plan changes after views of the model are
sent to layout, some of the views may
become out of date. Depending on the type
Dynamic & Static Views

A dynamic view references the view saved
with the original plan. Any changes made to
977
Layout
file that the view is sent from. This option

is maintained between sessions.
the original plan update the dynamic layout

view.
For information about controlling the display
of dynamic views in layout, see Displaying
A static view does not reference the original
plan and does not update when the plan
changes. Static views are like a snapshot
taken at a specific time; subsequent changes
do not appear in that snapshot. Changes
made in the original plan must be resent to
layout manually.
Floor Plan Views

and CAD Details
Cross Sections/Elevations
Views created using the Cross Section/
Elevation
The display of everything is under your

control. All editing must be done in floor
plan view or the original CAD detail, and
all changes are automatically reflected on
every copy in layout.
To edit the floor plan view or CAD detail

from layout, double-click inside the view
tool. This
opens the plan file where editing can be
done. Any changes made update the layout.
978
If the reference display is on when a floor

plan view is sent to layout, the reference
display always displays for that layout
view. See Reference Display on page
369.
, and

tools are
dynamic, but their behavior in layout is
different from other dynamic views.
CAD objects can be drawn in cross section/elevation views. Any CAD objects
added to a cross section/elevation view
automatically update in the layout.
CAD objects added in a cross section/elevation view can only be edited in the
cross section/elevation view.
Double-clicking a cross section/elevation view in layout while in Select
Floor plan views and CAD details sent to

layout are dynamic. Any changes made to
these items in plan are reflected
automatically in layout.
, Wall Elevation
Objects
mode activates the original
view, allowing you to modify the model
or add CAD objects.
The lines that define cross section/elevation views in layout are automatically
generated copies that are no longer linked
to the 3D model. Once in layout, these
lines can be edited using the Edit Layout
button. See Editing Layout Lines on
page 983.
Updating Cross
Sections/Elevations
If a cross section/elevation view is sent to
layout,and that camera is activated while the
layout sheet is open, closing the view opens
the following dialog:
, and Wall Elevation

views, camera
views and overviews created using any of the
If the layout view is up-to-date with the

3D model, you can choose NO.
To update the view on the layout page
choose OK. When the picture is updated,
the layout view is replaced with a new
copy. Any manual changes made to the
original picture are lost. For this reason,
you should only make changes made to a
layout view using the Edit Layout
tool after the model has been finalized.
Static Views
Any changes made to the 3D model have no

effect on static views. To update these views
in layout, delete the old view and send a new
one. See Dynamic & Static Views on page
977.
The lines that define vector views in layout
are automatically generated copies that are
no longer linked to the 3D model. Once in
layout, these lines can be edited using the
Edit Layout
button. See Editing Layout
Lines on page 983.
With the exception of Cross Section/

Elevation
, Backclipped Cross Section

To edit a layout view, first select its layout
box using the Select Objects
tool. Use
the edit handles that display to move, resize,
or rotate it. The edit toolbar also displays,
making additional tools available for
modifying the selected view.

Layout views can be edited like CAD boxes.
See Editing Box-Based Objects on page
111.
Floor plan views and CAD details can be
rotated. Both the layout box and the view
inside it rotate. Cross section/elevation and

3D views sent to layout cannot be rotated.
Deleting Views
To delete a view, select it and click the
Delete
key.
edit button or press the Delete
Copying Views
Just like many objects, views sent to layout
can be copied and pasted onto different
layout pages or even into different layout
files.
979
Layout
Vector View Tools

are static. Render and
Raytrace views sent to layout are also static
views. They are treated as imported images
embedded in the file. See Picture File Box
As a general rule, though, if multiple copies

of a view are needed, it is best to send the
view to layout as many times as necessary
because each view can then be controlled
independently.
Bear in mind, too, that if a layout has views
copied from a different layout file and is later
moved to a different location on your
computer, the link to the original plan file
may be broken. See Keeping Layout Views
Current on page 977.
Moving Layout Views

Layout views can be moved using the Move
edit handle or the Move Object Using
Dimension dialog. See Moving Objects
Moving Views to
a Different Page
To move a view from one layout page to
another, select the view, click the Open
Object
edit button, and change the Page
on the Line Style tab of the Layout Box
Specification dialog. See Layout Box
Editing Dynamic Views

Select a dynamic view and click the Open
View
edit button to open the original
view that was sent to layout. This is the same
as double-clicking a dynamic view in layout.
See Dynamic & Static Views on page 977.
Resizing Scaled Views

Scaled views retain their scale regardless of
how you resize the border. You can resize the
border proportionally from a corner handle
or select one of the handles on an edge to
change the size in one direction only. The
image may be cropped if the border is resized
small enough.
Resizing Non-Scaled Views

If the view was sent to layout using the Fit to
Sheet setting, resizing may have one of
several results:
Drag a corner handle in or out to resize

both the border and the image proportionally.
If you drag a side handle in or out, the

image stays the same size, but the border
changes. If you make the border smaller,
it may crop the image; if you make it
larger, you may show more of the image.
Rescaling Views
Floor plan views, cross section/
elevations, wall elevations and CAD
details sent to layout can be rescaled. To
change the scale of the view, select the
980
border and click the Rescale Layout View

edit button or select Tools> Layout>
Rescale Layout View. The Change Scale
dialog opens.
1
2
3
1 Choose No Scale to remove any
specific scale factor associated with the

selected view.
In most cases, you should specify a scale for

floor plan views, CAD details, and cross
sections/elevation views. Typical scales are
in = 1ft and 1 m = 50 m.
3 When a view is sent to layout at a scale
other than that of the original view, line

weights and line styles are affected. In many
cases, this is not desirable. Check Use
Layout Line Scaling to make lines in the
selected view appear the same as lines of the
same weight drawn on the layout page. See
Line Weights and Scaling on page 955.
2 Select this option to specify a scale for
the image. When the scale is changed,

the layout picture resizes.

Video: Layers - Layers and the Layout
File
for that view. From the layout page, you can

quickly do either using the Layout Box Layers
Select Window> Show Layout to

make the layout file that is currently
open the current view. You can also press
Ctrl + Tab on your keyboard.
When a view is sent to layout,the active layer
set is used. Some view types give you the
option of duplicating and renaming the active
layer set before sending the view to layout.
See Sending Views to Layout on page 975.
Do not delete layer sets that are used in

layouts.
To use the Layout Box Layers tool

1.
Select a layout view.
2.
Click the Layout Box Layers

edit
button to open the Layer Display
Options dialog. If this edit button does
not display, the view is not dynamic.
The layer set for the layout view displays at the top of the dialog.
The settings for the currently selected
layer display below.
3.
You can make changes to settings of the

current layer set.
Once sent to layout, static views cannot be

changed. See Dynamic & Static Views on
page 977.
The layer set referenced by a dynamic view
is saved with the plan rather than the layout
file, and the display of the view can be
modified either by editing the referenced
layer set or by selecting a different layer set
edit tool.
981
Layout
made to this layer set affect the layout

view, regardless of whether the changes
were made using the Layout Box Lay-
Changes made to this layer set affect all

other views that use it, not necessarily
the layout view alone.
4.
Alternatively, you can select a different

layer set for the layout view from the
Layer Set drop-down list. Changes
ers
5.
tool.
Save your changes before closing the

layout file.
Layout Page Display Options

Display Options from a layout file to
The Layout Page Display Options

dialog is very similar to the Layer Display
Options dialog, but only controls the
display of the layout borders and any objects
added to it such as text, dimensions, and
CAD objects. For information about how to
982
open the Layout Page Display Options

dialog.
use this dialog, see Layer Display Options

Dialog on page 218. For information about
controlling the display of views sent to
layout, see Displaying Layout Views on
page 981.

Dynamic views sent to layout reference
an original view in a plan. From the
layout page, you can quickly access that
original view by selecting a layout view, then
clicking the Open View edit button. The
original view can also be opened by doubleclicking the layout view using the Select
Objects
tool.
Changes made in this view update in the

original layout view. Depending on the
changes, other views may also be affected.
Notice the name of the current layer set that

displays in the Active Layer Set Control
drop-down list. Changes made to this layer
set affect not only the current view, but also
the associated layout view and any other
views that use this layer set.
It is important to remember that when a
plan view is accessed by opening a
dynamic layout view, that view uses the same
layer set as the layout view.
Individual lines in any vector view sent

to layout can be selected, edited and
drawn using the Edit Layout tool. Changes
made using this tool have no effect on the 3D
model.
The full set of CAD editing tools is not
available when using Edit Layout. In
many cases, it is more efficient to edit lines in
a vector view by sending it to a CAD detail for
editing first. See CAD Detail From View
on page 751.
Selecting Layout Lines

CAD lines in vector views sent to layout
cannot be edited with the Edit Layout
tool. Only lines generated by the program
can be edited using this tool.
To select a line in a layout view, click the
group select methods. See Selecting

Objects on page 92.
Adding New Layout Lines

Add a line to a layout vector view by clicking
the Edit Layout
button, selecting a
layout view, and dragging a new line within
the layout box. Once drawn, this line can be
edited like any other layout line and
maintains its position in relation to the layout
view it was drawn in.

When a line is selected, use the edit handles
to change its size, angle, and position, as
with standard CAD lines. A selected layout
line can also be deleted like a standard CAD
line.
Edit Layout
button and click the line.
You can also select additional lines in the
same layout view using the marquee select or
983
Layout
Angle Snaps
, Object Snaps
, and
Grid Snaps
are all available in layout.
See Snap Settings on page 80.
Layout line properties can be changed in the

Edit Layout Lines dialog. See Edit
Layout Lines Dialog on page 984.
Edit Layout Lines Dialog

When lines have been selected with the Edit
Layout
tool, click the Open Object
edit button to open the Edit Layout Lines
dialog.
The dialog allows you to change the

properties of the selected lines without
affecting the other lines in the view or
change the properties for all lines in the view.
Line Weight Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Weight for Selected Lines - If this
value is set to -1, the selected lines use

the Default Weight for their line type
defined in the lower part of this dialog.
Default Weights - Set the line width for all
Normal lines and all Pattern lines.
2 Selected lines can be changed to take
on the properties of either the Pattern

Lines or the Normal Lines.
3 Normal Lines define the edges of the

surfaces of the 3D objects.
984
4 Pattern Lines are define patterns such

as brick, siding, and shingles.
5 Highlight Certain Weight - Check this
box to isolate lines of a specific weight.

This activates the rest of the Highlight
Weight section, where you can specify
which weights of lines are highlighted.
6 All Lines Editable - Check this box to
select all layout lines, even those that

are not highlighted. If All Lines Editable is
not checked, only highlighted lines are
selectable until you return to this dialog and

uncheck Highlight Certain Weight.
7 Normal Lines / Pattern Lines -
Specify the line weight for each line

type to highlight. If All lines editable is
unchecked, the highlighted lines of the

specified weight are simple to select by
holding down the Shift key and dragging a
marquee around the view (inside the border).
Only the highlighted lines are selected.
Line Color Tab
Layout line color can be changed for the

selected lines only or for the entire layout
line type.
1 Click the box under Color for Selected
Lines and choose a new color from the

menu to change all selected lines to the
newly defined color.
2 Check Use Default Color to restore the
selected layout lines to the default color

for that line type.
3 Use the menu to define new Default
Colors for Normal Lines and for

Pattern Lines. Unless changed individually,
every layout line in that view takes on the
newly defined color for its line type.

Chief Architect allows you to review plan
files present in a current layout, change
existing links from one plan file to another,
and reestablish links to plan files that have
been moved or renamed.
Protecting Layout Links

Careful file management is needed to avoid
disrupting layout links and producing
missing files. See File Management on
page 157.
The following guidelines can help prevent
layout links from being disrupted:
985
Layout
Save plan files in the same folder as the

layout, or in a sub-folder in that folder.
1.
Files in the same folder or subfolder as

the layout.
Legacy plan files referenced by a layout

must have the .plan file extension. Plans
from version 9.5 and prior with the .pl
file extension cannot link to .layout files.
2.
Files in the directory the files were sent

to the layout from.
3.
If files of the same name as those

originally sent to the layout are not
found in these locations, the Layout
Files dialog displays. See Layout Files
Dialog on page 987.
Custom graphics included in a plan or

layout should be embedded in the file or
saved in the same folder as the layout.
Plan files used to save CAD details or

other information should be copied and
saved in the same folder as the layout.
Plan files should never be renamed. If a

new name is desired, make a copy of the
file and rename it. Changes made in the
copy do not affect the layout.
Avoid sending cross section/elevations to

layout more than once. Changes made to
the view can affect layout views in unintended ways.
Layout files should never be moved. If a

layout file must be moved, the entire
folder it is saved in should be moved or
copied and then moved.
Use Export> Export Entire Plan

to
create an independent copy of the original layout. Avoid use of Save As.
Do not delete any layer sets that are used

by a view that was sent to layout.
If you relink a layout view to a new plan,

be sure to save the plan file so the layer
sets are updated.
Finding Missing Files

When a layout file is opened, it looks for
dynamically linked views in the following
order:
986
To relocate missing files

1.
Select the file and then click the Browse

button to locate the file. Click Open to
restore the link. When all missing files
have been restored, click OK.
2.
Choose Tools> Layout> Layout files to

double-check that all files have been
found. If some are still missing, repeat
the above process. If a missing file is no
longer needed, delete the view borders
associated with it in the layout.
3.
Be sure to choose File> Save

when
the missing files have been restored to
save the new path names.
4.
Legacy plans with the .pl file extension

should be opened and saved in the most
current program version.
Results of Missing Files

If all missing files are correctly redefined,
the layout opens when you click OK.
If an error message displays, one or more of
the missing files could not be replaced by the
redefined file. Click OK to continue. The
layout opens, but with the following
characteristics:
Any floor plan views or CAD details

associated with the missing file(s) are
blank. Only the border displays.
2.
Any elevations or cross sections associated with the missing file(s) show the
automatically generated lines, but any
added CAD objects are absent.
Finding Files from

an Opened Layout
To view a list of the files that the current
layout is linked to, choose Tools> Layout>
Layout files to open the Layout Files
dialog. SeeLayout Files Dialog on page
987.
If you want to relink all references to this

file, use the Layout Files dialog by
choosing Tools> Layout> Layout Files....
SeeLayout Files Dialog on page 987.
Layout Files Dialog
If all files are located, only one section

displays: Files present in layout.
If files are missing, a second section is

also available: Files NOT FOUND in
layout.
Each section lists files by full pathname.

Click Browse to locate files in the
directory structure.
Relinking Layout Views

You can change the file that a dynamic
layout view is linked to by selecting the
view and choosing Tools> Layout> Relink
File or clicking the Relink File
edit
button. The Choose Layout File
Reference dialog opens. Select the file that
you want to link to and click Open.
1 Files Present in Layout lists all files

with intact links to the layout.
2 Files NOT FOUND in Layout lists the
names of files with disrupted links to

the layout. Any files listed here have been
moved or renamed and cannot be found by
the program. Intervention is required to find
these files and reestablish their links to the
layout.
3 Select a file and click the Browse
button to find the file in the directory

structure. Locate a missing file and click
Open to link it to the layout. You can also
type the entire path and file name of the file.
987
Layout
1.
Missing Layer Sets

The layer set associated with each view in a
layout is saved with the plan file from which
the view was sent. Just as it is important to
not move, rename or delete the plan file, it is
important that you not rename or delete the
layer set.
If a layer set used by a layout view cannot be
found when the layout is opened, the
Missing Layer Set dialog will display.
This dialog provides information about

which layout view is affected by the missing
layer set, the path name of the plan file that
the layer set is missing from, and the original
layer set name.
Select a replacement layer set from the
Available Layer Sets drop-down list.
Click the Define button to open the Layout
Page Display Options dialog, where you
can make changes to the selected layer set.
Printing Layout Files

Printing layout files is similar to
printing directly from a view in a plan
file. See Printing Directly from a View on
page 952.
As in a plan view, printing options for
layouts are set in the Page Setup dialog.
These options apply to all pages of the layout
file. See Page Setup Dialog on page 963.
988
Select File> Print> Print
to open the
Print dialog. See Print Dialog on page
965.
Scaling
The drawing scale is specified in the Page
Setup dialog. While you can specify any
drawing scale that you wish, in nearly all
circumstances, you will want the scale to be
1 in = 1 in for all layout files.
The views sent to your layout pages have

already been assigned a scale, and if you
select a scale other than 1 in = 1 in in the
Page Setup dialog, these views will be
scaled a second time when printed.
Layout views will print at their specified
scales only when the drawing scale for
the layout file is 1 in = 1 in.
You can also print a Check Plot, which is a

test printing, typically at a smaller scale,
made before final output to large paper

format. See Check Plots on page 971.
To see or change the current scale of a layout
view, select the view and click the Rescale
Layout View
edit button. See Rescaling
Views on page 980.
When a view is sent to layout at a scale other
than that used by the original view, line
weights may be affected. See Line Weights
and Scaling on page 955.
Layout pages can be exported to .dxf/

.dwg files much like any other vectorbased view.
The main difference is in the scale of the
output, which is in scaled paper units rather
than model units. If a 50 line in a plan

would be scaled to 1 inch when printed, it is
exported as a 1 line instead of its length
before prior to scaling. See Exporting 2D
DXF/DWG Files on page 917.
Layout Box Specification Dialog

A layout box is essentially a CAD box that
contains a view once it has been sent to
layout. When selected, a layout box has edit
handles similar to those of a CAD box that
allow you to rotate, relocate, and resize the
layout box.
Select a layout view and click the Open
edit button to open the Layout
Box Specification dialog. The Layout
Box Specification dialog is very similar
to the CAD Box Specification dialog.
Object
General Tab
On the General tab you can specify the exact
size and location of the layout box. See
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab allows you to set the
properties of the selected layout box and to
move the selected layout box to another
layout page. For more information about the
options in the Line Style tab, see Line Style
Tab on page 851.
989
Layout
Fill Style Tab

Layout Defaults
To access the layout defaults for the
current layout file, select Edit>
Default Settings, select Layout from the
Default Settings dialog, and click Edit....
The settings in the Layout Defaults dialog
are comparable to those in the Plan
Defaults dialog. Some options that do not
990
apply to layouts are disabled. See Plan

The default settings are saved with the layout
plan. If you want to customize the layout
settings for future plans, create a template
plan. See Template Files on page 167.
Chapter 39:
Schedules
Schedules
Chapter Overview
A schedule is essentially a text object with
grid lines separating rows and columns.
Schedules are available for doors, windows,
fixtures, furniture, and electrical items. A
schedule can contain information for one or
all floors of your plan.
Schedules update automatically whenever an
object is created, deleted,moved, or altered.
model. You should never assume it includes

what you expect or need.
Chapter Contents
Schedule Defaults
Creating Schedules
Editing Schedules
Adding Columns to Schedules
Schedule Specification Dialog
You should check each schedule carefully to

be sure it accurately represents what is in the
991
Schedule Defaults
Click the + next to Schedules to display
the schedule sub-headings. Select a
subheading and click the Edit... button to
open the Schedule Defaults dialog
associated with your selection.
Schedule defaults can also be accessed by
double-clicking the Schedules
The Schedule Defaults dialogs look the

same as the Schedule Specification
dialogs. The settings determine the initial
settings in the Schedule Specification
dialogs. Label defaults are also set here.
Individual schedules can be edited without
altering the default settings. See Schedule
button.
The defaults are stored with your plan. You

can create a template plan with defaults set
the way you like for future use. See

Video: Creating a Window Schedule
Select a Schedule Tool, and the Schedule

Specification dialog opens, allowing you
Creating Schedules
Schedules can be created in floor plan

view and CAD detail windows. Select
Tools> Schedules to access the Schedule
Tools.
992
to control how the schedule and associated

object labels appear. See Schedule
Editing Schedules
When you close the Schedule

Specification dialog, the schedule you
have just created displays on screen.
While you can place schedules in floor plan
view, you may find it helpful to place them in
one or more CAD Detail windows instead.

Saving schedules in organized CAD details
allows you to send them to layout without
needing to resize the layout view box. See
CAD Details on page 874.
Schedules can be edited using the edit

handles, the edit toolbar buttons, or the
Schedule Specification Dialog on page
995.

edit
the selected schedule.

edit button to
selected schedule(s). See Schedule

edit button to
selected schedule(s). See Components

edit
schedule(s). See Point to Point Move
on page 125.

edit button
to center the selected schedule(s) along a
wall or over schedules. See Center
Object on page 125.

edit
button to reflect the selected schedule(s)

Edit Handles
A selected schedule has the same edit
handles as a CAD box. See Editing BoxBased Objects on page 111.
In addition, schedules have edit handles
along the side of each column, in the
Schedule heading near the top. Click and
drag one of these handles to adjust the width
of the columns on either side.

A selected schedule can be edited in a variety
As with most objects, schedules can be
copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See
schedule.
993
Schedules
Editing Schedules

Group on page 122.

edit button
Converting Schedules to Text

Click the Schedule to Text edit button
to convert the selected schedule to a
tabbed text object. You can then edit the
schedule as text.
Click the Schedule to Text

edit button to convert the selected schedule into a
text object.
When a schedule is converted to text, it no

longer updates automatically. In addition,
shaped labels displaying as specified in the
schedules specification dialog will no longer
be present.
Click the Renumber Schedule

edit
button renumber the objects in the
selected schedule. This may be helpful if
You can copy the text from the Text

Specification dialog and paste it
into other applications.
Adding Columns to Schedules

Schedules can be customized by adding
columns for new subcategories. This
example uses a window schedule.
994
objects have been added or removed from

a plan and the schedule numbering has
gaps.
1.
Create the subcategories in the
Preferences dialog. See Categories
5.
For each accessory, click in the SubCat

column, choose a subcategory from the
drop-down list, and rename the Item
from accessory to the actual material
information.
6.
If you need a new subcategory, click Edit

Sub Categories, then use the subcategory when you return to the
Components dialog.
Panel on page 209.

2.
3.
Next, create the window schedule with

the new subcategories set to display. See
Schedule Specification Dialog on
page 995.
To add definitions, select the window in
floor plan view and click the Components
4.
edit button.
Click the Add button two times, and two

rows of accessories are added to the
component material list.
The window schedule updates to reflect the

new materials as soon as you click OK.
These materials are also placed into any
material lists that you generate.

Schedules and the object labels associated
with them can be edited in the Schedule
To open the Schedule Specification
dialog for a schedule, either select the
Schedules
schedule and click the Open Object

edit
button or double- click the schedule itself
tool.
995
Text Tab
5
6
2
3
1 Columns to Include - Select the check
box for each column you want to

display in the schedule. At least one column
must be checked to create a schedule.
Columns appear in the schedule in the same
order as this list. Columns may be added or
removed at any time by selecting the
schedule, clicking the Open Object

edit
button, and selecting or clearing check
boxes. Many of the columns described below
are available only for some schedule types.
The Number and Qty columns are
unique in that they may be included on
either or both ends of a schedule.
Number - Describes the sequence of this

schedule entry. For example, the first
window in the schedule is defined as W01,
and the rest of the windows are labeled
996
sequentially. This number may also be used

as all or part of the objects label.
Label - This box is available for objects that
can be labeled. A Label tab is included in the
specification dialog for the object if this is
the case. Check this box to include the label
in the schedule.
Qty - Quantity of the items represented by
the row. The quantity of an item is dependent
on how much information about it is shown
in the schedule. For example, if a schedule
only lists Number, Quantity and Floor, all
the windows on that floor display with the
same schedule number, even though the
windows might be different sizes and types.
The schedule does not show enough
information to distinguish them, although the
labels in floor plan view might.
Attached To - Indicates what an electrical

object is attached to in electrical schedules.
Be careful to have sufficient columns to

distinguish the objects. A 3040 fixed glass
window is not the same as a 3040 arch top
window, but they may appear the same in the
schedule if Description is not included.
Floor - Indicates the floor for each item in the
schedule. This column is usually needed only
if the check box for All Floors is selected.
Size - Shows the window or door size in feetinches or millimeters, according to the
format defined on the Label tab. A 3640
window is 36x40, with the dimension
order defined on the Label tab. Size does not
state units of measurement; they are implied.
Dimension - Displays the dimension of the
opening, including the units, in the format
Width x Height. If Include Type is selected
in the Label tab, the dimension is followed
by letters describing the object type. Size and
dimension are typically not used together, as
they provide similar information.
Width - Lists the width of an item.
Depth - Lists the depth of an item.
Height - Lists the height of an item.
R/O - Lists the rough opening size.
Drawer Pull - Lists the name of any attached

drawer pull hardware.
Door Pull - Lists the name of any attached
door pull hardware.
Hinge - Lists the name of any attached
hinge.
Header - Shows the dimensions and quantity
of header stock for each item.
Thickness - Displays the door thickness in
door schedules only.
Code - Lists the value entered in the Code
cell of the objects Components dialog.
Manufacturer - Lists manufacturer
information, if added in the objects
Components dialog.
Comments - Shows the information entered
in the Comments column of the
Components dialog.
Information in the Description, Code,
Manufacturer, and Comments columns is
edited in the Components dialogs for the
obect. Some objects have several rows, but
the schedule refers to only one. To find the
correct row, look at the Description column.
Often but not always, the first item in the ID
column is the one the schedule refers to; for
997
Schedules
By including one more column, such as Size,

the two windows above are separated by the
schedule.
Description - Shows the general description

of the object. This is the same information as
in the Item column of the Components
dialog. It includes the type (double hung or
ext., hinged), indicators such as ct (circle
top) or at (arched top), and materials if
specified in the objects Components
dialog.
The default is the current floor. Check All

Floors to include all floors in the schedule.
doors, this is D1, for windows, W1, for

cabinets, C1, and so on.
Note: When editing a Components dialog,
double-click a cell to edit it.
Text Tab For Other Objects

For Doors
In addition to the default columns, the

Components dialog includes a column for
each subcategory defined under the
categories in the Preferences dialog. See
Categories Panel on page 209. Check any
of these to create a column for that
subcategorys information.
Objects to Include - Check the boxes for
objects you want to include in the schedule.
Multiple schedules can be created using
these filters as desired. See Text Tab For
Other Objects on page 998.
2 Character Height - Specify a height

for text in the schedule.
To specify a printed text size, click the

Scale... button to open the Printed Size
Input dialog
4 Dont Rotate With Plan - Select the
check box to prevent the schedule from

is
5 Title - Enter a title for the schedule and
select the Show Title check box to

display the title at the top of the schedule.
6 Include From Floor - Specify the floor

whose objects appear in the schedule.
998
Double Doors - Include double doors.

Sliding Doors - Include sliding doors.
Glass Sliding Doors - Include sliding glass
doors. These may be included as part of a
window schedule if desired.
Pocket Doors - Include pocket doors.
Bifold Doors - Include bifold doors.
Garage Doors - Include garage doors.
Mulled Door Units - Include mulled door
units. If Treat as door is checked in the
Mulled Window Specification dialog, it
is included here. See Options Tab for
For Windows
3 Transparent Background - Check this

box to make the schedule background
transparent, allowing items behind the
schedule to show through. If unchecked, the
schedule has an opaque background that
blocks everything behind it.
rotating when Tools> Rotate View...

selected.
Single Doors - Include single doors.
Standard Windows - Include any window

that is not a bay, box, bow, or mulled unit.
Bow Windows - Include bow windows.
Bay Windows - Include bay and box
windows.
Glass Sliding Doors - Include sliding glass
doors as part of a window schedule. Also
available for door schedules.
Mulled Window Units - Include mulled
window units. If Treat as door is unchecked
in the Mulled Window Specification dialog,
it is included here. See Options Tab for
For Cabinets
Base Cabinets - Include base cabinets.
For Electrical
Wall Cabinets - Include wall cabinets.
Outlets - Include any electrical items that are

designated as outlets.
Full Height Cabinets - Include full height

cabinets.
Other - Include other cabinet objects: soffits,
shelves and partitions.
For Fixtures
Plumbing - Include any fixtures with the
Appears in plumbing schedule option
checked in the Symbol Specification
dialog.
Switches - Include any electrical items that

are designated as switches.
Lights - Include any electrical items that are
designated as lights.
Other - Include any electrical items that are
not outlets, switches or lights.
Appliances - Include any fixtures with the

Appears in appliance schedule option
checked in the Symbol Specification
dialog.
HVAC - Include any fixtures that have the
Appears in HVAC schedule option checked
in the Symbol Specification dialog.
Schedules
Indoor - Include any fixtures in the Fixtures

(Interior) library category that dont appear
in Plumbing, Appliances, or HVAC.
Outdoor - Include any fixtures in the
Fixtures (Exterior) library category that
dont appear in Plumbing, Appliances, or
HVAC.
Other - Include other fixture objects that do
not fall into any of the above Fixtures
categories.
For Furniture
Indoor - Include any furniture that is in the
Furniture (Interior) library.
Outdoor - Include any furniture that is in the
Furniture (Exterior) library.
Other - Include other furniture objects that
dont appear in Indoor or Outdoor.
999
Attributes Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Check Default to place the schedule on
the default layer. Click the drop down

list to select from all layers.
Click Define to open the Select CAD

Layer dialog and choose from all layers. See
Select Layer Dialog on page 222.
2 Color - Click the color bar to open the
Windows standard Color dialog. Use

the dialog to choose the desired line color.
By Layer - Select the check box to use the
default color for the specified layer.
different Font. The text styles Bold,

Underline, Italic, and Strikeout are
available.
4 Tabs - The edit box defines the number
of spaces from the left edge of the text

box where each new column begins. The first
column always starts at 0. In this case, the
second column (following the first tab) starts
10 spaces in, the next at 20 spaces, etc.
Default tab settings can be set in the schedule
defaults. See Schedule Defaults on page
992.
Label Tab
The Label tab of the Schedule
Specification dialog controls the type, size
1000
and appearance of the labels that display in

floor plan view.
1 Shape - There are six label shapes to
choose from. The size of the shape is

determined by the text it contains.
2 Size - Select one of the three formats to
use when showing opening size. This

applies to doors and windows only and also
affects the Size column of the door or
window schedule.
3 Include Type - Select the check box to
If a shape is selected and Show Labels is

also selected, windows or doors show the
shaped label, the schedule number, and
nothing else. All other label options, except
for Character Height and Initial Offset,
have no effect.
append the Size and Dimensions

columns selected on the first tab with letters
that designate the opening type. For example,
3050DH describes a 3050 double hung
window.
4 No rotate with plan - Keeps the label

from rotating with the plan.
5 Include Schedule # - Shows the
schedule number in front of the size.
If no shape is selected and Show Labels is

also selected, window or door are labeled
according to the format defined on this tab and
the Label tab for the specific object.
6 Product Code Label - Replaces the
size with the Code information added

to Code column components dialog.
1001
Schedules
Turning off the label removes that item from

the window or door schedule.
8 Character Height - Specify the height
7 Show Labels - Select the check box to

display object labels in floor plan view.
This also turns on the appropriate layer for
the objects labels in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
You can suppress the label for an individual
door or window by checking the Suppress
labels check box in the Labels tab of the
Specification dialog for that object.
1002
of characters (in inches or mm)

associated with the labels.
Note: The size of the label shapes is specified in the Callout Defaults dialog. See Callout and Marker Defaults on page 838.
9 Label Text - Specify the leading
characters to be used for the label.
Chapter 40:
Materials Lists
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Cost Estimating
The Materials List is based on certain

assumptions that may not match your
building style. Chief Architect makes no representation as to the accuracy or reliability of
the Materials List generated by Chief Architect. Always compare the Materials List with a
manual take-off before providing a quote or
ordering material for a job.
Chief Architect can calculate a Materials List

in three ways: From All Floors, From
Room, or From Area. In addition, a polyline
or multiple polylines can be used to define
areas in a plan a materials list can be
generated from.
Chapter Contents
Working With the Materials List

Creating an Accurate Materials List
Calculate From All Floors
Calculate From Area
Calculate From Room
Materials Polyline
The Master List
Editing Columns
Editing Materials Lists
Material List Display Options Dialog
Components Dialog
1003
Materials
List
Materials lists can then be created, edited,

and printed directly from the program. They
can also be exported as text, html or
Microsoft Excel format files for use in other
programs.
Managing Materials Lists
Exporting the Material List
Working With the Materials List

The materials list is based on accumulating
quantities of various items in your model.
There are several different ways to generate a
list. The materials list generated from each

method behaves the same; only the content
varies.
The Material List and Report Style panels of

the Preferences dialog control what
columns are included in the materials list and
their order. See Material List Panel on
page 206. These settings can be changed for
individual lists in the Material List
Display Options dialog. See Material
List Display Options Dialog on page 1012.
You can also control which objects are

included in the materials list by layer in the
1004

It is not necessary to wait until the plan is
complete to generate a materials list. A
materials list generates based on the current
state of the plan.
You can save materials lists with your plan,
but they do not update to include changes
made after they are generated. Create a new

materials list to reflect changes.
For comparison, generate materials
lists with and without a proposed plan
modification.
Saved materials lists can be accessed via the

Material Lists dialog that allows you to
edit, delete, or rename them. See Managing
If you are designing an addition and the
floor, ceiling, and roof information is
needed, create the building design to completion and use File> Save As to create a copy
of the plan under a different name. Then
delete the existing structure, leaving only the
building addition, and generate a materials
list using Calculate From All Floors.
When you close the materials list window,

the program asks if you want to keep the
materials list. You can name or delete it.

generally better with manual framing,
since each framing piece is calculated
based on the model. When no framing
has been built the framing is calculated
based on rules that may result in a different amount of material.
The accuracy of your materials list is tied

directly to the accuracy of your model. It
takes more than just making your model
look right to generate an accurate materials list. If, for example, you use CAD
lines to draw an item on a floor plan, that
item is not included in the materials list.
A better way would be to use a symbol or
some other structural element.
Framing items are added to the materials
list even if you havent done any framing.
The accuracy of framing materials lists is
Keep in mind that certain tricks, such

as using soffits to represent items that
arent directly supported in Chief
Architect can result in items being placed
in the materials list that you didnt
expect.
The more work you put into making
your model right, the more accurate
your materials list will be.
Calculate From All Floors

Select Tools> Materials List> Calculate From All Floors to generate a
materials list for the entire model.
Materials lists calculated From All Floors

include the framing information if framing
has been built.
1005
Materials
List
In order to take full advantage of Chief

Architects materials list capabilities, there
are several things to keep in mind.
Any changes made to the model after a

materials list is generated are not included in
that list. To update the materials list, reselect
Tools> Materials List> Calculate From All
Floors
Materials lists can be long and only a portion

of the list may display on your screen at one
time. Use the scroll bar on the right to scroll
through the complete list. Move the pointer
to cells in the list to make changes.
Calculate From Room

To calculate the materials list for a
room, select the room and select
Tools> Materials List> Calculate From
Room.
Calculate From Room

can also be
selected from a rooms edit toolbar.
A materials list calculated from a room is
created for only the contents of that room;
wall materials are not included.
Calculate From Area

Calculate from Area produces a
materials list for the portion of a plan
included within a materials list polyline on a
single floor.
Polyline Specification dialog. Mate-
rial list polylines created in this way are

still shown in floor plan view after the list
is created.
Materials list polylines can be created in two

ways:
To generate a materials list, select the

polyline and click the Calculate Materials
List
edit button and the materials list is
produced for items within the polyine on the
current floor. If you select the polyline and
then instead select Calculate from All
Floors, the materials list is produced for
items within the polyline on all floors.
Select Tools> Materials List> Calculate

from Area
and click and drag a rectangle around an area in your plan. When
you release the mouse button, a materials
list for the area is created.
Select CAD> and Framing> Rectangular Polyline

and draw a polyline
around an area of your plan. Select the
polyline and click the Convert Polyline
edit button to open the Convert
Polyline dialog. Select Material List
Polyline and click OK. Double click the
polyline to open the Material List
1006
You can group-select multiple polylines

before selecting Calculate from Area or
Calculate from All Floors by holding down
the Shift key in Select Objects
mode.
Materials are calculated for each polyline
and added into the total. If two polylines
intersect, materials in that area are counted
twice.
Materials Polyline
Materials Polyline
To create a materials polyline, select
Tools> Materials List> Materials
Polyline. Draw a rectangular polyline
in floor plan view around the area to be
calculated. Select the polyline and click the
Calculate Materials List
edit button. A
materials list is created for items within the
rectangle on the current floor.
Portions of walls, floors, and framing that are
inside the designated area are placed on the
materials list. Items such as cabinets,
furniture, studs, windows and doors are
included in the materials list only if their
center is within the materials polyline.
Large objects such as walls, framing, floor/
ceiling covering, and floor and ceiling joists
are split at the area boundaries so that only
portions of them appear in the materials list.
A few objects, such as floor joists, which
show as pieces in a full materials list, must
be listed in footage to accomodate this. For
example, if three 16-foot joists fall within a
four foot square area, the materials list shows
12 linear feet of joist material. This can be

useful for additions and/or remodels.
Categories
The materials categories, such as General,
Foundation, or Masonry, to be calculated
within a polyline can be specified prior to the
generation of the materials list.
To specify categories
1.
Select the materials polyline and click

the Open Object
2.
edit button.
In the Material List Polyline

Specification dialog, check the categories to be included in the materials
calculation. Categories not checked for
this polyline are ignored.
Since you create multiple polylines for

materials calculation, one polyline might
show only Masonry and Framing while
another might include only Roofing.
The Master List allows you to specify

supplier, manufacturer, price and other
information for all of the materials included
in your materials lists.
When a materials list is calculated, the
program refers to the Master List and checks
for a record for each material. If a record is
available, its information is included in the
materials list. If a record is not found, a new
one is added to the Master List.
Information for particular items can also be

added or modified in a materials list.
You can use information in an individual
materials list to update the Master List by
highlighting one or more rows in the list and
selecting Tools> Update to Master.
In addition, items in a materials list can be
updated to includes changes made to the
Master List by highlighting the row or rows
1007
Materials
List
The Master List
to update and then selecting Tools> Update

from Master.
Note: If the Master List contains more than
one record for an item, the program references the last one entered. You can override
this by defining one specific entry as the
default. This is achieved by clicking on the
check box in the Def column.
Chief Architect allows you to have more than

one Master List. Only one can be active, and
only the active list is updated with new
information. To view the current Master List,
select Tools> Materials List> Master List

.
Specify which Master List is active on the
Master List panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Master List Panel on page 208.
You should regularly back up the master materials list (mmaster.mat) or lists
using Windows Explorer.
Displaying the Master List

To open the active Master List, select Tools>
Materials List> Master List
The Master Window is almost identical to a

Materials List, but has a few additional
controls to help with viewing.
1008
The category menu at the top of the window

lets you limit the Master List to only show a
particular category or display all categories.
Editing Columns
When viewing the Master List, you can

adjust the width of columns and control
which columns are included in the
spreadsheet. These settings are remembered
the next time the Master List is opened. For
more, see Material List Display Options
Searching the Master List

Use the Find field near the bottom of the
window to search for text in the Master List.
The search starts from the currently selected

cell and moves to the right, then moves down
to the next row starting at the left column,
and so on, until it finds an instance of the text
you entered. If the text is not found, you hear

a beep. The status bar at the bottom indicates
how many entries are listed.
Editing the Master List

New records cannot be inserted directly into
the Master List, but they can be deleted or
modified. New records are added to the
Master List when a Materials List is
generated if a matching record is not found.
You can also use the Tools> Update to
Master option to add edited records from a
Materials List.
To delete a row from the Master List, click
the row number at the far left. The entire row
highlights. Choose Edit> Delete, click the
Delete
edit button, or press the Delete
key on your keyboard.
Editing Columns
For columns that can be edited by typing in

text, double click the cell to begin editing.
The following lists the capablities of each
column.
ID - This column displays an automatically
generated identifier for each entry. Click this
column in the Components dialog or in a
materials list to change the category of an
item.
Use - This column only appears in the Master
List and Components dialog. Check boxes
indicate if each item should be included in a
generated materials list. If Use is unchecked
in either place, the item does not show up in

the materials list. This is useful in cases
where the program generates several items in
the materials list but only one item needs to
appear because it will be purchased as a
single unit.
Sub Cat. - This column only appears in
materials lists and allows you to select a
subcategory for an item if subcategories have
been defined on the Categories panel of the
Preferences dialog. Click a cell in this
column in the Components dialog or in a
materials list and select from the drop-down
list or double-click the cell and type in the
name of the subcategory.
1009
Materials
List
The columns in a materials list, the

Components dialog, and the Master List
are very similar, but some columns dont
appear in all places.
Flr - This column shows the floor that the

material came from. It is only visible in a
materials list and is not editable.
Size - This column shows the size of the
item. Size can be edited in a materials list
and in the Components dialog by clicking
in a cell, but not in the Master List. To restore
the original size, simply delete the text you
typed in. For a blank cell, type a single blank
space.
Description - This column gives a brief
description of the item. It is editable in the
same way as the Size column.
Quantity - This column is used to specify
how many of an item must be found before a
materials list applies information from the
Master List to it. If at least that many items
are found for a materials list item, the price,
supplier, and other information are recorded.
Quantity is only found in the Master List
and is useful for applying a quantity
discount.
Count - This is the quantity of an item. In a
materials list, Count cannot be edited. In the
Components dialog, it can be edited for
added accessories. See Accessories on
page 1014.
Extra - This is found in the Components
dialog and in materials lists. It is used to
provide extra units of the item. When Extra
is edited in the Components dialog, the
Count column in the materials list is updated
to reflect the change.
Unit - This indicates the units used to
measure an item and is not found in the
Master List. When you change the units of an
item, the Quantity is updated to reflect the
change. When the Unit of an accessory in the
Components dialog is edited, Quantity is
1010
updated so any unit can be selected.

Additional unit conversions can be added on
the Unit Conversions panel of the
Preferences dialog. See Unit
Conversions Panel on page 195.
Price - This is the price of an item per unit. If
this is not entered in the Components
dialog, it is taken from the Master List.
% Markup - This is used to mark up the
price of an item as entered. If this is not
entered in the Components dialog, it is
taken from the Master List.
Labor - This is the cost of labor per unit to
install an item. If this is not entered in the
Components dialog, it is taken from the
Master List.
Equip - This is the rental or other per unit
cost of equipment to install an item. If this is
not entered in the Components dialog, it is
Tot. Cost - This is the calculated total cost
and is found in the Components dialog
and in materials lists. This uses the Count,
Unit, Price, %Markup, Labor and Equip
colums to calculate the cost. The formula
used is:
(Count + Extra) * Price * (1 + (%
Markup/100)) + ((Count + Extra) * Labor)
+ ((Count + Extra) * Equip)
If a column does not appear, 0 is used for the
value of that column with the exception of
Count and Price, which are always used in
the calculation even if they are not shown.
Supplier - The supplier of an item. If this is
not entered in the Components dialog, it is
taken from the Master List. If more than one
supplier is added to the Master List for a
given item, double-click the Supplier cell
for that item in a materials list to access a

menu of the suppliers that have been added.
Choosing a different supplier references a
different record in the Master List.
Def - This column is only available in the
Master List. It indicates which item is to be
used as the default if more than one item is
available. Click this column to change the
default.
Code - Enter a code to specify an item. This
could be a SKU number of the supplier, for
example. This can also be included in a
schedule or used as a label. If this is not

taken from the Master List. See Schedules
on page 991.
Comment - You can add additional text here.
This can also be included in a schedule. If
this is not entered in the Components
dialog, it is taken from the Master List.
Manufacturer - This column can be used to
specify the manufactuer of an item. This can
also be shown in a schedule. If this is not
You can enter information in the Price,

Supplier, Code and Comment columns for
each item. Once Master List information
exists for a particular item, you wont have to
enter this information. The system can load
the Price, Supplier, Code and Comment
fields for subsequent materials lists. The
combination of Item, Size, and Supplier are
used to identify unique materials in the
Master List.
Adding a supplier and price for any item is
straightforward. While in a materials list,
click in the cell and enter the information.
When the information is correct, highlight
the entire row and select Tools> Update to
Master. The new entry is added to the
Master List.
You can switch between several existing
suppliers for a given item by double-clicking
on the Supplier cell in a materials list. A drop
down arrow displays to the left of the cell.
Click it to view a list of suppliers for that

item and select one.
When a materials list is calculated, the
program searches the Master List for the
Price, Supplier, Code information for each
item. This information, marked as default in
the Master list, is used in materials lists.
Copying
Sections of the Materials List can be copied
and then pasted into a text box or into a word
processing program or spreadsheet program
using the standard Windows Copy, Cut and
Paste commands.
Changing the Font

The font used for materials lists can be
specified on the Font panel of the
Preferences dialog. See Font Panel on
page 187.
1011
Materials
List
Adding Information
Choose a new font from the list of those

available. This changes the materials list font
for all plan files, not just the current one.
If you have problems with the materials

list printing too small, try using a different Materials font.
Displaying Objects in the Materials List

You can control what objects are included in
the materials list and how they are shown.
Controlling Object
Display by Layer
The inclusion of objects in the materials list
can be controlled on the Mat column of the
An M in this column indicates that objects
in a layer are included in the materials list.
Click in the cell to add or remove the M.
218.
Material List
Display Options Dialog
When a materials list is open, select
Tools> Display Options to open the
Material List Display Options dialog
for the materials or the Master List. These
options correspond to the options in the
Master List panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Master List Panel on page 208.
Each plan file can be set to display materials

according to their category. Check boxes for
any columns you want to include. These
categories appear in the ID columns of the
material and Master List in the order they are
presented here.
The materials list changes automatically to
reflect these changes as soon as the OK
button is selected.
Note: If the display of the category is suppressed, the information is still part of the
materials list. If the materials list is exported,
the information related to the suppressed categories is exported as well.
1012
Displaying Objects in the Materials List
Subcategories
Columns Tab
The materials list and Master List come with

predefined categories. For each of these
categories you can define any number of
subcategories. Subcategories are defined on
the Categories panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Categories Panel on page 209.
Subcategories can be specified for any item
in the materials list or Components dialog.
Once a subcategory is defined, it can be
selected from the drop down list in the Type
column.
LKS Lockset
Subcategories are useful when creating door
and window schedules. For example, you
could choose to see the lockset for all doors
and windows in the schedule. If a door or
window has a material with the LKS
Lockset subcategory, any text in the item
field is shown in the schedule under the
lockset column. You would typically add an
Accessory with a LKS subcategory to a door
or window to add a lockset to a door or
window. See Creating Schedules on page
992.
Check to define which columns are included

in the materials list. You can suppress the
columns appearance by removing the check
next to the column name.
Move Up - Click this button to change the
order of the selected columns by moving
them up in the list. Columns appear in the
materials list in the same order shown here.
Move Down - Click this button to move the
selected columns down in the list.
Options Tab
1
2
1 Check Restrict floor and select a floor
to restrict the materials list to. To

restore it to showing all floors, remove the
check. This only affects materials lists Calculated From All Floors.
2 If all the supplies for a job are
purchased from the same supplier,
1013
Materials
List
A subcategory consists of a code and a

description. The code can be any sequence of
characters, up to 12 characters in length. The
description is how you want to label, or
describe the sub-category. For example:
restricting the supplier saves time. Check

Restrict supplier, then choose the supplier
from the list.
Suppliers can be added to the list in the
Components dialog. See Components
Components Dialog
Open the Components dialog by
selecting an object and then clicking
the Components
edit button. The
Editing the Components Dialog

Besides editing and adding information for
items in the materials list and Master List,
you can edit and add information directly for
some items through the Components
dialog. The Components dialog for an
item is the materials list entry for an
individual item or group of items.
This information in this dialog can be edited
just like a materials list or Master List.
Entering specific Price, Supplier,
Manufacturer, Comments or Typeembeds
that information into the item itself. When
that item is copied, even into a different plan,
component information is transferred as
1014
Components dialog can also be opened

from the contextual menu.
well. This information goes into the

materials list.
Components information can also be edited
for library items. When an item in a library is
placed into a plan the components
information goes along with it.
Accessories
In the Components dialog, you can add
additional materials list entries for the object
being edited. The additional materials list
entries are called Accessories and are saved
with the item. Accessories added to an object
are embedded and appear in the materials
list.
Note: Accessory quantities can only be

edited when one object is selected. If multiple
objects are group selected, accessory quantities are locked.
To create a new accessory

1.
Select an object and click the

Components
Components dialog.
2.
Click the Add button and a new line is

added to the spreadsheet.
3.
The new entry is given an item name of

Accessory#. You can give it any name
you prefer.
4.
All other columns for accessory items

except ID can also be edited.
5.
To remove an accessory, click any part

of its row and click the Delete
button.
edit

To open the Material Lists dialog,
select Tools> Materials List>
Materials List Management.
Done - Close the Material Lists dialog.

Help - Open the Help Index to the page
describing this dialog.
Edit - Open the selected material list. Double
clicking a materials list is equivalent.
Delete - Delete the selected materials list.
Rename - Open the Rename Material
List dialog.
Materials
List
Exporting the Material List

Any materials list can be exported into
a text (.txt) file that can be opened
directly by most spreadsheet programs.
From a materials list or the Master List,
select File> Export Material List to open
the Material Export Options dialog.
1015
1
3
2
4
5
6
7
option to create a text file with a tab

between each field entry in the materials list,
and a carriage return between each row.
only those columns that would have been

exported by Version 8. This is useful if you
are using a program that expects the file to be
in this format.
2 Comma Delimited (CSV) - Select this
Estimating Software
1 Tab Delimited (TXT) - Select this
option to create a text file with a

comma between each field entry in the
materials list and a carriage return between
each row.
3 Excel (XLS) - Select this option to
create a Microsoft Excel format file.
4 HTML - Select this option to create an
html file that you can view with your

web browser.
5 No Column Headers - Check this box

to prevent column headings from
appearing in the first row of the text file.
6 Run Default Spreadsheet/Editor -
Check this box to immediately open the

exported file with the program specified on
your computer.
7 Export Version 8 Columns Only -
Check this box to limit the export to
1016
You can export a materials list to a word

processor or spreadsheet program to arrange
it in your estimating format. You can also
export the materials list to a number of
commercial estimating programs in whose
databases you can keep your current pricing,
labor costs, and markups and generate
reports based on this data.
Before purchasing an estimating software
program, be sure that the program supports
the direct import of Chief Architect materials
lists.
Any questions regarding estimating software
packages and how they interact with Chief
Architect should be directed toward the
company providing the estimating software.
Chief Architect is unable to provide any
technical support for third party programs.
Appendix A
Technical Support
Services
Chief Architect is committed to providing

world-class technical support and training to
complement our professional products. Our
support professionals are eager to work with
you to make certain our software is
functioning as designed.
The primary function of technical support is
to make sure our software is functioning
correctly and to help you quickly resolve
problems that prevent its normal use. Our
Technical Support staff is trained in the use
of Chief Architect and is happy to answer

basic questions about how to find or use a
particular function of Chief Architect.
In addition to technical support, Chief
Architect has assembled a team of certified
trainers to offer instruction in using the
program. You can access our trainers in
several ways. Chief Architect offers one-onone personal tutor sessions, online training
sessions, and classroom seminars.
Reference and Training Resources

Chief Architect offers a variety of reference
and training options in addition to the
resources that come standard with the
program.
achieve specific design goals. The Help

Database can be referred to again and again
at your convenience.
The Chief Architect Technical Support Help

Database at www.chiefarchitect.com contains a variety of articles describing how to
resolve common technical problems and
Chief Architect offers a DVD video training

series and toolkits that contain in-depth
training on a wide range of topics from
beginning to advanced experience levels. For
1017
Technical
Support
Video Training
Help Database
more information about these products, visit

our Web site: www.chiefarchitect.com.
Interactive Training
If you have questions about how to use Chief
Architect, consider contacting our training
department for a personal training session.
Personal training sessions are an excellent
way to learn how to use the program,
providing one-on-one interaction with a
certified Chief Architect trainer via the
Internet. Unlike a telephone call to Technical
Support, a personal training session lets you
follow along with the trainer and see what is
happening on your computer screen. Discuss
topics that interest you and learn how to
accomplish your specific design goals.
Seminars
Throughout the year, Chief Architect
conducts training seminars in various
locations around the United States and
Canada. Learn about upcoming sessions on
the Internet at: www.chiefarchitect.com.
User Forum
Our ChiefTalk User Forum is a great place to
discuss and exchange ideas with other Chief
Architect users. Here you can post questions;
read discussions from other users; and post
suggestions to improve our product. In
addition to our regular users, from time to
time our engineering and support teams
monitor the forum and provide input and
discussion on current topics. This resource is
available without charge at www.chiefarchitect.com/chieftalk.
Before Contacting Technical Support

Before contacting Technical Support, take a
moment to see if the answer to your question
is found in the Reference Manual, Help
index, training DVDs, or in our on-line Help
Database. When you contact us, Technical
Support will refer you to these resources if
the answer can be found there.
Look up items related to your question in

the index of the Chief Architect Reference Manual. This manual can assist you
in resolving most how to questions.
Click Help> Index in Chief Architect to

access a comprehensive index of help
topics.
Refer to the Training DVDs available

for Chief Architect. These answers many
how to questions.
1018
Visit our Technical Support Help Database at www.chiefarchitect.com, which

contains articles describing how to
resolve common technical problems.
The Help Database also includes a

wealth of articles describing how to
accomplish many design goals. Use the
How Do I Solution Finder to locate
articles of interest to you.
If you have a question about how best to

accomplish a certain design task, you
may find the users at the ChiefTalk user
forum a valuable resource for information and advice. Access this site at
www.chieftalk.com.
Before Contacting Technical Support
The following are common reasons for

installation failure of Chief Architect and
other software:
1.
2.
3.
Anti-virus software is enabled and interfering with installation. Anti-virus software is the number one cause of
installation failures for any type of software. Refer to the documentation for
your anti-virus software for details on
how to disable the software and reenable it once installation is complete.
The recommended minimum system
requirements are not met.
The DVD has fingerprints, scratches, or
other defects. Sometimes a small fingerprint can prevent the program from
installing. Clean the disk with soft cotton cloth. Be sure to use soft cotton
rather than paper products on disks to
avoid scratching.
If you see visible cracking on a CD or

DVD, do not insert it in your CD/DVD
drive. Cracked disks can fly apart and cause
damage to your drive.
Troubleshooter can also be launched

manually by selecting Help > Hardware
Lock Troubleshooter.
Printing Problems
Printing problems fall into two main
categories: problems that prevent the printer
from working in any program and problems
printing from Chief Architect. To determine
if the problem is specific to Chief Architect,
try the following:
1.
Begin by clicking on the Windows Start

button, and select Printers.
2.
Right-click the printer that is not functioning properly in the Printers folder.
3.
Click Properties from the menu that

appears.
4.
On the General tab, click the Print Test

Page button.
If the printer does not produce a test page,

the problem is not one that Chief Architect
Technical Support can solve. Follow these
suggestions:
Check the connection between the computer and the printer.
Refer to the on-line Help Database for

solutions to common installation problems.
If the answer to your question is not found
there, contact our Technical Support
department for assistance.
Check your printer documentation for

troubleshooting printer problems.
Contact your printer's manufacturer or

check their Web site for support information.
Hardware Lock Not Recognized
Your printer manufacturer is the best source

for solving these problems. Chief Architect
Technical Support is not able to help
diagnose and solve these types of printing
problems.
If your hardware lock is not recognized on

startup, launch the Hardware Lock
Troubleshooter. The Troubleshooter can
diagnose and provide solutions to most
common problems with hardware locks. The
If you determine that the printer is working

but continue having difficulty printing from
1019
Technical
Support
Installation Issues
Chief Architect, refer to Printing &

Plotting on page 947. Chief Architect has
many new features and enhancements. As a
result, techniques that were used in prior
versions may not work in this current
version.
Make sure that you use Print Preview before
printing. Print Preview shows you how the
sheet is scaled to your drawing. If the
drawing is not on the drawing sheet onscreen, it will not be on the sheet when you
print.
For more information on how to set up and
use the enhanced printing functions in Chief
Architect X1, see Printing & Plotting on
page 947.
Make sure that your scaling is correct for the
paper size. If the plan is much smaller or
much larger than the print preview then you
may need to change your print scaling
settings. See Printing to Scale on page 952.
The on-line Help Database is another source
of solutions to common printing problems.
Our Technical Support specialists post new
articles periodically to help resolve problems
you may encounter.
Error Messages
It is important that abnormal errors be
reported to Chief Architect Technical
Support so that we can identify and resolve
any problems.
The content of an error message is useful in
diagnosing its cause. If you get an error
message, read it carefully and write down the
error number and the exact text of the error
message.
1020
Click the Print Screen key on your keyboard to capture a picture of the error
message. Open a new word processing document or e-mail message and choose Edit>
Paste to paste a copy of the error message
into the document for later reference.
If you encounter the error more than once,

make a note of your steps prior to recieving
the message.
Before you report an error, check the Help
Database to see if the error is already
documented by typing the error message or
part of the error message into the search
form. Most common error messages have a
known cause and simple resolution.
Finally, check to see if there are program
updates available. These updates are
provided free for the current version of Chief
Architect and contain enhancements and
other changes that allow the program to
perform at an optimum level. From within
Chief Architect, select Help> Download
Program Updates... to visit our web site,
www.chiefarchitect.com, and follow the
instructions.
Error Reporting
When and error occurs, you may have the
option in the message box to send the report
to Chief Archiect.
No personal information is sent. When you
click Send, your default Internet browser
launches and a web page appears on screen
This message confirms that the report was
sent successfully and may give you further
instructions on how to proceed.
Contacting Technical Support
Contacting Technical Support

available for download. Our engineering
team periodically creates updates to the
program to resolve functionality or program issues that were unknown at the
time of release. These updates are provided free of charge for the current
released version and can be accessed by
clicking on Help > Download Program
Updates.
Chief Architect provides free e-mail and telephone support for the current Full version of
Chief Architect. Free e-mail and telephone
support for the Lite version of Chief Architect is provided for the first 90 days after purchase. To extend your telephone support for
the Lite version, contact the Chief Architect
Sales Department.
There are several things you can do to ensure

a speedy answer to your question when you
contact Technical Support.
When you first encounter a problem or

error message, copy the exact wording of
the message or a detailed description of
the problem. This helps us isolate the
problem and provide you with a solution
as quickly as possible.
When placing a call to Technical Support,

be at the computer or work station that is
experiencing the problem and have Chief
Architect running. If you do not have
access to the problem computer at the
time of the call, the technician may be
unable to reproduce the issue and/or suggest a remedy that can be implemented
and verified immediately.
Be prepared to reproduce the problem

when you contact us. If the problem cannot be reproduced, there is a reduced
chance that we will be able to resolve the
problem on your first phone call.
Before contacting Technical Support,

check to see if there are program updates
Before contacting Technical Support,

select Help> About Chief Architect
and make a note of the serial number and
the exact version of Chief Architect you
are using. Technical support is available
to the owners of software licenses. When
you contact Technical Support, be prepared to verify that you are the owner of
the software license.
Priority Support
Chief Architect X1 Full version users can use
our Priority Support number located under
Help> About Chief Architect.. This Priority
Support number bypasses the regular phone
queues to give you the fastest possible
answers to your questions. This priority
support is not available for users of Chief
Architect Lite or older versions of Chief
Architect.
Web Support
Chief Architect has a variety of support
resources available on our Web site. These
include our Technical Support Help
Database; the How do I? Solution
Finder; downloadable program updates, and
ways to contact our Technical Support
1021
Technical
Support
Chief Architect's world-class technical

support is available Monday through Friday
from 6 AM to 5 PM Pacific Standard Time
and can be reached at (208) 292-3399.
department. To access these resources, visit:

www.chiefarchitect.com.
3.
Select File> Export Entire Plan.
4.
Unless asked to do otherwise, select

Export Plan Files Only in the Export
Entire Plan dialog.
5.
Click OK and browse to the folder you

created on the desktop in Step 1 in the
Browse for Folder dialog.
6.
Click OK and the files are created in

that folder.
7.
Create a zipped folder out of the folder

and submit it via the web submission
form or follow the directions given you
by Technical Support.
Our support team is happy to assist you in

finding the best resource to answer your
questions, and can resolve most issues in just
a few minutes. In order to allow us to quickly
answer your calls, we ask that you limit
yourself to one question per support call.
E-mail Support
Questions can be e-mailed to the Technical
Support department. To send an e-mail, visit
the Technical Support section of our Web site
and use the e-mail submission form. This
route ensures that your e-mail is delivered to
the first available support professional. Emailing an individual specialist directly is
not always a good idea, since that person
may not be available to answer your e-mail
in a timely manner.
Submitting Plans
If Chief Architect asks for a plan file to be
submitted via e-mail, your plan is used
internally to answer your question and is not
released to anyone outside of our office.
In some cases, you may need to submit a
plan to Technical Support for evaluation. If
you are asked to submit a plan, follow these
steps.
1.
Create a folder on your desktop with

your name in the folder name.
2.
Open the Chief Architect plan or layout

file in question.
1022
Telephone Support
Our support team is committed to answering
your questions as quickly as possible. There
are times when we get more calls than
expected and you may have to wait a few
minutes before speaking to a technician.
Your call is important to us and is answered
as quickly as possible in the order it was
received.
Users of Chief Architect X1 Full version
should use the priority support nubmer listed
under Help> About Chief Architect.
Whats New in
Version X1
Introduction
Welcome to Chief Architect X1 and thank you for your purchase. This appendix has been
written to help our upgrading customers make a smooth transition from earlier versions of
Chief Architect to Chief Architect X1. Read this carefully, using the checklist provided.
Following the checklist is a bullet list of features that have been added to X1 from version 10.
Before You Begin

Be sure to read this section before opening any plans created in earlier versions
of Chief Architect.
Before opening any plans created in earlier versions of Chief Architect, it is important to be
aware of some significant changes and the effect they may have on your plans. There are many
new features in Chief Architect Version X1 and many existing features have changed. Some of
these changes affect the way you use Chief Architect so it is very important to review them
carefully. We provide the following checklist of what you should do as an upgrade customer to
1023
New in X1
Appendix B
help you migrate your plans to Chief Architect Version X1. More information about each of
these steps can be found after the checklist.
Getting Started Check List

1.
Check for any available program updates.
2.
Migrate your custom and/or third party library files.
3.
Migrate your custom graphics files.
4.
Setup your legacy plan conversion preferences before opening any plan files.
a. Set your legacy text and dimension conversion fonts.
b. Set your legacy plan and layout page setup information.
c. Set your legacy layer conversion settings.
5.
Review the rest of the program preferences.
6.
Migrate your custom template plan and layout files.
7.
Setup your custom toolbar configurations.
8.
Review the new features list and familiarize yourself with the changes.
9.
Watch the Animated Tour.
10. Check www.chiefarchitect.com for more information.
1. Check for any available program updates - Program updates often contain many
improvements over the original release version and we highly recommend using the most
current version available. By the time you receive and install your copy of Chief Architect
Version X1, a program update may already be available. By default Chief Architect checks for
program updates each day when you launch the program. For information about changing this,
see General Panel on page 190. You can manually check for updates by selecting the menu
option Help> Download Program Updates. You can also check for program updates by going
directly to the Chief Architect Web site at www.chiefarchitect.com and navigating to the
program updates page. Note that you are only able to download an update if you have internet
access.
2. Migrate your custom and/or third party library files - The Chief Architect installer
should find any custom library files from versions 8, 9, or 10 and ask you if you want to copy
them into your Version X1 Libraries folder. If you install Version X1 on a different machine
than your previous version, the installer is not able to find your custom library files. If the
installer does not ask you to copy your old library files or if you decide that you only want to
1024
bring some of them forward into Version X1, you can always migrate them forward manually.
To manually migrate any library files to Version X1, you only need to copy the library files
(these will usually have the .alb file extension) from your previous Libraries folder into your
Version X1 Libraries folder using Windows Explorer. You should also copy over any textures
and images that are referenced by the .alb files. Avoid copying any of the library files installed
with a previous version of Chief Architect. These files are already updated for Version X1.
Library files installed with Chief Architect Version X1 are installed the Core Libraries folder.
You should not install or copy any of your custom libraries into the Core Libraries folder. More
information about transferring third party library files can be found under Third Party
Libraries on page 670.
3. Migrate your custom graphics files - If you have custom graphics files, including
textures, images or backdrops, that you were using in a previous version of Chief Architect,
you can copy them manually using Windows Explorer to use them in Version X1. Copy any
custom texture files from your previous Textures folder to your Version X1 Textures folder.
Copy any custom image files from your previous Images folder to your Version X1 Images
folder. Copy any custom backdrop files from your previous Backdrops folder to your Version
X1 Backdrops folder. We recommend that you keep all your custom graphics files in a
subfolder that has a unique name to keep them separate from the graphics files that are installed
with Chief Architect.We provide folders specifically for this purpose, called My Textures, My
Images, and My Backdrops. Texture and image files may not automatically show up in the
Library Browser in Version X1. Material and image objects are stored in the library. There are
several new tools available for creating material and image objects in your library, either one at
a time or as a whole group. For information about converting images, see Creating Images on
page 894. For information about converting textures and materials, see Creating Materials on
page 704.
4. Setup your legacy plan conversion preferences before opening any plan files - We
provide several different preference settings that help you control how version 10.0 and earlier
legacy plans are migrated into Chief Architect Version X1. You may want to do some
experiments with these settings so that you fully understand how they affect your older plans
when they are read into Version X1.
a. Set your legacy text and dimension conversion fonts - Unlike versions 9.5 and earlier, default text and dimension fonts can be set up on an individual plan basis. You
should set your Legacy Text Conversion font and your Legacy Dimension Conversion
fonts in your preferences before opening any old plans. Use the same settings here that
you had in your preferences for your previous version of Chief Architect so that your
text and dimensions will look the same. For more information, see Font Panel on
page 187.
a. Set your legacy plan and layout page setup information - Page Setup information
can be done on an individual plan basis. Use the Page Setup preference for legacy
plans and layouts so that your plans and layouts are set up the same way they were in
1025
New in X1
Before You Begin
your previous version. Note: You should make sure you leave the scale for layouts at 1
to 1. For more information, see Text & Page Setup Panel on page 189.
a. Set your legacy layer conversion settings - Significant changes have been made to
improve the setup and control of layers. Preference settings have been provided to
control how your legacy plan layers are converted when you open a previous version
plan in Version X1. By default, layers should be converted into the new format so that
they more closely match the defaults that we provide in the template plans. You can
modify these settings so that your layers more closely match how they looked in your
previous version. For more information, see Layers Panel on page 195.
a. 5.Review the rest of the program preferences - Any changes that you made to preference settings in your previous version do not migrate into Chief Architect Version
X1. You should review all the program preference settings to make sure any settings
that differ from the system defaults are modified appropriately. If you ever need to
reinstall Chief Architect you should review the preference settings again. For more
information, see Preferences Dialog on page 183.
6. Migrate your custom template plan and layout files - By default, Chief Architect
Version X1 installs a template plan that is used for new plans. You may want to continue using
any custom template files that you used in your previous version. To do so, you can manually
migrate these files by copying them from your previous Templates folder to your Version X1
Templates folder using Windows Explorer. You should then open the template files you have
migrated by selecting File> Open Plan and review all the default settings, making changes
where appropriate. You may also want to review all the settings in the default template plan,
profile.plan, to make sure the settings are how you want them. We recommend that you do not
modify the default template plans that come with Chief Architect Version X1. You should
create your own custom template files using the File> Save Plan As Template feature. For
more information, see Template Files on page 167.
7. Setup your custom toolbar configurations - It is possible, but not recommended, to
migrate toolbar configuration files from previous versions to Chief Architect Version X1.
Instead, we recommend that you select Tools> Customize Toolbars in Version X1 and setup
your custom toolbars the way you would like them.
8. Review the new features list and familiarize yourself with the changes - Some of the
new features allow you to produce plans much more efficiently so it is to your advantage to
know all of the new features. Some of the existing features have been enhanced significantly
and you need to know how they work to take advantage of them. The following list contains
some of the features that have changed significantly that we feel are the most important for you
to know about. You should review these areas before starting a new project or bringing any
existing projects into Version X1. Included with your purchase of Chief Architect is the
Overview of Whats New in Version X1 video. Watching it will give you a summary of the
changes that have been made since version 10. The Whats New in Version X1 video series is
1026
also available for purchase. These videos offer greater detail about the new features, tools, and
program behavior introduced in version X1.
9. Watch the Animated Tour - The animated tour is included with your purchase of Chief
Architect. Watching it will help give you an overview of Chief Architects tools and features.
10. Check www.chiefarchitect.com for more information - If you have additional questions
about the changes in Version X1, we have up to date information on our web site in the support
area. You can also post questions on the ChiefTalk web forum.
New and Improved Features by Chapter

Video: Overview of What's New in Version X1
New drop down toolbars available as

preference. See Appearance Panel on
page 184.
The following is a list of new and improved

features in Chief Architect Version X1.
Where possible, cross-references to
additional information has been provided.
Tools and Edit menus have been reorganized. See Edit Menu on page 29 and
Tools Menu on page 59.
Added link to ChiefTalk from menu. See

Help Menu on page 68.
New look for many of Chief Architects

toolbar buttons. See Chief Architects
Tools on page 24.
Fewer toolbars display by default. Toolbars organized in order of importance.

See Toolbar Configurations on page
22.
New MEP, Kitchen and Bath, CAD, Plan

Detailing and All Tools toolbar configurations. See Toolbar Configurations on
page 22.
Select Objects
is the active tool by
default when switching between toolbar
configurations.
Check for Program Updates is automatic.
Installation
Installer uses MSI technology instead of

Install Script.
New installation directory:

Chief Architect Inc> Chief Architect
X1.
Overview
New Startup Options dialog. See

Automatic check for video card driver

updates if customer is using a Microsoft
supplied driver or an OpenGL version
prior to 1.2.
Menus and
Toolbar Buttons
Improved Toolbar Customization

dialog. See Toolbar Customization Dialog on page 18.
1027
New in X1
Editing Objects
Pressing Shift key after clicking to move

an object enables slower movement.
Pressing Ctrl key after clicking to move
object removes movement restrictions.
See Moving Objects on page 123.
Improved magnify move edit behavior.

See Accurate Move on page 125.
Corner snapping added to help place

objects accurately. See Aligning
Point to Point Move

edit behavior
properly enabled for cabinets, text, and
most other objects. See Point to Point
Move on page 125.
Rotate/Resize About Current Point

moved to the Edit menu. See Edit
Menu on page 29.
Ability to edit Walls, Stairs, Slabs, Countertops, Polyline Solids, Roofs, Skylights,
Molding Polylines, Terrain, Terrain Features, Roads and Sidewalks in 3D views.
Pressing ESC during object move aborts

move, leaving object selected. See
Support for Select All function (Ctrl + A)

in floor plan view and 3D views. See
Select All on page 94.
Improved marquee selection by object

type for walls, stairs, roof planes, terrain,
and plants. See Marquee Select on
page 93.
Marquee select can be used to add objects

to the selection set. See Marquee Select
on page 93.
Clicking Copy/Paste
accesses a secondary edit toolbar allowing you to perform advanced editing operations, Sticky
All snapping behaviors (Snap To: submenu) moved to Edit menu. See Snap
New editing capabilities for 5 button

mouse. See Using the Mouse on page
4.
Edit Behaviors: Move
, Concentric
, Resize
, and Fillet
moved to
Edit menu. See Edit Behaviors on page
86.
Edit Settings: Edit Object Parts
Object Snaps
, Angle Snaps
Show Arc Centers
, Grid Snaps
Display Reference Grid
1028
, and
Pressing Esc when placing an object cancels the command. See Clicking and
Dragging on page 90.
Many V10 (and previous) edit behavior
involving Ctrl key and Shift keys now
accessed using Alt + right click mouse
movement. See Alternate on page 87.
Right-click move of selected objects
allows less movement. See Alternate
on page 87.
Mode
, Point to Point Move
Reflect About Object
, and Main
Edit Mode
, expanding on improved
copy/paste editing. See Copy/Paste on
page 137.
Double-click of Copy/Paste for multiple

copies has been replaced with the Sticky
Mode
secondary edit button. See
Sticky Mode on page 138.
Drag copy enabled for text and callouts,

and soffits. See Copy/Paste on page
137.
Multiple Copy
edit button creates an
array of copies at intervals. See Multiple
Copy on page 139.
New Paste Hold Position

command
replaces V10 Hold Position edit button
and V10 and prior concentric copy
behavior. See Paste Hold Position on
page 139.
and Select Fence

. See Using a
Fence on page 94.
Edit behaviors for wall opening objects:

doors, windows, bays, fireplaces. See
Editing Bay, Box and Bow Windows
on page 339.
Added Openings/Wall Hatching to

Delete Objects dialog. See Delete
Group selecting and opening dissimilar

objects for specification opens Object
Specification dialog, allowing objects
to be moved to another layer. See Specification Dialogs on page 8.
Left click move keeps objects at allowed

angles. Right click move (or Alt + left
click) is restricted to 90 degrees. See
Can disable Move Object Using

Dimension dialog with Shift key down.
See Moving Objects Using Dimensions
on page 804.
New behavior for Break Line

edit
button. See Break Line on page 130.
Unconnected lines and walls can now

display four headed move pointer over
center move edit handle. This allows you
to move the object any direction, not just
perpendicular to its length. See Alternate on page 87.
New 3D object snaps. See Object

Snaps on page 82.
by Reflect About Object

and
enabled for most objects. See Reflect
About Object on page 135.
Corner and edge edit handles disappear

as you zoom out from an object. See
Select/Make Fence
Preferences dialog contains only glo-
New Paste Special

command allows
copied items to be pasted in multiple formats. See Paste Special on page 139.
Copying and pasting a single object

leaves the pasted object selected. See
Paste on page 137.
Copy/Paste
works with Edit Area
Tools
. See Using the Edit Toolbar
on page 154.
Multiple copy added for many objects,

such as walls, doors, and windows. See
Multiple Copy on page 139.
works
with Edit Area Tools

. See Using the
Edit Toolbar on page 154.
Improved Edit Area

functionality.
See Edit Area Tools on page 153.
Reflect About Line edit button replaced
edit button split
into two edit buttons, Fence Select
bal preferences. Many plan-specific

options appropriately moved elsewhere,
1029
New in X1
such as the CAD Defaults dialog, and

the Floor Defaults dialog. See
Defaults & Preferences on page 175.
Subtract enabled when multiple polylines

or solids are selected. See Union, Intersection, and Subtract on page 146.
Specify how the Marque Select works in

the Edit panel of the Preferences dialog. See Edit Panel on page 201.
New Convert Arc/Circle to Polyline

edit button allows CAD circles and arcs
to be converted into polylines and vice
versa. See Convert Arc/Circle to Polyline on page 132.
In the Transform/Replicate Object

dialog, objects can be resized using fractions. See Transform/Replicate Object
Dialog on page 144.
Method of straightening a spline has

changed. See Straighten Spline Segment on page 118.
Circle editing has changed. See Editing

Circles, Ovals and Ellipses on page 118.
The polyline rotate edit handle is now

positioned relative to the selected edge,
allowing for more flexible editing behavior.
Improved Lock Arc Center behavior.

See Using Lock Center on page 102.
Resize edit handles for polylines move

when zooming in to maintain availability
on screen. See Using the Edit Handles
on page 96.
New Alternate Mode and Move Mode

buttons provide access to concentric, corner, fillet behavior edit functions. See
Edit Polyline Parts toggle button
Added keyboard hints for edit behavior

selectors. See Edit Behaviors on page
86.
Edit handle locations are now consistent

from object to object. See Using the Edit
Handles on page 5.
New selection behavior for wall hatching. See Hatch Wall on page 236.
Improved selectability of piers and pads.

See Editing Piers and Pads on page
380.
The two Make Block

edit buttons
(one for CAD objects, the other for architectural objects) have been replaced with
renamed Edit Object Parts

. Affects
editing of polylines, stair sections, walls,
and other polyline based objects. See
Edit Object Parts on page 93.
Multiple selected CAD objects now follow Grid snapping rules. See Grid
Snaps on page 85.
CAD Mode has been replaced with CAD
toolbar configuration. Any CAD object
can be drawn at anytime. See Toolbar
Select CAD Object button removed.
Select Objects
is the default selection tool in all modes. See Select
Objects on page 92.
Make CAD Block

tural Block
, Make Architec-
, and Make Mulled Unit
. See Architectural and CAD

Blocks on page 121 and Manually
1030
New behavior when converting CAD

lines. When you have finished converting
a CAD line or polyline, it remains
selected so you can open specification
dialog to edit it. The polyline object specification dialogs no longer open immediately following a polyline conversion.
See Convert Polyline Dialog on page
150.
Name of Display Arc Centers changed
File Management
Added Save Plan as Template. See

Can copy files from Windows Explorer

and paste them directly into Chief, as
well as drag and drop.
Recent File List shows up in the File

menu when a blank plan is opened.
Items in the Project Browser now appear

in alphabetical order. See Project
Open correct directory when browsing

for plan or layout templates. See Template Files on page 167.
Plan Thumbnails can be saved regardless

of thumbnail preference setting. See
Saving a Plan Thumbnail on page 161.
Error classes and error log file implemented.
When you save a version 10 plan in X1,

the program creates an archive with
_v10 added to the name.
to Show Arc Centers and Ends

. See
Show Arc Centers on page 102.
Angle Snaps
changed from a radio
button to a checkbox. See Angle Snaps
on page 84.

edit button
is available for group selected CAD
objects. See Move to Front of Group
on page 122.
New CAD Defaults

button. See
CAD Defaults on page 842.
Functionality of Center Object

edit
button expanded to all objects. See Center Object on page 127.
Objects can be snapped to other objects

on the reference floor. See Reference
Floor on page 368.
New Enter Coordinates dialog allows

you to enter absolute X and Y coordinates while editing an object. See Entering Coordinates on page 91.
Accurate Move
slows down mouse
movement, not object movement. See
Accurate Move on page 125.
Defaults &
Preferences
Preferences dialog contains only glo-
bal preferences. Many plan-specific

options appropriately moved elsewhere,
such as the CAD Defaults dialog, and
the Floor Defaults dialog. See Preferences Dialog on page 183, CAD
Defaults Dialog on page 878, and Floor
New Edit pane in Preferences dialog

contains options for edit behaviors and
snap properties. See Edit Panel on page
201.
1031
New in X1
Improved ability to identify when multiple objects are selected by adding Selection Fill Color option to Preferences
dialog. See Colors Panel on page 186.
Stair Sections Move Independently

moved from the stairs specification to the
Architectural pane of Preferences dialog. See Architectural Panel on page
198.
New preference setting allows control of

crosshairs in 3D views. Crosshairs on by
default. See Edit Panel on page 201.
New Edit Handle Tolerance setting

improves the ability to select edit handles
without changing the sizes. See Edit
Panel on page 201.
Improved control of contextual menu

when editing objects using edit handles.
Some options on the Render panel if the

Preferences dialog are renamed. H/W
Backdrop is now Surface Backdrop;
Use Muiltpass is changed to Use Transparency.
Layers
New Layer Set Defaults dialog centralizes layer set control and usage in
overviews, layouts, aerial views, plot
plan, etc. See Layer Set Defaults Dialog on page 225.
New Layer Set Management dialog

improves control of layer sets. See
Display of objects in 3D views controlled

by layer sets. View tools (such as framing
overviews) are no longer allowed to
affect the display of layers. See Layer
Sets on page 216.
New Active Layer Set Control dropdown box can be added to your toolbar
for convenient access to layer display
management. See Active Layer Set
Control on page 218.
2D, 3D columns merged in the Layer

Display Options dialog. Reference
column removed and replaced with new
layer set functionality. Color and Size
columns now affect 3D views. See
218.
Modify All Layer Sets checkbox in

Layer Display Options dialog is no
longer preserved between sessions. See
218.
Preferences dialog opens to last pane
accessed.
Modify Name In All Layer Sets added

to Preferences. See Layers Panel on
page 195.
Status bar messages use current num

style setting for angles.
All status bar preference settings grouped

together now on Appearance pane of
Panel on page 184.
Rotate Jump increment working for

Rotate About Object Center edit
behavior. See Behaviors Panel on page
202.
New intermediate defaults dialogs for

doors, schedules, cabinets, and walls. See
Default Settings on page 176.
Show screen redraw time moved to Status bar group. New slot in status bar. See
1032
Current cad layer is specified in the

Layer Display Options dialog using a
drop down list. See Layer Display
Placing an item on a locked or invisible

layer prompts message to turn on the
layer. See Displaying Objects on page
221.
Improved wall fill style control. See

Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page
251.
Curved walls drawn using arc creation

modes. See Drawing Curved Walls on
page 238.
Change Line/Arc
Object
edit buttons enabled for
walls. Also, select a wall and reverse the
wall layers using the new Reverse Lay-
Button added to Layer Display Option

dialog gives direct access to line styles in
the library.
Walls, Railings,
& Fencing
and Center
ers
edit button. See Using the Edit
Paste Hold Position improved for walls.

See Using the Edit Buttons on page
244.
Room
tool. See Polygon Shaped
Room on page 230.
Make Parallel / Perpendicular

edit
button now available for curved walls.
See Using the Edit Buttons on page
244.
New options in Wall Specification

dialog Stop at Ceiling, Balloon Thru
Ceiling and No Balloon Framing allow
you to specify wall framing. See Wall
New continuous wall drawing mode in

floor plan view can be accessed by rightclicking the mouse or pressing the Alt
key. Available in Full version only. See
Drawing Walls on page 238.
Added support for Double walls. See

New Overhang setting for non-default

walls in Wall Specification dialog.
See Wall Specification Dialog on page
259.
New wall edit handles. Walls can be

moved in any direction. Rotate edit handle allow walls to be rotated. Wall offset
edit handles removed, offset now automatically calculated. See Using Edit
Handles on page 242.
Wall defaults have been improved and

reorganized. See Wall/Railing/Fencing
Walls can be group selected with other

walls and other objects. See Selecting
Walls on page 242.
Deck Tools
pulled out of Wall Tools
family. Includes Straight Deck Railing
Walls can be drawn, selected, edited, and

deleted in 3D views. See Editing Walls
on page 242.
Improved ability to draw polygon rooms

using the Regular Polygon Shaped
New General Wall Defaults

button
and accelerator key. See Wall/Railing/
Fencing Defaults on page 274.
, and Curved Deck Railing
child
1033
New in X1
buttons. See The Deck Tools on page

231.
Fencing Tools
pulled out of Wall
Tools family. Includes Straight Fencing
Moved Retaining Wall tools from Build>

Walls menu to Terrain menu. See Terrain on page 1039.
Removed Alter Default Wall child button from wall tools family. Same functionality available through Wall
Specification dialog as it always has
been.
, and Curved Fencing

child buttons. See The Fencing Tools on page
231.
Break Wall
and Hatch Wall
removed from Straight Wall Tools

and Curved Wall Tools
families. See
Break Wall on page 230 and Hatch
Wall on page 230.
Added new wall types to profile plan:

CBS (Concrete, Block, Stucco) and ICF
(Insulated Concrete Form). See Wall
Wall layer widths can be specified in decimal or fractional units. See Wall Type
New wall hatch selection behavior. See

Hatch Wall on page 230.
Wording changes regarding Pony Walls

in dialogs. See Pony Wall Defaults on
page 229.
Walls can be dimensioned from a center

point. See Moving Walls Using Dimensions on page 244.
Rooms
Rooms can be selected in 3D views, display fill color when selected. See Selecting Rooms on page 283.
Deck planking orientation and overhang

is controlled on the Deck tab of the
Room Specification dialog. Deck
framing will relocate appropriately.
Foundation floor must be present. See
Decks on page 288.
Regular Polygon Shaped Deck

tool
allows you to create decks with or without railings. See Decks on page 288.
New Straight Deck Edge
and
Curved Deck Edge

tools for creating
decks without railings. See Decks on
page 288.
Object selection color can be customized.

See Colors Panel on page 186.
Walls display angle in status bar when

rotated using rotate edit handle. See
Editing Walls on page 242.
Floor and ceiling heights can be edited in

3D views. See Selecting Rooms on
page 283.
Walls do not produce 3D for air gap

material.
Show Lower Pony Wall moved to Pony

Wall Defaults dialog. See Pony Wall
Room Labels can be group selected and

edited. Initial room label size moved to
Room Label Defaults. See Room
Label Defaults on page 838.
1034
Exterior rooms display a bounding box

when selected. See Selecting Rooms
on page 283.
Replaced D dynamic default with

Default checkbox. See Room Specification Dialog on page 296.

on page 359.
Changed selection method for Bay/Box/

Bow Windows. See Editing Bay, Box
and Bow Windows on page 339.
Multiple Floors
Doors and
Windows
Windows and Doors edit the same in both

2D and 3D views. See Editing Doors
on page 309 and Editing Windows on
page 336.
Multiple copy works for windows.
Bay/Box/Bow Windows can be resized

using Transform/Replicate
edit button. See Transform/Replicate Object
Dialog on page 144.
New Double Wall options on Frame and

Trim tab of Door Specification dialog
and Window Specification dialog.
See Door Specification Dialog on page
315 and Window Specification Dialog
on page 343.
Soldier Course available for windows in

the Millwork library.
Can no longer edit window Height using

middle edit handle in plan view. See
Editing Windows on page 336.
Lost ability to change swing side using

edit handles for sliding doors. Change
Opening/Hinge Side
edit button
replaces functionality. See Changing
Door Swings on page 312.
Bay Window Spec dialog renamed

Bay/Box Window Spec dialog. See
Reference Display column removed from

Layer Display Options dialog and
replaced with a Reference Layer Set.
This allows for greater control of reference display and for reference lines to be
displayed in print. See Reference Display on page 369.
Added a Define button to the Change

Floor/Reference dialog to allow easy
modification of Reference Layer set. See
Change Floor on page 368.
Can add/remove and navigate between

floors in 3D views. See Adding Floors
on page 366.
Foundations
Added ability to edit wall footing heights

in 3D. See Editing Foundations on
page 376.
Slab Thickness can be edited in 3D

views. See Editing Foundations on
page 376.
Changed name of mudsill to sill plate.

See Foundation Tab on page 373.
Text added to the Foundation

Defaults dialog to alert customers that
the mudsill is included with Minimum
Wall Height value. See Foundation Tab
on page 373.
1035
New in X1
New confirmation dialog when deleting

foundation. See Deleting Foundations
on page 377.
Roofs
When roofs are group selected with other

items, the Move edit handle is enabled.
See Editing Roof Planes on page 402.
Dormer boxes reside on their own layer,

not default CAD layer.
Improved feedback during manual roof

plane creation. See Drawing Roof
Planes on page 393.
Allow Low Roof Planes defaults to

being checked. See Build Tab on page
417.
Can set Eave Fascia and Gable Fascia

separately for each roof plane. See
Options Tab on page 426.
Removed 20 Gable Line limit.
Build Roof dialog uses angle style setting for curved roof angle. See Build
Roof Dialog on page 416.
Added curved eaves for dormers. See

Dormer Specification Dialog on page
429.
Ability to join roof planes and make roof

planes coplanar in 3D. See Editing Roof
Planes on page 402.
Improved edit handles for curved roof

planes in floor plan view and 3D views.
See Editing Curved Roof Planes on
page 405.
New Click Stairs

child button. See
Click Stairs on page 436.
Auto Rebuild Roofs works for Roof

Baselines. See Roof Baseline Polylines
on page 391.
The Shift key is no longer used to draw

down stairs. The same functionality has
been replaced with pressing the Alt key
and right clicking when drawing. See
Drawing Stairs on page 437.
New settings in Build Roof dialog,

Same Roof Height at Exterior Walls
and Same Height Eaves. See Build
Tab on page 417.
Lock Center
edit button now available for curved stairs. See Using Lock
Center on page 102.
The Ctrl key is no longer used to bend

straight stairs. The same functionality has
been replaced with pressing the Alt key
and right clicking when using the end edit
handle. See Curved Stairs on page 436.
Added new options Extend Stringer

Top, Nosing at Top of Landing, and
Riser Surface at Top Landing to
Reorganized existing options. Extend
Stringer Top is on by default. See Staircase Specification Dialog on page 458.
Shed dormers placed using the Auto Dormer tools use their own default roof pitch
of 3 in 12. See Dormer Defaults on
page 432.
New Plan Check items for dormers.
Automatic Dormers now easier to place.
Options tab added to the Roof Plane

1036
Stairs
Framing
Stair Sections Move Independently

added to Architectural pane of
Preferences dialog. (See Defaults &
Preferences on page 1031)
New wrapped stairs. See Wrapped

Stairs on page 452.
Stairs can be drawn, selected, and edited

in 3D views. See Editing Stairs on page
441.
Wall framing can be edited in 2D, 3D,

and cross section views. See Editing
Framing on page 494.
Posts and piers can be selected and edited

without having the post or pier tool
active.
Build Framing dialog prompts you to
Objects now snap to reference floor. See

Editing Stairs on page 441.
Make Arc Tangent

edit button now
enabled for stairs. Editing Stairs on
page 441.
Chamfer
and Fillet
available for
stair landings. Stair Landings on page
443.
Settings on the Line Style tab can be set

for individual stair sections. See Displaying Stairs on page 440.
Added Fill Style tab to Staircase

Specification dialog. See Staircase
Stair angle displays using the settings in

the NumStyle dialog. See Staircase
Build Framing dialog is available in
3D views. See Build Framing Dialog

on page 475.
turn on appropriate framing layers if they

are turned off when you build framing.
See Build Framing Dialog on page
475.
Previous preference setting Fill New

Framing Members has been moved to
new CAD Defaults dialog. See CAD
Trusses
Truss labels can no longer be group

selected. See Truss Labels on page 506.
Truss labels have their own layer. See

Truss Labels on page 506.
Electrical
Improved creation of Starter Treads
and Flared/Curved Stairs

. See
Flared Stairs and Curved Treads on
page 448 and Starter Treads on page
451.
Can group select/marquee select and

move electrical objects. See Editing
Electrical Objects on page 527.
Stair tread lines display line weight correctly in floor plan view. See Displaying
Stairs on page 440.
New edit handles for electrical connections. See Editing Electrical Objects on
page 527.
The process for removing an electrical

object from a circuit has changed. See
Editing Electrical Objects on page 527.
1037
New in X1
Electrical objects now have snap points.

See Editing Electrical Objects on page
527.
Improved electrical connections. Dedicated layer, new behavior, new edit handles. See Editing Electrical Objects on
page 527.
Edit box added to the Auto Intensity

slider in the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See Electrical
Service Specification Dialog on page
529.
Cabinet Toe Kick and Flat Sides options

can be set independent of each other. See
Cabinet Specification Dialog on page
565.
New Flat Back option for cabinets

improves control of overhang on cabinet
backs. See Cabinet Specification Dialog on page 565.
Improved control of backsplash on cabinets. See Cabinet Specification Dialog

on page 565.
Once placed in a plan, library cabinets

can be resized in all views using edit handles. See Editing Cabinets on page 556.
Trim & Moldings
Added ability to place molding profiles in

plan to edit. See Place Molding Profile
on page 540.
Cabinet tops can be selected in 3D for

editing. See Editing Cabinets on page
556.
Improved wall corner and quoin editing.

See Quoins on page 537.
Improved cabinet editing behaviors. See

Editing Cabinets on page 556.
You can build custom symbol moldings.

See Symbol Moldings on page 540.
Cabinets display temporary dimensions

when selected in floor plan view. The
temporary dimensions locate the nearest
inside wall, cabinet or opening within 48
inches of the cabinet's centerline. See
Editing Cabinets on page 556.
Corner Width and Rounded options

grouped together on General tab of
Cabinet Specification dialog. See
Cabinet Specification Dialog on page
565.
Appliance Fill removed for Soffits,

Shelves, Partitions. See Shelf/Partition
Removed limitation of 7 inches for the

display of library doors. Set section
height minimum for every section to 1/16
of an inch. See Cabinet Specification
Dialog on page 565.
Cabinets
1038
New Cabinet Shelf Specification

dialog gives you automatic or manual
ability to specify the number, depth,
thickness, and spacing of cabinet shelves.
See Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog
on page 577.
New hybrid Cabinet/Symbol objects. Can
be opened for specification in the
Cabinet Symbol Specification dialogs. See Create Symbol Wizard on
page 925.
Can adjust height placement of cabinet
drawer hardware. See Cabinet Specification Dialog on page 565.
Reorganize Cabinet Specification

dialogs. See Cabinet Specification Dialog on page 565.
Roads & Sidewalks
Terrain
Other Objects
Terrain perimeter and terrain features can

be selected and edited in 3D views. See
Plant Chooser interface improved. See

New Feature Spline
Terrain features can be drawn in 3D. See

Added new Garden Bed Tools
, Stepping
, and Terrain Wall & Curb
Tools
. See Terrain on page 583.
Feature Polyline
Feature Polyline
angular Feature
Spline
renamed to Spline Feature
. See Terrain Feature Tools on page

590.
Terrain features now have thickness.
Moved Retaining Wall tools from Build>

Walls menu to Terrain menu. See Terrain Wall and Curb Tools on page 593.
, 3D Sphere
, 3D Cone
, and
Improved fireplace editing. Fireplaces

can be moved vertically along a wall and
deeper into a wall. See Fireplaces on
page 656.
You can resize individual items in architectural blocks without exploding the
block first.
Dimensions work inside architectural

blocks.
renamed to Rect. Feature Closed
Child buttons 3D Box
now the first child
button in the Terrain Feature Tools

.
See Terrain Feature Tools on page 590.
Stone
parent button.
Polyline Solid
(introduced in Version
10) allow you to create 3D CAD objects
that can be selected, edited in 3D, and
opened for specification. See Primitive
Tools on page 641.
added to Terrain Feature Tools

. See
New Primitive Tools

, 3D Cylinder
child button
Water Feature Tools
Road edit handles in new locations. See

Editing Road Objects on page 634.
Libraries
CAD Details are organized in alphabetical order. See Project Browser on page
165.
Style Attributes added to Library

Search dialog. This includes Commercial and Asian styles. See Library
Search Dialog on page 692.
Line styles are stored in the plan, not

Material.dat. Line Styles can now be
imported. Command available through
1039
New in X1
Mode, Material Painter Plan Mode. See

Material Painter on page 708.
the File> Import submenu. See Line

Styles on page 688.
Select a line style in the Library Browser

to draw a straight line using that line
style.
Certain aspects of manufacturer specific

library symbols can be locked.
Toilet pointer icon replaced with sink

icon when object from Interior Fixture
category is selected for placement.
Library Browser automatically scrolls

down when cursor reaches bottom. See
The Library Browser on page 670.
Text Search complete with no matches

displays when library search finds nothing. See Library Search Dialog on page
692.
New Library Content
New stand-alone color chooser. See

Color Chooser Dialog on page 722.
Global texture mapping replaced with

improved texture mapping by object for
panels, wall framing, moldings, windows, and more.
Can specify line weight for 2D patterns

on the Fill Style tab of various object
specification dialogs. Can specify fill pattern line weight for 3D views in the
Define Material dialog. See Define
Material Dialog on page 712.
Select Materials dialog renamed to

Plan Materials. See Plan Materials
on page 711.
Plan Materials dialog contains new In

Use column, replacing text **In Use**.
See Plan Materials on page 711.
Kitchen and Bath product content has

been integrated into Version X1.
The Roof Designers product content has

Added two sliders to the Define

Material dialog. See Define Material
Dialog on page 712.
The CAD Designers product content has

Zoom & View Tools
The entire library has been updated with

content to include the latest styles, colors,
and objects.
Manufacturer library content is now

downloadable from the Chief Architect
web site, rather than being on disk.
Reorganized Appliances and Fixtures

Libraries.
Materials
Material Painter child buttons: Material

Painter Component Mode, Material
Painter Object Mode, Material Painter
Room Mode, Material Painter Floor
1040
Pan Window
tool accessible using
the mouse button. Typical hand icon now
displays when in use. Marquee select
does not require Shift key to be
depressed. See Panning the Display on
page 725.
Aerial View uses the Aerial View Set

layer set. See Aerial View on page 729.
Vector and Render Views
Enhanced vector views are available.

These enhanced views deliver better
quality but are slower. Select this option
on the Appearance Panel of the

Panel on page 184.
Camera icons in floor plan view now display a rotate edit handle when selected.
See Editing a Camera in Floor Plan
View on page 740.
Field of View setting also applies to Vector Views. See Field of View on page
740.
3D line weights for materials (in nonscaled Vector Views) can be specified in
the Define Material dialog. See
The 3D line weights for Surface Edge

Lines can be controlled by object and by
layer in the 3D Settings dialog. This
improves control of Surface Edge Lines
and wall detail line weights in 3D views.
Line Styles for surface Edge Lines can be
also be specified. See 3D Settings Dialog on page 757.
Door opening indicators display in Vector

Views. See Displaying Vector Views
on page 742.
Selecting Rebuild 3D
rebuilds the
entire 3D model. See Rebuild 3D on
page 747.
All Camera movement tools available for

Render views. See Moving a Camera in
3D Views on page 737.
Final View With Shadows

tool
available for render views. See Preview
vs. Final Render View on page 766.
New Mouse-Tilt Camera

button
offers convenient access to existing func-
tionality. See Tilt Camera Tools on

page 739.
New mouse move camera hot keys offer

convenient access to existing functionality. See Keyboard Camera Movements
on page 740.
Mouse Orbit Camera

on by default
for Vector views. See Orbit Camera
Tools on page 739.
Light Sources can be group selected. See

Light Sources on page 772.
Sliders added to 3D Settings dialog.

New Version 10 Compatible Mapping

checkbox in 3D Settings dialog allows
V10 users to override new object texture
mapping behavior for legacy plans. See
3D Settings Dialog on page 757.
Solid fill maps to black in Color Off

mode. See Color On/Off on page 743.
Added progress dialog during 3D view

generation.
Added Save Camera

button to 3D
menu. See Saving 3D Views on page
747.
Interface improved in the Advanced section of the Render tab of the Define
Materials dialog. See Define Material
Dialog on page 712.
Name of Render menu item changed to

Render Current Vector View
Implemented correct functionality for

checkbox Unless Opening in the
Camera Defaults dialog. See Camera
1041
New in X1
Cosmetic changes to Sun Angle

Specification dialog. See Sun Angle
Dimension lines can be edited like lines

to ease dimensioning to plot plan corners.
Improved functionality of CAD tools in
Dimensions work inside architectural

blocks.
views. See
on page 750.
Text, Callouts
and Markers
Many new text macros, including

designer and customer information. See
Text Macros on page 826.
New leader line tool. See Leader Line

on page 819.
Raytrace settings preserved between sessions. See Raytrace Options Dialog on

page 788.
Arrows now attach to almost anything.

See Text Arrows on page 819.
Arrows are deleted when the object they

are attached to is deleted.
Name of Raytrace menu item changed to
Callout editing improved. See Editing

Point to Point Move

enabled for single and group selected callouts. See
Editing Callouts on page 822.
New edit handle for callouts makes creating arrows easier. See Editing Callouts
on page 822.
Callouts use same arrows as text. See

Callouts can be copied and pasted. See

Editing Callouts on page 822.
Text centers correctly on callout in framing and wall details.
Improved precision when placing text

objects.
CAD Objects
New ellipse tool draw a true ellipse. See

Ellipses on page 861.
Raytracing
Raytracing is significantly faster.
Added ability to lock aspect ratio of raytraced image. See Raytrace Options Dialog on page 788.
Raytrace Current Render View
Dimensions
Dimensions can be selected and rotated.

See Editing Dimension Lines on page
801.
Dimension lines snap to objects. See
Editing Dimension Lines on page 801.
Point Markers added when a dimension
line becomes separated from the object it
marks or is copied.
Improved behavior for temporary dimensions. See Display Temporary Dimensions on page 800.
Dimension Defaults dialog cleaned
up. See Dimension Defaults Dialog on

page 809.
1042
More control of temporary dimensions

with openings. See Display Temporary
New continuous CAD line drawing

mode, similar to continuous wall drawing
mode. See Line Tools on page 846.
Point Markers have label move handle

and rotate edit handle. See Point Tools
on page 843.
Plan Footprints can be created directly

from floor plan view, and their display
can be controlled more easily. New Plan
Footprint Specification dialog. See
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints on page
875.
Improved North Pointers. North pointer

can be resized in Transform/
Replicate dialog. Multiple north pointers allowed in a plan. North pointers can
be copied and pasted. See North
Pointer on page 849.
Plan Footprints can now be created in a

new CAD Detail window directly from
plan view. See Plot Plans and Plan Footprints on page 875.
Show line length and angle works with

multiple selected items.
Library button added to Line Style tab for

CAD objects for accessing line styles
saved to the library. See Line Style Tab
on page 851.
X accelerator key for creating CAD

circles changed to K.
CAD object specification dialogs worded

consistently. See CAD Circle/Oval/
Ellipse Specification Dialog on page
861.
List of CAD details now appears alphabetically, not in order of creation. See
CAD Detail Management Dialog on
page 874.
Removed CAD> Special menu and menu

items.
Menu item and toolbar button CAD
Plan Footprints can now be given a fill

pattern. See Plot Plans and Plan Footprints on page 875.
CAD Polyline joints can now snap to

Allowed Angles. See Polylines on page
863.
Added Retain Aspect Ratio option for

CAD blocks. See CAD Block Specification Dialog on page 872.
Arc creation tools Free Form Arc
Start/End/On Arc
End Arc
, Center/Radius/
, Start/Tangent/End Arc
, and Arc About Center

removed from Arc tools and into Edit>
Arc Creation Modes menu. Arc creation
modes now apply to curved walls as well.
See Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation
Modes on page 855.
New ellipse CAD object. See Circle

Tools on page 860.
Splines display new edit handles when

edited. See Splines on page 868.
Detail
renamed to CAD Detail Man-
agement
. See CAD Detail Management Dialog on page 874.
Input Arc dialog allows values to be
entered in feet, not just inches. See Input

Arc on page 857.
1043
New in X1
Advanced
Design & Editing
House Wizard boxes update better when

moving. See House Wizard on page
884.
Pictures,
Images, & Movies
Plant Specification and Image

Specification dialogs now contain X
and Y coordinates for accurate placement. See Image Specification Dialog

on page 897.
Image family of functions (Create

Image
, Create Billboard Image
and Create Image Library

) moved
from Tools menu to Build menu.
Interface improved in the Image

Export Windows Metafile (WMF)

renamed to Export Windows Metafile
(EMF)
. See Metafiles on page 901.
Can now dimension to plants and images.

This option is selected on the Locate
Objects tab of the dimension defaults.
New built-in screen capture utility. See

To create a screen capture on page 900.
New Import Metafile

feature to
complement existing Export Metafile
Support for DXF/DWG ellipse import.

See Compatibility on page 908.
. Removed support for WMF file

extensions. See Metafiles on page 901.
Support for DXF/DWG spline import.

See Compatibility on page 908.
New feature Copy Region As Picture
allows you to define an area on

screen, copy it to clipboard, and paste as
EMF or BMP in emails or other applications. See Copy Region as Picture on
page 904.
Added support for 3DS file types. See

Importing 3D DWG, DXF, 3DS, and
OBJ Files on page 916.
Added support for 3DS export. See

on page 922.
New Metafile Specification dialog

displays preview and allows you to reset
original aspect ratio and determine resolution. See Metafile Specification Dialog on page 903.
Images can be copied and pasted directly

into Chief Architect.
Removed Convert WLK to AVI.
Picture File Box Specification dia-
log now displays image size in pixels.

See Picture File Box Specification Dialog on page 893.
1044
Import/Export
Create Symbol
Wizard
Added support for 3DS file types. See

Importing 3D Data on page 926.
Added ability to import 3D Solids

from.dwg files. See Importing 3D Data
on page 926.
Removed 32K surface limit on symbols.
Added cabinet symbol snap points.
Printing &
Plotting
Reference Floor can be displayed for

printing. See Display Options and Printing on page 950.
Default Line Weight Scale changed to 1 =
1/100 mm. Most default layer line
weights set at 18, with legacy plans using
initial line weights of 4. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 963.
New Show Layout option in Send to

Layout dialog switches you to the layout
file when a view is sent to layout. See
Send To Layout Dialog on page 976.
Use Layout Line Scaling is now selected

by default. See Sending Views to Layout on page 975.
Layout files can only be linked to .plan

files.
Most values in Send to Layout dialog

are maintained between sessions. See
Layout
Layer sets for layout views are stored

with the plans layer sets. See Displaying Layout Views on page 981.
Rendered and Raytraced images can now

be sent directly to layout. See Static
Views on page 979.
Edit Layout Lines now supports CAD

snaps rotate and middle line handle for
moving. See Editing Layout Lines on
page 983.
The 3D line weights for Surface Edge

Lines can be controlled by object and by
layer in the 3D Settings dialog. This
improves control of Surface Edge Lines
and wall detail line weights in 3D views.
See Vector and Render Views on page
1040.
Views can be sent to layout if a layout file

is not currently open. See Sending
Views to Layout on page 975.
Ability to restrict angles when editing a

view in layout. See Editing Layout
Lines on page 983.
Improved control of line weights in views

sent to Layout. See Sending Views to
Layout on page 975.
Schedules
Labels now have a move edit handle.
Objects in schedules retain their numbering when the plan changes. Added
renumber button. See Using the Edit
Added Label column to schedules, displaying any custom labels assigned to

objects. See Schedule Specification Dialog on page 995.
Materials Lists
Terrain Features
are included in the
materials list. See Materials Lists on
page 1003.
Library> Components menu item disabled when no object is selected. See

1045
New in X1
1046
Numerics
2D Block ............................................. 932
3D
Backdrop ........................................... 760
Box ................................................... 642
Box Specification Dialog ..................... 645
Data, Import ....................................... 926
Generation, increase speed ................ 745
Home Architect files ........................... 158
Menu .................................................. 48
Molding Polyline ................................. 542
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog .. 546
Origin ................................................ 930
Remove 3D ........................................ 748
Remove 3D views .............................. 748
Settings Dialog .................................. 757
Surface, Delete .................................. 747
Tab ................................................... 945
Terrain ...................................... 583 , 629
Tools ................................................. 735
3D Box Specification Dialog ............ 645
3D Cross Section Slider ................... 785
3D Final View ..................................... 766
3D Framing View ............................... 742
3D Molding Polyline Specification
Dialog .............................................. 546
3D Roof Designer .............................. 402
3D View
Generation, Speed up ........................ 745
Line Weights ...................................... 955
3D Views ............................................. 697
Display .............................................. 742
Display Terrain In ............................... 596
Panels ............................................... 759
Save ................................................. 747
3D Wall Designer ............................... 238
3DS Files
Export ............................................... 922
Import ............................................... 916
A
Absolute Location
Move point ........................................ 845
New line end ............................. 599 , 857
New point ......................................... 844
Accelerator Keys ................................ 24
Activate Camera ............................... 748
Active Layer Set Control ................. 218
Adding
to the Library ..................................... 674
Extension Lines ................................. 802
Floor Between Existing Floors ............ 367
Floors ............................................... 366
Gable Over a Door ............................ 314
Images to the Library ......................... 897
Layout Lines ..................................... 983
LIbrary .............................................. 674
Molding Profile .................................. 539
New Layout Lines .............................. 983
New Library ...................................... 674
New Symbol ...................................... 675
Road Objects to the Library ............... 635
Symbol ............................................. 675
to the Library ..................................... 676
Toolbar Buttons ................................... 18
Adjust
Image Properties ............................... 790
Lights ............................................... 778
Material Definition ............................. 711
Overviews ......................................... 743
View Angle ........................................ 743
Wall Angle ........................................ 198
1057
Index
Index
Adjust Lights Dialog ........................ 778

Advanced
Deck Framing .................................... 289
Layer Mapping .................................. 911
Render Tab ....................................... 720
Splines ............................................. 117
Aerial View ........................................ 729
Aerial View Layer Set ....................... 731
Alcove Roofs ..................................... 412
Align
Curved Stairs Between Floors ............ 129
Curved Walls Between Floors ............ 247
Roof Edges ....................................... 403
Stem Walls and Footings ................... 377
Text .................................................. 825
Walls ................................................ 246
Walls between floors ......................... 261
All Views Toolbars ............................. 18
Allowed
Angles ................................................ 72
Angles Dialog .................................... 155
Wall Angles ....................................... 240
Alpha Channel................................... 718
Ambient Light ................................... 772
Angle Snapping .................................. 84
Angled dormer hole
see also Framing, Hole, Roofs ........... 484
Angled Front Cabinets ..................... 564
Angles
Allowed ............................................... 72
Entered as bearings .......................... 849
Sun Angle ......................................... 850
Angular Dimensions.......... 133 , 798 , 806
Anti-aliasing ...................................... 211
Appearance Panel ............................ 184
Appliances
Built into cabinets .............................. 554
Outlets, where placed ........................ 529
Arc
Creation Modes ................................. 855
Specification Dialog ........................... 858
Tab ................................................... 859
Tools ................................................ 856
1058
with Arrow ......................................... 858

Arch Tab............................................. 357
Architectural...................................... 198
Architectural Block Specification
Dialog .............................................. 667
Architectural Blocks......................... 664
Copy ................................................. 665
Delete ............................................... 665
Displaying ......................................... 665
Edit ................................................... 666
Explode ............................................. 666
Library .............................................. 681
Move ................................................. 665
Selecting ........................................... 665
Architectural Blocks Library ........... 665
Architectural Preferences................ 198
Archive Files ..................................... 162
Manage Auto Archives ....................... 163
Arcs .................................................... 856
About center ...................................... 856
Aligning Centers ................................ 128
Change to lines ................................... 72
Chord direction .................................. 857
Creation Modes ................................. 855
Direction of bend ............................... 857
Draw using center and radius ............. 856
Length of arc ..................................... 857
Length of chord ................................. 857
Lock Center ....................................... 102
Make Arc Tangent ............................. 128
Radius .............................................. 856
Show Arc Centers .............................. 102
Start and End Points .......................... 202
Start direction .................................... 857
Tangent, make ............................ 74 , 247
Area
Living Area calculation ....................... 285
of a Polyline ...................................... 863
of Rooms .......................................... 286
Arrange
All ..................................................... 728
icons ................................................. 728
Arrow
Auto Positioning ................................ 820
Defaults ............................................ 839
B
Backclipped Cross Section.............. 735
Backdrop
3D ..................................................... 760
Add new ............................................ 897
Create ............................................... 897
Definition ........................................... 769
Backdrops .......................................... 769
Backdrops Library ............................ 682
Background Color ............................ 186

Balusters ........................................... 268
Definition .......................................... 436
Base Cabinets ................................... 552
Base Specification Dialog ............... 516
Baseline ..................................... 393 , 425
Baseline (Roofs) ....................... 402 , 425
Baseline Dimensions ....................... 799
Baseline Polylines (Roofs) .............. 391
Editing .............................................. 391
Bay Window
see also Windows
Bay Windows..................................... 328
Bay/Box Window Specification
Dialog.............................................. 359
Beam Specification Dialog .............. 498
Beams
Floor/Ceiling ..................................... 472
Roof ................................................. 471
Bearing Line .............................. 472 , 488
Behaviors Panel................................ 202
Birdsmouth ........................................ 425
Bitmap Directories ........................... 193
Blind Cabinets .................................. 565
Blocked Doors and Windows .......... 315
Blocking............................................. 473
Joist ................................................. 473
Roof ................................................. 473
Bonus Libraries ................................ 670
Borders (Layout)............................... 973
Bow
Front Cabinets .................................. 564
Window Specification ........................ 360
Windows ........................................... 329
Box
3D .................................................... 686
Tools ................................................ 865
Windows ........................................... 329
Break
Line .................................................. 130
Line, complete ................................... 131
Line, partial ....................................... 130
1059
Index
Tab ................................................... 854

Arrows
Special use ........................................ 820
Text Line With .................................... 819
Attach Cabinets ................................. 560
Attenuatation ............................. 532 , 783
Attic
Retain attic wall ................................. 261
Rooms ............................................... 284
Trusses ............................................. 503
Walls ......................................... 248 , 261
Attributes Tab .................................... 833
Auto
Archive ...................................... 162 , 192
Dormers, Edit ..................................... 407
Floating Dormer ................................. 398
Generate Sidewalks ........................... 634
Place Outlets ..................................... 285
Rebuild Floors & Ceilings ................... 416
Rebuild Roofs .................................... 386
Roof Returns ..................................... 400
Save Files ................................. 163 , 191
Stairwell ............................................ 456
Auto Dormer....................................... 399
Auto-Detailing .................................... 751
Automatic
Exterior Dimensions ........................... 799
Framing ............................................. 474
Roof Styles ........................................ 386
Roofs ................................................ 384
Roofs vs. Manual Roofs ...................... 384
Sidewalks .......................................... 634
Wall .......................................... 230 , 236

Break Line
Button ................................................. 72
Bridging ............................................. 473
Build
Additional Floors ............................... 366
Foundation ................................ 367 , 372
Framing Dialog .................................. 475
House ............................................... 885
Menu .................................................. 33
New floor .......................................... 366
Roof Dialog ....................................... 416
Terrain .............................................. 596
Build Roof Dialog ............................. 416
Built-in Fixtures
Create .............................................. 696
Delete ............................................... 696
Bumping/Pushing ............................. 124
Buttons
Edit Toolbar ........................................ 71
C
Cabinet
Defaults ............................................
Designer ...........................................
Doors and Drawers Library ................
Modules Library ........................ 554 ,
Shelf Specification Dialog ..................
Specification Dialog ...........................
Tools ................................................
580
551
682
682
577
565
552
Cabinets............................................. 551
Angled front .............................. 562 , 566
Attaching .......................................... 560
Backsplash ....................................... 567
Base Cabinet .................................... 552
Bevel ................................................ 571
Blind ................................................. 565
Built-in appliances ............................. 554
Corner .............................................. 562
Countertop ........................................ 567
Countertop, custom ........................... 553
Defaults ............................................ 552
Delete face items .............................. 571
1060
Diagonal door .................................... 571

Dimension to corners/sides ................ 814
Displaying ......................................... 555
Door, glass ........................................ 571
Door, on back .................................... 571
Door/drawer style .............................. 559
Edit Handles ...................................... 557
End cabinets ..................................... 562
Flat sides .......................................... 571
Front Tab .......................................... 569
Full height ......................................... 552
Glass doors ....................................... 571
Island ................................................ 561
Labels ............................................... 555
Lazy Susan ....................................... 571
Locating with dimensions ................... 812
Minimum Width .......................... 552 , 580
Module Lines ..................................... 555
Moving, with Wall .............................. 562
Normal ...................................... 562 , 566
Opening Indicators ............................ 555
Outlet placement ............................... 529
Partition ............................................ 553
Peninsula radius ........................ 562 , 566
Pilasters ............................................ 574
Radius end ................................ 562 , 566
Resize Increment ............................... 580
Reverse Appliance ............................. 571
Separation ........................................ 571
Shaped ............................................. 562
Shelves ............................................. 577
Special shapes .......................... 562 , 566
Stile .................................................. 571
Toe kick ............................................ 568
Width Increment ................................ 552
CAD..................................................... 176
Align edges ......................................... 74
Angle Snapping ................................... 84
Angles in degrees/ bearings ............... 879
Block .................................................. 74
Box ................................................... 866
Box, Framing ..................................... 866
Break Line button ................................ 72
Circle ................................................ 860
Circle about center ............................ 861
Convert to Terrain .............................. 628
Cross box .......................................... 866
CAD Block
Insert ................................................. 871
Management ...................................... 871
CAD Block Specification Dialog ...... 872
CAD Blocks ........................................ 870
Add to library ..................................... 870
Custom libraries ................................. 870
Library ............................................... 683
CAD Box Specification Dialog ......... 867
CAD Circle Specification Dialog ..... 861
CAD Detail from View....................... 875

CAD Details ....................................... 874
Management Dialog ........................... 874
Sent to Layout ................................... 978
Truss Detail .............................. 505 , 875
CAD Menu ............................................ 55
CAD Objects
Converting ........................................ 149
Displaying ......................................... 869
CAD Oval Specification Dialog ....... 861
Calculate
All Floors ............................................ 72
Area, using polyline ......................... 1006
From All Floors ................................ 1005
From Area ....................................... 1006
From Room ..................................... 1006
Materials on soffits ............................ 652
Callout Specification Dialog ........... 834
Callout Tab ........................................ 835
Callouts.............................................. 821
Height ............................................... 615
Pointers and Arrows .......................... 821
Shape ............................................... 835
Size .................................................. 835
Camera
Activating .......................................... 748
Change Settings ................................ 753
Clip Surfaces within ................... 753 757
Create Views .................................... 736
Defaults .................................... 176 , 755
Degrees each rotate .................. 754 , 757
Height above floor ..................... 754 , 757
Move Tools ....................................... 739
Orbit Tools ........................................ 739
Remove Wall within ................... 753 , 756
Restrict to room ................................. 758
Save Cross Section/Elevation ............ 752
Tilt Tools ........................................... 739
Tools ................................................ 739
Camera Specification Dialog........... 753
Cascade ............................................. 726
Views ............................................... 726
Windows ........................................... 726
Casing
1061
Index
Current Layer ..................................... 869

Current Point ..................................... 845
Delete Points ..................................... 845
Detail from View ................................. 751
Dimensions, locate settings ................ 814
Drawing Tools .................................... 842
Ellipses ............................................. 861
Explode CAD Block ............................ 870
Extend Object(s) ................................ 143
Fillet ............................................ 73 , 131
Framing ............................................. 866
Joist Direction Line ............................. 489
Layout ............................................... 974
Line Length Format ............................ 879
Line to Arc button ................................ 72
Lines ................................................. 846
Make CAD Block ................................ 870
Make Parallel/Perp. ............................. 74
Menu .................................................. 55
Move to Front of Group ...................... 122
Ovals ................................................. 861
Panel ................................................. 199
Point, current ..................... 599 , 844 , 857
Point, move along line ........................ 846
Points, moving ................................... 845
Polyline ............................................. 402
Polyline, rectangular (tool) .................. 865
Polylines ............................................ 863
Resize ............................ 80 , 89 90 , 203
Rotate around .................................... 203
Rotate items ...................................... 203
Rotate Jump ...................................... 203
Snap Properties ................................. 204
Tangent button .................................... 74
Temporary Points ............................... 845
to Walls ..................................... 149 , 249
Trim Object(s) .................................... 143
Ignore for opening resize ................... 181

Suppress .......................................... 320
Tab ................................................... 351
Cathedral Ceilings ............................ 293

Ceiling
Framing .................................... 470 , 475
Height ............................................... 281
Materials ........................................... 281
Plane ........................................ 385 , 409
Plane Specification Dialog ................. 428
Truss ................................................ 502
Ceiling Plane Specification
Dialog.............................................. 428
Ceilings .............................................. 340
Automatic ......................................... 475
Basement ......................................... 373
Cathedral .......................................... 293
Coffered ........................................... 294
Dropped ............................................ 292
False ................................................ 292
Lowered ............................................ 292
Over this room .................................. 299
Special ............................................. 292
Tray .................................................. 294
Center
Doors ............................................... 311
Object button .................................... 127
Sheet ................................................ 951
Change
Door Swings ..................................... 312
Floor/Reference Dialog ...................... 368
Layout Line Length ............................ 983
Line to arc ......................................... 439
Line/Arc button .................................. 245
Materials in 3D Views ........................ 743
Roof Pitch or Height Dialog ................ 404
Scale Dialog ..................................... 980
View Panel Factors ........................... 745
Wall Types for Pony Walls ................. 233
Check
Plots ......................................... 948 , 953
Spelling Dialog .................................. 829
Checklist, IRC ................................... 886
Chief Architect
Serial number ..................................... 69
Version number ................................... 69
1062
ChiefTalk ............................................ 963

Child Buttons ...................................... 19
Chimneys ........................................... 660
Chord Direction, arc ......................... 857
Circles ................................................ 860
Aligning Centers ................................ 128
Circle about center ............................ 861
Create ............................................... 860
Draw using center and radius ............. 861
Edit ................................................... 860
Ovals ................................................ 861
Clear the Terrain ............................... 596
Click Stairs ........................................ 436
Client Information ............................. 167
Client Information Dialog................. 840
Close
Plans and Views ................................ 172
Program ............................................ 174
Views ................................................ 731
Color
Chooser ............................................ 722
Displaying images & pictures ............. 186
Off/On ............................................... 743
Color Chooser
Dialog ............................................... 722
eyedropper ........................................ 722
Color Palette........................................ 24
Colors ................................................. 186
Columns ............................................. 686
Materials List settings ........................ 206
Tab, Materials List Display Options ... 1013
Tabs ................................................. 833
Components .............................. 666 , 678
and Master List Columns .................. 1009
Dialog ............................................. 1014
Compound Raked Walls ................... 259
Concentric Resizing ........................... 88
Cone ........................................... 642 , 686
Cone Specification Dialog ............... 648
Configurations Tab ............................. 21
Connect
Electrical ........................................... 525
Walls ................................................ 240
Cross Section/Elevation Views ...........

Doors ...............................................
Layers ..............................................
Layout Borders ..................................
Materials for Raytracing .....................
Muntins ..................................... 338 ,
New CAD Detail Dialog ......................
New Electrical Symbol .......................
New Fixture ......................................
New floor ..........................................
New layout ........................................
New plan ..........................................
Objects in 3D Views ..........................
Plan Database File ............................
Plan Materials Library ........................
Plant Image ......................................
Polyline Solids ..................................
Raked Walls ......................................
Raytrace View ...................................
Render Views from Perspective Views
Rooms Below Staircases ...................
Stairwell ............................................
Symbol Wizard ..................................
Template Plan ...................................
Windows ...........................................
Wiring Schematics .............................
749
308
217
973
791
404
874
935
935
366
159
159
746
169
704
602
649
258
787
765
457
456
927
168
331
525
Create Symbol Wizard...................... 927
Cross Hair.................................. 192 , 201
Cross Section Lines ......................... 835
Cross Section Slider ........................ 785
Cross Section/Elevation Camera
Specification Dialog...................... 755
Cross Section/Elevations ................ 735
Create .............................................. 749
Edit Truss Shape in ........................... 505
Save ................................................. 752
Sent to Layout ................................... 978
Cubes ................................................. 686
Culs-de-sac ............................... 632 , 634
Curbs.................................................. 636
Current
CAD Layer ........................................ 869
Floor ................................................. 368
Floor, Delete ..................................... 367
Page ................................................. 972
1063
Index
Contextual Menu ............................... 767

Contextual Menus ....................... 71 , 184
Contours Tab ..................................... 612
Convert
Arc/Circle to Polyline .......................... 132
CAD Lines to Terrain Data .................. 628
CAD Objects ...................................... 149
Polyline ..................................... 149 , 628
Polyline Dialog ................................... 150
Polyline Solid to Solid ......................... 649
Polyline to Spline ............................... 152
Room Molding .................................... 542
Special Polylines into Polylines ........... 151
Spline to Polyline ............................... 152
Textures to Materials .......................... 704
to Polyline Road/Sidewalk .................. 634
to Solid .............................................. 151
Coordinates......................................... 91
Copy
Architectural Blocks ........................... 665
Electrical Objects ............................... 527
Floors ................................................ 368
Folders and Library Objects ................ 677
Layers ............................................... 217
Library List ........................................ 677
Library Objects .................................. 698
Region as Picture ............................... 904
Terrain .............................................. 597
Trusses ............................................. 505
Views ................................................ 979
Copy/Paste
Main Edit Mode .................................. 138
Sticky Mode ....................................... 138
Corner
Boards .............................................. 536
Windows ............................................ 330
Countertops, Edit Custom ............... 559
Create
Backdrops ......................................... 761
Bay, Box and Bow Windows Manually . 330
Bench Seat ........................................ 340
CAD Block ......................................... 933
CAD Blocks library ............................. 870
CAD Details ....................................... 874
Camera Views ................................... 736
Current Point..................................... 845

Curved
Deck Edge ........................................ 231
Deck Railing ..................................... 231
Roofs ................................................ 426
Stairs ................................................ 436
Walls ................................................ 240
Walls, Draw ...................................... 238
Custom
Counter Tops .................................... 553
Counter Tops, Editing ........................ 559
Counterholes .................................... 554
Custom Countertop Specification
Dialog.............................................. 579
Customize
Sheet Sizes Dialog ............................ 958
Toolbars ......................................... 7 , 18
Cylinder ..................................... 642 , 686
Cylinder Specification Dialog ......... 647
D
Dash, Add to dimensions ................ 810
Deck
Designer ........................................... 237
Edges ............................................... 231
Railing ...................................... 231 , 288
Railing Defaults ................................. 229
Decks ......................................... 231 , 288
Framing .................................... 289 , 301
Planking ................................... 289 , 301
Default
Origin Locations ................................ 930
Settings ............................................ 176
Wall Bottom Height ............................ 262
Wall Top Height ................................ 262
Default Lights ................................... 773
Defaults.............................................. 629
Arrow ................................................ 839
Cabinet ..................................... 552 , 580
Callout .............................................. 178
Camera ..................................... 176 , 755
DeckRailing ...................................... 229
Dimension .......................... 176 , 796 , 809
1064
Door ......................................... 177 , 305

Dormer ...................................... 177 , 432
Driveway ........................................... 178
Dynamic ............................................ 179
Electrical ........................................... 534
Fencing ............................. 179 , 229 , 274
Floor ................................................. 364
Foundation ........................................ 372
Framing .................................... 469 , 475
Layer Set .......................................... 225
Layout ............................................... 990
Marker .............................................. 178
Material ............................................. 721
Plan .................................................. 180
Railing ...................................... 229 , 274
Reset ........................................ 179 , 182
Road and Sidewalk ............................ 629
Roof .................................................. 385
Room ................................................ 280
Room Material ................................... 280
Schedule ........................................... 992
Sidewalk ........................................... 629
Text .......................................... 178 , 838
Wall .......................................... 228 , 274
Window ..................................... 179 , 328
Define
Light Types ....................................... 777
Line Weight ....................................... 954
Material Dialog .................................. 712
Delete ................................................. 677

3D Surface ........................................ 747
Built-in Fixtures and Appliances ......... 698
CAD points ........................................ 845
Current Floor ..................................... 367
Extension Lines ................................. 804
Floors ............................................... 367
Foundation ................................ 377 378
Framing ............................................ 496
Gable Over Opening .......................... 415
Keyboard .......................................... 845
Layers ............................................... 217
Layout Views ..................................... 979
Objects ............................................. 141
Roof Planes .............................. 386 , 405
Shadows ........................................... 777
Temporary Points .............................. 845
Designer Information ........................ 166

Designer Information Dialog............ 839
Details
CAD .................................................. 874
Cross Section/Elevations .................... 750
Truss ................................................. 505
Diamond style
see Lites
Dimension
Tab ................................................... 807
Tools ................................................. 797
Dimension Defaults ................... 176 , 796
CAD detail views ........................ 797 , 878
Cross section/elevation views ..... 797 , 878
Dialog ................................................ 809
Floor plan view .......................... 797 , 878
Dimension Line Specification
Dialog .............................................. 807
Dimension Lines
Display .............................................. 800
Edit ................................................... 801
Edit Handles ...................................... 801
Dimensions ........................................ 908
Angular .............................. 133 , 798 , 806
Automatic Reach ................................ 811
Automatic/Manual Toggle ................... 808
Cabinets ............................................ 812
To cabinets ................................ 813 814
To CAD ..................................... 813 814
Customize individual .......................... 808
Delete extension line .......................... 804
Distance between .............................. 811
Edit ................................................... 801
To electrical items ...................... 813 814
End to end ......................................... 797
Extension Lines ................................. 802
Exterior ............................................. 799
Fireplace, suppress dimension ............ 658
Font .................................................. 816
Imperial ............................................. 810
Inches only ........................................ 812
Interior .............................................. 798
Interior, minimum area ....................... 812
Items located .................................... 814

Line separation ................................. 812
Locate electrical ................................ 527
Locate Objects .................................. 812
Locate opening automatically ............. 812
Locate overall ................................... 812
Locating railings ................................ 261
Main Wall Layer ................................ 813
Manual Reach ................................... 812
Metric ............................................... 810
Minimum Interior Area ....................... 812
Minimum Number Size ............... 811 812
Move Extension Lines ........................ 803
Move Objects Using .......................... 804
Move Speed ...................................... 811
Moving Labels ................................... 801
Number height .......................... 811 812
Number Size, individual dimension ..... 808
Offset between lines .......................... 812
To openings ...................................... 813
Overall .............................................. 812
Point to point ..................................... 798
Print Size .......................................... 811
Printing ............................................. 957
Reach, Automatic .............................. 811
Reach, Manual .................................. 812
Screen size, minimum ............... 811 812
Separation ........................................ 812
Temporary ........................................ 800
To electrical items ............................. 814
Units ................................................. 809
Wall openings ................................... 812
Wall surfaces .................................... 812
To walls (surface, center, main layer) . 813
Directories ......................................... 192

Display
3D Views .......................................... 742
Arc Centers and Ends ................ 240 , 879
Cabinets ........................................... 555
CAD Objects ..................................... 869
Center of curved wall ......................... 240
Dimension Lines ................................ 800
Doors ............................................... 308
Drawing Groups ................................ 122
Drawing Sheet .................................. 951
Electrical ........................................... 527
1065
Index
Terrain Data ...................................... 597

Tools from Toolbars ............................ 19
Wall Hatching .................................... 236
Foundations ...................................... 376

Images ............................................. 896
Layout Views .................................... 981
Library Objects .................................. 697
Line Angles ....................................... 200
Line Length ....................................... 200
Master List ...................................... 1008
Molding Polylines .............................. 543
Objects ............................................. 221
Options, Layout ................................. 982
Pointer CAD Coordinates ................... 185
Pony Walls in Floor Plan View ............ 242
Road Objects .................................... 633
Roof Planes ...................................... 401
Room labels ...................................... 286
Stairs ................................................ 440
Temporary Dimensions ...................... 800
Terrain In 3D Views ........................... 596
Terrain in Floor Plan View .................. 596
Text .................................................. 823
Walls, Railings, and Fences ............... 241
Windows ........................................... 335
Divided Lites see Lites

Doll House View................................ 734
Door
Defaults .................................... 177 , 305
Tools ................................................ 306
Door Specification Dialog ............... 315
Doors
6-panel see Doors, Library
Arched .............................................. 322
Bifold Doors .............................. 307 , 313
Blocked ............................................ 315
Casing .............................................. 319
Casing, suppress .............................. 320
Center .............................................. 311
Change Opening/Hinge Side .............. 312
Change Swing Side ........................... 313
Creating custom doors ....................... 308
Curved doors .................................... 318
Displaying ......................................... 308
Doorways .......................................... 307
Doorways Library .............................. 684
Double-swing .................................... 317
Edit buttons ............................... 244 , 310
Exterior walls .................................... 306
1066
Frame ............................................... 319

Framing ............................................ 479
Gables Over ...................................... 415
Garage .............................................. 307
Garage, panels .................................. 316
Handles ............................................ 323
Hardware .......................................... 323
Hinged Doors ............................ 307 , 312
Hinges .............................................. 323
In curved walls .................................. 318
Interior walls ...................................... 306
Labels ............................................... 308
Library 295 296 , 307 308 , 316 , 668 , 683
Lintels ............................................... 319
Lites ................................................. 320
Locks ................................................ 323
Muntin Width ..................................... 321
Openings in railings ........................... 314
Plinth Blocks ..................................... 317
Pocket Doors ............................. 307 , 313
Railing openings ................................ 234
Recessed .......................................... 317
Resizing ............................................ 309
Sliding Doors ..................................... 313
Special casings ................................. 318
Style ......................... 295 296 , 316 , 668
Swing, change ................................... 312
Swing, changing for bifold .................. 313
Swing, changing for pocket ................ 313
Threshold lines .................................. 308
Transoms .......................................... 314
Type ......................... 295 296 , 316 , 668
Wrapped Openings ............................ 314
Doorways
Adding a door .................................... 308
Openings (ISD) .......................... 943 944
Dormer Defaults ........................ 177 , 432

Dormer Specification Dialog ........... 429
Dormers ..................................... 398 , 410
Angled hole for framing ...................... 484
Auto Dormer ...................................... 399
Explode ............................................. 408
Manually drawn ................................. 398
Over Windows and Doors, Gable ........ 415
Windows in ........................................ 408
Double
Draw
Arc About Center ............................... 856
Circle About Center ............................ 861
Curved Railing ................................... 238
Curved wall ........................................ 238
Framing Members .............................. 493
Lines ................................................. 846
Roof Planes ....................................... 393
Walls ................................................. 238
Drawing Groups................................. 122

Drawing Sheet
Center ............................................... 951
Select ................................................ 951
Show ................................................. 951
Driveway Defaults ............................. 178
Driveway Specification Dialog......... 637
Driveways ................................... 631 , 634
Drop Hip ............................................. 514
Drop Hip Truss see Trusses
DXF/DWG
2D View ............................................. 919
Advanced Layer Mapping ................... 912
DXF Code .......................................... 922
DXF vs. DWG .................................... 908
Elevation Data, Import ........................ 627
Export 3D .......................................... 921
Files .................................................. 623
Files, Export 2D ................................. 917
Files, Import 2D ................................. 909
Import ................................................ 916
Layer mapping ................................... 911
Layers, exporting ............................... 921
Line Type .......................................... 920
Dynamic
Defaults ........................................ 9 , 179
Print Preview ............................. 950 951
Views ................................................ 977
E
Earth Data Tab .................................. 779
Eaves
Boxed ....................................... 420 , 426
Fascia .............................................. 483
Fascia Width ..................................... 421
Framing ............................................ 483
Plumb Cut ......................................... 421
Square cut ........................................ 421
Edge Lines......................................... 930
Edge Lines, Automatic..................... 930
Edit
Auto Dormers .................................... 407
Bay Box, and Bow Windows ............... 339
Behaviors ........................................... 86
Behaviors, Default ............................... 86
Cabinet Door Style ............................ 559
Cabinets ........................................... 556
Camera in floor plan view .................. 740
Components Dialog ......................... 1014
Curved Roof Planes .......................... 405
Custom Countertops .......................... 559
Dimension Lines ................................ 801
Elevation Data ................................... 597
Extension Lines ......................... 802 803
Handle Size ...................................... 202
Handle Tolerance .............................. 202
in 3D View ........................................ 746
in a 3D or Render View ...................... 746
Layout Lines ..................................... 983
Layout Lines Dialog ........................... 984
Libraries ........................................... 677
Master List ...................................... 1009
Materials ........................................... 711
Materials in Render Views ................. 768
Materials Lists ................................. 1011
Menu .................................................. 29
Objects in Render Views .................... 770
Panel ................................................ 201
Paper Size Dialog ............................. 959
Pier and Grade Beam Foundations ..... 380
Piers and Pads .................................. 380
Polyline Parts ...................................... 93
Primitives .......................................... 643
1067
Index
Buffer Drawing ................................... 186

Buffered Printing ................................ 967
Truss see Trusses
Walls ................................................. 248
Road Objects .................................... 634

Roof Baseline Polylines ..................... 391
Roof Planes ...................................... 402
Room Labels ..................................... 287
Rooms .............................................. 290
Terrain Features ................................ 597
Terrain Perimeter .............................. 597
Text .................................................. 824
Toolbar ................................................. 7
Toolbar Buttons ................................... 71
Truss Shape in Cross Section View .... 505
Trusses ............................................ 504
Walls ................................................ 242
Edit Area
(All Floors) ........................................
(All Floors) Visible .............................
Polyline as marquee ..........................
Tools ................................................
Visible ..............................................
154
154
154
153
153
Edit Layout Lines Dialog ................. 984
Edit Type
Resize ................................................ 90
Edit Types
Concentric .......................................... 88
Fillet ................................................... 89
Move Corners ..................................... 87
Resize .................................... 80 , 87 , 89
Editing.......................................... 98 , 380
Electrical............................................ 177
Buttons ............................................. 524
Connections ...................................... 525
Defaults ............................................ 534
Deleting ............................................ 529
Dimension to ..................................... 814
Displaying ......................................... 527
General ............................................ 523
Labels .............................................. 527
Layer to Material Mapping .................. 935
Library ...................................... 526 , 684
Light ................................................. 524
Lights ............................................... 524
Locate, dimensions ........................... 527
Mode ................................................ 524
Moving Objects ................................. 527
Naming items .................................... 530
Options ............................................. 524
1068
Outlets .............................................. 524

Outlets, automatic ............................. 526
Service Specification Dialog ............... 529
Switches ........................................... 525
Tools ................................................ 524
Wiring ............................................... 525
Electrical Service Specification

Dialog .............................................. 529
Elevation
Regions ............................................ 587
Splines .............................................. 587
Tab ................................................... 616
Tools, Terrrain ................................... 585
Elevation Data ................................... 585
Edit ................................................... 597
Import DXF/DWG ............................... 627
Elevation Line Specification
Dialog .............................................. 616
Elevation Lines and Splines ............ 597
Elevation Point Specification
Dialog .............................................. 613
Elevation Points ........................ 585 , 597
Elevations
Create ............................................... 749
Interior .............................................. 735
Ellipses .............................................. 861
End Cabinets ..................................... 563
End Truss see Trusses
End-to-End Dimensions ................... 797
Energy Heel ....................................... 520
Enhanced Metafiles .......................... 901
Enter
Coordinates ....................................... 849
Coordinates Dialog .............................. 91
Dimensions ......................................... 11
Error Messages ............................... 1020
Estimating Software ....................... 1016
Exit Program...................................... 174
Expand Room Polyline ..................... 295
Expand/Collapse All ......................... 678
Explode
Architectural Block Button .................... 73
Export ................................................. 908

2D DXF/DWG Files ............................ 917
3D DXF, Color or Material Indicator ..... 922
3D DXF/DWG Model .......................... 921
3D Files ............................................. 922
All Floors ........................................... 917
Current View ...................................... 917
Drawing File Dialog ............................ 918
EMF .................................................. 901
an Entire Plan .................................... 173
Layers Sets ....................................... 224
Layout Files ....................................... 989
Materials ......................................... 1015
Materials List ......................... 1015 1016
Picture Files ...................................... 892
Render View ...................................... 770
to POV-Ray ....................................... 794
VRML Files ........................................ 905
Wall Definitions .................................. 255
Windows Metafiles ............................. 901
Windows Metafiles Dialog ................... 901
WMF ................................................. 901
Export Drawing File Dialog .............. 918
Export Windows Metafiles Dialog ... 901
Extend
Object(s) ........................................... 143
Slope Downward ................................ 387
Extension
Lines, Editing ..................................... 802
Tab ................................................... 808
Extensions Tab .................................. 815
Exterior
Dimensions ........................................ 799
Fixtures Library .................................. 684
Furnishings Library ............................ 685
Room types ....................................... 284
The Exterior Room ............................. 284
Walls ......................................... 229 , 232
External only ...................................... 813
F
F6 Key
Fill Window ....................................... 724
Fascia
Top ................................................... 425
Faster Rendering .............................. 771
Fence Designer ................................. 231
Fence Select ........................................ 94
Fencing ...................................... 231 , 237
Fencing Defaults....................... 179 , 229
Field of View....................... 740 , 757 , 906
File
Menu .................................................. 25
Menu, Recent File List ....................... 191
Organization ..................................... 160
Fill
Polyline ............................................. 869
Style Tab .......................................... 864
Window ............................................. 724
Window Building Only ........................ 724
Fillers ................................................. 564
Fillet ..................................................... 89
Button ................................................. 73
Two Lines ......................................... 131
Fillet/Chamfer Dialog ....................... 131
Filter Data .......................................... 625
Final View ........................... 211 , 765 766
Find Plan Wizard............................... 169
Fire Box Tab ...................................... 659
Fireplace .............................................. 72
Dimensions, suppress ....................... 658
Direction facing ................................. 656
Hearth height .................................... 658
Interior wall ....................................... 656
Library .............................................. 659
Masonry .................................... 656 , 960
No Fire Box ....................................... 659
Prefabricated .................................... 659
Symbol ............................................. 659
Fireplace Specification Dialog........ 657
Fireplaces .......................................... 656
Chimneys .......................................... 660
1069
Index
CAD Block ......................................... 870

CAD Block Button ............................... 73
Dormers ............................................ 408
Mulled Unit Button ............................... 73
Foundations ......................................
Freestanding .....................................
In walls .............................................
Types ...............................................
657
657
656
656
Fix
Connections ...................................... 240
Roofs ................................................ 386
Fixture/Furniture Resize .................. 181

Fixtures
Built-in, create ................................... 696
Built-in, delete ................................... 696
Counter top ....................................... 935
Layer to Material Mapping .................. 935
Library .............................................. 696
Lights ............................................... 524
Stand alone ...................................... 935
Wall .................................................. 935
Fixtures Library
Exterior ............................................. 684
Interior .............................................. 685
Flared Stairs ...................................... 448
Flat Region ........................................ 589
Flat Region Specification Dialog .... 616
Flip layers see Walls
Floating Auto Dormer ...................... 398
Floor ........................................... 177 , 364
Above Height .................................... 298
and Ceiling Heights ........................... 281
and Ceiling Trusses ........................... 502
Camera ............................................. 734
Defaults ............................................ 364
Export all ........................... 250 251 , 918
Export current .................... 250 251 , 918
Framing .................................... 470 , 475
Height ............................................... 281
Height in rooms ................................. 297
Insert ................................................ 367
Materials ........................................... 281
New Floor Dialog ............................... 376
Overview .................................. 734 , 742
Tools ................................................ 365
Floor Plan
Drawing .............................................. 10
View ........................................... 12 , 944
View Template .................................. 961
1070
Floor/Ceiling
Beam ................................................ 472
Truss ................................................ 472
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification
Dialog .............................................. 521
Floors
Adding .............................................. 366
Change Floor/Reference .................... 368
Copying ............................................ 368
Current Floor ............................. 365 , 368
Deleting ............................................ 367
Exchange With Floor Above ............... 367
Exchange With Floor Below ................ 367
Floor Up/ Floor Down ......................... 368
FloorTabs .......................................... 475
Insert New Floor ................................ 367
Multiple ............................................. 365
Reference Floor ......................... 365 , 368
Swap Floor/Reference ....................... 369
Folders Panel .................................... 192
Follow Terrain ........... 611 , 621 , 653 , 700
Font
Materials List ..................................... 187
Preferences ....................................... 187
Fonts .................................................. 818
Blueprint ........................................... 818
Dimensions ....................................... 816
Footings ............................................. 373
Alignment .......................................... 377
Centered on main layer ...................... 265
Centered on wall ............................... 265
Height ............................................... 265
Stem wall .......................................... 377
Stepped ............................................ 258
Width ................................................ 265
Footprint, Plan .................................. 876
Foundation......................................... 177
Defaults ............................................ 372
Tab ........................................... 264 , 373
Thickness .......................................... 265
Walls ........................................ 230 , 232
Foundations
Alignment .......................................... 377
and Room Specification ..................... 381
Build ................................................. 372
Frame and Trim Tab .......................... 319

Framing ...................................... 177 , 866
Automatic .......................................... 474
Beams ............................................... 482
Bearing Line ...................................... 488
Build Framing Dialog .......................... 475
Butt Joints ......................................... 475
CAD Box Tool .................................... 866
Ceiling ....................................... 470 , 475
Creating ............................................ 866
Cross Box .......................................... 866
Deck ................................................. 289
Decks ................................................ 301
Defaults ............................................. 469
Defaults Dialog .................................. 475
Deleting ............................................. 496
Details, Walls ..................................... 478
Displaying .......................................... 493
Doors ................................................ 479
Dormer .............................................. 484
Editing ....................................... 494 , 866
End studs, rotate ................................ 479
Floor ......................................... 470 ,

Furring ..............................................
Headers ............................................
Joining Platforms ...............................
Joist Direction ...................................
Keeping current .................................
Lap Joints .........................................
Layer ................................................
Lookouts ...........................................
Manual vs. Automatic ........................
Materials List ....................................
Mixing Trusses with Stick ...................
Overview ..........................................
Plates, mitred ....................................
Platforms ..........................................
Posts ................................................
Reference Marker ...................... 472 ,
Represented by single line ......... 493 ,
Retain Wall Framing ..........................
Rim Joist ...........................................
Roof ......................................... 470 ,
Tools ................................................
Trimmers ..........................................
Truss Spacing ...................................
Trusses ............................................
Trusses and rafters mix .....................
Wall Detail ........................................
Wall Openings ...................................
Walls ................................. 470 , 478 ,
Walls and materials list ......................
Walls frame thru ................................
Walls, build .......................................
Window Sills .....................................
Windows ...........................................
475
249
481
490
489
496
475
254
483
470
496
507
742
479
475
482
486
879
496
475
483
497
471
480
486
485
474
492
479
492
493
479
478
481
479
Framing Specification Dialog ......... 497
Frieze
Molding ............................................. 543
Tab ................................................... 422
From Line End, Move point ............. 846
Full
Gable Wall ................................ 263 , 387
Height Cabinets ................................ 552
Overview .................................. 734 , 741
Furnishings Library
Exterior ............................................. 685
Interior .............................................. 686
1071
Index
Center footings (2 methods) ............... 265

Delete ............................................... 377
Display .............................................. 376
Footing size ....................................... 265
Footings ............................................ 373
Garage .............................................. 379
Monolithic Slab .................................. 374
Pier and Grade Beam ......................... 380
Piers ................................................. 374
Piers specification .............................. 376
Piers, add manually ............................ 380
Piers, edit .......................................... 380
Room supplies floor ........................... 299
Set up ............................................... 372
Slab at top of stem wall ...................... 374
Slab thickness ................................... 373
Slab, monolithic ................................. 379
Slab, normal ...................................... 379
Slabs, create two ways ....................... 379
Stem Wall .......................................... 373
Step markers ..................................... 374
Turn wall into ..................................... 260
Types ................................................ 373
Use Mesh .......................................... 376
Walls ................................................. 265
Furniture .............................................. 72
Stand alone ...................................... 686
Table item ......................................... 686
Wall item ........................................... 686
Furring ............................................... 249
Group Select........................................ 92
Gutters ............................................... 421
Remove ............................................ 418
H
G
Gable
Dormer Over Windows and Doors ......
Over Door/Window ............................
Roof Line .................................. 385 ,
Roofs ................................................
415
314
410
390
Gable/Roof Line ................................ 385
Garage
Door panels ...................................... 316
Doors ............................................... 307
Garages
Foundation ........................................ 379
Garden Bed
Kidney Shaped .................................. 592
Polyline ............................................. 592
Round ............................................... 592
Tools ................................................ 592
General
Cabinet Defaults ................................ 580
Preferences ...................................... 190
Generate the Terrain ........................ 596
Geometric Shapes Library............... 686
Getting Help ........................................ 15
GFCI Outlets ...................................... 524
Girder Trusses .................................. 515
Glass House ...................................... 767
View settings ..................................... 767
Glass House Options Dialog ........... 767
Glass, Stained ................................... 331
Graphics Directories ........................ 193
Grid Snapping ..................................... 85
Grids
Materials list reports .......................... 207
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt
see GFCI Outlets
1072
Half walls see Railings, solid

Hand Rail Tab .................................... 272
Handles
Straight Stairs ................................... 441
Handrail Tab ...................................... 466
Hardiness Zone Maps ....................... 595
Hardware ............................................ 764
Library .............................................. 687
Lock Issues ..................................... 1019
Hardware Tab
for Cabinets ...................................... 573
for Doors ........................................... 323
Hatch
Fill patterns ....................................... 865
Patterns ............................................ 869
Polyline ............................................. 869
Wall .......................................... 230 , 236
Headers .............................................. 481
Hearth
Depth ................................................ 658
Height ............................................... 658
Height
Basement ceiling ............................... 373
Ceiling .............................................. 297
Floor ................................................. 297
Railings ............................................. 270
Help
Display .................................................. 6
Menu .................................................. 68
Tips .................................................... 15
Help Database ................................... 963
High Shed/Gable ............................... 390
Hill ...................................................... 589
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog .... 617
Hip
Roof .................................................. 390
see also Trusses

Holes
In slab ............................................... 379
In slab with footing ............................. 379
In terrain ............................................ 591
Hot Keys .............................................. 24
House Wizard ............................. 240 , 884
Edit rooms ......................................... 884
Multiple Floors ................................... 885
Hyperlink ............................................ 834
I
Icons
Arrange ............................................. 728
Image Adustment Dialog .................. 790
Image Specification Dialog .............. 897
Images ................................................ 769
Add new ............................................ 897
Create ............................................... 897
Definition ................................... 687 , 769
Displaying .......................................... 896
Displaying in color .............................. 186
In Layout ........................................... 896
Library ............................................... 687
Place ................................................. 896
Print .................................................. 770
Printing .............................................. 967
Resizing ............................................ 896
Select from library ...................... 603 , 898
Transparency Color ............................ 899
Images and Backdrops ..................... 769
Imperial
Measurements ................................... 810
Plans ................................................. 957
see Units
Import ................................................. 916
2D DXF/DWG Files ............................ 909
3D Data ............................................. 926
3D FilesI ............................................ 916
Drawing Wizard ................................. 909
DXF/DWG Elevation Data ................... 627
Layer Sets ......................................... 224
Line Styles ........................................

Picture Files ......................................
Terrain Data ......................................
Terrain Wizard ..................................
Wall Definitions .................................
688
890
623
623
256
Inches Only see Dimensions

Information
Client ................................................ 167
Designer ........................................... 166
Project .............................................. 166
Input
Arc ................................................... 857
Line .................................................. 847
Point ................................................. 844
Insert
Floor ................................................. 367
Floor Dialog ...................................... 367
Image ................................................. 72
Insulation........................................... 867
Auto-Detailing ................................... 751
Show in Elevation .............................. 751
Interior
Dimensions ....................................... 798
Fireplace, wall ................................... 656
Fixtures Library ................................. 685
Furnishings Library ............................ 686
Room types ....................................... 284
Intersection ....................................... 147
Invisible Walls.................... 230 , 234 , 261
IRC Checklist .................................... 886
Isometric View .......................... 734 , 743
iwalllay.dat and mwalllay.dat .......... 254
J
Join Roof Planes .............................. 403
Joist
Direction ........................................... 472
Direction Line ............................ 474 , 489
Joist Direction Specification
Dialog.............................................. 489
Joists ......................................... 471 , 474
Automatically create .......................... 474
1073
Index
Truss ................................................. 511
Bearing Line .....................................

Blocking ............................................
Depth ...............................................
Draw new, manually ..........................
Framing Reference ............................
Orientation ........................................
488
473
477
471
476
474
see also Framing
K
Keyboard
Camera Movements .......................... 740
Commands ................................... 7 , 679
Shortcuts ............................................ 24
Kidney Shaped
Garden Bed ......................................
Terrain Feature .................................
Kingpost ............................................
Kitchen Island ...................................
Knee Wall...........................................
592
590
519
561
387
L
Label Tab ...........................................
Labels
Cabinet .............................................
Door .................................................
Electrical ...........................................
Room ................................................
Trusses ............................................
Window .............................................
Landing ..............................................
Custom Shapes .................................
Height ...............................................
Locked ..............................................
Unlocked ..........................................
Landscape Designer ........................
Layer
Display Options Dialog ......................
Painter Tool ......................................
Tab ...................................................
Layer Display Options Dialog .........
1074
576
555
308
527
286
506
335
443
444
444
445
444
583
218
224
223
218
Layer Set
Control, Active ................................... 218
Defaults Dialog .................................. 225
Management Dialog ........................... 217
Layer Set Defaults Dialog ................ 225

Layer Set Management Dialog ........ 217
Layer Sets .......................................... 216
Exporting .......................................... 224
Importing ........................................... 225
Missing in Layout ............................... 988
Modify all .......................................... 216
Layers
3D DWG/DXF Models ........................ 921
Adding new layers ............................. 221
Advanced Layer Mapping ................... 911
Colors ............................................... 220
Copy ................................................. 217
Create ............................................... 217
Delete ............................................... 217
Dimension, individual ......................... 808
DXF/DWG files .................................. 911
Export Layer Set ................................ 919
Floor Plan View Display ..................... 221
Layer Sets ......................................... 216
Layout Views ..................................... 981
Locking ............................................. 222
Mapping ............................................ 911
Materials Lists ................................... 222
Preferences ....................................... 195
Rename ............................................ 220
Reset Names .................................... 220
Layout
Adding CAD ...................................... 974
Adding Lines ..................................... 983
Borders ............................................. 973
Borders, Filleted ................................ 974
Box Specification Dialog .................... 989
CAD Details ...................................... 978
Change line length ............................. 983
Change Pages ................................... 972
Copy files .......................................... 172
Create a New .................................... 159
Cross Section/Elevations ................... 978
Defaults ............................................ 990
Deleting Views .................................. 979
Display contents ................................ 981
Layout Box Specification Dialog ..... 989

Layout Files
Create ............................................... 971
Dialog ................................................ 987
Export ............................................... 989
Open ................................................. 164
Print .................................................. 988
Save ................................................. 160
Layout Files Dialog ........................... 987
Layout Links, Managing ................... 985
Layout Views
Copy ................................................. 979
Display .............................................. 981
Keeping views current ........................ 977
Relinking ........................................... 986
Left Button Definition .......................... 4
Legacy Plans
Page Setup ....................................... 189
Text Conversion ................................ 187
Length
Of arc ............................................... 857
Of chord ........................................... 857
Libraries
Cabinet Modules ............................... 554
Renaming ......................................... 677
Library
Add a new symbol ............................. 675
Add new library ................................. 674
Add to Library ................................... 676
Adding Objects .................................. 635
Adding third party libraries ................. 675
Appliances ........................................ 696
Bonus Libraries ................................. 670
Categories ........................................ 681
Editing libraries ................................. 677
Fireplaces ......................................... 659
Fixtures ............................................ 696
Primitives .......................................... 686
Third party libraries ................... 670 , 675
Library Browser ................................ 670
Adding Items ..................................... 674
Categories ........................................ 681
Docking ............................................ 673
Panes ............................................... 670
Preferences ...................................... 188
Library Categories
Architectural Blocks ................... 665 , 681
Backdrops ......................................... 682
Cabinet Doors and Drawers ............... 682
Cabinet Modules ............................... 682
CAD Blocks ....................................... 683
Doors ....................................... 308 , 683
Doorways .................................. 307 , 684
Electrical ........................................... 684
Exterior Fixtures ................................ 684
Exterior Furnishings .......................... 685
Geometric Shapes ............................. 686
Hardware .......................................... 687
Images ............................................. 687
Interior Fixtures ................................. 685
Interior Furnishings ........................... 686
Line Styles ........................................ 688
1075
Index
Edit Layout Lines ............................... 983

Edit Vector Views ............................... 983
Edit views .......................................... 981
Export ............................................... 989
Files Dialog ....................................... 987
Filleted border ................................... 974
Finding missing files ........................... 986
Floor plan view .................................. 978
Images .............................................. 896
Layout Box Layers ............................. 981
Line color .......................................... 985
Missing Files ...................................... 986
Missing Layer Sets ............................. 988
Moving Views .................................... 980
Open View ................................. 971 , 980
Page Display Options ......................... 982
Page Down ........................................ 972
Page Up ............................................ 972
Page Zero ......................................... 973
Prepare for ........................................ 971
Print From ......................................... 952
Relink File ......................................... 987
Rescale Views ................................... 980
Scale ................................................. 980
Selecting Views ................................. 979
Sending views to ................................ 975
Template ........................................... 973
Text ................................................... 974
Title Blocks ........................................ 973
View, contents ................................... 981
Materials ...........................................
Millwork ............................................
Moldings and Profiles ........................
My Libraries ......................................
Plants ...............................................
Sprinklers .........................................
Terrain ...................................... 596 ,
Windows ...........................................
688
689
689
681
689
690
691
691
Library Object Button

Specification Dialog .................... 696
Library Object Specification
Dialog.............................................. 699
Library Objects
and the Materials List ........................ 699
Copy ................................................. 698
Display ............................................. 697
Move ................................................ 698
Placing ............................................. 695
Resize .............................................. 698
Select ............................................... 698
Library Search Dialog ...................... 692
Include folders .................................. 693
Keywords .......................................... 693
Light Render Data............................. 525
Light Sources.................................... 772
Added Lights ..................................... 774
Default Lights .................................... 773
Default Sun Light ............................... 775
Fixtures ............................................ 773
Parallel Lights ................................... 777
Point Lights ....................................... 777
Spot Lights ........................................ 777
Sun Angles ....................................... 775
Light Specification Dialog ............... 781
Lights
Added ............................................... 774
Adjust ............................................... 778
Attenuated ................................ 532 , 783
Auto Intensity ............................ 531 , 782
Casts Shadows ......................... 533 , 784
Color ........................................ 532 , 782
Connect to switch .............................. 525
Cut Off Angle ............................ 532 , 783
Defining Types .................................. 777
Dir Angle ................................... 532 , 783
Display sources ......................... 533 , 784
1076
Drop Off Rate ............................ 532 , 783

Fixtures ............................................. 524
Floor Number .................................... 783
Height ............................................... 783
Light Fixtures .................................... 773
Light Sources .................................... 772
Light Types ....................................... 773
Sources ............................................ 772
Tilt Angle ........................................... 783
Type ......................................... 531 , 782
Types ................................................ 773
Line
Color Tab .......................................... 985
Endcaps ............................................ 200
Properties Panel ................................ 200
Start and End Points .......................... 202
Style Tab .......................................... 851
Styles, Library ................................... 688
Tab ................................................... 851
Weight .............................. 185 , 948 , 954
Weight Tab ........................................ 984
Weights, Show .................................. 951
with Arrow ......................................... 849
Line Specification Dialog................. 850

Line Weight........................................ 186
Lines ................................................... 846
Angles in bearings ............................. 879
Angles in degrees .............................. 879
Change to arcs .................................... 72
Color, layout ...................................... 985
Lengths ............................................. 879
Separation, dimensions ...................... 812
Lites
Craftsman ......................................... 354
Diamond ................................... 321 , 354
Normal ...................................... 321 , 354
Prairie ....................................... 321 , 354
Tab ................................................... 353
Living.................................................. 287
Living Area ........................................ 285
Calculation ........................................ 287
Delete label ....................................... 287
Label ................................................ 287
Restore label ..................................... 287
vs. Footprint ...................................... 287
3D File .............................................. 929

to Make Same Value .......................... 152
Locate
Openings Automatically ...................... 812
Roof Plane Intersections .................... 408
Lock
CAD layer .......................................... 220
Center ............................................... 102
Center Arc ......................................... 102
Control Handle Angle ......................... 118
Roof planes ....................................... 418
Tread Width ....................................... 447
Lookouts ............................................ 483

Low Detail Mode ................................ 746
Lowered
Ceiling ............................................... 340
Region .............................................. 589
M
Macros ................................................ 826
Main
Edit Mode .......................................... 138
Layer ................................................. 254
Make
Arc Tangent ............................... 128 , 247
CAD Block ......................................... 870
Parallel Dialog ................................... 134
Parallel/Perpendicular ................ 126 , 134
Parallel/Perpendicular button ............... 74
Room Molding Polyline Dialog ............ 295
Room Polyline button .......................... 74
Make Room Molding Polyline
Dialog .............................................. 295
Manage
Auto Archives .................................... 163
Materials ........................................... 706
Materials Lists ................................. 1015
Manual
Dimensions ........................................ 797
Roofs ........................................ 384 , 393
Marker
Defaults ............................................. 178

Tab ................................................... 837
Marker Specification Dialog ............ 837

Markers .............................................. 823
Framing reference ............................. 486
Types ............................................... 837
Marquee Select ................................... 93
Marriage Walls .................................. 248
Masonry
Fireplace ........................................... 960
Fireplaces ......................................... 656
Stairs ................................................ 455
Master List................................. 72 , 1007
Columns to display ............................ 208
Displaying ....................................... 1008
Materials List .................................... 208
Name of file ...................................... 208
Search ............................................ 1009
see also Materials List
Update from Master ......................... 1009
Update to Master ............................. 1009
Master plan see Profile Plan
Material .............................................. 177
Defaults ............................................ 721
Definition .......................................... 712
Export Options Dialog ...................... 1015
Eyedropper ....................................... 709
Material Painter
Modes .............................................. 708
Tool .................................................. 708
Materials ............................. 695 , 768 , 941
Add to Library ................................... 676
and Raytracing .................................. 791
Applying with Material Tab ................. 710
Calculating amounts .......................... 652
Categories ........................................ 715
Color ................................................ 713
Create New Material .......................... 704
Create using Color Chooser ............... 722
Define for Materials List ..................... 706
Editing .............................................. 711
Floor and Ceiling ............................... 281
in a Render View ............................... 768
Managing .......................................... 706
Materials List .................................... 706
1077
Index
Load
OBJ files ........................................... 942

On Soffits .......................................... 652
Polyline ........................................... 1007
Render properties ............................. 719
Stained glass .................................... 331
Tab ................................................... 710
Textures ................................... 718 , 768
Walls ................................................ 281

Materials List .................................. 1003
Calculate from All Floors ......... 1005 1006
Calculate from Area ......................... 1006
Calculate from Room ....................... 1006
Categories ............................... 209 , 1012
Columns to display ............................ 206
Display Options Dialog .................... 1012
Editing ............................................ 1011
Estimating software ......................... 1016
Export ............................................. 1016
Font .................................................. 187
Framing .................................... 484 , 496
Grid display on reports ...................... 207
Library Objects .................................. 699
Manage .......................................... 1015
Master List Preferences ..................... 208
Material, define ................................. 706
Preferences ...................................... 206
Report Style Preferences ................... 207
Roofs ................................................ 421
Selecting Categories ....................... 1007
Wall framing ...................................... 493
Working with ................................... 1004
Materials List Display Options
Dialog............................................ 1012
Max Tread Contraction ............ 454 , 463
Median................................................ 631
Medians.............................................. 634
Menus..................................................... 7
3D ...................................................... 48
Build ................................................... 33
CAD ................................................... 55
Edit ..................................................... 29
Help ................................................... 68
Window ............................................... 66
Mesh, Specify for foundation.......... 376
Metafile Size Dialog.......................... 901
1078
Metafiles............................................. 901
Metric
Dimensions ....................................... 810
Plans ................................................ 957
see also Units
Middle Mouse Button ................... 4 , 724
Millwork, Library ............................... 689
Minimum
Alcove ............................................... 420
Number Size ............................. 811 812
Missing Layer Sets Dialog ............... 988
Mixing Trusses with Stick
Framing ........................................... 507
Model Maker
Floor Plan, View Template ................. 961
Printing ............................................. 959
Modify
All Layer Sets .................................... 216
Name In All Layer Sets ...................... 195
Plan Database File ............................ 170
Molding .............................................. 279
3D Molding Line tool .......................... 542
3D molding polyline ........................... 542
Changing profiles .............................. 543
Custom profiles ................................. 539
Door ................................................. 324
Frieze ............................................... 543
Molding Line tool ............................... 541
Molding Polyline tool .......................... 541
Place Molding Profile ......................... 540
Polyline Specification Dialog .............. 544
Polylines ........................................... 539
Molding Polyline Specification
Dialog .............................................. 544
Moldings
in Rooms ........................................... 302
Symbol .............................................. 540
Library..................................... 542 , 689
Moldings Tab
for Cabinets ...................................... 575
for Doors ........................................... 324
for Molding Polylines .......................... 545
for Windows ...................................... 358
Muntins
Custom ............................................. 338
Width ................................................ 321
My Libraries ...................................... 681
N
Name
Of room for Plan Check ..................... 885
New
CAD Line Dialog ................................
Floor Dialog ......................................
Layer Name Dialog ............................
Plans Preferences .............................
Polygon Shaped Room ......................
847
376
221
194
235
Newels
Definition .......................................... 436
Newels/Balusters Tab .............. 270 , 464
No Locate Wall .................................. 261
Normal style see Lites
North Pointer..................................... 849
Number
Height, dimensions ............................ 812
Style/Angle Style Dialog .................... 873
O
OBJ Files ................................... 916 , 942
Object
Based Design ........................................ 3
Snapping .......................................... 204
Object Specification Dialog ............ 708
One Stretch Plane............................. 939
One-Click Auto Dimension .............. 799
One-Click Stairs................................ 436
Open
3D Home Architect files ..................... 158
Below ............................................... 285
Different file types ............................. 164
Directory ........................................... 164
1079
Index
Monolithic Slab.................................. 374

Monolithic Slab Foundations,
Rebuilding....................................... 378
Mouse Buttons, Using ......................... 4
Move
CAD Points ........................................ 845
Corners .............................................. 87
Dimension Numbers ........................... 801
Electrical Objects ............................... 527
Extension Lines ................................. 803
Folders and Library Objects ................ 678
Library Objects .................................. 698
Moving Speed .................................... 811
Object ............................................... 666
Object Using Dimensions Dialog ......... 804
Point to Point ...................................... 75
Restrictions ....................................... 124
Speed, Dimensions ............................ 811
Stairs ................................................ 441
Text ........................................... 824 , 993
to be Coplanar ................................... 404
To be Coplanar button ......................... 74
to Framing Reference ......................... 125
to Front of Group ............................... 122
Views to a Different Page ................... 980
Walls and Railings ............................. 242
Walls with Cabinets Attached .............. 562
Windows ............................................ 336
Moving Objects
Move Speed ...................................... 811
Mulled Units ....................................... 944
in Floor Plan View .............................. 944
in Materials Lists ................................ 347
Mulled Window Specification
Dialog .............................................. 347
Multiple
Copy ................................................. 139
Floors, Reverse Plan .................... 66 , 136
Objects .............................................. 698
Multiple Copy Dialog ........................ 140
Multiple Select .................................... 92
in Floor Plan View .............................. 242
Muntin Bars
see Lites
Files from a different version .............. 164

Object ................................................... 8
Plan .................................................. 164
Plan or Layout File ............................ 164
Symbol ..................................... 678 , 945
Template Files .................................. 167
Opening Tab ...................................... 946

Openings ................................... 943 944
Dimension locate ............................... 812
Dimensions to ................................... 814
Doorways, create ...................... 943 944
Headers ............................................ 481
Ignore casing for resize ..................... 181
Windows, create ........................ 943 944
Options Tab ....................................... 420
for 3D Settings .................................. 758
for Materials List Display options ...... 1013
for Soffits .......................................... 654
for Symbols ....................................... 946
for Windows ...................................... 345
Orthogonal Views ............................. 952
Outlets ............................................... 524
Above cabinet ................................... 529
Automatic ......................................... 526
Dishwasher ....................................... 524
Exterior ............................................. 524
For appliance .................................... 529
GFCI ................................................ 524
Interior .............................................. 524
Joining .............................................. 525
Manual ............................................. 524
Place ................................................ 526
Sink .................................................. 524
WP ................................................... 524
Ovals .................................................. 861
Overall Dimension ............................ 812
Overhang ........................................... 402
Overview .......................................... 1 , 79
Camera tools .................................... 739
Create .............................................. 734
Direction Tools .................................. 744
Full ................................................... 734
Plan .................................................. 734
1080
P
Page
Down ................................................ 972
Up .................................................... 972
Page Setup Dialog ............................ 963

Legacy Layouts ................................. 189
Legacy Plans ..................................... 189
Pan
Pan Window Tool .............................. 725
the Display ........................................ 725
Using the Keyboard ........................... 725
Using the Mouse ................................ 725
Using the Scroll Bars ......................... 725
Paper
Orientation ........................................ 963
Size .................................................. 971
Parallel Light ..................................... 777
see Lights ......................................... 774
Parallel/Perpendicular........................ 74
Parent Buttons .................................... 19
Partition ............................................. 553
Passthroughs .................................... 315
Paste................................................... 137
Hold Position ..................................... 139
in Place ............................................. 138
Special .............................................. 139
Path to Master list ............................ 209
Pattern Tab ........................................ 717
Patterns and Textures ...................... 705
PDF Files............................................ 953
Peninsula Radius Cabinets ............. 564
Personal Tutor ................................ 1018
Perspective Views ............................ 734
Picture
Copy Region as ................................. 904
Displaying in color ............................. 186
Save a Render View as ...................... 770
Picture File Box Specification
Dialog .............................................. 893
Picture Files
Export ............................................... 892
Import ............................................... 890
and Pads ........................................... 380

Automatic .......................................... 376
Beam, relationship ............................. 380
Creating automatically ........................ 376
Creating manually .............................. 380
Editing ............................................... 380
Foundation ........................................ 374
Move ................................................. 380
Resizing ............................................ 380
Piers and Pads................................... 380

Pitch ............................................ 388 , 425
Above Wall ........................................ 388
Show as degrees ............................... 181
Place
Gable Over Window(s) ....................... 331
Images .............................................. 896
Library Object Button ......................... 696
Library Objects .................................. 695
Outlets .............................. 235 , 285 , 526
Soffits ................................................ 650
Switches ............................................ 525
Plan ..................................................... 177
Database File .................................... 169
Defaults Dialog .................................. 181
Drawing .............................................. 10
Find Wizard ....................................... 169
Footprint ............................................ 876
Footprint Specification Dialog ............. 877
Materials Dialog ................................. 707
Save ................................................. 160
Templates ......................................... 167
Thumbnail ......................................... 161
Trace ................................................. 891
View ................................................... 12
View Tab ........................................... 946
Plan Check ......................................... 885
and room labels ................................. 286
Dialog ................................................ 886
Hold .................................................. 886
Restart .............................................. 886
Plan Defaults...................................... 180
Plan Export ........................................ 770
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog 877
Plans
Copy files ..........................................
New ..................................................
Open ................................................
Save .................................................
Search ..............................................
Transfer ............................................
172
159
164
160
168
172
Plant
Chooser Dialog .................................
Encyclopedia ....................................
Image Specification Dialog .................
Tools ................................................
608
608
602
606
594
Plant Image Specification

Dialog.............................................. 602
Plant Specification Dialog ............... 606
Plants, Library .................................. 689
Platform Holes .................................. 380
Plinth Blocks ..................................... 317
Plot Plan ............................................ 599
North pointer ..................................... 849
Setback Lines ................................... 601
Plotters .............................................. 949
Point
see also CAD point
Point Light ......................................... 777
Point Markers .................................... 844
Point to Point Dimensions .............. 798
Pointer
Coordinates .................................. 8 , 185
Cross Hair ................................. 192 , 201
Points ................................................. 843
Polygon
Shaped Deck ........................... 231 , 1034
Shaped Room ................................... 230
Polyline
3D Molding Polyline ........................... 542
Area ................................................. 863
Definition .......................................... 863
Edit Area ........................................... 154
Garden Bed ...................................... 592
Tab ................................................... 863
1081
Index
Scale ................................................. 891
Piers
Tool to create rectangular .................. 865

Polyline Solid .................................... 649
Convert to Solid ................................ 649
Creating ............................................ 649
Polyline Solid Specification
Dialog.............................................. 650
Polyline Solids .................................. 649
Polyline Specification Dialog.......... 863
Polylines
Fill patterns ....................................... 865
Molding Polyline tool ......................... 541
Pond, Round ..................................... 592
Pony Walls................................. 230 , 233
Align upper and lower ........................ 277
Change wall types ............................. 233
Default height .................................... 277
Display ............................................. 242
Show lower wall ................................ 277
see also Railings, solid
Post .................................................... 472
Post Specification Dialog ................ 499
POV-Ray............................................. 794
Prairie style
see Lites
Preferences ....................................... 678
Appearance ...................................... 184
Architectural Panel ............................ 198
Behaviors Panel ................................ 202
CAD Panel ........................................ 199
CAD Snaps ....................................... 204
Categories Panel ....................... 208 209
Colors ............................................... 186
Dialog ............................................... 183
Edit Panel ......................................... 201
Folders Panel .................................... 192
Font .................................................. 187
General Panel ................................... 190
Global settings .................................. 183
Layers Panel ..................................... 195
Library Browser ................................. 188
Line Properties Panel ........................ 200
Master List Panel .............................. 208
Materials List .................................... 206
New Plans ........................................ 194
1082
Render .............................................. 211

Report Style Panel ............................. 207
Reset preferences ............................. 214
Sun Angle Panel ................................ 201
Text and Page Setup ......................... 189
Texture Filter ..................................... 213
Time Tracker ..................................... 197
Unit Coversion Panel ......................... 195
Prepare for Layout ............................ 971

Preview vs. Final Render View ........ 766
Primitives
Box ................................................... 642
Cone ................................................. 642
Cylinder ............................................ 642
Editing .............................................. 643
Library .............................................. 686
Sphere .............................................. 642
Tools ................................................ 641
Print
3D Views ........................................... 953
Across Multiple Pages ....................... 953
Center Sheet ..................................... 951
Check Plots ............................... 948 , 953
Clear Printer Info ............................... 950
Color or Black and White ................... 966
Custom Sheet Size ............................ 959
Dialog ............................................... 965
Dimensions ....................................... 957
Directly from a View ........................... 952
Double-buffered printing ..................... 967
Drivers .............................................. 949
from Layout ....................................... 952
Image ....................................... 770 , 967
Image Dialog ..................................... 967
Layout Files ...................................... 988
Line Weights ..................................... 954
Line Weights and Scaling ................... 955
Model .................................................. 28
Model Dialog ..................................... 960
Options ............................................. 949
Paper Size ........................................ 948
Perspective Views ............................. 953
Plotters ............................................. 949
Preview ............................................. 951
Printable Area ................................... 951
Printing Scale .................................... 948
Problems ......................................... 1019
Print Dialog ........................................ 965

Print Image Dialog............................. 967
Print Model Dialog............................. 960
Printed Size Input Dialog ................. 825
Printer Setup...................................... 971
Printers ............................................... 949
Select printer ..................................... 965
Set up ............................................... 971
Priority Support ............................... 1021
Profile Plans ...................................... 167
Project
Browser ............................................. 165
Information ........................................ 166
Property lines .................................... 847
North pointer ...................................... 849
Proportional Resize ............... 80 , 89 90
Q
Quoin Specification Dialog .............. 538
Quoins ................................................ 537
R
Radiosity ............................................ 789
Radius ......................................... 240 , 856
End Cabinets ..................................... 563
of Tangent Curved Wall Dialog ........... 246
Radius To .......................................... 262
Radius of Tangent Curved Wall

Dialog.............................................. 246
Rafter depth ...................................... 425
Rafters ....................................... 471 , 474
Automatically create .......................... 474
Bearing Line ...................................... 488
Blocking ............................................ 473
Depth ....................................... 429 , 475
Depth, individual roof plane ............... 429
Framing Reference ............................ 484
Mixing with trusses ............................ 507
Trusses mix ...................................... 474
Railing
Defaults ............................................ 229
Tab ................................................... 267
Railings ...................................... 230 , 233
Balusters .................................. 268 , 270
Change wall into railing ..................... 260
Connect walls ................................... 241
Decks ............................................... 237
Exterior Materials .............................. 269
Fix connections ................................. 240
Half walls .......................................... 268
Height defined ................................... 270
Locate with dimensions ..................... 261
Moving .............................................. 242
Newels ............................................. 270
No Rail ............................................. 268
No Shoe ........................................... 269
Open rail type ................................... 268
Open with middle rail ......................... 268
Openings .......................................... 314
Partial ............................................... 453
Raise Shoe ....................................... 269
Solid ................................................. 268
Stairs ................................................ 453
Type ................................................. 268
Raise
Shoe ................................................. 269
Truss Off plate .................................. 520
Raised / Lowered Region
Specification Dialog...................... 617
Raised Region ................................... 589
Raked Walls....................................... 242
Raytrace
1083
Index
Render Views .................................... 770

Scale to Fit ........................................ 952
Services ............................................ 971
Setup ................................................ 971
Sheet Size ................................. 948 , 958
Terminology ....................................... 948
Text ................................................... 957
the Model .......................................... 959
Tiled .................................................. 953
to PDF File ........................................ 953
To Scale ............................................ 952
Troubleshooting ................................. 962
Aspect ratio .......................................

Create ..............................................
Export to POV-Ray ............................
Faster raytracing ...............................
Image Adustment Dialog ....................
Materials ...........................................
Options Dialog ..................................
Quality ..............................................
Radiosity ...........................................
Tab ...................................................
Window .............................................
788
787
794
792
790
791
788
793
789
791
790
Raytrace Options Dialog.................. 788
Raytrace View ................................... 787
Rebuild
3D .................................................... 747
Monolithic Slab Foundations .............. 378
Walls/Floors/Ceilings ............. 37 , 72 , 416
Recent File List ................................. 191
Recessed Door.................................. 317
Rectangular Polyline ........................ 865
Reduce Gable .................................... 520
Reference
Display Options ................................. 370
Floor ................................................. 367
Floor Color ........................................ 186
Grid .................................................. 182
Refresh Library Browser ................. 677
Regular Polygon ............................... 865
Relative
to Current Point, new line end ............ 848
to Current Point, new point ................ 844
to Current point, polar, new point ....... 844
to Itself, move point ........................... 846
to Previous Point, move point ............. 846
Remove
3D .............................................. 72 , 748
Backdrop .......................................... 761
Manufacturer Lock ............................. 698
Muntins ............................................. 339
Renaming Libraries .......................... 677
Render
Added Lights ..................................... 774
Ambient light ..................................... 772
Camera Field of View ................ 754 , 757
1084
Data Tab ........................................... 531

Daytime Ambient ............................... 773
Display light sources .................. 533 , 784
Export view ....................................... 770
Field of view ...................................... 757
Floor Overview .......................... 764 , 787
Full Overview .................................... 787
Graphics card .................................... 764
Interior Ambient ................................. 773
Light Fixtures .................................... 773
Light Sources .................................... 772
Nighttime Ambient ............................. 773
Overviews ................................. 764 , 787
Preferences ....................................... 211
Save view ......................................... 770
Settings ............................................ 212
Tab ................................................... 719
View Picture, Save ............................ 770
View, Edit in ...................................... 746
View, Materials .................................. 768
View, Preview vs. Final ...................... 766
View, Print ........................................ 770
Render
Render
Render
Render
Render
Data Tab ............................... 780

Full Overview ....................... 764
Tips and Tricks .................... 771
Tools ..................................... 765
Views .................................... 764
Ediiting Objects in .............................. 770
Replace from Library
Button ............................................... 680
Dialog ............................................... 680
Report style
Grid display settings .......................... 207
Materials List ..................................... 207
Rescale Layout Views ...................... 980
Reset
Defaults .................................... 179 , 182
Preferences ....................................... 214
Reshape Text ............................. 824 , 993
Resize
Components ...................................... 340
Doors ................................................ 309
Enable for symbols ............................ 181
Factor ............................................... 891
Restore Toolbars ................................ 24

Restrictions
Moving objects ................................... 124
Retain
Attic wall ............................................ 261
Wall Framing ............................. 261 , 496
Retaining Wall ................................... 593
Reverse............................................... 136
Plan .................................................. 136
Plan, Multiple Floors ............................ 66
Wall layers ......................................... 275
Ridge Top, edit roofs ........................ 425
Right Button Definition ....................... 4
Rim Joist ............................................ 475
Road .................................................... 178
and Sidewalk Defaults ........................ 629
Defaults ............................................. 629
Marking ............................................. 632
Marking Specification Dialog ............... 638
Markings ............................................ 634
Polyline ............................................. 631
Stripe ................................................ 632
Road Marking Specification
Dialog .............................................. 638
Road Objects
Different Types .................................. 630
Display .............................................. 633
Edit ................................................... 634
Select ................................................ 634
Road Specification Dialog ............... 635
Roads .................................................. 630
Curbs ................................................ 636
Roads and Road Polylines ............... 634
Roof
Baseline Polylines .............................

Baseline Specification Dialog .............
Baselines ........................... 393 , 402 ,
Baselines Polylines, Example Using ...
Beams ..............................................
Defaults ............................................
Framing ............................................
Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog ......
Pitches in Degrees ............................
Plane Specification Dialog .................
Styles, Automatic ..............................
Tab ...................................................
Tools ................................................
Truss ........................................ 471 ,
Truss Details .....................................
Truss Specification Dialog .................
391
422
425
392
471
385
470
432
433
424
386
263
385
502
505
518
Roof Baseline Specification

Dialog.............................................. 422
Roof Designer ................................... 383
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification
Dialog.............................................. 432
Roof Plane Specification
Dialog.............................................. 424
Roof Planes ............................... 385 , 393
Aligning ............................................ 403
Curved .............................................. 394
Delete ............................................... 405
Display ............................................. 401
Edit ................................................... 402
Edit Curved ....................................... 405
Intersections, Locate ......................... 408
Join .................................................. 403
Low roof planes ................................. 418
Move to be Coplanar ......................... 404
Raising/Lowering ............................... 404
Roof Truss Specification Dialog..... 518
Roofs .................................................. 962
2nd pitch ................................... 263 , 387
Angled baselines ............................... 425
Auto Rebuild ............................. 386 , 418
Auto Roof Return .............................. 264
Automatic ......................................... 384
Automatic vs. Manual ........................ 384
Baseline ............................ 393 , 402 , 425
Baseline Polylines ............................. 391
Birdsmouth ....................................... 425
1085
Index
House using Exterior Dimensions ........ 805

Ignore casing ..................................... 181
Images .............................................. 896
Library Objects .................................. 698
Picture ............................................... 892
Stairs ................................................ 441
Stem Walls ........................................ 377
Walls ................................................. 242
Windows ............................................ 336
Boxed Eave ......................................

Build Roof Dialog ..............................
Curved ..............................................
Dormers ............................................
Eave Fascia Width ............................
Energy Heel ......................................
Extend slope downward ............. 263 ,
Fascia top .........................................
Framing ............................................
Full gable wall ........................... 263 ,
Gable ...............................................
Gambrel ............................................
Gull Wing ..........................................
Gutters ..................................... 421 ,
Half-hip .............................................
High shed/gable ................. 263 , 387 ,
Hip ...................................................
Hip Trusses ......................................
Hole for skylights ...............................
Ignore Top Floor ................................
Knee walls ................................ 263 ,
Lock .................................................
Lock roof planes ................................
Mansard ...........................................
Manual .............................................
Materials Lists ...................................
Min. Alcove .......................................
Over curved walls ..............................
Over this room ..................................
Overhang .................................. 402 ,
Pitch .......................... 263 , 387 388 ,
Plumb Cut Eaves ...............................
Rafter depth, individual roof plane ......
Rafter tails ........................................
Raise off plate ...................................
Retain edits ............................... 418 ,
Retain manually drawn planes ...........
Returns .............................................
Ridge/top ..........................................
Roof Group .......................................
Roof Plane ........................................
Second pitch .....................................
Show all ridges ..................................
Show pitch as degrees .............. 181 ,
Skylights ...........................................
Square Cut Eaves .............................
Step Down Hip ..................................
Story-and-a-half ................................
1086
426
416
426
398
421
520
387
425
483
387
390
388
388
427
388
390
390
511
414
418
387
402
418
388
393
421
420
256
299
418
425
421
429
426
419
427
418
400
425
298
385
264
420
425
414
421
511
387
Subgirders ........................................ 512

Trusses ............................................. 419
Upslope Mark .................................... 402
Vertical Rafter Depth ......................... 425
Room
Defaults ............................................ 280
Definition ................................... 280 , 288
Label Defaults Dialog ......................... 838
Material Defaults ............................... 280
Molding Polylines .............................. 295
Polylines ........................................... 295
Room Label Defaults Dialog ............ 838

Room Labels...................................... 286
Display .............................................. 286
Edit ................................................... 287
Interior room area .............................. 286
Interior room dimensions .................... 286
Room area ........................................ 286
Standard room area ........................... 286
Room Specification Dialog .............. 296
Rooms
Area .................................................. 286
Attic .................................................. 284
Auto Place Outlets ............................. 285
Below Stairs ...................................... 457
Ceiling height .................................... 297
Ceiling over ....................................... 299
Edit buttons ....................................... 291
Editing .............................................. 290
Exterior types .................................... 284
Floor height ....................................... 297
Foundation floor definition .................. 299
Interior .............................................. 284
Interior area ...................................... 286
Interior dimensions ............................ 286
Living Area ........................................ 285
Moldings ........................................... 302
Name for PlanCheck .......................... 885
Open Below ...................................... 285
Polygon Shaped ................................ 235
Roof over .......................................... 299
Room Types ...................................... 284
Selecting ........................................... 283
Standard area ................................... 286
The Exterior Room ............................. 284
Types ................................................ 284
CAD items ......................................... 203

Jump ................................................. 203
Stairs ................................................ 441
Text ........................................... 824 , 993
View .................................................. 135
Rough Opening
Doorways (ISD) ......................... 943 944
Windows (ISD) ........................... 943 944
Round
Garden bed ....................................... 592
Pond ................................................. 592
S
S Markers ........................................... 374
Same
Height Eaves ..................................... 419
Roof Height at External Wall ............... 419
Wall Type .......................................... 245
Same Wall Type ................................. 245
Sash and Frame Tab ......................... 348
Save
3D Views ........................................... 747
and Save As ...................................... 161
Bitmap ............................................... 736
Cross Section/Elevation Cameras ....... 752
Plan .......................................... 160 161
Plan and Layout Files ......................... 160
Plan as Template ............................... 168
Plan Thumbnail .................................. 161
Render View Picture ........................... 770
Section/Elevation Cameras ................. 752
see also Autosave
Scale
Data .................................................. 626
Layout view ....................................... 980
Picture Files ...................................... 891
Printing to .......................................... 952
to Fit ................................................. 952
Schedule............................................. 178
Defaults ............................................. 992
Schedule Specification Dialog ........ 995
Schedules
Creating ............................................ 992
Schematics, Wiring .......................... 525
Scissors Trusses .............................. 516
Screen Capture Setup Dialog.......... 900
Scroll Bars......................................... 725
Search for Plans ............................... 168
Section see Cross section
Section/Elevation
Views, Create ................................... 749
Views, Detailing ................................ 750
Segment Angle at Curved Wall ....... 420
Select ................................................. 262
All ....................................................... 94
Backdrop .......................................... 761
Blocked Units .................................... 332
Components ...................................... 665
Components of Blocked Units ............ 333
Fence Select ....................................... 94
File ................................................... 624
Group, drag method ............................ 92
Group, marquee method ...................... 92
Layer Dialog ...................................... 222
Layout Lines ..................................... 983
Layout Views .................................... 979
Library Object Dialog ......................... 679
Library Objects .................................. 698
Marquee ............................................. 93
Materials with the Material Tab .......... 710
Multiple Objects .................................. 94
Next Object ......................................... 93
Object Parts ........................................ 93
Objects ............................................... 92
Objects button ..................................... 92
Objects in 3D Views .......................... 746
Road Objects .................................... 634
Room ................................................ 283
Same Type ....................................... 152
Same Type button ............................... 95
Selected Edge ..................................... 92
Shift+Click .......................................... 94
Similar Objects .................................... 92
Similar Objects Dialog ....................... 152
Terrain Data ...................................... 597
Walls, Railing, and Fences ................. 242
1087
Index
Rotate
Windows ........................................... 332

Selected Line Tab ............................. 864
Selection Fill Color........................... 187
Send
to Layout Dialog ................................ 976
Views to layout .................................. 975
Service Data Tab............................... 530
Set Angular Dimension
Dialog...................................... 133 , 806
Settings, 3D ....................................... 757
Setup
Screen Capture ................................. 900
Tab ................................................... 810
Tab, Right Dide ................................. 811
Shadows ............................................ 776
Shape
Tab ................................................... 355
Window ..................................... 355 , 943
see also Windows
Shelf ................................................... 553
Shelf/Partition Specification
Dialog.............................................. 578
Shoe
None for railing ................................. 269
Raise for railing ................................. 269
Short Extensions ...................... 810 , 815
Shortcut Keys ................................. 7 , 24
Show
0" ..................................................... 810
Dash in dimensions ........................... 810
Dimensions, inches only .................... 812
Dimensions, metric ............................ 810
Imperial dimensions .......................... 810
Inches only, dimensions ..................... 812
Line Weights ..................................... 951
Lower Pony Wall in Plan View ............ 277
Metric dimensions ............................. 810
Pitch as degrees ............................... 181
Sheet ................................................ 951
Short extensions ....................... 810 , 815
Show Arc Centers ............................. 102
Shutters ............................................. 353
Sidewalk ............................................ 632
1088
Defaults ............................................ 629

Polyline ............................................. 633
Sidewalk Specification Dialog ........ 639

Sidewalks, Auto Generate ............... 634
Site.......................................................... 3
Sizing
Symbols ............................................ 938
Tab ................................................... 946
Skylights .................................... 385 , 414
Slab............................................. 379 , 381
At top of stem wall ............................. 374
Foundation ........................................ 373
Holes ................................................ 379
Monolithic ......................................... 374
Toolbar button ................................... 379
Slab Specification Dialog ................ 381
Slabs................................................... 379
and the Materials List ......................... 380
Sliding Doors..................................... 307
Sloped Soffits.................................... 655
Snap Properties Preferences .......... 204
Soffit
Defaults ............................................ 650
Soffit Specification Dialog............... 653
Soffits ......................................... 553 , 650
Calculating Materials ......................... 652
Place under ceiling ............................ 654
Place under Roof ............................... 654
Sloped ...................................... 654 655
Sloped soffit ...................................... 654
Special applications ........................... 651
Solid Fill ............................................. 869
Solid Specification Dialog ............... 649
SpacePlanner Toolbar
Configuration ................................... 23
Special
CAD Buttons ................................. 69 70
CAD Preferences ............................... 201
Shaped Cabinets ............................... 562
3D Box .............................................. 645
Raised/Lowered Region .....................

Road ................................................
Road Marking ....................................
Roof Baseline ...................................
Roof Hole/Skylight .............................
Roof Plane ........................................
Room ................................................
Schedule ..........................................
Shelf/Partition ...................................
Sidewalk ...........................................
Slab ..................................................
Soffit .................................................
Solid .................................................
Sphere ..............................................
Sprinkler ...........................................
Stair Landing .....................................
Staircase ..........................................
Sun Angle .........................................
Symbol .............................................
Terrain ..............................................
Terrain Break ....................................
Terrain Feature .................................
Terrain Path ......................................
Text ..................................................
Wall Hatch ........................................
Window .............................................
617
635
638
422
432
424
296
995
578
639
381
653
649
646
620
467
458
778
945
610
618
617
619
830
273
343
Speed
3D views ........................................... 759
Up 3D View Generation ..................... 745
Spell Check ....................................... 828

Sphere ........................................ 642 , 686
Sphere Specification Dialog ........... 646
Spherical Backdrops ........................ 769
Spiral Staircase ................................ 685
Spline Tab.......................................... 869
Splines ............................................... 868
Advanced Splines .............................. 117
Control Handles ................................ 117
Lock Control Handle Angle ................ 118
Split
Levels ............................................... 283
Walls ................................................ 236
Spot Light .......................................... 777
Sprinkler
Designer ........................................... 594
1089
Index
3D Molding Polyline ........................... 546

Arc .................................................... 858
Architectural Block ............................. 667
Bay/Box Window ................................ 359
Beam ................................................ 498
Bow Window ...................................... 360
Cabinet .............................................. 565
Cabinet Shelf ..................................... 577
CAD Box ........................................... 867
CAD Circle ......................................... 861
CAD Ellipse ....................................... 861
CAD Oval .......................................... 861
Callout ............................................... 834
Camera ............................................. 753
Ceiling Plane ..................................... 428
Cone ................................................. 648
Corner Boards ................................... 536
Cross Section/Elevation Camera ......... 755
Custom Countertop ............................ 579
Cylinder ............................................. 647
Dimension Line .................................. 807
Door .................................................. 315
Dormer .............................................. 429
Driveway ........................................... 637
Electrical Service ............................... 529
Elevation Line .................................... 616
Elevation Point ................................... 613
Fireplace ........................................... 657
Flat Region ........................................ 616
Framing ............................................. 497
Hill / Valley ........................................ 617
Joist Direction .................................... 489
Layout Box ........................................ 989
Library Object .................................... 699
Library Object Button ......................... 696
Light .................................................. 781
Line ................................................... 850
Marker ............................................... 837
Molding Polyline ................................. 544
Mulled Window .................................. 347
Object ............................................... 708
Plan Footprint .................................... 877
Plant ................................................. 606
Plant Image ....................................... 602
Polyline ............................................. 863
Polyline Solid ..................................... 650
Post .................................................. 499
Quoins .............................................. 538

Tools ................................................ 594
Sprinkler Specification Dialog ........ 620

Sprinklers Library............................. 690
Stacked Windows ............................. 331
Stair
Designer ........................................... 435
Landing Specification Dialog .............. 467
Sections Move Independently ............ 198
Tools ................................................ 436
Stair Landing Specification
Dialog.............................................. 467
Staircase
Spiral ................................................ 685
Staircase Specification Dialog ....... 458
Stairs
Align Curved Stairs ............................ 129
Auto Stairwell .................................... 456
Balusters .......................................... 464
Change Line/Arc ............................... 439
Change radius of curve ...................... 441
Click ................................................. 436
Concrete ........................................... 455
Curved ...................................... 436 , 438
Curved Treads .................................. 450
Deck to ground .................................. 437
Direction ........................................... 437
Displaying ......................................... 440
Down ................................................ 437
Edit ................................................... 458
Edit Handles ..................................... 441
Exterior Colors .................................. 463
Flare Radius ..................................... 449
Flared ............................................... 448
Landings ........................................... 443
Large Stringer Base .......................... 462
Lock Tread Width ...................... 439 , 447
Make Reach ...................................... 459
Masonry ............................................ 455
Max Tread Contraction ...................... 463
Merge Sections ................................. 438
Moving .............................................. 441
Newels ............................................. 464
Open Underneath .............................. 462
Partial Railings .................................. 453
1090
Railings ............................................. 453

Reach Next Floor ............................... 459
Resizing ............................................ 441
Rise angle ......................................... 460
Rooms Below .................................... 457
Rotating ............................................ 441
Section width ..................................... 460
Sections ............................................ 460
Solid Railings .................................... 454
Stairwell ............................................ 456
Starter Treads ................................... 451
Straight ............................................. 436
Stringers ........................................... 461
Stringers, steel .................................. 455
Subsections ...................... 447 , 459 460
Symmetrically Flared ......................... 449
Terminology ...................................... 436
Tread Width .............................. 447 , 460
Treads .............................................. 459
Treads, define ................................... 461
Treads, retain number ........................ 461
Walk Line .................................. 447 , 462
Winders .................................... 442 , 460
Wrapped ........................................... 452
Stairwell, Create................................ 456

Start Direction ................................... 857
Start House Wizard ........................... 884
Startup Options..................................... 2
Startup Options Dialog ........................ 2
Static Views ....................................... 977
Status Bar ...................................... 8 , 185
Angle style ........................................ 873
Stem Walls ......................................... 373
Align ................................................. 377
and Footings, Align ............................ 377
Resize .............................................. 377
Step Down Hip, Advantages and
Disadvantages ............................... 515
Step Foundation S Markers ............. 374
Stepping Stone Tools ....................... 593
Stick Framing, Mixing with
Trusses ........................................... 507
Sticky Mode ....................................... 138
Stop at Ceiling................................... 262
Dimensions .......................................
Edge lines .........................................
Enable resize ....................................
Faces ....................................... 926 ,
Insertion point ........................... 926 ,
Modify ..............................................
Moldings ...........................................
Options .............................................
Origin ....................................... 926 ,
Reset origin ......................................
Resize ..............................................
Sides ................................................
Sizing ...............................................
Stretch Planes ...................................
Stretch Zones ...................................
Surface normals ................................
Surface Smoothing Angle ..................
938
930
181
930
930
925
540
935
930
930
939
926
938
945
939
940
926
930
Symbol Specification Dialog ........... 945
Symbols
Sizing ............................................... 938
vs. Native Objects ............................. 698
System Default Walls ....................... 251
T
Tab Key ................................................ 93
Tabs
Changing .......................................... 833
Columns ........................................... 833
Text .................................................. 833
Take Off see Materials List
Tangent
Curved walls ..................................... 247
Make arc, edit button ......................... 247
Make Tangent button ........................... 74
Technical Support ................. 1017 , 1023
Contact ........................................... 1021
E-mail ............................................. 1022
Hardware Lock Issues ..................... 1019
Installation Issues ........................... 1019
Priority ............................................ 1021
Telephone ....................................... 1022
Web ................................................ 1021
1091
Index
Story-and-a-half................................. 387
Straight
Deck Edge ......................................... 231
Stairs ................................................ 436
Stream ................................................ 592
Stretch Zones .................................... 940
Structure Tab ............................. 299 , 378
Subcategories.................................. 1013
Subfloor Thickness ........................... 477
Subgirder Hip, Advantages and
Disadvantages ................................ 515
Subgirders.......................................... 512
Subtract .............................................. 148
Sun
Shadows ........................................... 595
Sun Angle ................................... 775 , 850
Create ............................................... 775
Date .................................................. 779
Delete Shadows ................................. 777
Render Data ...................................... 780
Shadows ................................... 533 , 784
Sun Angle Specification Dialog....... 778
Sunlight Toggle ................................. 766
Sunrooms ........................................... 684
Suppress Objects in 3D Views ........ 745
Surface
Backdrop ......................................... 1032
Normals ............................................. 926
Smoothing Angle ................................ 930
Swap
Views ................................................ 729
Work-Reference ................................. 369
Switch
Create ............................................... 525
Current Floor/Reference Floor ............ 369
Double .............................................. 525
In circuit ............................................ 525
Place ................................................. 525
Three way ......................................... 526
Symbol
Automatic Edge Lines ........................ 930
Boundary box .................................... 938
Create ............................................... 925
Template Plan ........................... 159 , 167

Creating ............................................ 168
Temporary
Dimensions ....................................... 800
File Directories .................................. 193
Terrain................................................ 617
and 3D Draw Time ............................. 597
Break Specification Dialog ................. 618
Clear ................................................ 596
Copy ................................................. 597
Display in 3D View ............................ 596
Display in Floor Plan View ................. 596
Elevation Tools ................................. 585
Feature Tools .................................... 590
Grow All Plants Dialog ....................... 594
Holes ................................................ 591
Library ...................................... 596 , 691
Menu .................................................. 42
Modifier Tools ................................... 589
Properties, Clip ................................. 611
Retaining Wall ................................... 589
Sprinkler Tools .................................. 594
Terrain Breaks .................................. 588
Toolbar Configuration ............ 22 23 , 584
Wall and Curb Tools .......................... 593
Terrain Break Specification
Dialog.............................................. 618
Terrain Data
Convert CAD Lines to ........................ 628
Delete ............................................... 597
Import ............................................... 623
Select ............................................... 597
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog ...
617
Terrain Features
Clip ................................................... 617
Edit ................................................... 597
Height ............................................... 617
Terrain Modeler
3D Views .......................................... 597
Add Elevation Data .................... 585 , 597
Build Terrain ............................. 584 , 596
Building Pad Elevation ....................... 611
Clear Terrain ..................................... 596
Contour Line Smoothing .................... 612
1092
Contours ........................................... 612

Elevation Lines/Splines ...................... 597
Elevation Points ................................ 585
Generate Terrain ............................... 596
Primary Contours ............................... 612
Sun Shadows .................................... 595
Terrain Surface Quality ...................... 611
Terrain Surface Smoothing ................. 611
Triangle Size ..................................... 611
Terrain Path Specification

Dialog .............................................. 619
Edit ................................................... 597
Plot Plan ........................................... 601
Terrain Specification Dialog............ 610
Text
Align ................................................. 825
Arrows .............................................. 819
Auto Height, Width ............................. 833
Copy, Cut and Paste .......................... 825
Creating ............................................ 819
Defaults .................................... 178 , 838
Displaying ......................................... 823
Edit ................................................... 824
Editing .............................................. 824
Files ................................................. 623
Hyperlinks ......................................... 834
Justify ............................................... 825
Layer ................................................ 823
Layout ............................................... 974
Line With Arrow ................................. 819
Macros .............................................. 826
Maximum Characters ......................... 819
Move ......................................... 824 , 993
Printed Size ...................................... 825
Printing ............................................. 957
Reshaping ................................. 824 , 993
Special characters ............................. 828
Spell Check ....................................... 828
Tab Spacing .............................. 826 , 833
Tabbed Objects ................................. 826
Tables ............................................... 826
With Arrow ........................................ 819
Text Specification Dialog................. 830
Filters ................................................ 213

Tab ................................................... 718
Textures.............................................. 768
Add new ............................................ 897
Apply to items .................................... 718
Apply to materials .............................. 718
Convert to Materials ........................... 704
Create ............................................... 897
Filters ................................................ 214
Mapping ............................................ 705
View .................................................. 718
Third Party Libraries ......................... 670
Thumbnails
Enable ............................................... 192
Save ................................................. 161
Size ................................................... 192
Tiling Views........................................ 727
Time
Log Dialog ......................................... 882
Tracker .............................................. 881
Tracker Preferences ........................... 197
Title Blocks ........................................ 974
Toe Kick Height/Depth ...................... 567
Tool, Gable/Roof Line ....................... 410
Toolbar
Configurations .................................... 22
Tab .................................................... 20
Toolbars .......................................... 6 , 17
Add Tools ........................................... 18
All views ............................................. 18
Child Buttons ...................................... 19
Customize .......................................... 18
Delete Tools ....................................... 19
Edit .................................................... 71
Edit toolbar ........................................... 7
Parent Buttons .................................... 19
Restore .............................................. 24
Tool tips ............................................... 6
Tools
3D ..................................................... 735
Box ................................................... 865
Cabinet .............................................. 552
CAD Drawing ..................................... 842
Complete List ...................................... 24
Dimension ......................................... 797

Door ................................................. 306
Electrical ........................................... 524
Floor ................................................. 365
Framing ............................................ 471
Garden Bed ...................................... 592
Menu .................................................. 59
Plant ................................................. 594
Primitives .......................................... 641
Render ............................................. 765
Roof ................................................. 385
Slab .................................................. 379
Stair ................................................. 436
Stepping Stone ................................. 593
Tab ..................................................... 18
Terrain Wall and Curb ........................ 593
Vector View ...................................... 734
Wall .................................................. 229
Water Feature ................................... 592
Zoom ................................................ 723
Transfer Plans................................... 172

Transform/Replicate Object
Dialog.............................................. 145
Transom Window see Windows, stacked
Transparency Color.......................... 899
Treads
Lock width ........................................ 461
Maintain Width .................................. 461
Overhang .......................................... 463
Retain number in section ................... 461
Thickness ......................................... 463
Treatments Tab ................................. 357
Trim Objects ...................................... 143
Trimmers............................................ 480
Truss .................................................. 516
Base ................................................. 507
Base Specification Dialog .................. 516
Details ...................................... 505 , 875
Spacing ............................................ 486
Truss Base Specification
Dialog.............................................. 516
Trusses ............................... 419 , 474 , 485
Attic trusses ...................................... 503
Bottom Chord ............................ 519 , 522
Ceiling trusses .................................. 502
1093
Index
Texture
Copy ......................................... 502 , 505

Create .............................................. 502
Details .............................................. 505
Drop Hip truss .................... 515 , 520 , 522
Edit ................................................... 504
End truss .................................. 519 , 522
Energy Heel ...................................... 520
Floor and Ceiling ............................... 502
Floor trusses ..................................... 502
Floor/Ceiling ..................................... 472
Girder ............................................... 515
Hip ........................................... 511 515
Hip jack ............................................ 512
Hip Roofs .......................................... 511
Hip systems, comparisons ................. 515
Jack ................................................. 512
Kingpost ........................................... 519
Labels .............................................. 506
Laying out ......................................... 502
Locking ............................................. 521
Mixing with rafters ..................... 474 , 507
Raise off plate ................................... 520
Reduce gable .................................... 520
Require kingpost ............................... 522
Roof ......................................... 471 , 502
Scissors ............................................ 516
Spacing ............................................ 486
Step Down Hip .......................... 511 , 515
Subgirders ................................ 512 , 515
Top Chord ................................. 519 , 522
Truss Base ....................................... 507
Webbing ............................ 519 , 521 522
Two Stretch Planes .......................... 940

Type Tab ............................................ 945
U
Undo
Files ................................................. 164
Preferences ...................................... 191
Undo Zoom ....................................... 724
Union .................................................. 146

Unit Conversion Preferences .......... 195
1094
Unit Conversions Panel ................... 195

Units
Changing .......................................... 811
Dimensions, show imperial ................. 810
Dimensions, show metric ................... 810
Imperial ............................................. 811
Imperial dimensions ........................... 810
Metric ............................................... 811
Unrestricted Movement .................... 124
Untitled Plan
see New Plan
Update Templates ............................. 168

Use
Framing Reference .................... 476 , 484
Mesh ................................................. 376
Transparency .................................. 1032
Use Layout Line Scaling .................. 976
User Specified Walls ........................ 251
V
Valley .................................................. 589
Vector View Tools ............................. 734
Vertical Rafter Depth ........................ 518
View
Angle Dialog ...................................... 744
to CAD .............................................. 875
Views
Cascade ........................................... 726
Dynamic ............................................ 977
Static ................................................ 977
Virtual Graph Paper .......................... 180
Virtual Reality Modeling Language
see VRML
Visual CAD Snaps ............................. 180
Volume, Materials ............................. 715
VRML .................................................. 905
Export ............................................... 905
Images .............................................. 906
Textures ............................................ 906
Use of Texture and Image Files .......... 906
Walk Line .................................... 447 , 462

Walkthrough Options Dialog ........... 904
Walkthroughs............................. 748 , 904
Playing .............................................. 905
Recording .......................................... 904
VRML ................................................ 905
Wall ............................................. 179 , 274
Assemblies ........................................ 251
Bridging ............................................. 866
Cabinets ............................................ 552
Corner Specification Dialog ................ 536
Defaults ............................................. 228
Details ............................................... 875
Elevation ........................................... 735
Framing ............................................. 470
Framing Details .................................. 478
Framing Members, Drawing ................ 493
Hatch Specification Dialog .................. 273
Layer ................................................. 274
Layer Fill Style ................................... 253
Railing/Fencing Defaults ..................... 274
Tools ................................................. 229
Type Definitions Dialog ...................... 251
Types Tab ......................................... 265
Wall Corner Specification Dialog .... 536
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog ...... 273
Wall Specification Dialog ......... 259 , 387
for Pony Walls ................................... 266
Wall Type Definitions Dialog ........... 251
Walls ...................................... 3 , 227 , 275
Align pony walls ................................. 277
Aligning ............................................. 246
Aligning between floors .............. 247 , 261
Aligning colinear ................................ 246
Allowed Angles .................................. 240
Attic Walls ................................. 248 , 261
Centering footings (2 methods) ........... 265
Changing into railings ......................... 260
Compound Raked .............................. 259
Connecting ........................................ 240
Curved .............................................. 238
Curved, align between floors .............. 247
Curved, center point ..........................

Curved, drawing ................................
Delete hatching .................................
Dimensioning ....................................
Display surfaces only .........................
Double walls .....................................
Drawing ............................................
Edit Handles .....................................
Edit in 3D ..........................................
Editing ..............................................
Exporting Definitions .........................
Exterior and Interior ...........................
Fill style line weight ...........................
Fix Connections ................................
Flip layers .........................................
Footing width and height ....................
Foundation ................................ 232 ,
Foundation thickness .........................
Foundation wall .................................
Framing ............................................
Framing Detail ...................................
Framing Layer ...................................
Furred Walls .....................................
Grid snapping ...................................
Hatching ...........................................
Hatching line weight ..........................
Heights .............................................
High Shed/Gable ...............................
Importing Definitions ..........................
Interior, fireplace in ...........................
Invisible .................................... 234 ,
Knee Wall .........................................
Layer fill style ....................................
Layers ..............................................
Main Layer ........................................
Marriage walls ...................................
Materials ...........................................
Merging ............................................
Moving ..............................................
Multiple Select ..................................
No Locate .........................................
No Room Def ....................................
Pony Wall .........................................
Pony wall height ................................
Raked ....................................... 242 ,
Removing Breaks ..............................
Resizing ...........................................
Resizing Using Dimensions ................
240
238
236
254
241
248
238
242
242
242
255
232
253
240
275
265
265
265
260
478
492
254
249
240
236
273
244
263
256
656
261
263
253
254
254
248
281
242
242
242
261
261
233
277
258
241
242
805
1095
Index
Retain attic wall .................................

Retain wall framing .................... 261 ,
Retaining Wall ........................... 589 ,
Roofs over curved .............................
Room Def (invisible) ..........................
Same Wall Type button ......................
Same Wall Type handles ...................
Selecting ..........................................
Show length when editing ..................
Show lower pony wall ........................
Solid Railings ....................................
Splitting ............................................
Stepped .................................... 242 ,
System Default ..................................
User Specified ..................................
Wall Coverings ..................................
261
496
593
256
261
245
243
242
275
277
268
236
258
251
251
271
Water Feature Tools ......................... 592
Web Support ................................... 1021
Webbing ............................................. 522
Wedge ................................................ 686
Winders ...................................... 442 , 460
Definition .......................................... 436
Max Tread Contraction ...................... 463
Window
Defaults ............................................ 328
Menu .................................................. 66
Types ............................................... 328
Types, CAD Detail ............................. 874
Window Defaults ............................... 179
Window Specification Dialog .......... 343
Windows
Arch top (ISD) ................................... 943
Bay & bow dimensions ....................... 339
Bay windows ..................................... 328
Bay, roof over ................................... 341
Bench Seat ....................................... 340
Blocked ............................................ 315
Blocked units .................................... 332
Bow .................................................. 329
Bow, roof over ................................... 341
Box ................................................... 329
Box, roof over ................................... 341
Cascade ........................................... 726
Component ....................................... 328
Components ...................................... 339
1096
Corner .............................................. 330

Creating custom windows ................... 331
Custom Muntins ................................. 338
Defining Openings (ISD) ............ 943 944
Displaying ......................................... 335
Edit buttons ....................................... 337
Framing ............................................ 479
Gables Over ...................................... 415
in Curved Walls ................................. 346
Labels ............................................... 335
Layers see Windows, Levels
Levels ............................................... 334
Library ...................................... 329 , 691
Lites see Lites
Match roof ......................................... 356
Moving .............................................. 336
Mulled Units ...................................... 332
Muntins ............................................. 353
Recessed .......................................... 346
Resizing ............................................ 336
Schedules ......................................... 992
Selecting ........................................... 332
Shutters ............................................ 353
Stacked ............................................. 331
Stained glass material ........................ 331
Standard ........................................... 328
Window Levels .................................. 331
Windows Metafiles ............................ 901

Wiring Schematics, Creating........... 525
WP Outlet ........................................... 524
Wrapped
Openings .......................................... 314
Stairs ................................................ 452
Z
Zoom
Fill Window ....................................... 724
in Vector Views ................................. 745
Mouse wheel ..................................... 724
Tools ................................................ 723
Undo ................................................. 724
Wheel Mouse ........................................ 5

Refer

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Refer

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Chief Architect X1

Professional Design & Drafting Software

Chief Architect, Inc.

Copyright 2007 by Chief Architect, Inc. All rights reserved.

Printed in the United States of America.

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 2: Menus and Toolbar Buttons

Chapter 3: Editing Objects

Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses ................................................118

Chapter 4: File Management

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Project Browser ............................................................................... 165

Chapter 5: Defaults & Preferences

Sun Angle Panel...............................................................................201

Chapter 7: Walls, Railings, & Fencing

Chief Architect Reference Manual

The Fencing Tools ........................................................................... 231

Chapter 10: Windows

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Window Defaults ............................................................................. 328

Chapter 11: Multiple Floors

Chapter 12: Foundations

Chapter 13: Roofs

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Locating Roof Plane Intersections ................................................. 408

Chapter 14: Stairs

Chapter 15: Framing

Chapter 16: Trusses

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Floor and Ceiling Trusses ............................................................... 502

Chapter 17: Electrical

Chapter 18: Trim & Molding

Chapter 19: Cabinets

Chapter 20: Terrain

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Terrain Configuration Button........................................................ 584

Importing Terrain Data ..................................................................623

Chapter 21: Roads & Sidewalks

Chapter 22: Other Objects

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Soffits ................................................................................................ 650

Chapter 23: Architectural Blocks

Chapter 24: Libraries

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Library Object Specification Dialog.............................................. 699

Chapter 25: Materials

Chapter 26: Zoom & View Tools

Chapter 27: Vector Views

Chapter 28: Render Views

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Render View Tools .......................................................................... 764

Chapter 29: Raytracing

Chapter 30: Dimensions

Chapter 31: Text, Callouts and Markers

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Marker Specification Dialog........................................................... 837

Chapter 32: CAD Objects

Chapter 33: Advanced Design & Editing

Chapter 34: Pictures, Images, & Movies

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Copy Region as Picture ................................................................... 904

Chapter 35: Importing and Exporting

Chapter 36: Create Symbol Wizard